-
Part II: Marine and Freshwater Zoology
Encyclopedia Arctica 3: Zoology (Excluding Birds)
Part II: Marine and Freshwater Zoology
Marine
Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change in the North
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0468
EA-Zoology
( Max M. J. Dunbar)
FAUNISTIC EFFECTS OF CLIMATIC CHANGE IN THE NORTH
CONTENTS
Page Introduction 1 Fauna of the Land 6 Marine Fauna 10 Bibliography 17
001 | Vol_III-0469
EA-Zoology
(Max J. Dunbar)
FAUNISTIC EFFECTS OF CLIMATIC CHANGE IN THE NORTH
Introduction
During the past thirty or more years there have been changes in the
climate of the arctic and subarctic regions, manifested in a progressive
warming in both the atmosphere and the hydrosphere. Clearly the atmos–
pheric and marine climates are interrelated, but the mechanism of the
relation, and the causal paths involved, are at present uncertain. These
effects have altered the distribution of plants and animals, resulting in
a general northward extension of distribution, which is much more immediately
apparent in the sea than in terrestrial environments.The whole matter of recent climatic change has been reviewed by
Ahlmann (2) in a paper in which the climatological, glaciological, oceano–
graphic, and biological evidence for the recent warming is brought together,
and some years previous to Ahlmann’s paper, Jensen (15) made an extensive
review of the pattern of change, particularly as it affected West Greenland.
Both papers contain extensive bibliographic lists to which the reader is
referred. The increase in atmospheric temperatures has affected the whole
of the Northern Hemisphere, in all probability, but information from certain
parts of the North is lacking. Ahlmann has emphasized the urgency of the need
for the study of this change in greater detail, and has brought home the fact
002 | Vol_III-0470
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
that “here is something happening” which affects all of us, both at present
and in the immediate future.The underlying cause of the present warming effect, and indeed of longer–
term variations and fluctuations in climate, is not certain, but as early as
1916, Helland-Hansen and Nansen suggested that the terrestrial climatic
variations must ultimately becaused by variations in solar radiation; that
increased solar radiation set up increased atmospheric movement, and thus the
faster transmission of energy from the tropics to the poles. That climatic
variation is normal is obvious from a consideration of the geologic past of
the earth, and Ahlmann (2) has summarized the effects of recent (post glacial)
variations in northwest Europe, Iceland, and Greenland, areas in which it is
clear that the human economy within historic times has been greatly dependent
upon climatic conditions.In the atmospheric climate, the most spectacular changes in recent
decades have perhaps taken place in Spitsbergen, where there has been an
increase of no less than 9°C. in the mean winter temperature between the
period 1911-15 and 1931-35, the actual figures being −17.6°C. for the earlier
period and −8.6°C. for the later. In Greenland, the winter temperatures at
Jakobshavn during the period 1923-32 were more than 5°C. warmer than those
registered fifty years before, and there has been a steady rise since 1932.
Positive deviations from the former mean temperature, of from 2 to 4 degrees,
are the rule at all Greenland stations. In Canada, information on atmospheric
temperatures has recently been brought together by Hare (1950) in an exhaustive
study of the climate of the Canadian eastern Arctic and Subarctic. At Moose
Factory, Southwest Point (Anticosti Island), and St. John’s, Newfoundland,
the coldest period is shown to have been about the year 1915, since which
003 | Vol_III-0471
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
time there has been a slight rise of one or two degrees Fahrenheit in both
winters and summers. It was warmer in 1870-1910 than between 1915-20.
Such information as is available from northern stations in the eastern
arctic of Canada (Craig Harbour, Pond Inlet) also shown an increasing
temperature. The warming effect is, however, not so marked in Canada as in
Greenland and (especially) Spitsbergen; in fact, the effect is to some extent
related to the maritime nature of the climate. In the U.S.S.R., (Rubenstein,
quoted from Ahlmann 1949) (2), “it appears that an increase in winter tempera–
tures began about the latter part of the nineteenth century, and that it was
especially marked at such northern stations as Kola, Archangel and Leningrad,
while no increase was noticeable, for example, at Kiev.”Glaciers all over the world are now receding, for example, a with
perhaps a few exceptions, and at varying rates. Recession appears to be
slow in Greenland, but in southern Alaska, Iceland, and Norway the decrease
in glacier size is impressive.The pattern is similar in the marine climate, that is to say in the
temperature of sea water, at least in the North Atlantic and associated seas.
In the North Pacific arctic and subarctic area, the picture is uncertain due
to the lack of extended records with which to compare present observations,
but there is evidence of an increase in temperatures off the southern
California coast in recent decades (14), and in the coastal waters of British
Columbia (26). The marine change is perhaps most marked in West Greenland,
where the water has been growing warmer since about 1917, apparently owing to
a strengthening of the Irminger Current component in the West Greenland
Current (Jensen 1939, Kiilerich 1943, Dunbar 1946 and 1951). The Gulf
Stream itself has increased in temperature about half a degree centigrade,
004 | Vol_III-0472
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
at its origin in the Straits of Florida. The southern limit of ice in
the Greenland Sea (east of Greenland) retreated some 200 to 300 kilometers
between the years 1928 and 1936, and the thickness of the ice in the Polar
Sea decreased “from an average of 365 cm. during the Hansen Fram expedition
of 1893-96 to 218 cm. during the drift of the Russian ice-breaker Sedov in
1937-40” (2). In the Norwegian Sea, there appears to have been an increase
in both the volume and the temperature of the Atlantic water flowing northward,
of 2°C., compared with conditions at the beginning of the present century, and
Ahlmann (2) quotes Russian work on routine hydrographic sections along the
Kola meridian (33 1/2°E.), which showed an increase of the order of 2°C. in
the temperature at 200 meters between 1900 and 1921; the earming has been
continuing since 1921. A rise in temperature of the same extent has been
demonstrated in Spitsbergen waters, and the shipping season in West Spitsbergen
has been more than doubled since 1900. It appears, also, that the ice condition [ ?]
along the Siberian shelf have been easing during the past decades.In the Canadian eastern arctic, there is a lack of past records. It is
reasonable to suppose that the waters off southeast Baffin Island, in Hudson
Strait, and along the Labrador, have been influenced by the warming of the
West Greenland Current, most of which turns westward, south of the submarine
ridge between Greenland and Baffin Island, and takes part in the formation
of the Labrador Current. There is evidence of a biological nature (see below)
for the invasion of Atlantic water into Hudson Strait. The only physical
evidence is in the comparison between temperature and salinity measurements
made in Hudson Bay and Strait in 1930, by the Fisheries Expedition, and those
made in 1948 by the H.M.C.S. Haida. Working on these data, Bailey and Hachey
(5), and Dunbar (6) have shown that there must have been a significant increase
in both parameters between the years mentioned, which may perhaps be put down
005 | Vol_III-0473
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
to an increased influence of Atlantic water, as in West Greenland.There is some evidence also to be gained from comparisons of the
open-water seasons for shipping in Hudson Strait and Ungava Bay in past
years and at present. According to all reports and the memory of Older
residents in the eastern arctic, the possible season for navigation into
and and out of Ungava Bay, some 20 to 30 years ago, was little more than
two to two-and-one-half months, or between the beginning of August and some
time in October. Today the open water season is much longer, extending from
the middle of July (earlier inside the bay itself) to late November at least,
probably well into December. Lucien Turner, who visited Fort Chimo in 1882-
84, records in his 1885 manuscript (27) that his ship was caught in the ice
at the beginning of August 1882, off the mouth of the George River; this
could hardly happen during the present years, when all the ice is out of
Ungava Bay by the middle of July.Farther south in Canada, exceptionally high surface temperatures have
been recorded along the Atlantic coast in 1947 and 1949 (19), phenomena
which appear to be part of a general pattern of warming.In this general process there have of course been relapses. In 1938
there was a very cold season in West Greenland, and the winter of 1948-49
was one of the coldest on record. In the Siberian waters, ice conditions
were bad in 1933, 1934, and 1936 (2), in the Kara Sea, and in 1942 they were
again bad, worse along the whole northern route than at any time in recent
years. There are similar variations in the ice conditions in the Canadian
eastern arctic. It has been suggested by the present writer (8) that there
has not been any significant increase in water temperatures in West Greenland
since about 1936, and that it is possible that the present warm period is
006 | Vol_III-0474
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
leveling off. It is much too early yet to form any firm opinion, or to
attain any sort of certainty on this point. Surface temperatures in Georgia
Strait, British Columbia, have been falling somewhat since 1940 (26).Fauna of the Land
A warning should be sounded at the beginning of this section to the
effect that ( 1 ) recent northward extensions of distribution in terrestrial
fauna may not be caused by climatic change at all, at least in the obvious
and direct sense, and ( 2 ) if there is an important element of climatic
control, climatic change in the atmosphere may be long in inducing change
in distribution of animals; there may be a considerable time lag. Terrestrial
animals are not, for the most part, so delicately adjusted to environmental
temperature conditions as are aquatic animals.The first possibility, that direct climatic control may not be involved,
follows from the fact that the areas that fall within the terms of reference
of this encyclopedia have generally been recently freed from a covering of
ice. Once the ice has retreated, the processes of soil formation will continue,
albeit at rates controlled by the climate, no matter whether the climate is
cooler or warmer. As soil formation proceeds, so will colonization by plants
and by animals. The rate of colonization (which is manifested by northward
extensions of distribution) will depend on climatic variation, but the mere
fact of northward extension does not necessarily imply a causal connection
with present climatic warming.The fact that terrestrial animals, and especially the homotherms (birds
and mammals), are less delicately adjusted to temperature differences than
are aquatic animals, is demonstrated in an a priori manner by the failure
of the “life-zone” concept in classifying or formalizing the distribution
007 | Vol_III-0475
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
of life in North America. Founded upon temperature conditions alone,
Merriam’s original life zones are of only very general value, little more
than a useful descriptive convention. Nevertheless, it is clear that the
complex of factors which does control the distribution of animals is at some
point concerned with the atmospheric temperature aved average. Griscom (11),
in criticizing the life-zone system as applied to the distribution of birds,
seems to swing too far in the other direction, and to place too little impor–
tance upon temperature. He says, for instance: “In my lifetime various birds
have been steadily pushing northward and northeastward, and it follows, con–
sequently, that the present isothermal lines of their northernmost limits
are very much cooler than the isothermal lines that constituted limits
twenty-five years ago. In other words, it is obvious that temperature has
not limited the northward distribution of these birds in any way whatsoever.”
(11) p.160). The reclamation by birds of previously glaciated territory is
no doubt keeping pace with the reclamation by plants and other organisms,
but the influence of temperature upon the rate of that reclamation cannot
be ignored. With this preliminary warning of the limits of our present
knowledge, examples of recent northward extensions in the distributions of
organisms can be discussed.The effect is of course not restricted to the arctic and subarctic
regions, but it is with these regions only that we are concerned here.
Griscom (10; 11) has mentioned several birds which have spread northward
in the United States recently, and Hubbs (14) has studied the question of
recent changes in the distribution of marine fish in the pacific coastal
waters, also of the United States.Northward creep of vegetation has been observed in Iceland and in
008 | Vol_III-0476
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
Norway, Sweden, and Finland. “In the forests of northern Scandinavia the
economic benefits are of special importance. The trees are spreading
rapidly above their former limits, and the annual rings of both pine and
spruce show a quicker growth than they have for about two decades… Large,
formerly bare areas are now being [ ?] invaded principally by birch and
willow; the timberline of the mountain birch is rising higher and higher.
Vegetation in general is becoming more luxuriant” (2). A similar creep
northward of the tree line has been observed in Alaska. A similar studies
of the tree line in northern Canada do not appear to have been published,
but the northward movement of certain mammals has been observed.Rand (21) describes the coyote ( Canis latrans ) as the best example of
recent change in status and distribution. The coyote has “within the present
century…greatly extended its range northward and eastward and now occurs
as far north as the arctic ocean.” It is now known at Point Barrow, Alaska,
and in the Mackenzie Delta area. The red fox ( Vulpes fulva ) has been
gradually extending its range beyond the tree line and well into the edge
of the barren grounds. It is now recorded from southern Baffin Island (23)
and from Southampton Island (24). Whether this extension of range is
strictly referable to the climatic “amelioration” is uncertain; it might
conceivably be due to increased pressure from human populations farther
south.The moose ( Alces americana ) was described by Anderson (4) as increasing
rapidly in numbers at that date, and also as extending its range northward,
in the Mackenzie district. Again in 1924, Anderson recorded similar events
in the moose population. The moose had formerly, according to Macfarland (20),
been scarce in this region. Rand (21) doubts whether this increase in numbers
009 | Vol_III-0477
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
and in range of the moose can be ascribed to climatic factors, and is
inclined instead to suppose that such fluctuations in the moose population
are due to a combination of other factors, such as parasites, disease, and
activities of man.The activities of man in the cultivation of the land, farther south
than our present area, have long been known to affect the range of birds
and mammals. The movement northward of the white-tailed deer ( Odocoileus
virginianus borealis ) following the cutting of its native coniferous forests,
is such an example which should be mentioned here (3, p.7). Reduction in the
northern forests may also be related to the extensions of range in the coyote
and red fox, already mentioned, and in the apparent gradual colonization of
the barren lands by the wolverine (Gulo luscus).Among birds, there are many examples of northward extension of breeding
ranges in the temperate parts of the Northern Hemisphere, including Iceland,
but evidence of such extension in the Arctic seems to be scarce. Indeed, it
appears as though the crossing of the tree line is a step which requires
greater stimulation than a mere rise in temperature of one or two degrees.
It is in fact probable that birds which habitually breed up to the limit of
trees will not move farther north except as the tree limit does, and the
latter movement is of course slow. There are occasional records of conifer–
forest birds from well north of the tree line, such as that of a magpie ( Pica
pica hudsonia ) (22) from the Dubawnt River area, Northwest Territories, but
it is very doubtful whether such strays can be accepted as evidence of a true
extension of normal range.Before leaving the subject of the possible effects of recent climatic
change upon the terrestrial fauna, which effects, as w e i ll be apparent from
010 | Vol_III-0478
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
the somewhat scant evidence available, are not well marked nor with any
certainty related to the climate, mention should be made of an interesting
development in Greenland which seems to demonstrate a physiological effect
of increasing temperatures and general amelioration of climate. Faester (9)
has shown that the percentage of “summer skins,” or skins with thin fur
more or less dominated by brownish color, in the commercial take from South
Greenland has increased since 1929 from between 1.5 and 5% to 21% in 1938.
This increase is not due to any alternation in the trapping season, nor to
any change in handling of the skins for the Danish market. It represents
an actual difference in the state of color change of the white and blue
fox population during the trapping season, and Faester has related it to
the milder climate. It is interesting to note that the increase in the
pop proportion of “summer skins” in the catch occurred not during the
period following the greatest rise, in the decade of the 1930’s, when the
mean temperatures began to level off. This suggests that it is not the
direct effect of temperature that is concerned, but an indirect effect,
perhaps working through general conditions of nutrition.Marine Fauna
The effects of change in the marine climate are clearly more immediate
than those on land. The whole environment is affected simultaneously, over
large areas, and there are few microclimates to build up special local
conditions which obscure the picture as a whole. Marine organisms, as has
already been pointed out, are for the most part very sensitive to small
changes in temperature, much more so than terrestrial animals.Following immediately upon the hydrographic changes described above,
brought about mainly by an increase in the heat and transport of the Gulf
011 | Vol_III-0479
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
Stream and North Atlantic Drift, there occurred sweeping changes in the
fauna of the waters from Siberia westward to Baffin Bay. In the Barents
Sea, the Atlantic cod ( Gadus callarias ) appeared much farther east in 1921
than formerly, and continued to spread eastward. Along the Murman Coast,
this eastward spread was observed in a great variety of animals, including
the mollusk Cardium edule , and the echinoderm Echinus esculentus . Arctic
species of fishes, such as Leptagonus decagonus and Gymnacanthus tricuspis ,
have become scarce in this Murman area, and have been replaced by Atlantic
species, such as Zeugopterus norvegicus and Chirolophus galerita , and even
the mackerel ( Scomber scombrus ) and the herring ( Clupea harengus ) have
become abundant. The herring, mackerel, and coalfish ( Gadus virens ) were
reported for the first time from the west coast of Novaya Zemlya in 1936,
by Agapov and Toporkov (1), who write: “The appearance of these fishes,
aliens to the Arctic, is caused by the same factors as the appearance of
the cod and some other fishes in the Kara Sea, namely the general warm spell
of the past few years” (Agapov and Toporkov, quoted from Jensen) (15). The
Atlantic salmon ( Salmo salar ) was found to have invaded the Kara River in 1932.The fisheries of northern Norway have been greatly increased during the
present warm period, and the important cod fisheries around Bear Island and
in the waters west and south of Spitsbergen are entirely a product of this
warming effect. The contrast in the Norwegian fisheries today and those of
the preceding colder period are well expressed in the following quotation
from Jensen (15):“During the cold period something happened, which was diametrically
opposite to what occurred in the following warm period. In the years 1902
and 1903 arctic animals, such as the Greenland Seal ( Phoca groenlandica ),
012 | Vol_III-0480
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
the Ringed Seal ( Phoca foetida ) and the White Whale ( Delphinapterus leucas ),
whose mass-wanderings are otherwise restricted to purely arctic regions,
came down in enormous schools to the northern coasts of Norway and farther
also along the west coast. Previously the fixed ice-boundary had advanced
farther west and south than any one could remember; even in May 1902 it
extended as a continuous wall from Spitsbergen and Bear Island down towards
the Murman coast, not far from Varanger Fjord, presumably owing to the
prevailing northerly and easterly winds over Spitsbergen and the Barents Sea.
The temperature of the sea and air was noted as low. The special meteorological
and hydrographical conditions in conjunction with the advance of the ice were
taken to be the cause of the mass-incursion of arctic animals to Norway.
At the same time the great cod fisheries in the northern district of Norway
were a failure and the fishermen believed that the arrival of the seals had
driven the cod from the coast. It might be questioned, however, whether it
was not the changed natural conditions, which enabled the arctic seals and
whales to thrive on the northern coasts of Norway, which had the opposite
influence on the boreal cod and forced them to go elsewhere.”The history of the Spitsbergen fishery is recorded elsewhere in this
Encyclopedia . It will be enough here to mention that between its beginning
in 1874 and the present day, there was a period, from 1883 to 1926, when
colder conditions returned and the fishery disappeared.In the waters around Jan Mayen, Atlantic cod and herring were taken in
1930 and 1931, but not in commercial quantities. The Michael Sars expedition
of 1900, under the direction of Johan Hjort, had found no food fishes at
Jan Mayen.Perhaps the most spectacular of all these faunal changes has taken place
013 | Vol_III-0481
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
in the waters of Greenland, especially West Greenland, owing to the increased
activity and heat content of the Irminger Current, a branch of the North
Atlantic Drift, which turns north and then west, in the region southwest
of Iceland, to meet the cold East Greenland Current and, together with the
latter, taking part in the formation of the West Greenland Current. The
list of Atlantic animals that have appeared or increased in range in West
Greenland waters since the beginning of the warm period (about 1917) is
large, and includes the following:Atlantic cod appeared in increasing quantities and farther north each
year. This process, with the associated development of fisheries in Greenland,
is described in detail elsewhere (see “Greenland Fisheries”). The cod
came originally from Iceland, and gradually became established as a breeding
stock in the fjords and on the banks of West Greenland. In 1929, a haddock
( Gadus aeglefinus ) was caught in the Julianehaab district, a species which
had never before been recorded from Greenland waters. The haddock has not
become abundant, but other specimens have occasionally been caught since
1929. In 1936, another first record was made, when the brosme ( Brosmius
brosme ) was [ ?] taken in the Holsteinsborg district. The ling ( Molva
vulgaris ) was first caught in 1928, in the Frederikshaab district, and
the Atlantic halibut ( Hippoglossus vulgaris ), known previously only from
the banks south of Davis Strait, has invaded the Baffin Bay coast of West
Greenland, at least as far as the Upernivik district. The herring, pre–
viously known in small numbers in the extreme southwest of Greenland, has
increased its range northward at least as far as the Umanak district on
the west coast, and was first recorded on the east coast in 1932, from the
Angmagssalik area. It has since been seen in Scoresby Sound. The spiny
014 | Vol_III-0482
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
dogfish ( Squalus acanthias ), formerly rare in Greenland waters, has appeared
in greater numbers from the south. The rosefish, or Norway haddock ( Sebastes
marinus ), has become plentiful, and has now been shown to breed in West
Greenland waters (15).Certain fishes, previously common in the waters of the southern part
of Greenland, have moved northward during the present period of warmer condi–
tions. This class includes the Greenland or fjord cod ( Cadus ogac ), which
has become increasingly scarce in South Greenland and more abundant in the
north; and the capelin ( Mallotus villosus ), which was formerly most abundant
in the area south of Disko Bay on the west coast and of Angmagssalik on the
east coast, and has now moved the gravity point of its distribution farther
north. The capelin is now known from Thule and from Scoresby Sound. Probably
as a result of this movement in the capelin population population, the harp seal ( Phoca
groenlandica ) is now common in the northern part of West Greenland than
in the south.One whale, the pilot whale, blackfish, or ca’ing whale ( Globicephala
ventricosa ), formerly Globiceps melas ), has appeared in West Greenland waters
in recent years, as far north as Disko Bay.These are the most obvious increases in fauna, or in faunal range, in
Wet Greenland waters. There are also many planktonic animals and plants
which have invaded the West Greenland Current under the greater Irminger
Current influence. Jensen (15) mentions the medusa Halopsis ocellata as
an example, first recorded by Kramp (18) from collections made in 1928.
Another good example, also a coelenterate, recorded by Kramp is Hybocodon
prolifer , another Atlantic form first taken in West Greenland by the Godthaab
expedition in 1928 (17).
015 | Vol_III-0483
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
As would be expected, the invasion of Atlantic forms has been accompanied
by a retreat of the strictly arctic animals. This is best exemplified by the
northward retreat, in West Greenland, of the beluga or white whale, and the
narwhal ( Monodon monoceros ), both of which are now rare south of Disko Bay.
The Greenland or arctic halibut ( Reinhardtius hippoglossoides ) is another
arctic-water species that has become much more scarce in southwest Greenland
since the 1920’s.In the Canadian waters of the eastern arctic, faunistic changes are
much less marked than in West Greenland, in accordance with the lesser degree
of hydrographic change. Indeed, it is not possible to point to a single in–
stance of northward extension of range, or of retreat northward, with any
degree of certainty, partly because of the absence of good past faunal records.
It is generally reported that the ringed seal ( Phoca hispida = Phoca foetida )
is now less abundant in Ungava Bay and the region south of Hudson Strait
than in former decades, but figures are lacking, and moreover if any decrease
has in fact taken place, it is more than possible that it is due to human
activity. Decreasing numbers of ringed seal have even been reported by
residents in southern Baffin Island, but again, if the decrease is true, it
is not possible to ascribe it to hydrographic change. The same applies to
the drastic reduction in the distribution range of the Atlantic walrus
( Odobenus rosmarus ) in the past hundred years (see “Arctic and Subarctic Seals”).The coelenterate Hybododon prolifer , mentioned above as being first
found in West Greenland in 1928, was taken in large numbers in Lake Harbour
Inlet, southern Baffin Island, in 1939 and 1940 (7) (see “Marine Plankton”).
It is impossible to know how long it has been there, but since it was not
found in the well-worked Greenland waters until 1928, it is very probable
016 | Vol_III-0484
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
that it is a fairly recent arrival in Hudson Strait. It has since been taken
in numbers in Ungava Bay (unpublished date).The capelin, whose distribution has been altered in West Greenland, is
also of interest in this respect in the Canadian waters. It is most abund–
dant in the northern waters of Newfoundland, and along the Labrador, particu–
larly in the southern part. In four seasons of collecting in Ungava Bay, the
present writer obtained only two specimens of Mallotus , and it is not known
to the present-day Eskimos of that region. Lucien Turner, however, visiting
Ungava Bay in the years 1882-84, records in his manuscript report (27) on the
fishes (never yet published; the auther is here indebted to the Smithsonian
Institution for the loan of the manuscript) that capelin had not been recorded
within Hudson Strait until several years previous to 1884 “when a few were
seen in the neighboring waters of George’s River.” Continuing the quotation
from the Turner manuscript: “In the spring of 1884 they were observed in
great numbers in that vicinity [George’s River, or, more properly, George
River]. On the 8th of August 1884 a school of several thousand individuals
appeared four miles within the mouth of the Koksoak River. As many as were
desired for specimens were secured by the hand as they swam near the shore….
This is the first instance known either to whites or natives of the appearance
of capelin in the southern portion of Ungava Bay. They are well known to the
Eskimo, who apply the name Kolelekuk to the caplin” (Turner 1885).It is at once clear that faunal conditions in Ungava Bay in 1884 were
different from conditions in 1950. Capelin are now very rare, and they are
not known to the natives. They are North Atlantic fishes, edging into the
Subarctic, and they are seldom seen in swarms in water of temperature below
6°C. (25), although they have recently been observed in very large numbers
016a | Vol_III-0485
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
in 2°C. water in southeastern Newfoundland waters (Templeman, private
communication). At all events, the presence of capelin in large numbers
in Ungava in 1884 is a general indication of warmer conditions in the
water than exist at present. And yet, as has been recorded above, Turner
met with much more severe ice conditions in 1882 than are known today. It
is much to be deplored that routine temperature and salinity observations
were not kept at regular intervals in the eastern arctic of Canada in past
decades, because it is obvious that the history of hydrography and faunal
distribution in those waters has been varied, and the evidence brought
together here shows that the relations between atmospheric and marine
climate, and marine fauna, may not have been simple.
017 | Vol_III-0486
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Agapov, I.D., and Toporkov, G.N. “Some data concerning the fishes
of Novaya Zemlya.” Problems of the Arctic, vol.2, p.108.
Leningrad, 1937. (In Russian)2. Ahlmann, H. “The present climate fluctuation.” Geogr.Jour ., CXII
(4-6), pp.165-193, 1949.3. Anderson, R.M. “Catalogue of Canadian recent mammals.” Nat.Mus .
Canada., Bull . No.102, 1946.4. ----. “Report on the natural history collections of the expedition,”
Stefansson’s My Life with the Eskimo , Macmillan, New York,
1913.5. Bailey, W.B., and Hachey, H.B. “An increasing Atlantic influence in
Hudson Bay.” Joint Committee on Oceanography, St.Lawrence,
N.B. 11 pp. (mimeographed). 1949.6. Dunbar, M.J. “Eastern Arctic Waters.” Fish.Res.Bd. Canada, Bull. No.88,
1951.7. ----. “Marine macroplankton from the Canadian Eastern Arctic. II.
Medusae, et.” Can.J.Research , D, 20, pp.71-77, 1942.8.----. “The state of the West Greenland current up to 1944.” Fish.Res.Bd .,
Canada, Jour . VI (7), pp.460-471, 1946.9. Faester, K. “Effect of the climatic amelioration of the past decade on
the autumn change of coat of the arctic fox in Greenland.”
Medd.Grønl . vol.142 (2), 1945.10. Griscom, L. The Birds of Concord . Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University
Press, 1949.11. ---. Modern Bird Study . Cambridge Mass., Harvard University Press, 1945.
12. Hare, F.K. “The climate of the eastern arctic and subarctic of Canada
and its influence on accessibility.” Report for the Government
of Canada (Manuscript), 1950.13. Helland-Hansen, B., and Nansen, F. “Temperature variations in the North
Atlantic Ocean and in the atmosphere.” Videnskapselskapets
Skrifter, I. , Mat.-Naturv. Klasse, 1916 (9).14. Hubbs, C.L. “Changes in the fish fauna of western North America correlated
with changes in ocean temperature.” J.Mar.Res. , VII (3),
pp.459-480, 1949.
018 | Vol_III-0487
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
Bibliography
15. Jensen, Ad. S. “Concerning a change of climate during recent decades
in the arctic and subarctic…, etc.” Det.Kgl.Danske Vidensk .
Selsk., Biol Medd. , XIV (8), 1939.16. Kiilerich, A.B. “The hydrography of the west Greenland fishing banks.”
Medd. fra Komm.Danm.Fisk. og Havunders. , Ser Hydrografi, 3 (3),
1943.17. Kramp, P.L. “Medusae (Godthaab Expedition 1928).” Medd.Grøn ., vol.81
(1), 1942.18. ----. “A revision of the Medusae belonging to the Family Mitrocomidae”
Vidensk. Medd.Dansk Naturh.Foren ., 92, pp.305-384, 1932.19. Lauzier, L. “Unusually warm surface sea-water in 1949.” Fish.Res.Bd.
Canada, Progress Rep . Atlantic Coast Stations, No.51, p.17,
1950.20. MacFarlane, R. “Notes on the mammals collected and observed in the
northern Mackenzie district, Northwest Territories.” Proc .
U.S. Nat.Mus., 28, pp.673-764, 1905.21. Rand, A.L. “The mammals of northern Canada from a utilization viewpoint.”
Report for the Government of Canada. (Manuscript). I-XIV,
pp.1-809, 1949.22. ----. “Northern records of the magpie, Pica pica hudsonia (Sabine).”
Can.Field-Nat ., 59 (1), p.45, 1945.23. Soper, J.D. “The mammals of southern Baffin Island, Northwest Territories,
Canada.” J.Mamm. , 25 (3), pp.221-254, 1944.24. Sutton, G.M., and Hamilton, W.J. “The mammals of Southampton Island.”
Mem. Carn.Mus., 12 (2), 1932.25. Templeton, W. “The life history of the Chaplin ( Mallotus villosus O.F.
Müller) in Newfoundland waters.” Bull . Nfld.Govt.Lab.,
No.17 (Research), 1948.26. Tully, J.P. “Seasonal cycles in the sea.” Fisheries Res.Bd. Canada,
Progress Rep . Pacific Coast Stations, No.85, pp.88-90, 1950.27. Turner, L.M. “Fishes.” (Manuscript report deposited in the Smithsonian
Institution, Washington, D.C.), 1885.Max M. J. Dunbar
Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change in the North (repeated)
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0488
EA-Zoology
( Max M. J. Dunbar)
FAUNISTIC EFFECTS OF CLIMATIC CHANGE IN THE NORTH
CONTENTS
Page Introduction 1 Fauna of the Land 6 Marine Fauna 10 Bibliography 17
001 | Vol_III-0489
EA-Zoology
(Max J. Dunbar)
FAUNISTIC EFFECTS OF CLIMATIC CHANGE IN THE NORTH
Introduction
During the past thirty or more years there have been changes in the
climate of the arctic and subarctic regions, manifested in a progressive
warming in both the atmosphere and the hydrosphere. Clearly the atmos–
pheric and marine climates are interrelated, but the mechanism of the
relation, and the causal paths involved, are at present uncertain. These
effects have altered the distribution of plants and animals, resulting in
a general northward extension of distribution, which is much more immediately
apparent in the sea than in terrestrial environments.The whole matter of recent climatic change has been reviewed by
Ahlmann (2) in a paper in which the climatological, glaciological, oceano–
graphic, and biological evidence for the recent warming is brought together,
and some years previous to Ahlmann’s paper, Jensen (15) made an extensive
review of the pattern of change, particularly as it affected West Greenland.
Both papers contain extensive bibliographic lists to which the reader is
referred. The increase in atmospheric temperatures has affected the whole
of the Northern Hemisphere, in all probability, but information from certain
parts of the North is lacking. Ahlmann has emphasized the urgency of the need
for the study of this change in greater detail, and has brought home the fact
002 | Vol_III-0490
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
that “here is something happening” which affects all of us, both at present
and in the immediate future.The underlying cause of the present warming effect, and indeed of longer-
term variations and fluctuations in climate, is not certain, but as early as
1916, Helland-Hansen and Nansen suggested that the terrestrial climatic
variations must ultimately becaused by variations in solar radiation; that
increased solar radiation set up increased atmospheric movement, and thus the
faster transmission of energy from the tropics to the poles. That climatic
variation is normal is obvious from a consideration of the geologic past of
the earth, and Ahlmann (2) has summarized the effects of recent (post glacial)
variations in northwest Europe, Iceland, and Greenland, areas in which it is
clear that the human economy within historic times has been greatly dependent
upon climatic conditions.In the atmospheric climate, the most spectacular changes in recent
decades have perhaps taken place in Spitsbergen, where there has been an
increase of no less than 9°C. in the mean winter temperature between the
period 1911-15 and 1931-35, the actual figures being −17.6°C. for the earlier
period and −8.6°C. for the later. In Greenland, the winter temperatures at
Jakobshavn during the period 1923-32 were more than 5°C. warmer than those
registered fifty years before, and there has been a steady rise since 1932.
Positive deviations from the former mean temperature, of from 2 to 4 degrees,
are the rule at all Greenland stations. In Canada, information on atmospheric
temperatures has recently been brought together by Hare (1950) in an exhaustive
study of the climate of the Canadian eastern Arctic and Subarctic. At Moose
Factory, Southwest Point (Anticosti Island), and St. John’s, Newfoundland,
the coldest period is shown to have been about the year 1915, since which
003 | Vol_III-0491
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
time there has been a slight rise of one or two degrees Fahrenheit in both
winters and summers. It was warmer in 1870-1910 than between 1915-20.
Such information as is available from northern stations in the eastern
arctic of Canada (Craig Harbour, Pond Inlet) also shown an increasing
temperature. The warming effect is, however, not so marked in Canada as in
Greenland and (especially) Spitsbergen; in fact, the effect is to some extent
related to the maritime nature of the climate. In the U.S.S.R., (Rubenstein,
quoted from Ahlmann 1949) (2), “it appears that an increase in winter tempera–
tures began about the latter part of the nineteenth century, and that it was
especially marked at such northern stations as Kola, Archangel and Leningrad,
while no increase was noticeable, for example, at Kiev.”Glaciers all over the world are now receding, for example, a with
perhaps a few exceptions, and at varying rates. Recession appears to be
slow in Greenland, but in southern Alaska, Iceland, and Norway the decrease
in glacier size is impressive.The pattern is similar in the marine climate, that is to say in the
temperature of sea water, at least in the North Atlantic and associated seas.
In the North Pacific arctic and subarctic area, the picture is uncertain due
to the lack of extended records with which to compare present observations,
but there is evidence of an increase in temperatures off the southern
California coast in recent decades (14), and in the coastal waters of British
Columbia (26). The marine change is perhaps most marked in West Greenland,
where the water has been growing warmer since about 1917, apparently owing to
a strengthening of the Irminger Current component in the West Greenland
Current (Jensen 1939, Kiilerich 1943, Dunbar 1946 and 1951). The Gulf
Stream itself has increased in temperature about half a degree centigrade,
004 | Vol_III-0492
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
at its origin in the Straits of Florida. The southern limit of ice in
the Greenland Sea (east of Greenland) retreated some 200 to 300 kilometers
between the years 1928 and 1936, and the thickness of the ice in the Polar
Sea decreased “from an average of 365 cm. during the Hansen Fram expedition
of 1893-96 to 218 cm. during the drift of the Russian ice-breaker Sedov in
1937-40” (2). In the Norwegian Sea, there appears to have been an increase
in both the volume and the temperature of the Atlantic water flowing northward,
of 2°C., compared with conditions at the beginning of the present century, and
Ahlmann (2) quotes Russian work on routine hydrographic sections along the
Kola meridian (33 1/2°E.), which showed an increase of the order of 2°C. in
the temperature at 200 meters between 1900 and 1921; the earming has been
continuing since 1921. A rise in temperature of the same extent has been
demonstrated in Spitsbergen waters, and the shipping season in West Spitsbergen
has been more than doubled since 1900. It appears, also, that the ice condition [ ?]
along the Siberian shelf have been easing during the past decades.In the Canadian eastern arctic, there is a lack of past records. It is
reasonable to suppose that the waters off southeast Baffin Island, in Hudson
Strait, and along the Labrador, have been influenced by the warming of the
West Greenland Current, most of which turns westward, south of the submarine
ridge between Greenland and Baffin Island, and takes part in the formation
of the Labrador Current. There is evidence of a biological nature (see below)
for the invasion of Atlantic water into Hudson Strait. The only physical
evidence is in the comparison between temperature and salinity measurements
made in Hudson Bay and Strait in 1930, by the Fisheries Expedition, and those
made in 1948 by the H.M.C.S. Haida. Working on these data, Bailey and Hachey
(5), and Dunbar (6) have shown that there must have been a significant increase
in both parameters between the years mentioned, which may perhaps be put down
005 | Vol_III-0493
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
to an increased influence of Atlantic water, as in West Greenland.There is some evidence also to be gained from comparisons of the
open-water seasons for shipping in Hudson Strait and Ungava Bay in past
years and at present. According to all reports and the memory of Older
residents in the eastern arctic, the possible season for navigation into
and and out of Ungava Bay, some 20 to 30 years ago, was little more than
two to two-and-one-half months, or between the beginning of August and some
time in October. Today the open water season is much longer, extending from
the middle of July (earlier inside the bay itself) to late November at least,
probably well into December. Lucien Turner, who visited Fort Chimo in 1882-
84, records in his 1885 manuscript (27) that his ship was caught in the ice
at the beginning of August 1882, off the mouth of the George River; this
could hardly happen during the present years, when all the ice is out of
Ungava Bay by the middle of July.Farther south in Canada, exceptionally high surface temperatures have
been recorded along the Atlantic coast in 1947 and 1949 (19), phenomena
which appear to be part of a general pattern of warming.In this general process there have of course been relapses. In 1938
there was a very cold season in West Greenland, and the winter of 1948-49
was one of the coldest on record. In the Siberian waters, ice conditions
were bad in 1933, 1934, and 1936 (2), in the Kara Sea, and in 1942 they were
again bad, worse along the whole northern route than at any time in recent
years. There are similar variations in the ice conditions in the Canadian
eastern arctic. It has been suggested by the present writer (8) that there
has not been any significant increase in water temperatures in West Greenland
since about 1936, and that it is possible that the present warm period is
006 | Vol_III-0494
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
leveling off. It is much too early yet to form any firm opinion, or to
attain any sort of certainty on this point. Surface temperatures in Georgia
Strait, British Columbia, have been falling somewhat since 1940 (26).Fauna of the Land
A warning should be sounded at the beginning of this section to the
effect that ( 1 ) recent northward extensions of distribution in terrestrial
fauna may not be caused by climatic change at all, at least in the obvious
and direct sense, and ( 2 ) if there is an important element of climatic
control, climatic change in the atmosphere may be long in inducing change
in distribution of animals; there may be a considerable time lag. Terrestrial
animals are not, for the most part, so delicately adjusted to environmental
temperature conditions as are aquatic animals.The first possibility, that direct climatic control may not be involved,
follows from the fact that the areas that fall within the terms of reference
of this encyclopedia have generally been recently freed from a covering of
ice. Once the ice has retreated, the processes of soil formation will continue,
albeit at rates controlled by the climate, no matter whether the climate is
cooler or warmer. As soil formation proceeds, so will colonization by plants
and by animals. The rate of colonization (which is manifested by northward
extensions of distribution) will depend on climatic variation, but the mere
fact of northward extension does not necessarily imply a causal connection
with present climatic warming.The fact that terrestrial animals, and especially the homotherms (birds
and mammals), are less delicately adjusted to temperature differences than
are aquatic animals, is demonstrated in an a priori manner by the failure
of the “life-zone” concept in classifying or formalizing the distribution
007 | Vol_III-0495
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
of life in North America. Founded upon temperature conditions alone,
Merriam’s original life zones are of only very general value, little more
than a useful descriptive convention. Nevertheless, it is clear that the
complex of factors which does control the distribution of animals is at some
point concerned with the atmospheric temperature aved average. Griscom (11),
in criticizing the life-zone system as applied to the distribution of birds,
seems to swing too far in the other direction, and to place too little impor–
tance upon temperature. He says, for instance: “In my lifetime various birds
have been steadily pushing northward and northeastward, and it follows, con–
sequently, that the present isothermal lines of their northernmost limits
are very much cooler than the isothermal lines that constituted limits
twenty-five years ago. In other words, it is obvious that temperature has
not limited the northward distribution of these birds in any way whatsoever.”
(11) p.160). The reclamation by birds of previously glaciated territory is
no doubt keeping pace with the reclamation by plants and other organisms,
but the influence of temperature upon the rate of that reclamation cannot
be ignored. With this preliminary warning of the limits of our present
knowledge, examples of recent northward extensions in the distributions of
organisms can be discussed.The effect is of course not restricted to the arctic and subarctic
regions, but it is with these regions only that we are concerned here.
Griscom (10; 11) has mentioned several birds which have spread northward
in the United States recently, and Hubbs (14) has studied the question of
recent changes in the distribution of marine fish in the pacific coastal
waters, also of the United States.Northward creep of vegetation has been observed in Iceland and in
008 | Vol_III-0496
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
Norway, Sweden, and Finland. “In the forests of northern Scandinavia the
economic benefits are of special importance. The trees are spreading
rapidly above their former limits, and the annual rings of both pine and
spruce show a quicker growth than they have for about two decades… Large,
formerly bare areas are now being [ ?] invaded principally by birch and
willow; the timberline of the mountain birch is rising higher and higher.
Vegetation in general is becoming more luxuriant” (2). A similar creep
northward of the tree line has been observed in Alaska. A similar studies
of the tree line in northern Canada do not appear to have been published,
but the northward movement of certain mammals has been observed.Rand (21) describes the coyote ( Canis latrans ) as the best example of
recent change in status and distribution. The coyote has “within the present
century…greatly extended its range northward and eastward and now occurs
as far north as the arctic ocean.” It is now known at Point Barrow, Alaska,
and in the Mackenzie Delta area. The red fox ( Vulpes fulva ) has been
gradually extending its range beyond the tree line and well into the edge
of the barren grounds. It is now recorded from southern Baffin Island (23)
and from Southampton Island (24). Whether this extension of range is
strictly referable to the climatic “amelioration” is uncertain; it might
conceivably be due to increased pressure from human populations farther
south.The moose ( Alces americana ) was described by Anderson (4) as increasing
rapidly in numbers at that date, and also as extending its range northward,
in the Mackenzie district. Again in 1924, Anderson recorded similar events
in the moose population. The moose had formerly, according to Macfarland (20),
been scarce in this region. Rand (21) doubts whether this increase in numbers
009 | Vol_III-0497
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
and in range of the moose can be ascribed to climatic factors, and is
inclined instead to suppose that such fluctuations in the moose population
are due to a combination of other factors, such as parasites, disease, and
activities of man.The activities of man in the cultivation of the land, farther south
than our present area, have long been known to affect the range of birds
and mammals. The movement northward of the white-tailed deer ( Odocoileus
virginianus borealis ) following the cutting of its native coniferous forests,
is such an example which should be mentioned here (3, p.7). Reduction in the
northern forests may also be related to the extensions of range in the coyote
and red fox, already mentioned, and in the apparent gradual colonization of
the barren lands by the wolverine (Gulo luscus).Among birds, there are many examples of northward extension of breeding
ranges in the temperate parts of the Northern Hemisphere, including Iceland,
but evidence of such extension in the Arctic seems to be scarce. Indeed, it
appears as though the crossing of the tree line is a step which requires
greater stimulation than a mere rise in temperature of one or two degrees.
It is in fact probable that birds which habitually breed up to the limit of
trees will not move farther north except as the tree limit does, and the
latter movement is of course slow. There are occasional records of conifer–
forest birds from well north of the tree line, such as that of a magpie ( Pica
pica hudsonia ) (22) from the Dubawnt River area, Northwest Territories, but
it is very doubtful whether such strays can be accepted as evidence of a true
extension of normal range.Before leaving the subject of the possible effects of recent climatic
change upon the terrestrial fauna, which effects, as w e i ll be apparent from
010 | Vol_III-0498
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
the somewhat scant evidence available, are not well marked nor with any
certainty related to the climate, mention should be made of an interesting
development in Greenland which seems to demonstrate a physiological effect
of increasing temperatures and general amelioration of climate. Faester (9)
has shown that the percentage of “summer skins,” or skins with thin fur
more or less dominated by brownish color, in the commercial take from South
Greenland has increased since 1929 from between 1.5 and 5% to 21% in 1938.
This increase is not due to any alternation in the trapping season, nor to
any change in handling of the skins for the Danish market. It represents
an actual difference in the state of color change of the white and blue
fox population during the trapping season, and Faester has related it to
the milder climate. It is interesting to note that the increase in the
pop proportion of “summer skins” in the catch occurred not during the
period following the greatest rise, in the decade of the 1930’s, when the
mean temperatures began to level off. This suggests that it is not the
direct effect of temperature that is concerned, but an indirect effect,
perhaps working through general conditions of nutrition.Marine Fauna
The effects of change in the marine climate are clearly more immediate
than those on land. The whole environment is affected simultaneously, over
large areas, and there are few microclimates to build up special local
conditions which obscure the picture as a whole. Marine organisms, as has
already been pointed out, are for the most part very sensitive to small
changes in temperature, much more so than terrestrial animals.Following immediately upon the hydrographic changes described above,
brought about mainly by an increase in the heat and transport of the Gulf
011 | Vol_III-0499
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
Stream and North Atlantic Drift, there occurred sweeping changes in the
fauna of the waters from Siberia westward to Baffin Bay. In the Barents
Sea, the Atlantic cod ( Gadus callarias ) appeared much farther east in 1921
than formerly, and continued to spread eastward. Along the Murman Coast,
this eastward spread was observed in a great variety of animals, including
the mollusk Cardium edule , and the echinoderm Echinus esculentus . Arctic
species of fishes, such as Leptagonus decagonus and Gymnacanthus tricuspis ,
have become scarce in this Murman area, and have been replaced by Atlantic
species, such as Zeugopterus norvegicus and Chirolophus galerita , and even
the mackerel ( Scomber scombrus ) and the herring ( Clupea harengus ) have
become abundant. The herring, mackerel, and coalfish ( Gadus virens ) were
reported for the first time from the west coast of Novaya Zemlya in 1936,
by Agapov and Toporkov (1), who write: “The appearance of these fishes,
aliens to the Arctic, is caused by the same factors as the appearance of
the cod and some other fishes in the Kara Sea, namely the general warm spell
of the past few years” (Agapov and Toporkov, quoted from Jensen) (15). The
Atlantic salmon ( Salmo salar ) was found to have invaded the Kara River in 1932.The fisheries of northern Norway have been greatly increased during the
present warm period, and the important cod fisheries around Bear Island and
in the waters west and south of Spitsbergen are entirely a product of this
warming effect. The contrast in the Norwegian fisheries today and those of
the preceding colder period are well expressed in the following quotation
from Jensen (15):“During the cold period something happened, which was diametrically
opposite to what occurred in the following warm period. In the years 1902
and 1903 arctic animals, such as the Greenland Seal ( Phoca groenlandica ),
012 | Vol_III-0500
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
the Ringed Seal ( Phoca foetida ) and the White Whale ( Delphinapterus leucas ),
whose mass-wanderings are otherwise restricted to purely arctic regions,
came down in enormous schools to the northern coasts of Norway and farther
also along the west coast. Previously the fixed ice-boundary had advanced
farther west and south than any one could remember; even in May 1902 it
extended as a continuous wall from Spitsbergen and Bear Island down towards
the Murman coast, not far from Varanger Fjord, presumably owing to the
prevailing northerly and easterly winds over Spitsbergen and the Barents Sea.
The temperature of the sea and air was noted as low. The special meteorological
and hydrographical conditions in conjunction with the advance of the ice were
taken to be the cause of the mass-incursion of arctic animals to Norway.
At the same time the great cod fisheries in the northern district of Norway
were a failure and the fishermen believed that the arrival of the seals had
driven the cod from the coast. It might be questioned, however, whether it
was not the changed natural conditions, which enabled the arctic seals and
whales to thrive on the northern coasts of Norway, which had the opposite
influence on the boreal cod and forced them to go elsewhere.”The history of the Spitsbergen fishery is recorded elsewhere in this
Encyclopedia . It will be enough here to mention that between its beginning
in 1874 and the present day, there was a period, from 1883 to 1926, when
colder conditions returned and the fishery disappeared.In the waters around Jan Mayen, Atlantic cod and herring were taken in
1930 and 1931, but not in commercial quantities. The Michael Sars expedition
of 1900, under the direction of Johan Hjort, had found no food fishes at
Jan Mayen.Perhaps the most spectacular of all these faunal changes has taken place
013 | Vol_III-0501
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
in the waters of Greenland, especially West Greenland, owing to the increased
activity and heat content of the Irminger Current, a branch of the North
Atlantic Drift, which turns north and then west, in the region southwest
of Iceland, to meet the cold East Greenland Current and, together with the
latter, taking part in the formation of the West Greenland Current. The
list of Atlantic animals that have appeared or increased in range in West
Greenland waters since the beginning of the warm period (about 1917) is
large, and includes the following:Atlantic cod appeared in increasing quantities and farther north each
year. This process, with the associated development of fisheries in Greenland,
is described in detail elsewhere (see “Greenland Fisheries”). The cod
came originally from Iceland, and gradually became established as a breeding
stock in the fjords and on the banks of West Greenland. In 1929, a haddock
( Gadus aeglefinus ) was caught in the Julianehaab district, a species which
had never before been recorded from Greenland waters. The haddock has not
become abundant, but other specimens have occasionally been caught since
1929. In 1936, another first record was made, when the brosme ( Brosmius
brosme ) was [ ?] taken in the Holsteinsborg district. The ling ( Molva
vulgaris ) was first caught in 1928, in the Frederikshaab district, and
the Atlantic halibut ( Hippoglossus vulgaris ), known previously only from
the banks south of Davis Strait, has invaded the Baffin Bay coast of West
Greenland, at least as far as the Upernivik district. The herring, pre–
viously known in small numbers in the extreme southwest of Greenland, has
increased its range northward at least as far as the Umanak district on
the west coast, and was first recorded on the east coast in 1932, from the
Angmagssalik area. It has since been seen in Scoresby Sound. The spiny
014 | Vol_III-0502
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
dogfish ( Squalus acanthias ), formerly rare in Greenland waters, has appeared
in greater numbers from the south. The rosefish, or Norway haddock ( Sebastes
marinus ), has become plentiful, and has now been shown to breed in West
Greenland waters (15).Certain fishes, previously common in the waters of the southern part
of Greenland, have moved northward during the present period of warmer condi–
tions. This class includes the Greenland or fjord cod ( Cadus ogac ), which
has become increasingly scarce in South Greenland and more abundant in the
north; and the capelin ( Mallotus villosus ), which was formerly most abundant
in the area south of Disko Bay on the west coast and of Angmagssalik on the
east coast, and has now moved the gravity point of its distribution farther
north. The capelin is now known from Thule and from Scoresby Sound. Probably
as a result of this movement in the capelin population population, the harp seal ( Phoca
groenlandica ) is now common in the northern part of West Greenland than
in the south.One whale, the pilot whale, blackfish, or ca’ing whale ( Globicephala
ventricosa ), formerly Globiceps melas ), has appeared in West Greenland waters
in recent years, as far north as Disko Bay.These are the most obvious increases in fauna, or in faunal range, in
Wet Greenland waters. There are also many planktonic animals and plants
which have invaded the West Greenland Current under the greater Irminger
Current influence. Jensen (15) mentions the medusa Halopsis ocellata as
an example, first recorded by Kramp (18) from collections made in 1928.
Another good example, also a coelenterate, recorded by Kramp is Hybocodon
prolifer , another Atlantic form first taken in West Greenland by the Godthaab
expedition in 1928 (17).
015 | Vol_III-0503
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
As would be expected, the invasion of Atlantic forms has been accompanied
by a retreat of the strictly arctic animals. This is best exemplified by the
northward retreat, in West Greenland, of the beluga or white whale, and the
narwhal ( Monodon monoceros ), both of which are now rare south of Disko Bay.
The Greenland or arctic halibut ( Reinhardtius hippoglossoides ) is another
arctic-water species that has become much more scarce in southwest Greenland
since the 1920’s.In the Canadian waters of the eastern arctic, faunistic changes are
much less marked than in West Greenland, in accordance with the lesser degree
of hydrographic change. Indeed, it is not possible to point to a single in–
stance of northward extension of range, or of retreat northward, with any
degree of certainty, partly because of the absence of good past faunal records.
It is generally reported that the ringed seal ( Phoca hispida = Phoca foetida )
is now less abundant in Ungava Bay and the region south of Hudson Strait
than in former decades, but figures are lacking, and moreover if any decrease
has in fact taken place, it is more than possible that it is due to human
activity. Decreasing numbers of ringed seal have even been reported by
residents in southern Baffin Island, but again, if the decrease is true, it
is not possible to ascribe it to hydrographic change. The same applies to
the drastic reduction in the distribution range of the Atlantic walrus
( Odobenus rosmarus ) in the past hundred years (see “Arctic and Subarctic Seals”).The coelenterate Hybododon prolifer , mentioned above as being first
found in West Greenland in 1928, was taken in large numbers in Lake Harbour
Inlet, southern Baffin Island, in 1939 and 1940 (7) (see “Marine Plankton”).
It is impossible to know how long it has been there, but since it was not
found in the well-worked Greenland waters until 1928, it is very probable
016 | Vol_III-0504
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
that it is a fairly recent arrival in Hudson Strait. It has since been taken
in numbers in Ungava Bay (unpublished date).The capelin, whose distribution has been altered in West Greenland, is
also of interest in this respect in the Canadian waters. It is most abund–
dant in the northern waters of Newfoundland, and along the Labrador, particu–
larly in the southern part. In four seasons of collecting in Ungava Bay, the
present writer obtained only two specimens of Mallotus , and it is not known
to the present-day Eskimos of that region. Lucien Turner, however, visiting
Ungava Bay in the years 1882-84, records in his manuscript report (27) on the
fishes (never yet published; the auther is here indebted to the Smithsonian
Institution for the loan of the manuscript) that capelin had not been recorded
within Hudson Strait until several years previous to 1884 “when a few were
seen in the neighboring waters of George’s River.” Continuing the quotation
from the Turner manuscript: “In the spring of 1884 they were observed in
great numbers in that vicinity [George’s River, or, more properly, George
River]. On the 8th of August 1884 a school of several thousand individuals
appeared four miles within the mouth of the Koksoak River. As many as were
desired for specimens were secured by the hand as they swam near the shore….
This is the first instance known either to whites or natives of the appearance
of capelin in the southern portion of Ungava Bay. They are well known to the
Eskimo, who apply the name Kolelekuk to the caplin” (Turner 1885).It is at once clear that faunal conditions in Ungava Bay in 1884 were
different from conditions in 1950. Capelin are now very rare, and they are
not known to the natives. They are North Atlantic fishes, edging into the
Subarctic, and they are seldom seen in swarms in water of temperature below
6°C. (25), although they have recently been observed in very large numbers
016a | Vol_III-0505
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
in 2°C. water in southeastern Newfoundland waters (Templeman, private
communication). At all events, the presence of capelin in large numbers
in Ungava in 1884 is a general indication of warmer conditions in the
water than exist at present. And yet, as has been recorded above, Turner
met with much more severe ice conditions in 1882 than are known today. It
is much to be deplored that routine temperature and salinity observations
were not kept at regular intervals in the eastern arctic of Canada in past
decades, because it is obvious that the history of hydrography and faunal
distribution in those waters has been varied, and the evidence brought
together here shows that the relations between atmospheric and marine
climate, and marine fauna, may not have been simple.
017 | Vol_III-0506
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Agapov, I.D., and Toporkov, G.N. “Some data concerning the fishes
of Novaya Zemlya.” Problems of the Arctic, vol.2, p.108.
Leningrad, 1937. (In Russian)2. Ahlmann, H. “The present climate fluctuation.” Geogr.Jour ., CXII
(4-6), pp.165-193, 1949.3. Anderson, R.M. “Catalogue of Canadian recent mammals.” Nat.Mus .
Canada., Bull . No.102, 1946.4. ----. “Report on the natural history collections of the expedition,”
Stefansson’s My Life with the Eskimo , Macmillan, New York,
1913.5. Bailey, W.B., and Hachey, H.B. “An increasing Atlantic influence in
Hudson Bay.” Joint Committee on Oceanography, St.Lawrence,
N.B. 11 pp. (mimeographed). 1949.6. Dunbar, M.J. “Eastern Arctic Waters.” Fish.Res.Bd. Canada, Bull. No.88,
1951.7. ----. “Marine macroplankton from the Canadian Eastern Arctic. II.
Medusae, et.” Can.J.Research , D, 20, pp.71-77, 1942.8.----. “The state of the West Greenland current up to 1944.” Fish.Res.Bd .,
Canada, Jour . VI (7), pp.460-471, 1946.9. Faester, K. “Effect of the climatic amelioration of the past decade on
the autumn change of coat of the arctic fox in Greenland.”
Medd.Grønl . vol.142 (2), 1945.10. Griscom, L. The Birds of Concord . Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University
Press, 1949.11. ---. Modern Bird Study . Cambridge Mass., Harvard University Press, 1945.
12. Hare, F.K. “The climate of the eastern arctic and subarctic of Canada
and its influence on accessibility.” Report for the Government
of Canada (Manuscript), 1950.13. Helland-Hansen, B., and Nansen, F. “Temperature variations in the North
Atlantic Ocean and in the atmosphere.” Videnskapselskapets
Skrifter, I. , Mat.-Naturv. Klasse, 1916 (9).14. Hubbs, C.L. “Changes in the fish fauna of western North America correlated
with changes in ocean temperature.” J.Mar.Res. , VII (3),
pp.459-480, 1949.
018 | Vol_III-0507
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change
Bibliography
15. Jensen, Ad. S. “Concerning a change of climate during recent decades
in the arctic and subarctic…, etc.” Det.Kgl.Danske Vidensk .
Selsk., Biol Medd. , XIV (8), 1939.16. Kiilerich, A.B. “The hydrography of the west Greenland fishing banks.”
Medd. fra Komm.Danm.Fisk. og Havunders. , Ser Hydrografi, 3 (3),
1943.17. Kramp, P.L. “Medusae (Godthaab Expedition 1928).” Medd.Grøn ., vol.81
(1), 1942.18. ----. “A revision of the Medusae belonging to the Family Mitrocomidae”
Vidensk. Medd.Dansk Naturh.Foren ., 92, pp.305-384, 1932.19. Lauzier, L. “Unusually warm surface sea-water in 1949.” Fish.Res.Bd.
Canada, Progress Rep . Atlantic Coast Stations, No.51, p.17,
1950.20. MacFarlane, R. “Notes on the mammals collected and observed in the
northern Mackenzie district, Northwest Territories.” Proc .
U.S. Nat.Mus., 28, pp.673-764, 1905.21. Rand, A.L. “The mammals of northern Canada from a utilization viewpoint.”
Report for the Government of Canada. (Manuscript). I-XIV,
pp.1-809, 1949.22. ----. “Northern records of the magpie, Pica pica hudsonia (Sabine).”
Can.Field-Nat ., 59 (1), p.45, 1945.23. Soper, J.D. “The mammals of southern Baffin Island, Northwest Territories,
Canada.” J.Mamm. , 25 (3), pp.221-254, 1944.24. Sutton, G.M., and Hamilton, W.J. “The mammals of Southampton Island.”
Mem. Carn.Mus., 12 (2), 1932.25. Templeton, W. “The life history of the Chaplin ( Mallotus villosus O.F.
Müller) in Newfoundland waters.” Bull . Nfld.Govt.Lab.,
No.17 (Research), 1948.26. Tully, J.P. “Seasonal cycles in the sea.” Fisheries Res.Bd. Canada,
Progress Rep . Pacific Coast Stations, No.85, pp.88-90, 1950.27. Turner, L.M. “Fishes.” (Manuscript report deposited in the Smithsonian
Institution, Washington, D.C.), 1885.Max M. J. Dunbar
Littoral Fauna of the Arctic
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0508
(EA-Zoo. Holger Madsen)
LITTORAL FAUNA OF THE ARCTIC
CONTENTS
Page Introduction 1 Geographical Delimitation 3 Distribution of the High-Arctic and Subarctic
Zones in Different Regions4 Shore Fauna of the High-Arctic Zone 9 Shore Fauna of the Subarctic Zone 14 Bibliography 16
001 | Vol_III-0509
EA-Zoology
(Holger Madsen)
LITTORAL FAUNA OF THE ARCTIC
Introduction
The shore falls into two more or less sharply delimited divisions: the
littoral and the supralittoral zones. The littoral is that portion which is
periodically inundated, i.e., the tidal zone; the supralittoral is that portion
above spring tidemarks, but affected by the sea. That part of the littoral
which is inundated only by spring tide is usually included with the supralittoral
zone under the name “upper beach,” while the area below is referred to, for con–
venience, as the “tidal zone” proper.There is considerable variability in the extent of the two zones, depending
upon the slope of the shore, the height of the tidal wave, exposure to wind, etc.
Chiefly the depth of the zones is dependent upon the character of the coast,
whether rocky or sedimentary. In its strictest sense this delimitation applies
only to rock facies in absolutely wind-sheltered localities. Elsewhere , partly
due to waves, partly due to capillary attraction, on sandy shores, the littoral
area will shift upward. The downward shift of the boundary will be determined
by the lowest point to which the waves recede. A long period of calm weather
on an unsheltered shore may also force the line downward.On the upper beach, terrestrial ecological conditions prevail, being modified,
however, by the influence of such marine factors as, for example, the salinity of
002 | Vol_III-0510
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
of the bordering sea. The upper beach is also delimited in respect to other
terrestrial biotopes by this and other marine factors. Where there is an afflux
of fresh water, conditions are modified in a limnological direction, even in
the tidal zone proper, brackish water or estuary conditions prevailing.According to the aspect of the coast, the following biotopes in the tidal
zone can generally be discerned: ( 1 ) rock shore, ( 2 ) sand and/or gravel beach,
( 3 ) clay (or mud) shore, ( 4 ) mouth of stream or estuary, ( 5 ) littoral meadows,
and ( 6 ) lagoons. The last three mentioned biotopes vary greatly and are not
capable of sharp delimitation. Sand and clay shores present transitional stages,
as does a clay shore to estuary, littoral-meadow, and lagoon classification s .
Furthermore, only portions of the littoral meadows belong to the tidal zone proper,
the remainder belonging to the upper beach.In regions with high tides, it is often possible to discern zones within the
above-mentioned biotopes. The interzonation becomes less apparent where arctic
conditions (in the broad sense of the term) predominate. Shore fauna all over the
world present interesting ecological features because of the varying conditions to
which they are submitted and the meeting of land and sea factors; but many special
phenomena occur in arctic shores, as might be expected from the more severe con–
ditions for life.Comparatively little is known regarding the shore fauna of many arctic regions.
What knowledge we have is chiefly of Greenland, Spitsbergen, the Kola Peninsula,
and Novaya Zemlya. As to conditions on the arctic shores of America and Asia,
only scattered and casual information is available. From this, however, it is
possible to draw a few general conclusions, especially as to the biotopes of
rocky shores, which have been more thoroughly studied thus far. In such a habitat
the more conspicuous species occur, species which are commonly known and which
003 | Vol_III-0511
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
are liable to be collected even when expeditions lay scarcely any stress upon
zoological investigations. We have very few special investigations from which
to draw; for the most part our knowledge of littoral conditions must be compiled
from the general faunistical and zoogeographical papers that exist.Geographical Delimitation
The geographical delimitation of the littoral zone, as shown by the actual
distribution of animals, coincides broadly with the ones used in other parts of
this Encyclopedia, but certain special features are apparent as regards the
tidal zone proper.It is a common conception that the temperature and salinity of the water are
decisive factors for the littoral fauna; a conception supported by Steven (21)
and Dahl (5). As previously demonstrated by the author and strongly emphasized
by Dunbar (7), this does not, however, apply as to whether a specific littoral
fauna of higher animals, consisting of ( moll ) mollusks and Balanus balanoides ,
is actually able to develop in a given geographical region. The formation of
ice is almost wholly dependent on climate, and does not appear to be a decisive
factor. For example, a specific littoral fauna is present in Upernivik on the
northwest coast of Greenland but is absent in Scoresby Sound on the east coast;
yet the climate is practically the same in the two regions. Again, a sharp
climatic boundary is found about latitude 68°30′ N. in East Greenland, whereas
the boundary in the littoral is slightly north of 66° N. It seems, therefore,
that other causes are decisive here, causes which have some connection with the
sea and its abundance of life which would also affect the sublittoral fauna
(17; 19). According to Dunbar (7), the ocean currents are evidently a factor.The arctic littoral clearly falls into two regions: a high-arctic and a
subarctic. The high-arctic region is distinguished by the lack of a number of
004 | Vol_III-0512
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
forms characteristic of the littoral in other latitudes, notably the Balanus
balanoides and other barnacles, mollusks, and the Hydroida Hydroida .We have thus good criteria for delimitation of the arctic and subarctic
littoral regions. The southern delimitation of the Subarctic is more difficult.
There are, however, certain species of high-arctic distribution which are also found
in subarctic areas, and which may be taken as good indicators of the presence of
an admixture of polar water. The southern limit of their distribution may thus
be taken as a good guide to the limit of their subarctic region. Such species are
the amphipod Pseudalibrotus littoralis and the mysid Mysis oculata . It is of
interest to note that P. littoralis , within the subarctic area, is usually con–
fined to estuaries.So great are the differences met with in the subarctic zone that a more
detailed geographical subdivision is needed; and it may be predicted that one
will be made when more accurate information is available. But from the studies
thus far made it becomes obvious that the boundaries of the two zones are not
due to any single factor, such as differences in temperature, salinity, etc.,
but rather to a combination of factors not least of which are the ocean currents.
The high-arctic region is exclusively under the influence of arctic waters, but
the subarctic has everywhere a connection with warmer waters through the ocean
currents. Thus, the boundaries will shift in accordance with the fluctuations
of these currents (15).Distribution of the High-Arctic and Subarctic Zones
in Different RegionsIn Greenland, curiously enough, the longest stretch of the coast is subarctic
in character. Conditions on the north coast have not been investigate s d , but from
what is known about the nature of this region it is assumed to be high-arctic.
005 | Vol_III-0513
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
The east coast, which has been investigated, is high-arctic down to a point
immediately north of Angmagssalik, about 66° N. latitude, the northernmost
limits for the snail Littorina saxatilis var. groenlandica, the mussel
Mytilus edulis , the barnacle Balanus balanoides , the amphipod Jaera marina ,
and the polychaete Arenicola marina .From that point southward, the east coast is subarctic. The entire west
coast is subarctic northward to the Thule District (about 76° N.), although
very great differences are to be found on this enormous stretch. In previous
u: OIC? papers the author regarded the Thule District as high-arctic since the presence
of Mytilus edulis , although probable, judging from statements made by Greenlanders,
had not been proved. Recently, however, Vibe (verbal communication) found this
species in large numbers up to the lowest horizon of the tidal zone in several
Thule localities. Previously the author was inclined to reckon regions as
being in the high-arctic zone where Mytilus , and this species only of the higher
littoral forms, occurs in the sublittoral (as it is also reported from Novaya
Zemlya). But now it would seem that the very occurrence of this species indicates
an influence of Atlantic water (see also (7)).Since no mollusks other than Mytilus occur in the tidal zone farther north,
the Thule District can be regarded as the northernmost outpost of the subarctic
fauna. But in fact we must descend the coast for quite a distance southward
(about 73° N.) to find similar conditions, for it is at that latitude that the
L o i ttorina saxatilis var. groenlandica makes its first appearance. Still farther
southward, at Upernivik (72°47′ N.), a rather rich littoral fauna is met with.
There, besides the already mentioned forms, especially the littoral hydroids,
are found the u: previously called amphipod. Which is correct isopod Jaera marina , tubificides, and a number of mollusks and
polychaetes, which also occur in the sublittoral. Balanus balanoides was not found
in 1936, when the investigations were made.
006 | Vol_III-0514
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
In spite of zealous search, only older specimens of Mytilus edulis were
found at Upernivik and in the Thule District. From this fact it was concluded
that M. edulis does not spawn every year. It is possible, however, that they do
spawn but that the spat is unable to survive. Judging from the furrows in the
shell, some of the specimens are very old, probably twenty years.A little farther southward (72°23′ N.) in the harbor of Prőven, Balanus
balanoides makes its appearance, though few in number and restricted, especially
by the strong prevailing current of the locality, as to areas which enjoy favorable
conditions. At exactly what point southward continuous populations of B. balanoides
occur is not known.In the Umanak District the fauna has a more distinctly boreal stamp in places
where the freshwater influence, due to the outflow of glaciers, is not too marked,
as was shown by the investigations of Vanhőffen (31). Arenicola marina occurs here.Moving southward along the coast, the fauna is of the same main composition,
though more numerous and varied. Special littoral investigations of Amerdlok Fjord
in the Holsteinsborg District (about 67° N.) disclose the presence of a very rich
fauna, notably on the clay shore, where are Mytilus beds comparable in weight per
square meter to those of boreal waters (21).Aside from those mentioned, no other special littoral investigations have
been made. But much information can be gleaned from Otto Fabricius’ Fauna
Groenlandica (1780) as to the littoral fauna in the Frederikshaab District (16).
Fabricus’ investigations disclose the presence of a very rich littoral fauna as
well as a large number of sublittoral species. The only characteristically arctic
form present here is the Pseudalibrotus littoralis which, at this more southern
latitude, is retricted to river mouths.The fauna of north and east Iceland resembles that on the southwest coast
of Greenland.
007 | Vol_III-0515
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
Very little is known about the littoral fauna of Jan Mayen. Becker, in 1886,
mentioned Littorina palliata but once, and then as occurring in one locality
only, a cave on the island (which reference needs to be confirmed). The presence
in the supralittoral of the boreal fly Fucellia fucorum (14), would also seem to
indicate boreal influence (14), as do certain features of the fish fauna (15).
On the whole, however, the fauna is for the most part arctic in character, so
that Jan Mayen may be regarded as a subarctic outpost.In the southwestern part of Spitsbergen (Svalbard), subarctic conditions
prevail. Here we find Littorina sax a t a i lis var. groenlandica , Balanus balanoides ,
some hydroids, and bryozoans. Mytilus edulis no longer exists in Spitsbergen,
although subfossils from postglacial times have been found. Probably, because of
its comparatively short-lived larval stage, it has not since been able to spread
again to this region author OK? (26). In this connection, it can be mentioned that the
snails, Skeneopsis planorbis and Littorina littorea , referred to, respectively,
by Thiele (23) and Elton and Baden-Powell (8), have not been found in Spitsbergen
(compare (18) and (24). The occurrence of the beetle Micralymma marinum indicates
the arctic influence on the southern fauna here, as well as in Bear Island to the
south of Spitsbergen. On Bear Island, Balanus balanoides are also met with in
large numbers (30). Too little is known of the fauna of Spitsbergen to warrant
drawing distinct boundaries, but the northern parts are probably high-arctic.
In all probability the same hol e d s true for Franz Josef Land. At any rate, none
of the special littoral mollusks has been reported from there.On the A rc sia tic-European continent, the southern limit of the subarctic may be
drawn at Lofoten in Norway, since this point seems to be the southernmost limit
for the arctic Pseudalibrotus littoralis as well as the northernmost limit for
several littoral forms such as the snail Patella vulgate (6) (see (6) , especially
008 | Vol_III-0516
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
1934-37). The eastern boundary of the subarctic littoral is near the entrance
to the Kara Sea, conditions in this area greatly resembling those of northwest
Greenland; Littorina saxatilis occurs along a wide stretch, Balanus balanoides
more locally. However, several authors mention the occasional occurrence s of
young B. balanoides right into the Kara Sea, borne there probably by the constant
eastward current through Yugorski Shar. The greater part of the Kara Sea may be
classified as high-arctic.The greater part of Novaya Zemlya also belongs to the arctic province, but
in the southern part the Atlantic influence is felt, as apparent in the occurrence
of Mytilus edulis , which for the most part lives sublittorally, as in the Thule
District in northwest Greenland. Other manifestations of the Atlantic influence
are the presence of Littorina palliate (24) and the occasional occurrence of
Balanus balanoides in Matochkin Shar (22).High-arctic conditions prevail along the Siberian coast; Pseudalibrotus
littoralis, however, is replaced by the Siberian species, P. birulai . In the
Chukotsk Sea, east of Wrangel Island, subarctic conditions return, that is,
Pacific influence reaches that far west (22). It is difficult to designate
exactly the southern boundary of the subarctic on the western side of Bering
Strait; out two “indicators,” P. littoralis and Mysis oculata , do not occur
south of St. Lawrence Island, but there is evidence, nevertheless, for arctic
influence somewhat farther south. The level of Lorenz Island is the limit of the
subarctic on the eastern side of Bering Strait, but some arctic influence is felt
a little farther south on the western side, in the sublittoral (3; 10).The whole northern coast of the American continent is undoubtedly subarctic,
but very little is known about the fauna of this region, and conditions on the
northern islands are quite unknown. The entire eastern coast of Baffin Island
009 | Vol_III-0517
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
is subarctic, Mytilus having been found at Pond Inlet (17) and Balanus balanoides
has been found near Cumberland sound (22). What conditions prevail on Ellesmere
Island is now known, but it can be hazarded that the arctic zone descends some–
what farther southward on the western side of Baffin Bay. As to Pseudalibrotus
littoralis on the eastern coast of America, nothing is known; but the southern
limit of Mysis oculata is at Cape Charles, Labrador (about 53° N.). The occur–
rence of Littorina palliata would also indicate the subarctic character of the
region (20). We must, however, remember that this species seems to extend
farther south in America than in Europe the Iceland (24).Knowledge of the supralittoral is still more restricted than that of the
littoral zone proper. The limits will be seen to follow different courses,
corresponding more closely to the climatic limits, these in turn being affected
by ocean currents. Roughly, it may be said that the upper beach fauna in the
subarctic region will prove to be rather poor. The Orchestia community seems to
appear nowhere, are judging from the work in northern U.S.S.R. , littoral beetles,
with the exception of certain species of Micralymma , extend but a little distance
into the subarctic. Dispersion-ecological causes may account for the absence of
a number of littoral Hydrophlidae and Staphylinidae which are common in northern
Iceland, subarctic Greenland, Spitsbergen, and Novaya Zemlya.Shore Fauna of the High-Arctic Zone
Even though animals prevalent in the subarctic regions, such as mollusks,
barnacles, and hydroids, are completely absent in the high-arctic zone, other
animals adapted to the special shore conditions may be found. These special
shore conditions have been specifically investigated in East Greenland only,
but it is thought that similar conditions prevail throughout the high-arctic zone.
010 | Vol_III-0518
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
The main characteristic of the fauna is that, the more severe the conditions
the fewer the animals, both as to species and specimens. Very few examples of
true arctic animals adapted to life on the shore are known. The only instances
of which we can be sure are found among the order Diptera: the Muscidae Fucella
arciiformis and F. pictipennis, and the Chironomidae, Orthocladius decoratus ,
O. groenlandensis , O. fusistylis , and Smittia extrema . These live on the upper
beach as adults, in lagoons and littoral meadows as larvae, as do related species
in boreal regions.Since the distribution of these animals is much more dependent upon climatic
than upon littoral conditions, and distribution will not follow the littoral
boundaries outlined above. However, it may be said that they have a pronounced
northern distribution. Fucellia apparently has a western distribution, having
been reported only in Greenland and Arctic America, whereas Orthocladius decoratus
and Smittia extrema apparently have a more eastern distribution, being known to
occur in Spitsbergen. The staphylinid beetle Micralymma brevilingue , a few larvae
of which have been found in lagoons in East Greenland, and M. dicksoni , of similar
habits and occurring in northern Siberia, should also be mentioned.On sand shore and in sand patches on gravel shore in the tidal zone proper,
the turbellarians Notocaryoplana arctic a have been found, as have been, on clay
shore, Protomascrostomum groenlandicum . Both are new genera and species to the
author’s material from East Greenland and may prove to be true arctic shore
animals. As already stated, Pseudalibrotus littoralis is of wide arctic dis–
tribution, being related to the shore but not exclusively bound to it and,
though its habitats differ in the high-arctic and subarctic, occurs in both.The phenomenon noted in the distribution of Pseudalibrotus littoralis,
namely, that the habitat is less restricted in the high-arctic than in more
011 | Vol_III-0519
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
southern regions, is one frequently noted in the high-arctic, and may be due to
differences in competitive conditions.Aside from the above-mentioned species, a few other animals occur, also
being shore forms in the subarctic and boreal regions, again illustrating the
notably thinned-out character of high-arctic fauna. Wherever sufficient moisture
is present, enchytraeids occur, especially Lumbricillus lineatus in Greenland
(but doubtless elsewhere as well), Enchytraeus albidus , and probably other species,
if Spitsbergen, which has been especially well investigated in this respect, may
be taken as typical. The orybatid Ameronothrus lineatus very frequently occurs,
most often in the variety nigrofemoratus . The various biotopes occur in differing
frequencies, salt marshes harboring an especially rich fauna.Other true littoral animals occur: the collemboles, Archisotoma besselsi and
Hypogastrura viatica , and the parasitoid, Molgus littoralis .On rock shore the animal life is very poor, Molgus littoralis from the upper
beach alone being know n , but it probably feeds on some small as yet unknown
animals of the littoral lichen zone.In the shor e t , tomentose, algal vegetation within the tidal zone proper,
Ameronothrus occur, in association with oligochaetes, and undoubtedly also small
crustaceans, including several copepoda, which have also been ob served on other facies.
In most high-arctic regions this vegetation is characterized by the absence of
the dominant littoral algae, Fucus vesiculosus and Ascophyllum nodosum . Further,
several amphipods can be found, of which Gammarus locusta setosus Is this correct? has been
observed as especially common. No investigations on rock pools have as yet been
made, but in all probability their fauna will show similarities to that of the
lagoons. A striking feature of the rock-shore fauna is that it is not restricted
to rock shore, all the species having also been found on other types of shore.
012 | Vol_III-0520
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
The sediment facies is of course as differentiated as in other regions, but,
in contradistinction to more southern regions, no gr an ea t differences in the compo–
sition of the fauna can be observed. The plant life is of but slight importance,
and the animal life of no importance.On the upper beach, the above-mentioned flies and chironomides occur, together
with the littoral collemboles and mites, a large number of other collemboles (12),
and several spiders, the most common of these being Micryphantes nigripes and
species of Erigone Erigone (2), buried among the washed-up algae in the drift line.
Oligochaetes are also found.In the tidal zone proper, on gravel and sand beach, we find Gammarus locusta
setosus , Pseudalibrotus littoralis (the latter burrowing in the sand), and along
with the oligochaetes, the turbellarians, Notocaryoplana arctica and Monocelis fusca ,
these last two being absent where strong freshwater influence prevails and, finally,
several harpacticoids, these being known as brackish-water forms.Clay (or mud) shore has been studied in one locality only. There the forma–
tion was dependent on the outflow of a glacier, and it presented, on the whole,
the same picture as to fauna as had been found on sand shore, with a few exceptions.
The exceptions were the presence of a special turbellarian, Protomacrostomum
groenlandicum , not specifically determined ostracodes, and the harpacticoid
Bradya typica , which is always associated with a clay bottom. In stream mouths,
where extensive flats are often formed, and in lagoons, the usual animals may be
found. In stream mouths they are rather scattered. Here, the larvae of the
shore flies and midges, which occur characteristically in sheltered places, are
apparently coincident with accumulated organic matter, just as on the upper beach
animals occur only where vegetation is present. In the water of the stream mouths
and lagoons, Laophomte strőmi and species of Tachidius live, these harpacticoids
013 | Vol_III-0521
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
being known as brackish-water forms. The young of Cottus quadricornis prefer to
live in these places as well. Here, the small fishes are hunted by gulls, the
smallest animals being also preyed upon by small waders, although these birds
do not, as in boreal regions, nest on the shore. Geese crop close the vegeta–
tion of the littoral meadows which are characteristically covered with a mixture
of the algae Puccinellia phryganodes and Carex ursina .In the soil there is a teeming life of orybatids and collemboles and, where
there is a great deal of moisture, myriads of oligochaetes, nematodes, and pro–
tozoans, often rotifers and tardigrades as well, this latter life being especially
intensified in the film of cyanophyceans and diatoms occurring in the tidal part
of the lagoons and littoral meadows. Spiders abound in the upper beaches.The afflux of fresh water is the most important factor modifying conditions
of life in the salt marshes, the richest development of animal life occurring
where such an influence is felt. But, although the animals may be numerically
very considerable ( Ameronothrus up to about 50,000 per square meter, oligochaetes
and chironomides larvae about 12,600), the weights, which never exceed 20 grams,
are negligible compared with those of the marine communities.It is an interesting fact that in the arctic zones, particularly in the
high-arctic, plants and animals are not so strictly bound to the shore as in
more southern regions. This is especially noticeable in places where, from some
dispersion-ecological causes, fewer species are present. Molgus littoralis can
be found rather far from shore (16), as is true of the same species and Bdella
decipiens in northern Spitsbergen (27; 29). A number of shore plants, too, are
sometimes found far from shore, in places manured by birds or human beings, for
example, in the ruins of Eskimo houses. The spider Ameronothrus lineatus has
been found on bird cliffs on Bear Island and Ameronothrus and the shore oligochaete
014 | Vol_III-0522
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
✓ Lumbri o ci llus profugus have occurred in mosses on Jan Mayen (4; 28). Again, a ✓
number of animals found in the tidal zone farther south tend to be found lower
down (in the sublittoral) in arctic conditions, and this tendency becomes more
marked the more completely arctic the climate. This is found also, oddly enough,
in the Baltic, where, for instance, several littoral mollusks occur in much
deeper water than elsewhere (11; 17). It is possible that in this case also
the diminished competition due to the smaller number of species may be an impor–
tant factor.Shore Fauna of the Subarctic Zone
As already stated, a great variety of fauna can be found within this zone.
In fact, in its more southern portions or where conditions are for some reason
particularly favorable, a fauna as rich as or even richer than that of many
boreal regions occurs. A number of special investigations have been made, notably
along the Murman coast (11) and in West Greenland (18 ref. right? ; 21). The presence of Mysis
oculata , which is found almost everywhere, and the occurrence of Pseudalibrotus
littoralis as an estuarine form are outstanding characteristics of this zone.
The arctic influence on the fauna is felt in the absence of a number of boreal
forms. This is particularly true of the fauna of islands, such as Iceland, where
more special conditions prevail.Where the fauna is submitted to the influence of freshwater factors (rivers
and glaciers), a deterioration takes place. But where pure marine conditions
are provided, we find a teeming life in the littoral.On rock shore, the Balanus balanoides and Mytilus edulis associations dominate,
but there is a great variety of other mollusks and also crustaceans and worms,
these latter partly in connection with a strong vegetation of higher algae. On
beaches with sand and gravel, there is a rich life of burrowing worms and mussels.
015 | Vol_III-0523
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
On clay shore a still more luxurious life occurs, with a greater number of
individuals and the specimens being also of larger size. As in boreal regions,
the clay shore frequently develops into regular beds of Mytilus , many of the
specimens being as large as those found in boreal regions. There is a rich
epifauna of the same character as that found on the rock shore. Communities
of Macoma balthica-Arenicola marina abound, as do communities of Pygospio elegans ,
the latter occurring in river mouths as in boreal regions. A Hydrobia ulvae
community occurs on the Murman coast, but is missing both in Iceland and Greenland,
probably for reasons of dispersal. A Corophium volutator community seems to be
missing everywhere.On the upper beach, where climatic conditions make themselves most clearly
felt, the arctic influence on the fauna is very apparent, asserting itself
characteristically, as mentioned above, in the total absence of an Orchestia
community. In many places shore beetles abound. Backlund (1) has recently
contributed to our knowledge of these littoral beetles by making collections in
the Petsamo district of northern Finland.
016 | Vol_III-0524
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Backlund, H.O. “Wrack fauna of Sweden and Finland, ecology and chorology,”
Opusc.Entom . Suppl. 1945.2. Braendegaard, J. “The spiders (Araneina) of East Greenland. A faunistic
and zoogeographical investifation,” Medd.Grøenland, vol.121,
no.15, 1946.3. Broch, Hj. “Noen dyregeografiske trekk i nordhavenes bunndyrverden,”
Norsk. Geogr.Tidsskr . vol . 6, no.6, pp.1-16, 1937. ✓4. C Č ernosvitov, L. “Sur quelques oligoch e è tes de la r e é gion arcti c que et des ✓
I Î les Faer-Oer,” Annalses Sci.Nat. vol. Ser. 10, no. vol. 14, pp.65-111, 1931. ✓ ✓5. Dahl, E. “On the s S maller a A rthropoda of m M arine a A lgae, e E specially in the “ On the s S maller a A rthropoda of m M arine a A lgae, e E specially in the ✓
p P olyhaline w W aters off the Swedish West c C oast,” p P olyhaline w W aters off the Swedish West c C oast,” Lund, Gleerup, 1948. Undersőkningar över ✓
Oresund , vol.35 . 1948. (Gleerup, Lund, Sweden,) ✓6. Dons, C. “Norges strandfauna, I-XIX,” Norske Videnskaps-Akad. Forh.
vol.5, no.50; vol.6, no.11, 24; vol.7, no.2, 25, 30; vol.8, no.9.
12,20,21; vol.9, no.20,42,43; vol.10, no.8, 9, 12, 13, 14, 1932-37.7. Dunbar, M.J. “Note on the delimitation of the arctic and subarctic zones,”
Canad.Field Nat. vol.61, no.1, pp.12-14, 1947.8. Elton, C.S., and Baden-Powell, D.F.W. “On a collection of raised beach
fossils from Spitzbergen,” Geol.Mag . Lond. Vol.68, pp.385-405, 1931.9. Gisl e é n, Torsten. “Epibioses of the Gullmar Fjord. I. & II,” Kristinebergs
Zool.Stat. 1877-1927. Papers no.3,4, 1930. (Svenska Vetenskapsakad.
Skriftseries .)10. Gurianova, E. “Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Isopodenfauna des Pazifischen
Ozeans IV,” Zoologischer Anz . Vol.114, pp.250-65, 1936.11. ----, Saks, I., and Ushakov, P. “Litoral Zapadnogo Murmana.”
(The littoral of West Murman.), Leningrad. Gosudarstvennyi Gidrol.
Inst. Issled.Morei SSSR, vol.11 , pp.47-104, 1930.12. Hammer, M. “Studies on the Oribatides and Collemboles of Greenland,”
Medd. Grønland vol.141, no.3, 1944.13. Henriksen, K.L. “A revised index of the insects of Grønland,” Ibid . vol.119,
no.10. 193 0 9 .
017 | Vol_III-0525
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna. Bibliogrpahy
14. ----, and Lundbeck, Will. “Landarthropoder (Insecta et Arachnida),”
Ibid . vol.22, pp.481-823, 1917.15. Jensen, Ad.S. “Concerning a change of climate during recent decades
in the arctic and subarctic regions, from Greenland in the west
to Eurasia in the east, and contemporary biological and
geophysical changes,” Danske Vidensk.Selsk. Biologiske Medd .
vol.14, no.8, pp.1-75, 1939.16. Madsen, Holger. “Biology of a littoral mite,” Nature , Lond. Vol.139,
no.3521, p. 715, 1937.17. ----. “Investigations on the shore fauna of East Greenland with a
survey of the shores of other arctic regions,” Medd.Grønland
vol.100, no.8, 1936.18. ----. “Some zoogeographical corrections,” J.Conch . vol.21, pp.9-10, 1938.
19. ----. “A study of the littoral fauna of Northwest Greenland,” Medd.Grønland
vol.124, no.3, 1940.20. Packard , A.S. “On the recent invertebrate fauna of Labrador,” Boston
Soc.Nat.Hist. Mem . vol.1, 1865.21. Steven, D. “The shore fauna of Amerdloq fjord, West Greenland,”
J.Animal Ecol . vol.7, pp.53-70, 1938.22. Tarasov, N.L. “K faune usonogikh rakov ( Cirripedia thoracica ) Severnogo
Ledovitogo Okeana. III.” (Contribution to the fauna of
Cirripedia thoracica of the Arctic Ocean. III.), Leningrad.
Arkticheskii M N auchn-Issled.Inst. Trudy vol.50, pp.35-59, 1937.23. Thiele, J. “Arktische Loricaten, Gastropoden, Scaphopoden und Bivalven,”
Fauna Arct . vol.5, pt.2, 1928.24. Thorson, G. “Marine Gastropoda Prosobranchiata,” Zool. Iceland vol.4,
no pt. 60, pp.1- 149 150 , 1941.25. ----. “Marine Gastropoda Prosebranchiata. Zool. East Greenland,”
Medd.Grønland vol.121, no.13, 1944.26. ----. “Reproduction and larval development of Danish marine bottom
invertebrates, with special reference to the plan e c tonic larvae
in the Sound (Øresund),” Denmark. Komm.for Fisk.-og Havunders.
Medd.Ser.Plankton vol.4, no.1, 1946.27. Trägårdh, J. “Acari,” Medd.Grønland vol.43, no.14, 1917.
28. ----. “Monographie der arktischen Acariden,” Fauna Arct . vol.4, no.1, 1904.
018 | Vol_III-0526
EA-Zoo. Madsen: Littoral Fauna. Bibliography
29. ----. “Zur Kenntnis der litoralen Arten der Gattung Bdella Latr . , ”
Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Bihang Handl . vol.27, no.4, p.9, 1902.Arther 30. Urban, W. d’. “Zoology of Barents Sea,” Annals & Mag.Nat.Hist . vol.5,
no.6, 1880.31. Vanhöffen, E. “Die Fauna und Flora Grønlands,” Drygalski, Erich von. Grønland - Expedition der Grønland - Expedition der ✓ ✓ ✓
Gesellschaft fűr Erdkunde zu Berlin 1891-1893 Gesellschaft f ű r Erdkunde zu Berlin 1891-1893 . Berlin, Kűhl, 1897. vol.2.Holger Madsen
Benthonic Fauna of the Arctic and Subarctic Seas
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0527
EA-Zoology (Hjalmar Broch)
BENTHONIC FAUNA OF THE ARCTIC AND SUBARCTIC SEAS
This manuscript was accompanied by 11 maps. Because of the high price
of reproducing such maps, only a few submitted will be used in Encyclopedia
Arctica . The selection of the number of these maps will be determined by
the publisher, and the choice of those used should be made in conjunction
with a representative of the publisher. All maps are, therefore, being held
at the Stefansson Library until a selection can be made.
001 | Vol_III-0528
EA-Zoology
(Hjalmar Broch)
BENTHONIC FAUNA OF THE ARCTIC AND SUBARCTIC SEAS
A cursory review of the benthonic or sea-bottom animal world of the arctic
seas reveals some conflicting features. By comparison with the numbers of species
in temperate seas, the fauna must be character ia z ted as poor. This puts a stamp
of uniformity on the fauna which is further emphasized by the richness in individual
specimens. For, though the species are few, the number of individuals is, in
most cases, comparatively large. The zoologist is, therefore, inclined to charac–
terize the fauna as rather uniform or poor, whereas from the point of view of the
abundance of individuals it may be said to be rich.Although ecologists generally maintain that the number of individuals is
large in the arctic seas, where conditions are apparently unfavorable to the
existence of many species, our recent investigations make it by no means easy to
arrive at an explanation. The cause may be found in the obvious tendency of
arctic animals to shorten their larval, planktonic or passively floating period
of life, and to extend the nektonic or actively swimming life. These tendencies
are common to the benthonic fauna of the Arctic as well as Antarctic, which leads
to the supposition that the phenomenon must somehow be correlated with low
temperatures.Ecological investigations in Greenland waters, more especially by Gunnar
Thorsen, have to a certain extent thrown light upon the question. Since the
002 | Vol_III-0529
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
phytoplankton has but a short period of abundance in the icy seas and since the
sea fauna depends upon it for nourishment, the larval development must be finished
during these short periods of abundance. Either this or the further development
of the animal must proceed in the body cav o i ties of the adult. The theory is
plausible; but it scarcely explains the numerical abundance of individuals in
every species and in most localities, such abundance not being apparently con–
sistent with recurrent seasonal scarcity of food.No adequate reason has as yet been found to explain why the arctic benthonic
fauna shows this tendency to develop great numbers of individuals and their
apparent gregariousness. As an example of such tendencies, 2,000 specimens of
the brittle star, Ophiura nodosa , have been taken at one station in the Kara Sea.
Similarly, more than 400 specimens of the large crab, Chionectes opilio , have
been taken in single hauls in eastern Siberian waters and more than 1,000 specimens
of the cumacean crusteacean, Diastylis sp., in one catch with a dredge by the Vega
expedition working in the same sea. In the Barents Sea, the Norwegian steamer
Michael Sars, Michael Sars, in 1902, caught in a trawl more than one ton e of sponges, Geodia sp.,
and on another occasion, near Jan Mayen, more than a barrelful of the small mussel Pecton
groenlandica . Ossian Sars reports from the Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition
that the trawl near Spitsbergen came up positively filled with the sea lily
Antedon eschrichti . Many more such hauls have been reported.Such occurrences seem to be more frequent in eastern Siberian waters than in
the Kara Sea and farther westward. Data concerning such phenomena in arctic
American waters are as yet lacking. It must be noted, too, that, due probably
to the limitations and selective nature of the methods employed, the data on
bottom samplings by Russian zoologists make no mention of such gregarious
tendencies in arctic waters investigated by them. Moreover, a complete evaluation
003 | Vol_III-0530
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
of animal life cannot be made on the basis of bottom samplings, since vagile
benthonic animals almost entirely escape and thus elude investigation.As with other individuals among arctic animals, which are larger than in
temperate regions, the benthonic fauna of the Arctic shows a vigorous develop–
ment as to size. On the other hand, recent investigations have revealed a
slower rate of growth in arctic animals. The potency of growth being, however,
independent of its swiftness, this does not involve a contradiction. In graphic
terms, we may describe growth as proceeding along an ascending curve, the rise
being less steep the lower the temperature. The metabolism, however, increases
almost parallel with the surface of the individual, proceeding, as another potential
curve, more steeply with increased temperatures. The final size of the individual
is reached when the two curves cross (where the metabolism equals the potency of
growth). This point will be reached at smaller size under higher temperatures,
the growth continuing at lower temperatures - provided there is no interference
from accidental factors such as lack of food, variations in salinity, etc.The inference may justifiably be drawn that benthonic animals of the Arctic
are longer lived than are those of temperate or tropical waters. In other words,
we may hazard the statement that the total metabolism of the fauna of arctic seas
is rather strongly retarded and that the causal factor is the prevalence of low
temperatures.A vertical or bathymetric study of ar t c tic waters shows less stratification
in clearly separated layers than is the case with marine life in temperate or
tropical regions. In warmer seas three bathymetric zones can generally be clearly
distinguished: ( 1 ) an upper region of the costal banks (the continental shelf),
with a depth of some 400 to 600 meters; ( 2 ) an intermediate or archibenthal region,
with a depth of about 1,500 or 2,000 meters; and, ( 3 ) farthest down, the abyssal
004 | Vol_III-0531
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
region. Recent investigations have shown that, in arctic waters, the two deeper
levels are more confluent faunistically than elsewhere, although the special
facies (ooze) of the greatest depths still act selectively upon the animal world.
Species, for instance, which occur mainly along the slopes of the central arctic
basin are often met with in the deeper and icy cold strata of the Norwegian Sea,
and typical s e pecies from the abyssal depths of that sea are often, in higher
latitudes, found more or less accidentally in rather shallow water, even in the
shelf sea. Nevertheless, it is convenient to treat the deep sea and the shelf
sea (the sea along the coastal banks) separately. We shall begin with the deeper
waters where the fauna is comparatively poor.A glance at the charts of the northern seas reveals that the deep sea of
the Arctic ( below a 600-meter depth) falls into three sections. The great central
polar deep surrounding the North Pole communicates with the deep of the Norwegian
sea, traversing the Nansen Ridge between Spitsbergen and North Greenland, the
shallowest part of the ridge being situated some 1,000 meters below the level of
the sea. The icy cold depths of the Norwegian Sea are thus, as it were, an inte–
gral part of the arctic deep sea, though separated from the warmer Atlantic deep
sea by the shallow ridge in the Faeroe Channel, which is only about 600 meters
below sea level. To the south, this deep borders the Atlantic deep waters in
Davis Strait, elsewhere is separated from the polar deep by the shallow sounds
between the arctic islands and Greenland. Finally, the deepest parts of the Okhotsk
Sea form a basin effectively isolated from the polar deep, although these portions
must be ranged for study with the arctic deep waters.Our knowledge of the deepest parts of the central polar deep is very limited.
This is partly because of the difficulties of operating dredging gears from ice
surfaces and partly because so few expeditions equipped for deep-sea investigation
005 | Vol_III-0532
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
have crossed it. The Russians have occasionally collected specimens in the
deep sea along the Siberian slopes; but in many cases their publications are
not readily accessible. Largely because of the impracticability of carrying
out deep-sea work along the North American arctic coasts, very little is known
as to the benthonic fauna of these regions. Nevertheless, from the scattered
and inadequate information available to us, we can draw a few general conclusions.
The data obtained by the expeditions which have worked along the Nansen Ridge and
north of Spitsbergen prove the uniform character of the fauna in the deeps of the
Norwegian Sea and of the central polar basin.On the whole, the productivity of the lowest depths (2,000 meters and more)
is slight. The ocean bottom being always covered with Globigerina or Biloculina
ooze, the only attached animals that can exist there are those that have developed
special “root systems” which enable them to fix themselves in the soft bottom
without being drowned in the mud. An example of such adaptation is the Ilycrinus
carpenteri , a sea lily which is common to and characteristic of the arctic
abyssal deep. The sea slugs Kolga hyalina and Elpidia glacialis are also found,
the latter being met with in shallower depths at higher latitudes and occasionally
even in the deepest part of the coastal banks. Also found in the greatest depths
of the central Arctic Sea are the following: an isopod crustacean, Mesidothea
megalura ; the amphipod crustaceans, Bruzelia dentata and Harpinia abyssi ; the
mysidaceans, Pseudomysis abyssi (the only species known of this genus) and
Boreomysis scyphops ; the blind prawn, Bythocaris leucopis , and its near relation
B. payeri , the latter species also ascending to somewhat shallower parts of the
ocean deeps.In the abyssal regions below 1 , 000 meters, the lamellibranchiate, Peston
frigidus , is perhaps the most common and characteristic. At the same depth occur
006 | Vol_III-0533
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
marine snails, Neptunea mohni , Natica bathybii , and Bella ovalis . One of the
most interesting of the benthonic fauna of these icy depths is the red liparid
fish, Rhodichthys regina , which has not as yet been found in depths of less
tham 1,150 meters.It is interesting to try to trace the origin of the arctic abyssal fauna
by looking for related species in other oceans. Thus far such speculations have
been inconclusive, but certain interesting facts do emerge. For instance, the
genus Ilycrinus is restricted to the Pacific-Antarctic regions, whereas the
genus Bruzelia , though apparently it does not occur in the Pacific, has been
found outside the Arctic in shallower North Atlantic waters. The Harpinia abyssi
and the Bythocaris pa p y eri are among the rare abyssal arctic fauna which are
occasionally met with in the Atlantic deeps bordering the Arctic. On the other
hand, the genus Mesidothea , of which there are but four known species, is
entirely restricted to the arctic region and it may, therefore, be concluded that
it originated there. Apparently, then, the benthonic arctic fauna may have been
in part recruited from neighboring Atlantic and Pacific waters, but it also in–
cludes many species indigenous to the Arctic.The upper portions of the arctic deep sea, known as the archibenthal or
intermediate region, has a richer and more varied fauna, not counting the
occasional visitors from shallower waters. The reason for this is the more
varied bottom facies encountered above the “mud line.” The zone, however, cannot
be clearly delimited. Some species, such as the above-mentioned sea slug- Elpidia
glacialis , are found to be, especially in higher latitudes, very common in the
upper layers of the deep sea, whenever the special facies (soft, muddy bottom)
exists, and other species, such as the sea star Tylaster willei , are found at
such varying depths that we cannot determine with any certainty at what depth
007 | Vol_III-0534
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
to assign them as characteristic. A third echinoderm, the feather star Poliometra
prolixa , decidedly belongs to the upper part of the deep-sea region, but speci–
mens of it have been rather frequently met with in abyssal depths and in the
deeper portions of the “shelf” sea. The only seas urchin endemic to the arctic
deep sea, Pourtalesia jeffreysi , is similarly found occasionally in other zones
of the Arctic. The squid, Cirroteuthis mulleri , unique in this among its kind,
is always found at depths ranging from 550 to 2,300 meters and at temperatures
below 0°C. Among the crustaceans, the mysids, Parerythrops spectabilis and
Erythrops glacialis, are found characteristically in the upper strata of the
deep-sea region, together with the barnacles Scalpellum hamatum and S. striolatum ,
both of which seem to prefer the border layers between the intermediate and abyssal
zones.One of the most characteristic species of the arctic deep-sea region is the
fascinating sea feather, Umbellula er c rinus , the nake s d stalk of which may some–
times reach the imposing height of 2 meters, carrying on its top a bouquet of
large, flower-like polyps. The species seems to prefer the upper parts of the
deep sea, being usually found at a depth of 1,300 meters but smaller specimens have
also been found in shallow waters, at a depth of but 180 meters in the Siberian seas.
Its habitat is restricted to Greenland waters, the Norwegian Sea, and eastward as
far as 87°04' E. at 79° N. latitude, and is, therefore, an eastern arctic species
(see Fig. 1). The species is not found east of the New Siberian Islands or along
the arctic coasts of North America.Of interest to note is the case of the Umbellula encrinus which , because of
its short-lived and but feebly vagile larval stage is practically incapable of
penetrating into new regions, is nevertheless comparatively numerous in the deeper
parts of the isolated arctic deeps of Baffin Bay. The fauna of this basin is
008 | Vol_III-0535
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
on the whole of the same type as that of the great central polar deep and the
icy depths of the Norwegian Sea. For explanation, it is natural to cite the
polar currents which, after rounding the southern end of Greenland, continue
northward along the western Greenland coast into the northern part of Davis
Strait and Baffin Bay.Another detached deep-sea basin of arctic waters, the intermediate abyssal
depths of the Okhotsk Sea, will show, it is thought, quite another picture when
the results of the many Soviet expeditions are available. From the scattered
data now at hand we can reach some general conclusions. It may be expected
that species other than the sea anemone Amphianthus margaritacea will be found
to be common to the deep-sea regions of the Okhotsk Sea, the Norwegian Sea, and
Baffin Bay. At all events it is known that the alcyonacean (octocorallan) fauna
clearly exhibits an aberrant aspect: benthonic species common to the Pacific
abound in the Okhotsk Sea, some of them having developed into characteristic
local species. The data accessible to us show with certainty that the fauna of
the Okhotsk deep sea is much richer in species than the central polar deep,
probably due to a strong influx from the Pacific.Returning to the benthonic life of the central Arctic, Ekman summed up, in
1935, the species endemic to the arcti d c deep sea as follows: (1) entirely abyssal
(below 1,000 meters), 85 species; ( 2 ) mainly abyssal, in the archibenthal region
(below 550 meters), 60 species; and ( 3 ) predominantly archibenthal, 80 species;
total endemic arctic deep sea, 225 species. To this number must be added a
great series of species not restricted to the arctic deep sea but more or less
common to both arctic and boreal deep seas or even the abyssal regions of other
oceans. We must also include several species which are outstandingly eurybathic,
that is to say, common to both deep sea and shallower waters. There are, furthermore,
009 | Vol_III-0536
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
some eurythermal species which are apparently independent of differences in
temperatures. S A ccording to Ekman ’ s summary of these, no less than 560 species
of metazoans have been observed living in the arctic deep sea, of which about
40% may be characterized as endemic.In the shallower parts of the arctic seas, the picture is even more compli–
cated and blurred, especially in the so-called “lower arctic area.”Here, quite naturally, a strong influence from the boreal regions is apparent
in the fauna. Species of distinctly arctic character, such as the bivalve
Portlandia (Yoldia) arctica, the brachiopold Hemithyrus psittacea , or the brittle
star Ophiopleura borealis , exist side by side with species which are as boreal as
arctic in appearance. Examples of the boreal arctic fauna are the bivalves
Astarte banksi and A. compressa , the brittle star Ophiura sarsi , the deep-sea
prawn Pandalus borealis , etc. Among these are several species of predominantly
boreal character. Such transitional border areas of the Arctic are the northern–
most parts of the Pacific Ocean, the Atlantic coastal banks of southern Labrador,
the northern borders of the Newfoundland banks, the waters along the greater part
of the West Greenland coast, the north coast of Iceland, the Barents Sea, and the
western coastal waters of Spitsbergen.In the shallower coastal regions of the North American archipelago, the
northern Alaskan coast, as well as in the shelf sea of Siberia, Bering Strait,
and westward to Novaya Zemlya, and the banks around Franz Josef Land, few if any
boreal elements are apparent in the benthonic fauna, which is emphatically
high-arctic in character.Bottom samplings from this high-arctic coastal area show several endemic
arctic species, and many species seem to be restricted to their special domains
within the area. Whereas a typical shallow-water species, such as the
010 | Vol_III-0537
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
lamellibranchiate ( Portlandia (Yoldia) arctica is entirely circumpolar in its
distribution, we find that the endemic arctic isopod Mesidothea has developed
one species, M. sibirica , which is restricted to the Siberian coastal waters
from the Kara Sea to Bering Strait. It can be ha z sarded that parallel instances
of such adaptation will be found eventually in the coastal waters of arctic
North America, where the more or less isolated areas in the sounds of the archi–
pelage provide almost ideal conditions for the development of local races or species.
The estuaries of the great Siberian rivers and their environs with comparatively
brackish water also harbor characteristic local species of varieties, such as
the amphipodous crustacean ( Pseudalibrotus birulai , to mention one characteristic
example. Similar conditions no doubt also prevail in the shallower waters of
arctic North America, giving rise to similar results.In the eastern, or European and Siberian, parts of the Arctic Sea, several
expeditions have explored the benthonic fauna of the shallower water and have
clearly demonstrated that the distribution of the species is dependent upon
the currents. In the arctic regions this is, on the whole, more evident in
benthonic than in pelagic life and, among the benthonic fauna, is more obvious
in species with short-lived and feebly vagile larval stages than in the more or
less actively moving pelagic fauna. Dealing in terms of centuries-old develop–
ment, we may say that routes followed in the distant past can less easily be
traced, the more actively mobile the species. The study of the more free-floating
benthonic species and their recent distributions has, however, not only demon–
strated the routes of immigration but also, in some cases, g thrown light on
their geographic origins and suggested an explanation as to why many of them
have not as yet been able to attain the circumpolar regions.
010a | Vol_III-0538
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
Owing to the greater intermixture of boreal of even more southerly species,
the subarctic coastal waters harbor a much richer fauna than do the high-arctic
regions. Thus the benthonic animal world of the Barents Sea is very rich in
species as compared with that of the Kara Sea, and it is on the whole obvious
that the numbers of species decrease toward the east in these waters, the more
boreal species gradually diminishing. The minimum is evidently attained at the
New Siberian Islands, or between these and Wrangel Island. Here, too, we encounter
the first influence of the Pacific in the amphipods, isopods, and shrimps (for
example, the Spirontocaris macilenta Spirontocaris macilenta ), which, because of a certain amount of
mobility, are able gradually to advance, independent of the weaker ocean currents.The characteristics of these Pacific-Arctic regions recall those of the
arctic waters affected by the Atlantic of Gulf Stream. At the northernmost parts
of Norway the current has almost lost its Atlantic character but, the temperatures
being somewhat higher than those of arctic water s , some boreal and boreal-arctic
species may still be found in the Barents Sea and even to the north of Spitsbergen
and Novaya Zemlya. However, on the northern side of the New Siberian Islands
the last remnants of the Atlantic current have been so cooled that, given their
greater salinity and resultant greater specific gravity, they sink into the polar
deep along the arctic Siberian slope. The edges of the Siberian shelf north of
the New Siberian Islands, or somewhere between them the Wrangel Island, are the
farthest limits of the benthonic zooplankton of Atlantic origin which are free-
floating or have a short - lived and passively vagile larval stage.Thus far we have, in our discussion of the possible origins of the benthonic
fauna of the Arctic, referred only to the abyssal regions. In the upper, inter–
mediate or archibenthal parts of the arctic deep-sea region, and the adjacent
deeper parts of the coastal waters occur a great series of species which are
011 | Vol_III-0539
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
sometimes both boreal-Atlantic and arctic. To these must also be added several
species of the deeper, cold area of the Norwegian Sea and adjacent waters of
the Arctic which are clearly related to species in the Atlantic deep sea.
Zoologists long ago demonstrated the existence of such so-called “pairs of
species,” the one existing in arctic waters or the “cold area” of the Norwegian
Sea, the other being found in the Atlantic to the south of the submarine ridge
which extends from Scotland to Greenland. In several cases the species are so
deceivingly similar that they are, by former taxonomists, identified as one and
the same. Such was the case with the sea feathers, Umbellula encrinus (of the
Arctic) and U. lindahli (Atlantic intermediate region); the lamellibranchiates,
Pecten frigidus (arctic deep sea) and P. fragilis (Atlantic deep sea); the
starfish, Bathybiaster vexillifer (Arctic) and B. robustus (Atlantic); and
several others. In some species, for example the starfish ( Pontaster tunisspinus
or the brittle star Ophiocten sericeum, the characteristically different individual
groups that have developed in the cold area and the Atlantic deep sea were hitherto
regarded as “varieties,” the morphological differences being deemed too small for
a taxonomic distinction of separate species. In the large deep-sea pycnogonid,
Colossendeis angusta , specimens from the “cold area” and from the Atlantic deep
sea differ in proportions so that, although it is almost impossible to ascribe
a locality to a single specimen, it is quite easy to do so when a number of
individuals from, the two areas are seen side by side. It is, however, still
frequently impossible to decide with certainty whether we have to deal with
separate species or merely with variants of species.Further extremely interesting examples of closely related species are:
the Sabinea hystrix (Atlantic), S. sarsi (Boreal), and S. septemcarinata (Arctic)
of the Atlantic prawns; and the Pourtalesia jeffreysi (Arctic) and the P. wandeli
012 | Vol_III-0540
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
(Atlantic) species of the deep-sea urchins of the genus which is so richly
represented in the deeper layers of the Atlantic Ocean. Confronted by such
evidence, most zoologists now agree that the Atlantic influence on the benthonic
fauna of adjacent arctic waters is predominant and indisputable.Data added during recent decades to earlier finds have been recorded in
charts for the study of the distribution of benthonic zooplankton in northern
waters. With the aid of these we have been able to trace much of the history of
the arctic bottom fauna without having recourse to reasoning from more or less
hypothetical geological changes. Presumably the features of the arctic seas were,
in the main, during the last geological periods as they are today. On the other
hand, ocean currents have oscillated to some degree in intensity if not in their
course, possibly on account of slight sinking or rising of the earth crust as,
for example, in the environs of Bering Strait.Several species of the Arctic are doubtless of Atlantic origin. Geographically
these species constitute a characteristic group, usually referred to as “Eastern
Arctic,” or, by Elkman, “Atlantic-Arctic” species. The distribution of the
sea star of the shallower depths, the Icasterias panopla, provides a characteristic
picture of this group (see Fig. 2). It would seem that this species (and accord–
ingly the monotypic genus) had its origin near the borders of the Atlantic drift,
since it flourishes most abundantly around Spitsbergen and in the Barents Sea,
less numerously in the Kara Sea, with its easternmost advanced guards about the
Taimyr Peninsula. On the other hand, the species was apparently able to traverse
the waters between Spitsbergen and Greenland whence it spread along the eastern
and western coasts of Greenland and northward to Baffin Bay. The gap in the
distribution along the southern coasts of Greenland was probably bridged during
a period when the temperature was lower than it is today.
013 | Vol_III-0541
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
A similar distribution has been shown in the hydroid species, Lafoëina
maxima , which has been able to penetrate eastward to the New Siberian Islands
but has not as yet been located in the waters of Novaya Zemlya (see Fig. 3).
The arctic shrimp, Sclerocrangon ferox , found at a slightly deeper layer, is
another example of such distribution (see Fig 4). In the Norwegian Sea this
species is also found at the southern border of the cold area, along the con–
tinental shelf. Apparently it is more eurybathic than the former ones above
mentioned, for it has also been found in the upper parts of the deep sea. The
continuous habitat of S. ferox seems to end the western side of Taimyr
Peninsula. However, a stray community found north of the New Siberian Islands
indicates a probable continuous occurrence in deeper layers along the slopes to
the very limit of the habitat of eastern arctic species.Occasionally met with in Atlantic-boreal waters are arctic species of
eurythermal characteristics. For example, the pycnogonid, Aeginina longicornis,
has been found as far south as Cape Cod on the American coast and in the Skagerrak
at the southernmost point of Norway. In the high-arctic it occurs as far east as
the Taimyr Peninsula.Early in the history of the explorations of Greenland waters, zoologists
discovered in the bottom fauna species having no occurrence at Spitsbergen or
in the Murman or Barents seas. Later, these same species were found to occur
occasionally in the sounds of the Arctic Archipelago as well as about Bering
Strait and in the northernmost parts of the Pacific Ocean. These elements
of the benthonic world of the Arctic are sometimes, therefore, referred to as
“Western Arctic” species and, by Ekman, “Northwest-Pacific-Arctic” species.If we compare these distribution data with charts of ocean currents, light
is thrown not only upon the causes of such distribution but upon the possible
014 | Vol_III-0542
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
origin of these species. The invasion of the polar seas was no doubt through
Bering Strait. At their weakly vagile stages they would not able to force
their way west through the Siberian shelf sea, only species with actively vagile
benthonic periods of development or adults capable of crawling along the ocean
bottom being able to advance in this direction. On the other hand, eastward
through the shelf waters of the Beaufort Sea and the Arctic Archipelago and
along to Greenland waters, advance is favored by the currents which block advance
from the other direction.Well-known western arctic species do exist; but the charts almost always
show a gap between Bering Strait and the Canadian Arctic Islands. This may
merely be on account of the incomplete investigation of the fauna of the Beaufort
Sea (the coldest part of the Arctic Sea) as well as on account of the narrowness
of the shelf sea along these coasts. Data from the sounds between the islands
of the Arctic Archipelago are almost equally scanty for the latter reason.However, if on the basis of present available data we analyze the distribu–
tion of a species such as the arctic shrimp, ( Nectocrangon lar , which shows an
extensive occurrence in boreal and northern Pacific waters bordering on the
Arctic and a rather common occurrence in Greenland waters and along the coasts
of Labrador and Newfoundland, it becomes likely that, upon closer investigation,
the species will be found to occur more or less sporadically all along the arctic
coast of North America (see Fig. 5). The same is true of the hydromedusa,
Catablema multicirrata , and the scyphomedusa, Aurellia limbata , both of which
are resticted to rather shallow waters by their polyp stages of development; of
the ascidian, Boltenia ovifera ; and of the shrimp, Spirontocaris groenlandica ,
which, like Nectocrangon lar, penetrates a little farther into boreal regions.
(See Figs. 6, 7, and 8.)
015 | Vol_III-0543
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
These examples, selected at random, differ inter se in that two
coelenterates, Catablem e a multicirrata and Aurellia limbata , have not been found
in East Greenland waters but only along the western coast. This can be corre–
lated to the fact that at their polyp stage of development they seem to be
restricted to shallow and sheltered localities, such localities being found in
the Arctic Archipelago and not along the slopes of the shelf sea or the exposed
coasts of northernmost Greenland. The more eurybathic species such as the ascidian
or the shrimps can, on the other hand, make their way along the northernmost coasts
and into East Greenland waters, but have apparently been unable to cross the polar
currents and so reach the shelf waters of Spitsbergen.That Greenland waters harbor both eastern and western arctic species becomes
evident from the accounts here given of the eastern and western arctic components
of the benthonic fauna of the shelf sea and adjacent upper layers — the inter–
mediate or archibenthal layers — of the deep sea. This rich fauna is further
enriche s d by a strong admixture of Atlantic-boreal elements and occasional rein–
forcements from the Atlantic deep sea. Along the western Greenland coast,
especially on the coastal banks, this richness of the fauna is notable, but
becomes poor in the straits and sounds west of Davis Strait and Baffin Bay, at
least, according to present data.We have found, then, that the eastern arctic species have little potentiality
of invading the circumpolar regions, this being possible only to benthonic species
having at most weakly vagile larval or polyp stages of development. In western
arctic species, however, invasion of the circumpolar regions would seem to be
possible. When the species is so eurybathic that it can live and propagate in
border layers of the cold area along the submarine ridge from Greenland to
Scotland, there is the possibility that the species can gradually invade high-arctic
016 | Vol_III-0544
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
regions through the mutability of the border layers.Several high-arctic species have doubtlessly developed from primarily
western arctic forms. It is of speculative interest to try to trace their
origin. Taking as an example the brittle star, Ophiura (Stegophiura) nodosa,
we find an abundance in the Bering Sea, and the scattered finds at Sakhalin
and Sitka seem to indicate that the species originated in Arctic-Pacific waters
(see Fig. 9).Comparing the distribution of Ophiura (Stegophiura) nodosa with that of the
lamellibranchiate, Portlandia (Yoldia) arctica , we find that Bering Strait
represents a barrier to the latter. According to the quaternary finds, this
strait has always prevented any expansion of habitat into Pacific waters on the
part of this species. Whereas O. (S.) nodosa and other species with similar
distribution have in all probability invaded the polar sea through Bering Strait,
P. (Y.) arctica evidently had its origins in the polar sea and, although it has
not been able to pass through Bering Strait, it has shifted its southern limit in
European waters according to fluctuating hydrographical conditions, requiring as
it does the isothern of - + 2.5°C. in bottom mud. The P. (Y.) arctica lived, it has
been shown, during the last glacial period along the southern coasts of Scandinavia,
whereas its southern limits at the present time are at Spitsbergen and at the
entrance to the Kara Sea, with an isolated community in the White Sea (see Fig. 10).The amphipod crustacean, ( Stegocephalopsis ampulla , furnishes another interest–
ing example of a typically circumpolar species of high-arctic origin. If we are
to judge by present data, the species is scarce in its occurrence and extremely
stenothermal in character (see Fig. 11). That it has never been found except at
temperatures at or below -0.1°C. leads us to conjecture that it may have a more
common occurrence along the slopes of the polar central basin in the deeper parts
017 | Vol_III-0545
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
of the shelf sea which are areas as yet comparatively unexplored. Invasion
from the Atlantic or Pacific in the past is improbable, its nearest related
species being an insufficiently described one found in the abyssal region of
the Indian Ocean which has been placed in the same genus, but with a query.Before concluding, it may mall be well to recapitulate what is meant by
the “arctic deep-sea region.” It comprises the central, or polar basin, and
the adjacent deeps of the Norwegian Sea, Baffin Bay, and the Sea of Okhotsk.
The shallower of shelf-sea region of the arctic seas may be said to be one con–
tinuous region, in spite of Bering Strait which almost cuts off from the central
polar sea the northernmost waters of the Pacific Ocean and the adjacent Sea of
Okhotsk.In the benthonic fauna of the shelf region, there are remarkable differences
between the northern Atlantic and northern Pacific waters, where the arctic-boreal
species play a great part in the composition of the animal world. The admixture
of typically Pacific elements is more apparent in the Okhotsk than in Bering Sea.
In fact, the Sea of Okhotsk is the most aberrant part of the arctic seas. But
quite apart from this, the shelf sea, even of the central arctic region, discloses
a far more varied fauna than does the deep sea, the reasons for which we have
already mentioned. Many of these differences may be only apparent, not real, and
will disappear with more extensive field work along the American coasts.However, a close study of circumpolar species and a comparison with boreal
species indicated that the “white spots” on the distribution charts may not be
solely the result of inadequate investigation. In many cases the conditions of
life in the high-arctic waters have reduced in recent times the members of species
both in Siberian and American waters, and hydrographical changes may have set up
barriers between the boreal-arctic species of the Pacific and Atlantic oceans.
018 | Vol_III-0546
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
We have reason to believe that temperatures of the shelf sea in earlier times
were higher than they are today. The supposition is strengthened by the occur–
rence of relict populations as, for example, the communities of the mussel,
Mytilus edulis, found at the entrance to the Kara Sea, widely separated from
the usual habitat of the species, which has its easternmost limit on the eastern
coast of Norway bordering the Barents Sea. This warmer, Postglacial period when
the Mytilus edulis occurred in the region of Spitsbergen dates back to 2500 to
4000 years ago.On the other hand, as stated above, the occurrence of such species as the
Portlandia (Yoldia) arctica in the White Sea would lead to the inference that
high-arctic conditions once prevailed in what are in present times boreal-arctic
regions.
019 | Vol_III-0547
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Appelőf, A. “Die Decapoden Crustaceen,” Bergens Mus. Meeresfauna
vol.2-3, 1906.2. ----. “Invertebrate bottom fauna of the Norwegian Sea and North
Atlantic,” Murray, John, and Hort, J. The Depths of
the Ocean . London, Macmillan, 1912.3. Berg, L.S. “Die bipolar Verbreitung der Organismen und die Eiszeit,”
Zoogeografica vol.1, 1933.4. ----. “Uber die amphiboreale (diskontinuierliche) Verbreitung der
Meeresfauna in der nőrdlichen Hemisphäre,”
Zoogeografica vol.2, 1934.5. Berthelsen, E. “Contributions to the animal ecology of the fjords of
Angmassalik and Kangerdlugssuaq in East Greenland,”
Medd. Grø n land vol.108, no.3,1937.6. Birulia, L. “Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Decapoden-Krebse der eurasiatischen
Arctis,” Akad.Nauk. Classe Phys. - Mat. M e é m. Zapiski
ser.8, vol.29, 1910.7. Borg, F. “Uber die geographische Verbreitung der innerhalb des
arktischen Gebietes gefundenen marinen Bryozoen,”
Archiv für Naturgesch . Vol.2, 1933.8. G B reitfuss, L. “Die biologischen Problems der Arktis,” Arktis
l. Jahrg., H.3/4, pp.97-112, 1928.9. Broch, Hjalmar. “Anthozoa, mainly from Pacific waters, collected by
U.S.S.R. expeditions 1930-1932,” Leningrad. Gosudarst–
vennyi Gidrol.Inst. Issled.Morei S S . SR vol.23, 1940.
(Russian and English.)10. ----. “Cirripedia thoracica von Norwegian und dem norwegischen Nordmeer,”
“Norsks Videnskaps-Akad. Mat.-Nat.Kl. Skrifter , 1924.11. ----. “Einige Probleme der giogeographischen Abgrenzung der artischen
Region,” Berlin. Univ.zool.Mus. Mitt . 1933.12. ----. “Grősse der Meerestiere und Temperatur ihres Lebensraumes,”
Naturwissenschaften vol.21, 1933.13. ----. “Noen dyregeografiske trekk i nordhavenes bunndyreverden,”
Norsk Geogr.Tid [ ?] skr . vol.6, 1937.14. ----. Oktokrallen des nőrdlichen Pazifischen Ozeans und ihre Beziehung
zur atlantischen Fauna,” Norske Videnskaps-Akad.
Mat.-Nat.Kl. Skrifter , 1935.
020 | Vol_III-0548
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna - Bibliography
15. ----. “Post-glacial interchange between Pacific and Atlantic deeper
living boreal fauna!” Norsk Geogr.Tidsskr . vol.12, 1949.16. Brotskaia, V.A. and Zenkevich, L.A. “Kolichestvennti Uchet donnoi
Fauny Berentsova Moria” (Quantitative evaluation of the
bottom fauna of the Barents Sea.) Vaesoiuznyi Nauch. Issled.
Inst.Rybnogo Khoz.Okeanogr., Moscow. Trudy vol.4, 1939.
(Russian with English r e é sum e é .)17. ----, and Zenkevich, L.A. “Materialy po kolichestvennomu nchetu donnoi
fauny Barentsova, Belogo i Karskogo morei. 6. Kolichestvennyi
uchet donnoi fauny Cheschoi guby.” (Materials for the quan–
titative evaluation of the bottom fauna of the Barents, White
and Kara Seas. 6. A quantitative evaluation of the bottom
fauna of the Cheshskaia Bay.), Gosudarstvennyi Okeanogr.
Inst.,Moscow. Trudy vol.2, no.2, pp.41-57, 1932. (Russian
with English summary.)18. Carlgren, Oskar. “Die Brutpflege der Actiniarien,” Biologisches
Zentralbl. Vol.21, 1928.19. ----. “Ceriantharier, Zoantharier och Actiniarier,” Medd.Grønland,
Suppl. Vol.23, no.24, 1928.20. Carpenter, W.B. “Preliminary report of dredging operations in the sea
to the north of the British Islands in H.M.S. ‘Lightening,’”
Roy.Soc.Lond. Proc . Vol.17, 1869.21. Dall, W.H. “On climatic conditions at H N ome, Alaska, during the Pliocene,”
Amer.J.Sci . vol.23, 1907.22. ----. “Summary of the marine shellbearing mollusks of the NWcoast of
America from San Diego to the Polar Sea.” U.S.Nat.Mus. Bull .
no.112, 1921.23. Deriugin, K.M. “Fauna belogo moria i usloviia ee sushchestvovaniia.”
(Fauna des weisen Meeres und ihre Existenzbedingungen.),
Leningrad. Gosudarstvennyi Gidrol.Inst. Issled.Morei SSSR
no. 7/8, 1928. (Russian with German r e é sum e é .)24. Gorbunov, G.P. “Fauna Crustacea-Decapoda Severnoi Poloviny Karskogo
Moria,” (The Decapod crustacea of the northern half of the
Kara Sea.), Leningrad. Arkticheskii Nauchn-Issled.Inst.
Trudy vol.9, pp.59-77, 1934.25. ----. “Materialy no faune Decapoda Zemli Frantsa-Iosifa.” (Material
on the Decapod fauna of Franz Joseph Land.), Ibid , vol.2,
pp.80-91, 1932. (Russian with German r e é sum e é .)26. Gurianova, Ev. “On the question of the composition and origin of the
fauna of the polar basin bassalia,” Akad.Nauk. Comptes Rendus
( Doklady ) vol.20, no.4, 1938. (In English.)
021 | Vol_III-0549
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna - Bibliography
27. ----. “Zoogeograficheskii ocherk fauny Isopoda arktiki.” (Zoogeographi–
cal study of the arctic Isopods .), Arctica no.2, pp.127-52,
1934. (Russian with English resum e é .)28. ----. “Zur Zoogeographie der Crustacea-Malacostraca des Arktischen
Gebietes,” Zoogragrafica vol.2, 1936.29. Hartmeyer, R. “Studien an westgrőnlőndischen Ascidien,” Medd.Grønland
vol.62, pp.1-37, 1923.30. Idelson, M.S. “Materialy po kolichestvennomu uchetu donnoi fauny
Barentsova, Belogo i Karskogo Morei,” (Materials for the
quantitative evaluation of the bottom fauna of the Barents,
White and Kara Seas. No.7. Distribu g t ion of the benthos
biomass in the southern Barents Sea. The influence of different
factors in the density of the sea bottom population.),
Gosudarstvennyi Okeanogr.Inst. G Trudy vol.3, 1934.
(Russian with English resum e é .)31. Jensen, Ad.S. “Two new West Greenland localities for deposits from the
Ice Age and the postglacial warm period,” Danske Vidensk.
Selsk. Biologiske Medd . Vol.17, 1942.32. Jungersen, H.F.E. “Alcyonaria, Antipatharia og Madreporaria,” Medd .
Grønland vol.23, no.13, 1915.33. ----. “Fra Ingolf-Expeditionen. Bemaerkninger om Dybhavsfaunaen og
dens Fordeling i de nordlige Have,” Geogr.Tidsskr . vol.14, 1898.34. Kramp, P.L. “Hydroids collected in West-Greenland Fjords in 1911 and
1912,” Medd.Grønland vol.91, no.3, 1932.35. Kűkenthal, W. “Die marine Tierwelt des arktischen und antarktischen
Gebietes in ihren gegenseitigen Beziehungen,” Berlin. Univ.
Inst.fűr Meeresk. Verőff . Vol.11, 1907.36. Molander, A.R. “Northern and arctic invertebrates in the collection of
the Swedish State Museum. VII. Alcyonacea, Svenska Vetenskapsa–
kad. Handl . n.s., ser.4, vol.51, 1915.37. Murray, John, and Hjort, J. The Depths of the Oceans . London, Macmillan,
1912.38. Nordgaard, O. “Bryozoa from the arctic regions,” Tromsø/ Mus. Aarsh.
vol.40, 1918.39. Popov, A.M. “Hydrobiological explorations in the Nordenskiőld Sea,”
Internationale Rev.der Gesamt.Hydrobiol.u.Hydrogr . vol.25,
1931.
022 | Vol_III-0550
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna - Bibliography
40. Retovskii, L.O. “Fauna Crustaces-Decapoda Sibirskikh Morei.”
(Crustacean-Decapod fauna of the Siberian arctic.), Leningrad.
Arkticheskii Nauchn-Issled.Inst. Trudy vol.33, pp.7-29, 1936.
(Russian with German resum e é .)41. Rylov, V.M. “Alcyonaceae, sofrannye ekspeditsiei plovuchego Morskogo
Nauchnogo Instituta v 1921 g.) (Alcyonaceae, gesamelt von
der Expedition des Schwimmenden Wissenschaftlichen Meeresinstitut
im Jahre 1921.), Morskoi Nauch.Inst., Moscow. Trudy vol.2,
pt.1, pp.61-78, 1926.42. ----. “Hydroidea-Athecata, sofrannye ekspeditsiei Instituta v 1921 g.”
(Hydroidea-Athecata, aus den Sammlungen der Expedition den
Institus im Jahre 1921.), Plovuchii Morsk.Nauch.Inst.,
Moscow. Trudy vol.9, 1924. (Russian with German resum e é .)43. ----. “Hydroidea in Alcyonaria, sofrannye v Barentsovom More Murmanskoi
Biologicheskoi Stansiei vo vremia reisov po kolskomu meridianu
v 1921 g.” (Hydroidea et Alcyonaria, collectionn e é s dans la mer
de Barenz par la Station Biologique du Mourman pendant les
cr o ô is e é es le long du m e é ridien de Kola en 1921.), Akad.Nauk.Zool.
Muz. Ezhegodnik vol.27, pt.2/3, pp.233-46, 1927. (Russian with
French resum e é .)44. Sars, G.O. Mollusca Regionis Arcticae Norvegiae. Christiania , 1878.
45. Schellenberg, A. “Die Gammariden Spitzbergen” Berlin.Univ.Zool.Muz.
Mitt . Vol.11, 1924.46. Shorygin, A.A. “Iglokzhie Barentsova Moria.” (Die Echinodermen des
Barentsmeeres.), Morskoi Nauch.Inst.Moscow. Trudy vol.3, no.4,
1928. (Russian with German resum e é .)4 6 7 ----. “Iglokzhie Belogo Moria.” (Die Echinodermen des Weissen Meeres.),
Morskoi Nauch.Inst., Moscow. Trudy vol.2, no.1, pp.3-59, 1926.
(Russian with German resum e é .)48. ----. “Iglokzhie, sofrannye ekspeditsiiami Plovuchego Morskogo Nauchnogo
Instituta v 1921, 1923 i 1924 godakh.” (Echinod ermata aus den
Sammlungen der Expeditionen des Wissenschaftlichen Meeresinstitus
im Jahre 1921, 1923 und 1924.), Plovuchii Morsk.Nauch.Inst.,
Moscow. Trudy vol8, 1925. (Russian with German resum e é .)49. Sivertsen, E. “Crustacea Decapoda, Euphausiacea and Mysidacea of the
Norwegian expeditions to East Greenland (1929-1932),” Norsk
Polarinstitutt. Skrifter no.66, 1935.50. Spärck. R “Contributions to the animal ecology of the Franz Joseph
Fjord and adjacent East Greenland waters. I-II,” Medd. Grønland
vol.100, no.1, 1933.
023 | Vol_III-0551
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna - Bibliography
51. Stephensen, K. “Grønlands Krebadyr og Pycnogonider,” Ibid . vol.22,
no.1, 1913.52. ----. “The Scoresby Sound Committees 2nd East Greenland Expedition to
King Christian IX’s Land. Crustacea and Pycnogonida,” Ibid .
vol.104, no.15, 1933.53. ----. “Zoogegraphical investigations in certain fjords in Southern
Greenland with specific reference to Crustacea, Pycnogonida
and Echinodermata,” Ibid . vol.53, no.3, 1916.54. Strelnikov, I.D. “La faune de la mer de Kara et ses conditions
ecologiques,” Acad.Sci. Comptes Rendus vol.188, 1929.55. Theel, Hj. “Northern and arctic invertebrates in the collection of the
Swedish State Museum. II. Priapulids, Echiurids, etc.,”
Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl . n.s., ser.4, vol.40, 1906.56. Thorson, Gunnar. “Contribution to the animal ecology of the Scoresby
Souhd Fjord Complex (East Greenland),” Medd.Grønland vol.100,
no.3, 1934.57. ----. “Investigations on shallow water animal communities in the
Franz Joseph Fjord (East Greenland) and adjacent waters,”
Ibid . vol.100, no.2, 1933.58. ----. “The larval development, growth, and metabolism of arctic marine
bottom invertebrates compared with those of other seas,” Ibid .
vol.100, no.6, 1936.59. Ushakov, P.V. “Materialy po gidroidam arkticheskikh morei SSSR.”
(Materials on the hydroids of the arctic seas of U.S.S.R.),
Leningrad, Arkticheskii Nauchn.-Issled.Inst. Trudy vol.50,
pp.5-34, 1937. (Russian with English resum e é .)60. Vibe, Christian. “Preliminary investigations on shallow water animal
communities in the Upernavik- and Thule-districts (Northwest
Greenland),” Medd.Grønland vol.124, no.2, 1939.61. Winkler, M.E, and Schmitt, W.L. “Notes on crustacea chiefly Natantia,
collected by Capt. R.A. Bartlett in arctic seas,” Wash.Acad.
Sci. J . vol.26, 1936.62. Zenkevich, L.A. “Materialen zur quantitative Untersuchung der Bodenfauna
des Barents und des Weissen Meeres,” Morskoi Nauch.Inst.,
Moscow. Trudy vol.2, no.4, pp.56-64, 1927. (German only.)
024 | Vol_III-0552
EA-Zoo. Broch: Benthonic Fauna - Bibliography
63. ----. “Nekotorye Momenty Zoogeografii Severnogo Polarnogo Basseina
v sviazi e voprosom o ego paleograficheskom proshlom.”
(Beiträge zur Zoogeographie des nőrdlichen Polarbassins im
Zusammenhang mit der Frage Über dessen palägeogfaphische
Vergangenheit.), Zoologicheskii Zhurnal vol.12, 1933.
(Russian with German resum e é .)64. ----, and Brotskaia, V.I. “Materialy po ekologii rukovodiashchikh form
bentosa Barentsova Moria.” (Some date on the ecology of
dominants in the bentos of the Barents-Sea.), Moscow, Univ.
Uchenye Zap.Wiss.Ber . vol.13, pp.203-26, 1937. (Russian with
English resum e é .)Hjalmar Broch
Plankton of Arctic and Subarctic Seas
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0553
EA-Zoology
(M . ax J. Dunbar)
PLANKTON OF ARCTIC AND SUBARCTIC SEAS
CONTENTS
Page Chordata 7 Enchinodermata 8 Chaetognatha 8 Mollusca 9 Crustacea 9 Annelida 13 Coelenterata 13 Protozoa 16 Distribution 16 Bibliography 21
001 | Vol_III-0554
EA- [ ?] Zoology
(M. J. Dunbar)
PLANKTON OF ARCTIC AND SUBARCTIC SEAS
The more productive part of the northern regions is the sea, not the
land. The economy of the Eskimo, even in districts rich with commercially
valuable fur, is based upon the life produced in the arctic and subarctic
waters.Production in the sea is not easy to measure. There are as yet few
estimates of the bulk or weight of living matter produced in unit volumes of
different types of sea water, and in all cases the possible error may well be
considerable. There has as yet been no estimate of production in arctic water,
the most northerly being that of Kreps and Verzhbinskaia (28) in the Barents
Sea. The summary of estimates of production published by Riley (32), however,
shows higher figures for the more northern parts of the Temperate Zone than
for the tropical regions. It has long been supposed on purely cursory evidence
that his was so, but we have not yet reached the stage where we can establish
it with certainty. In making the production estimates, much depends on the
proper evaluation of such factors as speed of population turnover (from brood
to brood), the depth of the euphotic zone (the light zone in which plant cells
can grow and divide), the speed of loss of plant cells by sinking from the
surface layers, and the variation in production, in any given area, throughout
the year.
002 | Vol_III-0555
EA- PB. Zoo. Dunbar. Plankton
The basic life in the sea, as on the land, is the plant production, the
bulk of which is planktonic (phytoplankton), the word “plankton” being an
inclusive term for all the forms of life, both plant and animal, which cannot
swim fast enough to be independent (insofar as locomotion is concerned) of the
ocean currents, and which are therefore carried with them. Thus the pelagic,
or free-swimming larval stages of benthonic animals make up an important part
of the marine plankton, the so-called “temporary” plankton, present in the
plankton only at specific stages of their life cycles and specific times of
year. Most of the zooplankton, however, consists of animals whose whole lives
are spent plantonically.Arctic water and the arctic climate have several characteristic favorable
to the growth of phytoplankton, compared to tropical or subtropical water. The
low temperatures allow high concentrations of dissolved gases, both carbon dioxide
for photosynthesis and oxygen for energy requirements; the long summer days allow
photosynthesis to continue for longer periods (during the summer season) than in
regions closer to the equator; and it is probable that the greater viscosity of
the cold water has an important effect on the flotation of the plant cells, so
that the period of their sojourn in the ouphotic zone is extended, when com–
pared with warmer regions, despite the fact that the euphotic zone in equatorial
regions is considerably deeper than toward the poles, for obvious reasons.Another characteristic of polar water which appears to encourage phyto–
plankton growth and division, following certain recent experimental studies,
is the quantity of melting ice normally present during the arctic summer. Water
resulting from the recent melting of ice is rich in the trihydrol molecule.
(H 2 O)3, a polymer of water. Such water has been shown to stimulate the growth
and multiplication of plant cells used experimentally ( Euglena , Spirogyra ,
003 | Vol_III-0556
EA-Zoo. Dunbar. Plankton
Nitzschia ) (1; 2; 3; 18).Brandt (6) suggested that the productivity of the colder water of the
ocean might in part be due to the reduction of the activity of the denitrifying
bacteria (which reduce salts containing nitrogen to free gaseous nitrogen) in
water of low temperature. This has not been supported by later work (19, p.113),
which has derogated the importance of these bacteria in the metabolism of the sea.It has been suggested that the great numbers of sea birds which breed in
the North provide a constant supply of nutrient salts, or fertilizers, during
the whole of the summer. This effect is circular, since the numbers of the
birds depen t d ultimately on the food supplied by the sea; but there is little
doubt that the fertilizing effect of sea birds is important. In regions par–
ticularly rich in colonies of birds (kittiwake, murre, dovekie, etc.), such as
the interior of Disko Bay in West Greenland, the phytoplankton production is
most remarkably high, so high as to be immediately apparent at sight, and so
that plankton nets used in those waters are soon clogged completely and become
useless. Moreover, the phytoplankton in such areas does not appear to show the
normal spring and autumn peaks of production, but to continue at maximum pro–
duction all summer long. These effects are apparent also in the water surround–
ing isolated bird colonies, in otherwise normal water areas.Against these characteristics, it is necessary to put two properties which
operate in the opposite direction. The shallower euphotic zone has already been
mentioned; it has the effect of conc d e nitrating the phytoplankton, and consequently
some of the zooplankton, [ ?] into a shallower vertical range than is found in
tropical waters, since the vertical range of possible plant growth is restricted.
Also, the low temperatures (an asset in the matter dissolved gases) have the
effect of reducing growth rates, so that the intervals between breeding periods
004 | Vol_III-0557
EA-Zoo. Dunbar. Plankton
In the plankton are longer than in warmer water; the population turnover must
be supposed to be slower, and the mortality rate per brood perhaps higher,
than elsewhere.The growth-rate effect has resulted, in those planktonic animals so far
studied, in the establishment of a type of breeding cycle which may be peculiar
to cold-water regions. In Sagitta elegans arctica , Themisto libellula , and two
species of Thysanoessa , an alternating, or two-phase, breeding cycle was found
in which two independent broods, separated in age by half a year or by one year
(according to species), exist side by side, neither being parental to the other.
During the breeding season, three separate size groups are present; the breeding
group, the newly developed young, and the intermediate adolescent group (12; 7;
13). Size frequencies of this sort, with the implied two-phase breeding cycle,
have also been recorded in Anonyx nugax from East Greenland (38), and in
Euphausia superba in the Antarctic waters (35). Such breeding cycles have the
effect of offsetting the check on population resulting from slow growth rates
in cold water. They have the interesting corollary that the two broods present
at any one time are genetically separate, and unless the system goes out of
phase in one way or another, the conditions are presumably favorable for the
development of differences between the broods which might in time lead to
speciation.If this analysis of the productivity of arctic water is correct, areas
in which arctic water mixes with more temperate water should be especially
productive, for in such regions the inhibiting factors of slow growth rates
should be removed. Such regions do in fact appear to be remarkably productive
of life; for it is precisely in the mixing areas that the great commercial
fishers are developed, as on the banks of Nova Scotia, Newfoundland, and
005 | Vol_III-0558
EA-Zoo. Dunbar. Plankton
West Greenland, off rhe coasts of Iceland and of Norway, and in the North Sea.
Estimates of plankton production in these regions are correspondingly high.Without as yet going into detailed definition, it is to the productivity
of the sea water that Madsen has recently directed attention for the finding
of a working criterion for the delimitation of the arctic and subarctic zones
in the sea (29, 30). In a study of the littoral fauna of the Arctic and Sub–
arctic, Madsen found that the barren intertidal zone of the high-Arctic began
and ended quite suddenly; that the littoral fauna, for instance, of South
Greenland, characterized by certain key species, disappeared suddenly at
Angmagasalik on the east coast and at Upernivik on the west coast. He showed
that a purely climatic criterion would not suffice to explain this pattern,
and suggested that the productivity of the water itself was the limiting factor
involved (see “Littoral Fauna of the Arctic ” ). It has been pointed out that this
criterion may well apply also to other parts of the marine fauna besides the
littoral, and that the essential factor in inducing the greater productivity
of the southern part of northern waters may be the admixture of nonarctic water;
thus a natural and practical criterion for the delimitation of arctic from
subarctic water becomes immediately available (10).The arctic marine plankton is remarkable for the size attained by the
individual members, when compared to those of temperate or tropical waters.
i I t is the general rule that poikilothermic inhabitants of cold water grow to
a remarkably large size; this applied both to individuals of species with wide
range from temperate to arctic (as the chaetognath Sagitta elegans ), and to
the northern or cold-water species which replace tropical or temperate forms
within any one genus (such as the copepod Calanus hyperboreus which to some
extent replaces Calanus finmarchicus in the high-Arctic). The factors responsible
006 | Vol_III-0559
EA-Zoo. Dunbar. Plankton
for this phenomenon have not yet been fully analyzed; one important factor is
the effect of temperature on development of the gonads. “Delayed sexual
maturity, which favors growth in size, appears to be directly dependent on
retardation of growth at lower temperatures, and this is a common character–
istic of northern marine creatures” (20).The size effect has been studied in some detail in the field by two
Scandinavian workers, Sømme and Jespersen. Working on the marine copepod
Crustacea of West of East Greenland waters, Jespersen has demonstrated the
presence of two quite separate size groups in adult Calanus finmarchicus of
both sexes (22; 23). The same effect has been recorded in Calanus hyperboreus
in the waters of West Greenland (23a), and in the Norwegian Sea (37). These
differences were ascribed to the presence of a mixed population with two
different histories, one group having developed in polar water, the other in
boreal water, the individuals of larger body size belonging to the colder water.
However, since the discovery that the populations of C. hyperboreus from north–
east Greenland, clearly from polar water, correspond to the smaller size group
of West Greenland (23), this theory must be left in abeyance. We have thus no
plausible explanation for the size difference in this species.The marine plankton of the North follows the general rule that species
are fewer in number in polar than in other areas, but are often represented
by greater numbers of individuals. The number of species in the [ ?] northern
plankton, nevertheless, is enormous, as would be expected in so varied an ecolo–
gical grouping. In the following account of the species, only the more abundant
forms are discussed and those less abundant forms which display some feature
of special interest. Only the zooplankton is considered.
007 | Vol_III-0560
EA-Zoo. Dunbar. Plankton
Chordata
Pure arctic water is not rich in fish; consequently, fish eggs and larvae
are seldom dominant or even abundant in the plankton. Most of the fish present
in arctic water lay demersal eggs, which do not in any event appear in the
plankton. In subarctic regions, however, with considerable proportions of
boreal water, the eggs of fish are very abundant as temporary plankton. Thus,
the eggs of the Atlantic cod ( Gadus callarias ) appear in March and April in
the subarctic waters of West Greenland, especially in the sheltered fjord
waters where the cod spend the winter. Larval fish of many species are found
in the plankton; even the fish which lay demersal eggs pass through a stage in
which the young are pelagic, and since their powers of swimming are limited,
these young fish are included in our definition of the plankton. In certain
localized coastal areas, close to the influx of fresh water, the young of the
Cottidae (sculpins) are sometimes present in the early summer in large numbers,
even on occasion to the exclusion of other planktonic forms. Thus several
hundred young specimens of the Greenland sculpin, Myoxocephalus scorpius
groenlandicus , up to 26 millimeters in length, were taken in a single haul
in Glasgow Inlet, Lake Harbour, in v southern Baffin Island (9). Other fishes
frequently caught in larval stages in the plankton are Gymnocanthus tricuspis
(sculpin); Agonus spp. And Aspidophoroides spp. (poachers and alligator fishes);
Eumicrotremus (lumpsucker); various liparian s ; Lumpenus (eel blenny); Stichaeus
(northern blenny). Many planktonic eggs and larvae of fishes found in both
arctic and boreal waters are described by Ehrenbaum (14).The Urochordata are represented in the arctic and subarctic plankton almost
entirely by the Larvacea; the Thaliacea and the larvae of the Ascidacea being
008 | Vol_III-0561
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
comparatively rare. The commonest of the Larvacea is Oikopleura , which is
the summer is often very abundant; the house, or test, being then frequently
seen at the surface. In the Labrador Sea and Newfoundland area, O. vanhőffeni
has been found to be characteristic of arctic water, and O. labradoriensis more
abundant in mixed arctic and Atlantic water (16). The genus Fritillaria is
also fairly common.Echinodermata
Larval stages of bottom-living animals tend to be somewhat, reduced in the
time dimension in cold water, for reasons still unknown. Consequently various
larvae of the echinoderms are collected in the plankton nets only during a very
short period in the spring.Chaetognatha
The arrowworms (or glass worms) are represented by several species, by far
the commonest of which is Sagitta elegans arcitca , separated from the typical
elegans form of the temperate regions by much larger size, a relatively shorter
tail segment, and differences in the numbers of oral hooks. S. elegans arctica
is a neritic form, and is found usually in the upper 50 to 100 meters; it is
very common, sometimes dominating the plankton hauls in fjord waters. It is
an exceedingly voracious creature, and will attack animals as large as itself;
its normal diet consists of copepods. Large specimens up to at least 50 millimeters
in length have been found, and individuals over 40 millimeters are common. Other
chaetognaths occur only in much smaller numbers. Next in abundance to S. elegans
is probably Eukrohnia hamata , a deepwater temperate form, found also in shallower
water in the Subarctic. In areas with much Atlantic or Pacific admixture, more
southerly forms are naturally found, and Atlantic species are of course common
009 | Vol_III-0562
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
in the Labrador Sea and in the warm layer underlying the arctic water of the
polar basin. Such temperate or cosmopolitan species as Sagitta hexaptera ,
S. serratodentata , and S. elegans elegans are included in this group.Mollusca
Trochophore and veliger larvae of bottom-living mollusks are common,
and they appear to be produced during the whole of spring and summer. In more
temperate regions, these larvae are found in plankton during the entire year.
The same may be true of arctic waters, but we have as yet almost no winter field
work to go on. Of the pelagic Mollusca, two species are very abundant in arctic
water, and are indeed so characteristic as to be used as indicators of arctic
water in mixing areas. These are Limacina helicina , the little black “sea
butterfly,” and Clione limacine , a larger, yellow-brown form. L. helicina is
often present in great numbers close to the surface in the late summer and
early fall, during which time it forms an important food of various fish, in–
cluding the Atlantic cod in West Greenland and in Ungava Bay; the ringed seal,
Phoca hispida, has also been found to be eating this little mollusk in
September (11). According to unpublished information from Dr. George MacGinitie,
from Point Barrow, Alaska, Clione has been much more abundant than Limacina in
that area in recent years.Crustacea
The decapods are not planktonic as adults, although prawns and shrimps are
sometimes caught in plankton nets towing near the bottom. The larval stages,
however, are very abundant in the plankton during the spring and early summer,
as they are in most parts of the coastal waters of the world.Euphausiids . The euphausiids (order Euphausiacea) are found in deeper
010 | Vol_III-0563
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
water than the bulk of the coastal plankton, and in the deep oceanic water
beyond the continental shelves. The important species ecologically are Thysanoessa
raschill , T. inermis , and Meganyctiphanes norvegica . All three are found in
boreal water as well as arctic water, in fact, they are more common in the
southern parts of their ranges. Meganyctiphanes is known from the Mediterranean.
The euphausiids form the bulk of the food of certain whales, including the blue
whale in the North Atlantic region, and are known to whalers a [ ?] “krill.” They
are also eaten quite extensively by the harp or saddleback seal ( Phoca groenlandica )
and by the ringed seal ( P. hispida ), especially in subarctic areas with boreal
waters present. In pure polar water, their place in the seal economy appears
to be taken by the hyperiid amphipod Themisto . The same seems to be true for
the food habits of many fishes, including various species of cod, the arctic
char ( Salvelinus alpines ), and the capelin ( Mellotus villosus ), which commonly
eat Thysanoessa in subarctic waters.Mysids . Mysids (order Mysidacea), on the continental shelf, keep close to
the bottom as a rule; but they are frequently caught in plankton nets and are
normally included in the planktonic fauna. In coastal waters the commonest
species is Mysis oculata , which occupies approximately the same ecological
position, at least in the food chain, as does Thysanoessa . It is not uncommon
to find Mysis oculata swarming in shallow water in the neighborhood of freshwater
influxes, close to the surface. It is an arctic circumpolar littoral species,
often taken in the stomachs of seals and fish. It is also found as an arctic
relict in the Baltic Sea. Mysis ( Mictheimysis ) mixta is much less abundant,
but fairly common, and is not as strictly arctic as oculata . In deeper water
(usually below 100 meters in the daytime), two species of Boreomysis , among the
largest mysids known, are common in northern waters: B. arctica being a subarctic
010a | Vol_III-0564
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
form, which is replaced by S B . nobilis as the boreal influence from the south
becomes weaker.Amphipods . The amphipods (order Amphipoda) are both plentiful and varied
in the arctic plankton, sometimes dominating the planktonic scene. One of the
most successful and widespread crustacean orders, they function as scavengers
in many animal communities. Although they there are many more littoral and benthonic
spcies than planktonic, they have nevertheless invaded the water layers with
typical success. In the planktonic habitat the suborder Hyperiidea are the
dominant amphiods, and have become more completely planktonic in habit than
either the Gammaridea (the largest amphipod group) or the more rare and aberrant
Caprellidea; they are less typically scavengers. The large, dark-purple Themisto
libellula is the commonest of these planktonic hyperiids, and perhaps one of
the most important forms in the whole of the Arctic, in any habitat, terrestrial
or aquatic. It appears to replace in many ways of the euphausiids in arctic water,
and is a key species between the smaller planktonic Crustacea (especially the
copepods) and the fish and sea mammals (13). In Canadian eastern arctic waters,
and probably over the whole Arctic, it is the most important single food item
of the ringed seal, and is also eaten in quantities by the arctic char. But
essentially an animal of polar water, it is much less abundant in the subarctic
mixed-water region. It is often found at the surface of the water in the
brightest of sunshine, which is rare among planktonic animals and which is
perhaps made possible by the dark pigmentation; in general it seems to have
a vertical optimum noticeably higher in the water than the rest of the zoo–
plankton. Its food consists largely of copepods and detritus. MacGinitie
( in litt. ) describes Themisto libellula as being washed up on the beach in
summer at Point Barrow in great abundance.
011 | Vol_III-0565
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
Other common hyperiids of the arctic and subarctic are Hyperia galba ,
H. medusarum , and Hyperoche medusarum . All three are normally found in
somewhat deeper water than Themisto libellula , and they are also of wider
distribution horizontally, being found in the North Atlantic and North Pacific
as well as in polar water.Of the gammarid amphipods, the commonest in the coastal waters of the
North are Pseudalibrotus littoralis and Gammarus locusta. G. locusta is
essentially a littoral animal, but it is frequently caught in plankton nets
in fjords and along the coast; it is widely distributed in arctic and northern
temperate regions. Pseudalibrotus littoralis , on the other hand, is almost
confined to arctic water, and in the subarctic belt is normally found only in
the neighborhood of freshwater influxes, close into shore. It has been found
to be the commonest food of the arctic char ( Salvelinus alpinus ) in Frobisher
Bay, Baffin Island, during the months of July and August (E. H. Grainger,
unpublished data). Two common pelagic arctic species are Pseudalibrotus
glacialis and P. nanseni , both restricted to arctic water.Anonyx nugax is another very common gammarid amphipod of arctic and
boreal seas, found most abundantly in inshore waters. So many gammarids are
normally found in northern seas that it is impracticable to mention them all
in this arcticle; among the more common genera are Acanthonotosoma , Westwoodilla ,
Calliopius , Apherusa , Pontogeneia , Pleustes , Gammaracanthus , and Ischyrocerus .The caprellid amphipods are represented in arctic and subarctic waters by
the common little “ghost shrimp,” Caprella septentrionalis , present both on
the seaweeds of the littoral and in the water above them.Cirripeds . The cirriped Crustacea (barnacles) are sessile forms, but the
larvae, both nauplius and cypris stages, are numerous in the epiplankton during
012 | Vol_III-0566
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
the early part of the spring-summer season. Balanus balanoides is the most
common species.Copepods . At most times of year, the copepod Crustaces (order Copepoda)
are dominant in the plankton. In subarctic waters, Calanus finmarchicus
is the most abundant form, replaced to a large degree in pure arctic water
by Calanus hyperboreus , a larger species which may grow up to one centimeter
in length. It is a remarkable fact that Calanus hyperboreus has not been
recorded from Hudson Bay (39); it is, however, scarcely credible that future
and more extensive plankton towing will not show it to be common there. In
deep water (generally below 50 meters in arctic water, much deeper in more
southern regions), Metridia longa often dominates. This species is definitely
arctic in its affinities, and has been found dead in large quantities near
the surface in warmer water (22). Other common copepods in northern regions
are Oithona similis (Pacific, Atlantic, and arctic water); Acartia clause
(Atlantic , and Pacific, and recorded from James Bay and southern Labrador,
but not from East or West Greenland - a most remarkable distribution);
A. longiremus (circumpolar arctic and subarctic); Pleuromamma robusta
(Atlantic boreal,) as far north as Davis Strait); Undinella oblonga (arctic,
less common, carried by undercurrents into the Atlantic); Pareuchaeta glacialis
(arctic predominantly); P. norvegica (Atlantic boreal, mainly in subarctic
waters in our range); Gaidius tenuispinus and G. brevispinus Pacific, Atlantic,
and arctic); Microcalanus pygamaeus (arctic form, spreading down also in
Atlantic and pacific boreal waters, usually in deep water); Pseudocalanus
minutes [ ?] (Pacific and Atlantic). The last-named species, which now
includes the form known formerly as P. elongatus , is very abundant, a small
species, and sometimes dominant in the plankton.
013 | Vol_III-0567
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
The copepods are of vital importance in the biology of the sea. They
are the chief link in the food net between the phytoplankton and the larger
animal plankton and nekton. To a large extent they feed on diatoms, and
they are themselves the food of many pelagic fish as well as of the right
whales. At times they are so abundant at the surface as to color the whole
area pink or reddish, such swarms consisting usually of Calanus .Ostracods . The Ostracoda do not form any significant proportion of the
northern plankton. They are sometimes fairly common at the surface, but as
a rule are deepwater forms. The commonest species is Conchoecia superb .Branchiopods . Of the Branchi o poda, the great majority of which are
freshwater animals, the only group represented in the marine plankton is the
suborder Cladocera, and even in that group there are few marine species. They
appear occasionally in considerable numbers in the surface layers during the
months of July and August.Annelida
Some of the annelid worms are occasionally caught pelagically as adults,
but in the northern regions there are no annelids whose normal adult habitat
is the free water.Coelenterata
The a A nthomedusae and Leptomedusae, both of which groups have well-developed
hydroid stages, appear in the plankton only during the spring and summer
months, usually between May and September in the Arctic and Subarctic. The
Trachymedusae, Narcomedusae, and Scyphomedusae, in which the pol y p stage is
much reduced or suppressed, are found during most of the y year, as also are
the Siphonophora and the Ctenophora. It is possible, however, that these
014 | Vol_III-0568
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
nonhydroid groups pass at least part of the winter in resting stages, for in
the experience of the writer they are very scarce during the months of Decem–
ber to March in West Greenland. There has been almost no work done hitherto
on the winter distribution and condition of the arctic plankton.Anthomedusae . Many of the Anthomedusae are extremely abundant in spring
and early summer. Sarsia tubulosa (a species recently revised and rationalized
by Kramp (25) is circumpolar boreal and arctic in distribution; the larger
Sarsia princeps is an arctic water species. Hybocodon prolifer is an Atlantic
species which was found in West Greenland waters by Dr. Paul Hansen in the
1930’s (24). It seems likely that it is a recent immigrant into that area,
following the warming of the West Greenland current during the past thirty
years. The species was also found in large numbers at Lake Harbour, southern
Baffin Island, during July and August 1939 and 1940 (8), so that the intrusion
of Atlantic water into Hudson Strait must be supposed to extend at least as
far as that station. Three North Atlantic species of Euphysa are also
recorded from West Greenland, and the present records from that region con–
tain many other Atlantic immigrants. Bougainvillia superciliaris is a common
arctic and boreal form (both Atlantic and Pacific); B. principis is an
Atlantic form recently found farther north. Rathkea octopunctata and
Leukartiara brevicornis are both Atlantic and Pacific species recorded from
West Greenland and from northern Alaskan waters. Catablema vesicarium ,
C. multicirrata , Halitholus pauper , and H. cirratus are all arctic-boreal
forms, and all of them, except the Pacific Catablema multicirrata , are
circumpolar.Leptomedusae . The Leptomedusae are less well represented in the North.
Ptychogena lactea is an arctic water, circumpolar form. There are several
015 | Vol_III-0569
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
recent arrivals in West Greenland, including Halopsis ocellata , also first
recorded by Kramp (26), and discussed by Jensen (2) in his account of
[ ?] climatic changes in West Greenland.Trachymedusae . Only one of the Trachymedusae can be said to be common,
namely Aglantha digitale , which is arctic and boreal, found in both the
Atlantic and the Pacific. Several distinct races and variants of this
species have been described from various parts of its wide range. There
are a few boreal Trachymedusae which are occasionally found in arctic water and
two arctic bathypelagic species, Ptychogastria polaris and Botrynema ellinorae ,
are also occasionally found in deep Atlantic water.Narcomedusae. Aeginopsis laurenti is an arctic species, circumpolar in
range. Aeginura grimaldii Aeginura grimaldii is a cosmopolitan deepwater form.Scyphomedusae . Scyphomedusae are rare in pure arctic water, but in
subarctic areas they are quite common; all of them are fairly widely distri–
buted in temperate regions. Species found in subarctic water include Cyanea
capillata (Atlantic and Pacific), Aurelia limbata (Pacific species),
Halimocyathus lagena and Lucernaria quadricornis (both boreal Atlantic species),
and a few cosmopolitan forms such as Periphylla hyacinthina and Atolla wyvillei ,
both bathypelagic forms (24).Siphonophora . There is only one species [ ?] of siphonophoran at all common
in the North, Diphyes ( Dimophyes ) arctica , an almost cosmopolitan species
found at considerable depths in temperate and tropical regions, and at all
depths in the Arctic. In strongly subarctic regions such as West Greenland,
a variety of boreal species are found as immigrants (27).Ctenophore. Mertensia ovum is typical of arctic water, and v a e ry common,
Beroë cucumis is a bipolar species . , found in the Arctic and the Antractic,
016 | Vol_III-0570
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
and in the deep Atlantic water in between. Bolinopsis infundibulum is an
arctic-boreal species, circumpolar in distribution, but much less abundant
than the other two species.Protozoa
The protozoa of the arctic and subarctic seas are not at all well
known. For a general review of the planktonic protozoa of the temperate
North Atlantic, the reader is referred to Volume 7 of the periodical Nordisches
Plankton , published in Germany between 1901 and 1913, in which a few species
reported from West Greenland are described. Hardy (17) describes eight
species of the family Tintinnidae (Ciliata) taken by the Nautilus expedition
in 1931, and speaks of them as “a prominent feature of the collection.” They
included five species of Cytharocyclis , Ptychocyclis drygalski (the most
abundant form), Amphorella norvegica , and Tintinnus accuminatum .No attempt has been made here to supply complete lists of the known
arctic and subarctic planktonic species. Such a list would be long and tedious,
and would serve no useful purpose. Emphasis has been laid on the dominant forms.Distribution
The plankton can be divided into ( 1 ) true arctic species, and ( 2 ) boreal
or cosmopolitan species whose distribution extends into arctic or subarctic
waters. In the second group, the commoner species are found in both Atlantic
and Pacific; thus the great majority of the species mentioned above are
circumpolar in distribution, and any apparent patchiness in the distribution
of a species is likely to be due to lack of field work. The littoral waters,
over the continental shelf and in fjord regions, are always richer in plankton
than the oceanic regions, due to the greater availability of nutrient materials
017 | Vol_III-0571
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
brought to the surface by vertical interchange of water during the winter.The fact that certain common planktonic species are normally confined
to arctic water has been used to develop a “plankton indicator” technique
for northern regions similar to that developed in other regions. Thus
Frost (15) has shown that six species of the dinoflagellate genus Ceratium
can be used to indicate the presence, in the Newfoundland area, of water of
various types from arctic to Gulf Stream. C. arcticum and C. longipes are
the two cold-water indicators. Similarly Russell (33) gives Diphyes arctica ,
Sagitta maxima , Eukrohnia hamata , Calanus hyperboreus , Metridia longa , and
Limacina helicina as indicators of cold water (mainly but not entirely arctic)
entering the North Sea from the north through the Fair Isle Channel. Themisto
libellula , Pseudalibrotus nanseni , and P. glacialis are useful as arctic water
indicators in most parts of the North.Distribution is a dynamic, not a static, phenomenon. Nowhere is this
more clearly shown than in the marine plankton, whose distribution is dependent
upon the major water movements and which, therefore, respond immediately to
any changes in the hydrography of a given area. This is particularly well
demonstrated in the waters west of Greenland, where the recent warming of the
water has greatly altered the planktonic fauna; attention is drawn especially
to this fact in the consideration of the West Greenland coelenterates, above.
It is to be regretted that there is no information on the marine plankton of
the Canadian Eastern Arctic before 1939. It is apparent from the plankton
found in Hudson Strait and also in Ungava Bay (unpublished data) that there
is a considerable invasion of Atlantic species in those parts, but it is not
possible, due to the lack of past information, to gauge any changes which
may have [ ?] taken place.
018 | Vol_III-0572
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
The plankton of the polar sea itself has been studied very little.
Nansen’s expedition of 1893-96 made plankton hauls which yielded a rather
poor plankton, although containing many of the typical species. This was
in the region north [ ?] of the Siberian coast and westward to the meridian of
Spitsbergen. Wilkins’ Nautilus submarine expedition in 1931 made plankton
hauls in the upper 100 meters with a No. 25 net (and one haul up from 250 meters
with a No. 10 net) at five stations north of Spitsbergen, along the edge of
the ice between latitude 81° and 82° N. (17). Here again a typical arctic
plankton was found. Russian zoologists have more recently made a study of the
marine plankton north of Siberia, over the shelf, and, in 1937, the Papanin
expedition obtained plankton almost at the North Pole itself, hauling the nets
through the ice (36).Nansen came to the conclusion that the polar sea was an arctic desert,
containing little or no life (31). This was not confirmed by the Russian
expedition. Hauling their plankton nets from depths as great as 3,000 meters,
they obtained during July and August a considerable variety of plankton,
though not in any remarkable bulk compared to arctic water outside the ice
cover, or to subarctic water. All the commoner copepods were obtained, and
the layer of Atlantic water, underlying the polar water from 250 to 750 meters
in depth, contained typical Atlantic species such as Calanus finmarchicus ,
Microcalanus pygmaeus , Pareuchaeta norvegica , and Oithona similis .Such a zooplankton must depend on a considerable growth of phytoplankton.
Here again, the Russians upset Nansen’s conclusion. It had been though that
the ice cover of the polar sea, which is three meters thick on the average,
with its light snow layer overlying it, would reduce the light which penetrated
to the water so much that plant life could not exist there, and that the
019 | Vol_III-0573
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
phytoplankton growth in the polar sea must be restricted to the open leads in
the ice which open and close from time to time. The Papanin expeditions, how–
ever, found that, although the phytoplankton growth in July was very poor,
there was a considerable flowering in August, by which time the snow cover
had melted and pools of meltwater covered the ice-field surface. The euphotic
zone varied in depth, according to the condition of the ice, from three to
twenty meters. The presence of considerable quantities of phytoplankton
beneath the ice in summer is also recorded at Point Barrow by MacGinitie
( in litt . ), who writes: “Apparently there is some correlation between the
abundance of diatoms and the angle with which the rays of the sun strike the
ice.”It is interesting that there appears to be only one phytoplankton peak
during the season in the polar basin, occurring in August, and not two separate
peaks in spring and fall, such as are found in temperate waters and also in
subarctic and arctic waters where the ice cover is not permanent all year round.
Such a “monocyclic” condition was also found by Bogorov (4) along the northern
sea route from the Kara Sea to the Chukotsk Sea, accounted for by the very
short period during which light could penetrate into the water.A well-known characteristic of plankton, both marine and freshwater, is
the diurnal vertical migration performed by the majority of the planktonic
fauna, approaching the surface at night and sinking to lower layers during
the day. It has long been known that light intensity is the dominant factor
in controlling this migration; it was suggested many years ago, first by
Walther in 1893, that the presence of the sun above the horizon at midnight
would inhibit this upward migration of the plankton. Being surprised to find
evidence of diurnal migration in the medusa at Spitsbergen, he attempted to
020 | Vol_III-0574
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
to explain it by the hypothesis that they were subarctic forms which had
been carried to Spitsbergen in the Atlantic drift, and that the migration
was due to the persistence of such a physiological rhythm that the habit
of diurnal migration was continued even under conditions of arctic summer
nights.Russell (34) pointed out that this argument was unconvincing, since
even at that latitude (80° N.) the calculated solar radiation which pene–
trated the surface of the water at midnight in June was only 0.590 gram calorie
per square centimeter per minute, compared to 1.223 gram calories per square
centimeter per minute at noon, which he considered a large enough difference
to account for normal diurnal vertical migration. Bogorov (5) has since pub–
lished his findings in the Barents Sea, in which he finds no evidence of
vertical migra a tion during the height of summer; a little farther south,
however, in the southern part of the White Sea, the normal vertical movement
is apparent, and in September and October the vertical migration has returned
to the plankton in the Barents Sea. Furthermore, he points out that according
to the work of Zubov (41), tidal phenomena in the open sea cause considerable
vertical movement of water particles in the upper layers, so that the mainte–
nance by plankton of a constant level throughout the 24-hour day must entail
considerable swimming activity up and down. This is clearly a most interesting
problem in the biology of arctic plankton, and one which is probably still far
from elucidation.
021 | Vol_III-0575
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Barnes, T. C. “The physiological effect of trihydrol in water,” Nat.Acad.
Sci., Wash., Proc . vol.18, pp.136-37, 1932.2. ---, and Jahn, T.L. “The effect of ice and steam water on Euglena, ”
Ibid . vol.19, pp.638-40, 1933.3. ----, and ----. “Properties of water of biological interest,” Quart .
Rev.Biol . vol.9, no.3, pp.292-341, 1934.4. Bogorov, B.G. “Biological seasons of the Arctic Sea,” Akad.Nauk.
Comptes Rendus (Doklady) vol.19, no.8, pp.641-44, 1928.5. ----. “Peculiarities of diurnal vertical migrations of zooplankton in
polar seas,” J.Mar.Res. vol.6, no.1, pp.25-32, 1946.6. Brandt, K. “Ueber den Stoffwechsel im Meere,” Wissenschaftliche Meeres–
untersuch. Abt.Kiel , n.s., vol.6, 1899.7. Dunbar, M.J. “The breeding cycle in Sagitta elegans arctica Aurivillius,”
Canad.J.Res . Ser.D, vol.19, no.9, pp.258-66, 1941.8. ----. “Marine macroplankton from the Canadian Eastern Arctic. II.
Medusae, Siphonophora, Ctenophora, Pteropoda, and
Chaetognatha,” Canad.J.Res . Ser.D, vol.20, pp.71-77, 1942.9. ----. “Marine young fish from the Canadian Eastern Arctic,” Canada.
Fisheries Res.Brd. Bull . no.73, 1947.10. ----. “Note on the delimitation of the arctic and subarctic zones,”
Canad.Field Nat . vol.61, no.1, pp.12-14, 1947.11. ----. “On the food of seals in the Canadian Eastern Arctic,” Canad.J .
Res . Ser.D. vol.19, pp.150-55, 1941.12. ----. “On the size distribution and breeding cycles of four marine
planktonic animals from the arctic,” J.Animal Ecol . vol.9,
no.2, pp.215-26, 1940.13. ----. “On Themisto libellula in Baffin Island coastal waters,” Canada.
Fisheries Res.Brd. J . vol.6, no.6, pp.419-34, 1946.14. Ehrenbaum, E. “Eier und Larven von Fischen,” Nordisches Plankt . Vol.1,
1905, 1909.15. Frost, N. “The genus Ceratium and its use as an indicator of hydrographic
conditions in Newfoundland waters,” Newfoundland. Nat.Res.
Dept. Res. Bull . no.5, 1938.
022 | Vol_III-0576
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
Bibliography
16. ----, Lindsay, S.T., and Thomposon, H. “Plankton section,” Newfoundland.
Nat.Res.Dept., Fish.Res.Div. Ann.Rep . vol.2, no.1, pp.58-67,
1933.17. Hardy, A.C. “The arctic plankton collected by the Nautilus expedition,
1931. Part I - General account,” Linnean Soc. J . ( Bot .)
vol.39, pp.391-403, 1936.18. Harvey, H.W. “On the rate of diatom growth,” Marine Biol.Ass.U.K. J .
vol.19, pp.253-75, 1933.19. ----. Recent Advances in the Chemistry and Biology of Sea Water.
Cambridge, Engl., Cambridge University Press, 1945.20. Hesse, R., Allee, W.C., and Schmidt, K.P. Ecological Animal Geography .
N.Y., Wiley, 1937.21. Jensen, A.S. “Concerning a change of climate during recent decades in the
arctic and subarctic regions,” Danske Vidensk.Selsk.
Biologiske Medd. Vol.14, no.8, pp.1-75, 1939.22. Jespersen, P. “Godthaab expedition. Copepods,” Medd.Gronland vol.79,
no.10, 1934.23. ----. “Investigations on the Copepod fauna in east Greenland waters,”
Ibid . vol.119, no.9, 1939.23a. ----. “On the size of Calanus hyperboreus Krøyer in west Greenland
waters.” Internationale Rev. der Gesamt. Hydrobiol .
u. Hydrogr. vol.34, pp.102-07, 1937.24. Kramp, P.L. “Medusae, Godthaab Expedition,” Ibid . vol.81, no.1, 1942.
25. ----. “Medusae. Part 2. Anthomedusae,” Danish Ingolf Exped. vol.5,
no.10, 1926.26. ----. “A revision of the medusae belonging to the family Mitrocomidae,”
Dansk Naturhist.Foren. Copenhagen, Vidensk.Medd . vol.92,
pp.305-84, 1932.27. ----. “Siphonophora, Godthaab, Expedition, “ Medd.Grønland vol.80, no.8,
1942.28. Kreps, E., and Verzhbinskaia, N. “Seasonal changes in the phosphate and
nitrate content and in hydrogen ion concentration in the
Barents Sea,” Conseil Perm.Internat.Explor.Mer, J . vol.5,
pp.326-46, 1930.29. Madsen, H. “Investigations on the shore fauna of east Greenland with a
survey of the shores of other arctic regions,” Medd.Grønland
vol.100, no.8, 1936.
023 | Vol_III-0577
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Plankton
Bibliography
30. ----. “A study of the littoral fauna of northwest Greenland,” Ibid .
[ ?] vol.124, no.3, 1940.31. Nansen, Fridtjof. The Oceanography of the North Polar Basin . London,
Longmans, 1902. Norwegian North Polar Expedition 1893-96.
Sci.Res . vol.3, no.9.32. Riley, G.A. “Plankton studies. IIII. Long Island Sound,” Yale Univ.
Peabody Mus.Nat.Hist. Bingham Oceanogr.Fndtn. Bull .
vol.7, no.3, 1941.33. Russell, F.S. “Hydrographical and biological conditions in the North
Sea as indicated by plankton organisms,” Conseil Perm.
Internat.Explor.Mer, J . vol.14, pp.171-92, 1939.34. ----. “The vertical distribution of plankton in the sea,” Biol.Rev .
vol.2, pp.213-62, 1927.35. Ruud J.T. “On the biology of the southern Euphausiidae,” Hvalrådets Skr .
no.2, 1932.36. Shirshov, P.P. “Oceanological observations,” Akad.Nauk. Comptes Rendus
( Doklady ) vol.19, no.8, pp.569-80, 1938.37. Sømme, J.D. “Lengievariationer hos Calanus hyperboreus ,” 18de
Skand.Naturforskermøde , Copenhagen, pp.527-28, 1929.38. Stephensen, K. “Crustacea Malacostraca, 5. Amphipoda (1),” Danish
Ingolf Expedition vol.3, no.8, 1923.39. Willey, A. “Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson Bay.
4. Hudson Bay copepod plankton,” Contr.Canad.Biol. & Fisb .
n.s., vol.6, no.25, pp.483-92, 1931.40. Wilson, C.B. “The copepods of the plankton gathered during the last cruise
of the ‘Carnegie’,” [ ?] Carnegie Inst.Wash. Publ . no.536,
1942.41. Zubov, N.N. “Gidrologicheskie raboty Morskogo Nauchnogo Instituta v
Iugo-Zapadnoi chasti Barentsova Moria letom 1928 g. na
E/S ‘Persei,’” (Hydrological investigations in the south–
western part of the Barents Sea during the summer 1928.),
Gosudarstvennyi Okeanogr.Inst. Trudy vol.2, no.4, 1932.Max M . J. Dunbar
Arctic and Subarctic Inverterbrates of Economic Importance
001 | Vol_III-0578
EA-Zoology
(M. J. Dunbar)
ARCTIC AND SUBARCTIC INVERTERBRATES OF ECONOMIC IMPORTANCE
Introduction
Ultimately, all animals in the North may be considered to be of
economic importance, however distantly, since each species plays its part
in the total ecology, of which animals of immediate economic importance
to man form only a comparatively small fraction. But that is not the
significance intended in the title of this article. It is the intention
here to discuss briefly invertebrates in the Arctic and Subarctic which are
either of direct economic value to man, or which play a dominant role in the
biology of animals which are of direct value to man, whether these latter
animals are invertebrate or vertebrate.In the former group are included certain invertebrates which, although
not at present used economically by Eskimos or others, offer possibilities
of such use in the light of recent knowledge In the latter group, those
of indirect importance to man’s economy in the North, only those of clearly
dominant position are included. Parasites, although obviously important as
disease-producers, are not included; nor are biting flies, although they have
a damaging effect upon human activities in the northern summer, as the recent
Canadian work on their control testifies.
002 | Vol_III-0579
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of [ ?] Economic [ ?] Importance
Invertebrates of Direct Economic Value
The deepwater prawn, Pandalus borealis , is by far the most important
animal in this category. Commercial fishing for Pandalus began in Norway,
in 1898, following the exploratory work of Johann Hjort and C. G. J.
Petersen. The fishery continued at a low level until 1920, when it began
to grow rapidly up to over 3,000 tons taken in 1935 (7). On a smaller scale,
prawn fishing was started also in Sweden in 1902, and by Denmark in 1930.
The total weight of prawns landed by all three countries in 1935 was a little
under 5,000 tons. Most of the prawning grounds in Scandinavian waters are
at depths between 60 and 250 meters, but the prawns are found down to much
greater depths.Experimental fishing for Pandalus borealis in Greenland began in 1934,
in fjords of the Holsteinsborg district on the west coast, and in 1935 a
small cannery was established and was already producing canned prawns.
The production increased to about 70 metric tons by 1939, but was brought
to a temporary stop by wartime conditions. The cannery opened up again after
the war, and exploratory trawling brought to light new trawling grounds in
the Godthaab District, the Julianehaab District, and in Disko Bay. The
latter grounds are perhaps the largest of any known prawn beds. New
canneries have been built at Narssak, in the Julianehaab District, and at
Egedesminde, at the mouth of Disko Bay (4; 5; 6).The Greenland prawn grounds lie deeper than in Norway, for the most
pa d r t. Most trawling is done at about 400 meters, the deepest trawling bottom
so far found being apparently south of Ata Sound, in Disko Bay, at a depth of
445 metres. As a Norway, the prawns congregate on bottoms of a particular
kind, a firm mud with plenty of detritus; and for good trawling con x d itions the
bottom must of course be free of rocks. The best type of trawling bottom
003 | Vol_III-0580
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of Economic Importance
will produce a characteristic track on the echo-sounder paper (7), a multiple
tra d c e c d ue to echoes from different layers of mud or sandy mud.The life history of Pandalus borealis is of special interest. Like
several decap e o d crustaceans, it is a protandric hermaphrodite; each individual,
after a planktonic larval life, goes through a stage of a functional male,
followed by metamorphosis into a functional female stage, in which stage it
remains for the rest of its life. The following account of the Greenland
deepwater prawn is taken (in translation) from Hansen (5):“…..It is evident that the Greenland prawn, in its life history,
agrees with the deep-water prawn that is found at Spitsbergen, and upon
which the Norwegians have undertaken research work. The eggs which the
female prawn carries on her swimmerets are laid in July and hatch in the summer,
and the young larvae are found in the upper layers of the water. It takes
two years for the larvae to become mature males. They remain as males for
two years, after which time they change sex and become females; they stay
females for the rest of their lifetime. The females are thus older and there–
fore larger than the males. We do not yet know exactly how long they remain as
females, but it is at least two years, so that the prawns live at least six
years altogether. Trawling in Disko Bay has shown that the females lie
farther out from the coast than the males. Trawling near the coast produces
predominantly males and immature young, while trawling some sea-miles from the
land yields femal e s in much larger numbers.”Pandalus borealis has recently been discovered in large numbers in the
waters of Newfoundland, the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and the Labrador, in depths
over 100 fathoms, the limits of the explored range being Anticosti Island,
southwest Newfoundland, along the northern edge of the Grand Banks, and extending
004 | Vol_III-0581
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of Economic Importance
(possibly not continuously) up to Nachvak in northern Labrador. It is
possible that they go still farther north on this coast, perhaps into
Ungava Bay; but exploration in the Ungava Bay region has so far not reached
the depths at which Pandalus borealis may be expected, and moreover the
bottom has been found to be very unsuitable for trawling, at least in depths
[ ?] down to a hundred fathoms. Furthermore, the temperatures at
these depths in Ungava Bay are below zero Centigrade, probably during the
whole of the summer season, which is somewhat lower than the temperature
range at which Pandalus has been found on the Labrador coast, or in Greenland
waters.The general known distribution of Pandalus borealis , at present, is as
follows: Pacific and Atlantic oceans; in the Atlantic, from the waters of
Denmark and the Dogger Bank northward to Spitsbergen, where it is found as
far north as Hinlopen Strait and the north of Northeast Land; eastward to
the Barents Sea and in the Kara Sea to 78° 30' E.; Iceland, southeast Greenland,
and up the west Greenland coast to 75° 30' N; from Cape Cod to Nachvak,
Labrador. In the Pacific, it is known from the waters off Japan, in the Sea
of Okhotsk, and from the waters round the Aleutian Islands, along the south
coast of Alaska southward to the mouth of the Columbia River, latitude 46° N.
(7). It has been recorded from Bering Strait, but it is not common in the northern part of the Bering sea, and the known in purely
Bering Strait record (Maud expedition) seems to work the extreme limit of range in arctic water. It is thus a subarctic-boreal form.
that region. It is not known in purely arctic water. It is thus a subarctic-boreal form.Prawns of other species than Pandalus borealis have been found in
promising numbers in the northern part of the Bering Sea, by a trawling
survey in 1949, sent out by the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. The survey
was partly in response to numerous reports from local residents that there
existed in the northern Bering Sea species of animals, from cod to shrimps
005 | Vol_III-0582
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of Economic Importance
which might have a commercial value. Five species of shrimps or prawns
(the vernacular terms are interchangeable) were caught “mainly in the
waters around St. Lawrence Island and the approaches to Norton Sound.
Considering the large mesh of the trawl used (3″mesh in the bag, 6″ in the wings
and square), the numbers of gray shrimp ( Argis lar ) taken may be considered
sufficient to justify further investigation with g r ear more suitable for
shrimp fishing.” ( 3). The shrimps were caught in depths down to 40 fathoms,
mainly in water of temperatures between 0° and 4°C. Besides Argis lar , the
following four species were taken: Pandalus gonirus , P. hypsinotus , Spiron–
tocaris groenlandica , and Sclerocrangon boreas .The same Bering Sea survey in 1949 [ ?] studied the occurrence of king
crabs ( Paralithodes — not to be confused with the totally different Atlantic
“king crab,” Limulus, which is an arachnid, not a crustacean). King crabs
are at present fished commercially in the southern part of the Bering Sea.
In the northern part, “King crabs were widely scattered and of a much
smaller size than those found to the south. Both the Alaskan and purple
species were taken, and although no great quantities were found, it is
possible that a more thorough survey might reveal areas of concentration.
The shoal conditions in the northern area make it difficult to predict crab
movements there on the basis of knowledge gained in the southern regions of
deeper waters.” (3). The two species found were Paralithodes camtschatica
and P. platypus . They were taken in shallow water only, in depths down to
30 fathoms, and most of them were found at temperatures between 0° and 4° C.
Only 100 specimens were taken in the 51 drags made.The deepwater prawn is the only invertebrate at present exploited
commercially in northern waters, and it is not itself a truly arctic form.
006 | Vol_III-0583
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of Economic Importance
The prawns and king crabs taken in the northern Bering Sea may offer
possibilities of future use; they too are not arctic water forms, and
are not found in water of negative temperature. Arctic water itself,
then, by which is meant water originating in the Polar Sea and not mixed
with temperate waters, has so far not produced any commercial fishing for
invertebrates. Nor in fact does it offer many fishes in sufficient numbers
for such exploitation. The only invertebrate that is used to any extent
as food by the Eskimos, namely the blue mussel, Mytilus edulis , is also a
subarctic-boreal animal, not found in pure polar water.Mytilu m s edulis is circumpolar in distribution, from the northern limits
of the marine Subarctic southward in the Atlantic and Pacific to San Fran–
cisco on the American Pacific coast, North Carolina on the Atlantic side,
and the coast of Portugal in western Europe. In the north, it is one of the “indicator” littoral species by which a good estimate of
the limits of influence of nonarctic water can be made (2; 8; 9; see also
“Littoral Fauna” in this Encyclopedia). It shows a gradient of abundance,
decreasing northward. It is known as far north as Thule in West Greenland,
and it is found along the Labrador coast and in Ungava Bay. It is not common
in Ungava Bay, except at Port Burwell, where there is a bed exposed at spring
tides which is made use of by the native population. Wherever it occurs it
occurs in any numbers, it is eaten by the Eskimos as a pleasant change
in diet, and a very healt h y one. Sometimes whole meals of blue mussels are
eaten, especially in areas of abundance in West Greenland.Other invertebrates are of much less importance to the Eskimos. Shrimps,
whelks ( Littorina — also a subarctic and boreal form) and the ovaries of
the sea urchin ( Strongylocentrotus ) are occasionally eaten when casually
picked up, or when starvation threatens, but they are of very minor signify–
cance. In subarctic areas, similar to those in which Mytilus is found in
007 | Vol_III-0584
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of Economic Importance
the North, Littorina is very abundant in summer, and although small in size
could be eaten in greater quantities than is the fact at present.In periods of great threat of starvation, when in fact di s aster threatens,
invertebrates have figure s d in the diet of several expeditions. The best
example of this was the Greely expedition to Ellesmere Island, one of the
first International Polar Year parties, in 1882-83. During the last stages
of exhaustion, when the relief ship had failed to appear, Greely’s diary
records that “shrimp” were caught in a net, at the surface of the water,
and carefully rationed among the survivors. The cook was caught stealing
these “shrimps,” and on repeating the offence after due warning, was shot;
a good instance of the vital importance, on one occasion, of invertebrates
in the Arctic. These animals were taken in pure arctic water, close to the
surface, and it is probable that they were in fact Themisto libellula , an
amphipod crustacean of great abundance in arctic water, and one of the very
few forms found at the surface in large numbers. It is also possible that
the animals concerned were Gammarus locusta .Invertebrates of Dominant but Indirect Economic Importance.
This section will be covered only very briefly. In arctic and subarctic
environments, particularly marine environments, there are invertebrate forms
so dominant in the animal populations that they form almost exclusive diets
for larger animals, at least during certain seasons. The following list
includes only those animals that fall into this category, very often forming
monospecific populations locally, sometimes over wide areas, and thus figuring
as the direct support of animals of economic value to man: The amphipod
crustacean Themisto libellula , Anonyx nugax , Pseudalibrotus littoralis ,
008 | Vol_III-0585
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of Economic Importance
Gammarus locusta , and (in fresh water) Pontoporeia affinis ; the euphausiids
Thysanoessa raschii and T. inermis , and Meganyctiphanes norvegica ; the mysids
Mysis oculata and (in fresh water) Mysis relicta ; several copepods, more
especially Calanus hyperboreus , C. finmarchicus and Metridia longa ; and the
mollusk Limacina helicina .All these are “key industry” or dominant species in their respective
ecological territories. Themisto libellula is an upper - water form, deeply
pigmented and apparently able to tolerate the direct rays of the sun at the
surface. It is the most important of all food organisms of the ringed seal,
Phoca hispida (1). Seal stomachs are often found to be entirely filled with
nothing else but Themisto . It has also been found frequently in the stomachs
of the harp seal, Phoca groenlandica , and of the arctic char, Salvelinus
alpinus , and it is important in the food of sea birds in the Arctic. As a
link between the smaller planktonic crustaceans and the larger predators it
is perhaps the most important animal in the North, in any environment. Like
all the other animals in the present list, it is circumpolar in distribution.Anonyx nugax , another abundant form in both the plankton and the
littoral fauna, is found in deeper water than Themisto , except in the littoral
zone, where Themisto does not occur. It is eaten in large numbers by inshore
fishes and also plays an important part in the marine diet of the arctic char.Even more numerous than Anonyx is Pseudalibrotus littoralis , which is
present in enormous numbers in shallow water all over the northern seas.
Skulls and other skeletal specimens which the present writer has lowered to
the bottom for cleaning purposes in Ungava Bay, have been hauled back on board
ship completely filled with this amphipod. It has been found to be by far the
common food of the arctic char in Frobisher Bay (Grainger, unpublished
data: see “Arctic C h ar”).
009 | Vol_III-0586
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of Economic Importance
Gammarus locusta , the ubiquitous littoral amphipod, is abundant on
arctic and subarctic shores, and figures in the normal diet of all inshore
fishes. It is eaten in great numbers by the Atlantic cod ( Gadus callarias )
in West Greenland and in Ungava Bay (Port Burwell), and is also eaten by
the arctic char.Pontoporeia affinis is perhaps the most common amphipod in freshwater
environments in the northern regions, and as such is of great importance as
the main food of ma h n y freshwater fishes of considerable economic importance,
such as the whitefishes and lake herrings.The three euphausiids, Meganyctiphanes and two species of Thysanoessa ,
collectively known by the vernacular Norwegian name of krill , are pelagic
forms found in large numbers over a wide depth range. They are not usually
found very close to the surface, and thus do not complete with Themisto for
dominance. They have been found in the stomachs of sea birds (eider duck,
old squaw, kittiwake, murre, etc.), and form one of the chief foods of the
capelin ( Mallotus villosus ), and of the harp seal in certain parts of the
North. They are perhaps best known of all as the food of the blue whale
( Balaenoptera musculus ), and to a lesser extent of the other rorquals
(finback, Balaenoptera physalus ; sei whale, B. borealis , etc.).Mysis oculata is frequently met with in large schools or swarms in
shallow water, often where fresh water flows into the sea. It keeps as
a rule fairly close to the bottom. It is locally important in the food of
the Atlantic cod, the capelin, and the ringed, harp. And harbor seals.
The freshwater relict form of Mysis oculata is M. relicta , very common
in many lakes.The copepod plankton form the chief link between the phytoplankton and
the larger zooplankton, and also form the food of larger animals of great
010 | Vol_III-0587
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of Economic Importance
economic worth, such as the right whales ( Balaena spp.) and the herring
( Clupea harengus ). The dominant forms in the North are Calanus finmarchicus
and C. hyperboreus , together with a few other genera such as Metridia ,
Oithona , and others. (See “Marine Plankton”)The little “sea butterly,” Limacina helicina , appears in vast numbers
in the surface waters of the Arctic in August and September. In northern
Labrador and at Port Burwell, Ungava Bay, it figures prominently in the
food of the Atlantic cod. On the Labrador, in fact, the fishermen speak of
“capelin cod” in the southern half of the coast, where capelin form the
bulk of the cod diet, and “blackberry cod” in the northern part of the coast,
“blackberry” being another vernacular name for Limacina. Limacina has also
been taken in numbers from the stomachs of ringed seal at Clyde River, Baffin
Island, in September, at a time of year when there is very little else in the
plankton for the seal to feed upon, at least in the surface layers of the
[ ?] fjord waters (1). At one time it was thought that
the occasional bad taste of seal meat, and the poisonous qualities of polar
bear liver, were referable to the habit of the seal in eating Limacina ; but
the dangers of eating polar bear liver are now known to be due to factors for
which it seems quite unreasonable to blame this apparently harmless little
mollusk. The codfish in Labrador and Ungava Bay waters, which eat Limacina ,
are perfectly wholesome food.
011 | Vol_III-0588
EA-Zoo. Dunbar; Invertebrates of Economic Importance
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Dunbar, M.J. “On the food of seals in the Canadian eastern arctic.”
Can.J.Research , D, vol.19, pp.150-55, 1941.2. ----. “Note on the delimitation of the arctic and subarctic zones.”
Can.Field-Nat ., vol.61 (1), pp.12-14, 1947.3. Ellison, J.G., Powell, D. E. and Hildebrand, H. H. “Exploratory
fishing expedition to the northern Bering Sea in Juna and
July, 1949.” U.S.Dept. Interior; Fish & Wildlife Service,
Fishery Leaflet No. 369; 56 pp., mimeographed, 1950.4. Greenland Administration. “Sammendrag af Statistiske Oplysninger
om Grønland, IV, 20 Afsnit: Henkogningsstationen ved
Holsteinsborg.” Beretn.vedr.Gronl.Styrelse , no.1, pp.709-16,
1945.5. Hansen, P. M. “Fiskeriundersøgelserne ved Grønland.” Grønlandposten ,
vol.8, (8), pp.98-102, 1949.6. ----. “Dybhavsrejen ved Grønland.” Grønlandposten, vol.8 (3), pp.26-30,
1949.7. Hjort, J., and Rund, J. T. “Deep-sea prawn fisheries and their problems.”
Hvalradets Skrifter , no.17, pp.1-144, 1938.8. Madsen, H. “Investigations on the shore fauna of east Greenland with
a survey of the shores of other arctic regions.” Medd.Grøn .
vol.100 (8), pp.1-79, 1936.9. ----. “A study of the littoral fauna of northwest Greenland.”
Medd.Grøn . vol.124 (3), pp.1-24, 1940.10. Rasmussen, B. “Om Dypvannsreken ved Spitsbergen.” Rep. Norwegian
Fish. & Mar. Investigations , vol.7 (4),M. J. Dunbar
Marine Fishes of the North American Arctic
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0589
EA-Zoology (Henry Hildebrand)
MARINE FISHES OF THE NORTH AMERICAN ARCTIC
CONTENTS
Page Hydrographic Conditions 2 Ichthyofauna 4 Summary 16 Bibliography 17
001 | Vol_III-0590
EA-Zoology
(Henry Hildebrand)
MARINE FISHES OF THE NORTH AMERICAN ARCTIC
Our knowledge of the fish fauna of the American Arctic is very limited,
and there is need for much additional work before a clear picture of the
fauna can be drawn. Even today there are no commercial fisheries in the area
except in West Greenland. Early explorers were primarily interested in find–
ing a short route to the riches of Cathay, searching for precious minerals,
or attempting to reach the North Pole; any zoological exploration was merely
incidental and was not prosecuted vigorously.An immense area is covered by this article — all of the Arctic Sea
between the longitudes of Cape Farewell, Greenland, and Bering Strait, and
all the marine waters north of the coast line of continental North America
including James Bay, which reaches south to approximately 51° N. latitude.Demark has consistently held the lead in arctic scientific exploration.
In fisheries, the brig Tjalfe was outfitted by the Danish Government for in–
vestigations in Greenland during the years 1908-09; Adolph S. Jensen was the
leader of this expedition. Among other important fisheries investigations
in Greenlandic waters was that of the Dana in 1925. Canada has long been aware
of the vast Hudson Bay, which extend s so deeply southward into her territory.
Several expeditions have been sent here, the latest and best equipped being
the Loubyrne fisheries expedition in 1930.
002 | Vol_III-0591
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
A new interest has been manifested in this region in recent years, in
part due to changing hydrographic conditions which have revitalized the
fishing industry of Greenland, in part to unsettled world conditions. A
decline in land and sea mammals coupled with increasing native populations
have incited a greater interest in the ichthyofauna of the seas as a means
of bettering living conditions. The Canadian Government has had an expedi–
tion in Ungava Bay for the past four summers (1947-50) for this purpose.
Several new ships have been built for arctic marine research: the Adolph S .
Jensen by the Danes, the Calanus by the Canadians; and the Ernest Holt by the
British.The literature concerning arctic fishes is not great and is widely
diffused in numerous small articles and in narratives of travel and explora–
tion. A list of impotant references is given at the end of this article.
The writer wishes to acknowledge his indebtedness to the curators of the
following fish collections: National Museum of Canada, Royal Ontario Museum
of Zoology, Chicago Museum of Natural History, United States National Museum,
and the McGill University collections, for permission to examine specimens
from the Arctic.Hydrographic Conditions
A brief r e é sum e é of hydrographic conditions will help to explain the
distribution of fishes. However, it must be admitted that much hydrographic
investigation remains to be done, whole areas being relatively unexplored.Pacific Influence . The status is not clearly defined, but the term refers
003 | Vol_III-0592
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
to the warming effect of Pacific water entering through Bering Strait and
progressing eastward at least to the Mackenzie.Mackenzie District . This term is used to define the area where large
rivers flow into the Arctic Sea; it extends eastward to Back River.Arctic Archipelago ( Including Boothia Peninsula ). This area is char–
acterized for the most part by poor circulation, heavy and continued icing
for most of the year, and a very limited fauna.Hudson Bay and Strait . This region is characterized by low temperature
and salinity, and well-stratified water layers with little vertical movement.Baffin Bay and the East Coast of Baffin Island . This area is charac–
terized by the cold Arctic Current from Lancaster Sound.West Greenland . This is the area south of the submarine ridge across
the narrowest part of Davis Strait between Greenland and Baffin Island, which
is warmed by the West Greenland Current and has a bottom temperature of at
least 3°C.Transition Areas . There is some mixture of Atlantic water north of the
submarine ridge, which permits some forms to migrate farther north, especially
during the summer months. There is a modified influence of Atlantic water
around Port Burwell in Ungava Bay, with a change of fauna. Extreme south–
western Greenland is cooled by the East Greenland Current and is relatively
arctic in affinities.It must be remembered that distribution of organisms is not a static
but a dynamic phenomenon. Jensen, in 1939, showed how a slight warming of
the West Greenland Current had so changed the fish fauna in Davis Strait as
to alter the economy of the Greenlanders during the two preceding decades.
004 | Vol_III-0593
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
Ichthyofauna
A brief review of the ichthyofauna of the American Arctic will be given,
including each individual species known to occur in the region. However, it
must be stated that many arctic forms are in a state of chaos taxonomically,
because of lack of specimens and the marked inadequacy of original descript–
tions. Classification as used herein was taken from Jordan, Evermann, and
Clark, Checklist of the Fishes and Fishlike Vertebrates of North and Middle
America (1930), except where recent publications indicate a change. The
writer has also referred to a number of monographs on individual groups by
Ad. S. Jensen for names of forms occurring in Greenland.Myxine glutinosa (hagfish): not uncommon in the deep water of Davis
Strait warmed by the West Greenland Current.Petromyzon marinus (sea lamprey): rare, specimens known from South
Greenland.Squalus acanthias (common dogfish, spiny dogfish): formerly rare and
irregular in occurrence; Jensen states that this species has become more
common along the west coast of Greenland due to a recent amelioration of
climate.Centroscyllium fabricii (black dogfish): a deep-water form occurring
in the “warm” water south of the submarine ridge in Davis Strait.Somniosus microcephalus (Greenland shark): common along the west coast
of Greenland from Cape Farewell to Wolstenholme Sound. Other definite locali–
ties are Port Burwell and the Koksoak River estuary in Ungava Bay. Sight
records are known from Wakeham Bay, Hudson Strait, Southampton Island, and
several localities along the east coast of Hudson Bay, south to Great Whale
River.
005 | Vol_III-0594
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
This ground shark is a great carrion eater and will probably eventually
be found to parallel the distribution of the larger sea mammals in the Arctic.
It is an important economic fish to the Greenlanders; oil was first extracted
from the livers in 1805, and during the twentieth century the skins have
been added as an article of commerce. Nearly 35,000 sharks are taken yearly
by the Greenlanders, who regularly fish for this large, sluggish animal from
kayaks and also on fast ice. It offers little resistance when hooked.Although numerous specimens of this shark have been taken, its mode of
reproduction is unknown. The consensus is that it bears its young a b live,
but this has yet to be proved.The meat of the shark when dried is used as dog food, and if necessity
decress, human food. Fresh shark meat makes dogs violently ill, producing
what is known as “shark intoxication.” Death may ensue from eating the
fresh meat.Raja radiata : not uncommon along the west coast of Greenland north to
approximately 69° N. latitude. One specimen from Richmond Gulf, Hudson Bay,
is known.Raja fyllae : not uncommon in deep water south of the submarine ridge in
Davis Strait.Raja hyperborea : inhabits the deep cold water north of the submarine
ridge and has also been reported from extreme southwestern Greenland.Raja lintea : common in the deep “warm” water of Davis Strait.
Raja spinicauda : distribution same as preceding species, but not as common.
Acipenser fulvescens (sturgeon): primarily fresh water, occurs in the
brackish river mouths of James Bay.
006 | Vol_III-0595
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
Clupea harengus (common herring): formerly not common in West Greenland,
although fluctuations in numbers undoubtedly occurred. In recent years,
herring have increased in numbers and have almost become of economic impor–
tance. In 1934, two large herring were taken at Prőven, Greenland, in lati–
tude 72°30' N.Clupea pallasii (California herring): migrates sporadically into the
Arctic from the Pacific, reported as far east as Bathurst Inlet. Anderson
(1913) records a large school which appeared at Cape Bathurst in August 1911.Oncorhynchus gorbuscha (humpbacked slamon): straying along the north
coast of Alaska at least to the Mackenzie River.Oncorhynchus kets (dog salmon): straying through Bering Strait at least
to the Mackenzie. In 1914, a large run of salmon up the Mackenzie River was
reported.Salmo salar (Atlantic salmon): common only in the rivers of southern
and eastern Ungava Bay; uncommon in Greenland, reported only from Godthaab
Fjord, Amerdloq Fjord near Holsteinsborg, and Ikerasak, Sukkertoppen District.This is the only fish in the Canadian Arctic ever to have supported a
sustained commercial fishery. It was shipped direct to London markets from
Ungava Bay for a number of years, starting in 1881 and continuing until the
failure of the fishery in 1932. The number caught was not large, but varied
between 150 to 300 tierces a year.Salvelinus fontinalis (brook trout): primarily a freshwater form, but
has been reported from brackish and salt water in southern Ungava Bay, James
Bay, and Hudson Bay, at least as far north as the limit of trees.Salvelinus alpinus (arctic char, arctic salmon, or salmon trout):
007 | Vol_III-0596
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
anadromous and abundant throughout the Arctic; taxonomic status confused,
but all species described or reported from this region are included under
alpinus pending clarification of its taxonomic status. The fish is known
by a number of common names; in fact, it varies so much according to age or
ecological habitat that many explorers and travelers have though they were
dealing with separate species.This is the ekaluk of the Eskimo and the most important food fish through–
out much of the Arctic. Nowhere has it been developed commercially except
in Greenland, where a few hundred barrels a year are exported to Denmark.Stenodus leucichthys (inconnu): anadromous and common in the Mackenzie
River and tributaries; its eastern limit has been cited as Anderson River,
and to the west it extends along the arctic coast of Alaska.Leucichthys autumnalis : primarily a freshwater form, occurs along the
arctic coast of Alaska to the Mackenzie.Leucichthys sardinella : range similar to preceding species.
Leucichthys artedi (cisco): occurs in brackish water from Ungava Bay to
the Mackenzie; distribution along the arctic coast of Canada poorly known. In
Hudson Bay ciscoes are known to migrate to salt water during the summer.Coregonus clupeaformis (common whitefish): primarily in fresh water, occurs
sparingly to commonly in the brackish water of Ungava, James, and Hudson bays
and probably the estuaries of the larger rivers along the arctic coast to the
Mackenzie. In Hudson Bay, whitefish are known to migrate to salt water during
the summer.Prosopium cylindraceum (round whitefish): distribution similar to preceding
species, but makes a very unsatisfactory growth in the northern part of its Hudson
Bay range.
008 | Vol_III-0597
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
Mallotus villosus (capelin): possibly, when specimens are available,
two species will be found to occur in the Arctic. Capelin are common along
the west coast of Greenland and reach latitude 76°30' N. in migration.
Records are known from Ungava Bay, James Bay, Foxe Basin, Bellot Strait,
Coronation Gulf, Bathurst Inlet, and Point Barrow. Occurrences are often
sporadic. In parts of Greenland this form is caught and dried and is known
as the “daily bread” of the Greenlanders.Osmerus dentex (smelt): rare at the mouth of the Mackenzie River and
along the Alaskan coast.Nansenia groenlandica : rare in the deep water of Davis Strait.
Bathylagus benedicti : deep water of Davis Strait south of the submarine
ridge.Stomias boa : deep “warm” water of Davis Strait, straying to Jacobshavn.
Cyclothone microdon : deep water of Davis Strait, straying into Baffin Bay.
Argyropelecus olfersi : rare in the deep water of Davis Strait.
Notacanthus chemnitzi : rare in the deep water of Davis Strait.
Notacanthus rostratus : rare in the deep water of Davis Strait.
Anguilla bostoniensis (= A. rostrata ) (American eel): six specimens known
from southwest Greenland in the neighborhood of Nanortalik.Synaphobranchus pinnatus (long-nosed eel): not uncommon in the deep “warm”
water of Davis Strait.Histiobranchus infernalis : deep water of Davis Strait.
Saccopharynx ampullaceus : very rare, one specimen known from the entrance
of Davis Strait.Paralepis conregonoides borealis : known from the west coast of Greenland
from Cape Farewell to Umanak Fjord in latitude 72° N. This form does not breed
009 | Vol_III-0598
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
in the area, and is probably carried into the region by the current. It is
usually taken dead on the surface, or from fish or seal stomachs.Paralepis risso kroyeri : range similar to preceding species, but very
rare; known from Greenland by only five specimens; also recorded from Port
Burwell, Ungava Bay.Lampanyctus crocodilus (lantern fish): bathypelagic, common south of
the submarine ridge in Davis Strait; also reported from Port Burwell.Lampanyctus elongates (lantern fish): rare and of doubtful occurrence;
reported from Godhavn, Greenland.Myctophum arcticum (lantern fish): bathypelagic; known from Davis Strait.
Myctophum glacialis (lanter n fish): bathypelagic; common south of the
submarine ridge in Davis Strait. This lanter n fish has also been recorded from
Baffin Bay and Port Burwell, Ungava Bay.Alepisarus ferox (lancet fish): deep water of Davis Strait and also
reported from Jacobshavn, Greenland.Coryphaenoides rupestris (grenadier): common in the deep water of Davis
Strait and also in the fjords of West Greenland.Macrourus aequalis (grenadier): rare in Greenlandic waters.
Macrourus berglax (rattail grenadier): a very common macrourid in the
deep water of Davis Strait.Macrourus goodei : rare in our region; known from two specimens taken near
the entrance of Davis Strait.Trachyrhynchus murrayi : known from a single specimen from the west coast
of Greenland.Gaidropsa r us ensis : deep water and rare; reported from Umanak, Greenland.
010 | Vol_III-0599
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
Gaidropsarus septentrionalis : rare in the deep water of Davis Strait.
Ciliate argentata : This species has been taken in the deep water on
both sides of the submarine ridge in Davis Strait.Boreogadus saida (arctic Pollack, polar cod): a common fish throughout
the Arctic. This is a pelagic salt-water form, which is often found among the
ice floes. When pursued by the white whale, this fish has been known to
leap upon the ice floes in its endeavor to escape.Recent studies indicate that there may be several species occurring
in the American Arctic. Arctogadus pearyi and B. agilis have been reported
from Greenlandic waters, but their status is very uncertain due to the lack
of comparative specimens.Pollachius virens (coalfish): formerly rare in West Greenland waters;
however, with the recent amelioration of climate, large shoals have been
seen in the south Frederikshaab district.Eleginus navaga (tomcod): This form has been reported from the Mackenzie
Delta, Bering Sea, Point Barrow, Simpson Strait, and Coronation Gulf. In–
formation on this species is very scanty.Cadus callarias (common Atlantic cod): This fish has known periodic
cycles of abundance in West Greenland, which are apparently associated with
climatic changes. Jensen (1939) outlines how a recent climatic change has
so increased the number of cod as to alter the entire economy of the Green–
landers. Specimens have been taken as far north as Upernivik in Greenland.
The fish regularly spawns in Greenland waters. Cod occur at Port Burwell,
Ungava Bay, during the months of August and September.Gadus ogac (Greenland cod): This is a northern species of cod; it
011 | Vol_III-0600
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
prefers rocky grounds and coastal salt water. It has been reported from many
points in West Greenland, also Ungava Bay, Hudson Bay, Adelaide Peninsula,
Victoria Island, and Kent Peninsula. Apparently it has not been recognized in
Alaskan waters.Melanogrammus aeglefinus (haddock): very rare; apparently recorded for
the first time in 1929 in West Greenland.Molva molva : very rare; reported from the Frederikshaab District of
Greenland.Brosmius brosme (cusk): a rare form in the area warmed by the West Green–
land Current.Trachypterus arcticus (deal fish): straying into the region warmed by
[ ?] the West Greenland Current.Lampris guttatus : a rare fish in Greenlandic waters.
Reinhardtius hippoglossoides (Greenland halibut, arctic halibut): a common
and economically important fish along the west coast of Greenland to Umanak in
the north. This fish does not spawn in the bays and fjords where the adults
occur, but out in Davis Strait over deep water. Small specimens have been
taken at Port Burwell.Hippoglossus hippoglossus (Atlantic halibut): common along the west coast
of Greenland; has been fished as far north as Umanak, and a few strays have
been taken at Upernivik.Hippoglossoides platessoides (sand dab): occurs along the west coast of
Greenland to Umanak in the north.Platichthys stellatus (California flounder): This species has been re–
ported from Langton Bay, Kittigazuit, Coronation Gulf, and Queen Maud Gulf in
the Northwest Territories.
012 | Vol_III-0601
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
Liopsetta glacialis (arctic flounder): This species is reported from
Bathurst Inlet, Bernard Harbour, and Queen Maud Gulf in the Northwest Ter–
ritories. The arctic flounder, like the preceding species, has no economic
importance in the Arctic.Glyptocephalus cynoglossus (witch flounder): reported from Davis Strait
south of the submarine ridge.Gasterosteus aculeatus (three-spined stickleback): common in small brackish
water streams throughout the Arctic, except the extreme north.Pungitius pungitius (nine-spined stickleback): common throughout most of
the Arctic except Greenland. It does not occur in the brackish streams in
Greenland.Sebastes marinus (rose fish): This fish occurs along the coast of Greenland
from Cape Farewell to 71° N. latitude; a deep-water fish of commercial importance
in Greenland. Two small specimens have been reported from Port Burwell.Artediellus uncinatus (hook-eared sculpin): reported from Davis Strait
in deep water, also Dolphin and Union Strait in the Northwest Territories.Icelus bicornis (two-horned sculpin): This species probably occurs through–
out the Arctic; however, it has been reported only from West Greenland, southern
Ellesmere Island, Jones Sound, Hudson Bay, Foxe Basin, and Dolphin and Union
Strait.Triglops pingeli (mailed sculpin): This sculpin has been recorded from
Dolphin and Union Strait, Hudson Bay, Ungava Bay, and the entire west coast of
Greenland. This is a deep-water sculpin although occurring in shallow water
in the northern part of its range.
013 | Vol_III-0602
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
Triglops nybelini : a high-arctic sculpin occurring in Greenland to 78° N.
latitude, and apparently inhabiting deeper water than T. pingeli .Myoxocephalus scorpius (common sculpin): This is a common littoral sculpin
and is rarely taken below 30 meters. It is abundant along the west coast of
Greenland, north to Thule, where it is replaced by Oncocottus quadricornis .
In Ungava Bay this is the commonest shore sculpin. While M. scorpius has been
reported from James Bay, Hudson Bay, Foxe Basin, Dolphin and Union Strait, and
Devon Island, it is not as common in those regions as O. quadricornis .Myoxocephalus scorpiodes : This is a small littoral sculpin closely re–
sembling M. scorpius , reported as far north as Etah along the west coast of
Greenland. It is common in James and Hudson bays, living in the littoral zone.
Although reported from Foxe Basin and Dolphin and Union Strait, this form is
evidently rare along the coast of arctic Canada, and is apparently unknown
from Alaskan waters.Porocottus polaris : a small cottoid, whose affinities are unknown, reported
from Melville Island and Boothia Peninsula.Oncocottus quadricornis (four-horned sculpin): a high-arctic littoral
sculpin replacing M. scorpius in Greenland, north of Thule; often used as an
indicator of high-arctic waters. This sculpin is known from the north coast
of Ellesmere Island and holds the farthest north record of a marine fish.
Along the arctic coast of North America, this is much commoner than M. scorpius .Gymnocanthus tricuspis (stag-horned sculpin): a common sculpin along the
coast of Greenland north to Etah; also known from Jones Sound, east Baffin
Island, Ungava Bay, Hudson Bay, and Foxe Basin. The Pacific form G. galeatus
was identified from Hudson Bay on the basis of a single specimen.
014 | Vol_III-0603
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
Gymnocanthus pistilliger : known from the northern coast of Alaska to
Dolphin and Union Strait.Cottunculus microps : deep water of Davis Strait on both sides of the
submarine ridge.Cottunculus thompsonii : rare in the deep water of Davis Strait.
Leptagonus decagonus : common in Greenlandic waters north to Smith Sound
on the west coast; also reported from Exeter Sound and Lake Harbour, Baffin
Island.Aspidophoroides monopterygius (sea poacher): along the coast of Green–
land from Ivigtut to Jacobshavn, and from Exeter Sound, Baffin Island.Aspidophoroides olriki : common along the coast of West Greenland from
67° to 71° N. latitude; elsewhere reported from Ungava Bay, Hudson Strait, and
Hudson Bay.Cyclopterus lumpus (lumpfish): common in the southern part of its range
along the coast of Greenland from Cape Farewell to Umanak; also reported
from James Bay and the Churchill district of Hudson Bay.Eumicrotremus spinosus (spiny lumpfish): common along the entire west
coast of Greenland to Etah; also reported from Ungava Bay, Hudson Strait and
Hudson Bay, and Foxe Basin.Eumicrotremus derjugini : recognized only from Hudson Bay.
Cyclopteropsis malcalpini : known from type locality, Ulrik Bay, Greenland.
Lethrotremus armouri : known only from Upernivik, Greenland.
Liparis spp. (sea snails): Considerable confusion exists concerning the
systematic position of the liparids in northern waters. L. atlanticus has
been doubtfully identified from Ungava Bay. L. tunicatus is common along the
014a | Vol_III-0604
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
coasts of Greenland, Ungava Bay, Cumberland Sound, Foxe Basin, and Jones
Sound. L. major is known from Greenland north to Etah. L. cyclostigma , a
Bering Sea species, is known only from Hudson Bay in our region.
L. herschelinus is known from Alaska and Herschel Island, Northwest Ter–
ritories.Careproctus reinhardti : a deep-sea fish which has been reported
from Umanak and Jacobshavn, Greenland.Ammodytes lancea (sand launce): a common fish from Julianehaab dis–
trict to Umanak, Greenland. This species had also been reported from Ungava
Bay, Hudson Bay, and Kent Peninsula, Northwest Territories. A number of
subspecies have been recognized.Pholis gunnellus (gunnel): known from the Greenland coast between
Julianehaab and Ho l steinsborg.Pholis fasciatus (rock eel): an inhabitant of the shore salt water
along the Greenland coast north to 73° N. latitude; also reported from Devon
Island and Hudson Bay.Stichaeus punctatus (spotted snake blenny): common in the shore zone of
West Greenland to 73° N. latitude; also reported from Hudson Bay.Eumesogrammus praecisus : distribution the same as the spotted snake
blenny in Greenlandic waters; also reported from Port Burwell, Ungava Bay.Lumpenus maculatus (shanny): common along the west coast of Greenland
from Ivigtut to Jacobshavn; also reported from Port Burwell.Lumpenus lampetraeformis (snake blenny): common from Godthaab to Jacobs–
havn, Greenland.Lumpenus medius : rare from Disko Bay north to Northeast Bay, Greenland.
015 | Vol_III-0605
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
Lumpenus fabricii : a very common blenny along the west coast of Green–
land from Nanortalik to Godhavn. Elsewhere it has been recorded from Devon
Island, Ungava Bay, and Hudson Bay.Anarhichas lupus (wolf fish): fairly common from West Greenland to
Umanak Fjord in the north.Anarhichas minor : known from Davis Strait on both sides of the sub–
marine ridge.Anarhichas denticulatus : common in Davis Strait south of the submarine
ridge.Lycodes vahlii ( l e elpout): common in the deep water of Davis Strait.
Lycodes reticulatus (arctic eelpout): a common eelpout in Davis Strait
north to Umanak, Greenland; elsewhere reported from Ungava and Hudson Bay.Lycodes esmarkii : known from the deep water of Davis Strait.
Lycodes eudipleurosticus : a common eelpout in the deep cold water of
Baffin Bay and northwest Greenland.Lycodes seminudus : known from Jacobshavn to Upernivik, Greenland.
Lycodalepis polaris : A widespread range in Arctic America is indicated
by scattered records from Whale Sou n d, Devon Island, Cumberland Sound, Hudson
Bay, Point Barrow, and Bering Strait.Lycenchelys ingolfianus : known only from the deep water of Davis Strait.
Gymnelis viridis (fish doctor): a common eelpout throughout the Arctic;
it has been reported from most stations where collecting has been done.Bythites fuscus : Only a single specimen of this fish exists; it was
collected at Fiskenaes, Greenland.Ceratias ho l bölli : uncommon in the deep water of Davis Strait.
016 | Vol_III-0606
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
Oneirodes eschrichtii : rare in the deep water of Davis Strait.
Himantolophus groenlandicus : very rare in the deep water off Greenland.
Summary
The Arctic is noted for a paucity of fish fauna. The well-known and
rich fauna of West Greenland, warmed by Atlantic water, is strongly in con–
trast to the high-arctic waters of northern Ellesmere Island, where to date
only two species of fish have been discovered, Salvelinus alpinus and Oncocottus
quadricornis .If the areas whose faunas are influenced by the warming effects of Atlan–
tic or Pacific water are excluded, the fauna is characterized by relatively
few families of fish. The common anadromous form which enters most of the
rivers and streams is the arctic char, a member of the salmon family. Small
brackish streams are characterized by sticklebacks. Sculpins are represented
by a variety of species from the shore zone to deep water. Other common mem–
bers of the shallow and deep zones are the peculiar lumpfish and liparids, or
sea snails. The eel-like blennies and eelpouts are common in the Laminaria
zone and deep water. The arctic pollack, a member of the cod family, is the
most common pelagic form, and is often sighted near the surface among the ice
floes or in open leads.
017 | Vol_III-0607
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Bean, T.H. “Fishes collected in Cumberland Gulf and Disko Bay,” U.S.Nat.
Mus. Bull . no.15, pp.107-38, 1879.2. Dresel, H.G. “Notes on some Greenland fishes,” U.S.Nat.Mus. Proc . vol.7,
pp.244-58, 1894.3. Dunbar, M. J. “Marine young fish from the Canadian eastern Arctic,” Canada.
Fisheries Re d s . Bd. Bull . no.73, 1947.4. Dymond, J.R. “The Coregonine Fishes of Hudson and James Bay,” Contr.
Canad. Biol. of Fish , n.s., vol.8, no.1, 1933.5. - - - -. “The Coregonine fishes of northwestern Canada,” Toronto. Roy.
Ont.Mus. Zool. Contr . no.24, 1943.6. - - - -. “Notes on the distribution of Salmo salar and Salvelinus alpinus
in northeastern Canada,” Canad. Field Nat . vol.46, p.185, 1932.7. - - - -. “Pacific salmon in the Arctic Ocean.” Pacific Sci. Congr. 6th,
1939. Proc . vol.3, p.345.8. Ehrenbaum, E. “Die Fische,” Fauna Arct ., Jena, vol.2, pp.65-168, 1902.
9. - - - -. Nordisches Plankton, 1905, Zool. Teil l 413 pp.
10. Fabricius, Otto. “Pisces,” his Fauna Groenlandica . Hafniae et Lipsiae,
Rothe, 1780, pp.137- 84 83.11. Fowler, H.W. “Fishes collected by the Peary Relief Expedition of 1899,”
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. Proc . [ ?] vol.66, pp.359-66,
1914.12. - - - -. “Notes on some arctic fishes with a description of a new Onco–
cottus,” Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. Proc . vol.57, pp.362-70, 1905-06.13. Gunther, Albert. “Account of the fishes collected by Capt. Fielden between
78 to 83° N. lat. During the arctic expedition of 1875-76,”
Zool. Soc. Lond. Proc . p.293, 1877.14. - - - -. “Report of a collection of fishes made by C. Hart during the late
arctic expedition,” Zool. Soc. Lond., Proc . 1877, p. 475.15. Halkett, Andrew. Check List of the Fishes of the Dominion of Canada and
Newfoundland . Ottawa, Printer to the King, 1913.16. Hildebrand, H.H. Marine Fishes of Arctic Canada . Thesis, McGill University,
[ ?] 1948.
018 | Vol_III-0608
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
17. Hildebrand, S.F. “Annotated list of fishes collected on the several
expeditions to Greenland, Fox Basin region, and the coast
of Labrador by Capt. R. A. Bartlett,” Medd. Grønland , vol.125,
no.1, 1939.18. Je n sen, Ad.S. “ Concering a change of climate during recent decades in
arctic and subarctic regions from Greenland on the west to
Eurasia on the east,” Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Biologiske Medd .
vol.14, no.8, 1939.19. - - - -. “Contributions to the Ichthyofauna of Greenland 1-3. Spolia
Zoologica Musei Hauniensis II” Skr Skr . Uni. Zool. Mus. Kbhvn. 1942.20. - - - -. “Contributions to the Ichthyofauna of Greenland 4-7. Spolia
Zoologica Musei Hauniensis IV ” . Skr Skr . Uni. Zool. Mus. Kbhvn, 1944.21. - - - -. “Fishes,” Norwegian Arctic Expedition in the “ Fram ,” 2nd,
1898-1902. Report . vol.3, no.25, 1910.22. - - - -. The Greenland Halibut ( Reinhardtius hippoglossoides ). København,
Levin 2 Munkgsgaard, 1935.23. - - - -. “Investigations of the ‘ Dana ’ in west Greenland waters in 1925,”
Conseil Perm. Internat. Explor. Mer. Rapport , vol.39, pp.85-91,
1926.24. - - - -. “On subspecies and races of the lesser sand eel ( Ammodytes lancea ),”
Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Biologske Medd . vol.16, no.9, 194125. - - - -. “Researches on the distrib. boil. and syst. of Greenland fishes
( Sebastes marinus ),” Dansk Naturhist Foren. Copenhagen, Vidensk .
Medd . vol.74, pp.89-109, 1922.26. - - - -. The Selachians of Greenland . København, Bianco Lunos Bogtrykkeri,
1914.27. Jordan, D.S. & Evermann, B.W. “The fishes of North & Middle America,”
U.S. Nat.Mus. Bull . Parts I to IV. Washington, 1896-1900.28. Jordan, Evermann, & Clark. “Check List of the fish and fishlike vertebrates
of North and Middle America,” Rept. of Comm. of Fisheries 1928
(1930) Part 2.29. Kendall, W.C. “The Fishes of Labrador,” Portland Soc. Nat. Hist. Proc .
1909, vol.2, pt.8, pp.207-44.30. Lütken, C.F. “The crustacean of Greenland,” Jones, T.R. Manual of the
Natural History, Geology, and Physics of Greenland . . .
together with Instructions . . . for the Use of the Expedition .
Lond., Her Majesty’s Stationery Office, 1875.
019 | Vol_III-0609
EA-Zoo. Hildebrand: Marine Fishes of American Arctic
31. Murdock, John. “Fishes,” International Polar Expedition to Point Barrow,
Alaska, 1881-1883. Report . Wash., G.P.O., 1885, pp.129-32.
U.S. Cong.House, 48th Cong.2d S. Ex.Doc . no.44.32. Pfaff, J.R. “Fishes,” Fifth Thule Expedition, 5th, 1921-24. Report ,
vol.2, no.7, pp.1-19, 1937.33. Reinhardt, J.C.H. Ichthyologiske Bidrag til den Grönlandske Fauna .
Kbhvn, 1837.34. Reinhardt, J.T. Naturhistoriske Bidrag til en Beskrivalse of Grønland .
Kjøbenhavn, Klein, 1857, pp.20-27.35. Richardson, John. “The Fishes,” his Fauna Boreali-Americana . London,
1836, Pt.3.36. - - - -. “Notices of the fishes,” Franklin, John. Narrative of a Journey
to the Shores of the Polar Sea in the years 1819, 20, 21, and 22.
Lond., Murray, 1823, Appendix 6, pp.705-28.37. Scofield, N.B. “List of fishes obtained in the waters of arctic Alaska,”
Jordan, D.S. The Fur Seals and Fur-Seal Islands of the North
Pacific Ocean , Wash., G.P.O., 1899, pt.3, pp.493-509.38. Turner, L.M. Manuscript on Fishes of Labrador Peninsula, U.S.Nat. Mus. 1886.
39. Vladykov, V.D. “Fishes from the Hudson Bay region,” Contr. Canad. Biol .
Fish . n.s., vol.8, 1933.Henry Hildebrand
Arctic Marine Fishes
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0610
EA-Zoology
(Orvar Nybelin)
ARCTIC MARINE FISHES
CONTENTS
Page Introduction 1 Ecology 5 Pelagic Fish 5 Bottom Fish 9 Occurrence and Distribution of Bottom Fish 10 Ecological Factors 10 Arctic Boreal Species 13 Arctic-Subarctic Species 14 Subarctic Species 14 Panarctic-Subarctic Species 15 Low-arctic Species 16 Pan-arctic Species 17 High-arctic Species 17 Wandering Fish and Brackish-water Fish 19 Zoogeography 20 Circumpolar Species 20 Continuous Circumpolar Species 20 Discontinuous Circumpolar Species 21 Influence of Climatic Changes on Distribution 25 Bibliography 27
001 | Vol_III-0611
EA-Zoology
(Orvar Nybelin)
ARCTIC MARINE FISHES
[ Editor’s Note : In this article Dr. Nybelin uses
an ecological classification which divides the arctic
zone into “high arctic” and “low arctic.” His “subarctic”
thus becomes a narrow transition zone. The reader should
not that, in most of the other articles in this volume,
the term “subarctic” includes two of Dr. Nybelin’s zones:
‘low arctic” and “subarctic.”]Introduction
Although the number of species of fish in the Arctic Sea must be
regarded as being considerably less than in most other sea areas of corres–
ponding size, it is difficult to give a short survey of its fish fauna.
There are several reasons for this difficulty.Considering the Arctic Sea as a whole, we still know very little about
some of its essential sections even though others are well investigated,
i.e., the Greenlandic waters mainly by Danish, the Spitsbergen area by
Swedish, and the Alaskan area by American investigators. Thus the fauna of
the central arctic deep basin, as well as large sections of the North
American arctic coastal areas, are almost entirely uninvestigated, due
mainly to the technical difficulties involved in surmounting their natural
barriers. While the Russians, in the last decades, have carried out
extensive investigations along the north Russian and north Siberian coastal
areas, their publications are, to a large extent, rather inaccessible.Furthermore, in several cases, recent and thorough investigations have
002 | Vol_III-0612
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fishes
led to a new species concept. Thus many of the earlier published works
cannot be taken into consideration, from an ecological and zoogeographical
viewpoint, until the original material is reexamined in the light of this
new concept. An additional difficulty arises from the face that those
investigators who have worked, more or less thoroughly, with the n N orth
Pacific arctic fish fauna apparently have not had access to necessary com–
parative material from the Atlantic arctic area, and vice versa. Whether
these areas are stocked with identical or only with very closely related
species or subspecies is a matter of great uncertainty. Consequently, in
the present article, which has been based almost entirely on a study of the
literature, it has not been possible to give a complete list nor a compre–
hensive ecological and zoogeographical analysis of all arctic fish species.
Therefore the following lines do not claim to be anything other than an
attempt to give a general survey of the marine arctic fish fauna from an
ecological and zoogeographical viewpoint. Consequently the mentioning of
species throughout the te s x t is intended only to exemplify the account, and
should not be considered as a complete list of arctic fish species. For
reasons mentioned above, the comparatively well-known Atlantic arctic area,
with its greater variation of ecological conditions, has been treated in
greater detail than the Pacific arctic area.The Arctic or North Polar Sea, viewed geographically, is only an Atlantic
inland sea with a broad and comparatively deep connection to the North Atlantic.
Besides, there is a comparatively narrow and shallow (hardly 50 meters)
connection with the Pacific Ocean through Bering Strait. This shallow strait
is bounded on the north and south by considerable sea areas with maximum
depths of only about 100 meters. The Bering Sea, for the most part arctic,
003 | Vol_III-0613
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fishes
has a rather definite southern boundary at the North Pacific, but the broad
North Atlantic offers an indefinite southern boundary due to warm Gulf Stream
currents which displace the cold water masses considerably northward. More–
over, these two Arctic Sea outlets are also different from a hydrographic
standpoint.The character of a marine fauna is dependent, as Ekman (2) points out, upon the
hydrographic conditions, and not upon its geographical position. Consequently,
according to Ekman, we cannot accept the entire north Polar Sea as purely
high-arctic, i.e., having waters, as a rule, with temperatures below zero
(°C.). Only the following arctic coastal areas can be considered purely
high-arctic: north and east Spitsbergen, the northernmost part of Barents Sea,
Kara Sea, the north coast of Siberia, the North American Arctic Sea coasts
except a little area at Bering Strait, northwest and northeast Greenland
about to 69° N. latitude, and Jan Mayen. On the other hand, the following
areas have somewhat higher temperatures and are usually designated as low-
arctic: south and southeast Greenland, west and south Spitsbergen, the central
portions of Barents Sea, and the White Sea’s inner and deeper areas. Of
course, designating these areas as low-arctic does not preclude the possibility
that high-arctic conditions can exist locally, as, for example, the inner
portions of the West Spitsbergen fjords. Finally, the coasts of Labrador and
south to Cape Cod, southwestern Greenland, north and east Iceland, east Fin–
marken, the Murman C c oast, and the White Sea’s shallower parts, are usually
regarded as subarctic transitional area. However, this applies only to the
uppermost strata or the littoral zone.The North Atlantic deep areas are demarcated very sharply toward the
north by two shallow ridges. One, nowhere deeper than 560 meters, extends
004 | Vol_III-0614
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fishes
from East Greenland-Iceland-Faeroe Islands-Shetland-Scotland; another
extends between West Greenland and Baffin Island with a maximum depth of
approximately 700 meters. Few areas, if any, exhibit such sharp tempera–
ture differences as exist on either side of the ridge between the Faeroe
Islands and Shetland, to so-called Wyville-Thomson ridge. North of this
ridge, from about the 600-meter depth and downward, the water temperature
is constantly below zero °C. — typically high-arctic. Contrastingly, the
deep waters w s outh of the Wyville-Thomson ridge have a temperature of about
+3°C. — characteristic of the A r tlantic Ocean. Cold water masses (below
0°C.), coming from the north, stream over the ridge giving its summit and
uppermost southern slope a low-arctic to subarctic character. Consequently,
deep waters between Greenland and Scandinavia may show arctic conditions
nearly as far south of the Arctic Circle (depending on the North Atlantic
ridge), as the upper strata may show boreal conditions to the north of the
Arctic Circle (depending on the Gulf Stream).The sound between northeast Greenland and Spitsbergen divides the
deep - sea areas north of the North Atlantic cross ridge into two deep-sea
basins — the Norwegian Sea basin (depth more than 3,600 meters) and the
North Polar basin. However, the threshold depth of this sound is considerable,
about 1,500 meters. For this reason, the hydrographical conditions in the
deeper parts of these two basins (600 meters and deeper) ø are similar,
both being characterized by a temperature never higher than −1°C. and a
constant salinity of 34.93°/oo. The Norwegian Sea basin and the North
Polar basin, together with the completely isolated Baffin Bay depth, are
designated by Ekman as the Arctic Deep Sea. These three areas (the Arctic
Deep Sea) will be dealt h with in their entirety in the following report.
005 | Vol_III-0615
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fishes
In spite of the unmistakably arctic character of Bering Sea and the Sea
of Ok n h otsk, they will be considered only when their conditions give reason
to draw a direct comparison with the rest of the arctic areas.ECOLOGY
Marine fish are usually divided into two main categories based on their
life habits — pelagic fish and bottom fish. Although there are no clear-cut
boundaries separating these categories, it is a good general division of
marine fish and can also be used for arctic and subarctic fish.Pelagic Fish
There are fish that live their entire life in the free-water strata,
independent of the sea bottom. Thus they may be thought of as being ecologi–
cally equivalent to the plankton forms among the invertebrates. Their roving
life in the free-water strata allows a wide distribution, which is limited
only by unfavorable hydrographical conditions. Moreover, it is relatively
easy for pelagic fish to be carried far beyond their usually area of distribu–
tion by currents or other chance circumstances.As far as we know today, the arctic waters are very sparsely occupied
by pelagic fish. Most (perhaps all) are widely distributed species, which
were accidentally carried up into the arctic waters by the Gulf Stream.
Apparently they have not established a breeding population in the arctic
waters. Based on our present knowledge, the strictly arctic fish fauna lacks
true pelagic representatives. This is an exceedingly remarkable condition,
considering the great wealth of arctic plankton. The arctic fish mainly
make use of this rich source of food indirectly by feeding upon bottom
invertebrates, which use the dead plankton organisms as food.
006 | Vol_III-0616
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fishes
Pelagic fish in subarctic or low-arctic waters are found in those
areas where Gulf Stream currents regularly penetrate. This is especially
so in Davis Strait and off the coast of West Greenland, but pelagic fish
have also occasionally been taken at east Finmark, at the Murman C c oast,
and at West Spitsbergen. Small species which may normally be caught with
ordinary pelagic equipment are: Microstomidae: Nansenia groenlandica ,
first described from one specimen taken in Greenlandic waters but later
found to be common in the North Atlantic between 63° and about 49° N.
latitude; Bathylagus benedicti , known both from the north and south
Atlantic and taken at least 11 times in the southern part of Davis Strait.
[ ?] Gonostomatidae: Cyclothone microdon and C. p b raueri , cosmo–
politan species which have been found in [ ?] Davis Strait.on 17 and
8 occasions respectively. Stomiatidae: Stomias boa ferox , reported 13
times from West Greenland and Davis Strait. The most frequently caught
pelagic species are the North Atlantic Myctophiids Myctophum glaciale
and M. arcticum . The former ( glaciale has been taken 43 times along the
coast of northwestern Greenland, once off the southernmost part of East
Greenland. [ ?] and it has also been taken
in Baffin Bay, at Port Burwell ( u U ngava), and at least twice at Spitsbergen.
The latter ( arcticum ) has been collected 22 times outside the West Greenland
coast. There are 5 records of the more cosmopolitan Lampanyctus crocodilus
from Davis Strait and it is also mentioned as having been found at Port
Burwell. On three occasions Lampanyctus elongatus has been collected
at West Greenland.The records of the larger , and no doubt fast-swimming Paralepis Paralepis species
are different in that the young have been regularly taken in large numbers
007 | Vol_III-0617
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
in the southern areas of the North Atlantic, while the adults have been
almost exclusively found farther to the north at the Arctic Sea’s boundary.
Thus P. coregonoides borealis has often been taken at West Greenland but
only once from Norway, once from England, and once from the United States;
P. rissoi krøyeri has been found 6 times at West Greenland, once at East
Greenland, 5 times at south Iceland, twice at Norway, once at the Murman
C c oast, 6 times at North America, and once at Port Burwell (Ungava);
P. brevis has been taken twice at Iceland, once at East Greenland, and once
in the Skagerrak.Most, perhaps all, of these specimens seem to have been paralyzed by
the cold water, for they were found disabled or dead on the surface, and
also in the stomachs of seals or fish. Therefore it can be definitely stated
that these fish have gone beyond their usual area of distribution. The
fact that young of these species have been taken only to the south is a
good illustration of the ineffectiveness of the prevailing pelagic trapping
methods for the larger and faster fish species.The following species may also belong to this category: Anotopterus
arcticus - probably pelagic, known only as a skull taken from the stomach
of a halibut in Davis Strait; Saccopharynx ampullaceus - this n N orth Atlantic
fish was once found dead floating in Davis Strait; Plagyodus ferox - 4 specimens
of this nearly cosmopolitan fish were found dead (floating or washed up on
shore) on the coast of West Greenland. The two latter species have, however,
been trapped elsewhere several times. Ceratias holboelli , Oneirodes eschrichti ,
Himantolophus groenlandicus , and Caristius groenlandicus (probably pelagic ,
known from only one specimen) are peculiar deep-sea anglers, which have been
taken only with trapping gear. The North Atlantic Trachypterus arcticus has
008 | Vol_III-0618
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
occasionally been found off northernmost Norway, and the cosmopolitan
Lampris pelagicus was once found as far north as the M urman C c oast. Finally
it should be mentioned that the North Atlantic herring Clupea harengus,
which [ ?] previously was only accidentally caught as isolated specimens at
Greenland, has in later years been taken at Jan Mayen, Spitsbergen, Novaya
Zemlya, and in the Kara Sea. This range extension may be due to the recent
n N orth Atlantic “climatic improvement.”I believe it is clear that all of the above-mentioned pelagic fish
are only accidental visitors to the polar area. Are there no purely arctic
pelagic fish species? The polar cod Boreogadus saida has often been considered
an arctic pelagic fish. It occurs over almost the entire arctic area, from
the littoral zone near shore out to about 350 meters depth, and it has even
been found near the surface between drifting ice floes. Concerning the
occurrence near ice floes, Jensen (6, p.132) writes: “White Bay and Lönnberg
conclude from these observations that Gadus saida may be pelagic, S o ø ren Jensen
in his diary puts forth the view that the polar cod out in the big ice should
not be regarded as pelagic, no more than the amphipods and masses of diatoms
found together with them on the ice foot; he is of the opinion that they are
coastal forms which with the drift ice have been carried from the shore out in the
open sea and outhere, in a peculiar way, continue their “ ‘ littoral ’ mode of Single quote
life associated with the ice floes.” Thus the polar cod is not actually
a pelagic species.In The Depths of the Ocean , by John Murray and Johan Hjort, Hjort states
that Paraliparis bathybii should be considered a bathpelagic species. He
bases this statement on the evidence that this species, which has often
been caught by trawling nets, was also taken once in a pelagic net which
009 | Vol_III-0619
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
was towed at a great depth. It is possible that bathybii may have been
taken from the free-water strata as the trawls were hauled up to the surface,
but we must wait for additional evidence, in particular from pelagic hauls,
before stating definitely that P. bathybii is a bathpelagic species.It conclusion, we know of no truly arctic pelagic fish. All of the
pelagic fish taken in the arctic region must be regarded as accidental
visitors which have been carried far beyond their normal distribution by
Gulf Stream currents from the North Atlantic. To the best of our knowledge,
there no similar accidental invasion from the North Pacific to the arctic
area.Bottom Fish
The arctic fish fauna is made up mainly of bottom fish or species which,
because of food and other conditions, are more or less strongly bound to, or
dependent on, the sea bottom, from the shore zone down to the greatest depths.
The fact that fish are dependent upon the sea bottom does not preclude the
possibility that they may occasionally leave the bottom-water strata. For
example, species of the genus Trigla and the flat fishes are strongly adapted
to bottom life, but they may occasionally be taken in upper water la [ ?] y ers.
However, this cannot alter our opinion that they are true bottom fish.There are some bottom fish that might be thought of as being arctic
species from a geographical standpoint, but when considered ecologically
we find that they are not actually arctic. To this group belong the following:
Centroscyllum fabricii , Alepocephalus agassizii , Notacanthus chemitzii ,
N. rostratus , Synaphobranchus kaupii Histiobranchus in v f ernails , Nematonurus
armatus , “Mecrourus ” aequalis , Chalinura brevibarbis (= C. simula acc. to
Lütken), Trachyrhynchus murrayi , Antimora rostrata , Haleprophyrus eques ,)
010 | Vol_III-0620
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
Cottunculus torvus , Lycenchelys ingolfianus , and Lycodonus ophidium . These
are all Atlantic, in most cases North Atlantic species, which are found as far
north as the North Atlantic cross ridge but only rarely have been found north
of this ridge. No doubt Bythites fascus also belongs to the preceding group.
This fish has been found only once (1834) off West Greenland. The other
known species of this genus lives in the deep waters of East India, and in
general the whole family in characteristic of deep water.Occurrence and Distribution of Bottom Fish
Before discussing the occurrence and distribution of arctic bottom fish
it is necessary to consider some ecological principles.Ecological Factors . Certainly temperature is the most important
ecological factor. Above all it is the key factor in our definition of the
arctic region (see above). Of course the temperature sensibility and the
temperature span may vary from different species of fishes as well as for
other animals. Some can endure temperature changes only within a very
narrow range (stenothermic species) and among them some species may be
adapted to a very narrow range of negative temperatures, others to a narrow
range of low positive temperatures and so on. On the other hand, there are
species which are adapted to a much broader temperature range (eurythermic
species). As a rule, eurythermic fish consequently have a wider distribu–
tion than stenothermic fish which are limited by their considerably narrower
temperature boundaries.Moreover, different species react differently to change in the Water’s
salinity. In reacting to salinity, specie may be designated as stenohaline
if they are limited by a narrow saline range, and euryhaline if they show a
011 | Vol_III-0621
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
tolerance to a wider range of saline variations.Depth is another important ecological factor, and the response of fish
to it varies considerably. Some species are bound to certain fixed depths
(stenobathic species). However, one can distinguish between stenobathic
shallow-water species, stenobathic species in intermediate depths , and steno–
bathic deep-water species. Other species are not so narrowly restricted by
depth conditions and may exist within more or less unlimited depth boundaries
(eurybathic species).It is upon the combination of the rather closely related factors of
temperature and depth that we base our ecological classification of the
arctic marine fish fauna. Naturally, other factors such as salinity, nature
of the bottom, food supply, etc., also play an important role.The Swede N. v. Hofsten, in his well-known work Die Fische des Eisfjords
(3), was the first to give an analysis of the arctic marine fish fauna.
Continuing from his earlier analyses of the arctic echinoderms and decapod
crustacea, v.Hofsten divided the arctic fish into the following main groups:
( 1 ) arctic species, ( 2 ) arctic-boreal species, ( 3 ) boreal-arctic species,
and ( 4 ) boreal species reaching the low-arctic zone. The first group (arctic
species) is further subdivided into high-arctic and low-arctic species. High–
arctic species are characteristically bound to areas with negative temperatures,
while low-arctic species are found in areas with low positive temperatures.
In both these cases the species are strictly cold-stenothermic species. However,
those species which occur in both the high- and low-arctic temperature areas
are designated as panarctic. The second group (arctic - boreal species) is
broken down into panarctic-north boreal species, mainly arctic species,
panarctic-panboreal species, and low - arctic-boreal species.
012 | Vol_III-0622
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
This is a well-founded, and surely in essentials a permanent, division of
arctic fish. Yet it should be pointed out that it is difficult to draw up
boundaries between different ecological categories , v.Hofsten (3 ) , p.13 p. 103) himself
remarks that such a division has primarily a formal value, and that those
who expect to find a strict conformance in nature have confused aims and
means. This is especially no when one deals with such mobile forms as fish.
They can often react to temporary or seasonal changes in the environment, and
can easily stray beyond their normal or typical environment. Thus, isolated
discoveries may easily distort the picture of the species’ normal environmental
requirements. This may be an important factor in the ecological consideration
of those rare species which have been taken only a few times. It is clear
that more discoveries and increased knowledge of arctic fish must, in many
cases, lead to a revised concept of the species and its ecological niche.Furthermore, our conception of several species has recently undergone
a considerable change from a taxonomic-systematic respect. For example,
v.Hofsten regards Triglop pingelii as panarctic-north-boreal. According to
A. S. Jensen’s thorough analysis ( Jensen 1944 5 ), this specias is broken up
into four subspecies: the high-arctic Triglops p. pingelii , the low-arctic
T. p. pietschmanni , the subarctic T. p. islandicus , and the north-boreal
T. p. murrayi . Naturally, these must be assigned to their different ecological
categories. The arrangement that follows must consequently not be thought of
as a criticism of v. Hofsten’s classification, but rather as a modernization
based on more recent data. For example, I agree with Ekman (2) that the
arctic-boreal transition region ought to be regarded as a special subarctic
area because, as we shall see later, it has a characteristic fauna of its own.Before going further into this discussion it might be well to consider
013 | Vol_III-0623
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
those boreal species which penetrate into the subarctic , and low-arctic
zones , respectively. A considerable part of the North Atlantic’s economically
most valuable fish are found in these zones, for example: Gadus callarias ,
G. aeglefinus , Pollachius virens , Molva molva , Brosmius brosme , Hippoglo s sus
hippoglossues , Glyptocephalus cynoglossus , Sebastes marinus , Cyclopterus lumpus ,
and Anar c rhichas lupus . Formerly these species were found only occasionally
in the geographic arctic region, perhaps as temporary guests, but due to the
“climatic improvement” of recent years, they are now frequently found farther
north. It is interesting that a considerable amount of fishery operations
are now being conducted in the arctic area for some of these species. Probably
the following species should also be included in this group: Squalus acanthias ,
Raja fyllae , R. lintea , Coryphaenoides rupestris , Molva dypter y gia (?),
Ammodytes lancea marinus , the cyclostome Myxine glutinosa , and possibly Raja
radiata if it is not rather a low-arctic-boreal species.Arctic-Boreal Species . The fish species of this group are quite
markedly eurythermic, and therefore find favorable ecological conditions in
both the boreal and arctic zones. The various species are, however, apparently
adapted to somewhat different temperature ranges. At least one of them,
Hippoglossoides platessoides , seems to be adapted to somewhat higher tempera–
tures for it occurs within the whole boreal area, whereas its arctic distribu–
tion is limited to the subarctic and low-arctic regions. v.Hofsten has
characterized platessoides as low-arctic-boreal. Thus it stands close to
the preceding group, especially Raja radiata , but it is of more general occur–
rence in the low-arctic area than is radiata . A few other species are even
more eurythermic, as they occur not only within the boreal area but also in
true arctic waters. These panarctic-panboreal species are the common bullhead,
014 | Vol_III-0624
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
Cottus scorpius , and the nominate form of Liparis liparis . Finally, the
panarctic-north-boreal species seems to be adjusted to somewhat lower
temperatures, and consequently avoid the more southern and warmer parts
of the boreal area. Lumpenus lampetriformis stands nearest to the preceding
species, having its southernmost distribution in the North Sea. It is also
quite [ ?] plentiful in the Baltic. Artediellus uncinatus europaeus , Lumpenus
maculatus , and Careproctus reinhardti are not found farther to the south than
in the Skagerrak. The ice shark, or Greenland shark, Somniosus microcephalus ,
which has great economic importance in Greenland also avoids the warmer boreal
waters. The boreal distribution of Cottunculus microps extends only as far
south as Trondheim Fjord.Arctic-Subarctic Species . As pointed out in the introduction, the marine
arctic area can be divided into a high-arctic and low-arctic subarea based
on temperature differences. To these areas may be added the subarctic area,
designated by v. Hofsten as the boreal-arctic transition area. This latter
has a comparatively small extension. (See note at beginning of this article
concerning the use of the term “Subarctic.”) This and its transitionary
character appear to make the subarctic area unsuitable for the development
of a fish fauna of its own. Consequently, the species occurring here belong
partly to the warmer arctic-boreal group, and partly to the colder panarctic–
subarctic group. However, it appears that quite a few species are almost
entirely limited to the subarctic area.Subarctic Species . The range of the obviously subarctic Raja spinicauda
includes: West Greenlandic waters, Iceland’s southeast coast, near Bear Island,
the Barents Sea north of the Murman C c oast, and at the Skolpenbank (depths
between 175 and 836 meters, and between the temperatures of +0°.05 to 3°.8C. +0.05° to 3.8°C. ).
015 | Vol_III-0625
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
The following also belong to this group: Macrourus berglax , Reinhardtius
hippoglossoides , Anarrhichas minor , A. denticulatus , and Lycodes esmarkii .
These species occur from east Finmarken west to Storeggen at the Norwegian
west coast , at Iceland’s north and east coast, off the eastern United States
coast south to Cape Cod, and all except esmarkii are found off Bear Island
and West Greenland. Both of the Anarrhichas species and L. esmarkii are
also found on the Faeroe plateau and the Faeroe-Iceland ridge. A. minor
also occurs at West Spitsbergen, in the White Sea, and at the Murman
C c oast where denticulatus has also been found. The presence of R. hippoglos–
soides at southeast Greenland suggests that this species might more
accurately be designated low-arctic-subarctic. It is possible that both
the Anarr c hichas species and M. berglax may also be low-arctic-subarctic.
However, Triglops pingelii islandicus and Lycodes vahlii lugubris , which are
characteristic of Iceland’s subarctic coasts, and Aspidiophorides monopterygius ,
known only from West Greenland, Davis Strait, and the United States east
coast to Cape Cod, must be regarded as pure subarctic species.Panarctic-Subarctic Species . The upper temperature limits of these
eurythermic species almost coincide with subarctic conditions, but they are
also quite cold tolerant as they can withstand high-arctic temperatures.
C G aidropsarus argentatus has been found throughout most of the subarctic area,
and also at East Greenland and Jan Mayen. Leptagonus decagonus , also subarctic,
has been taken at Jan Mayen, and at north and east Spitsbergen. We can also
include in this group Aspidophoroides olrikii from the subarctic and Kara Sea,
and Liparis liparis bathyarctious from Spitsbergen, Barents Sea, Jan Mayen,
and northern Norway. Gymnelis viridis , which occurs within the whole arctic
area, has once been taken at Iceland’s northern coast and also outside
016 | Vol_III-0626
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
Labrador and there is, perhaps, equal justification for including it in
this group as in the panarctic group where it has formerly been placed.
This is also the case with the polar cod, Boreogadus saida , which on several
occasions has been taken from the waters around Iceland, and once off
Labrador. Gymnocanthus tricuspis is known from both the high- and low–
arctic regions, and also from the Murman C c oast, north Norway, and Labrador.
Possibly Icelus bicornis bicornis should also be placed in this group.Although the following species are partly subarctic, their occurrence
in Bering Sea and the Sea of Okhotsk is sufficient evidence to permit their
inclusion here. These species, with their distribution, are: Stichaeus
punctatus , - west Greenlandic waters, Hudson Bay south to Newfoundland,
Bering Sea, Sea of Okhotsk, and the Japanese Sea; Eumesogrammus praecisus,
West Greenland waters, Hudson Bay and Strait, Bering Sound and Sea, and
the See of Okhotsk; Lumpenus fabricii , west Greenlandic waters, Gulf of
St. Lawrence, Wellington Channel, off the Murman C c oast, White Sea, Novaya
Zemlya, and Bering Sea; and Eumicrotremus spinosus , panarctic and the
eastern United States coast down to Main e .Low- a A rctic Species. This group of species is neither numerous nor
sharply characterized. The capelin, Mallotus villosus , is usually thought
of as being a representative low-arctic species (2); but its interesting
spawning wanderings make it difficult to assign villosus to any fixed
ecological group. Yet it seems to be bound to low temperatures and probably
is closer to being a low-arctic than a low-arctic-subarctic species.
Otherwise, only the following species, limited to west Greenlandic waters,
can be included in this group: Artediellus uncinatus uncinatus , Triglops
pingelii pietschmanni , Liparis liparis major , Ammodytes lances dubius,
and Lycodes reticulatus reticulatus.
017 | Vol_III-0627
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
Pan - arctic Species . We do not know of many fish species that occur in
high-arctic as well as low-arctic areas which, contrary to the recently
mentioned species, have not also been found in the subarctic transition area.
However, the following relatively shallow-water species apparently belong to
this group: Icelus spatula spatula , I. uncinalis uncinalis , Lumpenus medius ,
the flatfish Liopsetta glacialis , and the gadid Eleginus na u vaga . Probably
the Greenlandic fjord cod Gadus ogac should also be included here, which,
besides its occurrence in West Greenland, has been met with in Ungava Bay,
Hudson Bay, and westward to Victoria Island, Kent Peninsula, and Simpson
Strait, all of which are pure high-arctic waters.High- a A rctic Species . The nucleus of the arctic fish fauna is made up
of cold-water species which are exclusively or predominantly bound to water
colder than 0°C. Using depth as a criterion, we can divide the high-arctic
species into three categories: stenobathic shallow-water species, more eury–
bathic species, and stenobathic deep-water species.The stenobathic shallow-water species occur only in the high-arctic
littoral zone. The classical example is Oncocottus quadricornis labradorious,
which occurs commonly throughout the entire high-arctic shallow-water zone.
The fact that it is missing from the waters at southeast and southwest
Greenland and Spitsbergen is excellent evidence of its high-arctic character.
Artediellus scaber is another shallow-water species which is found in depths
between 9 and 40 (to 90) meters, but it has a considerably smaller geographical
distribution than Oncocottus. We find Lycodes polaris at a somewhat deeper
level, from 19 to 180 meters. [ ?] Perhaps the little-known Cyclopteropsis
macalpini ought to be included here. We do not know the depth at which it
was originally discovered, but it was later taken at a depth of 174 meters.
018 | Vol_III-0628
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
Among the eurybathic shallow-water species may be listed: Lycodes rossi i
9 to 260 m., Triglops p. pingelii 4 to 300 (to 900) m., and Lycodes reticulatus
macro d c ephalus 20 to 300 0 m. Perhaps Lycenchelys kolthoffi should be included
here, but it has been taken only once (300 0 m.). Cottunculus sadko 300 to
690 m., Triglops nybelini approx. 125 to 930 m., Phocaegadus megalops 240 to
930 m., and Eumicrotremus spinosus variabilis 290 to 930 m. , are also
eurybathic, but it should be noted that the maximum depth is considerably
greater than for the preceding species. The following species can also be
included here for they have been found at a wide range of depths in the cold
area of the Norwegian Sea basin: Lycodes p. pallidus 12 to 910 m., [ ?]
L. seminudus 165 to 1 , 100 m., L. eudipleurostictus 185 to 914 m., and Raja
hyperborea 180 to 2,400 m. Besides the last four species, and a few others
mentioned earlier, the following are quite strongly eurybathic and eurythermic:
Gaidropsarus argentatus , Reinhardtius hippoglossoides , Liparis koefoedi ,
Careproctus reinhardti , Raja fyllae , and R. radiata .The Norwegian Sea basin also contains some high-arctic stenobathic deep–
water species which are not found in water w s hallower than about 600 m. These
are: Cottunculus subspinosus , Paraliparis bathybii , Rhodichthys regina , Lycodes
frigidus , L. pallidus similis , L. pallidus squamiventer , L. platyrhinus , L. lütkeni ,
Lycenchelys muraena , and Lycodonus flagellicauda . For a long time these species
have been regarded not only as characteristic of the cold Norwegian Sea basin,
but also as occurring exclusively there. However, this may not be the case inasmuch
as similar hydrographic conditions prevail throughout the arctic central depths,
because of the direct passage between the Norwegian Sea basin and the North
Polar basin. As v.Hofsten has pointed out, their area of distribution undoubtedly
includes the nearly uninvestigated central depths of the Arctic Sea. This
019 | Vol_III-0629
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
hypothesis gains support from the discovery of Rhodichthys regina at N.82°
41.5′, E.87°03′ from a depth of 2,365 m. by the Soviet Sadko expedition of
1935 (Yessipov, 1937).Wandering Fish and Brackish- w W ater Fish . In addition to the fish species
already mentioned, there are fish in the arctic region which are not truly
marine but which influence the arctic marine fauna. For example, the anadromous
fish species which spend most of their life in marine waters, but wander up
into freshwater rivers and lakes to spawn. Some of them are principally
distributed throughout the boreal region, such as Petromyzon marinus and
Salmo salar; others are more arctic, for example, Oncorhynchus gorbuscha ,
O. keta , and Stenodus leucichthys . We may regard Salvelinus alpinus as
purely arctic even though, as a river-wandering fish, it has been found as
far south as N.65° in the north boreal region at Norway’s northwestern coast.
Several of these anadromous fish species are exceedingly valuable food fish.The American freshwater eel, Anguilla rostrata , a katadromous fish
which spawns in the Sargasso area, has been found some few times in south–
western Greenland.Gasterosteus aculeatus and Pungitius pungitius occur commonly within the
arctic area, where they live in both salt and fresh water. However, pungitius
is completely absent from Greenlandic waters.Finally it should be mentioned that there is a strong element of
freshwater fish in the brackish water outside the large North American and
North Siberian river mouths. From the former area, H. H. Hildebrand lists
the following freshwater species: Acipenser fulvescens , Salvelinus fontinalis ,
Leucichthys autumnalis , L. sardinella , L. artedii , Coregonus clu n p eiformis ,
Prosopium cylindraceum, and Osmerus dentex . There is no corresponding report
020 | Vol_III-0630
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
for the North Siberian brackish water. However, Andriashev (1) states that
not less than 11% (a good 35%) of the 31 fish species occurring in the
Nordenskiöld Sea (Laptev Sea) are more or less pronounced freshwater fish.ZOOGEOGRAPHY
In a consideration of the geographical distribution of arctic fish, we
can of course disregard the general distribution of those species that are
only accidentally found in the Arctic. Also outside the scope of this report
are the pelagic fish mentioned in the foregoing pages, as well as the bottom
fish which we have designated as Atlantic deep-water species and those boreal
species which penetrate into the subarctic or low-arctic zone. Neither shall
we consider the distribution of the wandering fish, nor the freshwater species
found in brackish water.We are indebted to v.Hofsten (3) for a comprehensive analysis of the
geographic distribution of arctic fish. Although later investigations have
changed our concept of some species, this survey will follow the essential
features of v.Hofsten’s analysis.Circumpolar Species
Continuous Circumpolar Species . In accordance with v.Hofsten, we
designate as continuous circumpolar those species which are found throughout
the entire Arctic Sea and the adjacent parts of the Atlantic and Pacific oceans.
Gymnelis viridis and Gadus saida have been found practically everywhere in the
polar area where investigations have been carried out, and must be considered
continuous circumpolar species. The strictly coastal and extremely shallow–
water species, Oncocottus quadricornis labradoricus can also be designated
as a continuous circumpolar species even though it is not as widespread as
021 | Vol_III-0631
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
the two preceding species. Being a high-arctic species, it is of course
absent from the low-arctic waters at South Greenland and southwest Spits–
bergen. The fact that Oncocottus is not found at the coasts of northeastern
Spitsbergen and Franz Josef Land may well be due to our meager knowledge
of these two regions.As suggested earlier, elements of the same fauna may exist in both the
Norwegian Sea and the Central Polar basin. Whenever this is the case, as
pointed out by v.Hofsten, these species should also be considered continuous
circumpolar. However, Icelus bicornis which was designated by v.Hofsten as
a continuous circumpolar species, has since been broken up into two species,
biconnis and spatula. The distribution areas of the two species coincides
in the west at West Greenland, and in the east in the Kara Sea, with the
Atlantic-arctic area occupied by bicornis bicornis .Discontinuous Circumpolar Species . There are other species which occur
within the Atlantic-arctic area as well as the Pacific-arctic area, but are
missing along the Siberian and North American polar coasts. These species
show a discontinuous circumpolar distribution. v.Hofsten has placed Lumpenus
maculatus , L. medius , L. febricii , Aspidiophoroides olrikii , and Somniosus
microcephalus in this group. However, L. fabricii occurs also in the North
American Archipelago. Concerning these species, v.Hofsten feels that their
discontinuity may be due to inadequate knowledge of the fish fauna in the
coastal areas. This may well be the case , for , according to Andriashev (1),
both L. medius and A. olrikii have been found in the Nordenskiöld Sea (Laptev Sea).The capelin, Mallotus villosus , is regarded as a good example of a
discontinuous circumpolar species. Its low-arctic character undoubtedly
explains why it is missing from the high-arctic Siberian and North American
022 | Vol_III-0632
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
coasts. However, the Pacific-arctic capelin is considered by some authors
to be a distinct species, catervarius . If we are dealing here with two forms,
villosus in the Atlantic arctic and catervarius in the Pacific arctic, then
there is a circumpolar distribution of two closely related forms — the
circumpolar form complex of v.Hofsten. The distribution of such circumpolar
form complexes, then, can be thought of as being more or less continuous
or obviously discontinuous. v.Hofsten lists the following species as
examples of more or less continuous circumpolar form complexes.Atlantic-arctic species Pacific-arctic species Gymnocanthus tricuspis G. pistilliger ( [ ?] galeatus ?) Cottus scorpius Many closely related species Triglops pingelii T. beani Liparis liparis L. agassizi Liparis reinhardti L. gelatinosus (perhaps idential
with L. reinhardti )Eumicrotremus spinosus E. orbis Salvelinus alpinus S. malma
To this the following remarks may be added. Liparis reinhardti and
gelatinosus are now thought to be identical, as v.Hofsten supposed, and are
placed together as Careproctus reinhardti . If this concept is upheld, then
C. reinhardti must be [ ?] considered a probable continuous circumpolar
species. This may also be the case with Eumicrotremus spinosus and orbis ,
but opinion is divided as to the absolute identity.There is a great deal of uncertainty concerning the form complex Triglops
pingelii and beani , and at the present time the question cannot be definitely
settled. Jensen (4) has made it clear that T. pingelii in the older sense
comprises two distinct species, T. pinelii and T. nybelini; moreover he has
023 | Vol_III-0633
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
attempted to divide pingelii into four geographical subspecies (see above).
But as his investigation was based only on material from Greenland, Iceland,
the Faeroes, Scotland, Skagerrak and Kattegat, nothing is known at present
about the subspecies along the Norwegian coast, in the Barents Sea, at
Spitsbergen, or at Franz Josef Land. Schmidt (7) mentions a Triglops pingelii
pacificus from the Pacific-arctic area which is probably a close equivalent to
one of the Atlantic-arctic subspecies, and Andriashev (1) reports “ Triglops
pingelii subsp.” from the Laptev Sea belonging “rather to the eastern form
( Tr. pingelii beani Gilb.) than to the Barentz Sea form.” From this it
appears that there are closely related forms of Triglops pingelii in the
Pacific-arctic, Atlantic-arctic, and along the arctic Siberian coast. Thus
this form complex might be thought of as having a continuous circumpolar
distribution.Species of the genus Artediellus occupy an exceptional position in that
there is a series of species replacements from West Greenland eastward. Thus
we find A. uncinatus uncinatus at West Greenland , ; A. uncinatus europaeus at
East Greenland, Spitsbergan, Scandinavia, and Barents Sea , ; A. scaber through–
out the north Siberian Sea , ; and A. pacificus in the Pacific-arctic area.The more or less boreal form complexes, Hippoglossoides platessoides -
H. elassodon and Gadus callarias - G. macrocephalus , probably have a discon–
tinuous distribution.The majority of the arctic and arctic-boreal species have a considerably
more limited distribution. In accord with v.Hofsten we can distinguish four
general areas of arctic fish distribution. First, the Atlantic or perhaps
better the Atlantic-arctic species which occupy the areas bordering the North
Atlantic and, in most cases, West Greenland. Second, eastern species with a
024 | Vol_III-0634
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
distribution limited to the glacial sea coasts of Siberia and sometimes
including Barents Sea. Third, the western species occurring along North
America’s polar seacoasts and eastward to s S outh Greenland. The fourth area
includes the Pacific or Pacific-arctic species, with a distribution which
includes the North Pacific-arctic area, the Sea of Okhotsk, Bering Sea, and
adjacent parts of the Polar Sea on both sides of Bering Strait.Of these four areas, the Atlantic-arctic area appears to be rather rich
in species. This may be due, in part, to the area’s accessibility to investi–
gation, and because of this, at the present, it is by far the most thoroughly
investigated area. It should not be necessary to list here all the Atlantic–
arctic species. However, practically all of the species mentioned earlier
as being arctic or arctic-boreal belong in this group, with the exception of
the following: those designated as circumpolar species; those belonging to
circumpolar form complexes, the eastern Artediellus scaber and Lycodes polaris ,
the purely western Gadus ogac , Aspidiophoroides monopterygius , and Cottus
scorpicides; and the Pacific-arctic species.The Pacific-arctic species belong principally to the families Cottidae,
Agonidae, Liparidae, and Blenniidae. The number of species known from the
Pacific-arctic area, including Bering Sea and the Sea of Okhotsk, indicates
a very rich fauna, and as more [ ?] thorough investigations are carried out
it is entirely possible that the number of species will increase considerably.
An enumeration of species from this region is given by Taranetz (8).Some species appear to be common to two of the four areas. Thus Lycodes
P. pallidus occurs in both the Atlantic-arctic area and in the eastern area.
Stichaeus punctatus and Eumesogrammus praecisus are found in the western area
and the Pacific-arctic area. An exceptional position is held by Liopsetta
025 | Vol_III-0635
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
glacialis which occurs from the Pacific-arctic area long North America’s
arctic coast to Baffin Bay, but not West Greenland, and from the Pacific-arctic
area along the Siberian arctic coast to southwestern Barents Sea and the White
Sea. Obviously, glacial l is is missing from the greatest part of the Atlantic–
arctic area. Eleginus navaga has a somewhat similar distribution. It was
earlier known from Alaska and the northern coasts of Russia and Siberia, but
has recently been found at the Canadian arctic coast. This is on the whole
also the case with Icelus spatula spatula , except that it is found westward
all the way to West Greenland, but extends only as far eastward as the Kara Sea.Influence of Climatic Changes on Distribution
The present geographical distribution of the arctic fish fauna, like that
of the arctic fauna as a whole, is a result of historical conditioned causes,
above all climatic changes. During the last glacial period, the arctic fauna
must have been forced considerably southward into the Atlantic-arctic area.
Survivals of Boreogadus saida in southernmost Sweden lend proof of this. A
corresponding displacement undoubtedly took place in the Pacific-arctic area.
The improved climatic conditions of the postglacial period caused the arctic
fauna to move northward, followed closely by the subarctic and arctic-boreal
species. They may even have penetrated farther northward during the postglacial
temperature-maximum period than they do today. We must accept the hypothesis
that at least some members of the arctic fauna were forced southward into the
Atlantic-arctic and Pacific-arctic areas during the last glacial period. Thus
a number of arctic species which today have a continuous circumpolar distribu–
tion must have acquired a discontinuous distribution during the last glacial
period. The postglacial warm period would allow at least some of these species
026 | Vol_III-0636
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
to regain their continuous distribution. Subsequent adverse climatic changes
of later times, may have again resulted in a discontinuous range, especially
for those species which today have a discontinuous circumpolar distribution.
The earlier mentioned discontinuous circumpolar form complexes must be on
the other hand have derived their discontinuity as a result of earlier glacia–
tions, because the time interval since the last glacial period has probably
been too short for new species to become differentiated.Before we can give a more thorough analysis of this interesting problem,
we must learn more about the changing environmental conditions in the a A rctic
during the Quarternary P p eriod. We must also add substantially to our present
knowledge of the geographical distribution of many arctic species, and the
taxonomic interrelationships of these species must be thoroughly studied.
Consequently, the arctic fish fauna offers a great many interesting problems
for future investigators.
027 | Vol_III-0637
EA-Zoo. Nybelin: Marine Fish
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Andriashev, A. P. “New data on the ecology and distribution of fish
in the Laptev Sea,” Comptes Rendus (Doklady) de l’Acad.
Science de l’URSS. [ ?] Vol. XXIIII, No.7, Moscou, 1939.2. Ekman, S. Tiergeographie des Meeres . Leipzig, 1935.
3. v.Hofsten, N. Die Fische des Eisfjords . K.Sv.Vet.Akad.Handlingar.
Bd 54. No.10. Stockholm, 1919.4. Jensen, Ad.S. “Contributions to the Ichthyofauna of Greenland 1-3.”
Spolia Zoolog ., Musei Hauniensis, Vol.II. København, 1942.5. ----. “Contributions, etc.,4-7.” Ibid . Vol.IV, 1944.
6. ----. “Contributions, etc.,8-24.” Ibid . Vol.IX, 1948.
7. Schmidt, P. “A Revision of the Genus Triglops Reinhardt (Pisces,
Cottidae).” Annuaire Mus. Zoolog. de l’Acad , des Scien s c es
de l’URSS. Tome XXX. Leningrad, 1929.8. Taranetz, A.J. “Handbook for identification of Fishes of Soviet
Far East and adjacent waters.” Bulletin Pacific Scientif.
Inst. of Fisheries and Oceanography. Vol.11. Vladivostok,
1937.Orvar Nybelin
Arctic and Subarctic Seals
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0638
(EA-Zoology. M. J. Dunbar)
ARCTIC AND SUBARCTIC SEALS
CONTENTS
Page Fur Seals: Otariidae 1 Walrus: Odobenidae 4 Hair Seals: Phocidae 14 Physiology and Morphology 34 Bibliography 38
001 | Vol_III-0639
EA-Zoology
(Max J. Dunbar)
ARCTIC AND SUBARCTIC SEALS
All three families of the Pinnipedia (Otariidae, Odobenidae, and Phocidae)
are represented in the Arctic and Subarctic. The Pinnipedia as a group are
concentrated toward the poles rather than in the warmer waters.Fur Seals: Otariidae
Of the Otariidae, or eared seals, there are three groups in the subarctic
Pacific at present given specific rank by some authorities (35), but here
treated as subspecies, favoring the older nomenclature recently followed by
Allen (1). These are Callorhinus ursinus ursinus , breeding on the Commander
Islands in the Bering Sea; C. ursinus mimicus , breeding on Robben Island in
the Sea of Okhotak and also on the Kuril group; and C. ursinus cynocephalus ,
the famous Alaska fur seal, breeding on the Pribilof Islands in the Bering
Sea. One other member of this family, Steller’s sea-lion Eumetopias jubata ,
is found as far north as Bering Strait (44), thus barely to be included in
this article.All the fur seals are migrants, breeding in the north and spending the
winter farther south. The Commander Island seals winter mainly along the
east coast of Japan, those from the Sea of Okhotak (the mimicus group) winter–
ing farther west in the Sea of Japan (46). The Pribilof group ( cynocephalus )
is today by far the largest numerically, present estimates being as high as
002 | Vol_III-0640
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
three million individuals. These pass through the Aleutian channels in the
fall, moving southward into the Pacific as far as southern California, and
return in the spring up the coast of North America.The color of the Alaska fur seal varies with sex and age. The adult
male is reddish brown on the abdomen and limbs, darkening to almost black on
the back. The shoulders and neck are grayish. The adult female is considerabl e y
lighter, gray above and rufous beneath, the sides being brownish gray. The
young, before the first molt, are glossy black above, paling to a dark brownish
gray on the sides and abdomen, sometimes with a silvery sheen. After the first
molt the color is everywhere lighter. The pelage “consists of an outer cover–
ing of long, flattened, moderately coarse hair, beneath which is a dense coat
of long fine silky fur, which reaches on most part s of the body nearly to the
ends of the hairs” (2).The males are much larger than the females. Fully grown six-year-old
bulls reach a length of from 7 to 8 feet, and a weight, in the early spring,
of some 375 pounds. Older bulls of considerably greater weight have been
recorded, but the maximum is probably somewhat less than 500 pounds. Adult
females range in weight from about 80 to 120 pounds, and reach a length of
4 feet.The breeding habits of the Alaska fur seal are polygamous, and competition
for females is so fierce that, as a rule, only the larger and older males
enter into the running. Since the gestation period is about eleven and a
half months, the pups are born just before mating takes place each year. The
following account is quoted from Allen (1):“The old males arrive at the islands as early as April and establish them–
selves on the beaches, and they are soon followed in May and June by the females.
003 | Vol_III-0641
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
Each adult male gathers around him a harem, varying in size up to as many
as 40 or even more females, and until the end of the breeding season remains
at his chosen station, driving off other neighboring males, so that the
groups become somewhat spaced. After the birth of the young the females
are ready for mating and are occupied with the care of the pup s , going and
coming freely to and from the feeding grounds in the adjacent seas. The
nonbreeding immature males or ‘bachelors’ consort by themselves in a sep–
arate part of the shore.”Bobrinskoi, Kuznetsov, and Kuziakin (9) describe the habits of the
Commander Island fur seal [translation]: “The older males land on the rook–
eries late in the spring, followed by the younger breeding males. The females
and nonbreeding bachelor males arrive last. The females are immediately
herded by the breeding males into their harems. Within one or two days after
their arrival, the females give birth to their single offspring, and are
impregnated again within the next few days. Up to the middle of August the
males eat nothing and are incessantly on the watch, protecting the harems
which may consist of from 15 to 20 females. In the middle of August the
males enter the water and feed vigorously, thereafter leaving the rookery
and moving southward. In September or October, up to which time the young
feed exlusively on their mother’s milk, the females and the young leave the
rookery and go south. Between mid-August and mid-September all seals shed
their fur, and the black seals become gray.“The females reach puberty at the age of two, the males at the age of
three. The females mate in their third year, the males only at the age of
five or six. Before that age the young males are usually driven away from
the females by the stronger and older males.”
004 | Vol_III-0642
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
The fur seals are predominantly fisheaters. Elliott (21) recorded also
seaweed and crabs found in fur seal stomachs at the Pribilof Islands, and
Schultz and Rafn (51) examined stomachs of fur seals on migration off the
state of Washington and found many to be feeding on squid as well as herring;
one stomach contained shrimps. Barabash-Nikiforov (4) reports that the
Commander Island group of seals, like the Pribilof group, subsist mainly on
fish. The species found in the stomachs in this latter study were the Pacific
cod , ( Gadus macrocephalus ) whiting ( Theragra ), greenling ( Hexagrammos ), Atka fish
( Pleurogrammus ), and sculpin ( Myoxocephalus ). Stones are also quite commonly
found in fur seal stomachs. It has long been known that many of the Pinnipedia
have the habit of swallowing stones. It has been suggested that this habit is
connected with the high incidence of stomach parasites (roundworms) in seals;
that, in fact, the stones serve to grind the worms and thus reduce their nu m ber.
Among sealers, fishermen, and others, it is believed that the stones serve as
ballast. It is true that the stones are found in greatest abundance in the early
months of the year, when the seals are at their fattest and might be supposed
to find difficulty in diving.The North Pacific fur seal population had declined to a dangerous level
in the early years of the twentieth century. Extinction has been prevented
by international action, and the commercial kill on the Pribilof Islands is
now under strict control. A full account of the history of the protection of
this industry is given by Roberts (46). See also the more recent paper of
Bertram (8).Walrus: Odobenidae
The second family of the Pinnipedia is the family Odobenidae, containing
006 | Vol_III-0643
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
two species of walrus; Odobenus rosmarus , the Atlantic walrus, and O. diver–
gens , the Pacific walrus. The size, tusks, and generally terrifying aspect
of these creatures have made them famous since the earliest days of northern
travel. The English name is from the Norse, meaning “whale horse,” and the
Eskimo name is aivik , pronounced in varying ways according to locality. The
southern limit of their range has been retreating northward since the reces–
sion of the last Pleistocene ice sheet and has been hastened greatly during
historic times by the predatory attacks of man. The Atlantic walrus, for
instance, was found along the southern coast of Nova Scotia during the early
part of the sixteenth century and was described as breeding at Sable Island
by Jacques Cartier in 1534 (29). The restriction in range which is being
forced on the Atlantic walrus is succinctly expressed by Anderson (3) when
he describes it as having occurred in: “North Atlantic and Arctic Oceans
within historic times as far south as Gulf of St. Lawrence to Magdalen Island;
now seldom if ever appearing south of Hudson Bay and Hudson Strait; north to
northwest Greenland and Ellesmere Island; rare or casual west of Barrow Strait,
Somerset Island, and Fury and Hecla Strait.” It is found on both coasts of
Greenland, but on the west side seldom south of 65° N. latitude. In this area
it appears to concentrate, for reasons of hydrography and food supply which
are not yet fully known, in the Holteinsborg District, where the walrus hunt
is now of the greatest importance to the natives. Even here, however, Fabricius
could record as early as 1780 that “it has now become scarcer” (22). The
walrus has always been scarce in the neighborhood of Iceland. On the European
side of its distribution, the same story of decreasing range is recorded,
though not so drastically. Walrus are still found occasionally as stragglers
on the Scottish coast, and there is one record from the coast of Holland in
007 | Vol_III-0644
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
1926 (60). Their normal range in northern Europe today, however, is much
farther north. They are rare on the coast of Finmark and found in numbers
only in the neighborhood of Spitsbergen and North East Land, and in the Novaya
Zemlya area and northward. Bobrinskoi et al . (9) records them in small num–
bers near Franz Josef Land, and add that they are also found in the Kara Sea
near Novaya Zemlya and near Severnaya Zemlya, in the Laptev Sea. The north–
ward limit of distribution appears to be the northern coasts of the arctic
islands from Ellesmere Island ea s tward to Franz Josef Land and North Land
(Severnaya Zemlya). There are no records known to the write r of the walrus
having been found in the polar sea itself, away from the shores. It is by
nature a shallow-water animal, though also found in certain areas on the ice
over deep water away from land.In length, specimens of 12 and 13 feet are not uncommon, and there have
been records, or descriptions, of individual males up to 15 feet long. There
is great variation in the records and estimates of the maximum weight reached;
specimens weighing over 3,000 poun d s are probably rare, but males weighing
between 2,000 and 3,000 pounds when fully grown appear to be the rule. The
color is gray, grayish brown, or yellowish brown, and the skin of the adult
is almost hairless. The best and most complete description of the walrus is
still Murie’s (40) account of a young male specimen purchased by the Zoological
Society of London in 1867, to which the reader is referred.The hide is very thick and for any practical purpose, even for the build–
ing of the umiak or woman’s boat, it has to be split to half its thickness.
Commercial uses for this hide are now few; however, it is still used in the
manufacture of heavy traveling luggage. During the Second World War an
008 | Vol_III-0645
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
unexpected market for walrus hides from Greenland was found in North America —
the leather was used to make sparkproof mallets for use in the manufacture of
explosives. The water buffalo hides normally used for this purpose were un–
obtainable. In the old days of the walrus hunting industry, when the stock
was still considerable, the hide was sold “principally ... to Russia n and
Sweden, where it was used to manufacture harness and sole leather; it was
also twisted into tiller-ropes, and was used for protecting the rigging of
ships from chafing. In former times nearly all the rigging of vessels on
the north coasts of Norway and Russia used to be composed of Walrus-skin”
(37a). There was also a market for the hides in England and Scotland, where
they were tanned (a process which took several years), and used for various
manufactured articles, for example, polishing wheels (1). Walrus-hide ropes
were of considerable importance in the late Middle Ages. As a commercial
product, the hide of the walrus gradually became of subsidiary importance
to the ivory.In the native Eskimo economy, walrus are of great importance where they
are abundant. The meat is valuable food, and is the best dog food available.
Those [ ?] acquainted with the North will realize how vitally important dog food
is in the life of the Eskimos. The blubber is excellent fuel (internally as
food, externally for lamps), and the hide is used for harnesses and lashings,
umiaks, and sometimes dog whips (58). The ivory is carved into harpoon heads
and other implements, and also, where the skill of the carver is sufficient,
made into ornaments, cribbage boards, etc., for sale to the white man. In
some regions (as Lake Harbour in Baffin Island, and Kangamiu[?]t in West Green–
land), this souvenir trade has reached considerable size.The dentition of the walrus is aberrant and has been the subject of much
009 | Vol_III-0646
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
controversy and disagreement for some two hundred years. One reason for this
is the fact, apparent today, that there is considerable variation in the num–
ber and arrangement of the teeth in the adult. The incisors, three on each
side of each jaw in the young walrus (milk dentition), are not replaced in
the adult, with the exception, sometimes, of the third upper incisor. The
upper canines are greatly enlarged in both sexes and form the tusks which may
reach a total length of some 24 inches. The tusks of the female are thinner
and average a little less in length than those of the male. Not all the cheek
teeth of the m x ilk set are replaced by permanent te t e th. The dental formula
(I = incisor, C = canine, P = premolar, N = molar) given by Beddard (6) is,
for the milk dentition: I (3/3), C (1/1), P & M (5/4);; and for the permanent denti–
tion: I (1/0), C (1/1), M (3/3). Material examined by the author has shown, however,
that this adult formula is by no means invariable. The upper incisor and the
lower canine are sometimes absent.The walrus is an inshore bottom feeder. Various bivalve mollusks form
the bulk of its diet, such as mussels ( Mytilus , Modiolus , Modiolaria ) and
various clams ( Mya , Cardium , Saxicava ). Many of these live buried in the sand
or mud, and there seems to be little doubt that one function of the tusks of
the walrus is to dig the food out. It is seldom that the shells of these mol–
lusks are found in the stomach, and it is therefore assumed on good grounds
that the walrus is capable of removing the shells in its mouth. Considering
the crude nature of the dentition this is a remarkable feat. The shape of
the cheek teeth has, in fact, led several of the earlier field workers to sup–
pose that the diet of the walrus was largely vegetable (seaweed). There is no
direct evidence for this, although scraps of seaweed are sometimes found in
010 | Vol_III-0647
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
the stomachs, presumably taken in by accident with the animal food. Fish
and decapod crustaceans have also been recorded from walrus stomachs, and
there are several well-authenticated records of remains of the little ringed
seal ( Phoca hispida ) having been found in walrus. From personal verbal ac–
counts given to the writer by men in the Canadian Arctic and in Greenland,
it seems that seals are attacked in the water, and that it is not a question
of carrion-eating. It must be supp o sed, however, that the ringed seal is not
by any means a normal item in the walrus diet. Gray (25) quotes his father’s
account of a walrus which had killed and partly devoured a 14-foot narwhal.
Parasitic roundworms are common in the stomach and duodenum of the walrus.“The walrus is the only Pinniped that does not normally breed every
year” (7). The gestation period is 12 months, and the females are pregnant
not more frequently than every alternate year. The period of lactation is
very long, between 18 months and 2 years (7; 11). The pairing and pupping
period is in the early spring, from April to June, and takes place either
on ice floes or rocky shores. Only on e pup is born at a time.Walrus are decidedly gregarious in habit and, in areas where they are
common, it is quite usual to see them packed close together on the ice or
shore. For their size and power they are cautious, and will move away from
approaching men or boats; but when frightened or otherwise aroused they are
dangerous. They have been known to attack Eskimo hunters in their kayaks with
results fatal to the hunter; occasionally, walrus have attacked rowboats and
even motorboats. The polar bear and the walrus nurse a healthy respect for
each other, and the only serious enemy of the walrus, besides man, is the
killer whale ( Grampus orca ). When the pelagic x s eals [ ?] come close into the
heads of bays and fjords, as they sometimes do, the most probable reason is
011 | Vol_III-0648
EA-Zoo. Seals
the presence of either walrus or killer whales outside; when walrus come in,
there are probably killer whales in the n neighborhood.To say the the Atlantic w s a lrus is nonmigratory would be as untrue as to
say that it is a migrant. It does not, as the harp seal does, undertake long
regular migrations involving the whole population over large parts of its
entire distribution. On the other hand, it does move in local groups both
on breeding migrations and in more casual patterns; both types of movement
appear to be correlated with the behavior of the sea currents and hence of
the ice, but they are not found in all local groups of walrus. Thus, the wal–
rus of Southampton Island in Hudson Bay appear, from what few accounts exist,
to stay in the same general vicinity during the whole year (58). This is in
contrast to the behavior shown in another important center of distribution
in the geographical American Arctic, namely, off the coast of the Hosteinsborg
District of West Greenland, where the walrus breed far out in Davis Strait on
the ice over great depths in May and June, and incidentally do not feed at all
during this period (30). Later in the summer the herd moves in closer to the
shore and re [ ?] mains in shallower waters during the winter, depending partly on
ice conditions. The walrus is important in the native economy in the Thule
District in northwest Greenland, and seems to move south in the fall. This
follows the general rule of walrus distribution and movement, namely, that they
winter as far north as they can find open water, “retiring southward in autumn
before the advance of the unbroken ice-sheet” (2). Kane (35a) has a record
of walrus remaining until the second week in September in Rensselaer Bay (lat.
78°37′ N.) in 1853. Other migratory movements of walrus in the Greenland area
are implied by the following quotation from Hansen (30, translation): “In the
southern part of Greenland (the walrus) is very rare. In the Egedesminde
012 | Vol_III-0649
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
district i s t appear s in the fall, in September-November at Kitsigssut and
Aorfit, where it is hunted by the Greenlanders from Agto and Holsteinsborg.
In the Holsteinsborg district it appears in the fall in the Kangarsuk area
and at Taseralik at the mouth of Nordre Strömfjord. In the Sukkertoppen
district it is found from November to April and May between Kangamiut and the
northern boundary of the district.” He also adds: “On the east coast it was
formerly common at Scoresby Sound”; and, of the west coast: “Most are taken
in the spring by schooner from Holsteinsborg and Egedesminde in the west-ice.”
It is clear that there is much work to be done in this field.The movements of the Atlantic walrus in the Canadian Arctic are very im–
perfectly known. There is evidence that they are to some extent migratory,
but to print here the fragmentary pieces of knowledge available would not
serve any useful purpose. Their movements depend greatly on the behavior
of the sea ice. They normally appear, for instance, in the neighborhood of
Akpatok Island at the mouth of Ungava Bay in August and September, and are
hunted there at that time by the natives of Payne Bay. They do not now go
into Ungava Bay itself, although there are reports of earlier plenty there.
On the north shore of Hudson Strait, they are hunted during the open-water
season, especially to the eastward at the mouth of Frobisher Bay and at
Resolution Island. Their presence up the east and north coasts of Baffin
Island is sporadic and apparently hardly predictable.The Pacific walrus, Odobenus divergens , differs only slightly from the
Atlantic walrus. The tusks are longer and may reach a length of 36 inches;
they are also set somewhat differently in the jaws so as to lie more nearly
parallel in the male and slightly converging toward the points in the female.
The skull is broader and deeper anteriorly than in the Atlantic form, and
012a | Vol_III-0650
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
there are other minor differences. These are discussed in great detail by
Allen (2). In size, weight, color, and habits, the two species are very
similar.The range of the Pacific walrus is more restricted than that of the At–
lantic species and has suffered a like reduction in area since the first
arrivals of explorers and the establishment of sealing industries. The walrus
have always been reported as more abundant on the Siberian side than the
American side, a fact which is doubtless correlated with the course of the
cold arctic water which flows down the western side of Bering Sea toward the
Kamchatka coast. The western limit of range is given as Cape Shelagski,
longitude 170°34′ E. (1); to the east, the normal limit is Point Barrow,
but walrus have been seen occasionally much farther east, as far as Banks
Island. Of these reports Anderson (3) writes: “Recent (1942) reports from
western Eskimos colonized on west coast of Banks Island state that w la al rus are
taken now and then on Herschel Island and on west coast of Banks Island;
probably referable to the Pacific form, although there is a possibility that
eastern walrus may occasionally work around the north of the Arctic Archipelago.”
So far as is known, the distributions of the Atlantic and Pacific walrus do not
overlap at any point. To the north, the Pacific walrus has been seen on the
ice “as far as ships have penetrated” (1), that is, in the region of the 74th
parallel. In the southern part of its distribution, the Pacific walrus has
become very scarce. It is seldom seen on the Kamchatka coast, and, in spite
of a southward autumn migration, it is becoming scarcer in the southern part
of the Bering Sea. “In early days walruses were common about the Pribilov
Islands and at Walrus Island. With the coming of sealers, however, the walruses
have become very rare” (1). Collins (15) give s the winter and most
013 | Vol_III-0651
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
southerly range as “the general vicinity of St. Matthew Island to the Si–
berian coast in the vicinity of latitude 62° and also to a lesser extent
eastward in the area between St. Lawrence Island and N i u nivak Island.”
Bobrinskoi et al .(9) describe the distribution of the Pacific walrus in Russian
waters as “comparatively widespread in the Chukotsk Sea and in the nor [ ?] thern–
most part of the Bering Sea; only exceptionally encountered south of 60° N.
in the Bering sea.”Collins’ account is the only recent paper devoted exclusively to the
walrus. From his observations it is clear that there is a more general and
bet [ ?] ter-defined migration among the Pacific species than the Atlantic. The
animals follow the retreat of the ice edge north in May, June, and July, and
it is during this northward movement that pupping and mating take place. The
herds pass Point Hope early in July. At Wainwright, the natives hunt the wal–
rus about the first of August; at Point Barrow a little later, until early
September. From Point Barrow the walrus “swing north and west ... and then
drift south toward the Siberian side with the ice and current.” On the south-x
ward migration the narrow passage between the Big and Little Diomedes has been
reported by the natives to be “sometimes jammed with walrus for two days and
nights.”So-called “outlaw” walrus are described by Collins (15), and this phenomenon
is of special interest with regard to the occasional seal-eating habits referred
to above in the Atlantic walrus: “All the natives and other observers report
that there is an occasional ‘outlaw’ walrus. Such an animal is very large and
has very small sharp tusks that tend to stick out sideways. These animals some–
times stay in the Arctic during the winter and are always avoided by the other
walrus if possible. These outlaw animals live on seal and anything else that
014 | Vol_III-0652
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
they can kill and devour. Such ‘outlaws’ have been killed at St. Lawrence,
Di o mede, and Point Barrow during winter. Seal meat has usually been found
in their stomachs.” There is also a reference to these outlaws in Gray (25).On the subject of the present status of the Pacific walrus population,
Collins is of the opinion that, since the decline of the whaling and sealing
industries in the North Pacific and Bering Sea, the Pacific walrus population
has been increasing, that it is now holding its own, and is in no immediate
danger of extinction. From inquiries made in Alaska, the average annual kill
by Alaska natives is given as between 1,000 and 1,500 animals; the total
annual kill by Alaskan and Siberian natives is less than 2,000. This figure
is strikingly high compared to the present average ann [ ?] ual kill in West Green–
land, which from the published figures available (27) appears to be between
400 and 600 animals (Atlantic walrus). The kill in West Greenland, as else–
where, varies greatly according to ice conditions, and rose sharply in 1936
when the H d ol steinsborg natives began to hunt the walrus pelagically in motor–
boats. Figures from the Eastern Arctic of Canada are not available. It
should be remembered that these figures refer to the animals killed and
landed by the natives. The use of the rifle has caused a great wastage of
sea mammals due to the large number of animals which sink and are lost. This
wastage has been estimated as high as twice the number landed, in the sum–
mer season.Hair Seals: Phocidae
The third pinniped family, the Phocidae or “earless” seals, are the most
numerous both in [ ?] species and in individuals in the northern regions. Known
also as “hair seals,” they form the backbone of the traditional Eskimo economy
and are also exploited on a large scale commercially. Together with the walrus
015 | Vol_III-0653
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
they are distinguished taxonomically from the Otariidae by the absence of
the external pinna of the ear. The pelage is less thick and the fur and
guard hairs shorter than in the Otariidae.Four genera and seven species are recognized in arctic and subarctic
regions: Phoca vitulina , harbor seal (Eskimo kassigiak , krassigiak , or
variants; in Greenlandic written kasigiak ); P. hispida (or P. foetida ),
ringed seal, rough seal, jar seal, fjord seal, or “floe rat” ( Eskimo Eskimo netsuk ,
netsek , nechuk ; in Greenlandic script natseq ); P. groenlandica , harp seal,
saddleback, Greenland seal (in Canadian Eskimo kyoli , kyolik; in Greenlandic
atak , plus a variety of special names for various stages in the life cy c le . —
( T t he writer has found no explanation for the remarkable difference between
the Canadian and Greenlandic words for this seal) : ; P. fasciata , ribbon seal;
Cystophora cristata , hooded seal, bladdernose ( netchiuak in Canada, in Greenlandic Eskimo nat–
serssuak, the “big natseq ”); Erignathus barbatus ), bearded seal, squareflipper,
ground seal (Canadian Eskimo ugrug , ugjuk , oogjook ; in Greenlandic Eskimo ugssuk );
Halichoerus grypus , gray seal.The genus Phoca has recently been reviewed by Doutt in a most valuable
paper (18) which also contained the first description of a freshwater sub–
species of vitulina .The harbor seal ( Phoca vitulina ) is more abundant in the temperate than
in the arctic region. It is the common seal of the Atlantic and Pacific
coasts of Canada and of the shores of northern Europe. It is, however, suf–
ficiently common in the Arctic to warrant serious attention here, and has
always played a special part in the native economy by virtue of the beauty
of its spotted skin. It is much prized by the Eskimo womenfolk for use as
clothing. There is a remarkable variation shown in the color of the pelt;
016 | Vol_III-0654
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
the writer agrees with Doutt (18) that there is no better way of describing
the color than by quoting the excellent description given by Allen (2): “Color
variable. Above, usually yellowish-gray, varied with irregular spots of dark-
brown or black; beneath, yellowish-white, usually with smaller spots of dark-
brown. Sometimes uniform brownish-yellow above, and somewhat paler below,
entirely without spots; or uniform dark-gray above, and pale yellowish-white
below, everywhere unspotted. Not infrequently everywhere dark-brown or
blackish, varied with irregular streaks and small spots of yellowish-brown;
the head wholly blackish from the m n ose to beyond the eyes; the lips and
around the eyes rusty yellow. Length of male, 5 to 6 feet; of female, some–
what less. Young at birth uniform soiled-white or yellowish-white, changing
to darker with the first moult.”Doutt makes the comment on this description that Allen may have based it
partly on preserved specimens, in which case the oxidation which takes place
when they are allowed to dry with the grease on them gives them a more yellowish
tinge than in the natural condition. It has been the experience of the writer
that the harbor seal is much darker in the northern parts of its range than
farther south, and the normal kasigiak skin seen in the Arctic is dark, some–
times quite black, with whitish and yellowish mottlings. The skin color is
sometimes misleading as a taxonomic character, and the various species of
Phoca , as well as the subspecies of P. vitulina , are distinguished on constant
skeletal characters which need not be considered for the purposes of the present
article.The harbor seal, over the whole of its range, is a creature of both inland
waters (fjords and bays) and of the outlying skerries. In its northern limits
017 | Vol_III-0655
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
it differs markedly from the fjord seal, P. hispida , in the fact that it is not
at all an animal of the ice. It is normally met singly, never in herds, in ice–
free water. It is seldom found in the winter in areas where the salt water is
frozen. This leads one to suppose that the harbor seal, at least in the North,
is migratory, but there is no definitive work on this point to which reference
can be made. The young are born usually on the beach from late May to early
July, and the gestation period is about ten months. Mating may take place
in the water.Following the careful taxonomic work of Doutt (18), six subspecies of
vitulina are at present established, of which five are found in northern
regions.P. vitulina vitulina : the harbor seal of the coasts of west and north–
west Europe, found as far north as arctic Norway and Finland, and along the
coasts of Spitsbergen and the shores of the Barents Sea (44). It has also
been reported from the Baltic.P. vitulina concolor : the harbor seal of the American side of the At–
lantic; in the North, the harbor seal of the Canadian Eastern Arctic and
Greenland. It is known from as far north as Ellesmere Island, but it is
commoner in the more southern regions. Even in southern Baffin Island and
at Southampton Island in Hudson Bay it is not common. It invades Ungava Bay
[ ?] in small numbers only, and is more common on the Labrador coast. In
Greenland, it is known as far north as Upernivik but is on the whole a southern
form. It is fairly common in the fjords of the Godthaab and Frederikshaab
Districts, but has become scarcer in recent years (30). In East Greenland,
it is fairly common up to Angmagssalik, with occasional individuals seen as
far north as Scoresby Sound.
018 | Vol_III-0656
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
P. vitulina richardii : Pacific harbor seal, restricted to the American
side of the North Pacific. Recorded, in our area, from south and west coasts
of Alaska, and as far north as Point Barrow; occasionally also farther east
to Herschel Island.P. vitulina largha : the harbor seal of the Asiatic side of the North
Pacific, known from the Seas of Okhotsk and Japan, from Kamchatka, and from
the western shores of the Bering Sea, but rare to the west of East Cape.P. vitulina mellonae: This subspecies was identified by Doutt (18) on
the basis of an examination of material from Seal Lake, in the Ungava Penin[?]–
sula just east of Richmond Gulf on Hudson Bay. Seal Lake lies over 800 feet
above sea level, and the seals are landlocked. The most probable manner in
which the seal became isolated is considered to be by the land uplift [?]
following the retreat of the last ice sheet, and Doutt, going on both geo–
logical and anatomical evidence, calculates the probable time of isolation
as between 8,000 and 3,000 years. This is a very interesting example of
speciation under conditions of geographical isolation. It is the more inter–
esting in that Doutt considers that the extent of variation of mellonae from
the Atlantic form ( concolor ) is no less than the variation from the Pacific
form ( richardii ), and that there is a definite possibility that the freshwater
seal of the Seal Lake region may have come from the Pacific Ocean at a time
when the Atlantic entrance to Hudson Bay was dammed by ice.The harbor seal ascends rivers and enters lakes very readily, especially
in the spring; there are many records of this, over the whole range of the
species. Phoca vitulina mellonae is, however, the only instance of a land–
locked harbor seal so far recorded. All other landlocked seals belong to the
hispida group (ringed seal).
019 | Vol_III-0657
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
Harbor seals are known from fresh water as seasonal migrants in several
regions of the Ungava Peninsula. Before the numbers of the species declined,
they were common in the rivers flowing into Ungava Bay; one river flowing
into Leaf Bay, on the western side of Ungava Bay, has a name derived from the
former presence of harbor seals - Kasigiaksiovik. There have been reports
of seals, so far unconfirmed, from as far south as Lake Mistassini; thus
Neilson (43) writes: “ani [ ?] mals believed to be seals have been reported at
intervals in Lake Mistassini.” The general name of “ranger” seal is often
applied to these freshwater forms (both migratory and landlocked). The name
has no systematic value whatever, since it is also used for the freshwater
ringed seal.Information on the food habits of the harbor seal in the North is scarce;
there is some evidence that fish are consumed to a greater degree than by the
ringed seal, but that planktonic crustaceans also play some part in the diet.
One of Doutt’s specimens was found to have the stomach nearly filled with
“well digested pieces of fish.” Certainly what little work has been done on
the food habits of this seal in the temperate regions of its distribution has
shown a predominantly fish-eating habit (in both the Atlantic (28) and the
Pacific (14; 48). In 1948, a harbor seal taken in Canadian maritime waters
was found to contain in its stomach skeletal elements of a sturgeon (D. M. Scott,
unpublished data).The ringed seal ( Phoca hispida ) is the commonest and most widespread seal
of the Arctic. To the north, its distribution, according to recent accounts,
extends to the Pole, wherever there is open water in the ice. The Canadian
Arctic Expedition (1913-18) found seal in the polar sea north of Alaska and
west of the Canadian Archipelago, and the ringed seal provided Stefansson
020 | Vol_III-0658
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
and Storkerson with food on their journeys over that region (57). The Papanin
Expedition of 1937 observed seal from the first days of [ ?] their stay on the
ice “swimming around at the surface of the water, in the leads, gulping down
shrimps in a leisurely way” (57). In certain parts of its range, this seal
has moved farther north in recent decades following the invasion of Atlantic
water northward. There is some evidence that this is true of West Greenland,
and perhaps also the Canadian Eastern Arctic (19). The ringed seal is circum–
polar, and penetrates almost as far south as the ice itself. Thus it is
found on the Labrador coast, on the Norwegian coast (44) down to Bergen at times, and
in the Bering Sea. There is also a Baltic group of hispida . Landlocked seals
of Lake Baikal and the Caspian Sea are closely related to this species (59),
and hispida itself invades the fresh water elsewhere, as for instance into
Lake Nettilling on Baffin Island. Anderson (3) has divided the species into
three subspecies.In the economy of the native Eskimo, the ringed seal is one of the most
important animals in the North. It is closely associated with the ice, and
though not migratory in the ordinary sense, it moves toward or away from land
according to the behavior of the ice. Thus it is very common to find the
ringed seal disappearing from the inlets and fjords in the early summer, when
the ice moves out, to return again when the new winter ice begins to form.
There is, in point of fact, some question as to whether this is the proper
interpretation of the seal’s behavior, or whether the immediate cause of its
movement away from the inlets is the di s appearance of important food organisms
(such as the amphipod crustacean Themisto libellula ). The movement of Themisto ,
and of the ice, may both be caused by the same hydrographic conditions which
set up an outgoing surface current from the fjords (20). It is nevertheless
021 | Vol_III-0659
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
noticeable that the ringed seal remains all summer long in the regions of
melting ice at the heads of fjords with active glaciers.The ringed seals are not gregarious and are not seen in herds. Breathing
holes are kept open in the ice during the winter, and when the sun returns in
the early months of the year, the seals are commonly to be seen lying on the
ice beside the breathing holes. The young are born from February to April,
on the ice, in a shelter dug out of the snow. The pups are white, or yellowish-
white, and remain so for two to three weeks until the first molt; their coat
is soft, thick, and woolly. According to Hansen (30), the mothers [ ?] will oc–
casionally abandon their young under adverse weather conditions, in which
case the young are likely to die, but many, lacking mothers, will develop
abnormally slowly, so that the newborn appearance and color is retained for
several months.There is almost as much variation in pelt color in the ringed seal as
in the harbor seal. After the first molt, the young first-year seal takes
on a glossy coat somewhat thicker than in the adult. It may be pure gray,
dark gray, or yellowish gray, and may be mottled with ringlike marks in white
or yellow-brown; the underside is light in color. The effect is often silvery,
and it is this stage of the seal which is known in the Eastern Arctic of Canada
as the “silver jar.” Older individuals lose much of the beauty of this early
pelt, and are often hard to distinguish (on color pattern alone) from adult
harbor seal. The hair is not so close nor so soft, however, as in the harbor
seal, and the mottling is usually less defined and less striking. The belly
is white or yellowish; the underside of the very short tail, the inner sur–
faces of the [ ?] hind flippers and at the axilla of the front flippers are
often a light tawny color. The back is of varying depth of gray-brown, often
022 | Vol_III-0660
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
with the ringlike mottlings of lighter color from which the seal gets its
name. Phoca hispida is small, seldom exceeding five feet in length.From all present evidence, the ringed seal is not a fisheater. Small
sculpins, and occasionally capelin ( Mallotus ) and other fish may figure at
intervals in the diet, but for the most part the ringed seal is a planktonic
feeder, subsisting on the commoner and larger planktonic crustaceans. Other
planktonic forms, such as the pteropod mollusk Limacina (sea butterfly), are
also eaten at times. This planktonic habit of feeding appears to be true in
summer at least, in the Canadian Eastern Arctic, and there is (from informa–
tion received from natives and white residents) evidence [ ?] that the habit is
continued throughout the year. Kumlien (37), however, found the ringed seal
subsisting mainly on fish during the winter in Cumberland [ ?] Gulf: “The food
of the adults consists largely of different species of crustaceans, and
during the winter, especially, they subsist to a considerable extent on fish.”
But most of the records are of planktonic crustaceans. Gray (26) quotes sev–
eral earlier accounts, and himself found the stomachs of the ringed seals he
examined to be full of the amphipods Themi s to libellula and Gammarus locusta
and the euphausiid Meganyctiphanes norvegica ; Gray’s work was done in the
Greenland Sea. Dunbar (20) examined the stomachs of 47 ringed seals at Lake
Harbour and Clyde River (Baffin Island) in August 1939, and August and Septem–
ber 1940. During August at Lake Harbour, Themisto libellula was by far the
most important animal in the diet; many of the individuals were feeding ex–
clusively on this crustacean. Two specimens had been eating the mysid crus–
tacean Mysis oculata almost to the exclusion of everything else. During
September, at Clyde River, these crustaceans were absent or greatly reduced
in numbers, and the ringed seal stomachs were almost empty. Material collected
023 | Vol_III-0661
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
in Ungava Bay in 1948 by Hildebrand (unpublished data) shows the ringed seal
in that area to have been feeding mainly on Mysis and euphausiids of the genus
Thysanoessa. Johansen (34), reporting on the ringed seal examined by the Dan–
mark expedition in East Greenland, also commented on the planktonic feeding:
“All the seals shot in the drift ice had pelagic amphipods in their stomachs
... but they also live naturally on the polar cod ( Gadus saida ) ... we
found the otoliths in their stomachs, which also contained the jaws of squids,
Mysidae and other Crustacea.” In contrast to many species of seal, Phoca
hispida is comparatively free of parasitic worms in the stomach and intestine,
a freedom which is no doubt due to its feeding habits.The ribbon seal ( Phoca fasciata ) is rare and of very restricted range.
The following shortened description is taken from Allen (2):“ Adult male : General color, dark brown. A narrow yellowish-white band
surrounds the neck extending forward to the middle of the head above; another
broader yellowish-white band encircles the hinder portion of the body, from
which a branch runs forward on each side to the shoulder, the two branches
becoming confluent on the median line of the body below, but widely separated
above.“ Adult female : Uniform pale grayish-yellow or grayish-brown, with the
exception of an obscure narrow transverse whitish band across the lower part
of the back. The extremities and the back are darker, with a faint indication
of the dark ‘saddle’-mark seen in the male.“ Young: The young of both sexes are said to resemble the adult female.”
In size, the male attains a length of a little over 6 feet; the females,
about 5 1/2 feet. Pohle (44) gives the geographic distribution simply as “Bering
Strait,” but it seems to be a little more widespread than that. The type
024 | Vol_III-0662
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
locality is the Kuril Islands off the tip of the Kamchatka Peninsula, and
Anderson (3) gives the range as “mostly along the Asiatic shores of the
north Pacific from Saghalien Island, Kurile Islands, Okhotsk Sea, and Kam–
chatka to Bering Sea, north to East Cape and Point Barrow; occasionally taken
on the Aleutian Islands.” The species is so rare that almost nothing is known
of its habits.Harp Seal . Both the hapr harp seal or saddleback ( phoca groenlandica ) and the
hooded seal ( Cystophora cristata ) are of considerable commercial significance
as well as being very important in the native Eskimo economy. Both are
pelagic, migratory species.The harp seal reaches a length of about 6 1/2 feet in the male and 6 feet
in the female. The species owes its name to the broad dark band along the
sides in the adult. This band, in the words of Robert Brown (1), “commences
at the root of the neck ... and curves downwards and backwards at each side
superior to the anterior flippers, reaches downwards to the abdominal region,
whence it curves backwards anteriorly to the posterior flippers, where it
gradually disappears, reaching further in some individuals than in others.”
This banding is of variable definition in different individuals, and of vary–
ing shades from dark gray to black. The background color of the pelt in the
adult is a light brown-gray above and a dingy white or “tranished silvery hue”
beneath (10). The color of the upper parts is usually lighter in the females
than in the males, and the saddle is less dark and less well defined in
females. Sometimes it is broken up into large spots of dark color. Very
rarely an almost pure black adult pelage occurs.There has been much confusion in the past over the color patterns shown
by the harp seal, the result of inadequate knowledge of the age of the specimens
025 | Vol_III-0663
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
examined. The whole question has been authoritatively reviewed by Sivertsen
(52), to which paper the reader is referred for detailed information. The
newly born cubs are whitish, and the hair is thick and woolly, as in the
ringed seal. The first molt begins two weeks after birth and is complete
by the end of the first month of life. For the description of the young and
adolescent animals, it is convenient to use (but to modify) the terminology
used by Smirnov (52; 54; 55). The term “gray cub” is applied to the seal
after the first molt to the end of the first year; “gray seal” for immature
stages later than the first year; in English it is easily confused with
Halichoerus , and the term “gray young” is therefore suggested instead. This
corresponds more or less to the Newfoundland term “bedlamer.”The gray cubs are dark gray in color on back and sides, and the under–
surface of trunk and head is light or off-white. During the first year
darker mottlings appear on the back and sides. There is some variation in
this coloration. The gray young (one- and two-year-olds) are also gray, but
are distinguished from the cubs by the appearance of brown color, which
increases with age. These gray young, or bedlamers, are known by the Danes
as blaasiden (blue sides), and as agdlagtut by the Greenlanders. The spots
in the gray young may either increase or decrease in intensity with age, ac–
cording to individual variation. Maturity and adult markings are reached in
the fourth or fifth year (three- or four-year-olds). There is still some
disagreement on the age of maturity between the only two workers in this field,
Smirnov and Sivertsen.The harp seal is a North Atlantic and arctic form, ranging from Newfoundland
and the Canadian Eastern Arctic (Hudson Bay to Ellesmere Island) to the White
Sea, and the vicinity of Spitsbergen and Novaya Zemlya. It is common in the
026 | Vol_III-0664
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
waters of Greenland. It does not as a rule go farther west than Hudson Bay
and Lancaster Sound, but there have been two records of harp seals from
Canadian northwestern waters — one from Aklavik in 1926 and one from Mel–
bourne Island, Queen Maud Gulf, in 1941 (3; 45).The harp seals breed on the ice in the early part of the year in three
distinct regions: ( 1 ) east of northern Newfoundland and to the west in the Gulf
of St. Lawrence; ( 2 ) in the Greenland Sea between Iceland and Spitsbergen;
( 3 ) in the White Sea. The summer distribution of these groups is probably
as follows: ( 1 ) the west Greenland coast, Davis Strait, Baffin Bay, and the
Canadian Eastern Arctic; ( 2 ) East Greenland and the Greenland Sea, and waters
west of Spitsbergen; ( 3 ) east of Spitsbergen, and the waters round Novaya
Zemlya. It should be emphasized here that this assumption of the summer range
of the various breeding groups is based on general impressions and the opin–
ions of [ ?] whalers and sealers; it is the distribution given by Nansen (41).
There has been no scientific work done to trace the precise movements of this
seal on migration, with the exception of the recent researches of Sivertsen
in the White Sea. Thus it is not known whether the three groups are genetically
isolated, the one from the other, or whether there is a greater or lesser degree
of overlapping. On [ ?] the basis of small differences in skull measurements,
Smirnov (53) has divided the species into three subspecies, implying genetic
isolation; but it is doubtful whether the numbers examined can give signifi–
cance to the subdivision. There are also small differences in the season of
parturition which suggest divergent habits. Thus the White Sea seals are born
during an extended period from the end of January to the beginning of April,
most of them between February 20 and March 5 in average years; the Greenland
027 | Vol_III-0665
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
Sea group [ ?] produce the pups later in the season on the average, in late March
and April; and the Newfoundland group mostly in the first two weeks of March.
The gestation period is a little over eleven months, so that pupping and
mating take place within a few weeks of each other.For the behavior of the harp seal studied for the first time in detail,
the reader is referred to Sivertsen (52). There is not space here to do more
than describe in outline the migrations of this interesting animal. In the
White Sea group, the mature seals arrive on the breeding grounds in January.
In April, this breeding group is joined from the north by the adolescent, im–
mature seals up to three years of age, coming into the White Sea to molt. Both
adults and immature seals then molt until May. The rest of the year is spent
in the summer range to the north, in the Spitsbergen and Novaya Zemlya region.
The Jan Mayen harp seals, breeding between Iceland and Spitsbergen, over a
large area in which the concentration of seals varies in position from year to
year, collect on the ice during the early months of the year. In m M ay, the
parturition, copulation, and molting are over, and the seals move off, east
and north, to East Greenland and Spitsbergen. The summer distribution of this
group on the East Greenland coast is restricted, for they are scarce north of
Scoresby Sound, and the harp seals which frequent the extreme southern portion
of the east coast are thought to belong to the Newfoundland breeding group.The bulk of the Newfoundland group spend the summer and fall in West
Greenland, to the best of our belief. Certainly the harp seal population
of West Greenland is much greater than that of the Canadian Eastern Arctic,
which population also breeds in the Newfoundland area. The harp seals arrive
at the Greenland coast from the west at the end of May. They strike the
028 | Vol_III-0666
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
coast in the neighborhood of the Frederikshaab or Godthaab District, and from
there spread north as far as Thule and south to the Julianehaab District, and
apparently also round Cape Farewell to the extreme southeast part of Greenland.
As in the case of the ringed seal, the distribution of harp seal along the
West Greenland coast has shifted northward during the twentieth century, in
correlation with hydrographic changes. In the northern districts they remain
in the coastal waters all summer long (they are especially abundant in summer
in the Disko Bay region); but in southwest Greenland they disappear from the
fjords in July, to reappear again in September. This summer offshore move–
ment, analogous to the similar behavior of the ringed seal, appears to be
connected with the movements of the capelin ( Mallotus ), which forms as impor–
tant a part of the harp seal diet as does Themisto for the ringed seal. When
the harp seals reappear in the fjords in September they are fat, in contrast
to their underfed condition on arrival at the coast in May. The seals leave
the coast in the northern districts when the ice begins to form; in the south–
west of Greenland, where the water does not freeze in winter, the seals start
on their migration in December, join the northern group, and cross over to
the Labrador coast. The Canadian harp seals leave a little earlier than either
the northern or southern Greenland group, in accordance with the more arctic
conditions on the Canadian side. It is during this southern migration that
the harp seals, never very significant to the Canadian Eskimo economy, attain
their greatest importance to Eskimos of Hudson Strait, and especially those
few now left at Port Burwell. The Button Islands, Gray Strait, and the narrow
Ikerasak or McLelan Strait are on the direct route of most of the harp seals
from the Canadian side.Down Labrador, the harp seals hug the rocky coast, and on reaching
029 | Vol_III-0667
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
Belle Isle the majority are deflected eastward, down the east coast of New–
foundland to the Grand Banks. Some go through the Strait of Belle Isle and
around the west and south of Newfoundland; some of these apparently stay in
the Gulf of St. Lawrence and form the western breeding group in March. The
majority spend part of December, the whole of January, and part of February
feeding on the Gra n d Banks, and return north to the breeding grounds east of
Newfoundland, where they arrive toward the end of February.The harp seal population is still considerable, but there have been many
warnings that continued commercial sealing operations will endanger the species.
Without adequate scientific work, it is impossible to give a good opinion on
this point. The matter is treated briefly elsewhere (19).The adult harp seal has a wide diet, and appears to feed both pelagically
and, to a much lesser degree, at the bottom. In Frobisher Bay, Baffin Island,
Dunbar (20) recorded one harp seal stomach full of the crustacean Mysis oculata ,
with a few other planktonic forms such as Mysis mixta and T [ ?] he misto libellula .
In Greenland, many stomachs examined by the author at Godthaab were full of
capelin ( Mallotus villosus ); several also contained euphausiid crustaceans,
but these may have been derived from the stomachs of the capelin. The capelin
is certainly a most important food item for the harp seal, both in Greenland
and in Newfoundland. The White Sea group were reported by Smirnov (55) as
eating mainly pelagic crustaceans (especially euphausiids) and the polar cod;
next came the capelin, the herring, and pelagic mollusks. Other fish were
of less importance. During the breeding and molting season the seal appears
to eat nothing. The most detailed account of the food habits is given by
Sivertsen (52) for the White Sea group. During the first year (gray cubs),
the diet consisted entirely of planktonic crustaceans, including Anonyx nugax ,
030 | Vol_III-0668
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
Thysanoessa raschii , and T. inermis . The adolescents (gray young) added ben–
thonic forms such as the prawns ( Spirontocaris and Crangon ) and also capelin.
The adults, while on the breeding grounds, were found to be fasting. Adults
taken in the summer were feeding on planktonic amphipods and euphausiids.
Sivertsen quotes several authorities who found fish as well as planktonic
forms in harp seal stomachs.The hooded seal or bladdernose ( Cystophora cristata ) is much less abun–
dant than the harp seal. It breeds in the Jan Mayen area and east of New–
foundland, usually a little removed from the harp seal herds. On the Newfound–
land breeding grounds, the hooded seal lies farther out and to the east of the
harps, on the heavier ice. The males are somewhat larger than the females,
reaching a length of over 8 feet, compared to somewhat under 7 feet in the
female. The male is also distinguished by the presence of the “ H h ood” or nasal
sac, situated above the snout, which is capable of inflation at moments of
wrath or excitement. The males are reported to be of a fierce, aggressive
nature.The general color in both sexes is gray, lighter below than above. In
adolescent individuals the coat is a handsome plain gray and often silvery;
adults normally develop mottlings of dark brown or black.The summer distribution of this seal appears to be restricted, although
scattered individuals are not infrequently reported from faraway points.
Southeast and southwest Greenland is the center of concentration in summer;
but the hooded seal is essentially an animal of the open sea or of the heavy
pack ice, and it may be present in regions not normally visited by men. There
is no doubt that hooded seals were formerly more plentiful than they are today;
they were hunted, for instance, in Disko Bay at least up to the beginning of
the T t wentieth century. Today they are seldom if ever seen there. They are
031 | Vol_III-0669
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
rare in the Canadian Arctic, though sometimes seen at the east end of Hudson
Strait. There is one record from Ellesmere Island, and two quite remarkable
records from the western Ar [ ?] c tic — at Herschel Island in 1931, and at Tuktuyaktok
in 1942-43 (45). Hooded seals are of only sporadic occurrence in Spitsbergen
and the Barents Sea. Single specimens, however, according to Bobrinskoi et al .
(1), may accidentally reach as far east as the Yenisei River.No t much is known about the migrations of the hooded seals; Hansen (30)
writes that their breeding grounds “are only partly known.” In migrating to
the Newfoundland breeding area, they are reported to move down the Labrador
coast parallel to the route of the harp seals, but farther out to sea (5).
On the Greenland coast they appear in two migrations; first in April and May,
when they approach the Holsteinsborg District from Davis Strait (having moved
considerably due north from the breeding grounds) and move southward down the
coast. In June the seal leaves the coast again “presumably along the outer
edge of the floe-ice past Cape Farewell and up into Denmark Strait, where it
gathers in large herds to moult on the ice, about opposite the Blosseville
coast” (30). The hoodies reappear along the most southerly coast of Greenland,
disappearing again in August and September, probably over to the ice in Davis
Strait. In East Greenland, these seals appear first in April from the north–
east, moving off again in May. They return in July and remain in the waters
of southeast Greenland until the fall. It is evident that there is much detail
to be filled in, in this matter. As with the harp seal, the gestation period
is over eleven months and the mating season is in March; also, as with the harp
seal, it is still an open question whether mating takes place in the water or
on the ice, or both.
032 | Vol_III-0670
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
The bearded seal , squareflipper, or ugrug ( Erignathus barbatus ) is the
largest of the common northern Phocidae. The males reaches a length of 10
feet, the female slightly less; newly born pups can measure almost 5 feet in
length. The gestation period is eleven months, and the young are born in
April and May. As usual among the Pinnipedia, only one pup is born to each
female per season. The pups when born are a dark mouse-gray color, sometimes
with a reddish-brown tinge. The adult color is variable. Smirnov (53)
describes it as “without spots ... more or less uniformly brownish-gray,
lighter on the belly; face and throat light silvery or ashgrey.” The author
has seen fresh specimens light gray in color, sometimes with a yellowish
tinge.The bearded seal is circumpolar in distribution, never numerous in any
locality, and not of gregarious habit. Pohle (44) gives its range as “from
the north coasts of the continents to edge of pack and beyond.” This does not
give the whole picture, for the bearded seal is common much farther south
than these limits. Thus it is found all around the shores of Greenland,
with the exception of the extreme north and northeast; across arctic and sub–
arctic North America, in the Bering Sea, south to the Amur River on the Asiatic
side of the North Pacific, and to the Aleutians on the American side; in Hudson
Bay, Hudson Strait, Ungava Bay, Labrador, and even occasionally in Newfoundland
waters; and over the Siberian shelf.Erignathus is not truly migratory. From its sporadic occurrence in many
regions and from its occasional absence for several weeks from localities
where it is common, it may be inferred that the movements of bearded seals
are casual and unorganized. During the winter, they remain in northern areas
wherever there is enough open water to suit them. From the findings of
033 | Vol_III-0671
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
Soper (56), it seems that these seals are not abundant in the waters of southern
Baffin Island; the present writer has found them to be more common in Ungava
Bay and on the south side of Hudson Strait than in Baffin Island waters.
During two summers’ work in Ungava Bay, the ratio of bearded seal to ringed
seal seen was a little higher than one to three (Dunbar and Hildebrand, un–
published data).This species is of great importance to the Eskimo. The meat is used as
food for both men and dogs. The skin is tough and durable and is used for
harpoon lines, dog whips, kayaks, thongs for various purposes, and, in some
parts, for the u n m iak or woman’s boat. The bearded seal skin makes the best
kamik (skin boot t ) soles.In some parts of the North the liver of the bearded seal has the reputa–
tion of being toxic to both men and dogs. Opinion on this point is [ ?] by no
means unanimous, and it may be that the toxicity is only temporary, depending
on the food habits of the seal immediately before death. Again, it may be
that the seal, in those regions where the liver is poisonous, has local food
habits which might be responsible for the toxic substance. At all events,
the liver is freely eaten in many parts (Ungava Bay, for instance) without
ill effects. It is possible, according to the work of Rodahl and Moore (47),
that the toxicity is due to the very high concentrations of vitamin A found
in some bearded seal (also polar bear) livers.The bearded seal is a bottom feeder, eating prawns, clams, and benthonic
fish (sculpins, etc.). Its food habits are thus similar to those of the walrus.
Like the walrus, also, it invariably carries large numbers, often several hun–
dreds, of parasitic roundworms in its stomach. These are quite often attached
to the stomach wall in clumps. The intestine is also often colonized by tape–
worms in great quantity.
034 | Vol_III-0672
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
The gray seal ( Halichoerus grypus ) is a North Atlantic species of very
limited range, and only occasionally enters arctic or subarctic waters. It
is rare at the level of Belle Isle on the American side, and there are a few
records, some doubtful, from West Greenland. (The type locality, however,
does happen to be Greenland, the specimen having been described by Fabricius
(23). It is common on the Iceland coasts. It is not known from Spitsbergen,
but according to Pohle (44) and Bobrinskoi, it occasionally reaches as far
as Novaya Zemlya. Bobrinskoi et al. (9) have recorded between 500 and 600
gray seal rookeries along the Russian coast, and described the migrations of
this species as being local only. The gray seal males are about 8 feet in
length, the females smaller, usually under 7 feet. The color is silver-gray,
ash-gray, or dusky, usually with obscure mottlings of darker color.Physiology and Morphology
The morphological modifications by which the Pinn [ ?] i pedia differ from the
rest of the Carnivora are already well known. They are all associated with
a return to an aquatic life, and include the fusiform body shape, the modifica–
tion of limbs into flippers, the reduction of claws and of milk dentition; and
it is said (though the writer has never had the opportunity to confirm this)
that in some species the nostrils are normally closed and require muscular
effort to open them. Much less known are the physiological specializations
which the seals, together with other diving animals, have evolved. On the
physiology of respiration in diving mammals, all work up to 1939 has been sum–
marized by Irving (31); a similar review of work on water balance (osmotic
equilibrium) up to 1939 is found in Fletcher (24). Later work of this kind on
seals includes publications by Scholander (49); Scholander, Irving, and Grin–
nell (50); Irving, Scholander, and Grinnell (32; 33).
035 | Vol_III-0673
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
The results of these researches may be summarized as follows: ( 1 ) the
maximum length of time during which the harbour seal and the gray seal can
safely remain submerged is about 15 to 20 minutes; from observations of
various men in the field, includ e ing sealing captains, this figure is correct
for harp seal and hooded seal as well. ( 2 ) The oxygen capacity of the blood
of seals is about one-third greater than is usual in land mammals; this
increased capacity appears to be due both to increased concentration of red
corpuscles and to a larger carrying capacity in the corpuscles themselves.
(3) The lungs of seals, or of any diving animals, are not greater in propor–
tion to body size or weight than those of land mammals or birds. ( 4 ) T h e
blood volume of seals, that is, the proportion of blood to body volume, is
only slightly greater than in land mammals, if at all. ( 5 ) Special anatom–
ical modifications found in the circulatory system of seals and other diving
mammals, such as well-developed retia mirabilia , enlarged vena cava , and a
muscular band which surround s the vena cava at the diaphragm level, may have
important effects in altering the circulation and in storing oxygenated blood,
at least temp o rarily. Circulation through certain parts of the body, as for
instance the hind flippers, is reduced during diving. Irving considers that
a differential vascular control of the oxygen distribution during diving is
of great importance; according to his theory, the brain and heart are kept
supplied with oxygen, while “organs with little susceptibility for oxygen
lack, like the muscles, are confined to work anaerobically or nearly so during
the dive” (49). Scholander’s work supports this theory. ( 6 ) The sensitivity
of the respiratory system to carbon dioxide, which accumulates during diving,
is reduced in diving mammals. ( 7 ) The most remarkable physiological change
during diving, and undoubtedly a highly important adaptive charact [ ?] eristic,
036 | Vol_III-0674
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
is the large and immediate reduction in the metabolic rate. Muscular activity
is much relaxed, and the heart rate in Scholander’s experimental seals was
cut down immediately on submersion from 150 beats per minute to 10 beats per
minute. The low frequency lasted the whole period of submersion, and was un–
affected by any struggling of the animal. Such bradycardia, Scholander found,
“can be induced by any interference with the proper gaseous exchange ... and
can also be induced by psychical factors, as frightening.” Later work showed
that the oxygen consumption from the blood following this immediate bradycardia
was as low as one-fifth of the normal value, and that the oxygen supply was
sufficient for from 15 to 20 minutes. Bradycardia sometimes sets in slowly,
in which case the oxygen is used more radily rapidly and last s for only 8 or 9 minutes.
In spite of the reduction of heart rate down to 10% or less of the normal, the
individual heartbeats are normal and of full force and amplitude, so that the
arterial blood pressure remains at the normal level. The lactic acid content
of the blood rises only slowly during diving, and this was found to be true
whether the seal struggled or was quiescent; similarly the oxygen drain from
the blood was not affected by struggling. These observations lead one to sup–
pose that the circulation through the muscles during diving is greatly reduced,
and this inference is supported by the fact that, on recovery, at the surface,
the lactic acid content of the blood rises very rapidly, and the extent of
the increase is related to the length of the submersion period (49). ( 8 ) In
correlation with these effects of reduced metabolism, the temperature of the
seal drops during diving; the blubber and the brain were found to drop the
most — about 2.5°C. during a 15-minute dive (50). This indicated a reduction
of heat production of about 50% during diving.
037 | Vol_III-0675
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Seals
Seals, in common with other marine mammals, show certain modifications
in renal and general cellular physiology in response to the nature of the
environmental sea water. Osmotic pressures of blood and urine are higher
than in land mammals. Thus the freezing-point depression of the blood appears
to be, on the basis of available data, about 0.69°C., as against 0.54° to
0.59°C. for man. The freezing-point depression of the urine varied from
1.72° to 3.99°C. in seal, compared to 1.8°C. in man, the increased tonicity
being due to increased salt concentration. There was found to be a discrep–
ancy between the quantity of salts ingested in the food and the amount ex–
creted in the urine; it seems that “those marine mammals which su b sist largely
on vertebrates have no special salt-clearance problem; whereas those living
on invertebrates probably do have a special mechanism for the reduction of
urinary sal concentration” (24).The fat content of the milk of marine mammals is known to be very high,
and that of seal milk seems to be highest of all. Sivertsen (52) gives
figures of 426.5 grams per kilogram and 428.2 grams per kilogram of milk for the harp seal,
to be contrasted with 34 grams per kilogram for average cow’s milk. Small
wonder that the young cubs put on their fat so quickly!For a study of the comparative behavior of the Pinnipedia, the reader is
referred to Bertram (7). There are many interesting points in seal biology
which appear to be related, but on which little work has yet been done. Among
these are the prolonged gestation, the common habit of polygyny, the precocity
of the young, and the pattern of migration, both annual and intra-annual. The
prolonged gestation is particularly remarkable. With most seals, gestation
takes just under twelve months, contrasted with fifteen weeks for tigers, and
six months for bears, land mammals of comparable size. The gestation period
in some of the largest whales is no longer than that in seals.
038 | Vol_III-0676
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Arctic and Subarctic Seals
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Allen, G.M. Extinct and Vanishing Mammals of the Western Hemisphere,
with the Marine Species of All the Oceans. Cambridge, Mass.,
The Committee, 1942. American Committee for International
Wild Life Protection. Special Publication no.11.2. Allen, J.A. History of North American Pinnipeds . Wash., G.P.O., 1880.
3. Anderson, R.M. “Catalogue of Canadian recent mammals,” Nat.Mus.Can.
Bull . no.102, 1946. Biological Ser . no.31.3a. Austin, O.L., and Wilke, F. “Japanese fur sealing.” U.S. Dept. Interior,
Fish & Wildlife Service, Spec.Sci.Rep.Wildlife , no.63, 91 pp.
1950.4. Barabash-Nikiforov, I. “Mammals of the Commander Islands and the surround–
ing sea.” J.Mammal . vol.19, pp.423-39, 1938.5. Bartlett, R.A. “Newfoundland seals,” Ibid. vol.8, pp.207-12, 1927.
6. Beddard, F.E. Mammalia . London, Macmillan, 1902. (Cambridge Natural
History.)7. Bertram, G.C.L. “The biology of the Weddell and Crab eater Seals, with
a study of the comparative behaviour of the Pinnipedia,”
Brit.Graham Land Exped. Scientific Reports vol.1, no.1, 1940.[ ?]
8. ----. “Pribilof fur seals,” Arctic, vol.3, no.2, pp.5-85, Aug.1950.
9. Bobrinskoi, N., Kuznetsov, B., and Kuziakin, A. Opredelitel Miekopi–
taiushchikh SSSR. (Guide to Mammals of the USSR.) Moscow,
Sovetskaia Nauka, 1944, pp.162-78.10. Brown, R. “Notes on the history and geographical relations of the
Pinnipedia frequenting the Spitzbergen and Greenland seas,”
Zool.Soc.Lond. Proc . 1868, pp.405-40.11. Chapskii, K.K. “Morzh Karskogo Moria. Rezultaty issledovannia biologii,
geograficheskogo rasprostranenfia i zapasov morsha Karstogo
Moria i Novoi Zemli.” (The Walrus of the Kara Sea. Results
of the investigation of the Life History, the Geographical
Distribution and Stock of Walruses in the Kara Sea.), Leningrad.
Arkticheskii Nauchn.-Issled.Inst. Trudy , vol.67, 1936.
(English resume.)
039 | Vol_III-0677
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Arctic and Subarctic Seals - Bibliography
12. ----. “Nerpa sapadnykh Morei Sovetskoi Arktiki. Morfologicheskaia
kharateristika, biologiia, Promyshlennoi syre.” (The Ring
Seal of Western Seas of the Soviet Arctic. The Morphological
Characteristics, Biology, and Hunting Production.), Leningrad.
Arkticheskii Nauchn.-Issled.Inst. Trudy vol.145, 1940.13. ----, and Kovalev, K.V. “Promyslovye mlekopitaiushchie Barentsova i
Karskogo Norei.” (Sea mammals of the Barents and Kara Seas.),
Leningrad. Arkticheskii Nauchn.-Issled.Inst. Trudy , vol.123,1938.14. Clemens, W.A., Hart, J.L., and Wilby, G.V. “Analysis of stomach contents
of fur seals taken off the west coast of Vancouver Island in
April and May, 1935,” Ottawa, Dept. of Fisheries, Publ . pp.3-11.15. Collins, G. “Habits of the Pacific Walrus ( Odobenus divergens ),”
J.Mammal. vol.21, pp.138-44, 1940.16. Colman, J.S. “The Newfoundland seal-fishery and its possible influence
on the Greenlanders,” Polar Rec . vol.2, no.16, pp.99-103, 1938.17. ----. “The present state of the Newfoundland seal fishery,” J.Animal Ecol.
vol.6, no.1, pp.145-59, 1937.18. Dou u t t, J.K. “A review of the genus Phoca ,” Carnegie Mus. Annals vol.29,
pp.61- 2 125, 1942.19. Dunbar, M.J. “Greenland, an experiment in human ecology,” Comm.J .
March, 1947, pp.69-109.20. ----. “On the food of seals in the Canadian Eastern Arctic,” Canad.J.Res .
ser.D, vol.19, pp.150-55, 1941.21. Elliott, H.W. A Report upon the Condition of Affairs in the Territory of
Alaska. Wash., G.P.O., 1875.22. Fabricius, Otto. Fauna Groenlandica; Pattedyr og Fugle . Oversat og
Forsynet med Indledning og Kommentarer af O. Helms. København,
G.E.C. Gad, 1929. Grønlandske Selsk.Skr. vol.623. ----. “Om de Grønlandske Saele.” Dansk Skriv.Nat.Selsk . vol.1, no.2,
p.167, 1791.24. Fletcher, E.S. “The water balance in marine mammals,” Quart.Rev.Biol .
vol.14, pp.451-59, 1939.25. Gray, R.W. “The walrus,” Naturalist, vol.1939, pp.201-07, 1939.
26. ----. “Seals of the Greenland Sea,” Ibid. vol.1935, pp.199-205, 1939.
040 | Vol_III-0678
EA-Zoo. Dunber: Arctic and Subarctic Seals - Bibliography
27. Greenland Administration, 1944. “Sammendrag af Statistiske Oplysninger
Om Grønland, Part III,” Beretninger Vedrørende Grønlands
Styrelse, no.1, Sect.11, pp.561-665, 1944.28. Griffin, D.R. “Stomach contents of Atlantic Harbour seals,” J.Mammal .
vol.17, pp.65-66, 1936.29. Hakluyt, Richard. The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques &
Discoveries of the English Nation . Glasgow, MacLehose, 1903,
vol.8, p.156.30. Hansen, P.M. “Gronlands nyttedyr,” Greenland Administration, Vejledning
i Behandling af Gronlandske Produkter . Copenhagen, n.d.31. Irving, L. “Respiration in diving mammals,” Physiol.Rev. vol.19,
pp.112-34, 1939.32. ----. , Scholander, P.F., and Grinnell, S.W. “Regulation of arterial blood
pressure in seal during diving,” Amer.J.Physiol. vol.135,
pp.557-66, 1942.33. ----, ----, and ----. “Significance of heart-rate in diving ability of
seals,” J.Cellular Comp.Physiol . vol.18, pp.283-97, 1941.34. Johansen, F. “Observations on seals and whales,” Medd.Grønland , vol.45,
pp.203-24, 1910. (Denmark-Ekspeditionen, 1906-8.)35. Jordan, D.S., and others. The Fur Seals and Fur Seal Islands of the
North Pacific Ocean. Wash., G.P.O., 1898. Parts 1-4.35a. Kane, E.K. Arctic Explorations. Philadelphia, Childs and Pederson, 1856.
2 vols.36. Knipowitsch, N.R. “Ueber die Biologie der Seehund und die Seehundjagd
im europäischen Eismeer, nach Russischen Quellen,” Conseil
Perm.Internat.Explor.Mer. Rapport , vol.8, pp.83-107, 1907.37. Kumlien, L. “Contributions to the natural history of arctic America,
made in connection with the Howgate Polar Expedition, 1877-78.
(Including papers by other authors.),” U.S.Nat.Mus. Bull .
no.15, pp.1-179, 1879.38. Loganov, G.N. Tiuleni i Morzh. (Seals and the Walrus.) Moscow, Koiz,
1939.39. Mineev, A.I. Ostrov Vrangelia. (Wrangel Island.) Moscow, Glavsevmorput,
1946. Chap.8, pp.370-401.40. Murie, J. “Researches upon the anatomy of the Pinnipedia. Part 1. On
the walrus (Trichechus rosmarus. Linn.),” Zool.Soc.Lond. Trans .
vol.7, pp.411-64, 1872.
041 | Vol_III-0679
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Arctic and Subarctic Seals - Bibliography
41. Nansen, Fridtjof. Blandt Sel og Bjørn. Kristiania, 1924.
42. Neumov, S.P. Tiuleni SSSR. (Seals of the USSR.) Moscow, Koiz, 1933.
43. Neilson, J.M. “The Mistassini Territory of the northern Quebec,” C n a ad.Geogr .
J . vol.37, no.4, pp.145-57, 1948.44. Pohle, H. “Die Satigetiere des arktischen Gebietes,” Fauna Arct. Jena,
vol.6, pp.67-80, 1933.45. Porsild, A.E. “Mammals of the Mackenzie Delta,” Canad.Field Nat . vol.59,
no.1, pp.4-22, 1945.46. Roberts, Brian. “The protection of fur seals in the North Pacific ocean,”
Polar Rec. vol.4, no.30, pp.264-71, July, 1945.47. Rodahl, K., and Moore, T. “The vitamin A content and toxicity of bear and
seal liver,” Bio-chem.J . vol.37, no.2, pp.166-68, 1943.48. Scheffer, T., and Sperry, C.C. “Food habits of the Pacific Harbour Seal,
Phoca richardii,” J.Mammal . vol.12, pp.214-26, 1931.48a. Scheffer, V.B. “Experiments in the marking of seals and sea l -lions.”
[ ?] U.S.Dept. Interior, Fish & Wildlife Service, Spec.Sci .
Rep.Wildlife, no.4, 33 pp. 1950.48b. ----. “The food of the Alaska fur seal.” U.S.Dept. Interior, Fish &
Wildlife Service, Wildlife Leaflet 329, 16 pp., 1950.48c. ----. “Growth layers on the teeth of Pinnipedia as an indication of age,”
Science , vol.112, pp.309-11, 1950.48d. ----. “Growth of the testes and baculum in the fur seal, Callorhinus
ursinus,” J.Mammal. vol.31, pp.384-94, 1950.49. Scholander, P.F. “Experimental investigations on the respiration...in
diving mammals and birds,” Hv [ ?] a lrådets Skr . no.22, pp.1-131,
1940.50. ----, Irving, L., and Grinnell, S.W. “Temperature and metabolism of
seal during diving,” J.Cellular Comp.Physiol . vol.19,
pp.67-78, 1942.51. Schultz, L.P. and Rafn, A.M. “Stomach contents of fur seals taken off
the coast of Washington,” J.Mammal. vol.17, pp.13-15, 1936.52. Siverteen, E. “On the biology of the harp seal, Phoca Groenlandica Erxl. ,”
Hvalrådets Skr. no.26, pp.1-166, 1941.53. Smirnov, N. “Diagnostical remarks about some seals (Phocidae) of the
northern hemisphere,” Tromsø Mus. Aarsh.Naturh.Afd . vol.48,
no.5, pp.1-23, 1927.
042 | Vol_III-0680
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Arctic and Subarctic Seals - Bibliography
54. ----. (Investigation of the seal-hunting in the White Sea.) Leningrad.
Inst. Opytnoi Agromomii. Otdel Prikladnoi Ikhtiologii.
Izvestii vol.6, 1927.55. ----. “On the eastern harp seal, Phoca ( Pagophoca ) groenlandica var
oceanica Lepechin. Preliminary note,” Tromsø Mus. Aarsh.
Naturh. Afd . vol.47, no.2, pp.1-11, 1924.56. Soper, J.D. “A faunal investigation of southern Baffin Island,”
Nat.Mus. Bull . no.53, pp.1-143, 1928. Biological Ser. no.15.57. Stefansson, Vilhjalmur. The Friendly Arctic . New ed. N.Y., Macmillan,
1944.58. Sutton, G.M., and Hamilton, W.J. “The mammals of Southampton Island,”
Carnegie Mus. Mem. vol.12, no.2, sect.1, pp.1-111, 1932.59. Taliev, D.N., and Bazikalova, A.Ia. “Predvaritelnye rezultaty aravneniia
fauny Baikala i Kaspiia pri pomoshchei reaktsii pretsipitatsii.”
(Preliminary results of a comparison of the Baikal and Caspian
faunas by the methods of precipit o in reaction.”, Akad.Nauk.
Comptes Rendus (Doklady) vol.2, no.8, pp.512-17, 1934. (In
Russian and English.)60. Van den Brink, F.H. “Catalogue des mammiferes des Pays-Bas trouves a
l’state sauvage,” Societe Zool.France. Bull . vol.56, pp.163-90,
1931.61. Vinokurov, I., and Florich, F. “Tiulenii Ostrov.” (Seal Island.)
Vokrug Sveta , no.1, p.56, 1947.60a. Vibe, C. “The marine mammals, and the marine fauna in the Thule district,”
Medd. Grønland , Vol.150, 115 pp., 1950.Max M. J. Dunbar
Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale or Bowhead
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0681
EA-Zoology
U.S. Dept. of Interior (Raymond M. Gilmore)
THE ARCTIC RIGHT WHALE, GREENLAND WHALE, OR BOWHEAD
Contents
Page Introduction 2 Names 5 General Characters 6 Size 7 Head 11 Body 14 Color 15 Skin and Blubber 16 Swimming and Diving 19 Baleen 24 Digestive Tract 28 Endocrine System 28 Food 29 Feeding 32 Food and Water Balance; Excretion 34 Respiration, Spout, Voice 35 Circulatory System 38 The Senses, Tropic Behavior, Sleep 38 Intercommunication 42 Social Behavior, Intra- and Interspecific Relationships 48 Reproduction 50 Growth and Development; Maturity and Age 52 Accidents, Morbidity, and Mortality 55 Parasites, Enemies, Defense 56 Geographic and Ecologic Distribution 59 Migration 67 Varieties of Physical Types of Arctic Right Whale 69
001 | Vol_III-0682
EA-Zoology
U.S. Dept. of Interior (Raymond M. Gilmore)
THE ARCTIC RIGHT WHALE, GREENLAND WHALE, OR BOWHEAD
CETACEA: The order of mammals which includes all whales, dolphins,
and porpoises (but not the fish called a dolphin).The Arctic has but three characteristic, or endemic, species of Cetacea.
These are ( 1 ) the arctic right whale, ( 2 ) the white whale (white porpoise, or
beluga), and ( 3 ) the narwhal. All other species found in the Arctic are sum–
mer migrants from the south; those which regularly migrate north are the blue
whale, the finback, the humpback, the gray whale (Pacific only), the male
sperm whale, the bottlenose whale, some of the beaked whales, the killer whale,
the pilot whale, and the common porpoise. Other species found in the Arctic
are stragglers, and usually rare.The word “whale” refers to the larger cetaceans — those 15 to 20 feet
or larger. The word “porpoise” applies to the smaller forms, under 15 feet
or so, and without a distinct beak, although the name is often used for small
forms with a distinct beak. However, the proper work for these beaked small
cetaceans is “dolphin.” The arctic right whale is truly a whale. The white
whale is a porpoise, as is the narwhal. The current names, however, have such
a firm and long-standing usage that it would be folly to substitute habitually
such names as white porpoise, arctic porpoise, for the white whale, and tusked
porpoise for the narwhal. The words “whale,” “Porpoise,” and “dolphin” have
a close correlation with natural classification by families, but not absolutely so.
002 | Vol_III-0683
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Introduction
The arctic right whale, Greenland whale, or bowhead is the only true
arctic whale. It is almost universally considered a distinct species, but
it is a “right whale,” or member of the family Balaenidae , and is closely
related to the ordinary right whales of the north and south temperate seas.
In fact, it may be nothing more than a north polar geographic race, or sub–
species, of the common right whale.The scientific name is usually written as Balaena mysticetus , which
indicates a full specific rank, but it can be considered as Balaena glacialis
mysticetus to indicate status as a subspecies of the right whale of the
North Atlantic.It is not possible nor feasible to attempt to resolve this taxonomic
matter here, but such a possible alternate status should be kept in mind as
the characters are read below, or when the animal is observed in the future,
either in life or as a specimen in a museum.The generic name Eubalaena was created to give generic distinction to
the true right whales in distinction to the arctic right whale, but this is
the extreme in “splitting,” or separating taxonomically, these closely re–
lated whales, and is not followed here.As an ecotype of cold polar waters, the arctic right whale has no
counterpart in the Antarctic, despite conditions there which are more favorable
in degree and extent than in the Arctic. This situation invites theoretical
discussion which can be only mentioned here, viz.: The arctic right whale
seems to be merely a large development of the right whale in accordance with
organic polarity by latitude — a feature so common within many other species
which range from temperate or subtropical to polar seas. The absence of any
003 | Vol_III-0684
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
true right whale ( Balaena ) from high antarctic waters, even though they are
normally abundant in the nearby subantarctic seas in the southern summer,
may hint at species-conflict with the blue, finback, and/or humpback whales
which find such ideal conditions and have such large populations in the high
antarctic waters, especially as concerns the blue whale. However, such a
conflict will then have to be recognized and explained in the Arctic where
the arctic right whale is the predominating species.A species-conflict between the blue whale and the arctic right whale
has been hinted by certain observations, but it needs verification, and, if
existent, has interfered only locally with the distribution of either species:
preventing the arctic right whale from access to certain shrimp concentrations
away from the pack ice, and pushing out the blue whale from similar food areas
within the open pack ice.A rare pygmy right whale ( Neobalaena ) is known from subantarctic of the
Australian sector, but its species strength and adaptations are as unknown as
are other features of its biology.Most of our information on the arctic right whale comes from old accounts.
Arctic whaling practically ceased by the turn of the 20th century, and there is
almost nothing of value or volume in the subsequent zoological literature from
any scientific expedition or from observations on the annual activities of
native whalers at St. Lawrence Island, Cape Prince of Wales, Point Hope,
Wainright, and Point Barrow, in Alsaka.Despite the killing of thousands upon thousands of arctic right whales
during the 300 years from the early 1600’s to the early 1900’s, all the way
from Spitsbergen to Baffin Bay, Hudson Bay, and from the Beaufort and Chukchi
seas north of Bering Strait to Cape Navarin off Kamchatka, one cannot expect
004 | Vol_III-0685
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
the whaler to have recorded many scientific observations. We can but be
thankful that there existed among these rough, unlettered men such literary
and scientific enthusiasts and such mental and physical giants as the Scores–
bys, father and son, Brown, Scammon, and the Grays, father and son.The arctic right whale was, up to the turn of the last century, by
far the most important animal of the Arctic from the economic viewpoint of
the European, and perhaps to some Eskimos who utilized the whale for suste–
nance. Today its importance has dropped to nil for the white man, and to a
somewhat minor role even for the whaling Eskimos. The seal, walrus, reindeer,
birds, and perhaps fish, have partially replaced the whale in importance as
a source of animal protein food and economic wealth.In accordance with the important place of the arctic right whale in
the economic development of the Arctic it has been represented by a truly
enormous amount of writing, and it will be many years before a single inves–
tigator can begin to summarize adequately the biological data on the whales
themselves, and the economic history of the whaling industry.Descriptions of the arctic whale and of the technique and economy
of the whaling industry were written as long ago as the mid-1600’s, but
without going into the merits or demerits of these early accounts, it can
be said that not until 1820, when William Scoresby Jr. published his two
volumes on An Account of the Arctic Regions, with a History and Description
of the Northern Whale Fishery , did the arctic right whale, and the technique
of the whalers, with an economic history of the industry, receive adequate
detailed description. Scoresby’s work is still a source book of great value,
even though it has been supplemented by the studies “On the Greenland whale...”
by the Danish scientists Eschricht and Reinhardt who had specimens brought to
Denmark by the whalers, and by the accounts of Brown in 1868 on his experiences
005 | Vol_III-0686
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
in the waters of Davis Strait and Baffin Bay, as well as the works of the
American Scammon, on the whaling of the Bering and Okhotsk seas, of David
Gray and his son Robert Gray on their whaling activities in the Greenland
Sea around Jan Mayen and Spitsbergen, and the compilation by Southwell in
1898 of published information and testimony from whaling captains on migra–
tion and ranges.These classic accounts, together with the many books on whaling in
the Arctic, require an enormous amount of reading and a nicety of judgment
in interpreting the observations and the allegations of the whalers, who
took the data from their logbooks, journals, and memories.Names
Common, vulgar, or colloquial names are legion. The following have
been identified in the literature:Spitsbergen whale Bowhead Greenland whale Arctic bowhead Great polar whale Common whale Great bone whale Whale-fish Arctic whale Fish Arctic right whale Grand Bay whale Greenland right whale Hunchback Right whale Steeple Top
There are also a number of local or whaler’s names for the different
ages, sexes, or localized occurrences.Bull (adult male)
Cow (adult female)
Calf (young)
006 | Vol_III-0687
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Cub (recently born young)
Suckers (suckling young)
Short-heads (suckling young)
Blue-skins (young)
Stunts (“2-year olds” — whalers estimate of the age)
Skull-fish (“2-year olds” — whalers estimate of the age)
Size-fish (when longest baleen is “size” of 6 ft.)
Rock-nosers (immature, near the coast of Davis Strait in
autumn, evidently segregated somewhat)Pond Bay fish (Young or immature at Ponds Inlet, N.E. Baffin
Island, in July, evidently segregated somewhat)Middle-icers (old whales in the Middle Ice of Davis Strait)
West-ice whale (those along the west ice near Jan Mayen to
Spitsbergen, the main population of these seas)South-ice whale (those which appear along the south coast of
Spitsbergen from the east in years of little ice)In addition, there are a number of local Eskimo names which are often
used:Arbeck, Arbavik, Sokalik (W. Greenland)
Arbak, pl. Akbeelik (east side of Baffin Island)
Puma (N.W. Greenland)
Arbik, Pumah (Cumberland Sound, S.E. Baffin Island)
A-gho-vuk (Alaska)
Akvirk (N. Alaska and Mackenzie Delta)
Akvik, Aukbik (Southampton Island)
General Characters
The arctic right whale is large, robust, smooth on back (without dorsal
fin), and possesses an enormous head with jaws well bowed downward in front.
007 | Vol_III-0688
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
The color is black with some white on the chin and vent. The flippers are
bluntly pointed, and the flukes are wide with almost straight rear edge and
rather sharp tips. There are no skin-folds on the throat as in the rorquals.Size
Dimensions of body . During the last decade of standardized procedure,
almost no measurements have been taken of the arctic right whale, and one
has to go back to the inexact records of 75 to 125 years ago to get an idea
of size.The available data indicate that females are larger than males of the
same age (the case with all baleen whales, Mysticeti ) and thus attain greater
maximal lengths. For the males this is around 55 feet., with a range of
size for full-grown adult of 45 to 55 ft. For the females the maximum is
probably around 60, and range for full-grown individuals of 50 to 60 ft.Total length, today, is defined as the distance in a straight line from
the tip of the upper jaw to the notch in the flukes. The greatest length,
or extreme length, is obtained by measuring from the tip of the protruding
lower jaw to the tip of the flukes, and this procedure, especially when the
flukes are twisted and one side is prolonged backward, gives a measurement
up to 3 feet longer than the standard total length; and when the tape is
placed over the curve of the body, the length would be even more. Probably
the old-time whalers measured the extreme length, pacing it off roughly on
deck, or estimating it therefrom while the carcass lay floating alongside
in the early stages of flensing. Such a method was subject to error, and
Guerin’s comments of 1824 are pertinent here, to wit: that it was difficult
to get measurements because it was so important to flense the whale immediately
after it was alongside that there was no time for measurements, and the men
008 | Vol_III-0689
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
very tired and could not be found to assist in a necessarily two-man job;
therefore his measurements were those which “struck the eye,” i.e., were
guessed in a rough way.Size Measurements. Published measurements of the arctic right whale
are seldom accurate and never in a quantity sufficient to satisfy modern
demands. For most of such knowledge one must turn to the old tracts, as
is the case with other information on this species of whale. Generally the
arctic right whales were measured while alongside the ship before flensing,
and under this condition the carcass was mostly submerged, especially the
tail. Rarely have measurements been made accurately in a straight line and
while the carcass lay on shore exposed to examination. It is hoped that
observers in the Arctic will realize this lack of information and take every
opportunity to get accurate and complete measurements of any Arctic right
available to them, together with details of sex, locality, and date.Desireable measurements are:
Total length . Tip of upper jaw to notch of flukes in straight line.
Greatest length . Tip of protruding lower jaw to tip of flukes in
straight line (subject to more error than total length due to slight dis–
location of lower jaw when resting on solid substratum and similar twisting
of flukes; probably many measurements in the past are of this type).Snout to angle of mouth , eye and ear opening . These are taken
practically simultaneously and give an idea of length of mouth and length
of head (without severing it).Snout to center of base of flipper .
S n out to vent (anus).
Notch of flukes to vent .
009 | Vol_III-0690
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale or Bowhead
Notch of flukes to center of genital slit .
Length of flipper along median line, from center of base to tip.
Breadth of flipper at widest points.
Spread of flukes. (difficult unless the animal is resting on belly
or back — generally it is on the side and the flukes are twisted; if so,
measure one side from tip to notch and double).Depth of peduncle (best measured between two paralleled boards).
Width of peduncle (ditto, with more emphasis).
Girth behind flippers (difficult unless carcass is floating and a
line can be passed around body, knotted at proper point and withdrawn for
measurement. Also, difficult to appraise if any bloating has taken place,
which occurs soon and may account for the enormous girths mentioned in the
literature).Sketches of the outline of head and jaws, flippers, flukes, peduncle,
etc., would be in av va luable.The words “full-grown” and “adult” are not necessarily the same.
“Full-grown” means physical maturity, after which no more growth in length
takes place. “Adult” means either the attainment of sexual maturity or full
size, and, from anaolgy with other whales, sexual maturity is reached some
years before and at a size somewhat below that of physical maturity.Data on the average age and length of the attainment of sexual maturity
of each sex are nonexistant. Those for the age and length of physical
maturity are scant. The only way to determine physical maturity is by an
examination of the vertebrae after cutting the corner of the centrum with
an ax. If any of the terminal discs are separated from the centrum by a
cartilaginous layer, the animal is still immature and growth would have
continued. If, throughout the entire length of the vertebral column, the
010 | Vol_III-0691
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale or Bowhead
union is solidly ankylosed or fused, the animal is full-grown and physically
mature. Fusion of epiphyses takes place rapidly when it starts and is last
in the thoracic region.Eschricht and Reinhardt (1866:55) gave the stage of physical maturity
of two specimens:Male ? Skeleton 48-1/2 ft. Skull 18-1/2 ft. Vertebral discs
not all fusedMale ? Skeleton 45-1/2 ft. Skull 17-1/2 ft. All vertebral
discs fused
It would appear that the first, of doubtful sex, was really a female.
Measurements of girth, taken by old-time whalers, ranged around 0.66
or two-thirds of the length. Thus the calculated diam e ter would be around
0.2 to 0.25 of the length. These figures show that the girth of the arctic
right whale is about the same as the humpback (also a robust species), but
not slim as Scoresby stated (girth one-half of the length), nor as bulky
as Eschricht and Reinhardt asserted (girth equal to length).Despite bulkiness, the body has a great deal of flexibility, and one
whaler recounted how a large harpooned whate curved the body into a semi–
circle and spun around thus on the surface. Most cetaceans have [ ?] more
Flexibility to the body than the heavy form would seem to indicate, and are
graceful in their movements in the water.Girth is a dimension which is subject to a great deal of variation.
Some of this range of size is normal and the result of the usual conditions
of fatness and leanness attendant upon season and availability of food as
well as age, sex, and pregnancy, but even more is undoubtedly due to b l oating
after death which greatly increases the normal measurement.Old-time whalers, however, processed their catch at sea as soon after
capture as possible, and thus they usually had fresh material with little
distortion from bloating. This would make their measurements of girth
011 | Vol_III-0692
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale or Bowhead
accurate enough to be inserted confidently into our body of modern
knowledge on whales. Presumably they measured the girth of the carcass
floating alongside the ship by a line passed around the body (which should
have been relatively easy under the circumstances), or estimated the thick–
ness of the body, from a position on the flensing platform which extended
out from the side of the ship and over the whale as the two lay in contact.Head
The head of the arctic right whale is huge and bowed. The upper jaw
(snout or rostrum) is curved strongly downward on the inside as well as
outside, from the blowholes to the front tip (“nib end”); and is also bowed
downward in the back on the inside toward the ventrally situated throat.
It resembles the curbed beak of a gigantic bird. (The top of the head
dips down only slightly in the rear, though the back of the skull bows
almost as much as the rear of the palatal region.) This bowed condition
allows the baleen plates to be very long (6 to 12 feet) in the middle of
each row and requires them to be short at each end, with the tips of all
blades in a line making only a slight convex curve. The upper jaw is also
narrow in front, but gradually widens toward the rear near the eyes, and
is flanked between two huge, fleshy lower lips.The lower jawbones, or mandibles, as shown from the figure of a mounted
skeleton with skull, by Eschricht and Reinhardt (1866, pl. 2), and from
the mounted skull in the U.S. National Museum, appear to extend nearly
straight forward from the articulation with the skull at its low, rear
base to a little beyond the end of the beaklike upper jaw, and to bow
somewhat, to the extent of the slight curve of the bones, in a lateral
plane. This provides a wide floor to the mouth; and, into the sides of
this spacious cavity fit the tips of the baleen plates. Between the ends
012 | Vol_III-0693
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
of the palates lies the narrow, high, sessile tongue sitting on the floor
of the mouth medially like a great humped ridge. The tips of the longest
blades of baleen, in the middle of each row, actually diverge and fit into
the sides of the widest part of the mouth where the mandibles bow outward
most. These long blades have a concave outer margin and are the typical
“saber blades” of the “bowhead.”The lower lips themselves are remarkable structures. They rise as
walls of tissue, connective and fatty, from the horizontal jawbones, stand–
ing upright 4 to 5 feet through their own rigidity. The upper edge makes
a great half-arc in general conformity with the curve of the upper jaw.
They are high enough to conceal completely the bases of the long baleen
p l ates in the middle of each row when the mouth is shut.Looking up at the roof of the mouth, or palate, one sees a deep
inverted valley whose steep walls are the fibrous hairs of f t he matted, frayed
inner margins of the baleen plates, and whose apex is the long, narrow, con–
cave line of the smooth, hard palate.Looking at the mouth from the front, one sees the narrow beaklike
upper jaw curved down in front, with its lateral pendant rows of baleen plates
fitting down between the walls of the lower jaws, and with the ridgelike
tongue fitting up in between the lower parts of the baleen and against the
hairy inner fringe.The strongly bowed condition, convex upward, of the upper jaw and roof
of the mouth, and the edges of the fleshy lower lips, together with their
huge size in relation to the rest of the body (conforming with that of the
head), has caused the American whalers to give the name “bowhead” to the
arctic right whale. However, the condition is also typical of all right
whales, i.e., members of the family Balaenidae . In Australis the name
“bowhead” was sometimes applied to the southern right whale, or black whale,
013 | Vol_III-0694
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
and it is quite likely that the name “bowhead” has been much used in a
loose way to indicate large right whales, either as individuals or as
populations, as well as the arctic form.At the top of the high bowed bead are the nostrils, or blowholes.
During the quick respiration at the surface, the contracting muscles which
open the nostrils, front and side, bulge upward making the whole top of the
head stand out above the surface in a distinct peak separately from the
broad low elevation of the back to the rear. The unusual height of this
peak for the name “steeple-top,” to certain individual whales by the Ameri–
can whalers of the Okhotsk and Bering seas. The double profile of peaked
nostrils and broad, low back is very characteristic of the arctic right
whale and of right whales in general.The intervening depressed area is the neck, which, even though formed
of compact and fused cervical vertebrae, has a distinct constriction dorsally.
In the rorqual baleen whales, the neck vertebrae are not fused and are rela–
tively long, but no such distinct neck is evident.The nostrils themselves are double slits, about 8 inches long and
diverging posteriorly in a slight curve, concave laterally. The septum pre–
sumably is wider than in the rorqual baleen whales, because the spout has a
characteristic double structure, at least in its basal half.There appear to be more hairs on the chin and snout of the arctic
right whale than in most other species of Cetacea. These are distributed
in patterns of lines or whorls and probably have a sensory function. (See
Senses.)The eye is small, with perhaps six inches diameter to the entire eye–
ball, and is located low down on the rear of the head just above the corner
of the mouth. (See Senses.)The ear is represented by a minute hole between the eye and the i a nterior
014 | Vol_III-0695
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
base of the flipper. There is no external ear (pinna), and the long external
canal (meatus) leading from the surface to the ear bones of the skull is small
and plugged with wax.There are no longitudinal folds of skin and blubber on the throat and
chest as in the rorqual baleen whales, nor apparently any indication of such
near the chin as in the gray whale.Body
Back. The back is smooth, without dorsal fin as in the rorquals, with–
out fatty bumps as in the sperm and gray whales, and without low dorsal ridge
as in the narwhal and white whale. It is, however, rounded and robust enough
to be well exposed when the whale surfaces, and, with the top of the head
peaked by the hostrils, gives a double profile to the body which is very
characteristic.Flipper . The flipper is short and borad, about 7 feet long by 4 feet wide,
with a characteristic flat S-curve to the rear margin which gives a scalloped
edge and a point to the tip. There is undoubtedly a deal of irregularity to
this outline as a consequence of injuries; and the younger individuals possess
a narrower, more laceolate form.Flukes. The flukes, or horizontal tail fins, are broad, 18 to 20 feet
or so, and of characteristic shape: rather straight rear margin with very
slight S-curve on each half from central notch to rather sharp tips which
do not project back. The ratio of breadth to body length is from about 0.35
to 0.4.Pedunckle. The peduncle, tail or base of tail (the “small” of the whalers),
is strongly ridged above and below. This ridging is really a finning to give
015 | Vol_III-0696
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
less resistance to the water during up and down movement of the flukes and
thus to reduce turbulence of swimming down to a point near zero. There is
a slight ridging also to the sides of the peduncle just as it passes to the
horizontal flukes, but this is common to all Cetacea.On the dorsal and anterior, or middle, of the peduncle in Roy’s figure
(in Scammon, 1874, pl. 12) th is a sharply rounded hump which appears to be
not a part of the keeled ridge but rather an accumulation of fat, but which
in R. Gray’s figure (1887) is quite clearly an anterior sharp development of
the keeled ridge. The distinctness of this high part to the keeled ridge,
or of this humped accumulation of fat, gave rise to the name “hunchback” for
some individuals in which the feature was well developed; and W. H. Hall
(in Scammon, 1874: 305-306) actually described this “hunchback ” as a doubtful
“?Variety Roysii ” of the arctic right whale Balaena mysticetus on the basis
of Scammon’s description and Roy’s figure, with type locality as the Okhotsk
Sea where it was said to be common. There is little doubt that the “bunch” is
part of [ ?] the keel on the peduncle, not a separated structure, and is a
normal adult development in the species.Color
The arctic right whale is a black whale, with some white normally on
g the chin and peduncle only, but occasionally also around the mouth, eyes,
axillae, and genitalia. The young are pure bluish black — “blue skins.”
Old individuals occasionally show more white becoming dappled with spots
or piebald with blotches, but none are banded transversely with white as
has been claimed. The black pigment lies in the epidermis; white color is
due to an absence of such pigment.
016 | Vol_III-0697
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Unusual colors are an albino, red, or yellow individual. The albino
condition is of course due to the utter absence of black pigment in the
epidermis and the reflection of light from the white dermis and blubber
underneath through the transparent epidermis. The red color is undoubtedly
found in skin patches without pigment, on individuals with rare red blubber
showing through. The yellow color is surely the yellow-green diatom
Cocconeis ceticols which attaches itself to the underside of whales as a
commensal in cold polar waters, and is responsible for the name “sulfur-bottom”
for the blue whale.Skin and Blubber
Skin. The skin of the arctic right whale is naked and generally smooth;
but a waviness, like ripple marks on a sandy beach, has been reported, perhaps
for old or thin individuals; and there are a few short hairs on the snout and
chin. Sweat and oil glands are presumably absent as they are in all other
Cetacea examined.The S s tructure of the skin itself follows the usual mammalian (and ver–
tebrate) pattern of an outer epidermis and an inner dermis (corium, or cutis
vera ). The epidermis itself follows the usual cetacean structure of an outer,
paper-thin layer of cornified cells, and an inner, 1/2-inch-thick layer of
germinative cells, which appears to the naked eye as in other whales, to be
composed of huge macroscopic columnar cells. The outer thin corneal layer
is transparent and peels off in large strips or sheets when it becomes dry
after death. The inn d er germinative layer is soft and brittle and contains
the melanin pigments when the skin color is black.The de r mis, so closely attached to the overlying epidermis that they
017 | Vol_III-0698
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
cannot easily be separated, is composed of the usual two mammalian layers;
the outer, compact fibrous pepillated layer, and the inner, diffuse cellular
reticulated layer. But, both these layers are very especially developed:
the outer dermal layer, pars papillaris, as also in the white whale and narwhal,
is unique among Cetacea in having the fibers very heavy and compact and
running in a longitudinal direction, thus giving an excellent base for a
leather which can be stretched in the direction of the fibers for perhaps
1/3rd the length, recovering its width and length upon release of tension,
and having enormous strength. Such a leather is actually manufactured from
the homologous layer in the white whale, but not in the arctic right whale,
or the narwhal. It has been compared favorably with the shell leather of a
horse hide taken from the rump.The inner layer of dermis, the pars reticularis , is sparsely fibrous
as in other mammals, and these fibers are diffusely arranged and distributed,
but, ás in other Cetacea and most marine mammals, this layer is also tre–
mendously engorged with fat, and forms the “blubber” of the animal.The entire skin of the arctic right whale, without most of the blubber,
is converted into a table delicacy by the Eskimos known as “muktuk,”
“mattak,” etc., and similar use is made of the same parts of the skin of
the white whale and narwhal. (See Human Usage.)Blubber . The blubber of the arctic right whale is the inner layer of
the dermis, the pars reticularis , which is tremendously engorged with fat.
It is closely adherent to the otter parts of the skin, but may be pulled
loose from underlying muscular tissue to which it is attached by dry fascia.The color of the blubber is usually white or creamy-white, but there
have been observations of reddish blubber. This condition is not so common
018 | Vol_III-0699
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
in other whales which are captured today, but in these it is presumed to
be caused by the pigment astacin derived from the reddish shrimps of the
family Euphausiidae. However, the frequency with which the bowhead probably
feeds on the copepod Calamus with the red drop of oil in its body, might point
toward this animal plankton as a source of the red color along with a definite
chemical linkage of the pigment with the gliceridic fat, or with one of its
component fatty acids, and with a homolipoidal character to the absorption
of fat from its food by the arctic right whale.The function of the blubber has been stated to be as an insulation
for keeping the body heat from dissipating into the cold surrounding waters —
in other words, to keep the animal warm from its own internal heat without
too much metabolism. This it actually does to some extent; a carcass will
retain body heat for days after death. However, when exercising violently
for a protracted period, the heat production is certainly so great that it
must be dissipated fast in order to avoid too high a body temperature, and,
without sweat glands or a doglike panting mechanism, the blubber must be
able to transmit this heat into the surrounding water. There actually may
be a critical point of thickness when the blubber is more of a blanket than
is beneficial.An important function of the blubber is to release stored energy to
the body when food is less abundant and less nutritious during the long winter
season in warmer waters. At this time, the whale undergoes a relative period
of starvation, and it is only during the summer, during abundance of food,
that it can recuperate and lay up extra fat in the blubber for the next lean
winter season. The blubber also may supply metabolic water, which would seem
to be necessary to an animal which certainly drinks no fresh salt water.It was the blubber which yielded the oil to the whalers, who did not
utilize the bones or visceral fat.
019 | Vol_III-0700
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Swimming and Diving
The bulky form of the body, the short and broad flippers, and the
wide flukes, indicate that the arctic right whale is a slow but strong
swimmer, and a good diver.Swimming is done by powerful vertical strokes of the tail-flukes,
as part of a wave of motion that starts at the peduncle (tail “peduncle”).
The combined action of the keeled (ridged) peduncls and the lfexible flukes
undoubtedly eliminates all turbulence, or drag, and makes swimming friction–
less, with a tremendous saving of energy at the speeds involved.Stabilization is accomplished by the flippers and the high vertical
ridge on the peduncle. A dorsal fin is not present, nor probably needed as
in the faster swimmers, and its absence is a character of the entire family
Balaenidae.Water has great weight, 62.4 lbs. per cu.ft., and its resistance to a
swimming animal is so strong that to attain high speeds the body must adap–
tively evolve into a sleek, fusiform shape without any blocking projections.
This has happened perforce to the swift rorqual whales as it has to the sleek
dolphins and the spindled-shaped tunas and mackerels and the rocket-shaped
barracuda.In this specialization of body form, the robust arctic right whale has
not reached, or has lost, the high level of swimming form and speed of the
rorquals.The fluke of a cetacean has been likened to a “cambered aerofoil,”
(dorally convex airplane wint), is passive ( f or non-propulsive), and gives
a favorable reaction in its contact with the air by creating a vacuum under
the upper cambered (convex) wing, lifting the plane and giving a measure of
020 | Vol_III-0701
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
forward propulsion.The fluke of a cetacean is really a cambered, propulsive, flexible,
reversible hydrofoil. It is cambered in that the surface bearing against
the water is convex. It is propulsive in that it moves and actually drives
the whale through the water. It is flexible in that the camber of the
surface changes, and can decrease to zero. It is reversible in that the
bearing surface and camber are completely reversed at each up and down stroke.Scoresby in 1820 started a long-time controversy over swimming mechanics
by stating that, together with the vertical motion of the flukes, there was
an oblique movement, as in soulling with an oar. This oblique movement of
the flukes has never been proved, and, in fact, motion pictures of captive
dolphins have shown no evidence of it, but the case of the twisted flukes will
take time yet to die — it is even today credited with causing the strong
asymmetry to the left of the skulls of most toothed cetaceans (but not of all,
and not of any baleen whales) and it has been used recently to explain the
sinistral twist to the narwhal tusk.Though the soulling twist to the flukes may be entirely absent, there
is no doubt that the whale can twist the whole peduncle and flukes a bit in
coordination with a turn of direction of swimming.During normal feeding activities, the route of the whale may be some–
what erratic, in conformity with the distribution of the concentrated patches
of food under water. During traveling, however, the course should be straight.Aberrant swimming antics are breaching and lobtailing, though neither
can be considered common (as in the humback).Speed is a function of swimming, but the arctic right whale holds no
records in this respect. When feeding, the rate may be as high as 4 m.p.h.,
and when traveling, or “making passage,” 8 or 10 m.p.h. might be attained.
021 | Vol_III-0702
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Diving . When the arctic whale dives, it arches its hind-back out of
water and usually throws the flukes clear of the surface. This is the result
of great flexion of the body from the powerful thrust of the flukes, and of
the vertical nature of the dive.The duration of the dive depends upon such factors as concentration of
the food, distribution of ice and open water, and age of the whale, but there
should be an average duration as a character of the species, as well as of
the individual, under the circumstances of feeding or traveling.Depth of dive is directly related to duration, but not vice versa, i.e.,
the deeper the dive, the longer it is, but a long dive may not necessarily
be deep. Actual depth is difficult to measure, and only when a harpooned
whale comes to the surface with mud on the snout or broken jaws as evidence
of having struck the bottom, can the depth of the dive be accurately determined;
unfortunately the old-time whalers failed to mention the depth of the water
when they recorded these interesting circumstances. And a harpooned whale
taking out a mile of line does not necessarily mean that it dived a mile —
half or more of this length of line can be horizontal when under water.However, there is evidence that the arctic right whale can dive con–
siderable distances — not only because it remains below as long as a half
an hour or so, and possibly an hour when harpooned, but also because of the
vertical nature of the start of the dive at the surface, and the general
robustness of the animal. It is believed by some that diving is well enough
developed to be the normal escape mechanism for the species rather than
swimming, when danger or man or killer whale threatens. As an estimate,
perhaps 500 feet can be considered maximal for the species in depth of dive,
but this is a sheer guess — it might be a thousand feet.
022 | Vol_III-0703
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Diving involves the direct reciprocal function of respiration, and
there is regular alternation and duration, or extent, of each, which may
be called the “respiratory-diving rhythm.” This rhythm during traveling is
a single spout, or blow alternated with a short and shallow dive which,
however, carries the whale a good distance at considerable speed. During
feeding, the diving-respiratory rhythm may vary from a series of 4 or 5 blows
and shallow dives for a couple of minutes with a long dive of 10 minutes or
so, up to 8 or 9 blows and a dive of 20 minutes or even 25.A rhythm characteristic of the species is not evident, but under the
circumstances of the moment in conditions of ice, depth, and food distribution
the rhythm for any individual is remarkably constant, and a whaler, noting
several successive alternations of the rhythmic cycle, can quite accurately
predict when the animal will appear again (and perhaps even the general spot).Buoyancy . Most arctic right whales float after death, though a few
sink, and the matter would seem to be one of individual variation in the amount
of fat, with the excessively lean whales sinking and the normally bulky fat
whales floating.It is evident that the sinkers are barely heavier than water and can be
raised without much trouble, like a bucket of water in a well. The old-time
whalers sometimes raised a whale which sank after death in shallow water and
could not be lifted easily without risk of drawing the iron, by a simple tech–
nique, because of this bare difference between the specific gravity of the
whale and that of cold sea water. A second harpoon was weighted heavily and
lowered down the first line which had been drawn taut and held vertical. The
second harpoon then sank into the carcass by the weights and usually the
combined hold of the two would enable the body to be gently lifted to the
surface and secured to the ship.
023 | Vol_III-0704
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
It would seem, consequently, that in the living whale there is also a
slight, natural, positive buoyancy. What effect this may have on efficiency
in swimming is not known: it probably would slow the rate, though only to
a slight degree. However, the matter of buoyancy could be more important in
diving than in swimming. At first sight, it would seem to be an obstacle to
efficiency in this matter, but, as a matter of fact, it probably is an essen–
tial help in diving. This needs a bit of explanation.The acknowledged master among whales in the deep-dive is the sperm whale,
with a record of 3,240 feet, and this species is also a floater, i.e., is
naturally buoyant. The other deep-diver, the bottlenose whale, also floats.A second phenomenon connected with this discussion is “letting-go,”
or the act by which the living whale sinks rapidly and directly downward from
the surface without any apparent swimming motion, and certainly without any
forward thrust or inclination of the body. This ability to let-go was ob–
served by whalers to take place sometimes when the arctic right whale was
suddently frightened and unhurt. The importance here is the implication
that “letting-go” means an ability to volunatrily and markedly change the
specific gravity of the body, perhaps on the principle of the Venetian Diver.
Letting-go has also been reported for the sperm whale and the pilot whale
(blackfish).Combining the ability to dive long and deep with a natural buoyancy
of the body and with the probable ability to change the specific gravity at
will, gives an explanation of diving somewhat as follows: When about to
dive deeply, the whale combines thurst of the flukes and vertical inclination
of the body with decrease of specific gravity to descend rapidly and when
exhaustion of reserve oxygen and/or accumulation of wastes demands a return
024 | Vol_III-0705
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
to the surface, reestablishes the natural buoyancy of the body by release
of the reflex to maintain it, and ascends naturally, quickly, and almost
without effort to the surface. This explanation makes buoyancy a neces–
sity for return to the surface, rather than a hindrance to submergence
through a natural tendency to keep the animal floating, but it takes the
acquired ability to change specific gravity to counteract the latter.Baleen
The mouth and feeding apparatus of the whale are remarkably well
developed. The mouth itself is huge ly , as the size of the head indicates.
Its extreme dimensions are length and height. The baleen plates are long
and hang in two rows from practically the entire length of the narrow roof
of the mouth on each side. The tongue is long, narrow, and high — a
muscular organ to control action in the bottom of the mouth in cooperation
with the throat muscles in feeding and swallowing. The lower lip is tre–
mendous in depth, reaching far up the sides of the baleen plates from the
lower jawbones below bowed laterally, and arching dorselly to contact the
sessile small upper lip and cover the sides of the baleen. The throat
itself is small, 3 to 5 inches in diameter.The actual shape and size of the head, as well as the lips, especially
the huge lower lips, have been described. (See Head.)Baleen, or whalebone, is one of the most distinctive features of the
arctic right whale in its uniform great length and fineness of texture.
The average adult length perhaps is about 10 ft., and it certainly grows
to 12, but the records of 14 and even 15 ft. can be viewed with doubt
(see below). It seems to have averaged more in length and been a bit finer
in its [ ?] component medullary fibers than the baleen of the ordinary right
025 | Vol_III-0706
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
whale, though this difference has usually been overemphasized and exaggerated.Black is the predominating color, i.e., most blades are all black, but
some, particularly in front, have longitudinal striations of lighter color,
and that of the young is bluish.The length of a blade (plate) of baleen was usually (always?) measured
by the whalers from base at root to tip without hairs after the blade had
been cut or pulled out of the gum, in which 10 inches or [ ?] so were imbedded.
The hairs at the tip would add another 12 to 18 inches, and, if the basal
point was taken at the gum-line, a foot or so would be subtracted. With
four possible points of measurement, the amount of variation between any two,
and the difficulty of comparison of two separate sets of measurements, is
obvious.The baleen grows in two rows from the sides of the narrow, arched
palate, where upper teeth might otherwise be. Each plate, split or blade
of baleen is thin, flat and narrow, like a long knifeblade; each is firmly
embedded in the “gum” transversely to the long axis; and each is separated
one from another by a narrow space. They hang down from the roof of the
mouth like long, narrow cards in a loose deck. The outer edge of each blade
is hard and smmoth like the back of a knife blade, but the inner edge is
fringed with fibrous hairs about 6 inches long, or more, which come out of the cen–
tral medulla between the front and back faces, or cortex. In some places,
the frayed inner edge of the cortex on both front and back faces also forms
part of the hairy fringe. The fibrous hairs protrude practically parallel
with the inner edge, which is at only a slight angle with the outer edge,
because the hairs themselves are the fibers which make up the medulla of
each blade and they run lengthwise from their growing bases in the gum.
026 | Vol_III-0707
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic White Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
The combined hairy edges of all the closely set blades of one side form a
mettled sieve through which water but not the macroplankton of the water can
pass; and it is the macroplankton krill (shrimp), brit (copepods), sea
snails (pteropods) — which form the food of the arctic right whale.The rows of baleen do not meet in front, but are separated by a small
gap, a feature also of the gray whale but not of the remaining baleen whales
(the rorquals) which have the rows continuous as a line of short bristles
across the front of the mouth above.Near the center of each row of whalebone where the curved upper jaw is
highest, the blades are longest, and near the ends they become progressively
shorter until they are only a few inches long. The bladelike form also dis–
appears anteriorly and posteriorly and becomes round bristles, eventually
without clear transverse alignment, which makes their count as blades very
difficult.The number of blades in a row may be a specific character of the
arctic right whale, or of the family Balaenidae. It has been determined
as from 315 to 320, with the variation evidently caused by the gradual
transition of blades into transverse rows of bristles into a mass of the
same. Counts higher than thix have been made, but they are probably inac–
curate and again the result of the transition from blade to bristle. Counts
lower than this are in the literature, but likely are of marketable blades
only (longer than 1 foot or so) which, to the whaler, were the only blades
worth counting, and were indicative of the size of the whale and the yield
of baleen.The long central blades are 6 to 10 inches wide at the base and taper
slowly to a point 8 to 12 ft. away. At the inner base of each blade lie a
027 | Vol_III-0708
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
number of very short subsidiary blades and bristles, separated by small gaps.The base of each blade is a narrow slit-like pulp-cavity, which contains
the growing matrix of the fibers of the medulla of each blade, ending as long
tendrils in the short hollow base of each fiber. The pulp probably is con–
tinuous with the gum which surrounds the embedded base and gives rise to the
cortex of the blade covering the fibrous medulla, but the pulpry tendrils
in the base of each fiber are red like muscle fibers, while the pulp of the gum
is white and hard likt the meat of a green coconut.Growth of baleen takes place rapidly in length, much more slowly in
breadth, and is practically negligible in thickness which in the adult blade
is only 3 to 4 mm. Rate of wear is impossible to determine.Baleen is essentially an epidermal structure homologous to hair, finger–
nails or claws. Chemically it is a protein known as keratin.There occurs on the front and back faces of each blade for their entire
exposed length a continuous series of indistinct narrow transverse ridges and
hollows. Ridges are generally found opposite ridges (opposite arrangement),
but may also be opposite hollows (alternate arrangement). From 1/4 to 1 inch
separate the ridges, and some are noticeably higher than others.Scoresby was the first to suggest that these “rings” had something to
do with age, but no serious work was done on this character as a possible
clue to age until recently when the details of surface sculpture were
studied on other species by means of a pantograph stylus which exaggerated
the vertical variation, but the results have been inconclusive.Curvature of the edges of the blade is a matter of interest because it
has been stated that a “scimitar” blade with outer edge convex and inner hairy
edge concave is characteristic only of the arctic right whale, and thus is a
good character for the species. However, as Eschricht and Reinhardt have shown,
028 | Vol_III-0709
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
though all the front blades including the longest are of this shape, posteriorly
they become progressively straight and then actually have a reversed curve,
with outer edge concave and inner convex.It has also been asserted that the baleen plates of baleen whales are
bent backward at the tip when the mouth is closed, and spring forward when
the mouth is opened. Though this statement was made without direct reference
to the arctic right whale, it would seem most applicable to this form because
of the very long whalebone. It is possible that baleen blades snap when unbent
quickly from a naturally folded position in the closed mouth, and produce a
distinct noise. There have been no muscles described from the base of the
blades, but the bending and unbending, if it exists, with or without snapping
noise, may be confined to the terminal portions of the blades, and merely be
a secondary action of the forcible closure and quick opening of the mouth.Digestive Tract
As concerns the rest of the digestive tract, the throat is known to
be narrow in the usual mysticete way. The stomach is presumed to have the
usual huge size and four-chambered structure (though without any ruminating
function). The intestines also can be considered as long with many glands
but without sharp dimorphism into long small intestine and short large intes–
tine, hence without obvious external cecum. The liver may be presumed to
have the usual cetacean form of three lobes of large size and no gall bladder,
the bile being secreted from the usual ducts but collecting in long vessels
in the pancreas. Oil Content of the liver should be low, but content of
vitamin A in the oil should be high.Endocrine System
Nothing is known specifically of this system in this species, but it can
029 | Vol_III-0710
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
be presumed to follow the usual baleen whale pattern. The endocrine glands
are the usual mammalian, pituitary, thyroid, parathyroid, Langerhans cells
of the pancreas, adrenals (suprarenals), follicles of the ovary, and inter–
stitial cells of testes. The secretions are normal mammalian in quantity
and function. The intermediate lobe is not developed in the pituitary.Food
The arctic right whale feeds on small animal life of the sea, prin–
cipally the tiny red copepod Calanus , the small, winged f r ee-swimming snails
Pteropoda, and the small mysid and euphausiid shrimps. These small animals,
the first and third crustaceans, and the second a mollusk, swarm in vast
numbers in certain parts of the polar seas in the spring and summer shortly
after the annual flowering of unicellular, microscopic, marine plant such as
diatoms, peridinians, and coccolithophores, upon which the small animals
feed. This proliferation of plant and animal life on or near the surface of
polar and subpolar seas is an annual spring and summer phenomenon, and such
is its enormous extent quantitatively that these plants and animals are the
basic organisms in the food chain of all higher animals, including squid,
fishes, sea birds, seals, and whales.Plankton is the name given to the small marine organisms which move around
horizontally in a passive way by drifin o with the current, though many have
a remarkably ability to move vertically or change their depth, in accordance
with the diurnal cycle. Though all are small, the smallest, usually plant
cells, are called microplankton, and the slightly larger, usually animals,
are called macroplankton.The whales feed directly on the macroplankton — they have eliminated
the “middle man.” This food relationship is intimately linked with the
development of great size of body and mouth and the peculiar structure of
030 | Vol_III-0711
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
the baleen — all three phenomena go together, evolutionarily speaking.Great body size in animals is almost universally dependent upon the
means to feed directly upon great quantities of food which itself is most
often found in large masses of small units, i.e., leaves of grass or brush,
small plants entire, swarming or colonial animals and plants of small size
in a small area, etc. The largest animals have been the brontosaurine dino–
saurs, the sharks, and the baleen whales. The extinct brontosaure were herbi–
vorous in swampy places; the largest sharks (whale shark, basking shark)
strain swarming macroplankton from the sea through their gill rakers, and
the largest whales utilize masses of macroplankton by means of the special struc–
ture known as baleen, in a large mouth.The copepod crustacean, Calanus , is the smallest of the three main
types of food eaten by the arctic right whale. It may be only 1/4 inch long,
and is marked by the presence of two conspicuous pumose feelers diverging
from the head and by a red color imparted from a red drop of oil in the body
cavity. They are known as “sea-lice,” “rice-food” or “brit,” “herring-food,”
“cayenne,” “red-feed,” etc., by the whalers. Despite their small size they
increase in the spring after the diatoms in incredible numbers and mass, and
thus afford an abundant supply of food for any animal which can harvest them
efficiently. The arctic right whale is able to do this because of the very
fine fibers on the baleen which make a mat dense enough to stop the tiny
bodies. Of all the baleen whales, only the closely related and similarly
built right whale, and the rorqual known as the sei whale (pollock whale,
fine-fringed finner, Rudolph’s rorqual, etc.) can utilize the calanid copepod
for a major item of food.Next to the copepod Calanus, the euphausiid and mysid shrimps are
probably the commonest item of food for the arctic right whale. These small
031 | Vol_III-0712
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
shrimps, 1/2 to 1 inch long, are reddish and have six threadlike feelers
forward, besides a typical shrimp form.They increase greatly in size and numbers, in the spring and summer,
just after the annual blooms of the diatoms and other phytoplankton, and
come to the surface in great swarms to spawn. This occurs in the northern
seas [ ?] in summer and usually at night, or while the light is weakest, and
it is during these times and places that the whales take toll for food.
Collectively the several species of the northern seas, Thysanoessa inermis,
Meganyctiphanes norvegica , etc., are known as “krill,” “red food,” etc. The
famous large species of the Antarctic is Euphausia superba , 1 to 2 inches long.The third important food item of the whale is the group of winged
snails called Pteropoda. These small snails swim actively by means of
“wing-feet” or “fin-feet” and swarm in countless numbers in favorable spots
of the polar seas in summer, forming food for seal and bird as well as whale.
There are two principal species — the entirely naked Clione limacina , 35 to
40 mm. across, and the small Spiratella helicina ( Limacina helicina ) of
5 to 10 mm. which has a transparent chitenous shell. The former is black
and called “blackberry” by the whalers, as well as “sea snail.”The nature of the food of any whale can be known accurately only by
the actual examination of stomach contents. This was difficult in the former
days of whaling, because the carcass was flensed in the water of its blubber
and baleen, and then cut loose to float away or sink. There was little chance
for an exposure of the stomach unless the belly was cut, and this was probably
not the usual procedure with the whalers. Hence, today, we should be exceedingly
grateful to the old-timers who took the trouble to cut and look into the
stomach to examine or preserve the contents for later identific i ation.
032 | Vol_III-0713
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Feeding
About the act of feeding there is meager testimony, but what there is
indicates that the arctic right whale swims through the concentrations of
plankton with the mouth partially open and the lower lip reflexed somewhat
to broaden the inverted U-shaped trough between baleen and tongue and form
a funnel. The water flows into the front of the mouth and out between the
baleen plates which bridge the gap on the sides, or out at the corner of the
mouth, leaving the accummulation of small food on the matted hairy inner edges
of the baleen, from where it shifts backward toward the throat either through
action of the water current passing through the mouth or by action of the
tongue. No food is ordinarily seen clinging to the hairy fringe of the
baleen of any whale after death.Most of the feeding is done near the surface and near the ice, or
actually in the broken edge of the ice pack, because concentrations of
[ ?] plankton seem to be greatest there, but deeper layers are also cropped
as are localities removed from the ice. The amount taken must be enormous.Statements that a baleen whale swims through the water with the jaws
widely distended are logical in view of the size of the mouth and the need
of the animal to obtain a large quantity of the small food to suffice as a
meal, but such statements do not consider the impossibility of swimming for–
ward at any velocity with the mouth open widely and forming the most effective
brake to forward progress which the whale could use; nor do such statements
consider the gap unabridged by baleen on the sides, if the lower jaw is at
right angles to the upper.Forward velocity, is probably necessary for feeding, though there may
be suction by the throat to increase the current of water flowing through
033 | Vol_III-0714
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
the mouth. If so, such a suction and current would have to be reversed
at frequent intervals to reset the muscular mechanism and this can be
done when the mouth is closed to expel water and to concentrate the food before
swallowing. Extreme development of this suction action might be associated
with the expansible grooves on t he throats of rorquals whales, though this
carries the speculation much farther than is intended here. Actually the
many deep grooves (and lands) on the throat and chest of the rorquals may
function as a hydrostatic aid to eliminate turbulence in the rapid progression
through the water by these 20-knot swimmers.The act of swallowing is probably similar to that in man or any other
mammal, with the tongue pressing up from the bottom to force the food back–
ward. Probably the mouth is closed at the time, but this is not certain,
and there is no reason to assume that swallowing cannot be done under water
as well as on the surface. Swallowing is thus probably intermittent and
depends on the concentration of food and the rapidity with which the mouth
is filled. There is no reason to assume that the passage of food is in a
steady stream down the throat. The fact that there is no intake of sea
water into the stomach would rule out any steady stream of food passing
down the gullet, because such ingestion would likely include some water.The assertion can be found that the anterior tip of the tracheae at
the epiglottis can be thrust into the internal nostrils (posterior nares)
and enable breathing to take place at the same time as swallowing — the
food passing around this pipeline of air that extends vertically across
the middle of the throat.The smaller toothed cetaceans, the dolphins and porpoises, it is true,
have a greatly elongated epiglottis which on dissection is found lodged in
034 | Vol_III-0715
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
the internal nostrils. Consequently such a special separation of functions
can be described, but the development of the epiglottis in the baleen whales
is much less. The demand for air is, of course, imperative and must not be
hindered by any other activity, and though it would seem that the business of
feeding is not so important that it cannot be quickly and briefly suspended
to breathe, in the smaller forms, at least, it would seem that swallowing
and breathing both go on uninterrupted.Detection of food in the water has not been investigated, but it may
consist of “smelling” water-borne odors by the organs of Jacobsen in the
front tip of the palate, or by the tongue; by sight of dense swarms of food,
or it may consist of contact with the hordes of small organisms by the sinus
hairs on the snout, or even in the “hearing” of the movement of macroplanktonic
organisms in swarms, such as the snapping of shrimp when swimming, or the
rustle of carpaces, etc. It is certain, however, that there is a certain
amount of blundering through the water in connection with feeding, especially
after it has started. (See Senses.)Food and Water Balance; Excretion
The food balance of the body can be summed up by saying that in summer
they eat and get fat, and in the winter they do neither, but use up much of
the fat to maintain body processes during this periodic scarcity of food.
The depot fats are in a constant state of flux and change, either receiving
or losing constituent parts. No good biochemical studies with other mammals,
and with other whales, it would seem that, in this animal, fluctuating
balance is the normal condition. Also, it seems likely that the deposited fats
are largely similar to those taken in with the food, i.e., homolipoidal.Water balance is a more complicated and less known problem. Certain
035 | Vol_III-0716
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
it is that the whale drinks no fresh water. It is almost as probable that
they take in no salt water with the food, by the simple expedient of squeezing
it out of the mouth when they swallow; and it is likely that they manufacture
metabolic water from carbohydrates derived from fats of the body. Ana l ogy
with other baleen whales could mean that the blood is quite salty, perhaps
at times even isotonic with sea water.The kidneys are made up of thousands of individual small kidneys,
each about the size of a gold ball, called renculi. This compound structure
may have a special function.Feces are in the form of a thick liquid which, emitted at the surface
when the whale rises to blow, colors the surrounding water red if the whale
has been feeding on shrimp, and presumably with the same color for copepod
food; but it should be black if the food has been the large winged snail,
Clione limacina .Respiration, Spout, Voice
Respiration is periodic and definitely rhythmic, as a short series of
blows at the surface interrupted by a long pause during submergence, and
is part of a regular diving-respiratory rhythm. (See Diving.) The act
of a single respiration itself is a quick blastlike exhalation as soon as
the nostrils break the surface, accompanied by the visible condensation of
breath, or “spout,” and is followed immediately by a quick inhalation
which goes unnoticed in the general noise of the blow and the heave of the
body out of the water. Both exhalation and inhalation take only about two
seconds, or perhaps three. The entire account above is adapted from obser–
vations on other baleen whales, because there has been no detailed record
of such in the arctic right whale, which, however, should have a similar
pattern.
036 | Vol_III-0717
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
the form of the vaporous spout is curiously undescribed in most
accounts of the more lettered old-time whalers, but we know that it has
the typical double nature similar to that of the right whale, which, as
admirably shown by the British cetologist L. Harrison Matthews in 1938 for
the southern right whale, is two distinctly separate streams of vapor di–
verging at an angle of at least 30 degrees and rising 10 ft. or so. This
form is unique among whales.In the rorquals the spout is a high, single, vertical column from the
closely appressed double nostrils on top of the head, and in the sperm whale
it is a single low gush at a forward angle from the single S-shaped nostril
at the left tip of the high snout. However, if close enough behind a ror–
qual, one may discern a double nature at the base of the spout just above
the twin blowholes, with the twin jets merging only a few feet above the head.It can be concluded that the diverging spouts of the right whale are
the result of a characteristic slant to the nostrils so that, when open,
they point dorso-laterally instead of dorsally, and the same can be assumed
for the arctic right whale.The exhalation of air (the spout) is accompanied by a loud swoosh or
blastlike hiss. No other sound is heard from the whale and no true vocal
cords or a true voice are present, as is the case also with all other Cetacea,
but it is very likely that they can make some sort of sound. (See Inter–
communication.)It is believed that the normal position of the nostrils is closed,
and that it takes a voluntary action to open them, which itself is a reflex
stimulated by the emergence of the nostrils or top of the head out of water
into air. There is a certain amount of evidence that a whale can spout while
the nostrils are slightly below the surface, but this observation should be
verified.
037 | Vol_III-0718
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
There is testimony that oiliness on the surface of the water means that
whales have been feeding recently because it is believed that a considerable
amount of mucus is discharged with the spout. However, the matter needs
verification and study. Some or all of this floating oily substance may
be from plankton.As far as known, air is transmitted directly to the lungs without the
intervention or supplemental use of any nasal chambers or air pockets for
storage of either used or unused air. The question of whether a whale sub–
merges with full, partly full, or empty lungs is still unsolved, but it seems
likely that they take a full, or normal, breath on the last respiration —
at least they have a quantity of air in the lungs when they spout after
emerging from a dive. Decrease of buoyance would seem favorable for diving,
but buoyancy itself appears to be a character of deep-diving whales, and under
any circumstances the need for oxygen is vital. (See Diving.)The trachea, as our knowledge of other whales indicates, is rigidly
supported with cartilege, and the lungs are very elastic with the alveoli
possessing a sphincter muscle. Everything points toward strength and elasticity,
with the probable functions of resisting some amount of pressure associated with
deep diving and of completely replacing the air at each respiration.There has been mentioned in connection with feeding, the possible disso–
ciation of breathing from swallowing by means of a continuous air passage to
the lungs through an elongated epiglottis inserted into the internal nostrils
as a vertical tube across the throat (oesophagus). It appears likely that
these structures function in just this way, and that the whale can breathe
quickly and at any time when at the surface, irrespective of feeding activities.
038 | Vol_III-0719
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Circulatory System
The circulation of blood and lymph of the arctic right whale probably
follows the general mammalian pattern, with the added feature of an exten–
sive system of capillary knots or plexuses known as retia mirabilia in the
thoracic region and a thick vascular spongy cushion in the dura mater lining
of the spinal cord and brain. The volume of blood or its haemoglobin content
would seem normal for mammals, though salt content may be slightly higher.
Undoubtedly the peripheral circulation can be stopped during deep dives to
conserve the blood-oxygen for the brain, and this, with undoubted slow heart
beat, or brachycardia, helps the whale to maintain itself under water for long
periods without breathing.A temperature of 102°F. has been recorded for an arctic right whale,
but the conditions of taking and details of the subject were not stated.The Senses, Tropic Behavior, Sleep
The arctic right whale, in agreement with most other Cetacea, has poor
eyesight, especially out of water, and acute hearing, especially under water.
A sense of taste is probably present, and water-borne chemicals (odors) may
possibly be “smelled” by special organs in the mouth. A sense of touch and
feeling undoubtedly is acute and well distributed over the entire body, and
is helped by sinus hairs on the snout.Tropic behavior, which is recorded, is a pronounced timidity and a
tendency to escape strange stimuli rather than investiagte or fight; there
is also a positive thermotropism to cold water with a preference for the
edge of the ice pack, and a positive thigmotropism for water current. Sleep
is done at the surface, usually in a sheltered place in the ice or near its
edge.
039 | Vol_III-0720
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Vision . The eye of the arctic right whale is relatively small, like
that of an “ox,” but it has evolved into a fish-type as an adaptation for
vision through water, not air. The eye opening is about 2-1/2 inches wide
between canthi (corners) and is covered by movable lids 5 or 6 inches long
which do not have eyelashes. The eyeball is slightly flattened in front,
a bit more than 2 inches in diameter, and with a transversely elliptical
pupil. From knowledge of the eyes of other baleen whales, the cornea is
lubricated by special Harderian glands, and the base of the eyeball is
greatly stiffened by a thick coat of sclera. However, the eyeball is
movable to some degree, and points slightly downward and forward. An
eye placed so far laterally certainly has no binocular coordination with
the opposite member, nor can it be directed straight for or aft.Eyesight is probably poor, especially out of water. However,
undoubtedly vision plays a large part in orienting the whale in a general
way to the environment, because there is certainly detection of open leads
of water under the ice by patches of refracted light, and there probably
is awareness of thick concentrations of macroplanktonic food by dark patches
in the water; there is also an ability to see a ship’s hull or a fellow whale,
and, even, perhaps, to distinguish sharp details in objects close-to.The ability of the arctic right whale to see through air is a dis–
puted point. Actually, there is no need for the whale to look out o f the
water, unless it be to spy an Eskimo whaling crew waiting at the edge of
the ice in a lead ahead! Anything on the surface of the water, ship or
other whale, would be seen by its shadow or its bulk, especially if the
observing whale turned itself to bring one eye into better position for
overhead vision. Yet there actually have been a number of records where the
arctic right whale has conspicuously and deliberately thrust the head out of
040 | Vol_III-0721
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
the water, apparently to “size-up” an intruding boat and men the better.Hearing . The ear of the arctic right whale is visible externally
only as a small hole just back of the eye, flush with the skin, and in some
individuals is hardly detectible. This represents the outer end of the
external canal (meatus), without trace of an external pinna. The narrow
canal leads to the ear bones on the side rear of the skull, though perhaps
the tube is blocked with wax, or perhaps it is atrophied, or grown together
in places, we do not know. The ear bones themselves are a loosely attached
swollen, periotic chamber about the size of the human fist which represents
the fused tympanic and periotic bones with the fused bones of the middle ear.
There is a hollow fingerlike membrane attached at one side and other compli–
cated structures. This complex makes up the heart of the ear, and is respon–
sible in some way for the alleged acute powersof hearing, which here means
the detection of waterborne vibrations. The structure and function as an
aid in hearing, or Eustachian tubes, said to be very large in other Cetacea,
are not known.Few accounts disagree on the extreme acuity of the arctic right whale
in detecting vibrations through the water. Such good hearing was painfully
evident to those whalers who sp l ashed oars too loudly, or stomped feet on
the bottom of the boat.However, there is some disagreement as to the ability of the whale
to hear air-borne noises, with the majority of writers discounting such;
but here and there are bits of evidence that such airbo nr rn e noises are
transmitted in some way through the water and hence to the whale.Smell . A sense of small is probably absent or rudimentary in the nasal
passages, which themselves have no true olfactory chambers. Certainly smell
does not function much because of the very short amount of time when airborne
041 | Vol_III-0722
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
odors can contact the nasal membranes.However, the detection of water-borne odors may be accomplished through
taste buds in the tongue, or by means of the vestigial twin pits of the
organs of Jacobsen in the front tip of the palate, or by other means. Such
sensitivity would be extremely difficult to determine and measure.Taste. The sense of taste is also unmeasurable though it undoubtedly
exists and may be intimately linked with the detection of water-borne
odors as a sense of smell. This is pure speculation, but taste and smell
in the water should be due to the same physical cause: chemicals in the
water, though contact of food is the primary stimulus to taste, and the whale
can safely be considered as having an acute development of this sensitivity
to food taste.Touch. The sense of touch is undoubtedly well developed because one
can postulate with reason that the arctic right whale is very sensitive
to water pressure, water temperature, and water flow as well as to contact
with solid objects such as ice in large or small form, fishes, and even
macroplanktonic food. As concerns this sense, the hairs on the muzzle can
be considered as organs of touch. They are dead-looking, white, short,
brittle hairs, but each ends (if there are homologies with other baleen
whales) in a nerve and blood sinus (Pacinian corpuscle) which would register
the slightest tactile impression on the hair by food particle or water
current.The skin around the nostrils is undoubtedly very sensitive to contact
of air and water because it probably is the trigger to the nostril reflexes
which allow respiration as soon as the head emerges out of water and holds
them open for the duration of the emergence, and no longer.Tropisms . Trophic behavior, or instinctive action in response to
042 | Vol_III-0723
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
environmental stimuli, is little understood, but it is known that the whale
is extremely sensitive to strange stimuli and reacts with timidity, fright,
and flight rather than curiosity or fight. It is easily spooked by as
much as a bird lighting on the back.The whale also rarely strays far from the ice, and presumably is
constantly aware of this type of environment by sight of the ice itself,
the sound of slapping water, the feel of the low temperature, and the taste
of fresh water, and positively orients itself accordingly.There is also evidence that the whale swims against the current
habitually, at least when frightened, and perhaps also when feeding. This
positive thigmotropism to water flow would be advantageous in the detection
of water-borne odors and sounds which reveal the nearby presence of food,
but it is hard to see what it has to do with safety, which is usually associated
with ice, no matter where it may lie in relation to water currents. The sperm
whale is also notoriously an upwind swimmer when chased or harpooned.Sleep . Sleep is done at the surface while in the shelter of an ice
cove or lead where smooth water prevails, and appears to be quite profound.
Undoubtedly the eyes are closed, and the body is maintained in a normal
upright position by a slight body torus and action of the flippers. The
body floats at the surface by natural buoyancy.Intercommunication
Perhaps this is the place to discuss the possibility and the nature
of intercommunication between individuals of the arctic right whale. De–
tection, by one whale, of the movements or presence of another, and the change
of behavior accordingly, was well known to the old-time whalers who noticed
that fright of one whale often appeared to be communicated in some way to
043 | Vol_III-0724
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
others nearby, and all promptly “took-off.” In addition, the action of a
pair or of any larger, socially integrated group was usually in unison,
and when one whale got out of step it returned soon to concerted group
action, even while submerged and sometimes at some distance away.Intercommunication automatically implies by definition the intention
to communicate some message and the ability to understand it. Otherwise,
it would be mere detection of unintentional signals, which undoubtedly
takes place but is not intercommunication in the strict sense.The usual physical means of intercommunication under water are three:
Light (vision, sight), chemicals (smell), and vibration (sound, hearing).
The nature of electrical discharge and its reception by organisms is little
understood, and although it is known to exist in some fishes, is without a
clue in Cetacea. Physical contact (touch) and chemical contact (taste)
involve no distance and will be ruled out in this discussion of intercommuni–
cation, although touch at least is probably acute in Cetacea.The arctic right whale has a small eye, but it is adapted for vision
through water and can probably function well in this medium. Thus a whale
can undoubtedly see signal movements of another whale, but this means of
communication is limited by the poor Visibilities possibilities of making
sign language on the part of the whale, and the poor penetration of light
through water. At best, bright light can penetrate little more than 600
feet, with 200 feet about the limit for purposes of good vision, and the
distance would be much less for weak light reflected from a dark body.It seems that communication by visual stimuli would be practically
limited to violent swimming motions of fright and flight, and then it is
doubtful that this is done intentionally to convey a message to another
whale. Similarly classified might be the upside-down and lateral swimming
of a whale when curiously investigating a ship, or when feeding.
044 | Vol_III-0725
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
However, the striking coloration of some species, such as the sharply
white bellies of the white-vented and bellied porpoises of the North Pacific,
the white band on the flipper of the least rorqual, the distinot black and
white pattern of the killer whale, etc., might be functional as recognition
marks for purposeful social communication, when coupled with certain actions
to flash the pattern and make it more conspicuous.The sense of smell in the arctic right whale for under-water odors is
unknown, but even if one attributes a high degree of acuity, which is hardly
likely, this sense would seem to be limited by the short distance of diffusion
of a concentration of chemicals in the water and the apparent lack of external
glandular secretions of the whale, though it is admitted that, coming down–
water, odors may travel surprisingly far and fast.When it comes to the sense of hearing in the arctic right whale, it is
apparent that there is an unusually specialized development of the middle and
inner ear, and, according to the usual cetacean pattern, also of the accustic
tract of the brain, which is associated with the reception of vibrations.
The absence of an external ear (pinna) and open external canal, with fusion
of the ear bones, should not be construed as meaning a vestigal condition
of the entire ear or poor hearing, but merely as a complete absence of any
need or ability to detect air-borne vibrations or transmit such sounds through
a tympanic membrane. All mammals on the way to aquatic life have reduced
external ears and canals.In addition, vibrations pass through water with a speed and distance far
greater than through air, in fact, about five times as fast and may times as
far, for the same amplitude. Water is the ideal medium for the transmission
of this physical means of communication, which is so common in air-living animals
that it should be practically universal in aquatic animals.
045 | Vol_III-0726
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
The maximum distance of intercommunication between Cetacea would seem
to be prima-facie evidence in this matter, but it is very difficult to determine
and is complicated by the factors of specific differences and subjective inter–
pretations put upon whale behavior by the observer. Distances of detection of
one whale by another have been put as high as one mile, and from there on down
the claimed observations of intercommunication increase. Of importance here,
however, is the apparent positive intercommunication at distances far beyond
the limit of penetration of light or the diffusion of odors, and at a speed
which could be only light or sound.The conclusion is that sound vibrations and hearing are really the
important mechanisms of intercommunication in the arctic right whale. This
must be admitted as a primary assumption in the discussion to follow.The absence of vocal cords and a “voice” has been mentioned, but all other
Cetacea also are unequipped with cords or a “voice,” yet some definitely and
unequivocally are known to make noises, and we can presume that when hydro–
phones are put into action on arctic right whales, without interference from
other species or other known sources of sound, this species will be found to
make a variety of noises and sounds also.It is reasonable to suppose that these messages purposefully communicate
strong emotions such as fright and sexual desire, and perhaps even indicate
territorial claims or the presence of each other for social reasons.Without vocal cords, how can the arctic right whale make a sound for
transmission through the water? Theoretically, the following possibilities
can be considered:1. Movement of the flukes under water so that friction and cavitation
is produced, accompanies by a sound like that of a propeller. Cavitation can
be seen in the wake of whales when swimming under full power near the surface,
046 | Vol_III-0727
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
and may be more normal in occurrence than is apparent, but in this case the
apparent conflict between cavitation and alleged absence of drag or turbu–
lence would have to be resolved. Cavitation by the flukes is probably the
origin of the sound heard by submariners during the late war and thought to
have come from enemy subs or ships, but never identified other than being
sometimes associated with a whale in the vicinity.2. a. Forcible and controlled expulsion of a small amount of air
from the nostrils to make a whistling, whining, gurgling, flatulent, trilling,
singing, or popping sound. Tursiops dolphins in a tanks have been heard to
make some of these sounds at the same time that bubbles have been seen emerging
from the nostrils, and the arctic right whale has been observed to emit a
stream of bubbles from the blowholes while swimming near the surface in clear
water. The spout of a whale after a dive indicates that much air is retained
in the lungs, which is not the case with dolphins. However, there may be
considerable production of sound by air expulsion from the nostrils of a whale
without exhaustion of air from the lungs.b. Forcible and controlled passage of air into air pockets, sac ,s (,'s)
or resonating chambers to make a hollow, drumming, booming, or popping sound.
This type of vibration has not been recorded for any Cetacea, but the presence
of a large blind chamber in each side of the huge laryns of most whales, including
the right whale, makes such a mechanism and sound distinct possibilities.The almost universal tendency of mammals and other terrestrial vertebrates
(from which Cetacea were originally derived) to communicate by the controlled
use of air in the respiratory passages, makes this look like a logical mechanism
also in the shale even without vocal cords.3. Rubbing or stridulation of one part of the body on another part to
produce a squeaking or stuttering sound. The arctic right whale might accomplish
047 | Vol_III-0728
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
this bya. rubbing the large, rubbery, flexible lower lip on the edge
of the upper.b. rubbing the lower lip on the edges of the baleen.
c. rubbing the tongue on the tips of the baleen.
d. rubbing one part of the nasal passages or larynx against
a neighboring part, such as a nasal plug in its socket. Although a
aqueaking sound has been noticed the Tursiops dolphin in a tank, the means
of production remains a mystery. Of the above methods, perhaps the first
is the only logical one to ascribe to the arctic right whale as a possibility.4. Slapping, drumming, or the percussion of one part on another, or on
the water or on a membrane, to make a drumming, clicking, slapping or clapping
sound. In the arctic right whale such might be accomplished bya. slapping the flippers on the side of the body.
b. slapping the flippers on the surface of the water.
c. slapping the flukes on the surface of the water.
d. slapping the large, flexible lower lip against the sessile upper.
Slapping the flippers or flukes on the surface can make a loud noise.
With the flukes it is known as lobtailing, and with the flippers, loblolling.
Neither is common, but each is performed occasionally in connection with
violent swimming antice ( q.v. ), which may be only an individual expression
of exuberance, or counter-irritation against lice, or even a communication
of a social nature to other whales, wherever they may be, to announce sexual
activity. Slapping the water with the flukes when harpooned may be more of
a defense blow against the offending boat than a signal of danger to other
whales.
048 | Vol_III-0729
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
5. Quickly unbending a strongly flexed and resilient organ to make
a snapping noise. In this connection one immediately thinks of the baleen
plates, which are horny, resilient and perhaps bent in the mouth normally
or purposefully and when quickly released snap back into normal position.
There may be even a bending at the edges by the lower lip with quick release,
one at a time, to make a staccato noise. All this, however, is pure specula–
tion. (See Baleen.)The possibilite os using water in a forced stream to make a noise
cannot be ruled out, but it is hard to imagine how it is done by a whale.
Water sucked in and out of the rear of the mouth might make a slurping noise,
but here the possibilities appear exhausted. Certainly there is no jetlike
expulsion of water out of an orifice of the body, such as the blowholes.
Nor is it that squid and octopi, which progress by the sudden forcible
squirting of water from the mantle out of the siphon tube behind, make any
noise in the process.Social Behavior. Intra- and Interspecific Relationships
The arctic right whale appears to be solitary or socially aggregated
only in family groups of two, three, or perhaps four. Two would mean a mated
pair, or a mother with recent young; three would mean a mated pair with a
recent young; and four should mean a mated pair with tw s o young, a yearling
and a newborn calf. The actions of swimming, feeding, and playing of the
members of a social group such as outlined above, are undoubtedly coordinated
by the social cohesion of the group, and thus identified as a social organiza–
tion.Larger groups are usually to be considered as accidental aggregates
attracted to the same spot by a concentration of food, or by passages through
ice, or ice masses forming obstacles in the path of migration. However,
049 | Vol_III-0730
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
there is evidence that some degree of sexual and age segregation take place,
and that there may be loosely coordinated groups, larger than three or four,
of either young females, pregnant females, mothers of young, or young bulls,
or even young of both sexes. Evidence for these larger groups of segregated
classes of individuals is, however, extremely tenuous.Harmonious associations with other animals are also very vaguely known.
In places, the northern fulmar (a tube-nosed swimming bird) is called whale–
bird because it often congregates in great numbers where the arctic whale is
present, but this is best explained as a purely accidental association of the
two species drawn to the same spot by the presence of the same food. There
is also said to be a food association between the arctic right whale and the
white whale (white porpoise, beluga); in this case the latter may find food
among some fish preying on the small whale food.There is a striking coincidence between the ranges in time and in some
places in North Atlantic and Greenland waters between the arctic right whale
and the narwhal, but this is not easily explained except in an indirect way,
as is the occasional association with white whales. The narwhal in these
places was actually hailed by some whalers as a harbinger of the larger
species, as if there was a successional character to their association.Other relations with other species of animals include the predator-prey
relationship between the arctic right whale and its animal food (see Food and
Feeding, and Distribution); the prey-predator relationship with the killer
whale, in which the arctic right whale is the victim (see Enemies; the host–
parasite relationship with certain parasites (see Parasites); and finally the
antagonistic relationship with certain other species of whales (see Enemies,
Distribution).
050 | Vol_III-0731
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Reproduction
This subject covers anatomy, physiology, sexual maturity, breeding
(mating) season and behavior, gestation, parturition (calving), nursing,
milk, maternal care, and social as well as geographical segregation of sexes
and ages when related to the above.It is presumed that the sexual anatomy of the adult male and female
follow the general pattern of cetacean structure.In the male, the member would normally be sheathed in the genital slit,
2 to 3 feet in length, where it is completely hidden and not breaking the smooth
contour of the body as it would if pendant. The member is long, sharply
pointed, with rudimentary prepuce, and probably with a small beculum (because
one has been described from the right whale). The urethra penetrates it for
the entire length. The testes are internal, on the inner body wall just above
the base of the member; they are sausage-shaped and large. When the member is
sheathed, the appearance of the genital region resembles that in the female,
with the difference of a distance of 18 inches or 2 feet between the anus and
the genital slit, instead of 6 or 8 inches as in the female.In the female the genital orifice would be close to the anus (6 to 8
inches) a bit wider, with clitoris perhaps visible, and flanked closely by
the shorter slits of the mammae, one on each side. The uterus should be bicor–
nuate and the vagina with valve-like folds. The ovaries presumably are located
on the lateral body wall at the base of the kidneys, and during pregnancy have
a huge corpus luteum which later leaves a rosette structure in the ovary for
apparently the entire life of the individual.The mammae are two, just lateral to the genital slit, each lying in an
individual fold from which it does not protrude except when swollen lactation.
051 | Vol_III-0732
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
The nipple is probably slightly larger than the human thumb. The mammary glands
would lie forward of the genital region for the length of the abdomen, and,
although secreting much milk during lactation, should not swell the contour
of the body appreciably. They possess large sinuses which store the secreted
milk so that it can be given to the calf in large quantities and quickly
during nursing. The milk is certainly white, thick, bitter, and full of fat,
but without sugar. Nursing seems to be done while the mother rolls on the side.Sexual maturity probably is attained at about 3 years, when the animal
has reached practically its full size, though growth takes place slowly for
several years more.Mating, or breeding, seems to take place anywhere from the summer feeding
season to midwinter, or until all the females are covered. This activity
would seem to be naturally secondary in importance to the great summer feeding
activity.Courtship is undescribed. Coupling is of course ventro-ventral and,
sometimes at least, while upright in the water with the beads exposed. Gesta–
tion seems to be between 9 and 11 months, parturition taking place from late
April to early winter. Parturition and nursing require so much strength and
foodstuffs from the mother that they would logically accompany or immediately
follow the fattening early in the feeding season.The young are weaned probably in 6 to 9 months, but may accompany the
mother for a year. Pregnancy may occur every year or every other year;
probably both conditions are found, and it is not known which is the normal.Almost invariably the birth is single, but twins rarely are born. Addi–
tional multiple births would seem to be impossible to carry to a successful
conclusion by the limited number of mammae, and even two might be diffidult
to raise.
052 | Vol_III-0733
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
The act of parturition itself should follow the cetacean pattern of
breach (tail) presentation and quick termination. This pattern of action
enables the nose to appear last and to obtain a breath of air rather than
water on the first reflex. The young certainly is very precocious and able
to swim and breathe at the instance of emergence, though the mother undoubtedly
turns immediately and helps the baby remain on the surface until all its
normal reflexes are functioning. Despite this perfect adaptation for birth of
an air-breathing animal at sea, drowning may be a very serious factor in
mortality.Maternal affection is marked, and the female is said to be quite fierce
when with calf. The latter was often harpooned to make more certain the capture
of the female which would not leave; otherwise she was as timid and docile
or more so than the male. There would seem to be some social and geographic
segregation of the pregnant and recently parturient females from the others
because they were taken by the whalers with much less frequency than adult
males and half-grown young. Presumably the females in summer and fall seek
the protection of the ice to a greater extent than the others, and may don–
gregate in larger numbers farther within the broken ice pack where ships
cannot go and which killer whales avoid.Growth and Development; Maturity and Age
The newborn arctic right whale is 13 to 15 feet long, with predominantly
black color except for some white on the chin, and with baleen just protruding
from the gum. The head is relatively small. Birth is usually in the late
spring and early summer, and suckling continues for perhaps 6 months. After
weaning, the calf may continue to accompany the mother for a number of months
more. Girth of the young whale has been stated as 3/4th of the total length,
which is larger relatively than in the adult.
053 | Vol_III-0734
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
The relatively small size of the head is the reverse of the case with
most young mammals, and may be related to the need for suckling heavily with
a mouth devoid of lips and for growing quickly when very young. The devel–
opment of the head and baleen has been noted as exceptionally good in small
calves, and growth is apparently rapid, with the consequences that weaning
can be presumed to occur soon after birth and be accompanied by the physical
ability to take adult food. Whale reproduction and infant life point to an
evolutionary trend of shortening the period of early dependency on the mother.The rate of growth is not known; it was considered by most early authors
to be very slow, but some thought it rapid. The attainment of sexual maturity
is not known in age or size; but for physical maturity there is an indication
that males are full grown at around 45 feet, and females at 50 feet or so,
though age at this period is unknown.Knowledge of other baleen whales could indicate that growth is rapid,
with sexual maturity at 3 years or so, and physical maturity a few years later.
The presence of a corpus luteum in an ovary is positive proof of sexual maturity
for females, as is mature motile sperm for males, but these have not been
examined in the arctic right whale, as far as known. Physical maturity is
indicated by the complete fusion of all vertebral epiphyses, and this is known
for several individuals, as mentioned above.Age, or longevity, was considered by early authors to be great, 50 to
100 years or so, and this was in line with the general belief of the times.
The evidence consisted in the dates on old harpoons found buried in blubber
from some previous encounter; in the amount of scar tissue around a wound;
in the apparent absence of diseased individuals or death by means of other
than whaling activities; and especially in the many apparently annual “rings”
on the blades of baleen.
054 | Vol_III-0735
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
[ ?]
The difference between the date of cap ut tu re of a whale and that on an
old harpoon found embedded in the flesh or blubber from a previous encounter,
was often considered prima-facie evidence of at least the minimum age of the
whale. However, the date on the old harpoon was that of its manufacture
and not the year of its final use before being lost, and a harpoon might
have been 40 years or from the date, but cast into the whale and lost only
a year or so previous to recovery. However, one harpoon was recovered an
alleged 40 years after it was stamped with a date of manufacture, and 37
years after the whip whose name it also bore, was lost at sea!The amount and nature of scar tissue and the apparent absence of
mortality and morbidity and too vague to be reliable criteria for age deter–
minations. Most dead carcasses found at sea showed evidence of attack by
whalers and not by killer whales or other injuries, and thus it might have
been hastily concluded that natural death was infrequent.However, the matter of the “rings” on the baleen plates, has come in
for a great deal of discussion and interpretation. Scoresby is considered
the father of this idea. The “rings” appeared to him to be 6 or 7 inches
apart, and he thus concluded that the age of the whale was accurately repre–
sented by a figure twice the length in feet of the longest baleen blade.
However, Eschricht and Reinhardt, the greatest researchers on the arctic
right whale since Scoresby, believed that growth in the whale was rapid
and that their 22-foot individual was no more than 2 years old, despite the
observations that its 3-foot baleen had many rings. They implied that many
more than 2 rings were formed yearly, and perhaps that the number was not
related to age.Wear of baleen occurs but was not discussed by any author as affecting
055 | Vol_III-0736
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
the number of rings and hence the age. However, wear would obliterate the
earlier and most terminal rings and give a low figure no matter what inter–
[ ?] pretation is placed on the periodicity of ring formation.Recent researches by Norwegian and Japanese authors on the blue and
finback whales have shown that there is a relation between the “rings” and
age all right, but an interpretation is still in doubt.Accidents, Morbidity, and Mortality
Accidents occur but are practically confined to drowning. Some new–
born calves certainly drown at parturition, and though nothing is known of
the incidence it is believed to be high. The infant and young, and even
the adult, are known to become trapped occasionally in rapidly freezing ice
and drown because of inability to reach air; and the recently weaned calf
might conceivably misjudge the extent of solid ice floes and dive too far
to return to the original lead or be unable to reach the other side and drown.The only other type of accident is stranding, and records of stranded
bowheads are so rare that it would seem that they instinctively avoid inlets
where the tidal range is great, or, when floundering in shallow water, in–
stinctively remain calm and await without panic the rising ride or work their
way into deeper water.There is no evidence of morbidity and disease. Pathology of any
abnormal condition is also unknown. But investigation has been absent.The natural mortality of the arctic right whale is undoubtedly greatest
in the early infant stage, as it is with most mammals, with some of the factors
continuing throughout life until senility eventually operates on some.In the newborn stage the dangers would be from drowning at parturition
056 | Vol_III-0737
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
and predation from killer whale and shark which might be attracted by the
blood and commotion.In the infant the main danger would be from predation by killer whale
and possibly shark, and accidents in the ice, such as drowning under an ice
pan too large to traverse, or entrapment by freezing of the leads and sub–
sequent drowning. Aboriginal human groups which hunt the bowhead take their
greatest toll on the young.In the adult stage the factors of predation by killer whale and accident
by drowning would be less, and predation by sharks would probably cease to
exist, but the adult would be subjected to the sledge-hammer blows of the
whaling industry and suffer accordingly. Death from stranding might increase
with age. Old age undoubtedly overtakes certain of these adults but the
proportion is unknown. Large but emaciated whales with long ballen have
been reported, and undoubtedly these were senile.Of all factors of mortality, the most serious would seem to be the
devastating decimation of the adults by the whaling industry, which removes
reproductively active individuals. Of “natural” factors, there is no way
of estimating the worst, and although it is the natural thing to blame the
killer whale for vicious predation, actually more arctic right whales may
die from drowning accidents than from predation.Parasites, Enemies, Defense
The arctic right whale seems to be relatively free from parasites
though most individuals have a few lice of the genus Cyamus (a crustacean)
around the jaws, axillae, and genitalia. The absence of a “bonnet” on the
snout indicates the relative freedom from Cyamus infestation because this
057 | Vol_III-0738
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
structure on the common right whale is invariably a mass of lice. Barnacles
occur but the incidence is not known. Penellids are unreported. Diatoms
sometimes attach on the under surface in a film and color the skin, but they
would seem to be commensals rather than parasites.The principal natural enemy of the arctic right whale is the killer
whale. Man, of course, is an enemy, but an unnatural one in the sense that
most of his predation on the whale was a temporary cultural activity of the
17th and 18th centuries. The Eskimos and Sea Chukchi of the Bering Strait
and arctic Alaska area, on the other hand, are more a natural enemies in that
they have hunted the bowhead millennially as part of their subsistence economy.
Man’s organized and economic persecution is a special story coming under the
heading of human utilization, or whale fishery, or whaling industry.There is evidence that the Greenland shark (sleeper shark, gurry shark,
polar shark, Somniosus microcephalus ) is an enemy in that it attacks living
whales, but these stories are probably exaggerated extensions of the remarkable
tenacity and persistence with which these 10 to 15-foot sharks will tear at
the carcass of a dead whale in such a frenzy of gluttony that they can be
chopped with blubber spades and harpooned without turning away from their banquet.
They are known to capture seals, which indicates a speed of attack and a
voraciousness which might be directed toward the calf of the Greenland whale
if not at the adult.The killer whale is really the only serious natural enemy of the arctic
right whale, and even then the amount of its predation is probably less than
might be expected. The arctic right whale fears this wolf of the sea and
takes refuge in the ice or leaves the entire area as quickly as possible.
One important reason for the tendency of the arctic right whale to inhabit
broken ice and penetrate far into leads before or farther than almost any
058 | Vol_III-0739
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
other mammal except a seal, is believed to be its fear of the killer whale,
which, however, undoubtedly finds the majority of its food to be large fish,
like cod and salmon, and seals, and white whales or narwhals in the order of
importance named. Capture of calves should be more common than that of adults.All old accounts which used the words “swordfish,” “thresher’ shark,”
and “sawfish,” even though accompanied by descriptions which apply to these
animals, referred to the killer whale. The names were loosely used by sailors,
and the descriptions were hung on the account later after consultation with
some book which described the true swordfish, thresher-shark, or sawfish.There are stories alleging the narwhal to be an enemy that furiously
attacks the whale with its long tusk, but these accounts are undoubtedly
spurious. There is actually a vague sort of association between the two
species, and where the narwhal is found in West and East Greenland waters,
the arctic right whale often is found also, either at the same time or later,
but without any known antagonism or social inter-relationships. (See Social
Behavior, etc., Distribution.)Defense against parasites would appear to consist of rubbing the body
against the ice, though this has not been recorded often and may have been
done by heavily infested individuals.Defense against enemies, killer whale, man, and the Greenland shark,
is by blows of the tail exclusive ly, but such is probably the last resort
of a naturally timid animal which would attempt to escape first rather than
flight. When in defense of its young, or tormented by harpoons and held by
the lines, or when cornered by boats in the ice, the furty and power of the
blows by the flukes is tremendous, and the whole body is maneuvered so that
this powerful organ is brought into play either from below or from the top
against whaleboat, killer whale, or shark. There is no disagreement as to
this method of defense, as there is none concerning the non e -use of the mouth
059 | Vol_III-0740
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
for biting, which is just the only other imaginable defense.Geographic and Ecologic Distribution
Originally, before whaling greatly reduced its numbers, the arctic
right whale was abundant from Spitsbergen to Jan Mayen in the Greenland
Sea, in Davis Strait, Baffin Bay and its tributary channels, as well as
in Hudson Strait and northern Hudson Bay; and, on the other side of the
American continent, from the Beaufort Sea off Banks Island and the Mackenzie
River west to the Chukotsk Sea near Wrangel and Herald islands, and south
through Bering Strait to the northwestern Bering Sea off Kamchatka.
Occurrence in the nearby Okhotsk Sea is disputed (see Physical Types of
the arctic right whale).It was not found eastward of Spitsbergen and north of Europe and
Siberia as far as the Chukotsk Sea, i.e., it was absent from the Norwegian
Sea, the Barents Sea, the Kara Sea, the Laptev Sea, and the East Siberian
Sea. Reasons for its absence in these waters can be considered to be the
relatively warm temperatures of the Norwegian and Barents seas where the
Gulf Stream ends, and the heavy summer sea ice in the Kara Laptev, and
East Siberian seas. Competition from the blue whale in the Norwegian and
Barents seas may help the relatively warm Gulf Stream waters in preventing
the arctic right whale from spreading from the Greenland Sea to the Kara
Sea in summer. Absence of proper food in quantity may also have an adverse
effect.This original distribution of the arctic right whale was separated
into at least three, and probably four, distinct local populations:
( 1 ) The East Greenland, or Greenland, or Greenland Sea, Population, which wintered in the
seas north and northwest of Iceland and summered in the waters from Jan Mayen
060 | Vol_III-0741
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
to Spitsbergen and northeast Greenland; ( 2 ) The West Greenland Population,
which wintered in southern Davis Strait between northern Labrador and Hudson
Strait to southwestern Greenland, and summered in northern Baffin Bay, Lan–
caster Sound, and tributary channels and bodies of water; ( 3 ) The Hudson
Bay Population, which wintered probably in Hudson Strait and perhaps central
Hudson Bay, and summered all around Southampton Island and in the Foxe Basin;
and ( 4 ) The Bering-Arctic Population, which wintered in the northwestern
Bering Sea from Cape Navarin to the Kamchatka Peninsula, and summered
from Wrangel and Herald islands eastward to the Beaufort Sea and Banks
Island.Today the arctic right whale is practically unreported from the
Greenland Sea (Jan Mayen to Spitsbergen), and few are recorded from Baffin
Bay, Davis Strait, or Hudson Bay. Individuals exist in these waters, but
they are extremely scarce, migrate north early, and have barely been able
to maintain themselves since almost complete extermination 50 years ago.However, the Bering-Arctic population is relatively strong and numbers
are to be seen annually from St. Lawrence Island to Point Barrow, and in the
Beaufort Sea between the mouth of the Mackenzie and Banks Island. This
population did not suffer such devastating blows of the whaling industry
as did the other three and has recovered faster. However, no recent census
figures are available.It is possible that the three populations of the Greenland-Hudson
complex interchanged some individuals during the winter when the south parts
of the ranges were nearly continuous, and at an early date when original
populational levels were high. However, there is little chance that interchange
of individuals was normally effected between this Atlantic area and the
061 | Vol_III-0742
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Bering-Arctic population of the Pacific area, which could take place only
in summer when the whales of the former area extended as far west as Barrow
Strait, and the whales of the latter area extended as far east as the north–
eastern Beaufort Sea near Melville Island. This closes the gap between the
ranges to about 600 miles, but this gap is filled with practically impene–
trable ice.There is positive evidence in the ruins of Eskimo villages throughout
the Canadian Arctic that, not many thousands of years ago, the arctic right
whale was a summer visitant of this intervening area, i.e., in Cornwallis
Island, Gulf of Boothis, King William Island, and Queen Maud Sound. At this
time the waters could have been higher on account of land lowered from former
ice-sheet pressure, and the Rae Isthmus, Bellot Strait, the base of the
Boothis Peninsula, and Simpson Strait might have been passable in depth and
in freedom of ice to the arctic right whale. There seems to have been a
coincidence (causual relationship?) between the abandonment of these villages
by the Eskimos and the disappearance of the whale.In the last century there were a number of accounts of whales harpooned
in West Greenland waters with embedded harpoons which later investigation
claimed had been struck in East Greenland waters the same season, and in
some cases only a few days prior. These stories were believed to be strong
evidence of extremely rapid swimming and common interchange of individuals
between these two areas separated by a thousand miles of open water in summer;
or they were believed to prove the existence of an open water channel across
Greenland:The discovery of Eskimo harpoon points of stone in whales off East
Greenland also was once believed to indicate that they had been harpooned in
Davis Strait far to the west, but later it was shown that Eskimos inhabited
062 | Vol_III-0743
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
up to about 1850, the coast of the northeast Greenland above Scoresby Sound,
and hunted whales.Several lively tales attained gread credence and circulation in Europe
during the 17th and 18th centuries, and have been repeated seriously in some
modern literature. They related how whales harpooned in Korean and Kamchatkan
waters occasionally had embedded harpoons of European manufacture and thrown
in Spitsbergen waters, thus purporting to prove that the arctic right whale
regularly or occasionally migrated or wandered from the north Atlantic to
the northwest Pacific, though no route was mentioned.These storie ’ s originated from European sailors shipwrecked off Korea
and Kamchatka. They related seeing some of the whales and the harpoons in
question and hearing of others. The Gulf of Tartary (Tatary) mentioned in
one account, lies between Sakhalin Island and the Amur region of Asia just
northeast of Korea, and is in the range of the right and gray whales, both
of which, especially the right whale, may easily be confused even by whalers
with experience of the arctic right whale. There is no doubt of former
extensive whaling in these waters by the local inhabitants nor doubt of the
presence of harpoons of European manufacture, but it is far more plausible that
these harpoons were obtained in trade overland or by sea from Europe by the
high-culture Koreans, rather than that they were transported in the bodies
of migrating or wandering arctic right whales. In fact, even if the whale
could have swum this far through the great ice fields of the arctic coasts
of Asia or North America, it would not have gone so far mouth into the home
of the right or gray whale but would have stayed north in the colder waters
of its Bering-Arctic brother-population.Ecologically, the arctic right whale is associated with heavy ice,
cold-water temperatures, and concentrations of certain food. Depth of water
063 | Vol_III-0744
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
seems not to be a factor in itself, although statements are found that the
whale prefers shallow water. Neither does salinity or turbidity of the
water appear to affect the whale directly, although they may do so indirectly
by influence on planktonic food. There is no indication that any other species
of cetacean, such as the narwhal, has any positive influence on the distri–
bution of the arctic right whale.Negatively, the arctic right whale is repelled by the absence of pack
ice, temperatures too high for comfort, absence of food, and the presence of
killer whalers and possibly antagonistic species of other cetaceans such as
the blue whale, or other vertebrates such as the Greenland shark.Sea ice is a positive factor in distribution, but only along its edge;
extensive closed fields of ice are actually a deterrent to distribution and
a factor in mortality ( q.v. ). However, the arctic right whale definitely
prefers the edge of the pack ice to the open sea, and the heavy pack to the
light. A feeling of well-being could be imparted to the whale, especially
female with young, by broken floes and intervening leads that furnish safe
refuges from enemy and storm. The killer whale is unwilling or unable to
penetrate as far into the floe ice as the arctic right whale, and calm
water is always found in the pack. Any effect of the ice on the possible
antagonism between the arctic right whale and the blue whale is not known.It is believed that a low temperature of sea water is desired by the
whale, and that there may even be a narrow critical range of temperature which
restricts its distribution, the upper limit of tolerance is not known.The heavy layer of blubber of the whale is an inherent character which
is adaptive to the cold polar waters as well as to the forced winter starvation
period. In warmer waters there would be less loss of body heat through such
thick blubber, to the extent that overheating would result, especially during
064 | Vol_III-0745
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
such vigorous activities as courtship, mating, and escape from enemies.Concentration of food is a potent factor in the distribution of the
arctic right whale, at least in summer. The favorite food is the tiny,
red, copepod crustacean Calanus (the “sea rice” or “brit” of the whalers),
but also eaten extensively are the swarming pelagic shrimps of the family
Euphausiidae and the winged pteropodmollusks of the genera Clione and
Spiratella . Fish apparently are not eaten in quantity even when they
swarm as do the fingerling tom-cod and the capelin.The zooplanktonic food of the whale is itself dependent upon the
phytoplankton, such as the diatoms and coccolithophores. These in turn
are found only where dissolved phosphates, silicates, and nitrates are
sufficient and where temperature and light are optimum. Depth of water
may have some influence here, but probably only in connection with the
dissolved nutrients and the upwelling of bottom water or incoming river
water which carries them. Turbidity from silt would probably have a
harmful effect if strong enough to overcome the benefit from dissolved
nutrients in the same run-off water. Turbidity in deep water is from
phytoplankton, generally diatoms, and this usually means the association
of zooplankton, fish, whales, birds, etc., nearby in space or time.The early flowering of the phytoplankton is sometimes so prolific
that the resulting mass of plant life chokes the water and makes it foul
and slimy. At this time and place the zooplankton is not common, either
by reason of improper time or unfavorable conditions. The diatoms and other
marine plants then decline, either as a result of the grazing action of
small marine animals (zooplankton) which appear to increase at this time,
or because of the disappearance of nutrients, or perhaps because the life
cycle is run.
065 | Vol_III-0746
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
The zooplankton gathers at the flowering places of the diatoms, but
actually swarms most heavily at the surface when ready to spawn some time
after the period of heavy feeding. Thus there is a sequence of events in
time and, to a slight extent, in space of: Flowering of phytoplankton,
increase of zooplankton, decrease of phytoplankton, and spawning and
swarming of zooplankton. It is at the latter event that the whales pay
their calls for indulging in a bit of feeding themselves.Salinity seems to have no influence on the distribution of the arctic
right whale, even though there must be a considerable normal fluctuation
during the seasons. Inorganic salts should be low near the pack ice in
summer when the ice is melting, and should be high in winter when the
sea ice is taking away the upper and fresher layer of water. Salinity
in muddy w s hallow waters of the coast is considerably lower than in the
deep blue waters offshore, but the whale appears equally indifferent to
both conditions.Dissolved organic materials in the water are sometimes called
“nutrient salts,” and these materials are the basic foods of the diatoms
and other marine plants, but these salts are not considered a part of the
water salinity. They are mainly nitrates, phosphates, and silicates.The depth of water has as little influence on the distribution of
the arctic right whale as does salinity. It is true that the shallow coastal
waters hold no terrors for the whale, that it does not panic and strand as
might a species less accustomed to shallow water; but it consorts with
equal readiness in deep water if other conditions are favorable. However,
there is probably a negative effect from extreme tides which are found in
some places of the subarctic and arctic regions. This phenomenon as a factor
in whale distribution is not well known, but an example is a comparison of
the former whale population of Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay, both on
066 | Vol_III-0747
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
the southeast coast of Baffin Land. The whalers found that many whales could
be found and taken at the former but not at the latter, only about a hundred
miles to the south and directly adjacent to the winter grounds off Hudson
Strait. The tide of Cumberland Sound is much lower than at Frobisher Bay.The flowering of the enormous quantities of microscopic marine plants,
and the subsequently swarming of the slightly larger marine animals which
form the food of the arctic right whale, is a periodic phenomenon of polar
seas. As such, it occurs wherever conditions are right. These places change
locally to some extent from year to year, but over large areas rarely fail.They commence in spring in the areas off the winter ice, and as the summer
advances, recur progressively farther north into areas which were covered
with winter ice.The arctic right whale harvests this bloom of life from its earliest
occurrence farthest south along the ice front to its farthest point in the
north along the edge of the permanent polar ice pack, following the harvest
north as the season advances. There are some “early birds” among the whales,
as well as stragglers, and these scatter the movement over great distances
and weeks of time, but eventually the entire population of arctic right whales
shifts northward in the summer and retreats again in the fall when the food
disappears and ice forms on the surface of the sea. This annual movement is
a true migration of small scope, and one directly and entirely related to
feeding.It has been stated that the southward-flowing, cold currents along the
east coast of Greenland and on the west side of Davis Strait and Baffin Bay
are devoid of plankton and thus of whales such as the blue, finback, humback,
and arctic right whale, but the latter is found in these cold waters in summer
and the presence of plankton is to be presumed. The other whales inhabit,
067 | Vol_III-0748
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
in summer, areas of mixed cold and warm waters which are rich in plankton.
These areas are southwestern Greenland where the Greenland whale wintered,
and the Jan Mayen and Spitsbergen area where the arctic right whale fed in
spring. The arctic right whale deserted both areas for its own summer feeding
ground in the cold currents.It appears that the early migrators do not wait for the first blooms of
plankton in the wintering grounds when spring arrives, but take off for the
north as soon as the ice begins to open, not to feed much until the summer
feeding grounds are reached. It also appears that the stragglers are forced
northward as much by the push of other cetaceans arriving from the south to
take over the grounds (blue whales, humpbacks, finbacks) and perhaps by social
bonds of their own population, as by their own instinct to seek fresh pastures
as they ripen progressively to the north.There may actually be subpopulations of each described large population,
each of which always maintains a forward, intermediate, or rear position in
the main mass and area.Migration
The arctic right whale is a migrator on a small scale. It is closely
linked with its ecologic niche of the broken edge of the impenetrable pack
ice, and only to the extent that the distribution of this ice habitat shifts
north in summer and south in winter does the range of the whale change, and
migration be assumed to take place.The East Greenland (or Greenland Sea) population winters from the
southern part of the Greenland Sea (and northern Denmark Strait) to the
vicinity of Jan Mayen, and perhaps toward Spitsbergen. In spring it moves
northeast along the ice to the west side of Spitsbergen, and, as summer
068 | Vol_III-0749
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
advances, moves northwest toward northeast Greenland and the edge of the
permanent polar pack. With autumn it returns southward off the coast of
northeast Greenland and is pushed a bit eastward by the ice as the winter
advances.The West Greenland (or Davis Strait-Baffin Bay) population winters off
the coast of southwest Greenland (Disko to Sukkertoppen, or perhaps Godthaab),
and also near the entrance to Hudson Strait, Resolution Island, and northeast
Labrador. Perhaps the range in winter is continuous from southwest Greenland
to Labrador, but it is not continuous normally with the East Greenland popu–
lation around Caps Farewell at the southern tip of Greenland.In spring the whales from southwest Greenland move north past Upernivik
to Melville Sound and into Smith Sound near Ellesmere Island, and perhaps
westward around the north side of, or through the famous “Middle Ice” of
Baffin Bay, to Pond Inlet and Lancaster Sound. The individuals around Hudson
Strait and northwest Labrador apparently split, the greater part going north
to Cumberland Sound and thence up the west side of Davis Strait and Baffin
Bay at the western edge of the “Middle Ice” to Pond Inlet and Lancaster
Sound. The remainder seem to go west through Hudson Strait to Southampton
Island and then into Foxe Basin.The migrations of the Davis Strait-Baffin Bay populations are baffling
because the testimony is conflicting.The Hudson Bay population which summers in Ross Welcome and Repulse
Bay, between Southampton Island and Arctic Canada, may come also from Hudson
Strait, but there is some evidence that it remains in the broken ice of
the southern central part of Hudson Bay during the winter.Return of all these populations from summer to winter grounds in
autumn is presumably along the same route, although a circuitous course has
been claimed, e.g., the Landaster Sound whales moving south through Fury
069 | Vol_III-0750
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
and Hecla Strait to Foxe Basin and thence both to Hudson Strait.The Bering-Arctic population winters from Cape Navarin south to
central Kamchatka and then east along the edge of the impenetrable Bering
ice pack toward St. Matthew Island, but not into the eastern part of the
Bering Sea, nor south around Kamchatka into the Okhotsk Sea. In spring it
moves up along the northwestern Bering Sea, between St. Lawrence Island and
the Asian mainland and through Bering Strait to the coast of Alaska at
Point Hope, Wainright, and Barrow, where it turns eastward to the Beaufort
Sea. Some may turn westward at the strait and later go toward Herald and
Wrangel islands which become free from ice at a relatively late date.The return migration comes out of the Beaufort Sea in September and
passes along the edge of the ice off Barrow toward Wrangel and Herald islands
and thence south toward the Siberian ice and shore and then out through
Bering Strait to the northwestern Bering Sea.Varieties of Physical Types of Arctic Right Whale
The arctic right whale has been considered at one time or another by
various authors as having some clearly defined varieties, subspecies, races,
or physical types. Today these variants are held nonexistent, and all the
populations of the arctic right whale are considered as one species and
capable of free and fertile interbreeding if brought together, without
sharply distinct characters in any one part of the range or in any part of
the total population which cannot be accounted for by individual, age, or
sex variation.Some of these alleged varieties of arctic right whale were really
populations of regular right whales with characters intermediate between
070 | Vol_III-0751
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
the typical right and the typical arctic forms. Some were individual variants
or segregated parts of the populations of the arctic form. The following list
will cover all the alleged varieties found in the literature:West-ice fish (“Westys-vissch”) of Zorgdrager (1720), also known as
“eilandsche Walvissch”; found in seas west of Spitsbergen; the regular variety.South-ice fish (“Sudys-vissoh”) of Zorgdrager (1720), found to the south
of Spitsbergen in years of heavy “South-ice” (See Eschricht and Reinhardt,
1866); now also considered as of the normal type.The “West Greenland whale” of various authors, found in seas west of
Greenland; distinctions not known.The “rock-noser” of Guerin (1845); an alleged small variety with a
tendency to stay near the rocks on the west side of Davis Strait; undoubtedly
segregated, young age-classes.The “inito” of the Eskimos of northwestern Alaska; a small individual
of the arctic right whale, or possibly an occasional individual of the gray
whale.The “Grand Bay whale” of the large northeastern bight of the Gulf of
St. Lawrence as it pinches off into the Strait of Belle Isle; probably a
summer population with characters intermediate between the right and the
arctic right whale, or a winter population which migrated north late in spring.The “bunchback”; an individual variant of the normal arctic form (and
of the right whale), found throughout the Arctic and in the Okhotsk Sea,
and characterized by a high keep on the peduncle.The “Steeple-top,” “bunchback” of the Okhotsk Sea, described in formal
zoological literature by Dall (in Scammon, 1874: 304) as [ Balaena mysticetus ]
var. roysii ; a population type or individual variant of the right whale in
the Okhotsk Sea.
071 | Vol_III-0752
EA-Zoo. Gilmore: Arctic Right Whale, Greenland Whale, or Bowhead
Then we have the following names for arctic right whales with various
individual peculiarities and origins:Balaena mysticetus pitlekajensis , described by Malm from the Arctic
Sea.Balaena mysticetus angulatak , described by Gray from ear bones taken
in the Orkney Islands.The B. groenlandica of Linnaeus, the B. vulgaris of Brisson, are
considered mere synonyms for recent B. mysticetus , and the fossil forms
B. tannenbergii of Rathke and B. mysticetus fossilis of Van Beneden probably
are indistinguishable from normal variants of recent arctic right whales.Raymond M. Gilmore
Sea Otter
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0753
(EA-Zoo. Fredericka I. Martin)
SEA OTTER
CONTENTS
Page Physical Characteristics 1 Habits 2 Primitive Hunters 4 Russian Fur Trade 5 Fur Trade After 1867 9 Conservation1 12 Bibliography1 14
001 | Vol_III-0754
EA-Zoo.
(Fredericka I. Martin)
SEA OTTER
The sea otter, Enhy r dra lutris lutris , family Mustelidae, most prized of
furred marine mammals, once frequented Pacific help beds from southern Califor–
nia northward and westward around the Pribilof, Aleutian, Commander, and Kuril
Islands and along the Kamchatkan coast, wherever shellfish were abundant.Physical Characteristics
An adult is between 4 and 5 feet long, including a 2-inch-wide, foot-long
tail, and measures 10 to 12 inches around its shoulders; it weighs about 80
pounds. The southern species or subspecies are smaller than the northern. The
sea otter has a small rounded head with sharp-pointed ears, a flattened muzzle,
large black eyes, and a mouth fringed with tufts of coarse , light whiskers. It
has extremely short legs; the hind ones are stout and muscular with broad
webbed feet for swimming; its tail acts as a rudder. Its forelimbs are shorter
and thinner with small paws and tiny digit-like claws, always kept folded
across its chest while swimming, but useful for performing many tasks. Draped
loosely like an oversize garment around its body is the valuable pelage. The
underfur consists of short (3/4 in.), thick, glossy, silky, dark-brown or black
hairs, white or silver at the roots, and, especially in older animals, white-tipped;
the head hairs are quite grizzled. The skins are removed by cutting them open at
002 | Vol_III-0755
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
at both ends and withdrawing the whole body; they can be stretched on drying
frames to approximately 6 feet and almost twice the actual width. A cured
skin gives a false impression of the animal’s size. The fine hairs are
damaged when pulled apart, but the method was used because size counted as
much as quality. The underfur is protected from water soaking by the abundant
secretion of oil glands and the sparse, stiff guard hairs. As the sea otter
lives in waters of fairly constant temperature, its fur is never stagy or unfit
for sale, even during the summer molting period.Habits
Completely aquatic, the sea otter mates, breeds, eats, and sleeps in the
sea on tangled kelp mats. It can only hop slowly and awkwardly when it is
forced to hurry ashore, for the hard rocks wound its tender feet. So it ven–
tures out only on kelp-covered sea rims, as on the Kuril ledges, so narrow
that landslides have often wiped out entire colonies. Although nervous and
shy when molested by man, sea otters are most lively creatures when undisturbed.
Rarely quarreling, they frolic together socially, hissing and puffing gleefully
as they tumble one another about in the water. They can swim seven miles an
hour. Being expert divers, they glide smoothly and directly downward, with
scarcely a ripple disturbing the water, but they cannot stay under water long.
Often when pursued they life submerged with their nostrils at the surface of the
water. As their sense of smell is keener than their sight or hearing, this
defensive feint enables them to keep track of hunters. Asleep or awake, even
when eating, they love best to lie on their backs in the water.According to some observers, they eat regularly morning, noon, and evening,
chiefly crustaceans and mollusks, many of which they can crush or masticate with
003 | Vol_III-0756
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
their unusually broad, massive molars and knob-shaped cuspids. Sometimes a
rock is used as a hammer, in which instance the otter rolls on its back,
places the mollusk on its chest, grasps the rock in both paws , and hammers
until the shell cracks. In eating crabs, the otter skillfully balances the
crab on its chest, pulling off one leg at a time. Sometimes the otter makes
a hole and sucks the contents of a sea urchin, but often it eats the whole
urchin, even the spines. A mother otter has been observed holding her young
carefully in one arm while diving for food, opening the shell with a rock,
and feeding its contents to the baby most efficiently with the other paw.
Their favorite foods are sea urchins (probably three-quarters of their diet),
clams, snails, crabs, limpets, chitons, polyps, more rarely smelts, and very
small fish.Otter families are very affectionate. Courtships are tender and gentle,
and males are frequently seen in company with their mates and offspring. There
is no regular mating season. Nine months after mating, the female bears a
single large pup with a full set of teeth, and, although she introduces it to
solid foods at six months, suckles it for at least a year. She tends it care–
fully, fondling and caressing it most lovingly, and protects it vigilantly
until it is fully mature at four years of age. A frightened mother will seize
her baby with her teeth and swim frantica l ly toward safety, or risk her life
endeavoring to answer its bleating cries if it is captured by hunters. Some–
times a second pup is born before the first one is grown up. The mother takes
tender care of both her medvedki (“little bears”) as the Russians called them,
often swimming with one in her arm and the other at her side.Doubtless because of the long nursing period and the prolonged dependency
of the young, the birth rate is low. Man , killer whales, and storms are their
004 | Vol_III-0757
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
chief enemies. Aside from hunters, storms cause most fatalities, washing
exhausted animals far out to sea or battering them against rocks. Throughout
rough weather, otters swim constantly and strenuously to remain near their kelp
pastures. Then, worn out by battling high seas and tangled in the kelp, they
sleep so soundly that hunters surprise them more easily than in calmer seasons,
when, apprehensively alert, the otters quickly spy human intruders.Primitive Hunters
Aborigines hunted them for food as well as for fur; the natives of Kam–
chatka and the Kurils esteemed otter flesh next to eagle meat. Because of
the risks of sea hunting and the beauty of the furs, prestige of wealth in
some tribes was measured by the number of otter pelts a hunter secured. Al–
though the Ainus could steal upon otters in the Kurils to net or club them,
most tribes had to hunt by boat. The Aleuts, who believed otters were
descended from an incestuous brother and sister transformed into sea creatures
for their sin, were the most expert. Clad in a new or freshly laundered
cixdaq (raincoat of animal intestinal membranes, usually sea lion’s), lashed
to the manhole of his iqax (small skin canoe), an Aleut and his boat were an
entity almost as much at home in the water as the otter, able like it to roll
over in the waves and emerge dry and unharmed. Preparations, especially for
the great expedition after spring’s turbulent storms, were elaborate. Women
could not participate, even by washing the hunters’ clothing. The Aleuts
believed that otters blamed the guilty sister chiefly for their punishment and
consequently hated all females. During several days of fasting and weaving
spells, the hunters lived apart from their wives. Hunters believed that amulets
made from white-veined, red or yellow rocks would cause the otter to pursue
005 | Vol_III-0758
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
his pursuer; owners of this type of amulet were considered the luckiest hunters.
Otter harpoons were usually three-barbed, two-inch bone points often nicked
with the owner’s mark, thrown from a board. The hunter controlled his harpoon
by a long sinew cord to which he might attach an inflated animal bladder to
mark the point to submergence. Men usually traveled in parties of six or more;
the first one to spy an otter signaled by shouting or waving a paddle, and
darted to where the animal dived. Swiftly the others ringed the spot. Bubbles
often betrayed the presence of the otter, and as it came up for air the hunters
shouted and hurled their harpoons, forcing it to dive repeatedly to hasten its
exhaustion. No matter how many harpoons lodged in it, the otter belonged to
the one who scored the first hit. When they returned from the hunt, the men
put on new or clean garments their wives had ready; those worn on the successful
hunt were thrown into the sea to persuade otters their enemies were dead. Aleut
striplings proved their maturity by hunting the otter in the most inaccessible,
dangerous waters. Until the Russians came, Aleuts made otter garments which
the Russians called by the Siberian name parka , especially for the women; they
trimmed other clothing with strips of fur and tails.Russian Fur Trade
The first Europeans who saw the otter were Vladimir Atlasov and his com–
panions, who found it at the tip of Kamchatka in 1700. They coveted the glossy,
silky fur of the animal, which they called sea beaver ( morskoi bobr ), because of
its broad tail and thick, short coat. They obtained only a few specimens, for
the otter was too fleet for the clumsy dugouts of Kamchatkan hunters, who shot
them with arrows, or sometimes found them helpless on drift ice and clubbed them.
Of the 3,500 furs Atlasov presented to Peter the Great as tribute in 1701, only
006 | Vol_III-0759
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
ten were otter, just enough to excite aristocratic fancy. Shortly after 1712,
the adventurer Ivan Kozyrevski discovered the northern Kurils and their ac–
cessible otter colonies. Secretly, since they lacked royal consent, Siberian
promyshlenniki ( q.v. ) (trading hunters at first, then only fur hunters) ventured
boldly into the stormy Okhotsk Sea in the most flimsy craft to get the new fur.
If Kamchatkan legend be true, a great many perished at sea.In 1741, Vitus Bering’s shipwreck on the island named for him in the
Commander Island group accidentally opened up larger otter grounds to the
promyshlenniki , and started the Russian conquest of Alaska. There the ex–
pedition’s scientist, Georg Wilhelm Steller, wrote the first account of the
otter and of Kamchatkan hunting methods. The shipwrecked men survived the
winter on otter meat, but the presence of such valuable furs incited them
to reckless, mad behavior. They gambled for skins, cheated one another, and
quarreled violently. They killed too many animals for the fur, letting the
flesh rot, until their hunting frightened the animals away. Only the arrival
of fur seals saved them from starvation. When they were ready to depart in a
ship built from the wrecked St. Peter , many, obsessed by greed, wanted to
remain another year to get more pelts. Safely back in Okhotsk they sold
nearly a thousand furs for $30,000, about a fifth of their value at the Chinese
frontier. The news caused many Siberians to desert sable hunting to pursue
otter in the uncharted Pacific. The next spring the Capitan , a shitik (a crude
small boat, calked with moss, its planks literally sewn together with animal
sinews or osiers) headed for Bering Island. Captain Emilian Bassov returned
that same season with 1,600 otter and fox furs worth over 100,000 rubles (ap–
proximately $125,000) at Okhotsk. By 1750, other hunting groups, taking about
1,000 animals a year, had almost wiped out the Commander herd. Hunting was
007 | Vol_III-0760
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
discontinued for several years, and in 1754, Iugov took 790 animals from Copper
Island, the large large catch on record from the Commander group. Meanwhile,
beginning with Navodchikov who reached Attu and Agattu in 1745, other hunters
were working in the Aleutian chain. Island by island they pursued the otters
eastward, reaching the Alaska Peninsula and finally Kodiak Island by 1760.On the uninhabited Commanders, the Russians themselves hunted. On the
Aleutians, following Siberian precedence, they began to make use of the
islanders as hunters. Some Russians appropriated furs by force, while others,
more guileful, bartered such trifles as six blue beads, tufts of horse or goat
hair, narrow strips of red Chinese cloth, or a few leaves of tobacco for a prime
fur. They began to ask for furs as yassak tribute, for the new ruler who, they
informed the islanders, had graciously taken them under his protection. Soon
the well-disposed Aleuts turned against the invaders, but after many years of
valiant resistance they were subdued and became Russian vassals. Driven by
their greedy masters, they soon depopulated their otter colonies, except for
scattered fugitives hiding along the most rugged coasts. In 1786 Gerasim
Pribylov discovered the breeding islands of Alaska fur seals, and large new
colonies of sea otters. In two years Pribylov and his hunters secured 2,000
otter pelts, and his successors took even more; 5,000 in one season at St. Paul
Island, but only 1,000 the next year. On the Pribilof Islands, as on Bering
Island, promyshlenniki gambled for otter pelts in their leisure time, and un–
bridled gambling helped to break the Pribilof bank. By 1803 the beaches on
St. Paul Island were deserted, including Zolotoi or Golden Sands, named for
the living wealth of furs. Otters were gone from St. George Island by 1811.
Between 1745 and 1799, when the North Pacific and Alaskan fur industries were
consolidated into a single company, the Russian American Company, about 40
008 | Vol_III-0761
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
small traders shi o p ped 11,694 otter furs to Siberia.Under the new monopoly Russian expansion was southward along the con–
tinental coastal islands, still on the trail of the otter. From their
capital at New Archangel on Sitka Island, the Russians regularly dispatched
flotillas of several hundred Aleut and Kodiak hunters in their canoes to
old and new otter grounds. At Sitka the Russians encountered two threats
to their exclusive monopoly: hostile tribes headed by the Tlingits, and
foreign competition. Reports of the prices secured for otter furs in China
by members of Captain James Cook’s expedition, who bought them from north–
western tribes for old clothes and trinkets, attracted English and American
traders in search of furs to exchange for Chinese goods. Efforts of the
Russian Government and company directors to halt their traffic were futile.
Because he was hard-pressed to feed his young colony, Aleksandr Baranov,
direct ion or of the company, ignored his superiors’ prohibitions and traded
cheaper sealskins - never otter furs - for foreign traders’ high-priced
provisions. Subsequently his successors were empowered to carry on such
emergency trading, and as long as the Russians were dependent upon them
for supplies, foreign traders continued to come. They were able to buy more
furs from their native neighbors than the Russians, because, as transients,
they willingly exchanged firearms and ammunition for furs. Even if coastal
tribes sent their furs overland to Hudson ’s as Bay Company posts, they received
more attractive goods than the impoverished Russians could offer. So the
Russians depended mainly upon their impressed Aleut and Kodiak hunters,
stationing them on islands from the Kurils to the Farallons. Hunters were
hired out to Yankee skippers, who transported them and their boats to distant
regions, particularly to California waters, in return for 50% of the otter
009 | Vol_III-0762
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
catch. Alarmed by increasing competition in China, where the Russians obtained
the highest prices for their furs, the Tsar issued a decree in 1820, forbidding
foreign vessels to hunt, fish, or trade in his North Pacific. After protests
from his competitors’ governments, he retracted his prohibition in treaties
with England and the United States in 1824-25, and as long as otters were ob–
tainable, American and English trade flourished.On the Asiatic side, around 1790, English and Dutch vessels traded for
otter fur in the Japanese-owned southern Kurils and did some pelagic hunting.
The total take of these small independent ventures was probably enormous. The
Russian American Company’s catch from 1799-1821 was 86,644 sea otters; during
the next four decades it was only 51,315. To prevent extermination, hunting
grounds were rotated, firearms prohibited, and hunting parties reduced from
fleets of several hundred canoes to small bands. The reduction was caused in
part by high casualties. Whole companies of a hundred hunters or more were
killed in storms or massacred; individual hunters drowned; and some were shot
or imprisoned by California Spaniards for trespassing. In villages deprived
of hunters, entire families starved to death. N. P. Rezanov wrote his Russian
associates, in 1806, that fur lovers would pull their otter caps over their
shamed faces if they realized how many human lives the fur cost.Fur Trade After 1867
The Alaska otter region came under the control of the United States in
1867, when the Territory was purchased. A few years later Russia leased the
Commander fur seal rights to a partly American company, and the Kuril Islands
were exchanged for Japan’s half of Sakhalin Island in 1875. These changes re–
vived the otter industry under new auspices. Otter fur was still costly, and
010 | Vol_III-0763
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
European furriers were as anxious to get it as the Chinese had been in earlier
years. The Pribilof Islands lessees, the Alaska Commercial Company, had certain
advantages over all rivals — large capital, trading posts on all populated
Aleutian Islands, and a fleet of ships to transport hunters and their canoes
to and from otter grounds between other voyages. Only three companies com–
peted seriously with the seal monopoly for very long, but the race was intense.
Small parties of Aleut and Kodiak hunters harassed the otters continually among
the treacherous reefs of Sanak and along other equally dangerous Alaskan
coasts. As one party became exhausted, a schooner would bring a fresh con–
tingent. The otters had no respite. They were killed by clubs and nets or
guns on the sea rims, and harpooned or shot from boats. Wherever they fled,
their enemies were waiting. The Aleuts received fairly good prices for their
furs, usually as store credit. Few hunters saw cash, and almost none of them
saved money. Tempted by the traders’ attractive and extremely expensive mer–
chandise, they bought, in addition to necessities, carpets, china, furniture,
clothes, jewelry and the small heating and cooking ranges made especially
for the small native Alaskan huts. While London furriers were still paying
over $1,000 for one fur, the boom ended around 1890. About 47,842 otter had
been killed in the previous decade. Small traders left the region. Before
1900, except at Unalaska, even the Alaska Commercial Company had to close its
Aleutian posts. Abruptly the Aleuts were plunged into destitution with no
resource by which to earn a living, since excessive trapping had almost deci–
mated their foxes also. Still the Alaska Commercial Company encouraged pur–
suit of the scattered fugitives, taking 127 pelts in 1900. In 1910, a year
before otter killing was outlawed by international covenant, its 16 schooners
got 29 pelts.
011 | Vol_III-0764
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
Meanwhile in the areas around western Bering and Okhotsk seas, exploita–
tion on land and sea had been as thorough but less systematic. About 1869,
Japan organized the otter industry in the southern Kurils, extending opera–
tions to the northern islands after 1875, and transferring the management
to different agencies from time to time. The hunters were always Ainus,
who used nets and clubs until pelagic competition forced them to use firearms
and boats. For a prime skin the government paid about eight bushels of rice.
Sale to unauthorized recipients was punishable by death. The American,
Captain Kimberlay, master of the Cygnet of Santa Barbara, was the pioneer
pelagic hunter. His catch in the Kurils in 1872 was 300. The following
year six American and Canadian schooners, mostly with Chinese and Japanese
crews, joined the chase; the next season at least six more were added. Japan–
ese gunboats patrolled the coast, but according to the veteran Captain Snow,
Kuril otter fled from the lawful Ainu hunters beyond the territorial limit
into the legal rnage of other pelagic hunters who took at least 8,325 pelts
between 1872-82; the Japanese took only 1,777. The next decade’s catch of
1,201 was about equally divided between sea and land hunters. Another 800
animals were killed before 1902; from then until 1909, only 352. Pelagic
hunting in those waters was perilous. After three successful seasons, 50
vessels known to Captain Snow had been wrecked or lost at sea; and more than
300 members of their crews were drowned. According to Snow, only shipbuilders
and outfitters profited from the industry.In 1872 the part-Russian affiliate of the Alaska Commercial Company ac–
quired a twenty-year contract for Commander sealskins, but apparently obtained
few Copper Island otters. No otters ever resettled Bering Island. In 1896,
when the American fur seal investigator Leonard Stejneger visited Copper Island,
012 | Vol_III-0765
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
the Russians were permitting the Aleuts to take limited catches (200 that
season), provided they used only nets, released females and young otter, and
sold pelts to the government at a fixed rate. During the heyday of pelagic
hunters, sentries had been posted on the south shore to prevent raiders from
landing, but how many animals were killed at sea is not known.Conservation
The North Pacific Fur Seal Convention, signed in 1922 by Japan, Russia,
England Great Britain , and the United States , forbade their citizens or subjects to kill
otter, a prohibition so belated as to seem a memorial to an extinct animal
rather than a practical conservation measure. But, by 1930, scattered sur–
vivors had multiplied slowly and were attracting poachers. American patrol
boats began to visit lonely Aleutian coasts and wardens came to check the
population. Guards were posted on some islands during the summer. In spite
of these precautions, eight otter furs were taken from poachers in 1935.
Prior to 1941, there were rumors, impossible to verify, that Japanese poachers
were raiding American otter grounds. Although her otter census was estimated
as only 700, Japan was first to re-enter the trade, selling 50 Kuril furs in
London and 32 in the United States in 1939, under the Convention’s regulations.
According to the Fish and Wildlife Service, United States Department of the
Interior, the others’ federal guardian since 1940, Aleutian battles did not
harm or disturb the animals, and the census after World War II was close to
3,000. In the early 1930’s, Copper Island’s 700 otter were increasing at the
rate of 7% yearly. Hunting was still forbidden. Since then Soviet scientists
have conducted startling experiments, advocated in 1741-42 by Steller, for
raising the animals in captivity. These scientists have successfully reared
013 | Vol_III-0766
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
young otter in salt-water pens, almost like domestic animals, and attempts
to raise them in fresh water have given promising results. If change of
habitat and breeding in captivity prove feasible, the great period of the
otter fur industry may not be ancient history as it seems today, but may
instead lie in the future.
014 | Vol_III-0767
EA-Zoo. Martin: Sea Otter
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Allen, Alexander. Hunting the Sea Otter . London, 1910.
2. Allen, G.M. Extinct and Vanishing Mammals of the Western Hemisphere .
N.Y., American Comm. for International Wild Life Pro–
tection, 1942.3. Barabash-Nidiforov, I. “Mammals of the Commander Islands and the
surrounding sea,” J.Mammal . vol.19, pp.423-29, 1938.4. ----. “The sea otters of the Commander Islands,” Ibid . vol.16,
pp.255-61, 1935.5. Elliott, H.W. Our Arctic Province: Alaska and the Seal Islands . N.Y.,
Scribner, 1887.6. Eyerdam, W.J. “Sea otters in the Aleutian Islands,” J.Mammal . vol.14,
pp.70-71, 1933.7. Snow, H.J. In Forbidden Seas . London, Arnold, 1910.
8. Stejneger, Leonhard. “The Asiatic fur-seal islands and fur-seal
industry,” Jordan, D.S. The Fur Seals and Fur-Seal
Islands of the North Pacific Ocean . Wash., G.P.O.,
1898, Vol. 4.9. Steller, G.W. “Habits and characteristics of the sea otter,”
Jordan, D.S. Ibid . Wash., G.P.O., 1899, vol.3, pp.210-18.10. Tikhmenev, P.A. Istoricheskoe Obozrenie Obrazovaniia Rossiisko–
Amerikanskoi Kompanii i Deistvii eia do Nastoiashchago
Vremeni . (Historical Review of the Russian American
Company.) St. Petersburg, V. Tipografii E. Veimara,
1861-63. 2 vol.11. Veniaminov, I.E.P. Zapiski ob Ostrovakh Unalashkinskago Otdela .
(Notes on the islands of the Unalaska section.)
St. Petersburg, Tip. I. Rossiiskoi Akademii, 1840.Fredericka I. Martin
White Whale
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0768
EA-Zoology
[Vadim D. Vadykov]
WHITE WHALE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page Introduction 1 Taxonomic Position 2 Vernacular Names 3 External and Anatomical Features 5 General Appearance 5 Color 6 Size 6 Weight 6 Skin 7 Blubber 8 Teeth 9 Larynx 9 Age and Growth 10 Suckling Calves 10 Blue Calves 10 Adolescents 10 Adults 11 Growth 11 Sexual Dimorphism 12 Primary Distinction 12 Secondary Distinction 13 Relative abu i ndance of the Sexes 13 Reproduction 14 Maturity Age 14 Foetus Age and Period of Gestation 14 Mating Season 15 Birth 16 Number of Calves 16 Suckling 17 Behavior 17 Temperature Preferences 17 Food 17 Parasites 18 Predators 19 Voice 19 Senses and Intelligence 20 Swimming and Diving 20 Geographical Distribution 21 Movements 23 Economic Importance 24 Methods of Catching 24 Oil 25 Skin 25 Meat 25 Conservation 26 Bibliography 26a
001 | Vol_III-0769
EA-Zoology
[Vadim D. Vladykov]
WHITE WHALE
Introduction
The white whale or beluga ( Delphinapterus leucas ) is a circumpolar cetacean
found along northern coasts of the Old and New Worlds. The beluga is probably
the most characteristic mammal of the Arctic. Its white color and the deep–
sighing sound of its blowing has a certain magic. Nelson (1918, p. 468)
poetically expressed this by the following words: “During the twilight hours
of the Arctic summer night, glowing with beautiful colors, the ghostly white
forms of these whales breaking the smooth blue-back surface of a far northern bay
add the crowning effect of strange unworldly mystery to the scene.” Probably
because of this the beluga plays a very prominent part in religious rites, full
of occultism and magic, of the Koryak Eskimos from the Okhotsk Sea. The chief
ceremony of the Koryaka is the “festival of the whale ghost,” which consists of
paying mystic rites to the head of a white whale. The body of the animal is
treated with rather scant ceremony, being carved into small pieces and distributed
among the hunters, but the head is honored by many quaint ceremonies (Willey,
1906).
002 | Vol_III-0770
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Taxonomic Position
It was Pallas (1776, pp. 84-87), who, for the first time, gave an accurate
description and proposed the name Delphinus leucas for a porpoise of white color,
killed in the Gulf of Ob in Siberia. In 1804, Lac e é p e è de (1804, p. xli) used a
new generic name for the same animal, namely, Delphinapterus Delphinapterus , which signified a
porpoise without a dor a sal fin. However, Lac e é p e è de also changed the specific
name, leucas , of this animal established previously by Pallas, by calling it
Delphinapterus beluga , but, due to priority rights, the scientific name of the
white whale used today is Delphinapterus leucas .In 1815, Rafinesque (True, 1889, p. 146) suggested a new generic name
Beluga , probably without knowing that Lac e é p e è de already had proposed for the same
genus the name of Delphinapterus . Certain earlier authors, as, for instance,
Cope (1865, p. 278), and Scammon in 1869, described several species of white
whales under the names: Beluga angustata , B. catodon , B. conreta , B. declivis ,
and B. rhinodon . True (1889), after an accurate analysis, considered all the
above five species, and several others described by various other authors, as
synonymous with Delphinapterus leucas . The opinion of True is generally
recognized by modern authors as, for instance, by Elliot (1901, pp. 19-20),
Anderson (1947, p. 86), etc.During the last decades some Soviet authors, as Klumov (1935), Barabash
(1937), and others, on basis of certain skull differences, claim the existence
of three distinct beluga species. According to them, Delphinapterus freimani
is restricted to the White Sea, D. dorofeevi inhabits the Okhotsk Sea, and
D. leucas is found in the Gulf of Ob and other sections of the Arctic Sea and
North Atlantic Ocean. The opinion of these authors is not universally recognized,
as their conclusion is based on a rather small number of specimens studied.
003 | Vol_III-0771
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Anderson (1947, p. 87) said in this connection, that considering the widely
ranging migratory habits of the white whales, it is unsafe to make assumptions
of distribution of species from purely geographical grounds. D. dorofeevi may
perhaps be the same as the white whale of western Alaska, and which may range
through Bering Strait, northwestward along the Siberian coast, as well as along
the northwest coast of Alaska with a continuous range into Canadian waters in
Beaufort Sea and Coronation Gulf; but it is also possible that either D. leucas
or D. freimani may have a continuous range along the arctic coasts of Siberia,
Alaska, Yukon, and Northwest Territories of Canada.The beluga ( Delphinapterus leucas ) and the narwhal ( Monodon monoceros ) have
several features in common: The absence of the dorsal fin, all seven cervical
vertebrae unfused, etc., hence they are usually separated into a particular
subfamily Delphinapterinae (Fraser, 1938, pp. 284-89), distinct from other
subfamilies of the toothed whales (Odontoceti). However, the present author
prefers to consider the beluga as a member of a separate family Delphinapteridae,
the same opinion being already expressed by such prominent authors as Harmer
(1933, p. 10) and others.Vernacular Names
Pallas (1776), in the original description of Delphinapterus leucas , used
its Russian name, beluga or morskaia beluga which simply signifies an animal
(fish) of white color, in reference to the adults. Pallas spelled beluga, at least
in the French translation of his work (1794), as belouga . However, subsequent
authors, especially English ones, spell this word as beluga . It may be added
that Sutton & Hamilton (1932, p. 92) rather erroneously believe that the name
beluga is derived from the Eskimo kellilughak , the term employed by inhabitants
004 | Vol_III-0772
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
of Hudson Bay. ; In Russian literature sometimes the name of D. leucas is spelled
as belukha in order to distinguish it from a large species of sturgeon ( Huso
huso ), which is commonly known in [ ?] the U.S.S.R. as beluga , Chapsky (1941, pp.
107-09) and Vladykov (1944, p.49).In different European countries Delphinapterus leucas is known as: beluga or
white whale in English; [ ?] weisswal in German; hvidfisk in Norwegian; and b e é luga
in French. According to Brunelli (1931) and Harmer (1927, pp.11 & 39), in France
the same term beluga is also applied to Risso’s dolphin ( Grampus griseus ), thus
contributing greatly to the confusion in names between these two very distinct
cetaceans.In Quebec, French-Canadian hunters apply the name marsouin blanc or simply
marsouin for adults, while the young animals, from birth to adolescence are
known as: veau (calf), bleuvet (blue calf), and blanchon or blaford ( of grayish–
white color) (Vladykov, 1944, p. 49). The Hudson Bay Eskimo name is killeluak or
kelleluak (Soper, 1928, p. 74); the Eskimo name in Alaska and the Mackenzie,
killaluak (Anderson, 1913, p. 500). In Siberia, Samoyedes call it viborka , and
Ostyaks have another name for it, vising-potliand (Pallas, 1794, p. 194).Probably the earliest known name for Delphinapterus leucas was that of adhothuys ,
which was employed by Jacques Cartier in narratives of his first voyage to Canada in
1534. According to him, the adhothuys was “une sorte de poisson duquel jamais
n’avions vue, ni oui parler. Ils sont blancs [ ?] comme neige, et grands comme
Marsouins, et ont le corps et la teste comme L e é vriers; lesquels se tiennent entre
la mer et l’eau douce qui commence entre la rivi e è re du Saguenay et Canada.”
005 | Vol_III-0773
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
External and Anatomical Features
General Appearance . The beluga has a rather small, round head, the length
of which is less than one-fifth the total length of the animal. Small, round
eyes, which seem out of proportion to the large body, are located somewhat in
front of the blowhole. The jaws are not conspicuously prot u r uded to give an
appearance of a beak, as it is in various species of dolphins. The mouth is
rather small and carries from eight to ten teeth on each side of the jaws, the
total number of teeth not exceeding 40. Behind the head is an ill-defined
construction which has some semblance of a neck.The flippers are broad and rounded, varying in length with age and sex of
the animal from 9 to 17% of the entire length. The younger individuals of both
sexes have relatively longer flippers, and, among adults, males have decidedly
longer flippers than females (Vladykov, 1943).As Lac e é p e è de (1844, p. 83) pointed out, the beluga’s body resembles two
cones; the anterior and smaller one has its base situated at the flippers
and touches the larger cone which corresponds with the rest of the body and
is directed backward. The maximum circumference of the animal, equal to about
62% of the total length, lies immediately behind the flippers, while the smallest
is at the tail base. The tail, which is a mighty organ of propulsion, is rather
broad and divided into two lobes or flukes. The adult male has much larger tail
flukes than the female (Vladykov, 1943).On the back, along the median line, there is a very low keel, the vestige of
the dorsal fin of other dolphins. The beluga’s skin is smooth, without any trace
of hair. Even in an embryo of 10 centimeters in length we are unable to detect
the presence of it; thus the beluga is the only mammal which has lost [ ?] its
hair completely, one of the most important features of the mammals.
006 | Vol_III-0774
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Color . The adult animal is entirely of a milk-white color, thus well
meriting its Russian name, beluga . However, there are four definite color
changes throughout the life of this animal: newly born calves are dark brownish,
then become bluish, then gray, and eventually white. In younger adults of white
color, the edges of the flippers and flukes are still dark gray or nearly black;
this dark coloration disappears with age. In the beluga from the St. Lawrence
River we have never observed either mottled or yellow coloration, as was erro–
neously stated by Beddard (1900, p. 244), and repeated by several subsequent
authors. The color changes in the beluga depend on the distribution and intensity
of pigment (brown or black melanine grains) present in the epidermis only. With
age the quantity of pigment in the Malpighian cells diminishes progressively
and disappears completely in adult individuals. These changes are even visible
by microscopic examination of vertical cross sections of the skin. The micro–
scopic details are found in a paper by Bonin & Vladykov (1940, pp. 257-69).Size . The size of the beluga varies not only with the age and sex of the
animal, but depends also on the region. According to Birula (1934, p. 12), in
the White Sea the maximum length [ ?] is 395 cm. (13 ft.); in the Kara Sea, 462
cm. (15 ft. 2 in.); and in the North Pacific, 540 cm. (17 ft. 8 in.). Among 190
belugas measured from western Greenland, Degerbøl and Nielsen (1930) found a
maximum of 476 cm. (15 ft. 7 in.) for the female and 571 cm. (18 ft. 9 in.) for
the male.In the St. Lawrence River the largest animal (male) measured by us was 447
cm. (14 ft. 8 in.). According to several hunters from Quebec, the beluga may be
a much longer, particularly in Hudson Bay, attaining lengths up to 854 cm. (28 ft.)
(Vladykov, 1944, p. 67).Weight . There is rather scanty information on the weight of the beluga. From
personal experience in the St. Lawrence River, the data in Table 1 were compiled
(Vladykov, 1944, p.67):
007 | Vol_III-0775
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Table 1 Number of
specimensLength Weight Age Sex In. Cm. Lb. Kg. 1 Calf Male 62.5 159 185 84 3 Blue calf Females 83-90 211-224 415-574 188-261 2 Grayish white Females 105.5-126 229-268 668-901 303-409 2 Adult Females 138-158 320-351 1,313-2,108 596-956 2 Adult Males 170-176 432-447 2,861-2,981 1,297-1,351
The weight of a beluga is divided into nearly equal halves, one of which
consists of skin with blubber, and the other of ungutted carcass. The fatter
the beluga, the more it weighs. In the St. Lawrence River the heaviest weight is
noticed in animals taken from July to September.Skin . In the beluga, as in other Cetacea, the sweat or sudoriferous glands
are absent. Moreover, in our species the sebaceous glands and hair are absent
also, so the whole body is sealed in a poreless envelope. The skin of the
beluga is very thick, being more than one-half inch thick in the adult animal.
In general, the epidermal layer is adult 9 millimeters in cross section, while
the dermis is from 3 to 5 millimeters in thickness. The thick, well-defined
dermis is a very characteristic feature of the beluga, while in other Cetacea,
with rare exceptions, it is rather thin and ill-defined. It is quite probable
that the skin of the narwhal has the same histological structure (Harmer, 1930,
p. 286). Gray (1930, p. 744) claims that the Greenland right whale ( Balaena
mysticetus ) has also a rather thick dermis. It is worth noting that all three
of these species are found in the Arctic, so the thick dermis may be an adaptation
008 | Vol_III-0776
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
for the arctic habitat. The dermis of the beluga, after suitable tanning
treatment, becomes a leather of excellent quality, generally known as “por–
poise leather.” The thick epidermis, which consists mainly of protein (73%),
is used by the Eskimos as food; the thick epidermis, which consists mainly of
protein (73%) is used by the Eskimos as food; when prepared so that a half inch
or more of blubber remains attached, it is called by them muktuk ( maktak )
and is eaten raw or boiled. Quebec hunters call it e é caille and in northern
[ ?] U.S.S.R. it is known as alapera (Chapsky, 1941, p. 110). The English tanners
call the epidermis “cork” (Bonin & Vladykov, 1940, p. 276).Blubber . Beneath the dermis is a thick layer of hypodermis consisting
of fat, usually known as blubber. Blubber, together with the thick skin, forms
a thick blanketlike heat-retaining layer over the whole body of the beluga, thu i s
helping [ ?] it to survive at very low temperatures. The thickness of blubber
is not the same over the whole body of the animal; on the belly it is about
half as thick as on the back. In general, the thickness of blubber varies
with the age of the animal and the season, the extreme variations being from
1-1/2 to 10-1/2 inches (4 to 27 cm.), measured on the back, along the median line,
about one foot behind the blowhole. The blubber in suckling calves is from 2 to
3 inches thick, while in adults it is usually more than 6 inches. The amount
of blubber has a direct relation to the abundance of available food: the animals
killed in the St. Lawrence River during November, when the water is very cold,
had a rather thin layer of blubber, less than 3 inches, while those obtained
during the summer months were the fattest, the blubber having a thickness of
from 5 to 10 inches. During August and September certain individuals became so
fat that they floated after being killed. Usually dying belugas sink slowly, so
the hunter harpoons them in order to prevent their loss. It should be noted that
009 | Vol_III-0777
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
the beluga is probably the fattest animal among the Cetacea. The average thick–
ness of its blubber is about 3% of the total length of the animal, while, for
instance, in the Balaenoptera it is about 1-1/2% (Mackintosh & Wheeler ) , 1929,
pp.365-68; Mathews, 1938, pp.234-38).Teeth . The mouth of the beluga is well supplied with teeth, said to serve
only for grasping, and not for cutting or chewing. Thus the food is swallowed
whole (Arsenyev, 1939, p. 36; Vladykov, 1946, p.19). Teeth, numbered normally 9
on each side of both jaws, often are irregularly implanted and [ ?] of various
size (True, 1889, p. 188), but there is not always a total of 36, either fewer
or more may occur, the number varying most frequently from 8 to 10 on either
side of each jaw. It was reported by True (1909, p. 325) and Lönnberg (1911)
that the teeth of the young are not all simple, but rather that the crowns
of the teeth of both jaws, particularly posteriorly, have accessory cusps.
This condition has not been observed in the eastern Canadian Arctic, perhaps
because of older individuals being taken in which little or no crown remains,
the teeth being worn down to the collar. Such wearing might suggest a
function of the teeth beyond mere grasping, and that there is perhaps some
chewing action.Larynx . As in all cetaceans, there are no vocal cords in the larynx of
the white whale. Watson and Young (1880, p. 416) suggested that although at
first sight there appeared to be vocal cords, these are rather inward projections
of the sharp inferior borders of the arytenoid cartilages. These cartilage
projections may serve the purpose of vocal cords in the white whale, permitting
the great variety of sounds described as emanating from the beluga.
010 | Vol_III-0778
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Age and Growth
Suckling Calves . The term calf is used to refer to a newly born whale, or
one up to the age of a few months, less than 85 inches in length. The average
newly born calf of the St. Lawrence River region is about 59 inches long. The
calves are characteristically brown at first, then take on a deep brown to
bluish-brown color. The tail flukes are very dark, with the tips black. Older
specimens have a color between brown and blue.The calves have no teeth showing, and are nourished by their mother. It
is probable that this continues for at least six months during which time only
milk is found in the stomachs. It is not known if only milk is taken before
weaning or if the first taste of other nourishment occurs before the milk diet
is given up. Generally no a parasites are found in those stomachs examined which
contain only milk, but are present in those which have acquired nourishment
elsewhere.Blue Calves. These are young, second-year white whales of the stage fol–
lowing the brown calf. On these, at the back of the head and around the eyes,
the color is of a darker blue than on the rest of the body (Wyman, 1863, p. 604).
The fin extremities are very dark, nearly black; pectoral fins are not curved.
On both jaws the teeth begin to show, but are fow in number. Length of the
blue calf varies from about 7 to 9 feet. (Vladykov, 1943, p. 34).Adolescents . These are the white whales of the third and fourth years. In
these the darker coloring beings begins to disappe a r, the body taking on a grayish or
whitish color. The fin tips remain dark, but the beginning of curving at the
extremities is noticed (Vladykov, 1943, p. 34). Most of the teeth have appeared
(Degerbøl and Nielsen, 1930). Near the end of this stage the female attains
011 | Vol_III-0779
EA Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
sexual maturity, but this is probably not so in the male. Common lengths are
from 10 to 11 feet.Adults . The adult stage of almost completely white coloration is achieved
at four years. In the youngest slight evidence of grayness may be seen at
the fin tips, these being probably of the four-year group. The males of the
adult group show [ ?] conspicuous upward-curving of the fins (Vladykov, 1944,
p. 89). There is nothing definite known on the age limit of the beluga, but
the possibility of males living longer than females has been suggested, since
the former reach es lengths much greater than the latter. Sleptzov (1940) gives
the maximum age of the dolphin ( Delphinus delphis ) as 18 to 20 years.Growth . From material collected by Vladykov (1944, p. 91) from white whales
of the region of the Manikuagan River mouth, Quebec, the most common female
length was from about 330 cm. to 378 cm., members of the four-year age group,
while most abundant of all were the males from about 406 cm. to 429 cm.,
probably five or perhaps six years old.The following from Vladykov (1944, p. 92), Table 2, shows length increase
of each stage over that of the new-born calf:Table 2 Males Females Group No. Length. In. % increase No. Length. in. % increase New-born 6 68 100 8 71 100 Blues 8 97.5 143 11 96.5 136 Grays 11 123.5 182 20 126 178 Whites 13 141 205 34 138 195 Adults 46 164 240 3 157 211
012 | Vol_III-0780
EA Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
During the first few years both sexes are of similar size, after which
males are somewhat longer than females. After the fourth year the males gain
considerably over the females.In Greenland Degerbøl and Nielsen (1930) estimate the annual growth during
the it first two years to be about 40 inches, the rate diminishing after this
time.Sexual Dimorphism
Primary Distinction . Of primary importance in the recognition of the
female is the presence of the genital opening and anus in the same ventral
groove. Within this longitudinal opening is the vagina, with the clitoris,
immediately behind which is the urethra opening, and posterior to this the
anus. On each side of this groove, just posterior to the center, are the
mammary glands. During nursing these p g lands are extended but otherwise are
retracted within the mammillary cavities (Watson and Young, 1880, pp. 429-33).In the male the presence of the penis, and the anus posterior to and
separate from the urogenital groove, are the best means of identification,
the latter particularly when the penis is retracted. On either side, in
front of the anus, and posterior to the urogenital fissure, is a rudimentary
mammary gland. In a 160-inch specimen the testes lie within the abdomen
close to the intestine near its extremity, and are about 4 inches long,
while the penis is conical with a circumference varying from 4 inches near
the base to 1-1/2 inches at the apex, and contains no bone or cartilage
(Barclay and Neill, 1821, p. 384)
013 | Vol_III-0781
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Secondary Distinction . Other differences than those revealed by genital
structures exist between male and female white whales. One of these is the
length of adults, referred to previously. Maximum male length from the St.
Lawrence River region is 447 cm., while the extreme female length is 409 cm.
(Vladykov, 1944, p. 97). Similar male superiority in length has been noted
by Douhovny (1933), Birula (1934) and others. In Greenland, Degerbøl and
Nielsen (1930, p. 143) found the male maximum to be 571 cm., while that for
the female was 476 cm. Correlated with this greater male length is greater
weight and thicker skin and blubber layer.Differences occur also in body proportion. The male head is longer and
flatter than that of the female. Dimensions of fine are important in sexual
differentiation. There is little difference between the tails of young whales,
but it becomes great in adults. The tails of males are relatively larger,
in the St. Lawrence River the maximum tail measurement for males being 134 cm.,
for females, 96 cm. (Vladykov, 1944, p. 97). Pectoral fins are relatively
greater in the males than in the females. Also, Vladykov (1943) has observed
an upward curve of the fins of the male that has not been observed on the
female. Evidence of this comes from the Canadian Arctic (Vladykov, 1944, p. 97)
and Siberia (Chapsky, 1937).Relative Abundance of the Sexes . Unfortunately, the number of white whales
studied from any one place at any single period is small, which means that data
are suitable to give scarcely more than a suggestion of number differences be–
tween the sexes. Contributing to the difficulty here is the possibility of
greater ease in capturing the males. Vladykov (1944, p. 98) studied 14 foetuses
taken in 1938 in the St. Lawrence area. Of these 11 were male, 3 female.
Suckling calves born in the spring of 1938 and taken the same year numbered 4
014 | Vol_III-0782
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
males and 5 females. In 1939, 2 male s and 1 female foetuses were taken. The
suggestion has been made of possible annual variation in the ratio of newly
born white whales, and also that perhaps females of different length groups
are likely to give birth to young of a definite sex. Information from 1939
(p. 101) indicates a tendency of females 330 cm. long to give birth to females.Of 162 white whales taken in 1938 and 1939, Vladykov (1944, p. 98) found
54.5% to be males, 45.5% females, while in 1939 alone, of 22 individuals,
36.5% were males and 63.5%females. In Greenland the winters of 1925-26 and
1926-27, 55% of the belugas examined were males (Degerbøl and Nielsen, 1930),
while in the Gulf of Ob in 1931, 40% of 159 white h whales taken were males (Douhovny,
1933).Reproduction
Maturity Age . Generally the age of [ ?] maturity of male cetaceans may
be learned by examining the testis volume or by making a histological smear of
a testis or epididymus and examining for spermatozoids (Mackintosh and Wheeler,
1929, pp. 407-14). Vladykov (1944, p. 103) suggests secondary sexual charac–
teristics as indices in noting the approach to sexual maturity, particularly
the increase in tail measurement, which probably occurs in the St. Lawrence
region when the whale is slightly more than 11 feet (350 cm.) long.Determination of age of maturity of females is considerably easier than
in the males, evident by the presence of the corpus luteum and the condition
of mammary glands, etc.Foetus Age and Period of Gestation. Gulberg (1886) was the first to attack
015 | Vol_III-0783
EA Zoo. Vladykov:White Whale
the problem of age determination in foetuses of large whales. A more precise
method was devised by Barrett-Hamilton (Hin g t on, 1925) and Risting (1928), with
successful employment on the genus Balaenoptera by Mackintosh and Wheeler
(1929), Zenkovic (1935), and Matthews (1938), Megaptera by Matthews (1937),
and Physeter by Matthews (1938).Vladykov (1944, p. 109), in calculating age of the white whale foetus
considered length at birth (L) to be 150 cm. for the St. Lawrence region and
160 cm. for Greenland, where they are generally larger (Degerbøl and Nielsen,
1930). Foetus length on the 60th day (1) is given as 10 cm., on the supposition
that growth during the first two months is 1.7 mm. per day. Gestation takes
approximately 360 days, and growth for the last 10 months is taken as 4.7 mm.
per day. The formula used is (L-1)/300 for daily length increase.The gestation period of the beluga is not known with certainty. Heptner
(1930, pp. 36-40) put it at 11 or 12 months. Vladykov (1944, p. 106) considered
it to be 12 months, chiefly because of the finding of foetuses of only one size
at any one time of the year, the smallest in July, with full development
reached in May and June. Whether females produce young every year in the St.
Lawrence River area is not known, although whalers say they do each year and
that these are accompanied by calves of different age groups at one time.
In Greenland, according to Degerbøl and Nielsen (1930, p. 143), only one young
beluga is produced at a time, every second or, more probably, third year.Mating Season . Knowing the age of the foetus allows calculation of the
probable date of mating (Hinton, 1925; Risting, 1928). In the St. Lawrence region
mating occurs in the spring, principally in May (Vladykov, 1944, p. 110), while
in Greenland it takes place over a greater length of time, from February to
016 | Vol_III-0784
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
August, chiefly in May and June (Degerbøl and Nielsen, 1930). The activities
of the males have been observed during the mating season, often three or four
pursuing a female and fighting among themselves. Spencer (1889, p. 79J) des–
cribed the mating of white whales in Hudson Bay as follows: “Coition takes
place under water. The two animals, with a noise as if they were rubbing
hard against each other, rise in the water until nearly the whole body is
visible, then come in sudden contact, and fall asunder.”Birth . Most births in the St. Lawrence region occur in May and June
(Vladykov, 1944, p. 112). During June most of the females are seen accompanied
by young calves. Degerbøl and Nielsen (1930) say that most Greenland white
whales are born in April. It seems that the normal method [ ?] of delivery in–
volves emergence of the calf anterior and first, although this is not the
only procedure. Degerb o ø l and Nielsen (1930) reported observations [ ?] by
Greenland Eskimoe of birth occurring tail foremost. Vladykov (1944, p. 113)
suggested that this method of birth is abnormal, and cited reports of hunters
in the St. Lawrence area indicating that tail-first births ofter reulst result in
death of the young whale and the mother, the tail flukes preventing completion
of delivery. Birth of the beluga under normal conditions has not been observed.Number of Calves . According to Heptner (1930), there are generally one or
two calves. In the St. Lawrence River only one foetus has been found in a white
whale mother, although often two calves are seen with the females, and a report
came from a hunter of seeing a female with three calves (Vladykov, 1944, p. 114).
From Greenland three instances of this are reported by Degerbøl and Nielsen (1930),
while Sutton and Hamilton (1932, p. 93) wrote of the report of a native of
Hudson Bay who claimed to have seen a female with seven embryos.
017 | Vol_III-0785
EA Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Suckling . Lactation probably continues for at least six months, although
its duration is not known exactly. Young in their second year, although still
accompanying their mothers, show evidence of food other than milk in their
stomachs.Vladykov (1944, p. 114-15) described the suckling procedure in the beluga,
in which the mother rolls on her side, with one fin out of the water, and the
calf takes up a position perpendicular to her while the mother balances herself
almost motionlessly. Each feeding period is short, the structure of the mammary
glands allowing a jet-like flow of milk (Kellogg, 1938, p. 661). The high
fat percentage of whale milk, from 20% to 46% in different species (Clowes,
1929, pp. 472-75; Freund, 1932, pp. 18-21) is no doubt a contributing factor
to the rapid growth of young whales.Behavior
Temperature Preference . The beluga is an animal adapted to northern lati–
tudes, and appears to prefer water of a low temperature. The white whales of
the St. Lawrence River seem more numerous when the surface water temperature
is below 60°F. Many of their movements can be correlated with annual tempera–
ture changes in various areas.Food . The principal information on the food of the beluga is given for
White, Kara, and Barents seas by Heptner (1930), Tschirkowa and [ ?] Folitarek
(1930), and Birula (1930); for the St. Lawrence River area by Vladykov, (1944
and 1946), and for the North Pacific region by Heptner (1930) and particularly
by Arsenyev (1939). Fishes and other aquatic organisms make up the diet of the
white whale in all regions. As the beluga has a rather narrow esophagus, it
cannot feed on fishes of any large size. According to Vladykov (1946), in the
018 | Vol_III-0786
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
St. Lawrence area the largest fish found in a beluga’s stomach was a cod
( Gadus callarias ), 30 inches in length, which probably weighed in a fresh
state less than 10 pounds. Arsenyev (1939) for beluga from the North Pacific
mentioned finding a Pacific salmon ( Oncorhynchusketa ) weighing around 5 pounds.
Thus in all regions the principal food consists of fishes of small size.
From the study of the stomach contents of 165 belugas of the St. Lawrence
region, Vladykov (1946) found the most frequent occurrence of small fishes such
as capelin ( Mallotus villosus ) in 54 stomaches (51%) and of sand launce ( Ammodytes
americanus ) in 58 stomachs (54%). Among invertebrates, polychaetes ( Nereis
virens ) were present in 64 stomachs (60%) and squid ( Illex illicebrosus ) in 35
stomachs (33%). The large male belugas take also small numbers of young common
cod ( Gadus callarias ) and adults of Greenland cod ( Gadus ogac ) and sculpin
( Myoxocephalus groenlandic su us ) . Adult belugas of both sexes feed also to a
certain extent on flatfishes (Pseudopleuronectes americanus and Liopsetta
putnami ). Among invertebrates in addition to polychaetes and cephalopods there
are found also other groups of mollusks and various crustaceans.Parasites . York and Maplestone (1926, pp. 170 and 273) listed as most
abundant stomach parasites of the white whale Anisakis kükenthali , A. simplex ,
and a dweller in the bronchial tubes and the ears, near the tympanum, Stenurus
arcticus , all nematodes. In the St. Lawrence River area A. simplex is found
abundantly in the first stomach compartment of the beluga (Vladykov, 1944,
p. 118); also in the stomach is the small acanthocephalan, Corynosoma strumosum .
There is no evidence of external parasites.Suspicion of the presence of trichinosis ( Trichinella ) infection in the white
whale has been held for some time. Thorburg, Tulinius and Roth (1948, p. 789)
019 | Vol_III-0787
EA Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
suspected its presence during an epidemic in West Greenland in 1947, but no
infected whales were found. Actual evidence of its existence in the beluga
was reported by Bradley and Rausch (1950, pp. 105-07) in Alaska.Predators . There are probably few enemies of the white whale; the most
serious enemy is the killer whale ( Orcinus orca ), which attacks the beluga
with its traditional ferocity. Another is the Greenland shark ( Somniosus
microcephalus ). Both of these range over northern waters inhabited by the
white whale. According to Heptner (1930), walrus ( Odobenus rosmarus and O.
divergens ) occasionally attack white whales.Voice . There have been many reports of sounds emitted by the beluga,
described variously as resembling the violent agitating of a tin pla c t e held
in the hand (Sutton and Hamilton, 1932, p. 93), and as a pleasant trilling,
earning it the name “sea canary” (Beddard, 1900, p. 245). Varied as the des–
criptions are, they point to a real ability of the whale to produce [ ?] vocal
sounds, which have been heard under a wide variety of circumstances. Other
descriptions of the “voice” include: a grating sound (Nelson, 1918, p. 469),
the “put-put” of a motorboat (Andrews, 1925, p. 56), a grunting like that of a
pig, describing the frantic moans of a captured female (Struthers, 1896, p.
124), and a loud, repeated outburst, suggesting the bellow of a bull or the
grunt of a walrus, coming from a male approaching a net (Chapsky, 1937, p. 57).
Schevill and Lawrence (1949, p. 143) gave an interesting account of white whale
sounds heard in the L l ower Saguenay River in Quebec by the use of an underwater
microphone. Among the more outstanding noises reported by them were: “high
pitched resonant whistles and squeaks,” “bell-like” sounds, something like
“a crowd of children shouting in the distance,” and a [ ?] “trilling, which quite
justified the name “sea canary.”
020 | Vol_III-0788
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Senses and Intelligence . According to Casgrain (1873, p. 4) and Heptner
(1930), the olfactory sense of the beluga is well developed, allowing the whale
to perceive many odors from nearby shores. Rand (p. 675) reported acute hear–
ing ability. The brain is relatively large, the ratio of brain weight to body
weight being 1:230 (Vladykov, 1944, p. 125) compared to 1:14,000 for the
blue whale ( Balaenoptera musculus ), and 1:25,000 for the Greenland right whale
( Balaena mysticetus ) (Freund, 1932, p. 6).Evidence of great maternal regard for the young comes from white whale
hunters, who have observed extreme agitation in females when their young have
become caught in nets, and a definite tendency for the mothers to protect
their calves when in danger. Tschirkowa and Folitarek (1930, p. 113),
Sutton and Hamilton (1932, p. 93), Casgrain (1873, p. 3), and Arsenyev
(1939, p. 60) have given evidence of the young attaching themselves to various
parts of their mother and presumably being thus “carried” while she swims about.Swimming and Diving . The white whale is not a rapid swimmer, its customary
speed, according to Degerbøl and Nielsen (1930, p. 144), being about six miles
per hour. Vladykov (1944, p. 127) recorded a chase at about ten miles per hour
for ten to fifteen minutes, after which the male whales showed more evidence of
fatigue than did the females. The beluga can remain submerged at least fifteen
minutes if disturbed; undisturbed underwater periods, however, last normally
ten to fifteen seconds (Rand, p. 675). Howell (1935, p. 155) noted two types of
movement, one in which the top of the head is followed by the back rolling
deliberately into view, the other in which the top of the head and the snout
appear together with less of the back showing. The blow-hole emerges in each
case. The whales swim in groups of usually not more than two or three abreast,
often in single file (Scammon, 1874, p. 94), frequently traveling in large
schools of several hundred (Sutton and Hamilton, 1932, p. 92).
021 | Vol_III-0789
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Geographical Distribution
The white whale is an inhabitant of cold weat h er, ranging throughout much
of the arctic and subarctic region of the Northern Hemisphere. Greel e y (1886,
pp. 359-60) recorded it from 81°35′ N., and reported that Parry, in 1827, saw
belugas at 81°40′ N., while True (1907, p. 325) noted it from as far south
as 39°22′ N., off New Jersey. Scheffer and Slipp (1948, pp.303-04) referred
to its appearance in 1940 off Washington state, and Townsend (1929, p. 171)
mentioned its occurrence of f Massachusetts. Other comparatively rare southern
sojourns are reported from the British Isles by Barclay and Neill (1821),
Struthers (1896), Millais (1906, pp. 315-16), Harmer (1927), Miller (1928, p.
514) and Fraser (1938, pp.288-89), from the Baltic Sea by Japha (1909), and
from the coast of the Netherlands by Deinse (1947).The beluga is found generally in fairly shallow, coastal water, visiting
indiscriminately both brackish and fresh waters. There are known cases where
it ascends rivers to very considerable distances, as in the Pechora River
(Tschirkowa and Folitarek, 1930), and the Yukon River, where it goes 700 miles
from the mouth (Fraser, 1938, p. 287).The great numbers of white whales along the west coast of Greenland have
been described by Degerbøl and Nielsen (1930). Canadian (St. Lawrance River
region) distribution is given by Vladykov (1944). Little specific information
exists on the beluga from Newfoundland. Packard (1891, p. 442) and Bangs
(1898, p. 492; 1910, p. 454) ref r rred to the common sight of white-whale
schools along the Labrador coast in summer, and Hantzsch (1909, pp. 245-47)
reported the beluga from northern Labrador, near Hudson Strait. Reports of
the whale in Hudson Strait and in regions of Ungava Bay, near and in the Koksoak
River, [ ?] come from Degerbøl and Freuchen (1935), in Leaf Bay from Low (1906,
022 | Vol_III-0790
EA Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
pp. 274-75), and at Port Burwell from Bernier (1910, p. 313). The whales are
not uncommon in northwestern Ungava Bay and in Diana Bay to the west.The belugas of Baffin Island are reported by Low (1906, p. 27 5 4 ), Soper
(1928, pp. 74-75, and Soper 1944, p. 252) along the south e coast; by Anderson
(1934, p. 74) and Degerbøl and Freuchen (1935) in Frobisher Bay and Cumber–
land Gulf on the east coast; by Bernier (1909, p. 71) in the Lancaster Sound
area to the north; and by Soper (1928, p. 75), Menning (1943, p. 56), and
Degerbøl and Freuchen (1935) on the west.Preble (1902, p. 40), Low (1906, pp. 274-75), Binney (1929, p. 19), Sutton
and Hamilton (1932, pp. 92-94), Degerbøl and Freuchen (1935), and Manning (1946,
p. 84) indicated large numbers of beluga around Southampton Island, along the
east and west coasts of Hudson Bay, and in James Bay. References to white
whales in Foxe Basin was made by Anderson (1913, p. 500), Manning (1943, p.56),
and Degerbøl and Freuchen (1935). Degerbøl and Freuchen noted the beluga in
Jones Sound, north of Devon Island, while Bay (1904, p. 477) recorded it from
King Oscar Land, Ellesmere Island. Preble (1902, p. 41), Bernier (1909, p. 71),
and Soper (1928, p. 74) reported many white whales from the Prince Regent Inlet
area, and Low (1906, p. 274) noted them in Barrow Strait.MacFarlane (1905, p. 729), Anderson (1913, p. 500), Anderson (1934, p. 73),
and Porsild (1945, p. 21) described white whales as abundant in the area of
the Mackenzie River Delta. Preble (1908, p. 128) noted them along the north
coast of Alaska, east to the Mackenzie, while Anderson (1913, p. 500) described
them from east of Richards Island.Nelson (1918), Kellogg (1931, p. 74), and Bradley and Rausch (1950, p. 105)
referred to the white whales of Alaska, those of Point Barrow noted by Anderson
(1934, p. 73), the Yukon River by Nelson (1918, p. 468) and Fraser (1938, p. 287),
023 | Vol_III-0791
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
and the south coast by Osgood (1924, p. 11).Nelson (1918, p. 468) described the white whales of the Bering Sea, and
Arsenyev (1939, p. 109) in the Sea of Okhotsk. References to the north Siberian
coast com e from Pallas (1776), Ostroumov (1929), Douhovny (1933), Chapsky (1937),
and Arsenyev (1936; 1939). Presence of in the Kara Sea was noted by Ostroumov
(1929), in the Barents Sea by Tschirkowa and Folitarek (1930), in the White Sea
by Heptner (1930), Birula (1934), and Barabash (1937), and along the western
Scandinavian coast by Harmer (1927), Freund (1932), and [ ?] Birula (1934).
Seamundsson (1939, pp. 23-24) referred to the beluga as a casual visitor to
Iceland, seen only a few times during this century, chiefly along the colder
north and northwest coasts.Movements . The movements of white whales seem to be correlated, at least
in some instances, with water temperature changes. During the unusually cold
winter of 1902-03 a large number of belugas were observed around the Norwegian
coast. After the water temperature returned to normal, the belugas disappeared
(Harmer, 1927, p. 16; Freund, 1932, p. 44; Birula, 1934, p. 14). Recent warming
of the waters of western Greenland has resulted in a d i minished white whale
population in that region (Degerbøl and Nielsen, 1930, pp. 143-44), presumably
because of a preference for colder water. During the same period (1927-29)
belugas were unusually abundant in the St. Lawrence region. This was attributed
by Vladykov (1944, pp. 141-46) to immigration from outside. A few years later
the number of belugas in this area returned to normal. In general, belugas
have always been present, at least for the last four hundred years, not in the
Gulf of St. Lawrence, but in the river proper. According to Vladykov (1944, pp.
57-61), belugas are always present in the estuary of the St. Lawrence River, from
Ile aux Coudres to Baie Trinit e é and Cap Chat. In spring and early summer, when
024 | Vol_III-0792
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
the water is still cold in the Gulf, the belugas are found also around the Gaspe
coast and along the north shore up to Natashkwan. Late in fall, a small number
of belugas ascend the St. Lawrence River quite regularly, beyond Quebec City,
thus entering fresh water. In regions farther north the whales withdraw n in
autumn from ice-forming areas, many migrating through Hudson Strait to winter
in Davis Strait or along the [ ?] Labrador coast, in spring returning to Ungava Bay
and Hudson Bay. East of Baffin Island migration south in October extends along
both sides of Davis Strait. According to Anderson [ ?] (1913, p. 500) and
Porsild (1945, p. 21), the belugas appear in the Mackenzie River Delta region in
July, moving west again in late summer.E C c onomic Importance
Methods of Catching . A common method of taking the white whale in the Cana–
dian Arctic (Anderson, 1934, p. 74) and in Greenland (Degerbøl and Nielsen, 1930)
is for the hunters to drive the whales to the heads of fjords or up rivers into
shallow water by shocting and general noise-making and then await the fall of tide
and subsequent stranding of the animals, when they are shot. Similarly, the
whales are pursued by boats into fairly shallow water where diving is limited,
shot, and hauled near shore, where at low tide they are cut up. In Norway and
Russia, as well as in parts of the Canadian Arctic, nets are used. Chapsky (1937)
refers to nets used in the Gulf of Ob as being 1,800 feet long and 18 feet deep,
with a mesh of 7 inches. Arsenyev (1940) describes special seines used in the
North Pacific regions, over 2,000 feet long. Hunting in the St. Lawrence River
is accomplished chiefly with motorboats, the whales being pur us su ed and shot from
these (Vladykov, 1944, pp. 25-37).
025 | Vol_III-0793
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Oil . One of the most important products of the white whale is its oil,
the amount of [ ?] which varies, depending upon the size of the whale and the
period of the year in which it is taken. Roughly estimated, an 8-foot calf
might be expected to yield 20 gallons, a 12-foot adult 70 gallons, and a 14-
foot adult 100 gallons (Vladykov 1944, pp. 155-59). Oil content is highest
in spring and early summer, lowest in fall and winter, the difference being
great. The oil of the beluga has been a valuable product [ ?] for the natives
of regions in which the whale is found in abundance, the Eskimos of Greenland
and the Canadian Arctic. Commercial uses are as a fine lubricant, pa i r ticularly
the oil from the head, as an agent in tanning, as a constituent in cooking
fats, and, according to Brocklesby (1941, p. 418), as an adulterant for paints.
Anderson (1934, p. 74) referred to export of the oil from Cumberland Sound, in
Baffin Island.Skin . Among the Eskimos of Canada and Greenland, the raw epidermis is
considered a particular food delicacy. Export of beluga skins has taken place
from Cumberland Sound (Anderson, 1934, p. 74) and from Southampton Island (Sutton
and Hamilton, 1932, p. 92). Histological studies of beluga skin were made by
Bonin and Vladykov (1940). “Porpoise leather,” as the prepared skin is called
commercially, is a strong, durable leather used in the manufacture of shoe laces,
made from the dermis. For further details see Vladykov (1944, pp. 149-55).Meat . The meat of the white whale is used principally by the Eskimos of
northern Canada and Greenland, for their own consumption and as dog food. As
with much of their other food, white whale meat is taken in quantity during
fav ro or able periods and stored for use at other times of the year (Anderson, 1934,
p. 74, and others). The beluga is not used to any extent for food except by
the northern natives.
026 | Vol_III-0794
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
Conservation . There is no existing international control over the taking
of the white whale such as that governing the hunting of the larger, more
commercially important whales. Data on numbers in the different regions where
they are taken in quantity are not suitable to allow any accurate estimates
for limiting hunting so as to assure continuance of abundance. Methods used
at the present time, at least in North America, seem to result in the killing
of considerably fewer whales than more concentrated efforts would do. For
example, Porsild (1945, p. 21) suggested more could be taken with safety
around the [ ?] Mackenzie River Delta. Vladykov (1944, p. 167) arrived at the
conclusion that about 3,000 belugas could be taken annually in the Canadian
Arctic, and about 1,000 more in the St. Lawrence region. The most that can be
said is that no great decline in numbers seems to have come about during the
last few decades, and so, at least at the present rate of commercial hunting,
the future of the white whale population seems fairly secure.Females accompanied by their calves are so lean that, at least from an
economic standpoint, hunting them is comparatively unprofitable. Therefore, it
is strongly suggested that females accompanied by their young should be
protected.
026a | Vol_III-0795
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Anderson, R.M. “Report on the natural history collections of the
expedition.” In V.Stefansson’s My Life with the Eskimo .
Macmillan, N.Y., 1913.2. ----. “Mammals of the eastern arctic and Hudson Bay.” Canada’s
Eastern Arctic . Dept. Int., Ottawa, 1935.3. ----. “Mammals and birds.” Canada’s Western Northland . Dept.
Mines and Resources, Ottawa, pp.97-122, 1937.4. ----. “Catalogue of Canadian recent mammals.” Nat. Mus. Can. Bull.
102, Ottawa, 1947.5. Andrews, R.C. Whale hunting with gun and camera . 333 pp. New York,
1925.6. Arsenyev, V.A. “A morphological characteristic of the far eastern
white whale.” Bull. Far Eastern Branch Acad. Sci., U.S.S.R.,
19: 131-144. Vladivostok, 1936. (In Russian)7. ----. “Distribution and migration of the white whale in the far east.”
Bull. Pac. Sci. Inst. Fish and Ocean., 15. 109 pp. Vladivostok,
1939. (Russian with English r e é sum e é )8. ----. “Technical problems of the far eastern beluga.” Bull . Paci. Sci.
Inst. Fish. and Ocean., 20: 129-150. Vladivostok, 1940.
(In Russian)9. Bagby, R., Bagby, A. “Moby Dick’s bairn.” Collier’s , Dec.14, 1940;
pp.18 & 69. Springfield, Ohio.10. Bangs, O. “A list of the mammals of Labrador.” Amer. Nat. , vol.32;
pp.489-507. 1898.11. ----. “List of the mammals of Labrador.” Appendix IV, W.T. Grenfell’s
Labrador, the country and the people , pp.458-468. Macmillan,
N.Y., 1910.12. Barabash, I.I. “Taxonomic observations on white whales.” Journ.Mamm .,
vol.18, pp.507-509, 1937.13. Barclay & Neill. “Account s of a Belu f g a or White Whale killed in the
Firth of Forth.” Mem. Wernerian Nat. Hist. Sec., vol.3,
pp. 371-394, Edinburgh, 1821.14. Bay, Edvard. “Animal life in the King Oscar Land and the Neighbouring
Lands.” Appendix III. Otto Sverdrup’s New Land, Vol.2,
pp.477-483, 1904.
027 | Vol_III-0796
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
15. Beddard, F.E. A Book of Whales . London, 1900.
16. Bernier, J.E. Report on the Dominion Government Expedition to Arctic
Islands and the Hudson Strait on board the C.G.S. “Arctic”
(1906-1907) . 127 pp. Ottawa, 1909.17 [ ?] . B---. Report on the Dominion of Canada Government Expedition to the
Arctic Islands and Hudson Strait on board the C.G.S. “Arctic”
(1908-1909) . 529 pp. Ottawa, 1910.18. Binney, G. 1929. “Hudson Bay in 1928.” Geog.Jour ., LXXIV, no.1,
pp.1-27. London, 1929.19. Birula, A.A. “Ueber die Seesaugetiere des Weissen Meeres.” Zool .
Anz. , vol.107, pp.10-22. Leipzig, 1934.20. Bonin, W., and Vladykov, V.D. “Etude sur les mammif e è res aquatiques.
1. La peau de Marsouin blanc ou B e é luga ( Delphinapterus leucas ).”
Nat. Can. , vol.67, pp.253-287. Quebec, 1940.21. Bradley, P.J., and Rausch, R. “A preliminary note on trichinosis
investigations in Alaska.” Arctic , vol.3 (2), pp. [ ?] 105-107, 1950.22. Brocklesby, H.N. “The chemistry and technology of marine animal oils
with particular reference to those of Canada.” Fish. Res. Board
Can. Bull . No.59, 442 pp. Ottawa, 1941.23. Brunelli, G. “Biologie industrielle des Delphinid e é s.” Cons. Explor .
Mer. Rapp. et Proc.-Verb ., vol. 6, pp.167-174, 1931.24. Casgrain, Abb e é . “La P e ê che aux Marsouins dans le fleuve Saint-Laurent.”
Montr e é al, 1873. (Published without author’s name.)25. Chambers, E.T.D. Les p e ê cheries de la Province de Qu e é bec, l e è re partie .
Ministere de la Colonisation, des Mines et des P e ê cheries de la
Province de Qu e é bec, 1912.26. Chapsky, K.K. “Migrations and hunting of white whale in the northern
part of Ob Bay.” Trans . Arctic Inst. (Biol.), 71. 60 pp.
P L eningrad, 1937. (Russian with English r e é sum e é )27. Clowes, A.T. “A note on the composition of whale milk.” Discovery
Reports, vol.1, 472-475, 1929.28. Cope, E.D. “Second contribution to the history of the Delphinidae.”
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol. 17, pp.278-328, 1865.29. Degerboel, M. (Personal communication). 1939.
30. ----., and Freuche m , P. “Mammals.” Report of the Fifth Thule Expedition,
1921-1924. Zool. Mus. Copenhagen, vol.2 (4 and 5). 1935.
028 | Vol_III-0797
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
31. Degerboel, M., and Nielsen, N.L. “Biologiske Iagttagelser over og
Maalinger af Hvidhvalen ( Delphinapterus leucas (Pall.))
og dens Fostre.” Medd. Grønland , vol. 77, pp. 119-144.
Copenhagen, 1930. (In Danish with English r e é sum e é ).32. Deinse, A.B. van. “Onze cetacea vanaf 808 tot en met 1944.”
Levende Natuur , vol.50 (4, 5) pp.52-53, 1947.33. Douhovny, M.M. “ Delphinapterus leucas Pall. in the Obi Gulf.”
Abstr . works Zool. Inst. Moscow University: 79-82, 1933.
(In Russian)34. Elliot, D. G. “A synopsis of the mammals of North America and the
adjacent seas.” Field Columbian Museum, Zool . Ser., 2, 1901.35. Forbin, V. “La p e ê che aux B e é lugas.” Nature , pp.543-546, Paris, 1930.
36. Fraser, F.C. “Whales and Dolphins.” In Giant Fishes, Whales and Dolphins ,
by J. R. Norman and F. C. Fraser, vol. 14, 361 pp. New York, 1938.37. Freund, L. “Cetacea.” In Die Tierwelt der Nord-und Ostsee , by G. Grimpe.
Part XII: 1-64, Leipzig, 1932.38. Gray, R. W. “The integument of whales.” Nature , vol.125: 744, London,
1930.39. Greely, A.W. Three Years of Arctic Service. An Account of the Lady
Franklin Bay Expedition of 1881-84 and the Attainment of the
Farthest North. London, 1886.40. Güldberg, G.A. “Bidrag tel Cetaceernes Biologi. Om forplantningen og
draegtighedstiden nos de noratlantiska Bardehavaler.” Vid.
Selsk. Forhand , vol.9, pp. 1-56. Christiana.41. Hantzsch, B. “Beiträge zur Kenntnis des nordöstlichsten Labradors.
Mitteilungen des Vereins fur Erdkunde zu Dresden,” vol.8,
pp.168-229; 245-320. (“Notes on mammals,” pp.245-257,
translated into English by M.B.A. Anderson, in Canadian
Field-Naturalist , 45 and 46, 1931 and 1932, Ottawa.). 1909.42. Harmer, S.F. Report on Cetacea stranded on the British coasts from
1913-1926. Brit. Mus. Nat. Hist., vol.10, 91 pp. London, 1927.43. ----. “On the use of white whale skin for shoe laces.” Nature , vol.125,
p.286, London, 1930.44. ----. Appendix to J.F.G. Wheeler’s Notes on a young sperm whale from the
Bermuda Islands”. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1933 (2), pp.409-
410, 1933.
029 | Vol_III-0798
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
45. Heptner, W. G. “Materiale zur Kenntnis der geographischen Verbreit–
ung und Biologie des Weisswales (Delphinapterus).” Arb. Zool.
Vorsch. Inst. Inst., 4 (2), pp.7-100. Moscow, 1930. (In
Russian).46. Hinton, M.A.C. Reports on papers left by the late Major G.E.H.
Barrett-Hamilton relating to the whales of south Georgia: 57-
209. London, 1925.47. Howel, A.B. “Observations on the white whale.” Jour. Mamm ., vol.16,
pp.155-56, 1935.48. Japha, A. “Zusammenstellung der in der Ostsee bisher beobachteten Wale.”
Schr. Phys.-ökonom. Ges. K o ö nigsborg, vol.49, p.119, 1909.49. Kellogg, R. “Whaling statistics for the Pacific coast of North America.”
Jour. Mamm., vol.12, pp.73-77, 1931.50. ----. “Adaptation of structure to function in whales. Cooperation in
Research.” Carnegie Institution of Washington, Publication 501 ,
pp.649-682, 1938.51. ----. “Whales, giants of the sea.” Nat. Geogr. Mag. , vol.77 (1),
pp.35-90. Washington, D.C., 1940.52. Klumov, S. “The new form of white whale.” Biulleten ’ Rybnogo Khoziaistva
SSSR (Sea Fishery Economics in U.S.S.R.), vol.7, pp.26-28.
Moscow, 1935. (In Russian).53. Lac e é p e è de, Comte de. Hist. Nat. des C e é tac e é s. 1804.
54. ----. Histoire Naturelle. Les C e é tac e é s, les Quadrup e è des ovipares, les
Serpents et les Poissons . Nouv. Edit. Vol.I. 668 pp. Paris, 1844.55. Lönnberg, E. “Remarks on the dentition of Delphinapterus leuc e a s .”
Arkiv. F f ür Zool ., vol.7 (2), pp.1-18. Stockholm, 1911.56. Low, A.P. Report of the Dominion Government Expedition to the Hudson
Bay and the Arctic Islands on board the C.G.S. “Neptune ”,
1903-1904. 355 pp. Ottawa, 1906.57. MacFarlane, R. “Notes on mammals collected and observed in the northern
MacKenzie river district, Northwest Territories of Canada, with
remarks on explorers and explorations of the far north.” Proc .
U.S. Nat. Mus., vol.28, pp.673-764, 1905.58. Mackintosh, N.A., Wheeler, J.F.G. “Southern Blue and Fin whales.”
Discovery Reports, vol.1, pp.257-540, 1929.
030 | Vol_III-0799
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
59. Manning, T.H. “Notes on the mammals of south and central west Baffin
Island.” Jour. Mamm. , vol.24 (1), pp.47-59, 1943.60. ----. “Birds and mammal notes from the east side of Hudson Bay.”
Can. Field-Nat ., vol.60 (4), pp.71-85, 1946.61. Matthews, L.H. “The Humpback whale, Megaptera nodosa .” Discovery
Reports , vol.17, pp.7-92, 1938.62. Matthews, L.H. “The Sperm Whale, Physeter catodon .” Discovery Reports ,
vol.17, pp.93-168, 1938.63. ----. “Notes on the Southern Right Whale, Eubalaena australis .”
Discovery Reports, vol.17, pp.169-182, 1938.64. ----. “The Sei Whale, Balaenoptera borealis .” Discovery Reports ,
vol.17, pp.183-290, 1938.65. Millais, J.G. Mammals of Great Britain and Ireland , vol.3. 384 pp.
London, 1906.66. Miller, G.S. “List of North American Recent mammals, 1923.” U.S. Nat.
Mus. Bull ., vol.128, 673 pp. Washington, D.C., 1924.67. Nelson, E.W. “Wild animals of North America.” Nat. Geog. Soc.: pp.385-
612. Washington, D.C., 1918.68. Osgood, W.H. “A biological reconnaissance of the base of the Alaska
Peninsula.” North American Fauna , vol.24, 1904.69. Ostroumov, N. “To the investigation of the white whale, Delphinapterus
leucas Pall. and its trade in the Gulf of Jenisei.” Rep.
Siber. Sci. Sta. Fish., 4 (1). Krasnoyarsk, 1929.70. Packard, A.S. The Labrador Coast . 513 pp. New York, 1891.
71. Pallas, P.S. Reise o d urch verschiedene Provinzen des Russischien Reichs ,
vol.3, part 2. 760 pp. St. Petersburg, 1776.72. ----. Voyages du Professeur Pallas dans plusieurs provinces de l’empire
de Russie et dans l’Asie Septentrionale, Nouv. Ed., 5. 448 pp . Nouv. Ed., 5. 448 pp
Paris, 1794.73. Porsild, A.E. “Mammals of the Mackenzie Delta.” Can. Field-Nat .,
vol.59 (1), pp. 4-22, 1945.74. Preble, E.A. “A biological investigation of Hudson Bay region.” North
American Fauna , vol.22, 1902.75. Rand, A.L. “The mammals of northern Canada.” Unpublished MS.
031 | Vol_III-0800
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: White Whale
76. Risting, [ ?] S. “Whales and whale foetuses.” Cons. Explor. Mer .
Rapp. et Proc.-Verb ., vol.50, 122 pp., 1928.77. Saemundsson, B. “Mammals.” The Zoology of Iceland, IV (76), 1939.
78. Scammon, C.N. The marine mammals of the northwestern coast of North
America . San Francisco, 1874.79. Schevill, W.E., and Lawrence, B. “Underwater listening to the white
porpoise ( Delphinapterus leucas ).” Science , vol.109 (2824),
143-144. 1949.80. Sleptzov, M.M. “D e é termination on de l’ a â ge chez Delphinus delphis L.”
Bull. Soc. Nat. de Moscou, vol.49, pp.43-51. Moscou, 1940.
(Russian with French r e é sum e é ).81. Soper, J.D. “A faunal investigation of southern Baffin Island.”
Nat. Mus. Can. Bull . vol.53, Biol. Ser. 15. 143 pp. Ottawa, 1928.82. ----. “The mammals of southern Baffin Island, Northwest Territories,”
Canada. Jour. Mamm. , vol.25 (3), pp. 221-254, 1944.83. Spencer, M. “Notes on the breeding habits of certain mammals from
personal observations and inquiries from Indians.” Geol. and
Nat. Hist. Surv. Can. Annual Report , N.S. 3 (2), appendix 3:
77j-78j. Montreal, 1889.84. Struthers, J. “On the external character of the anatomy of a Beluga
( Delphinapterus leucas) .” Journ Anat. & Phys. Norm. & Path. ,
vol.30, pp.124-156. London, 1896.85. Sutton, G.M., and Hamilton, W.J. “The mammals of Southampton Island,”
Mem. Carn. Mus., vol.12 (2), pp. 92-93, 1932.86. Thorburg, N.B., Tulinius, S., and Roth, H. “Trichinosis in Greenland.”
Acta Path. et Microbiol. Scand ., vol. 25, pp. 778-794, 1948.87. True, F.W. “Contributions to the natural history of the Cetaceans.
A review of the family Delphinidae.” U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull . 36.
191 pp. Washington, D.C., 1899.88. True, F.W. “Observations on living white whales, Delphinapterus leucas ...”
Smith. Misc. Coll Smith. Misc. Coll ., vol. 52 (3), pp. 325-330. Washington, D.C. 1909.89. Tschirkowa, A.I., and Folitarek, S. “Ueber den Weisswal ( Delphinapterus
leucas Pall.) und dessen Fang in Tschescha Indiga Bai (Barentz–
Meer).” Arb . Zool. Vorsch. Inst., vol.4 (2), pp.101-127.
Moscow, 1930. (In Russian).[ ?]
032 | Vol_III-0801
EA-PS. Vladykov: White Whale
90. Vladykov, V.D. “A modification of the pectoral fins in the Beluga
from the St. Lawrence River.” Nat. Can ., vol.70 (1 and 2),
pp.23-40. Quebec, 1943.91. ----. “Chasse, biologie, et valeur e é conomique du Marsouin Blanc ou
B e é luga ( Delphinapterus leucas ) du fleuve et du golfe Saint–
Laurent.” Etudes sur les Mammif e è res Aquatiques , III.
D e é partement des P e ê cheries, P. Q. 194 pp. Qu e é bec, 1944.92. ----. “Nourriture du Marsouin Blanc ou B e é luga ( Delphinapterus leucas )
du fleuve Saint-Laurent.” IV. Etudes sur les Mammif e è res
Aquatiques. D e é partment des P e ê cheries, P. Q. 158 pp. Qu e é bec,
1946.93. Watson, M., and Young, A.H. “The anatomy of the northern B e é luga ( Beluga
catodon , Bray; Delphinapterus leucas, Pallas) compared with
that of other whales.” Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, vol.29,
pp. 393-434, 1880.94. Willey, A. Article in Nature . London, 1906.
95. Wyman, J. “Description of a “White Fish” or White Whale ( Beluga borealis
Lesson).” Jour. Nat. Hist ., vol.7, pp.603-612. Boston, 1863.96. Yorke, W., and Maplestone, P.A. The Nematode p P arasites of The Nematode p P arasites of . Vertebrates
536 pp. London, 1926.97. Zenkovic, B. “On whale foetuses.” C.R. Acad. URSS, vol.2, pp. 337-344.
Leningrad, 1935.Vadim D. Vladykov
Fisheries
Commercial Fisheries of Alaska
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0802
(EA-Zoo. Edward W. Allen)
COMMERCIAL FISHERIES OF ALASKA
CONTENTS
Page General 1 History 2 Fishing Methods 12a Jurisdiction 14 Statistics 15 Bibliography 17
001 | Vol_III-0803
EA-Zoology
(Edward W. Allen)
COMMERCIAL FISHERIES OF ALASKA
General
Contrary to popular belief, gold is not the primary production of Alaska.
Commercial fisheries constitute the backbone of Alaskan economy. Since the
United States acquired Alaska in 1867, its fishery output has aggregated a
value in excess of $1,500,000,000 as against an approximate aggregate value
for all other Alaskan production — gold, copper, platinum, tin, marble, furs,
reindeer, lumber, vegetables, ice, and ivory — of $1,200,000,000, up to the
year 1947. The production of fish and fishery products have given employment
to more people than all other industries. No other activity makes equal con–
tribution to the tax revenue of the Territory. Moreover, fisheries are not a
necessarily exhaustible resource like metals, but, under proper management,
are capable of sustained annual recurrence in perpetuity.Alaska’s consuming public (aside from military forces) probably does not
exceed sixty thousand white people and a lesser number of natives — Indian,
Aleut, and Eskimo; the entire population, scattered over an area about one-
fifth that of the entire forty-eight states, is hardly equal to that of a
respectable suburb of a major city. Hence, most of Alaska’s fishery output
goes to the United States proper to form an important item of the nation’s food
supply. A normal season’s pack of salmon, for instance, is considered to be
002 | Vol_III-0804
EA-Zoo. Fisheries of Alaska
at least 6,000,000 cases of 48 one-pound cans each or approximately 300,000,000
pounds valued at something like $100,000,000, although the market price fluc–
tuates greatly. But the annual pack has varied from under 4,000,000 to more
than 8,000,000 cases.Besides salmon, which support the greatest fishery, Alaskan waters pro–
duce halibut, herring, cod, black cod (sablefish), mackerel, rockfish, hake,
dogfish, also crabs (including the giant king crab), shrimp, and clams, and,
in addition, those marine mammals usually classed with fishes — whales, wal–
ruses, and fur seals. It is the hope of trawlers , that, with increase in know–
ledge and demand, a substantial bottom-net fishery will be developed. Whales
and fur seals are widespread in their migration, but most of the Alaska fisheries
are limited to the continental shelf, which is generally contemplated as con–
stituting the submerged fringe of the continent out to where comparatively
shallow bottom breaks off into the ocean abyas, and which, in the case of
Alaska, extends from a width of a few miles to one hundred miles in the Gulf
of Alaska and still farther in Bering Sea, much of which is shallow regardless
of the distance from shore s . There are scientists who consider it possible
that depth fisheries may eventually be pursued beyond the edge of the conti–
nental shelf.History
Vitus Bering discovered the mainland of Alaska in 1741, his landfall
being Mount St. Elias. His first landing was on Kayak Island about which his
log states: “The men who returned on the small yawl announced the find s ing of
an underground hut, something like a cellar, but no people. In the hut, they
discovered dried fish dried fish , bows and arrows.”
003 | Vol_III-0805
EA-Zoology. Fisheries of Alaska
It is significant that the first mention of Alaskan native food is fish,
for on the arctic coasts whales, walruses, seals, and, throughout the remainder
of the huge territorial coast line, salmon and halibut constituted the major
aboriginal food supply. Even in the interior, the small Athapasoan popula–
tion was heavily depend a e nt upon the well-stocked rivers.However, it was not the true fish, but primarily the sea otter (now almost
extinct), and to a much lesser degree the fur seal fishery, which aroused the
insatiable greed of the Russian adventurers. It was the exquisite fur of the
sea otter which impressed the crew of Bering’s ship and lured adventurers to
cross the tempestuous North Pacific in puny boats calked with pitch and bound
with thongs. Through enslaving the Aleuts who were skilled in hunting sea otter,
the Russians rapidly slaughtered these poor animals, starting with the Aleutian
Islands, then proceeding easterly and southerly clear down to the California
coast. They took other furs also, but sea otters were the real enticement.Eventually, in 1799, the Russian American Company was formed and given
governmental as well as trade monopoly powers. The sea otter had been seriously
depleted in some areas by that time but, during the history of the company, it
was said to have taken approximately 140,000 sea otter and more than 2,500,000
fur seals.When, in 1867, the United States acquired Alaska, almost immediate depletion
of the fur seals set in but was eventually checked by government intervention.
From 1870 to 1910, the Pribilof Islands were leased to a private company; after
that they were under direct government operation. Pelagic sealing (killing the
seals in the water) by nationals of other countries threatened to exterminate
these animals which each year were repairing to the Pribilof Islands to spend
the summer and have their young. After bitter controversy, an arbitral tribunal,
in 1893, held against the right of the United States to protect the fur seals
004 | Vol_III-0806
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries of Alaska
more than three miles offshore.The “three mile rule” as to territorial waters is that, under international
law, a nation owns a strip of water that width along its sea coasts. Fishery
wars between England and The Netherlands in the days of the Stuart kings stim–
ulated legal discussions as to the right of a nation to huge ocean areas or to
no ocean area at all. The princip al le that a nation owned as wide a strip of
coastal water as it could defend from the shore gained increasing acceptance.
It was believed that cannon could not sheet more than three miles, so this
distance became popular.Although the aggressive big navy at n ations such as Great Britain, Germany,
and Japan adopted three miles as the limit, and the United States, urged by its
New England fishermen, did so also, the rule has never received universal ac–
ceptance. Scandinavian countries, the Soviet Union, Portugal, and others claim
greater width. Despite ownership of territorial waters by the coastal nations,
ships of other nations have certain rights of “free passage” through these waters.There is strong legal support for the principle that a nation’s right to
protect its coastal fisheries may extend beyond its territorial waters. The
United States has given support to a reasonable doctrine of this kind, but some
Central and South American nations have sought to stretch the doctrine to the
untenable extent of expanded ownership.In 1911, almost but not quite too late, the United States, Great Britain,
Russia, and Japan entered into a treaty to put an end to pelagic sealing in the
Pacific Ocean from 30° N. latitude northward. The United States was to have con–
trol of the Pribilof Island herd, Russia of the Commander Island herd, Japan of
the Robben Island herd, but there was to be a percentage accounting between them
of the catch. Japan caused the treaty to terminate shortly before World War II.
005 | Vol_III-0807
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries of Alaska
Canada and the United States are now operating under a modus vivendi , but at
the present time (1950) no permanent protection of the herd is assured.There is no doubt that the Russians in their American possessions, as
well as the natives, depended heavily on fish for their food. In 1833,
Governor General Wrangell issued the instruction, “You must strive to prepare
a sufficient quantity of fish — dried, salted, and fresh — while it is
obtainable by seining and fishing.” And the Mikhailovski Redoubt near Sitka
was famous for its salmon. There were also some irregular shipments of dried
and salted fish to California and the then-called Sandwich Islands (Hawaii),
but the Russians never established a substantial commerical fishery.However, fisheries played an important part in the purchase of Alaska
from Russia by the United States. California and Washington (then a territory)
fishery people were so impressed with the potentiality of Alaska’s waters that
they induced the Washington legislature, in January 1866, to memorialize Presi–
dent Johns on that “abundance of codfish, halibut, and salmon, of excellent
quality, have been found along the shores of the Russian possessions.” Fish–
ing privileges in these waters were sought, and the memorial contained the far–
sighted request that the Government “employ such ships as may be spared from
the Pacific naval fleet in exploring and surveying the fishing banks known to
navigators to exist along the Pacific Coast from Cortez bank to Behring St a ra its.”
Secretary of State Seward gives credit to this memorial as opening the door for
the conversation between him and the Russian Minister at Washington, Baron
Edouard de Stoeckl, which led to the purchase.Although fur seals ( Callorhinus alascanus (- C. ursins cynocephala))
aroused the most immediate interest after the purchase, that very year United
States vessels caught cod ( Gadus macrocephalus ) valued at $350,000. Cod fishing
006 | Vol_III-0808
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
has continued in a more or less desultory way to the present day, principally
in the southeasterly part of Bering Sea and around the Shumagin Islands.Selmon ( Oncorhrnchus sp.) fishing, eventually to become the greatest
of all, was late and slow in getting started, so much so that Bencroft, the
historian, in the middle 1880’s, commented on the great increase in the Alaska
canned-salmon pack from 8,000 cases in 1880 to 36,000 cases in 1883 — the
pack is now counted by millions of cases.Salmon canning started in 1864 on the Sacramento River, spread to the
Columbia River in 1866, to British Columbia in 1876, to Puget Sound in 1877,
to Siberia in 1910, and to Japan in 1913. The first cannery in Alaska was
established in 1878, when the North Pacific Trading and Packing Co. converted
a saltery at Klawak, on the west side of Prince of Wales Island in south–
eastern Alaska, into a cannery. This is in the great pink salmon area.The first cannery to operate in the famous red salmon region of Bristol
Bay was on the H N ushagak River in 1884. Cannery development spread throughout
the whole coastal region from the Yukon to Dixon Entrance, although there has
recently been little canning on the Yukon.There were several spurts of cannery building, one being about the end
of the nineteenth century, another about 1911-12, and a third as a result of
the First World War. There have also been several bad periods. The greatest
failure of all was that of the precocious Pacific Packing & Navigation Co.,
which purchased canneries right and left at the beginning of the twentieth
century and was wound up in 1904. Another bad period followed the collapse
of the First World War boom. A third occurred in the early 1930’s, and a
minor one during 1937.During the Second World War, in order better to utilize the few ships
007 | Vol_III-0809
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
available, the short labor supply, and scarce material, the salmon industry,
under authority of the Department of the Interior, entered into a so-called
concentration plan for more efficient and economical operation. Many of the
industry’s vessels had been taken over by either the Army or the Navy. These
vessels were credited with having played an essential part in saving Alaska
from Japan.In spite of war curtailment in operations, the industry emerged in a
prosperous condition, but with many difficulties on its hands. Operating
costs had risen enormously. Shipping facilities decreased to the point that
aircraft are now largely employed for transporting the many fishermen and
cannery workers who must be brought in each s eason to su p plement the limited
but increasing number of such employees available in Alaska.Halibut ( Hippoglosus stenolepais ), though not as easily caught as salmon,
apparently formed a favorite part of the Alaskan native diet. This fish was
abundant throughout the year in the inside channels and bays which abound
along all the Alaskan coast except the arctic portion. Captain Cook, in 1778,
commented on the halibut at the Shumagins; La P e é rouse, in 1786, at Lituya Bay;
Dixon, in 1789, at Yakutat.Commercial fishing for halibut on the Pacific Coast commenced off Cape
Flattery in 1888. In Alaska, it started in a very small way about the end
of the nineteenth century, principally at Petersburg, but it was not until
1910 that the ocean type of fishing reached Cape Ommaney at the south end of
Baranof Island. It expanded, in 1913, to Cape St. Elias. Thereafter, it spread
to the Aleutian Islands.As was subsequently ascertained, halibut is a slow-growing fish with a
definitely limited habitat. The increasingly great intensity of fishing on
008 | Vol_III-0810
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
this type of fish soon resulted in serious depletion. The resultant action
of Canada and the United States marks an epoch in ocean fishery conservation.
In 1923, these two countries created a joint agency (International Fisheries
Commission), by treaty, to investigate the serious situation; then, in 1930,
they negotiated a second treaty which vested regulatory powers in the Commis–
sion. By sound regulatory management, the Commission has brought about such
a rehabilitation of the banks that, although formerly the Atlantic was the
great halibut producer, these Pacific North American banks now produce almost
three-fourths of the entire world halibut supply.Whaling was pursued by Alaska natives — Eskimos and Aleuts principally —
but the Russians, although they made a few feeble attempts, never developed a
whale fishery.It was the Yankees who developed whaling in the North Pacific and Arctic
in a big way. It is said that these seas fairly swarmed with whales; they
must have in order to support the huge fleet which frequented those waters
in the 1840’s and 1850’s.A Nantucket whaler, Captain Barzillai Folger, reached Kodiak Island grounds
in 1835. The bowhead or right whale ( Balaena mysticetus ) was particularly sought
after because the whalebone which it yielded, in addition to oil, was then in
great commercial demand. Moving on farther, the whalers struck the Siberian
coast at Caps Navarin and followed the bowhead north along the ice pack.
Captain Royce, in the Superior , first led the way into the Arctic Sea in 1847,
and in 1853, 250 ships passed north through Bering Strait. The next year, the
whalers for the first time passed east of Point Barrow.The Governor of Russian America protested against these American ships
entering Bering Sea which he claimed to be Russian national waters, but the
009 | Vol_III-0811
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
Russian-United States treaty of 1825 had recognized American rights to fish
throughout the Pacific Ocean, and his protest came to naught.In 1846, the American whaling fleet consisted of 678 ships and barks, 35
brigs, and 22 schooners, valued at $25,075,000, the majority of which are
said to have operated in the North Pacific. In 1849-50, the value of the
catch was given as $6,367,000 worth of oil and $2,075,000 of whalebone. In
1852, the combined value of oil and whalebone was said to have risen to
$14,000,000. After the 1850’s, whaling rapidly declined. In recent years,
whaling on the American side of the North Pacific almost dwindled away, al–
though the Soviet Union is said to be expanding its operations in this region.There have been several sensational disasters to the American whaling
fleet. In the last year of the Civil War (1865), the Confederate raider
Shenandoah surprised and attacked the fleet, capturing 38 ships and burning
all but 4.In 1871, there were 41 ships in the narrow ice passage north of Point Hope.
They refused to heed the warning of the friendly natives; the pack swung
inshore and crushed many ships or forced them to be abandoned.Then, in 1897, eight whalers were caught in the ice near Point Barrow.
Lieutenant D. H. Jarvis of the United States cutter Bear was ordered by the
Secretary of the Treasury to land an expedition from his ship to go to Point
Barrow and assist the stranded whalers.Lieutenant Jarvis landed on Nelson Island, proceeded by dog team to Cape
Prince of Wales, secured reindeer there and induced W. T. Lopp, the missionary,
with his Eskimo herders, to drive the reindeer to Point Barrow, while Lieutenant
Jarvis went on ahead. Although the whalers were not as destitute as anticipated,
both Lieutenant Jarvis and Mr. Lopp are entitled to great credit for their
010 | Vol_III-0812
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
efforts. Mr. Lopp left Cape Prince of Wales on February 3, 1898, with 448
reindeer, made the 700 mile trek and delivered 382 deer at Point Barrow on
March 30, 1898.Other fisheries have their own special histories, but the only other
having features of special note is the crab fishery of Bering Sea. In the
late 1920’s, American interests from Seattle and San Francisco considered
organizing a floating crab cannery project for this region which was then
practically virgin. They failed to get started, and the next summer the
Japanese entered the field. Year after year the Japanese expanded their opera–
tions and, beginning in 1934, entered the salmon field.Protests came immediately from all parts of the coast, from fishermen’s
unions as well as operators, but the Department of State and the Bureau of
Fisheries, lulled by the false denials of the Japanese, failed to take effec–
tive action. Finally, in 1937, a private operator in Bristol Bay and some
labor union leaders flew over and took pictures of a Japanese mother ship with
fresh salmon on her deck and of her accompanying fishing vessels. At about the
same time a cod fisherman in Bering Sea demanded that guns be sent him to de–
fend his men against the Japanese invaders. The Department then created a
division on international fisheries and procured a gentlemen’s agreement with
Japan to desist from its salmon fishing in Bristol Bay — but the Japanese crab
fishing continued until World War II.Complaints of inadequate fishery protection were again raised by the in–
dustry in January 1944, among them that the Economic Division of the State De–
partment, to which this subject had been assigned, had neither the facilities
nor the inclination to function in this regard. In 1948, a complete revision
of the fishery organization of the Department resulted in a setup more satisfac–
tory to the industry.
011 | Vol_III-0813
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
Now Americans have entered the Bering Sea and are catching the huge king
crabs ( Paralithodes sp.), the canning of which and sale to the United States had
proved so profitable to the Japanese. Some of the American operators are canning
the crabs, others are freezing them and shipping them south in that condition.Cordova, on the east side of Prince William Sound, is one of the big pro–
ducers of canned and frozen crab. Until recently all of the catch of this area
was taken from the sound, few of the fishermen ever venturing farther out. But
during the closed season in the sound, the summer of 1950, Cordova fisherman
began putting traps outside, in the vast Gulf of Alaska. The results were
phenomenal. Small boats, each manned by two men or a man and a boy working 100
to 150 traps, made daily hauls of 1,800 to 2,500 crabs per boat, for which a
Cordova packing plant paid 15 cents a crab. Thus the daily take for each boat
averaged $300 to $400, each fisherman making $150 to $200 per day. All of this
brought prosperity to the workers in the processing plants at Cordova, and a
boom to the town itself.Fishing Areas
Although fish abound, there is very little commercial fishing beyond the
Yukon River. Residents of this enormous arctic region, however, engage in sub–
stantial sustenance fishing.All varieties of salmon — king ( Oncorhynchus tshawytscha ), red or sockeye
( O. nerka ), silver or coho ( O. kisutch ), pink ( O. gorbuscha ) and chus ( O. keta ) —
are found in the Yukon, but this river is most famous for its kings which ascend
even to its headwaters, 2,000 miles from the sea. Although home consumption is
permitted, commercial fishing on the river is so rigidly restricted as to be
negligible.
012 | Vol_III-0814
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
The Kuskokwim River also has substantial fish runs but almost no commercial
fishing.The American side of Bering Sea contains the Pribilof Islands, home of
the fur seals, which, however, are no longer caught at sea but are herded
onshore. The southeasterly portion of the sea is known to contain halibut,
but probably in very limited quantity. It also contains substantial stocks of
king crabs, cod, and salmon. The Japanese caught salmon many miles offshore,
but, under Government restrictions, the American fishery is an inshore fishery
in the Nushagak, Kvichak, and Naknek districts and along the north shore of
the Alaska Peninsula.The Bristol Bay area is famous for the predominance of red salmon, which
is one of the finest varieties for canning.The eastern Aleutian Islands and the south side of the Alaska Peninsula
with adjacent islands O Ø- -Sanak, the Shumagins — have salmon, predominantly
red and pink, also herring ( Clupea pallasii ), cod, and clams.Kodiak Island has the several varieties of sa o l mon. At one time the Karluk
River was the most famous — or notorious — red salmon stream in the world,
but its predominance has waned. Herring are important at Kodiak Island;
dungeness crabs and clame are also found here. The is true in Cook Inlet and
Prince William Sound. The Copper River is famous for its red salmon, claimed
to be of specially high quality.All of these fisheries extend into southeastern Alaska where, in addition,
shrimp (various genera, such as Pendalus , Spirontacaris , and Sclerocrangon ) also
reach commercial importance and where pink salmon predominate. Sablefish or
black cod ( Anoplopoma fimbria ) and dogfish ( Squalus sucklii ), the latter for
their livers, are also fished here, and there are some other minor fisheries.
012a | Vol_III-0815
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
Halibut have not been mentioned in connection with the several fishing
districts but are to be found in the inside channels and out to the edge of
the continental shelf in some places (Gulf of Alaska) as much as one hundred
miles offshore, from Dixon Entrance to Bering Sea. Much of the halibut caught
in Alaskan waters is landed in Prince Rupert or Seattle.Whaling, when pursued, extended off the entire Alaskan coast.
Fishing Methods
Disregarding native fishing methods such as jigging for tomcod through the
ice, native nets, and spearing, all of which are of little moment commercially
though important to the domestic economy of the natives, there are several well–
established types of fishery operation.On the Yukon, resident whites and natives are permitted to use fish
wheels for catching salmon, and some commercial fishing is permitted with
drift gill nets and set nets. In Bristol Bay, except for a few anchored or
stake - gill nets, fishing is done with drift gill nets. These are particularly
adapted to the region because of the tides and the murky condition of the in–
shore water. Purse seines can probably be operated successfully for a con–
siderable distance offshore but are prohibited in that area. The use of power
in the gill-net boats is also prohibited. The justification for these restric–
tions from a conservation standpoint is said to be that the run is so limited
that more rapid operation would necessitate an impractical shortening of the
season which, even now, is only thirty days with not more than twenty-one days
of actual fishing because of closed weekly periods. Gill nets are also used
in a few other places.Elsewhere in Alaska, salmon are caught principally with purse seines,
013 | Vol_III-0816
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
pound nets (more commonly called fish traps in Alaska), or by trolling. There
are, however, some places where gill nets or beach seines are used. Excepting
in certain far western areas, purse seine boats are limited to fifty feet in
length. This is probably to favor the natives and other local residents. To
the westward, larger seine boats are common. Fish traps are either pile-driven
traps or floating traps, the latter far outnumbering the former.There is constant controversy between the purse seiners and the trap
operators. The purse seiners attack the traps because of their efficiency.
It is believed, however, that even the purse seiners may benefit from the
efficiency of the traps which facilitate more efficient cannery operation.
Comparison with British Columbia seems to indicate that the use of traps in
Alaska enables the operators to pay higher prices for seine-caught fish and
still compete in the world market. From a conservation standpoint, traps
are more easily regulated than as-called “mobile gear” and it makes little
difference to a fish in which he is caught.In southeastern Alaska, large quantities of king salmon, a lesser quantity
of coho solmon, and some other fish are caught by a large fleet of trollers.Herring are caught with purse seines or gill nets. Cod are caught with
hook and line; black cod by long-lining; crab with crab pots, with nets, or
by trawling. Shrimp are caught by trawling; clams are dug. The seals on the
Pribilofs are killed onshore, the three- or four-year-old males being selected.Trawling for ground fish has not yet been used extensively in Alaska, but
it is probable that this method of fishing, which is so greatly used in the
Atlantic and substantially employed on the Pacific coast farther south, will
invade Alaska waters — it is being experimented with in Bering Sea.Such whaling as has been done in recent years has been with killer boats,
014 | Vol_III-0817
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
operating from share stations (Akutan, Port Hobron, or Port Armstrong). The
large whaling factory ships now common in the Antarctic never came into use
by the American industry in the North Pacific.Jurisdiction
In the United States proper, except where international commissions have
been granted control, fisheries within state territorial boundaries and to some
extent beyond (there are disputes as to whether a state’s jurisdiction may ex–
tend beyond three miles, but it is conceded to do so as to its own citizens
and vessels in the absence of some international issue) are regulated by the
several states independently of the Federal Government. In Alaska, however,
the Bureau of Fisheries and its successor, the Fish and Wildlife Service, since
1924 (the year of passage of the White Act), have had almost unlimited regula–
tory control for conservation purposes. Much still remains to be learned about
the conservation of fisheries, but much knowledge has been acquired by study and
experience. The fishing industry is now hopeful that real progress is in sight
in the application of the basic fishery conservation principle that annual
escapement should be assured adequate to maintain existing fisheries, and, if
they any are depleted, gradually to restore them to a stabilized optimum; but
the industry feels that it is an unjustifiable economic loss not to allow all
fish to be caught which are not thus required. The Fish and Wildlike Service
has practically a free hand in Alaska as nowhere else to evolve effective
measures for the application of this principle.It is of interest to note that the salmon industry itself has financed the
University of Washington to establish a Fisheries Research Institute which is
independently engaging in a scientific research program on the Alaska salmon.
015 | Vol_III-0818
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
Statistics
Government reports are readily available giving detailed statistics.
These may also be obtained from fishery trade magazines, hence only a few
figures will be given. Table I shows the aggregate value of Alaska fishery
products for the period 1867-1947.Table I . Fishery product Value, dollars Fishery product Value, dollars Salmon 1,413,635,807 Whalebone 1,16 3 2 ,597 Halibut 58,478,475 Whale oil 1,293,385 Cod 12,376,630 Fertilizer and
fish meal12,228,848 Herring 28,372,898 Oil 28,683,014 Shellfish 16,723,733 Miscellaneous 24,147,882 Total 1,597,103,269
From 1910, when the Government assumed direct operations in the Pribilof
Islands, to 1947, the number of seals in the herd increased from about 130,000
to more than 3,600,000. In the same period the take of sealskins increased
from 12,964 (it dropped to 3,191, in 1912, and continued low for a number of
years) to 61,447. In 1948, there were approximately 3,837,000 animals in the
herd and 70,142 skins were taken.The average annual Alaska canned salmon pack, 1896-1947, measured in cases of
48 pounds each, has been: red, 1,542,807; pink, 2,842,002; chum, 783,016;
echo, 220,255; king, 41,207; total, 5,429,289.The canned crab pack, in 1947, was only 10,124 cases of dungeness crab, but
much of the king crab catch was not canned but frozen. In 1948, the sum total
016 | Vol_III-0819
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
of the crab catch (including canned, cold-packed, frozen, and fresh) was
875,079 pounds, valued at $977,810. Of the total weight, 572,107 pounds
were king crabs, valued at $684,260. The figures for the 1948 catch repre–
sent an increase of 61% in volume and 97% in value over the preceding year.The cured herring pack, in 1947, was 8,351 full barrels (250 pounds
each); the codfish catch was 240,424 fish. The halibut landed in Alaskan
ports aggregated 24,429,000 pounds. Mild cured salmon amounted to 5,825
tierces of kings and 94 tierces of silvers (a tierce equals 825 pounds).The 1947 frozen fish packed in Alaskan plants aggregated 32,110,661
pounds. The canned clam pack was 19,393 cases (48 half-pound cans to the
case).The 1947 yield of fish oil was 3,779,675 gallons and of fish meal 14,232
tons.
017 | Vol_III-0820
EA-Zoo. Allen: Fisheries in Alaska
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. “Alaskan Crabs Prove Bonanza for Fisherman,” N.Y. Herald Tribune, Sept. 3,
1950, p.30.2. Andrews, C.L. The Story of Alaska . Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton, 1938.
3. Bancroft, H.H. History of Alaska . San Francisco, Bancroft, 1886. His
Works vol. 33.4. Cobb, J.N. Pacific Salmon Fisheries . 3d ed. Wash., G.P.O., 1921.
U.S. Bur. of Fisheries. Doc . no.902.5. Corbett, P.E. The Settlement of Canadian-American Disputes . New Haven,
Conn., Yale Univ. Press, 1937.6. Farrar, J.V. The Annexation of Russian America to the United States . Wash., Roberts, 1937.
7. Gregory, H.E., and Barnes, Kathleen. North Pacific Fisheries . N.Y.,
Institute of Pacific Relations, 1939. American Council
of the Pacific. Studies no.3.8. Pacific Fisherman Year Book , 1948. Seattle, Wash., Freeman, 1948.
Edward W. Allen
Maritime Fishing in Canada (excluding Labrador)
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0821
(EA-Zoo. M ax . J. Dunbar)
MARITIME FISHING IN CANADA (EXCLUDING LABRADOR)
CONTENTS
Page Western Arctic 3 Eastern Arctic 5 Commercial Fishing 8 Future Possibilities 12 Bibliography 14
001 | Vol_III-0822
EA-Zoology
(Max J. Dunbar)
MARITIME FISHING IN CANADA (EXCLUDING LABRADOR)
This article discusses maritime and tidal fishing only; it does not
cover the river and lake fishing by Eskimo, Indians, or others for such fish
as the lake trout, whitefish, or arctic char. The last-mentioned species is
also caught in salt and brackish tidal waters, as will appear below. “Fisheries”
in the broadest sense sometimes include whaling and sealing, but in this article the
subject matter is restricted to fish. Finally, the considerable development
of maritime fisheries in Labrador waters is left for a special article, as the
importance of that fishery warrants; Labrador is the only region in arctic or
subarctic Canada in which commercial fishing has yet been developed on a con–
siderable scale.The Eskimo is by the habit of his forefathers a hunter, not a fisherman.
Hunting implements play a much larger part in the Eskimo technology than does
fishing gear, and by the state of development of the fishing implements in the
Eskimo armament s , the minor role which fishing plays in the Eskimo life can be
judged. The fish ap s pear is an ingenious weapon, developed also among other
primitive peoples in other parts of the world. But it is the only important
fishing tool that the Eskimos have developed. Gill nets are used today for
char, and for Atlantic salmon, whitefish, and lake trout in restricted areas,
and hand lines are used with jigs or baited hooks to a small extent. Along the
002 | Vol_III-0823
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
Western Arctic coast, fishing is of some importance. But even including the
winter fishing on lakes, common enough among Eskimos, the total fishing effort
is not great in northern Canada, and nothing approaching the development of
maritime fishing of the native population of Greenland exists among the Cana–
dian Eskimos at present (1950).The reasons for this are not far to seek, although as yet imperfectly
understood. Polar water, originating in the upper layers of the polar basin,
is cold and, although of great potential productivity, fails to realize its
possibilities of production of life because of its low temperature, which slows
down all growth rates. On mixing with temperature water (Atlantic or Pacific),
however, this inhibition is apparently removed, and the production of life surges
up to values which are probably higher than anywhere else in the oceans. This
is as yet an inductive conclusion only, and still has to be supported by more
empirical evidence; it is the hypothesis which at present best fits the findings.
For a more detailed discussion, see “Plankton of Arctic and Subarctic Seas.”West Greenland is an area in which Atlantic water appears in large quanti–
ties, mixed with polar water from the East Greenland Current, and it is there
that the present fishery developments among Eskimo people are taking place.
Arctic and subarctic Canada, on the other hand, are endowed with much smaller
quantities of nonarctic water, and the production of life, including fish, is
not so great. In continental North American waters, the areas of mixing lie
farther south, notably around Newfoundland — consequently, it is there that
the fisheries are found.Nevertheless, there are regions in northern Canada where invasion of
nonarctic water occurs, and in which are found useful marine fish. There are
also examples of predominantly freshwater fish which are also found and fished,
003 | Vol_III-0824
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
to some extent, in brackish and salt waters. Finally, there is the ubiquitous
arctic char which invades the streams of arctic Canada annually to spawn.Western Arctic
There is a limited amount of information on fishing by Eskimos and whites
to be found in Canadian Government publications, such as Canada’s Western North –
land and Keewatin and Northeastern Mackenzie (4). The only comparatively recent
study is that sponsored by the Fisheries Research Board in the Mackenzie Valley in
1944 (15). This study, however, although including the delta area, did not
extend out into the truly marine waters.The arctic char ( Salvelinus alpinus ) is taken at several places along the
northwest coast, as at Herschel Island, west of the Mackenzie Delta. Little is
known of the biology of this form in the Western Arctic, but the matter is con–
sidered again below in the description of Eastern Arctic fisheries. Other
fishes caught sporadically in the sea, at the mouths of rivers in the northwest,
are the inconnu ( Stenodus mackenzii ), a Siberian immigrant to Canada, and the
tullibee or lake herring ( Leucichthys ) species). Neither can be said to be of
any great importance in salt waters.The traditional lack of marine fishery development among the Eskimos is
well illustrated by comparatively recent finds in the Western Arctic, concerning
the Pacific (or Californi s a ) herring ( Clupea pallasii Clupea pallasii ), the arctic smelt
( Osmerus dentex ), and the starry flounder ( Platichthys stellatus ), (1) another
Pacific form. These were recorded by Anderson (1), during the Canadian Arctic
Expedition of 1908-12, and it is apparent that they were not used by the native
population at all. The Pacific herring was so abundant that about 13 barrels,
amounting to some 3,000 fish, were captured in a single sweep of a 200-foot
seine net. No commercial use is as yet made of these fish. They are evidence
004 | Vol_III-0825
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
of probable Pacific influence in the hydrography of the Western Arctic.According to Anderson, fishing plays a more important part in Eskimo life
in the Western Arctic than it does in the Eastern, but little of it is strictly
marine. The following quotations are from Anderson’s article on fishes in
Stefansson’s My Life with the Eskimo (1):“Fish play probably a more important part than anything else in the
domestic economy of the Eskimo of the western Arctic coast. The list of food
fishes is not large, but the number of individuals is so great that a family
supplied with a gill-net or two can travel in summer along practically the
whole Arctic coast, and be reasonably sure of catching enough fish for them–
selves and dogs at nearly every camping-place. When all the food required for
a family can be obtained by merely putting out a fish-net every night and clear–
ing it every morning, making a living is not a difficult matter. The Mackenzie
delta is preëminently a fish country, fish being the staple food throughout
the year - fresh in summer, and usually in a tainted or semi-putrid state in
winter. Fish taken early in the fall are stored away in caches, and generally
become more or less tainted before they freeze. The tainted fish are always
eaten raw and frozen. As usual where game and fish are very easy to obtain in
season, the natives generally underestimate their needs for the winter, and
have a period of shortage in the early spring.“West of Franklin Bay the common method of fishing is by gill-nets, set
along the shore or across the mouths of rivers and creeks, rigged with sinkers
and floats, and set from a kayak or shoved out into the water with a very long
pole made of driftwood sticks spliced together. In winter the usual method is
by ‘jigging’ through holes in the ice with barbless hooks of bone, ivory, or
silver, though sometimes nets are set under the ice.”Anderson goes on to say that east of Dolphin and Union Strait the Eskimos
005 | Vol_III-0826
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
do not fish as much as farther west. Anderson’s observations come from the
first decade of the twentieth century, and may now be considered to be partly
of historical interest. Equipment at least has improved, and it is possible
that Anderson has somewhat underestimated the importance of seal hunting in
this area.From Anderson’s discoveries, however, it is clear that the maritime waters
of the Northwest offer possibilities of fishery development which have hitherto
not even been estimated. The Eskimos of this region acknowledge that until the
coming of the white man the Pacific herring and the flounder were never fished
by the native, in fact were unknown, and they have even suggested that the white
man brought both fish with them.Eastern Arctic
In the Canadian Eastern Arctic, as in the Western, the arctic char
( Salvelinus alpinus ) is the most important economic fish. Manning (13) records
that “the arctic char...[is] the only fish of importance to the Eskimo” of northwest
Hudson Bay and southwest Baffin Island. This is true, in fact, of most of the
Eastern Arctic. The char is, for the most part, a migrant form, moving up into
the rivers and lakes in the summer, spawning in the fall, and returning to the
sea in the early spring. Some individuals appear to remain in fresh water all
their lives. For a summary of our present knowledge of the biology of this
interesting fish, see Dunbar and Grainger (6).The arctic char is fished extensively during the winter, through the ice in
the lakes, and in summertime it is commonly caught in gill nets along the shore,
and in the rivers during the upstream migration. The nets are most frequently
laid in tidal waters, the inner end of the net being above low watermark.
Sometimes, as in Ungav e a Bay, the whole net is laid above low watermark, so that
006 | Vol_III-0827
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
it can simply be visited at each ebb tide and the fish removed. The arctic
char is very widespread in the arctic and subarctic regions; it is fished by
Eskimos in all parts of its range, and the production of this fishery is
considerable.The Atlantic salmon ( Salmo salar ) extends some small distance into our range.
It is common in the rivers of Ungava Bay, from the Koksoak eastward (Whale River,
George River, etc.). It is not known west of the Koksoak, except for occasional
strays in Leaf Bay and Leaf River, but within its Ungava Bay range it is of
significant importance in the Eskimo economy. The Ungava Bay salmon fishery,
restricted almost entirely to the tidal stretches of the Koksoak, Whale and
George rivers, has recently been studied by the Fisheries Research Board of
Canada as part of a general survey of the Eastern Arctic marine resources.Lucien Turner, who stayed at Fort Chimo between 1882 and 1884, reported
that the largest Atlantic salmon he saw there weighed 44 pounds, and that the
averagelay between 14 and 19 pounds (14). The salmon are fished with gill nets
during the annual upstream migration, approximately from the third week in
July to the end of August. The salmon run is very variable. Turner found
that the run showed two peaks within this period, the first run being composed
of the larger fish. In 1947, the greatest run occurred in the first three
weeks of August. In 1948, according to Hildebrand (unpublished data), there
was an almost complete failure of the salmon run in both the Koksoak and the
George rivers. There was an early run from July 25 to the end of the month
followed by a blank month of August when only the occasional salmon was caught.
The reasons for this great variation in the salmon runs are not known. Sometimes,
as happened in 1948, there is a late run in September, never in large numbers.
This unreliability of the salmon fishery in Ungava Bay is a source of considerable
007 | Vol_III-0828
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
concern to the native population; for the salmon are used not only for immediate
human consumption but also for the all-important dog feed in the winter, the
fish being stored in drums and allowed to become tainted and finally frozen.
The present catch probably varies between 12 and 40 barrels for the Koksoak
River alone.Other species figure only slightly in Eskimo fishing in the Eastern Arctic
of Canada, and are caught sporadically and in a casual manner when there is
nothing better to do, or when other resources fail seriously. Such are the
sculpins, especially the common daddy sculpin, Myoxocephalus scorpius , which
can be caught very easily by hook and line, or by jigger, in shallow water
during the summer. In spite of their unprepossessing appearance, sculpins are
good to eat, although small.In waters entirely or mainly polar in origin, such as Hudson Bay and the
waters of northern Baffin Island, the polar cod, Boreogadus saida , is caught in
the same way, and the Greenland cod, Gadus ogac , may be caught anywhere in
Arctic Canada west to Bathurst Inlet, butnever in large quantities. None of
these fish amounts to any importance in the Eskimo economy of Canada.In the neighborhood of Port Burwell, in Ungava Bay, the Atlantic cod,
Gadus callarias, occurs in great abundance in August and September, and is
occasionally caught by the few Eskimos now living at that almost deserted
settlement (see “Future Possibilities,” p.000). Atlantic cod are also reported
from Resolution Island, where they are caught in August by the personnel of the
radio station. Precise identification of these fish at Resolution Island has
not yet been made.
008 | Vol_III-0829
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
Commercial Fishing
No commercial maritime fishing is carried on, or ever has been carried
on, is the Western Arctic of Canada, and very little in the Eastern Arctic.
The Atlantic salmon of Ungava Bay is the only marine fish which has been
exploited commercially within our present area (Canadian Arctic and Subarctic,
excluding Labrador) for a sustained and continuous period. The full records
of the Hudson’s Bay Company which operated the fishery mainly on the Koksoak
River have not been available to the writer, and the statistics given here
are compiled from various sources and are not complete.The salmon fishery apparently began in 1881, and when Luci a e n Turner ✓
visited Fort Chimo in 1882, it was in full swing. In a manuscript account
deposited in the Smithsonian Institution and here quoted through the good
offices of that organization, Turner describes the method of fishing developed
on the Koksoak, involving the use of gill nets of six and six-and-a-half-inch
mesh n s et at some ten fishing stations between Chimo and the sea. During the ✓
first four years of the fishery a small refrigerator ship, the Diana , equipped
with a dry air freezing plant and able to store about fifty tons of fish, was
used to take the salmon to England. Later it was found cheaper and more
profitable to salt the salmon for transportation. The catch for the first
four years, according to Turner, is given in Table I.Table I. Salmon Catch on the Koksoak River from 1881-84. Year Approxmate tonnage Average weight, lb. 1881 40 19 1882 24 16 1883 38 14.5 1884 less than 40 14.7
009 | Vol_III-0830
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
The output of the fishery varied not simply because the abundance of
fish varied, but because the number of men working was not constant, nor the
number of fishing stations operated. The fishery was never large, and grew
consistently smaller as the years went by. It will be noticed that in the
first four years the average weight of the fish dropped considerably, which
is a bad sign for the future prosperity of any fishery.In 1884, similar fisheries were opened on the George and Whale R r ivers. —
In 1896, Low wrote that the salmon catch averaged 100 tierces (one tierce
equals 300 lb.) on the Koksoak, 50 tierces on the Whale River, and 120 tierces
on the George. The take from the Koksoak was thus already down considerably
since the beginning of operations. Four years later, Low (12) reported that
the salmon fishery had steadily declined and that, in 1897, it had been almost
a total failure. From the scattered records available for later years, it is
apparent that the output continued to decline, and the fishery was finally
given up in the early 1930’s.Interest in the Hudson Bay trade route and in the possibility of developing
the Hudson Bay area generally, in connection with the proposed shipping expansion,
prompted the investigation of the resources of Hudson Bay. Huntsman (9) has
reviewed these efforts, which culminated in the fisheries expedition to Hudson
bay in 1930. Quoting from Huntsman’s paper: “Pennant wrote in 1784 concerning
Hudson bay — ‘the Company have attempted to establish a fishery; and for that
purpose procured experienced people from the Spitsbergen ships, and made con–
siderable trials between lat. 61 and 69; but after expending twenty thousand
pounds, and taking only three fish, were, in 1771, obliged to desist.’ “In the twentieth century several one-man expeditions have made marine
studies in Hudson Bay, connected, more or less, with the possibility of fishery
010 | Vol_III-0831
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
development. In 1930, however, the problem was tackled on a reasonably large
scale by the Fisheries Research Board (then the Biological Board) of Canada,
which chartered a trawler, the Loubyrne , with H. B. Hachey as officer-in-charge.
This expedition resulted in an increase in our knowledge of the fauna of Hudson
Bay, both vertebrate and invertebrate, and also in the first information obtained
on the physical oceanography of Hudson Bay and Hudson Strait. It also showed
that Hudson Bay was entirely unsuitable for the development of fisheries. In
the words of Hachey (8), “The expedition travelled a total distance of about
eight thousand nautical miles. Of this amount three thousand and one hundred
miles were covered in occupying the various stations for [ ?] the purpose of the
investigation... Hand lines were used at several points for seven hours and
fifteen minutes [in all]. Drift nets were used for twelve hours. Long lines
were used for two hours and fifty-five minutes, and trawling operations were
carried on for fifty-seven hours and fifty minutes. As a result of the total
work covering the whole of Hudson bay not a single commercial fish was taken.”This repeats, in fact, on a more scientific basis, the experience of the
Hudson’s Bay Company in the eighteenth century. Huntsman (9) has reversed the
normal approach and inquired whether we know of any reasons why Hudson Bay should
have rich fisheries. He points out (as has been already mentioned) that the
areas of great commercial fishery development are exceptional, and that in
comparison to them most of the world’s waters are barren. The regions where
polar and nonpolar water mix are unstable, the vertical interchange of water
is great, and, hence, the surface layers are constantly being replenished with
nutrient salts. The blossoming of phytoplankton in such areas is quite
exceptional. In great contrast to the hydrographic conditions found in these
mixing centers, the waters of Hudson Bay, as has been shown by the 1930 expedition (7),
011 | Vol_III-0832
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
are highly stratified and, therefore, highly stable. Hudson Bay is in fact a
great estuarine area, receiving vast quantities of fresh water from land drain–
age. The upper fifty meters are thus strongly stratified and greatly reduce
the possibility of vertical interchange. Consequently, the biological pro–
duction of Hudson Bay is small. Moreover, the temperatures found in the deeper
water are such as to slow down growth rates very seriously. Temperatures of
−2° C. were recorded at some stations, a temperature which is below the freezing
point of the body fluids of most fishes. The 1930 expedition demonstrated not
only that Hudson Bay offered no possibility of commercial fisheries, but also
showed why it could not.As one leaves Hudson Bay and approaches the Atlantic, however, the possi–
bilities of fishing increase. There is some evidence that the Atlantic influence
in Hudson Strait and even in Hudson Bay may have been increasing in recent years,
following the similar development in West Greenland (2). It is not inconceivable,
therefore, that the Atlantic cod may increase its range in these parts, as it has
done in Greenland. In the meantime, the Atlantic cod at Port Burwell are almost
the only known fish which offer such possibilities at present (1950). From late
July until the end of September at least, fishing schooners could operate out of
Port Burwell with advantage.Certain small commercial undertakings have been made in Eastern Arctic
waters in very recent years. In 1947, and again in 1948, one company obtained
a license to fish for arctic char in Frobisher Bay, southeast Baffin Island.
And in 1948, a Norwegian vessel is reported to have taken some 800 Greenland
shark, ( Somniosus microcephalus ), in the northern part of Baffin Bay. The
arctic char enterprise used gill nets in salt water [ ?] at the mouth of a river,
and caught only 7,700 fish in 1948, hardly enough to repay expenses. It is
012 | Vol_III-0833
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
doubtful, anyway, whether the char is a fish which can stand a steady commer–
cial take without serious damage to its population — and hence to the Eskimo
economy.Future Possibilities
In 1947, the Fisheries Board of Canada inaugurated a long-term study of
the waters of the Canadian Eastern Arctic intended ( 1 ) to elucidate the
general oceanography, both physical and biological, and ( 2 ) to discover any
possible marine resource which could be developed by the Eskimo population in
their own interests. After the first year of reconnaissance in Ungava Bay, a
special research vessel, the Canadian Government motor vessel (C. G. M. V.)
Calanus, was built and sailed into winter quarters at Fort Chimo. Up to the
present (1950), only the waters of Ungava Bay have been studied, but the in–
vestigations are planned to cover Hudson Strait and the waters of south and
east Baffin Island in the coming years.These studies have shown that the Atlantic cod at Burwell, and the Greenland
shark, both offer real possibilities of development, within the Eskimo economy,
and could also be exploited, in a small and strictly controlled manner, commer–
cially. The young of the Greenland halibut ( Reinhardtius hippoglossoides )
has also been found to be common at Port Burwell, but the adult fish have not
yet been caught. Long lines generally have been found to be unsatisfactory,
even for cod, and Ungava Bay does not offer good bottoms for otter trawling.
Hand lines, and long lines laid in special ways for shark, are the best means
of fishing, according to the present results of the investigation.The Greenland shark has been fished in Greenland since the early years of
the nineteenth century, but has never been attempted by the Canadian Eskimos,
although it appears to be abundant in Canadian northern waters and is easy to catch.
013 | Vol_III-0834
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
The Eskimos are either frightened of it or scorn it as a useless animal.
It has been found in Greenland, however, to be very valuable. The meat, if
eaten fresh, is toxic, owing to some ammoniacal substance which is little
understood but which may have something to do with the method of excretion and
adjustment of water balance which this particular shark has developed. When
dried, however, and mixed with a little seal or fish oil, the meat makes very
good dog feed, and is also not infrequently eaten by the Greenlanders if necessary.
The lvi liver is very large and contains about 60% oil; it is fairly rich in
vitamin A. The skin can be processed to an excellent and hard-wearing leather,
and, if the epidermal layer is removed, a fine, soft chamois-type leather can
be made.The discovery of marine resources which the Eskimo can use, however, is
only a small part of the problem of introducing marine fisheries into Ungava Bay
or other parts of the Canadian North. The establishment of the fishing habit in
the Eskimo is a much more difficult and much longer task. In West Greenland,
the process took a generation, and there is no reason to suppose that it will
take a shorter time in Canada. Moreover, the potentialities for marine fishery
development in northern Canada are not at all comparable to those of West Green–
land, and cannot be so unless the encroachment of the Atlantic water, which has
now spread up the West Greenland coast, increases to such proportions as to
make the waters of Arctic Canada, or a large part of them, into another area
of mixing of arctic and Atlantic water, in proportions similar to the condition
of West Greenland. For a summary of the important hydrographic changes which
have been occurring during the past thirty years in West Greenland, see Jensen (10)
and Dunbar (5). This situation is most unlikely to occur in [ ?] Arctic Canada
in the for e seeable future.
014 | Vol_III-0835
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Anderson, R.M. “Fishers,” Stefansson, Vilhjalmur. My Life with the
Eskimo . N.Y., Macmillan, 1913, pp.450-55.2. Bailey, W.B., and Hachey, H.B. An Increased Atlantic Influence in
Hudson Bay. St. Andrews, N.B., Joint Committee on
Oceanography, 1949. Mimeographed.3. Bethune, W.C., ed. Canada’s Western Northland . Ottawa, Patenaude,
1937.4. Blanchet, G.H. Keswatin and Northeastern Mackenzie . Ottawa, Acland,
1930.5. Dunbar, M.J. “The state of the west Greenland current up to 1944,”
Canada. Fisheries Res.Brd. J . vol.6, no.7, pp.460-71.6. ----, and Grainger, E.H. The Arctic Char (Salvelinus alpinus The Arctic Char (Salvelinus alpinus
Linnaeus) with Special Reference to Frobisher Bay Linnaeus) with Special Reference to Frobisher Bay
1948 1948 . Canada. Fisheries Res.Brd. Bull Bull . In press.7. Hachey, H.B. “Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson Bay.
6. The general hydrography and hydrodynamics of the
water of the Hudson Bay region,” Contr.Canad.Biol.& Fish Contr.Canad.Biol.& Fish .,
n.s., vol.7, no.9, pp.91-118, 1931.8. ----. “Report on the Hudson Bay fisheries expedition of 1930. A.
Open water investigations with the S.S. Loubyrne,”
Ibid . vol.6, no.23, pp.465-71, 1931.9. Huntsman, A. B G . “Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson Bay. ✓
I. Hudson Bay and the determination of fisheries,” Ibid Ibid . vol.6, ✓
no.22, pp.457-62, 1931.10. Jensen, A.S. “Concerning a change of climate during recent decades in
the arctic and subarctic, from Greenland in the west to
Eurasia in the east, and contemporary biological and
geophysical changes,” Denske Vide sn ns k.Selsk. Biologiske ✓
Medd . vol.14, no.8, pp.1-75, 1939.11. Low, A.P. “Report on expl l o ration in Labrador Peninsula along the ✓
East Main, Koksoak, Hamilton, Manicuagin and portions
of other rivers in 1892-3-4 and 5,” Can.Geol.Surv. Ann.Rep Ann.Rep . 1895,
n.s., vol.8, L I . ✓
015 | Vol_III-0836
EA-Zoo. Dunbar: Maritime Fishing in Canada
12. ----. “Report on the exploration of the south shore of the Hudson
Strait and Ungava Bay,” Ibid . 1898, n.s., vol.10,
L.13. Manning, T.H. “Hunting implements and methods of the present-day
Eskimos of north-west Hudson Bay, Melville Peninsula,
and south-west Baffin Island,” Geogr.J . vol.103, no.4,
pp.137-52, 1944.14. Turner, L.M. Manuscript on the Fishes of the Labrador Peninsula .
Deposited in the Smithsonian Institution, Washington,
D.C., 1885.15. Wynne-Edwards, V.C. “The Mackenzie River,” Canada. Fisheries Res.Brd.
Bull . no.72, pp.21-30, 1947.Max M. J. Dunbar
Greenland Fisheries
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0837
(EA-Zoo. Poul M. Hansen)
GREENLAND FISHERIES
CONTENTS
Page Part 1: Fisheries of the Greenlanders 1 Introduction 1 The Greenland Halibut Fishery 3 The Halibut Fishery 4 The Shark Fishery 4 The Char Fishery 5 The Prawn Fishery 5 The Catfish Fishery 6 The Cod Fishery 6 Part 2: Fisheries of Foreign Nations 10 The Halibut Fishery 10 The Cod Fishery 13 Bibliography 17
001 | Vol_III-0838
EA-Zoology
(Poul M. Hansen)
GREENLAND FISHERIES
PART 1: FISHERIES OF THE GREENLANDERS
Introduction
When the Eskimos about a thousand years ago emigrated to Greenland from
Arctic North America, they had very little experience in sea fishing. Moving
south along the coast of West Greenland they came to regions abounding with
many species of fishes, and they gradually invented gear which enabled them
to exploit these occurrences. Hooks were made of bone, and lines of baleen
and sealskin. Equipment for fishing capelin were made from sinew thread, and
spears with wooden handles and bone points were used for trout fishing. With
the arrival of European ships to in Greenland, the natives acquired materials for
the manufacture of less primitive gear. Twine was used instead of baleen and
iron replaced bone as material for hooks. With such implements the Greenlanders
were able to fish in deeper waters and make bigger catches.Originally the Greenlanders fished only from kayaks, but eventually wooden
boats became common and nowadays kayaks are used only in regions where the
population is backward as far as fishery is concerned. In recent years motor–
boats have become increasingly popular for cod, halibut, and Greenland shark
fishing.
002 | Vol_III-0839
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
In former times, fish was used only for home consumption. Except for
shark liver for train oil, which in rather early times (1805) was the object
of trade, the Greenland Administration did not buy fish from natives. The
cod fishery carried on by the Danes in the years 1847-51 did not encourage
the Government to continue, as only the first two years gave satisfactory
results. In 1851 the fishery was stopped because the cod were too scarce.Seal hunting was formerly the main industry of the Greenlanders, and
those who engaged in fishing were despised by their countrymen. The reason
for this disdain was that fishing could be carried out by women, children, and
disabled men, while seal hunting, it was claimed, required the full mental and
physical strength of its participants. This point of view has now changed.Investigation of the stock of fish in Greenland waters and the possibility
of utilizing its occurrence were not undertaken until 1906. That year two
Faeroese cutters carried on experimental fisheries, instigated by the Greenland
Administration. The results of these experiments were negative because in that
period cod were extremely scarce in Greenland waters. In 1908-1909 practical
scientific fishery investigations were carried on from the brig Tjalfe under
the leadership of Professor Adolf S. Jensen. These investigations gave rise
to establishment of fisheries stations and the commencement of rational
fisheries for cod, halibut, and Greenland halibut in South Greenland. The
results of the Tjalfe expedition laid the foundation of the important fishery
which is being carried on by the Greenlanders today. The experiences gained
from these experiments made possible a rapid development of the cod fishery
when the cod appeared in Greenland waters in great numbers in the 1920’s.
Now the cod fishery is the chief industry in South Greenland and the southern
part of North Greenland, while the old national industry, seal hunting, has
003 | Vol_III-0840
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
decreased greatly with the decrease in the number of seals.Of approximately one hundred different species of fishes which occur in
Greenland waters, only a few are fished for home consumption or export. Fishes
used only for home consumption are the fjord cod ( Gadus ogac ), the Norway
haddock ( Sebastes marinus (“ S.nor g v egicus )), the sea scorpion ( Myox o cephalus ✓
scorpius ), the capelin ( Mallotus villosus ), the long rough dab ( Hippoglossoides
platessoides ), the lumpsucker ( Cyclopterus lumpus ), and the polar cod ( Boreogadus
saida ). The capelin is of especially great significance. Large numbers of this
small fish are dried on the rocks and used in the winter for human consumption
and for dog feed.The species of fishes which the Greenland Administration buys and processes
for export are the Greenland halibut ( Reinhardtius hippoglossoides ), the halibut
(Hippoglossus hippoglossus) , the Greenland shark ( Somniosus microcephalus ),
the char ( Salvelinus alpinus ), and the cod ( Gadus callarias ). In addition, a
fishery for deep-sea prawns ( Pandalus borealis ) has been carried on in Amerdlok
Fjord at Holsteinsborg since 1935.The Greenland Halibut Fishery
The Greenland halibut is taken on long lines in deep water in the neighbor–
hood of Jakobshavn in North Greenland. In South Greenland it was caught in some
fjords in the Julianehaab District from 1910 onward, but, with the increasing
temperature of the sea water in the middle of the 1920’s, the stock of halibut
decreased to such a degree that the fishery was stopped. In Ja c k obshavn, where ✓
the fishery has been carried on since 1904, the catch is filleted [ ?] and
salted in barrels for export. The product is sold in smoked condition on the
Danish market. In winter many Greenland halibut are taken through holes in the
004 | Vol_III-0841
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
ice in the Ja c k obshavn Ice Fjord. The catch is transported on dog sledges to ✓
the Settlement, where it is cut in long pieces and dried in special houses.
The final product is not exported but sold in Greenland.The Halibut Fishery
Fishing for halibut took place at Holsteinsborg and the settlement of
Kangamiut from 1910 to about 1935. The fishery was carried on from motorboats
with long lines on the offshore banks in Davis Strait. In the first years the
product was salted in barrels; in 1924, a cannery was built at Holsteinsborg.
The production of canned halibut reached its maximum in the years 1927-29,
with about 124 tons a year. Then a sudden decrease occurred owing to the fact
that the halibut stock was depleted by the great fisheries expeditions sent out
from England and Norway. The foreign fishermen fished the halibut on the off–
shore banks and in the deep sea in Davis Strait and Baffin Bay. Within a few
years the halibut stock was so diminished that the fishery would not pay even
with modern equipment.The Shark Fishery
The Greenland shark is common in deep water in the fjords, along the
coast, and in the deep sea outside the fishing banks of the west coast as well
as the east coast of Greenland. Fishing has been carried on by the Greenlanders
since the beginning of the nineteenth century. During recent years (late 1940’s),
shark fishing has been pursued to some extent at Angmagssalik, on the east coast
of Greenland. In North Greenland, sharks are fished in the wintertime through
holes in the ice; in the summer, they are fished from small wooden boats, and
even from kayaks, with thin lines carrying a big hook baited with seal blubber.
Long lines with several hooks are now generally used for shark fishing.
005 | Vol_III-0842
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
The shark liver was used for the manufacture of train oil, which was
an important Greenland product. Nowadays, shark liver is salted in barrels
and sent to Denmark, where the oil is extracted in a factory in Copenhagen.
About 600 to 900 tons of salted shark liver is produced per year. North
Greenland produces, by far, the largest quantity of shark liver, but the
production in South Greenland has been simultaneously increasing on a rela–
tively larger scale. Sharkskin salted and sent to Denmark in barrels, is used for the manufacture of leather; shark
meat is dried and used for dog feed, for when fresh, the meat is poisonous to dogs.The Char Fishery
The char occur along the entire Greenland coast and are fished for home
consumption in all parts of the country. Only in the districts of Holsteinsborg,
Sukkertoppen, and Godthaab is char fishing carried on for export. It is fished
with nets in July and August when the char gathers at the mouth of the rivers.
The fish are cleaned and salted in barrels at the fishing places. An experiment
with canning char at one of the largest rivers in Godthaab District failed as
the stock decreased to a minimum after only two years of fishing. The yearly
production fluctuates from about 200 to 800 barrels; hence, the char fishery
is of minor importance.The Prawn Fishery
The various fisheries expeditions with the ships Tjalfe, Dana, and Godthaab
have proved that large amounts of deep-sea prawns occur in Greenland waters.
When the stock of halibut diminished owing to overfishing by the foreign expe–
ditions, the production of the cannery at Holsteinsborg had to be changed.
Fortunately a rich supply of deep-sea prawns was found in the neighboring
Amerdlok Fjord, and prawns are now canned instead of halibut. Fishing with
prawn trawl and the production of canned prawns began in 1935.
006 | Vol_III-0843
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
In addition to the five motorboats which were formerly used for fishing
halibut and which belong to the Greenland Administration, a few motorboats
belonging to Greenlanders are participating in the prawn fishery. The prawns
are fished at depths of about 300 to 400 meters. In the years immediately
following World War II, the new research ship Adolf Jensen discovered large trawling
grounds for prawns in the Juli e a nehaab District. A cannery has been planned for ✓
the settlement of Narssak in Skovfjord, but, owing to the difficulties of
getting materials, production cannot be started until 1950-51.The Catfish Fishery
In 1938, some of the catch of this fish began to be exported for use in
the manufacture of ladies’ shoes, bags, etc., for, when properly dressed,
catfish skins form a beautiful leather.Only in a few places is the catfish fishery of any significance; the
Greenlanders are more interested in the cod fishery.The Cod Fishery
The cod fishery is by far the most important fishery for the population
in South Greenland and in the southern part of North Greenland. As mentioned
previously, the cod has been periodic in its occurrence. In the nineteenth
century, there were two good periods, one in the twenties and another at the
end of the forties. Since about the mid-1920’s, there has been an abundance of
cod along the whole west coast up to the Umanak District in the north and on
the offshore banks.The cod first appeared about 1917, in the Julianehaab District, moving
northward in the following years. In 1922, it appeared in the Sukkertoppen
District; [ ?] in 1928, it reached
007 | Vol_III-0844
EA-Zoo. Hansen:Greenland Fisheries
Hound Islands (Hunde Ejland) in the Egedesminde District; and, in 1931, there
were cod as far north as Disko Bay and in the Umanak District. Since the end
of the 1930’s, a few cod have been taken even at Upernivik. The abundance of
cod in the Greenland waters is a result of the considerable change in the
natural conditions, temperature, and marine currents which have taken place
from the beginning of the 1920’s. Owing to the warmer conditions in the sea,
several marine forms previously with a southern distribution have extended
their area northward in Greenland waters, while more arctic forms have retreated
farther north. This change in occurrence applies to the invertebrates as well
as to fish and marine mammals. The warm period has now lasted for more than
twenty-five years and there is still no indication that it is about to end.
As the cod fishery gradually developed, the Greenland Administration set up
more and more stations along the coast for the manufacture of salted cod. In
1939, there were 115 fisheries stations in all: 75 in South Greenland and 40 in
North Greenland. During and after World War II, new and spacious fish houses
have been built and several of the old ones have been greatly enlarged.From a small beginning the fishery suddenly increased in the mid-1920’s,
reaching a peak in 1930, with a yield of more than 8,000 tons. The following
years the yield varied somewhat. It was very low in 1938, which was an unusually
cold year with stormy weather and much ice, which greatly interfered with the
fishery. In 1939, the yield was again normal. During the war the output of
the cod fishery was very large. In 1942, it exceeded 10,000 tons, and, in
1946, it reached 13,000 tons (fresh weight).The cod is mostly fished from small wooden boats (dories), but small
motorboats are now being used in increasing numbers by the Greenlanders. An
over-all picture of this development is given is Tables I and II.
008 | Vol_III-0845
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
Table I. Number of Boats Used in Various Years. Year Number of boats Number of motorboats 1920 387 0 1925 558 1 1930 1,157 12 1935 1,469 37 1939 1,509 73
Table II. Power of Motorboats Used in 1939. Number of Motorboats Horsepower of engines 22 2 1/2 34 3-5 9 6-10 3 11-20 5 21-30
The Greenlanders’ demand for motorboats has grown since the war, but the
postwar conditions in Denmark and lack of material for boat building have made
it difficult to satisfy this just demand. As already mentioned, long lines have
in increasing degree replaced the more primitive jig for fishing cod. The cod
is sold by the natives to the fisheries adviser, who supervises the preparation
of the salted cod at the fishery station. When finished the product is packed
and sent to Denmark and exported from there. The salted cod is finely cured
and has the best reputation on the world market, where it always commands the
highest price.BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS
Since 1924, biological investigations, especially of the cod, have been
carried on in Greenland waters, and many of the problems concerning the biology
009 | Vol_III-0846
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
of the cod have been clarified. Marking experiments have shown that the
Greenland stock of cod, especially from the southern part of Greenland, is
closely connected with Iceland, the spawning place d s being on the south and ✓
west coast of the latter island. The fry is carried with the currents to
Greenland, where, on the southwest coast, large numbers of the small cod grow
up. The Greenland stock of cod has no connection with Newfoundland, however.
Fluctuations of the year-classes are more pronounced in the Greenland stock of
cod than in any other region where cod occurs. During the period 1924-47 the
following eight rich year-classes have been dominant in the catches: 1917, 1922,
1924, 1926, 1931, 1932, 1934, and 1936, So far the 1922 class has been of the greatest ✓
importance, but in a few years it will probably be superseded by the 1934 class,
which has been unusually abundant. During the entire war period, the 1934 and
the 1936 classes have been dominant in the catches. In 1947 these year-classes
were 13 and 11 years old, respectively. Among the year-classes younger than
the 1936 class only the 1945 class seems to be rich. None of the younger
year-classes has the same predominance in the stock of cod as the previously
mentioned rich year-classes had in former times. The 1945 class can be expected
to enter the catches for the first time in 1951. According to our experience,
a rich year-class decreases greatly in numbers of individuals when it is as old
as the 1934 year-class is now. It is to be expected that in some of the coming
years a decrement in the stock of cod in Greenland waters will set in, which,
of course, will influence the fishery of the native population as well as that
of the foreign nations in these waters.
010 | Vol_III-0847
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
PART 2: FISHERIES OF FOREIGN NATIONS
Only two species of fish — halibut ( Hippoglossus hippoglossus ) and cod
( Gadus callarias ) — have been the object for fishery in Greenland waters by
others than the native population.The Halibut Fishery
Halibut occur in West Greenland waters, especially along the slopes of
the Lille and Store Hellefiskebanks, in the deep waters of Davis Strait, where
tye they live mainly on large prawns ( Pandalus borealis ). In the summer when the ✓
water temperature rises, the halibut migrate to shallower waters on the banks
and to the coastal waters. This movement must be regarded as a migration in
search of food as halibut, in the shallower waters, feed upon fish, especially
capelin ( Mallotus villosus ) and sand launce ( Ammodytes spp.). In the autumn
when the coastal water turns colder, the halibut are again forced to move back
to the deep waters of Davis Strait, where the bottom water remains warm
throughout the year, and it is here they have their true home. The halibut
fishery has especially been carried on in the summer on the great fishing banks.The first halibut fishery recorded for these waters was by American fishing
schooners in 1866, outside Holstein e s borg. This fishery lasted until the 1890’s ✓
when it was discontinued, owing, it was said, to the heavy duty imposed in the
United States on salted halibut from Greenland. A report on these fisheries
from 1866 to 1881 is given by Newton P. Scudder, who visited the banks in 1879,
on board one of the American schooners. During this time, 31 fishing trips were
made from Gloucester to Davis Strait. The fishery was carried on with long lines
on the banks and the slopes of the banks, and satisfying catches of halibut were
made, while cod were taken “not in sufficient numbers to warrant their being salted.”
011 | Vol_III-0848
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
The proportion between cod and halibut was about 1 to 15.In the first years of the twentieth century until the outbreak of the
First World War, some Canadian vessels fished for halibut in Davis Strait.
In 1914, the Faeroese Jens Andreasen sent two cutters to Greenland for halibut
fishing. The fishery was successful, and the cutters returned with a full hold
of halibut salted in barrels, but the German invasion of Belgium, the principal
market for salted halibut, made the sale of the catch impossible.From the Norwegian side, the halibut fishery began in 1924, when Engvald
Baldersheim equipped an expedition to West Greenland consisting of the two
motor vessels Stormfuglen and Ameta . The chief purpose of the expedition was
halibut fishing; cod fishing was secondary. The halibut catch was very successful,
and, in consequence, Baldersheim, the next summer, sent out the mother ship Oslo
(2,700 tons) and 16 motor vessels; but, owing to various circumstances (one of
reasons being that the weather was unfavorable), the expedition failed of economic
success. In the following years, the Baldersheim firm, financed by the English
company Hellyer Bros., Ltd., purchased a 5,000-ton ship, Helder , specially built
for long-line halibut fishing and equipped with a freezing machine and motor dories.
The crew consisted of 250 sailors and fishermen. Besides this vessel, the two
motor ships Skaga and Lardal joined the expedition in 1927, and a trawler trans–
ported the catch to England. The halibut fishery in 1926 and 1927 was very
profitable and, in 1928, the Baldersheim-Hellyer Bros. trade culminated in the
use of two big freezing ships, Arctic Queen (10,000 tons) with a crew of 500 men,
and Arctic Prince (5,000 tons) with 250 men, and some steam trawlers for transport
of the fresh halibut to Hull. The fishery was carried on from about 60 motor
dories and a motor vessel which functioned as a research ship. In addition to
this large English (British) -Norwegian undertaking, two smaller Norwegian expeditions fished ✓
012 | Vol_III-0849
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
in Davis Strait, namely the Thorland expedition and the Korsvik expedition;
the former was an English investment, the latter Norwegian financed. The
fishery was carried on very intensively with long lines on the offshore banks
as well as in the deep sea in Davis Strait, from Greenland to Baffin Island and
Labrador. Unfortunately the stock of halibut could not withstand such exploita–
tion, and within a few years the catch diminished to such a degree that the
great fishery expeditions no longer paid and were discontinued in 1935. The
total quantity of halibut taken in West Greenland waters from 1927 to 1935 was
between 3,000 to 4,000 tons.From the Danish side, the halibut fishery was started in 1935 by a commercial
concern. A three-masted schooner of 550 tons was purchased in Sweden and equipped
with freezing apparatus and storage for 250 tons of frozen halibut, and a hold
for 100 tons of salted cod. The crew consisted of 30 Faeroese fisherman. The
fishery was carried on from motor dories with long lines. The output was only
44 tons of halibut. In spite of this failure, a new concern, Nordlyset, was
started, and an expedition went to Greenland again the following summer with
the mother ship Arctic , which was used as a station ship at Faeringerhavnen, ✓
while the fishery was carried on with motorboats, the cutter Soli Deo Gloria
of 24 tons, and a hired Icelandic cutter of 24 tons. It was planned that the
expedition, besides operating its own fishery, should buy halibut from the
different Faeroese cutters and other ships that fished for cod off Greenland.
The expedition was based not only on halibut fishing, but also on cod, for
preparation of salted cod was undertaken. However, only 123 tons of halibut
and 141 tons of cod were obtained, and the firm was obliged to go into liquidation.The two last Danish expeditions to Greenland waters for halibut fishing were
013 | Vol_III-0850
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
equipped by the concern Gunnbjørn in 1937 and 1938. The motorship Steady
(397 tons ) was used as the mother ship. The first year the fishery was
carried on from the Steady but the next year the fishery operated with only
three motor dories and three Norwegian cutters. The crew consisted of 32 men,
including 28 Faeroese fishermen; the catch was frozen on board the Steady .
The results were unsatisfactory both years, 54 tons of frozen halibut in 1937,
and about 200 tons in 1938. As it was impossible to get a quota for sale of
frozen halibut on the English market, the concern was obliged to sell the catch
in Sweden and Denmark where the prices of this product were very low. The
Gunnbjørn organization was also obliged to go into liquidation.On the whole it can be said that the attempts by Danes to exploit the
stock of halibut in Greenland waters were unsuccessful chiefly owing to the
fact that the Danish fishery started too late, for by 1935, the great Norwegian–
English expeditions had depleted the halibut stock to such a degree that the
fishery could not pay.The Cod Fishery
The occurrence of cod in Greenland waters has been characterized by great
fluctuations, periods of plenty alternating with periods of scarcity.We have information about two good periods in the nineteenth century, one
in the twenties, and the other at the end of the forties. In the years from
1847 to 1851, fishery experiments were made under the supervision of a former
Iceland merchant named Thomsen. Fishing was carried on from boats and from
sloops at various place d s between Fiskenaesset and Holsteinsborg, both in the ✓
fjords and on the banks farther out at sea. The first two years gave a good
yield. In 1849 and 1850, the results were poorer, partly owing to unfavorable
weather; and in 1851, when only about two thousand cod were taken, the work
was discontinued.
014 | Vol_III-0851
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
During the period of Thomsen’s venture, some experimental voyages were
made by English fishing vessels. These led to precisely similar results and
were discontinued at the same time. The general conclusion was that cod fishery
could not be made into a profitable business for any length of time, owing to
the irregular appearance of the fish.In the twentieth century an attempt at cod fishing was made in 1906 by
the Faeroese shipowner Napoleon Andreasen with two cutters from the Faeroes.
Again the result was very unsatisfactory; only about 2,000 cod were taken at
Holsteinsborg.Another attempt was made in 1908 to 1909 under the leadership of Adolf S.
Jensen from the big Tjalfe . Although this expedition was also a failure,
for cod were not found on the offshore banks in Davis Strait, the scientific
investigations of this expedition laid the foundation for the important cod
fishery which subsequently developed.Earl ier y in the 1920’s, a change in the hydrographic conditions in Greenland
waters took place. The temperature of the water increased, and large shoals of
cod appeared on the banks as well as in coastal waters and fjords. As a result,
in the middle of the twenties, many foreign fishing vessels visited Greenland
waters for cod fishing and continued until the outbreak of World War II.The Norwegians were the first to begin operations, in 1924. The good
results of the experiments gave rise to a cod fishery off West Greenland the
following year, carried on by forty Norwegian vessels. The fishery did not
pay, however, largely because many of the vessels were too small for the pur–
pose, and the running expenses too high. During the 1930’s, the Norwegians
built many new ships, specially fitted for fishing in Greenland waters, and a
profitable fishery was carried on until the outbreak of the war. Many of the
015 | Vol_III-0852
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
ships were able to make two journeys to Greenland each season, bringing home
two cargoes of salt cod. Since World War II (up until 1948), only two or
three Norwegian vessels fished for cod with long lines in the Davis Strait.In 1925, the Faeroese cod fishery at Greenland started, and the fishery
continued year after year with increasing number of cutters, some years more
than a hundred, with about 3,000 fishermen. In the first few years, hand lines
were chiefly used, but later long lines were used to an increasing degree.
From 1934 onward, some Faeroese fishermen operated with small motorboats based
in three of the fishery habors which were opened for the Faeroese by the Danish
Government on the West Greenland coast. In 1938, the Faeroese fishing vessels
were granted the privilege of fishing inside the territorial waters off certain
parts of West Greenland.The Germans also participated in the fishery, and, in 1932, German fishing
vessels were predominant. In 1934, the German fishery was transferred to the
Barents Sea, where the conditions for operating with steam trawlers are more
favorable than on the Greenland banks.Among other foreign nations which carry on cod fishery off Greenland are the
English, Scottish, French, and Portuguese. In some years Canadian fishing
vessels have also been seen. The French and Portuguese use mostly large sailing
vessels, and fish from dories, manned with one or two fishermen. English, French,
and Portuguese steam trawlers have also tried cod fishing in Greenland waters,
but the bottom of the fishing banks is not as suitable for trawling as at
Iceland and in the Barents Sea.Since the Faeroese fishermen are of Danish nationality, Denmark designated
several ha r bors to serve as refuges and as places to replenish water supplies. ✓
The first harbor for the Faeroese was opened in 1926, at Ravns Stor Island
016 | Vol_III-0853
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Greenland Fisheries
(Ravns Storö). The following year it was transferred to the more northerly
Faeringerhavnen at 63°42′ N. latitude, south of the Colony of Godthaab. Four
harbors are now made available for Danish, Faeroese, and Icelandic ships; these
are from south to north: Ravns Stor Harbor, Faeringerhavnen, Tovkussak, and
Faeringer Nordhavn. Faeringerhavnen is also open to ships from other nations.
At each harbor there is a radio station, a source of water supply, and storage
facilities for oil, salt and salted cod.After the Second World War, cod fishing was resumed. In 1947, about
18 Faeroese cutters and 3 Norwegian vessels fished with hand lines and long lines
on the Greenland banks with good results. Also, some French and Portuguese
vessels fished in Davis Strait. One Faeroese and one Icelandic trawler tried
trawling without success, owing to the fact that the cod were feeding in the
upper water layers and did not keep to the bottom.
017 | Vol_III-0854
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Fisheries of the Greenlanders Greenland Fisheries —
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Annales Biologiques , vol.1, 1943. “North Western Area.” Contributors:
Arni Frideriksson, P.M. Hansen, and A Å . Vedel T a å ning. Copenhague. ✓2. Cons e il Perm. Internat. Explor. Mer. Bull.Statist . vol.15-25. ✓
3. “Fiskeriberetninger,” Beretninger og Kundgørelser Vedrørende Styrelsen af
Grønland. Aarene 1911-47. København.4. Hansen, P.M. “The age-composition of the stock of cod in West Green–
land waters in the years 1924 to 1938,” Conseil.Perm.Inter–
nat.Explor.Mer. Rapport vol.109, 1939.5. ----. “Fiskeriundersøgelser ved Vestgrønland,” Beretninger og
Kundgørelser Vedrørende Styrelsen af Grønland. Aarene
1932-40 og 1947. København.6. ----. “Synopsis of investigations into fluctuations in the stock of
cod at Greenland during the years 1930-1933,” Conseil
Perm.Internat.Explor.Mer. Rapport vol.86, 1934.7. ----. “Undersøgelser over den grof Grønlandske Torsk,” Beretninger
og Kundgørelser Vedrørende Styrelsen af Grønland , no.4,
pp.705-11, 1931.8. ----, Jensen, Ad.S., and T a å ning, A Å .V. Cod Marking Experiments in the ✓ ✓
Waters of Greenland 1924-1933 . København, 1935.9. Hjort, Johan, and Ruud, J.T. “Whaling and fishing in the North Atlantic,”
Conseil Perm.Internat.Explor.Mer. Rapport vol.56, no.1,
1929.10. Jensen, Ad.S. “Beretning on K F iskeriundersøgelserne ved Grønland,” ✓
Beretninger og Kundgørelser Vedrorende Kolonierne i
Grønland, no.5, pp.73-106, 1909.11. ----. “Concerning a change of climate during recent decades in the
arctic and subarctic regions in the west to Eurasia in
the east, and contemporary biological and geophysical
changes,” Danske Viedensk.Selsk. Biologiske Biologiske Medd . vol.14, ✓
no.8, 1939.12. ----. “Investigations of the ‘Dana’ in West Greenland waters, 1925,”
Conseil Perm.Internat.Explor.Mer. Rapport vol.39, pp.85-
102, 1926.
018 | Vol_III-0855
EA-Zoo. Hansen: Fisheries of the Greenlanders Greenland Fisheries
13. ----. “On the fishery of the Greenlanders,” Denmark. Komm.for Fisk.–
og Havunders. Medd.Ser.Fiskeri , vol.7, no.7, 1925.14. Kiilerich, A. “The hydrography of the West Greenland fishing banks,”
Denmark. Komm.for Fisk.-og Havunders. Medd.Ser.Hydrografi ,
vol.144, no.2, 1943.15. Oldendow, Knud. Tilstandene i Grønland 1946 . København, 1947.
16. Schmidt, Johs. “Racial investigations.X. The Atlantic Cod ( Gadus Gadus
callarias callarias L.) and local races of the same,” Carlsberg
Lab. Comptes-Rendus vol.18, no.6, 1930.17. “Statistiske Oplysninger om Grønland I,” Beretninger Vedrørende
Grønlands Styrelse no.1, 1942.18. T a å ning, A Å .V. “Some features in the migrations of cod,” Conseil Perm. ✓ ✓
Internat.Explor.Mer. J . vol.12, no.2, 1937.19. ----. “Survey of long distance migrations of cod in the north western ✓
Atlantic according to marking experiments,” Conseil Perm.
Internat.Explor.Mer. Rapport vol.89, no.3, pt.2, 1934.Poul M. Hansen
Fisheries of Labrador
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0856
EA-Zoology
(W. Anthony Paddon and Donald Andrews)
FISHERIES OF LABRADOR
CONTENTS
Page Cod Fishery 2 Salmon Fishery 8 Herring Fishery 10 Sea Trout Fishery 10 Other Salt-Water Fish 11 Freshwater Fish 12 Conclusions 14 Bibliography 16
001 | Vol_III-0857
EA-Zoology
(W. Anthony Paddon and Donald Andrews)
FISHERIES OF LABRADOR
The fisheries of Labrador probably began with the discovery of the
fishing banks off the Labrador coast by John Davis, in 1586, although there
is some evidence that the coast had previously been visited by French and by
Portuguese fishing vessels. The principal produce since the beginning has
— been salt codfish. ( Gadus callarias )The fishing population was until 1767 entirely a summer floating one, but,
in 1768, the firm of Noble and Pinson and, in 1770, Captain George Cartwright
independently established permanent or winter stations on the coast, the former
at Chateau Bay and the latter, after several trials, in Sandwich Bay near the
modern settlement which now bears his name. Settlement was very slow, improving
somewhat in the early nineteenth century. By 1881, the total census was 2,416.
In 1911, there were 3,200 settlers in Labrador, and the number today (1950) is
about 6,000 and rapidly increasing. Although the summer population visiting
Labrador to fish has included large numbers of other nationalities, it has
generally been British and mostly from Newfoundland. Considerable numbers of
French vessels have fished along the Labrador coast at certain times, and, in
1820, it was recorded that for every British vessel on the coast there were
three American, but this condition did not prevail for long.As a result of the stimulus of wars or fluctuations in the markets, the
002 | Vol_III-0858
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
population visiting Labrador to fish may occasionally have approached 15,000
as a maximum, but has averaged perhaps 6,000 for the last half-century
(1900-49), the greater decline occurring in the most recent years; the maximum
number of vessels was about 1,000. During the ten-year period between 1930
and 1940, the average population visiting Labrador was 4,254 Newfoundland
fishermen, of whom 1,830 were stationed ashore and 2,424 lived on board; an
average of 311 schooners engaged in the fishery. The tendency since then has
been toward a decline of the schooners engaged and a slight increase in the men
stationed ashore. In 1947, there were only 179 schooners on the Labrador coast,
although the increased number of men stationed ashore maintained the total as
slightly over 4,000. In 1948, the number of schooners had further declined to
131, although in 1949 the total reached 150. It is hoped that the entry of
— Newfoundland into the C D ominion of Canada will cause increasing numbers of
Nova Scotian fishermen to avail themselves of this fishing territory.Cod Fishery
Since 1945 to the present (1950), the amount of salted codfish ( Gadus
callarias ) exported from Labrador has been fairly stable, averaging approxi–
mately 200,000 quintals per year. This does not include the catches made by
American, French, or other foreign vessels. There is no reason to doubt
that the catch could be greatly increased if markets were available, because
as early as 1880 and as recently as 1935, two peak years, 398,000 quintals
— and 400,000 quintals, respectively, of sal d t cod were exported.
003 | Vol_III-0859
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
The cod fishery is today carried on with traps, which are large rectangular
boxlike arrangements of gill nets in shallow waters, with hand lines employing
the twin-hooked lead jigger either baited or unbaited, and to a lesser extent
with trawl lines and set hooks.Methods have changed slowly since the beginning of the fishery, and the
only important innovations seem to have been the cod trap, use of which has
been increased greatly in the last half-century, and the introduction of the
gasoline engine at about the time of the First World War. The former has greatly
increased the per-capita catch of fish and reduced the labor of fishing; the
latter has increased the range and the hours per day of actual fishing time
available to the fisherman. It has also greatly increased his operating expenses,
which will be discussed later on.The Labrador permanent population consists principally of British or
British-and-aborigine mixed stock. There are, however, about a thousand
Eskimos north of Makkovik. Most of the permanent population moves out to
summer fishing homes for the summer months, traveling from winter bases by
dog team or in their motorboats.The Newfoundland summer fishing population come north either in their own
schooners or in the Government-operated mail steamers. The schooner crews or
“floaters” live on board their vessels and are free to follow the fish; the
“stationers” take up quarters in established bases.The schooners are from thirty to a hundred and fifty tons, averaging per–
haps sixty or seventy tons. They are built out of Newfoundland or Nova Scotia
softwoods, but in the cold waters of the Labrador Current they seem to be
surprisingly durable. Some of them are extremely able and remarkably swift
004 | Vol_III-0860
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
sailers. Almost all of them are equipped with small auxiliary engines, and
diesel power is just beginning to appear. A few modern diesel motor vessels
are beginning to appear on the coast, and the days of the old-style sailing hull
are probably numbered. The average capacity of fishing vessels is between 800
and 1,200 quintals of wet salt codfish.Life afloat or ashore is rough and uncomfortable. The diet consist s of
coarse staples, principally bread, salt beef, molasses, and tea, together with
some margarine. A few schooners and some of the shore stations employ girls to
do the cooking. Washing facilities are very limited, and the quarters, afloat
or ashore, are very cramped. When the fish are running, a working day of 18 to
20 hours is the rule rather than the exception, and in the long northern days the
fishermen are at the traps by daylight and often work until after midnight putting
away the catch. Physical breakdown is not uncommon, especially among the boys
and young men.Erysipeloid infections, boils and furuncles, and other troublesome skin
infections are common from splitting-knife injuries, fishhook or fishbone per–
forations, sea-urchin spines, etc., and it is common to see men working with
high temperatures and with serious infections of hands, arms, or axillae. Many
hands and arms were sacrificed, although modern chemotherapy has sharply reduced
the numbers to a minimum in the past ten years. The labor is one of grinding
toil, constant physical discomfort or even suffering, and considerable physical
danger.The majority of the Newfoundland crews consist of able-bodied grown men,
— whereas , the Labrador crew is usually a family unit. The Labradorman’s equip–
ment is generally inferior to that of the Newfoundlander, and his resources
and capital exceedingly limited. He fishes as a rule for a merchant who has a
005 | Vol_III-0861
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
business monopoly in the district concerned, and upon whose mercies he is
dependent for supplies for the winter as well as the fishing season. He is,
therefore, afraid to deal with any market which might give him more favorable
prices, for fear his credit might be cut off at a critical time and leave him
starving. Often overcharged for his equipment and supplies, and frequently
— too uneducated to look out for his own interests, his lot is ua usually much
harder than that of the Newfoundlander. He is generally less skilled, and
rarely can be afford the five or six hundred dollars necessary for a trap, so
that he is dependent upon the much less productive and more strenuous hand line.
It is, therefore, not surprising that while a Newfoundland fisherman might, in a
good year, expect to receive as his share the proceeds from between fifty and a
hundred quintals of fish, perhaps worth seven hundred to a thousand dollars, his
Labrador counterpart is fortunate to get the revenu s e from twenty-five to eighty —
quintals of fish, usually at a dollar or so poorer price per quintal.The boats used are from 25 to 35 feet in over-all dimension s , carvel-built,
open craft, of Newfoundland or local fir, and they are surprisingly good sea boats.
Powered with primitive single-cylinder, two-cycle gasoline engines of from 3 to
8 horsepower with 5 to 7 1/2 being the most commonly used size, they average just
over 6 knots. The Labradorman’s boat is generally a castoff from a Newfoundland
crew and purchased second hand. In the opinion of the writer the change-over to
diesel engines is imperative. A 7-horsepower gasoline-powered motorboat would
cost about 7 cents per mile to operate, whereas a similar boat powered with a
10-horsepower diesel engine costs only about 2 1/2 cents per mile and gives more
speed and power.The fish is landed from the boat to a fishing stage of poles erected on the
ha r bor rocks or else directly aboard a schooner, where it is headed, gutted, split, —
006 | Vol_III-0862
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
washed, and salted. For Labrador heavily salted cure, about 6 1/2 quintals of
fish may be salted with a hogshead of salt. The salt is supplied by the schooner
or by a local merchant, costing about $6.00 on the coast. After standing for
some time, this fish may be washed in sea water and sun-dried on the rocks to
complete cure. Most of the shore fisherman’s catch, however, and nearly all the
— schooner’s fish are shipped v s outh to Newfoundland “green” for drying on spruce
pole bawns or by artificial means prior to export.The markets for this product are chiefly the Mediterranean countries and
the West Indies, frequently the poorer ones, and the price is low (see Table I).
Recent currency exchange and dollar controls have made payment difficult.— Table I. Export Markets of Labrador Sal d t Cod for the Year 1947-48. Country Weight, quintals Price paid, dollars Spain 49,000 747,000 Italy 17,000 247,000 Greece 6,000 83,000 United States 580 8,900 Puerto Rico 81,000 1,250,400 Cuba 4,522 78,000 Other West Indies 7,500 47,714 Miscellaneous 9,000 150,139 Total 2,612,153
The chief competition in this market is provided by Newfoundland’s tradi–
tional rivals, Iceland and Norway. The modern equipment and the mechanized
efficiency of the fishing fleets of these countries are steadily increasing
their margin of superiority over Newfoundland.The writer, from patrolling the Labrador fishery a number of years in the
Grenfell Mission Hospital boat Marav e a l is unable to escape the conclusion that
this whole fishery is doomed unless it is completely revised.
007 | Vol_III-0863
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
The product is coarse and unappetizing, and is designed for the markets
least able to pay good prices. It ignores the prosperous markets of North
America, and the markets which may again open in parts of Europe. These markets,
which would have no interest in dry salt cod, would perhaps welcome the delicious
frozen fillets which might be produced by a fresh-fish industry. The gasoline
motorboats are expensive to operate and the gasoline-powered schooners even more
so. The hardships and low returns of this fishery have little appeal for a
people whose increasing contacts with the great military bases of Newfoundland
and Labrador and with the conditions of industrial North America are changing
their outlook rapidly. The fishery, too, is abandoned in mid-September when
the fish are just reaching their peak in quality and quantity. Most of the
Labrador inlets and bays swarm with cod until mid-December, and they are in
shallow and protected waters where they are much more accessible than during
the summer. The waters of lower Hamilton Inlet, for example, are alive with
cod in October and November of most years, but not one fish is taken. Salting
heavily in the twentieth century would appear to be nothing but an expensive
— way of spoiling good fish. Furthermore, almost three-fifths of the fish is are
thrown away, and there is no attempt to produce by-products such as fish meal.
Even the oil is neglected, only part of the livers being used at all. Many
fishermen discard the livers with the cleaning. The methods of preparing such
liver oil as is produced, if seen by the customer, would discourage purchase.In summary, the Labradorman generally fares far worse than the Newfoundland
fisherman. So low are the returns from the fishery that he cannot be blamed for
deciding, as he sometimes does, that there is no point in wasting his strength on
extra labor for which there will be no reward.
008 | Vol_III-0864
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
Salmon Fishery
The picture here is somewhat less discouraging. Salmon ( Salmo salar )
were described by George Cartwright, in 1768, as abundant in all the streams.
The first methods of fishing must have depleted them, as it was customary to
seal off the streams with nets. In 1812, it was reported that 2,069 tierces
of salmon were exported, but accurate records prior to this are hard to find.
At that time large quantities were used locally for dog feed, and the Eskimos
and Indians must have caught large numbers. In 1863, the fish taken from
Sandwich Bay alone were reported to exceed 1,500 tierces, suggesting that the
Labrador export from all of Labrador for that year probably reached 3,500 tierces.
Since then the amount of salmon fishing has increased far more than the total
catch. Today (1950), however, the size of mesh permitted and the enforcement
of laws prohibiting the netting of streams have probably salvaged the situation.
A study of annual salmon returns gives much support to the local opinion that
the salmon supply is fairly stable, and, unless there is a major increase in
fishing or a relaxation of the laws, the Labrador salmon would appear to be safe.Fishing is by gill net, moored close along shore and perpendicular to the
— shore line. The mesh of the net is usually of 6 o t r 7 inches measure. A few
salmon blunder into cod traps. Since the first experiments with chilling and
freezing in 1925, the proportion of fresh to salt salmon has increased steadily,
and it is estimated that less than 20 per cent of the total is salted today.
The fisherman’s catch is collected daily by power launch and chilled with natural
ice, generally from icebergs which can usually be depended upon except in the
bay heads. Snow is a fair emergency substitute, deep drifts in crevices often
lasting into August. Salmon fishing begins in July and lasts well into August.
The fish vary greatly in size but might average 8 to 12 pounds in most localities
009 | Vol_III-0865
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
and occasionally exceed 50 pounds. The grilse or young salmon, locally known
as peel, are not accepted, most of them escaping through the large mesh nets
in any case. From the salmon centers, where they are packed in ice in wooden
boxes holding 100 pounds, they are shipped by small fast diesel coasting
vessels to maritime ports for rail delivery. Increasing amounts of salmon have
found their way from Labrador to Job Brothers’ filleting and quick-freezing
plant in St. Anthony, northern Newfoundland, in recent years.Some figures on salmon production are given in Table II.
Table II. Fresh Salmon Production in Labrador. Year Weight, pound s — 1940 1,060,000 1945 760,000 1948 880,000 1949 1,180,000
This fishery would appear to be far more modern and efficient than the cod
fishery, although the fisherman, due to the unfortunate presence of a monopoly
on the coast, does not derive full benefits from it. The prices paid the
fisherman vary between 8 and 15 cents a pound, although during World War II
and shor e t ly thereafter they were somewhat higher, reaching 25 cents a pound on
occasion. A Grenfell Mission-inspired cooperative at St. Anthony, Newfoundland,
has for some years been getting its members a much better price by shipping its
own fish directly to the markets of the St. Lawrence and the Maritimes, Canada and it would be highly desirable if this organization —
could spread north or if the Labradormen could be induced to establish their own
organization.
010 | Vol_III-0866
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
Herring Fishery
The common North Atlantic herring ( Clupea harengus ) moves in mysterious
ways. Once [ ?] plentiful along the Labrador coast, it still occurs in fair
quantity south of Hamilton Inlet and is found in smaller numbers north to Nain.
In the second half of the nineteenth century, there was an average catch of
about 30,000 barrels shipped from the coast. Today there are few herring
caught north of the Strait of Belle Isle, although there is a limited salt
— herring industry in the Battle Harbour - - Cape Charles area.In 1938, an American firm sent a floating herring factory and an attendant
fleet of four trawlers to the Snug Harbour-Comfort Bight area and the venture
showed considerable promise. The war interfered with further development for a
time, but Messrs. Baird of St. John’s. Newfoundland, finally ventured to estab–
lish a herring meal and oil plant ashore at Comfort Bight. Herring, which had
for many years been very plentiful in this vicinity, wisely abandoned the whole
area and have not returned since. The factory is still in existence. The total
Labrador salt herring catch for 1947 was only 247 barrels.Sea Trout Fishery
The splendid char ( Salvelinus alpinus ) is caught along most of the coast,
but does not appear in commercial quantities south of Hamilton Inlet, and the
catch is small south of Nain. From Nain north the quantity increases, and from
Okkak Bay north the bays and inlets are alive with them in June and July.
Eskimos are the principal fishermen. From Nutak north the proportion of
“red-fleshed” to “white - fleshed” fish increases and in Saglek and Nachvak fjords —
nearly all the trout is red-fleshed. The red fish is more attractive and com–
mands a higher price, although the difference is far less apparent in fresh or
011 | Vol_III-0867
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
or frozen trout than in salt trout. Always an important article of human and
of dog diet a ry, trout was [ ?] not exported in quantity until the middle of the
nineteenth century, principally by the Moravian missionaries. In 1885, a
total of 597 barrels was shipped to England; in 1895, the figure was 787; and,
in 1905, it reached 800. The Hudson’s Bay Company, during the era in which it
traded in this area, experimented with both frozen and salted trout but no
important developments resulted. Since the Department of Natural Resources
has been handling the trade in the northern districts, it has encouraged the
salt trout industry, and production has increased to almost double the figure
of the early part of the century. There is as yet no evidence of damage to
the supply.The fishery is carried on entirely by gill net, usually well up in the bays
and inlets. Nets are served satisfactorily by oared boats, so that the cost of
equipment is slight. Motorboats can practically be dispensed with. The catches
are increasing steadily with fine fishing grounds north of Saglek still virtually
untouched. One or two Newfoundland schooners have tried fishing these grounds,
loading with salt trout instead of codfish, and the fishermen seem agreed that,
although the proceeds are not much higher than in cod fishing, the work is much
pleasanter and easier.It seems a great pity to salt this beautiful fish, which could provide
stiff competition for the finest of inland freshwater fish in the Canadian and
American markets.Other Salt-Water Fish
Other fish are caught chiefly for domestic use locally and are enumerated
below. Whether or not any of them might have commercial possibilities except on
a very small scale remains to be seen.
012 | Vol_III-0868
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
Among salt-water fish, capelin ( Mallotus villosus ) are probably the most
numerous. These are used for bait and dog feed and eaten dried, usually either
raw or toasted. Visitors who try them usually find them delicious. Two fish
known as tomcod, one of them probably the Greenland cod ( Gadus ogac ) are used
as food only in the winter and spring, when they are caught through the ice.
At this time, when other fish are scarce, they are prized, but at other times
of the year they are treated with contempt. Halibut are present, but are
rarely caught in Labrador, as they tend to lie offshore and because the use of trawl —
lines is not widespread. Two species occur, the common Atlantic halibut
( Hippoglossus hippoglossus ) and the Greenland halibut or turbot ( Reinhardtius
hippoglossoides ). Other flatfish common in Labrador are the winter flounder
( Pseudopleuronectes americanus ) and smooth flounder ( Liopsetta putnama ) and the
rusty dab ( Limanda ferruginea ) and the long rough dab ( Hippoglossoides platessoides ).
A few local connoisseurs know and enjoy these fish, but most of them are dis–
carded if caught. Lumpfish ( Cyclopterus lumpus ), eels , ( Anguilla bostoniensis ), and sculpines (various —
species) occur but are ignored, even as dog feed. Lobsters ( Homarus americanus )
are numerous south of the Strait of Belle Isle but are not found north of this
area. No useful edible crab is known in Labrador. Shrimps are found only in
deep water and are not used. Against shellfish in general, there is an active
prejudice among the Labradormen, although most of them will eat mussels ( Mytilus
edulis ) in the spring before other fish appear. The writer was told that some
experiments in scallop dragging off southern and central Labrador yielded
encouraging results, but nothing has been heard since and the existence of this
shellfish is unknown to the Labradormen.Freshwater Fish
Used extensively for food among the Labradormen are a variety of freshwater
and anadromous fish.
013 | Vol_III-0869
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
Aside from the salmon and arctic char grilse mentioned, the most important is the —
brook trout ( Salvelinus fontinalis ), which occurs in many varieties and sizes in all
the estuaries and rivers, lakes and ponds. Like most of the other species to
be discussed, they are taken with light gill nets or through the ice. Fishing
through the ice is a sport dearly loved by the Labrador family, but unfortunately
the best season coincides with the spawning season and will probably have to be
stopped. Another important food fish in some areas is the smelt , ( Osmerus mordax ), which is caught —
through the ice with hooks and line in autumn and spring, and in gill nets in the
autumn until freeze-up.Less important, and often used for dog feed, are jackfish or pike ( Esox lucius ),
freshwater suckers of several types ( Catostomus spp.), whitefish ( Coregonus spp.), and a fish known locally as —
bottlefish, which has not yet been positively identified. It somewhat resembles
the whitefish, but is smaller. Some flatfish come into fresh water as do occasional
sculpins. Tomcod move into the bays and rivers in winter and are caught through
the ice, finding considerable use.In the [ ?] interior, beyond the range of any but long-range trappers, there
is a wide variety of freshwater fish, including gray lake trout ( Cristivomer
namaycush ) and ouananiche ( Salmo ouananiche ), and a fish locally known as cocomish
and reported by Snelgrove as resembling a cross between these two. There are
speckled trout, and whitefish are reported to be very numerous, so much so as
to offer some possibility of a commercial fishery in time. There is a burbot
( Lota maculosa ), which reaches large size, and many pike. Many other species
probably occur.It is interesting that most of the Labrador rivers are obstructed and do
not permit easy ingress to salmon. Salmon, for example, cannot pass Muskrat
Falls on Hamilton River, so far as is known, which means that a large portion
014 | Vol_III-0870
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
of the watershed of Labrador is barred to them. The possible effects of estab–
lishing a fish ladder here is an interesting subject for consideration.Conclusions
The commercial fisheries of Labrador are clearly run on lines which are
neither modern nor efficient, and, unless there is a radical change, they would
appear to be doomed to perish at the hands of their more efficient competitors.Possibly some such solution as the following might help to meet the situation.
Shore-based or floating plants would be established for freezing and filleting,
and located in central areas. Small diesel collectors would then make daily
rounds, as is being done today in the salmon industry, to collect not only the
fisherman’s salmon but his codfish and whatever other fish products might be con–
cerned. At the plants this would be filleted, probably by local women, who have
demonstrated their adaptability to this type of work at St. Anthony. It would
then be frozen. Fast coastal freighters could take it to the markets of the St. Lawrence and the Maritimes Canada as it accumulated.
A salt cod fishery might survive, since the early summer codfish is rather thin
and does not make good fillets, but it would have to be run on better lines than
is the case today, and with more thought to marketing. By late summer, when the
salmon fishery and, in the northern areas, the sea trout industry were over, it
would be time to start in earnest on the filleting of the fat and delicious fall
codfish. This fishery could and should run until late in the autumn. Mid-November
should be the earliest date of shutdown, and in most years it could be continued
later.Such freezing stations would probably find interesting side lines in whatever
local fisheries might permit. Smelt or brook trout, rock rod, flatfish of various
sorts, would all seem to be possibilities. Local berries might be an additional
side line which d c ould be very profitable, as berries are numerous and of fine
quality.
015 | Vol_III-0871
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
In addition there should be provision to make fish meal and other
by-products of the main industry, and the pernicious habit of throwing
away more than half the fish should cease.
016 | Vol_III-0872
EA-Zoo. Paddon and Andrews: Fisheries of Labrador
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Blair, A.A. Salmon Investigations: l.Obstructions in Newfoundland and
Labrador Rivers . St. John’s, Nfld., 1943. Newfoundland.
Natural Resources Dept. Res.Bull . (Fisheries) no.12.2. Gosling, W.G. Labrador: Its Discovery, Exploration, and Development .
London, Alston Rivers, 1910.3. Grenfell, W.T., and others. Labrador, the Country and the People .
N.Y., Macmillan, 1909.4. Hatton, Joseph, and Harvey, Moses. Newfoundland. Boston, Doyle and
Whittle, 1883.5. Hutton, S.K. Among the Eskimos of Labrador . Toronto, Musson, 1912.
6. Newfoundland. Fisheries Board. Report ... and General Review of the
Fisheries for 1945. St. John’s, Nfld., 1946. Newfoundland.
Natural Resources Dept. Econ.Bull . no.13.7. ----. Report ... and General Review of the Fisheries of 1947-1948. St.
John’s, Nfld., 1949.8. Prowse, D.W. A History of Newfoundland . 2d ed. rev. & corr. Lond.,
Eyre and Spottiswoode, 1896.9. Stearns, W.A. Labrador . Boston, Lee and Shepard, 1884.
10. Tanner, Väinö. Outlines of the Geography, Life & Customs of Newfoundland–
Labrador. (The Eastern Part of the Labrador Peninsula) .
Cambridge, Eng., University Press, 1942. 2 vols. Acta
Geographica vol.8, no.1, 1944.11. Thompson, Harold. A Survey of the Fisheries of Newfoundland and
Recommendations for a Scheme of Research . St. John’s,
Nfld., 1931. Newfoundland. Natural Resources Dept.
Econ.Bull. no.1.W. Anthony Paddon and Donald Andrews
Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
001 | Vol_III-0873
EA-Zoology
(Michael Graham)
FISHERIES AT BEAR ISLAND AND SPITSBERGEN
South of Spitsbergen there is a shelf of comparatively shallow water,
less than two hundred fathoms deep, which is known to English fishermen by
the name of the island on it. They occasionally see the snow-covered mountains
of Bear Island, and the wireless transmissions from the station maintained by
the Norwegians form the nearest link with a far-away civilization. Bear Island
offers little else; a risky anchorage in Misery Bay for no more than one or two ships;
wireless bearings and an occasional visual bearing; and a name for rich fishing
grounds, especially on the slope of the shelf 30 miles away from the island.
The fishermen, associating it too often with cold, snow, fog, and especially
gales, have no love for the island. They make a pun on the name, and call it
“buffie,” which is slang for naked.“Bear Island” figures largely in English fishing talk, meaning the whole
shelf, but this area is only a corner of a much larger region, the Barents Sea.
This applies whether we consider the fish and the trawling effort, the geography,
or even the political interests.On Mercator’s chart the shape of the Barents Sea is roughly rectangular,
whereas it is really narrower to the north. The southern boundary is formed by
the northern coast of Norway and the adjacent coast of Soviet Russia. The eastern
margin is Novaya Zemlya. The western side is open to the ocean, but it is marked,
002 | Vol_III-0874
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
broadly, by the West Spitsbergen Current. This current is a branch of the
North Atlantic Current, popularly called the Gulf Stream. It runs from the
Lofoten Islands on the coast of Norway, to the west coast of Spitsbergen.
The northern boundary of the fishing area is a moving one, namely the polar
ice field, which moves across the northern part of the Barents Sea, coming
from the northeast.By the nature of the water masses, it is possible broadly to distinguish
three areas of the Barents Sea: the southern portion lying 50 to 100 miles broad,
along the coasts of Norway and Soviet Russia, where there is more or less well–
marked influence of Atlantic water; the northeastern, which is won from the
field ice in summer; and the northwestern, which is flanked by the Atlantic-type
water of the West Spitsbergen c C urrent, but is also invaded by arctic water ✓
originating from the polar basin, coming from the northeast. This northwestern
area yields the [ ?] Bear Island to Spitsbergen fishery.An additional feature, which may or may not be important in the fisheries,
is provided by the West Spitsbergen Current, which continues around the northern
coast of Spitsbergen, so as to enter the Barents Sea between Spitsbergen and
Franz Josef Land.The Barents Sea is a “transition” sea, lying between the polar basin to the
north and the Atlantic Ocean westward, often called either Greenland Sea or
Norwegian Sea. The Barents Sea receives water from both of the greater areas
and is governed by the balance between them - as a pond connecting two lakes,
themselves in motion, would be subject to changes in each of them, and would
contain currents derived from theirs, and variable with their vagaries. In the
Barents Sea, it is usually possible to recognize the water one is working in.
If it is of 2° to 5°C. at most depths, higher at the surface in summer, with a
003 | Vol_III-0875
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
salinity just over 35 per mil l e, it is recognized as Atlantic water; if it is ✓
colder than and fresher, it is of arctic origin.Although it is not to be doubted that fish do, when it suits them, dis–
regard the temperature of the water, in the region around Newfoundland,
Thompson (16) found most cod in mixed w ta at er, with temperatures from 0° to 7°C.,
varying at different times and places, but with the most favorable temperature
often ranging between 1° and 4°C. In that region also there is mixing of
arctic water and Atlantic, the cold Labrador Current meeting the warmer water.
The correlation of fish catches in the Barents Sea with bottom temperatures
provides a wide open field for research, especially in the Bear Island area.In English minds the arctic fishery means cod, and the cod makes the big
catches. But there are also haddock and plaice, and several other species.
Table I shows the English catch for 1947. This total catch of 270,169 tons isTable I. Fish Weight, long tons Cod ( Gadus callarias ) 190,189 Haddock ( Melanogrammus aeglefinus ) 51,031 Plaice ( Pleuronectes platessa ) 12,088 Saith e or coalfish ( Gadus (Pollachius) virens ) 7,233 ✓ [ ?] this also [ ?] is the [ ?] haddock states in [ ?] letter of 3-14-50? Redfish ( Sebastes norvegicus Sebastes norvegicus (= S. marinus S. marinus ) ) 4,121 — Dab ( Limanda limanda ) 1,151 Halibut ( Hippoglossus hippoglossus (= H. vulgar e i s )), ling ( Molva
molva ), skates and rays, etc.4,356 Total 270,169
quite a lot of fish to bring home fresh, from grounds 1,000 miles or more away,
004 | Vol_III-0876
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
but it could be more if the English market liked coalfish and redfish. Their
part in the table is much smaller than their share of the Barents Sea.It is evident that, taking the Barents Sea as a whole, cod bulks nearly
4 times the haddock and about 16 times the plaice. But this is not true for
all the parts of the region.In the southern part of the Barents Sea, as defined above, cod landings
are but little more than twice those of haddock. The very high preponderance
of cod over haddock and plaice is a special feature of the Bear Island to
Spitsbergen area, as can be seen in a list of the landings from there in 1947.
In that list, we find cod showing 84,047 tons, haddock 3,285 tons, with other
species in small quantities, making up the total of 90,273 tons. In this list,
plaice is negligible. I have seen one plaice caught at Bear Island, but it was
regarded as a rarity.It is evident that this fishery is mainly dependent on cod, and it happens
that we know a good deal about this fish. The Bear Island cod population is a
contingent of the great Norwegian stock, which has been studied for a century.
Cod marked at Bear Island have been captured at the Norwegian coast, and cod
marked in the great Norwegian area of spawning at the Lofoten Islands have been
retaken at Bear Island and Spitsbergen.The cod spawn on banks off the coast of Norway, but especially above all
at the Lofoten Islands, where they afford one of the world’s classical fisheries,
in the great West Fjord. The cod eggs and fry drift helplessly for several weeks,
and it is therefore, a provision of nature that the main breeding place serving
the Barents Sea should be upstream in relation to the main currents. After
breeding, the cod swim down the currents and many cod marked at Lofoten have been
taken 500 miles away, off the coast of Finmark district, where the fish set in
005 | Vol_III-0877
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
later in the year. The spawning is at its height in March, and the fishery
on the Finmark coast, in which they are taken again, may begin only five or
six weeks later. Other marked spawners, as we have said, have been taken off
Spitsbergen, that is, downstream on the track of the West Spitsbergen branch of
the Atlantic Current system.The floating eggs and fry drift down the currents, and by the time the
young fish are large enough to be taken in trawls, say at 30 centimeters in
length, they may be found on various fishing grounds all over the Barents Sea.
In general, the Barents Sea is the nursery and growing area, and the area for
recovery of spent fish, whereas the Norwegian coast is the spawning ground.This outline of the cod’s migrations has doubtless been suspected or
believed by some of the Norwegian fishermen for many years. They distinguish
the Finmarken as loddetorsk because they came with the lodde or capelin, which
strikes the coast at that season, and they call the large cod at Lofoten skrei .
Studies by Norwegian scientists of the samples from the two sets of fish left
little doubt of the identity of the two stocks, and marking experiments confirmed it.These Barents Sea cod take a long time to grow. They mature at from 6 to
12 years of age, according to Norwegian naturalists who have studied the rings
on the ear stones of the cod, which show characteristic spawning marks.There are, as always where a species is abundant, minor spawning grounds
and other exceptions to the main outline given above, including occasional
migration as far as Iceland; but there is little doubt that the account given
by the Norwegians - Sars, Hjort, Sund, and Rolle s f sen - describes the life of the ✓
majority of the fish. It shows the Bear Island stock as a part of a much greater
one. It consists of growing fish (codling and sprag) and of the larger fish when they
006 | Vol_III-0878
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
are not breeding. When they take them at Bear Island, these big fish are
described by the English trawlermen as “Lofoten fish,” or with humo u rous ✓
exaggeration, as , “b----- great man-eating cod.”Seeing that the Barents Sea as a whole, including the Bear Island shelf,
is apparently a growing and recuperating area for the cod, the food supply is
clearly important. Although cod will swallow almost anything, including young
cod, cod’s heads discarded by trawlermen, orange peel, and lumps of coal, two
kinds of food are preeminent in the cod’s diet in the Barents Sea. These are
“krill” (small shrimps of the Eupkausiace s a and Amphipoda orders) and capelin ✓
( Mallotus villosus ), which is an arctic fish of the salmon and smelt family,
not unlike a small, slender herring. Near the coast, cod also feed on herring,
which form its staple diet in some other parts of the world, but in the Barents
Sea it is probable that the capelin plays a larger part.Large shoals of cod feeding on capelin have been followed by trawlermen
in August in the northern Barents Sea. The cod seemed to shift every few hours,
traveling ever toward the northeast in the Hope Island area, so it may be that the
capelin were on the move also. I am grateful to the skipper of the trawler
Rinovia for a report of how he had to travel after them. “We were fishing in
a position 76°10′ N., 28°40′ E. where h w e found fish of very good quality ...
This fish was feeding and after a few days it just disappeared leaving
absolutely no sig h n of fish on the ground. –“The ships consequently had to steam and look for the fish again. Some of
them went to a position 76°50′ N., 32°00′ E. where fishing was very spotty
and only lasted about 24 hours. Other ships went to a position 50 miles east
of Cape Thor (Hope Island) where fishing was from 10 baskets to sometimes 3 bags
(over 4 tons) for 2 hours tow..., but the fish was on the move all the time and
ships had again to leave and eventually went to a position 75°20′ N. on the
100 fathom line.”
007 | Vol_III-0879
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
Neither the capelin nor the krill, nor for that matter the herring, are
bound to be the bed of the sea, so there is no reason to think that the cod —
are absent from the middle and upper layers. Indeed, they are known to be
in the middle layers when spawning, and there is nothing to stop them being
there at other times. But the trawl only fishes at the sea bed and a few feet
above it, so the picture of cod distribution given by the trawl fisheries may
be largely misleading. There is, at any rate, a great deal still to be learned
about the cod of the Barents Sea.That, however, does not mean that the fishermen have not found out a good
deal about how to catch them. The largest factor is that of morale: if you are
a deckie you must stand among wet and slippery fish and gut them quickly, three
per minute, with the air well below freezing point and spray continually lashing
you; you must learn to shuffle and slide and hurdle over the pound boards, when
the slime-soaked deck is heaving under you; to unshackle and hook up heavy trawl
doors in the dark as the winchman cunningly takes the strain on the warps; you
must be ready to cling hard to the gunwale, as a sea tries to wash you overboard.
If you r are a skipper your art is how to drive the deckies so far and not too far;
organizing the working of the ship so that you pack the maximum of fish away in
a day. You must be wise enough to find the true news of fish among the “mixed grill”
of exaggeration and humo u rous obscenity that comes on the radio-telephone from ✓
your brother s skippers. On you lies the decision when to leave a poor or moderate ✓
fishing for a better fishing rumored or suspected a whole day’s steam away.
And generally, you must manage the three weeks’ voyage as a business, one that
will gross £3,000 to £9,000 and give you, as skipper , £300 to £900, provided
the expenses of the voyage have not been too heavy.The expenses are heavy, and there is the 10 to 12 days’ steaming to be
paid for, to and from home. The profits come from the great concentrations of fish,
008 | Vol_III-0880
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
which allowed an average of 1.4 tons per hour’s trawling on arctic grounds,
in 1947, compared with 0.1 ton in the North Sea. But the heavy concentrations
of fish have to be sought. When they are found, as much as 10 tons can be
caught in half an hour, though that is somewhat exceptional. When the cod are
as thick as that, fishing is limited by what the crew can gut, wash, and stow
on ice. This is about 40 tons per day; and it is hard to see how the work could
be done more rapidly than it is. Indeed, this rate leaves little scope for
improved methods of cleaning or stowing.The fishery varies with the seasons in location and in yield. This is a
subject that can be better described by figures than by words, and Table II shows
the variation in the English component in 1948, when England had by far the
largest share. The statistics are arranged in three areas, separating the area
off the coast of Norway west of North Cape, and also separating the Bear Island
to Spitsbergen area.Table II. Number of English Landings in 1948 and Total Weight of Catch. Region I
“Barents Sea”Region IIA
“Norwegian Coast”Region IIB
“Bear Island to Spitsbergen”Month Number of
landingsWeight,
long tonsNumber of
landingsWeight,
long tonsNumber of
landingsWeight,
long tonsTotal
landingsJan. 159 20,970 43 5,384 - - 202 Feb. 41 5,687 167 22,806 - - 208 Mar. 52 3,348 156 16,920 - - 208 Apr. 116 15,701 23 3,506 1 133 140 May 55 6,005 1 85 65 10,100 121 June 54 7,899 1 190 95 16,708 150 July 148 23,837 - - 14 2,316 162 Aug. 50 7,250 - - 111 16,714 161 Sept. 42 5,347 1 89 78 8,933 121 Oct. 45 4,802 2 146 54 6,730 101 Nov. 116 13,360 - - 43 6,225 159 Dec. 160 21,825 - - 32 5,345 192 Total 1,038 136,031 394 49,126 493 73,204 1,925
009 | Vol_III-0881
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
Table II is not quite complete in one way. Some of the trawlers are
unaccounted for in certain months. Some also fish off Iceland and only come
to the Barents Sea when fishing is particularly favorable. This movement is
the principal cause of fluctuation in the total column at the right hand of
the table. There we see that there are generally between 150 and 200 vessels
fishing the region, allowing that the voyage and turn-round take just under a
month.In the first three months of 1948 the Bear Island to Spitsbergen area was
closed by polar ice, and this accentuated the concentration on the Norwegian
coast. At this season the cod are approaching the Lofoten Islands to spawn, and
very heavy catches are made on the migration routes. Thus on the narrow strip
of ground off Andanes, between 100 and 200 fathoms in depth, the trawlers are w s o ✓
concentrated that they have to form a queue and take their turn to tow along the
ground. The results show up very well in the table, in the high quantities landed
in February and March.For the rest, Table II gives a picture of the fairly steady attraction of
the Bear Island area, with the effort fluctuating between the Bear Island fishery
and the move varied fishery in other parts of the Barents Sea. The statistical
region II B includes the grounds fished in summer to the northeast, in the
vicinity of Hope Island, and the high value in August may be attributable to
the movement of cod into that area in pursuit of the capelin.Although it has been necessary to show that the Bear Island fishery is in
most respects only a part of the fishery in a greater region, it can in one
important way be considered by itself. Historically, it has been a great and
novel venture by English trawlermen, developing in an heroic and spectacular
fashion from 1928 onward, in a period when much of the world was in the slough
of depression.
010 | Vol_III-0882
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
The Bear Island venture had some of the qualities of a gold rush, as the
earliest fisheries in the North Sea also had, when one of the grounds earned
the name of “California.” As in gold rushed, successful men worked to beyond
human endurance, gutting fish for 72 hours on end, and proud of it, without
respite for meals or sleep. Men as tired as they bec o a me were not safe on the ✓
deck, nor were skippers who kept watch for so long in the wheelhouse capable
of caring for their ship’s safety or efficiency. However, it is reasonable that
ships away from port for two so long should take the maximum advantage of fish
when they are on it, and deck hands accept spells of intense work compensated by
rest when the ship is steaming. By 1948, most trawlers arranged for a third of
the crew at a time to be resting, except perhaps at the end of the fishing when
the word goes round to “fill her up.” Then each haul is anxiously watched as it
comes in, for their resolve will not allow them to cease until their cargo has
reached a respectable figure, usually somewhat short of full capacity. At that
stage, hauls always seem to run smaller: 200 baskets would satisfy them and could
easily come in one haul. Instead, there seems an interminable succession of
20- to 30-basket hauls. Then comes a good one, and the gear is whipped in “with
a will,” as the saying is, and stowed up with an air of finality, as if it would
never be used again.The English Bear Island fishery is said to have begun on the information of
a Norwegian. Fishing for cod in Norwegian waters has been carried on from time
immemorial from rowing and sailing boats. The methods vary, but are principally
based on the hook and line. During recent years, Norway has started to use trawlers.
A somewhat similar description would apply to Russian fishing in the area, except
that the development of trawling was earlier and in larger volume.Norwegian fishermen have habitually ventured out to sea. In 1902, the
011 | Vol_III-0883
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
the Norwegians discovered the Skolpen Bank, north of the Russian coast, at
latitude 71° N., longitude 37° E; and they often tried the Bear Island and
Spitsbergen grounds.It is recorded that in 1825, and again in 1865, Norwegian hunters wintered
at Bear Island, and caught cod on the nearby grounds. Between 1873 and 1882,
the west coast of Spitsbergen supported a Norwegian fishery for cod caught on
hand lines from rowing boats. In 1882, 249,000 cod were taken; but in 1883,
the cod had vanished, and 18 vessels caught only three fish — so the tale runs.After the debacle in 1883, there was no commercial fishery on the Bear
Island to Spitsbergen bank for a great many years. There were unsuccessful
trials in 1898, 1899, 1901, 1905, 1906, and 1914. Only in 1914 was there some
success, in a good catch of halibut.From 1924 onward, the Norwegians again tried the Bear Island area. In June
1925, they made good catches of cod, and the Norwegian fishermen went there
commercially. English trawlers went in the summer of 1928, after which time
the ground became the most prominent of all in providing the English fish
supply. In 1929, there were 180 voyages; in 1934, there were 459; in 1938,
1,285.The Germans joined in the fishery in 1930, and Icelanders (landing in
England and included as English landings), Norwegians, and Faeroese take a
substantial part. French fishermen and Scots are there in small numbers.
The growth of the principal participation is shown in Table III.
012 | Vol_III-0884
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
Table III. Quantity (in Metric Tons) of Demersal Species of Fish Landed
from Region IIB (Bear Island and Spitsbergen) .Year England Germany Norway Faeroes 1929 15,900 - 7,200 - 1930 60,200 6,400 7,500 - 1931 47,000 15,800 2,200 - 1932 37,100 19,800 1,700 - 1933 32,300 21,300 2,100 - 1934 41,900 16,200 3,600 600 1935 71,700 23,800 14,000 700 1936 107,500 30,100 16,600 12,200 1937 109,500 23,900 6,100 4,200 1938 137,200 43,100 - 7,300
During the 10 years of development of the Bear Island fishery, other
increases were taking place in the Barents Sea. From region I, that is, ex–
cluding the Bear Island and the Norwegian coastal areas west of the North Cape,
the number of landings by England rose from a few hundred in the early years to
just over 1,000 in 1937. The quantities landed by the principal participants
are shown in Table IV. This table, unfortunately, omits information on a sub–
stantial Soviet Russian participation.Table IV. Quantity (in Metric Tons) of Demersal Species of Fish Landed
from Region I (Barents Sea).Year Norway England Germany 1929 110,800 24,100 47,900 1930 73,600 33,300 63,100 1931 71,600 23,200 46,100 1932 60,300 27,200 25,900 1933 78,700 36,200 35,200 1934 77,100 47,100 36,200 1935 89,100 43,900 36,100 1936 117,000 76,300 33,600 1937 104,000 103,200 44,600 1938 89,600 78,800 53,000
013 | Vol_III-0885
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
A smaller development than that at Bear Island, but perhaps even more
spectacular, was the fishing on the Andanes and Malangen grounds, on the
approach to Lofoten Islands. In 1934, German trawlers found the fishery on
the narrow slopes, and thus began, as it were, an invasion of the Norwegian
monopoly of the skrei gathering for spawning. However, as Table V shows, the
quantity caught by all trawlers has not reached half that taken by the
Norwegians, using mainly their traditional methods.Table V. Quantity (in Metric Tons) of Demersal Species of Fish Landed
from Region II A (Norwegian Coast).Year Norway Germany England 1933 263,900 - 3,200 1934 275,000 18,200 4,400 1935 230,300 47,300 12,500 1936 242,100 78,500 21,400 1937 337,300 107,400 33,700 1938 344,500 90,800 18,000
As might be expected, the development of great trawl fisheries in the
Barents Sea during the twentieth century has been accompanied by changes in the
size and equipment of the trawlers. In 1905, when the plaice off the north coast
of Russia first attracted the English trawlers to the Barents Sea, the ships
measured 120 to 130 feet on the keel, holding no more than 80 tons of fish;
whereas nowadays an arctic trawler carries more ice than that. Until 1930,
there were few new ships. But the development of Bear Island put new heart into
the industry, and ships were ordered willingly. A typical ship built in 1933
was 155 feet long, with a speed of 11 knots, carrying 130 tons of fish and 60 tons
of ice. She had a crew of 23, and, like her predecessors, was coal-fired, as
014 | Vol_III-0886
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
many trawlers still are. A typical ship built in 1948 was 175 feet long,
steamed at 12 knots, and could hold 260 tons of fish and 90 tons of ice. The
crew may number 28. She may or may not be oil-fired. These trawlers are
notable for their fittings and equipment. Apart from the beauty of the skipper’s
berth and bathroom, and amenities of various kinds for the crew, there are
important technical aids, including wireless direction-finding equipment,
long-range communication sets, and echo sounders. The newer ships are carrying
radar; but, at present (1950), the compasses are still as crude as ever, “one
that Nelson would be ashamed of,” as a navigator put it.It is doubtful if the trawlers will become much larger, so long as they
have to re p ly on bringing their fish home fresh, on ice. In 1947, it took so ✓
long to fill the ships sufficiently that, on the average, the the first-caught
fish was 19 days on ice, from region I, and just under 18 days from the Bear
Island and Spitsbergen area. At about the 15th day, fish so stored suffers
various ill l effects, and deteriorates quickly after landing.These fisheries for cod, haddock, and plaice, in the Barents Sea, are on
the margin of the living area for these temperate species, and the margin is a
movable one. The polar ice field, with the fresher, colder water that results
from its melting, forms their boundary. It is, therefore, not surprising that
these fisheries are irregular. They vary noticeably from year to year and from
decade to decade. Some of these fluctuations in fisheries may be noted here.Good brood years for cod occu pi rr ed in 1904, 1912, 1917, 1918, 1919, 1929, ✓
1930, and 1937. These would give good fisheries for doo cod ling 4 to 5 years later, ✓
and their beneficial effect shows in the Lofoten fishing for 6 or 7 years.Good periods in the Lofoten fishery were 1875 to 1895, and 1925 to the
present (1950).
015 | Vol_III-0887
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
Good periods in the Spitsbergen to Bear Island area were 1873 to 1882,
and 1925 to the present.These fluctuations are not yet understood. They form ample, if rather
difficult material for investigation, and are amenable to interesting specula–
tions. They may depend on the moving balance between the Atlantic Ocean and
polar seas, or on pressure systems in the atmosphere, or ultimately, perhaps,
on variations in solar radiation.Climatic changes and natural fluctuations in the fisheries make the future
uncertain. It may hold continuing good fishing in the Barents Sea, or it may
be that fishing will be more difficult, and give smaller yields. Nor is the
technical future clear. Diesel propulsion, with greater carrying capacity for
size, is tempting, but not yet obviously advantageous over steam. Quick freezing
is technically perfected, but, at present, operationally and economically just
out of grasp. Finally, the market for relatively fat-deficient kinds of fish
contains elements of uncertainty. But even the difficult times of reconstruction
after a world war did not prevent new men from taking to the hardships and
isolation of the arctic fishery, and the great natural resource formed by the
Barents Sea cod, haddock, and plaice is likely to provide an appreciable part
of England’s food supply for many years to come.
016 | Vol_III-0888
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Atkinson, G.T. “Notes on a fishing voyage to the Barents Sea in August
190 8 7 ,” Marine Biol.Ass.U.K. J . vol.8, pp.71-98, 1908. ✓2. Averinsev, S.W. “Results of hydrological work conducted in the region of
Cape Kanin (Barents Sea) in connection with fisheries,” Annals
& Mag.Nat.Hist. ser.9, vol.17, pp.117-26, 1926.3. Brown, N.N., and Cheng, C. “Investigations into the food of cod ( Gadus
callarias L.) off Bear Island and of the cod and haddock
( G. aeglefinus L.) off Iceland and the Murman Coast,” Hull Bulls .
Mar.Ecol . vol.3, no.18, pp.35-71, 1946.4. Davis, F.M. “An account of the fishing gear of England and Wales,” Gt.Brit.
Agric.& Fish.Brd. Fisheries Investigations ser.2, vol.15, no.2, 1936 . ✓5. Hjort, J. “Fluctuations in the great fisheries of Northern Europe,”
Conseil Perm.Internat.Explor.Mer, Rapport vol.20, 1914.6. Iversen, T. “Some observations on cod in northern waters,” Norway.
Fiskeridirektøren. Rep.Norweg.Fish.Invest . vol.4, no.8, 1934.7. Jensen, A.S. “Concerning a change of climate during recent decades in the
arctic and subarctic regions, from Greenland in the west to
Eurasia in the east, and contemporary biological and geophysical
changes,” Danske Vidensk.Selsk. Biologiske Medd . vol.14, no.8, 1939.8. Knipovich, N.M. Ekspeditsiia dlia Nauchnopromyslovykh Issledovanii u Beregov
Murmana. (Expedition für Wissenschaften-Praktische Untersuchungen
an der Murman-Küste.) St. Petersburg, Khudozhestvennoi Pechati,
1902.9. Lundbeck, J. “Biologisch-statische Untersuchungen über die deutsche
Barentsmeer-Fischerei (mit besonderer Berüchsichtigung von
Kabeljau und Schellfisch),” Wissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuch .
Abt.Helgo . vol.18, no.3, pt.8, 1932.10. Maslov, N.A. “Donnye Ryby Barentsova Moria i ikh promysel,” (The bottom
fishes of the Barents Sea and their fisheries.) Knipowitch.Sci .
Inst.Sea.Fish.Ocean.U.S.S.R. Trans. vol.8, 1944. (Russian with
English summary.)11. Messiatzev, I. “Chief results of the fishery research in the Barents Sea by
GOIN (State Oceanographic Institute of the U.S.S.R.),” Conseil
Perm.Internat.Explor.Mer, Rapport vol.81, pp.141-51, 1932.12. Robertson, J.A. “A survey of the Bear Island trawling ground,” Ibid . vol.81,
pp.115-39, 1932.
017 | Vol_III-0889
EA-Zoo. Graham: Fisheries at Bear Island and Spitsbergen
13. Rollefsen, G. “Foreign trawling and stocks of cod in northern waters,”
Norway. Fiskeridirektøren. Smaskrifter no.2, 1946.14. Skvortsov, I.N. “Tralovyi lov v Barentsovom More.” (Trawl fishing in the
Barents Sea, technical and economical investigations.), Moscow.
Nauchn.Inst.Rybn.Khoz. Trudy , vol.1, pp.166-272, 1924.15. Sund, O. “Cod measurements during 21 years on the western and northern
coasts of Norway. Methods and results,” Conseil Perm.Internat.
Explor.Mer, Rapport vol.87, no.7, 1934.16. Thompson, H. “A biological and economic study of cod ( Gadus callarias L.)
in the Newfoundland area,” Newfoundland. Nat.Res.Dept. Res.Bull .
no.14, 1943.17. ----. “The occurrence and biological factors of haddock in the Newfoundland
area,” Ibid . no.6, 1939.18. Zenkewitch, L., Brotsky, V.A., and Dekereva, A. Materialy po pitaniu ryb
Barentsova Moria . (Fish food in the Barents Sea II.), State Ocean.
Inst., 1st Session, Rep. no.4, 1931. (Russian with English summary.)Note: Statistics are taken from Great Britain. Agriculture and Fisheries Board,
London, Sea Fisheries Statistical Tables Sea Fisheries Statistical Tables 1919/20- and Conseil Permanent ✓
International pour l’Exploration de la Mer, Copenhagen, Bulletin Statistique ,
vol.1, 1903/04 -Michael Graham
Norwegian Sealing and Arctic Fishery
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0890
(EA Zoo. John Giaver)
NORWEGIAN SEALING AND ARCTIC FISHERY
CONTENTS
Page Sealing 1 Eastern Ice (White Sea and Barents Sea) 4 Northern Ice (East and North of Svalbard) 4 Western Ice (at Jan Mayen) 4 Denmark Strait 4 Newfoundland 4 Fisheries 5
001 | Vol_III-0891
EA-Zoo.
(John Giaver)
NORWEGIAN SEALING AND ARCTIC FISHERY
Sealing
In ancient times several kinds of seals were abundant along the coast of
Norway. From old finds (3000 B.C.), we learn that seals were hunted here before
cattle were raised or grain cultivated in the country. This coastal seal hunt–
ing was an important economic factor until historic times, and strict regula–
tions existed, limiting the right to hunt. Seals were almost exterminated,
however, following the introduction of firearms. In fact, the extermination
of seals may have been deliberate, as a measure toward furthering the fishing
industry, which is now paramount.Seal hunting provided, in earlier epochs, oil for light and heating, and
was the chief factor which spurred the Norsemen to seek farther and farther
to the north as their boats and ships became more seaworthy. The early sagas
have tales to this effect, and the Konungs Skuggsj a á ( King's Mirror ), written
about 1260, gives accurate descriptions of the arctic regions and the animals
hunted there.Aside from the sagas and their information, the first Norwegian whaling
dates from a King's privilege given to two citizens of Bergen in 1614. On a
smaller scale, whalers from southern Norway took part in the hunting of the
Greenland whale ( Balaena mysticetus ) in the waters between northern Norway,
002 | Vol_III-0892
EA-Zoo. Giaver: Norwegian Sealing and Arctic Fishery
Spitsbergen and East Greenland. Like the Dutch, Englishmen, Scots, and Germans,
Norwegians took up sealing when the northern whales became scarce. Enter–
prising shipowners of Bergen are known to have carried on sealing since the
last part of the seventeenth century, but from about 1720, the industry made
rapid progress. At the same time sealing became an important activity in other
cities of southern Norway. In 1750, 697 barrels of seal oil and 9,159 sealskins
were brought to Bergen; in 1755, 668 barrels and 4,867 skins.Seal hunting on a large scale was begun in the nineteenth century when
Norwegian sealing, as we now know it, got its start. In 1784, the King
offered a reward to every ship equipped and sent out for sealing and whaling
in the Jan Mayen and Spitsbergen waters. The first small ships went out from
Hammerfest in 1819. From that period onward the sealers from south Norway and
those from north Norway must be regarded separately. The sealers from north
Norway used small ships, sloops and schooners and lodias (purchased from Russia),
and they hunted walrus mainly until about 1860. In the years 1830-34, 6,000
walrus were taken to Hammerfest, but only 600 seals (mostly bearded seals,
Erignathus barbatus ). The fields were in those days at Spitsbergen and Bear
Island, but from 1867 on, the north Norwegian sealers went to Novaya Zemlya and
the Kara Sea. They also hunted in the White Sea, one of the world's greatest
breeding places of the Greenland seal ( Phoca greenlandica ).While the British and Germans had hunted in the western ice, known to be
the breeding place of the Greenland seal and bladdernose seal ( Cystophora
cristata ), since early in the eighteenth century, a few of the small north
Norwegian ships tried this field for the first time in about 1830. But the
"big sealing" on this field by Norwegians started in 1847, when Svend Foyn of
Tönsberg, later known as a whaling veteran, went on his first cruise with the
003 | Vol_III-0893
EA-Zoo. Giaver: Norwegian Sealing and Arctic Fishery
brig Haabet . This voyage also started the sealing from south Norway, that is,
from the towns Tönsberg, Sandefjord, Larvik, among others. The ships used were
much bigger than those from north Norway, and so were the catches, for it has
been reported that 16,400 young seals were taken by a single ship. In 1866,
small steam engines were installed. About 1880 these sealers started hunting
the bottlenose whale ( Hyperooden ampullatus ) after the sealing season, and
during a period of 30 years they brought some 60,000 bottlenoses to south Norway.
The southern sealing died out in the beginning of the twentieth century.Large numbers of bladdernose seal gather in the ice between Iceland and
Greenland (Denmark Strait) in the month of June. The first man to hunt here
was skipper Edvard Holm Johannesen of Tromsö, who entered the strait with his
schooner Nordland in 1874. From 1876 to 1885, some 500,000 bladdernoses were
taken here, and during the next 20 years the catch varied from 15,000 to 40,000
per year.While sealing from south Norway stopped about 1900, it continued to thrive
from north Norway, with the use of more modern ships. In 1898, Severin Brandal
of Sunmöre took up sealing on the west coast, starting a relatively large sealing
industry there. Today (1950) there are two separate sealing fleets in Norway,
the Sunmöre fleet and the north Norway fleet. Most of the boats are now motor-
driven, the tonnage ranging from 40 to 50 tons to about 500 tons. At present,
Norway has about 60 to 70 sealing ships. The first steel sealer was delivered
from England in 1948.Modern Norwegian sealing started when the steam engine and later the motor
came into full use at the beginning of the twentieth century. From then on,
the ships were more strongly built; but even now many a good ship is lost in
the ice, as was certainly the case in the old days. Today Norwegian sealers
are hunting all over the Atlantic Arctic.
004 | Vol_III-0894
EA-Zoo. Giaver: Norwegian Sealing and Arctic Fishery
Eastern Ice (White Sea and Berents Sea ). In the White Sea, Greenland seals
( Phoca groenlandica ) are hunted from the beginning of March. When the old seals
are moving northward in April and May, they are hunted off Novaya Zemlya and
farther north in the Barents Sea; a relatively small number of bearded seals
( Erignathus barbatus ) are hunted at the same time. In 1921, the Soviet Union
claimed a territorial border on a line between Sviatoi Nos and Kanin Nos, thus
intercepting the Norwegian sealers from hunting in the White Sea proper. For
a fee of $40,000 ( in 1925 reduced to $25,000), 55 sealers were allowed to operate
inside the above-mentioned border southward to a line between Orlovski and
Cape Kanushin. The Soviet Union refused to renew this treaty after World War II.
Owing to climatic changes, sealing in the White Sea entrance was very poor in
the years 1930-39, when the seals went into the White Sea basin.Northern Ice (East and North of Svalbard ). Mostly bearded seals and
fjord seals ( Phoca hispida ) , together with some polar bears ( Thalarctos
maritimus ), are hunted by the smaller sealers (from Tromsö and Hammerfest)
in north Norway from June throughout the summer.Western Ice (at Jan Mayen ). Greenland (harp) seals in all age groups
(white coats, blue backs, and adults) and bladdernose seals are hunted from
the end of March to April.Denmark Strait . Bladdernose seals are hunted in June and early July.
After the sealing season in these waters the ships complete their catch with
arctic sharks ( Somniosus microcephalus ) found southward along the southeast
Greenland coast. Until about 1930, some of the sealers used to go northward
along the northeast Greenland coast to hunt walrus ( Odobenus rosmarus ) and
bearded seals.Newfoundland . The first real attempt of Norwegian sealing on this distant
005 | Vol_III-0895
EA-Zoo. Giaver: Norwegian Sealing and Arctic Fishery
field was made in 1938, when Martin Karlsen of Brandal, S o u nmöre, sent two of
his ships there, led by the veteran sealer Captain Kristoffer Marö. Together
the two ships got about 16,000 seals, worth about $32,000. In 1939, seven
sealers left for Newfoundland, but three of them went down in a storm; the
total value of the catch was about $60,000. Since World War II, only one
sealer from Norway has visited this field each year, but in 194 9 8 , several
larger sealing ships were being built for use in these distant waters.The total annual value of the Norwegian sealing varied during the ten
years preceding World War II from about $400,000 to more than $700,000. During
the same period 36 ships were lost. The value of the 1947 catch was more than
$1,500,000. The following statistics for 1937 show approximately what is in–
volved in an average annual catch: 82 ships, 1,206 men, 2 shipwrecks, 66,385
Greenland seals (old and young), 62,373 bladdernose seals, 6,780 bearded seals,
78 walrus, 344 dead polar bears and 42 live ones, 2,920 tons blubber; the total
value of the catch was about $700,000.The figures given above do not show a true picture of the sealing industry's
importance to Norway, where it is the basis of relatively great industries , not
only in the preparation and export of skins but in the utilization of blubber.
The real value amounts to several million dollars.Fisheries
Fishing has always been one of Norway's main industries. The first attempt
at extending the industry into the Arctic was made in 1819, when a sloop was
sent from Bodö in Nordland to try cod fishing at Bear Island. The skipper did
not find the island, however, and went walrus hunting along the coast of Spits–
bergen.
006 | Vol_III-0896
EA-Zoo. Giaver: Norwegian Sealing and Arctic Fishery
Aside from a short period of rich cod ( Gadus callarias ) fishing on the
banks of West Spitsbergen during the early 1900's, the arctic shark was the
only catch sought for in the Arctic by the Norwegians for more than a hundred
years. This shark, of which only the liver is taken, frequents the coastal
waters or rather along the banks almost everywhere in the Far North, but mainly
off north Norway, at Bear Island and West Spitsbergen, and along the coast of
southeast Greenland. The vessels used for arctic shark fishing are partly
sealers and partly common fishing boats. During 1930-39, the oil from the
catch of arctic shark varied from 7,692 hectoliters, valued at $60,000, in
1930, to 17,201 hectoliters of oil, valued at $120,000, in 1934. In 1947,
766 tons were taken, worth $61,000.The presence of commercial fishes on the arctic banks seems to be irregular, ap–
parently varying according to the temperature of the sea water. As mentioned above,
quite a rich cod fishery took place off West Spitsbergen in the early nineties,
but it stopped with the sudden disappearance of the cod there. The same thing
happened with the halibut off West Greenland. It was formerly well known to
sealers that the waters around Bear Island were rich in halibut ( Hippoglossus
hippoglossus ), cod ( Gadue callarias ), and haddock ( Melanogrammus aeglefinus ), but
investigations carried out by the Norwegian Fishery Administration all over the
northern seas did not confirm this. In 1925, however, the fishing skipper Gustav
Strom of Honningsavåg found an abundance of cod, halibut, and haddock on the Bear
Island banks, and after his return with his bountiful catch, skipper Johan War–
holm made an attempt, with equal success. This discovery led to a very rich
fishery at Bear Island and west of Spitsbergen, considered one of the most impor–
tant in Norwegian waters. Since World War II, however, the catch has diminished
considerably, and it is feared that we are once again confronting a period of
poor fishing on these banks.
007 | Vol_III-0897
EA-Zoo. Giaver: Norwegian Sealing and Arctic Fishery
Although foreign trawlers for many years have roamed all over the northern
seas and even worked on the banks just outside the coast of north Norway,
trawling has been prohibited by law for Norwegians. This rather curious
restriction, based upon the fishermen's fea t r that trawling would glut the
market, gave rise to much criticism, which bore fruit. A limited number of
Norwegian trawlers are now allowed to fish outside the territorial boundary
and they are doing very well.A great number of Norwegian fishing vessels are also taking part in the
herring ( Clupea harengus ) and cod fisheries at Iceland. Cod and herring, caught
in Davis Strait, at Iceland, and Spitsbergen, are salted on board, while most
of the catch from the Bear Island banks and the Barents Sea is delivered fresh.Special investigations are carried out in the northern sea every year by
the Norwegian Fishery Administration. These official cruises cover all parts
of the Arctic from Davis Strait to the Barents Sea. In the summer of 1948, an
expedition was equipped to find new fields for shark fishery off the coast of
northeast Greenland and to search for halibut banks off southeast Greenland.
The hydrographic section of the Norwegian Polar Institute publishes charts
of the main arctic fishing fields.John Giaver
Freshwater
Freshwater Vertebrates
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0898
EA-Zoology
(V. C. Wynne-Edwards)
FRESHWATER VERTEBRATES
CONTENTS
Page Introduction 1 Ecology 4 Rivers 4 Lakes 6 Ponds 7 Freshwater Vertebrate Fauna 7 Lampreys and Fishes 8 Lampreys: Petromyzontidae 8 Sturgeons: Acipenseridae 9 Salmon and Related Fishes: Salmonidae 10 Graylings: Thymallidae 24 Smelts: Osmeridae 25 Suckers: Catostomidae 26 Minnows: Cyprinidae 27 Blackfish: Umbridae 28 Pike: Esocidae 29 Trout Perch: Percopsidae 30 Perch: Percidae 31 Sculpins: Cottidae 31 Sticklebacks: Gasterosteidae 33 Ling: Gadidae 34 Amphibia 36 Mammalia 38 Bibliography 40
001 | Vol_III-0899
EA-Zoology
(V. C. Wynne-Edwards)
FRESHWATER VERTEBRATES
Introduction
The majority of vertebrates dealt with here are fishes. There are a few
Amphibia but no aquatic reptiles extending into subarctic regions; and of
aquatic mammals, two species of seal and one cetacean Delphinapterus occur in
arctic fresh waters. Semiaquatic mammals, for example, beaver Castor (circum–
polar), muskrat Fiber (nearctic), water rat Arvicola (palaearctic), and otter
Lutra (circumpolar), are e n x cluded, together with numerous aquatic birds, many —
of them typically boreal and arctic, for example, loons (Gaviidae), geese,
swans, and many ducks (Anatidae).Roughly one-seventh of the land area of the world drains into the Arctic
Sea and adjacent ice-bearing seas, and many of the large rivers have their
sources far to the south in the temperate belt of Europe, Asia, and North America.
Five of these rivers are 2,000 miles or more in length, namely, the Ob (2,700
mi.), Yenisei (3,300 mi.), Lena (2,800 mi.), Yukon (2,000 mi.), and Mackenzie
(2,525 mi.). In summer they carry collectively an incalculable volume of rela–
tively warm, usually mud-laden water to or beyond the Arctic Circle, forming
natural channels for the dispersal of the temperate-zone continental aquatic
fauna and flora into high latitudes.
002 | Vol_III-0900
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
Within the area of Pleistocene glaciation in North America and Europe,
there is a series of great lakes also, the more northerly including Athabaska,
Great Slave, and Great Bear lakes in the Mackenzie system; Nettilling and
Amadjuak in Baffin Island; Ladoga and Onega in Karelia. On account of im–
pediments to drainage by glacial drift and permafrost, the frequency of smaller
lakes and ponds is without parallel in other parts of the world.Parts of these freshwater systems were either covered by continental ice
at some stage of the Peistocens, so that their preglacial fauna was exter–
— — minated, or endured a climate so sever e that few or no fres h water vertebrates
survived. The postglacial period, up to the present day (1950), has been char–
acterized, therefore, by recolonization of surprising speed and extent; and
realization of this confers upon the study of the distribution of the freshwater
fauna a fundamental significance.Recolonization has taken place, of course, from refugia little or not at
all affected by glaciation: in North America, for example, the Mississippi
Basin is the most important; and in Asia several of the great freshwater systems,
— including Lake Baikal on the Agara- H Y enisei, and probably the Ob, Lena, and others,
evidently sustain an important part of their preglacial faunas. The spread of
fishes from one river system to another has occurred in two ways: either through
the sea to enter the new river by its mouth; or through the headwaters, where
changes in the interior drainage, most commonly resulting from temporary blockage
by continental ice or glacial drift, have diverted the waters from one system
into another.The first method is generally possible only to fishes able to live either
in the sea or fresh water, i.e., "euryhaline" species. It appears to be the
most frequent method of recolonization and it has the result that fishes entering
003 | Vol_III-0901
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
a river by its mouth cannot ascend impassable waterfalls and are usually
thereby debarred from the upper waters of the system.The second method has been important where transitory dams of ice or
boulder clay have formed lakes draining now into one system, now into another,
as has occurred so commonly in North America. The resulting alternation of
isolation and communication is certainly connected with the origin of species
swarms in Salvelinus , Coregonus , and Leucichthys in some American and European
lakes. As a promoter of recolonization, it has been successful to an unexpected
degree. To take an outstanding example, it has apparently permitted the little
— trout perch Percopsis to pass from the Great Lakes - Mississippi refugium far
to the north and west via the low-lying Canadian Shield into the Mackenzie,
— and thence to its mouth, and o th v er the divide into the Yukon, where it was dis–
covered by the author in the Porcupine River at Old Crow, Yukon Territory, in
1945; the distance is 2,500 miles in a direct line. The only known cyprinid
in the Yukon, Couesius Plumbeus , has a similar range; but, like the lake trout
( Cristivomer ), the round whitefish ( Prosopium cylindraceum ), the northern
sucker ( Catostomus catostomus ), the blackfish ( Dallia ), the pike ( Esox lucius ),
and the burbot ( Lota lota ), it very probably survived the Pleistocene in ungla–
ciated refugia in the west or northwest.The most important families of arctic and subarctic freshwater fish con–
tain many euryhaline species, e.g., the sturgeons ( Acipenser ), salmon, trout,
— — and char (Salmonid ea ae ), whitefish (Coregonidae), inconnu ( Stenodus Stenodus ), smelts
(Osmeridae), sticklebacks (Gasterosteidae), and sculpins (Cottidae). The seagoing
Salmo and Oncorhynchus , which enter fresh water only to spawn, have distributions
cen s tered on particular oceans, and may be divided into Atlantic and Pacific series;
whereas the more strictly freshwater coregonines and others, which feed and grow
004 | Vol_III-0902
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
freely in fresh water, belong rather to continental series, either palaearctic
or nearctic as the case may be. It is interesting to find in the Mackenzie and
Yukon that, whereas the headwater colonists are of course American or nearctic
types, many of the euryhaline anadromous colonists are essentially palearctic,
including the inconnu and two or three coregonines.Ecology
The peculiar features of arctic freshwater habitats may all be attributed
to the effects of low temperature. Few or no cold-blooded vertebrates can sur–
vive the arctic winter except in fluid water; and the prevailing low summer
temperature tends to retard growth and development. This effect is to some ex–
tent compensated by adaptation, permitting faster growth at low temperature:
thus Miller (34) found little difference in the growth rate of pike ( Esox lucius )
in Great Bear Lake compared with Lesser Slave Lake ten degrees farther south;
the same appeared to be true of whitefish ( Coregonus ) and tullibee ( Leucichthys ),
but not of lake trout ( Cristivomer ).The physical effects of temperature are somewhat different in running-water
and standing-water environments, and these are treated separately.Rivers . Several of the great rivers, as mentioned already, gather much
of their water in temperate areas between latitudes 50° and 60° N., where annual
precipitation is higher than it is in the Arctic. In summer the upper waters
are relatively warm and, during the two to four weeks required to carry these
warm tributary waters down to the Arctic Sea, they retain their heat to an im–
portant extent. The Mackenzie, for example, may be inferred to have summer max–
ima in the main channel of the delta at latitude 68° N. of 15° to 18°C., whereas
in large lakes, in the same latitude, the open water may never exceed 10°C. at
005 | Vol_III-0903
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
the surface. Nansen (36) records a water temperature of 9.9°C. as late as
September 7 in the Yenisei at latitude 67°43′ N.The great rivers are all characterized by being extremely muddy or turbid,
excepting about 100 miles of the Mackenzie immediately below its outlet from
Great Slave Lake, which serves as a mud trap; and the Angara similarly dis–
charges the waters of Lake Baikal (36). Visibility in the water in commonly
less than one-half meter and this makes the habitat unsuitable for grayling
( Thymallus ) and freshwater trout ( Salvelinus ), which by habit take much insect
food from the surface. The rivers are frequently several miles wide, shallow,
— and full of bar e s and alluvial islands. They also resemble one another in having
remarkably even profiles, without falls or serious rapids to form barriers to
shipping or migratory fish in their lower 1,000 to 1,500 miles. The normal
speed of flow seems to be about 3 miles per hour (5 km. per hour). The Yukon,
however, is much faster, averaging more like 5 to 7 m.p.h., and thereby adding
enormously to the effort of anadromous migration. Complete vertical mixing is
achieved by slow, majestic swirls and eddies, which mark the river's steady flow,
although confluent waters, like the clear Mackenzie and the muddy Liard, may keep
to their respective banks for scores of miles.The rivers are actually closed by ice for at least six months, and remain
near 0°C. and carry floating ice for several weeks longer, extending the winter
period for the river fauna from late October to the beginning of June. Some of
the smaller rivers in the tundra may in fact be frozen from October to May, in–
clusive (38). In the Mackenzie and Yenisei, the spring break-up begins in the
upper tributaries and proceeds downstream with the floods as much as 100 miles
a day. Water levels may suddenly rise 5 or 10 meters, backing the current up–
stream in the tributaries; a tenfo l d increase in the scour of the river is
006 | Vol_III-0904
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
reinforced by the momentous surge of blocks of ice reared up together in wild
confusion. Several descriptions have been given of the awesome spectacle, but
none more vivid than that of Henry Seebohm (43) at Turukhansk, in 1877: it
cannot be otherwise than a primary limiting factor in river ecology. In the
upper Yukon and no doubt some other rivers, the spring high water comes after
the break-up, since the principal sources are in high snowy mountains.In the permafrost region of Transbaikal, where excessively low winter tem–
peratures prevail, flow is said to cease almost entirely in certain rivers,
which may in many places freeze from top to bottom (36). Bottom ice, for
example, in the Lachine Rapids at Montreal, sheathing submerged boulders and
stones where the swift current prevents the surface from freezing, must have a
destructive effect on the bottom fauna. It is well known at Bear River rapids
between Fort Norman and Great Bear Lake (38), and is probably a characteristic
feature of places where the water remains open all winter.Lakes . The larger lakes are essentially oligotrophic, without thermal
stratification and with oxygen contents near saturation at all depths down to
300 meters. This is true of Great Bear Lake, in which plankton production is
very meager; Secchi's disk is visible to a maximum depth of 29 meters, and
predaceous fish such as lake trout ( Cristivomer ) must take a significant part
of their food in the form of terrestrial insects at the surface (34). Many
subarctic lakes are of Forel's "temperate" type, in which the maximum surface
temperature exceeds 4°C., e.g., Great Slave, Baikal, Onega, and Ladoga; Great
Bear is on the border line, since in the open water the temperature of 4°C. is
but little exceeded, though locally, in bays and shallows, 15°C. or higher may
be attained in hot weather. The bottom fauna and fish populations are naturally
concentrated in summer at these points.
007 | Vol_III-0905
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freswater Vertebrates
Most tundra lakes are probably of the "polar" type, in which the surface
never exceeds the temperature of maximum density. Soper (46) found Nettilling
Lake still filled with ice in early August; and highly polar lakes barely thaw
before the ice re-forms, so that there can be little or no circulation at any
time. In all very large lakes, open water occurs at temporary contraction
cracks throughout the winter, although the ice may be two meters thick, and
this permits the survival of air-breathing seals in Baikal, Nettilling, etc.Precipitation exceeds evaporation throughout the arctic regions, and there
are consequently no inland drainage systems nor saline lakes.Ponds . Small and large stagnant ponds (27) are characteristic of perma–
frost country, and in many areas they dot the tundra and taiga plains in
countless numbers. They are seldom habitable by fish unless they have outlets;
and they may freeze to the bottom unless the depth exceeds two meters. The
Alaska blackfish lives in this habitat, as well as in streams, and is widely
— believed to be able to survive imprisonment in i n ce, though on circumstantial
evidence only. In some of the thousands of ponds in the Mackenzie Delta, there
are whitefish ( Coregonus ) and other fish, completely isolated except during a
brief period at the height of spring floods, when the delta channels overflow
their banks: some indeed may be isolated for several years at a time.FRESHWATER VERTEBRATE FAUNA
The four classes of Vertebrata dealt with in this article are the lampreys
(Cyclostomata), bony fishes (Osteichthyes), Amphibia, and Mammalia. In the
last-mentioned class, only the white whale and two species of hair seal are
included, all three being in fact normaly marine mammals exceptionally occurring
008 | Vol_III-0906
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
in arctic or subarctic fresh waters. There are no "cartilaginous fishes"
— (Chondricht h yes) nor aquatic reptiles in these waters. The sequence followed
is systematic.Lampreys and Fishes
A number of families of freshwater fishes are highly typical of, though
not wholly confined to, the arctic, subarctic, and alpine regions. One in
particular, the Salmonidae, contains by far the largest number, and the most
valuable, of northern freshwater fish (including salmon, trout, whitefish,
and tullibee) and absolutely predominates in arctic fresh waters.Lampreys: Petromyzontidae
Lampetra (Entosphenus) japonica is known throughout the arctic mainland
from the White Sea eastward across Asia to the Yukon and Mackenzie. It was
described from the Yukon by Bean (3) as Lampetra aurea , and occurs at least
as far up as Dawson, where the author took a larva in 1945; Richardson (42)
found one, Petromyzon fluyiatilis , adhering to an inconnu in Great Slave Lake.
Several subspecies are recognized by Berg (4), including kessleri in the Dvina,
Pechora, and Ob, and septentrionalis , recorded by him, likewise from the Pechora
and Ob and thence eastward to the Anadyr, but no t in Baikal.Like the European Lampetra fluviatilis which they closely resemble, L .
japonica descend to the sea, returning to spawn. No other lampreys are known
to occur in the Arctic.Nansen (36) says the lampreys are used as bait for sturgeon on the Yenisei.
In the delta and lower part of the Yukon, they run up from the sea in early spring,
and are, or were formerly, taken by the Indians with dip nets through holes cut in
the ice, for use as dog food. They are said to be exceedingly oily (15).
009 | Vol_III-0907
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
Sturgeons: Acipenseridae
Some types of sturgeon spend part of their lives in the sea and enter rivers
to spawn. These are therefore euryhaline anadromous migrants; others complete
their whole life history in fresh water. One of the former, Acipenser baeri ,
is, or has been, of considerable economic importance in the Ob (including
especially its tributary the Irtysh) and Yenisei. It ascends the rivers from
the sea as soon as the ice is out in the spring, though some are caught through
— the ice in winter in the mouth of the Yenisei at la t itu t de 70°11′ N. (36); it
attains a weight of 100 kilograms (220 lb.), and exceptionally 200 kilograms
(440 lb.).The smaller sterlet, Acipenser ruthenus , attaining about 1 meter and
usually 6 to 6 1/2 kilograms (13-14 lb.), is a nonmigratory species in the Ob
and Yenisei. Froms regarded by Berg (4) as hybrids between A. ruthenus and
A. baeri are found in the same rivers and in Lake Baikal, the Lens, and Kolyma.
In modern times the sterlet has also penetrated the canals and become established
in the Dvina and Neva systems, coming originally from the Volga, in which it is
indigenous also.Sturgeons are not native to any arctic rivers within the area of Pleisto–
cone glaciation in the Old World, that is, west of the Urals; nor do they occur
in the Anadyr, Yukon, Mackenzie, or rivers eastward until we come to the Churchill
and Nelson system in Saskatchewan and Manitoba. Their absence from this quadrant
— of the Arctic (roughly long. 160° E. to 110°W.) can cert a in a ly be ascribed to
lack of opportunity for postglacial colonization, since there is little doubt
that the rivers in question are as suitable for sturgeons as the Dvina has
proved itself to be. It should be noted that the Pacific sturgeon Acipenser
transmontanus is found on both shores of the temperate North Pacific, north to
010 | Vol_III-0908
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
the Copper River in southern Alaska (15).The rock sturgeon ( Acipenser fulvescens ), found in subarctic Canada, is
another small species allied to the sterlet: this species, over most of its
range, does not migrate to the sea. It occurs in the rivers entering the
west side of Hudson Bay and James Bay from the Churchill southward, in Mani–
toba and Ontario, and perhaps also on the Quebec side. It has apparently
come as a "headwater colonist" from the Great Lakes system.Salmon and Related Fishes: Salmonidae
Salmon . To the layman there may seem very little resemblance between
salmon and trout on the one hand, and whitefish on the other. The former are
swift, active fish, with well-developed teeth in their large mouths, and small
scales; the latter are toothless, small-mouthed, large-scaled, and rather inert.
The two series are connected, however, by intermediates, of which the inconnu
or hielma , a fish well known in the great arctic rivers, is an example; and
for this reason subdivision of this important family cannot be satisfactorily
made.The salmon are normally sea-run fish, entering rivers only to spawn, and
fasting while in them. There are two genera, Salmo and Oncorhynchus , the latter
comprising the Pacific salmon, and being found only in the North Pacific region
of American and Asia. Salmo , if we include the steelheads and cutthroat trout
( S. gairdneri and S. mykiss ) of the American Pacific slope and the related
cutthroat trout of Kamchatka, occurs both in the North Pacific and North Atlan–
tic regions.Salmon are of little importance in truly arctic waters, other than the
Yuken and Anadyr. Salmo salar , the Atlantic salmon, extends northeastward
011 | Vol_III-0909
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
in greatly diminished numbers to the mouth of the Pechora, and northwestward
to South Greenland, Labrador, and Ungava Bay (though not west of Leaf River,
in which they occur only occasionally, according to the latest information pro–
vided by M. J. Dunbar and Legendre and Rousseau (30). It is abundant in New–
foundland, Iceland, and Scandinavia, including the Baltic.Salmo trutta , the brown trout, both sea-run and landlocked, is present in
northern Europe, east to the Urals. S. gairdneri , comprising the steelhead
and rainbow group, occurs in southern Alaska, and enters the Yukon Territory
at one point by the Alsek River and its tributaries.Of the six species of Oncorhynchus , two are known to occur north of Bering
Strait, though in numbers too small to be of economic importance. These are
the humpback or pink salmon, O. gorbuscha , which has been taken from the mouths
of the Mackenzie, Colville, Kolyma, Indigirka, and Lena rivers; and the chum
or dog salmon, O. keta , from the Mackenzie, Kolyma, and Lena. Dymond and
Vladykov (14) believed that an imperfect specimen of Oncorhynchus , taken in
Great Bear Lake and examined by them, belonged to the keta species.In the Yukon and Anadyr five species are found: the humpback, Oncorhynchus
— gorbuscha , the dog salmon, O. keta , the fine king or spring salmon, O. tachawytscha ,
the coho, O. kieutch , and the sockeye or red salmon, O. nerka . The Yukon is
famous for its king salmon, some of which reach almost 100 pounds (45 kg.) in
weight. This species penetrates to the uppermost tributaries of the river, in–
— cluding the Lew e s, Teslin, White-Donjek-Kluane, and Porcupine. In streams enter–
ing Marsh Lake above Whitehorse, and at Atlin, British Columbia, king salmon reach
the astounding distance of 1,800 miles from the sea. To achieve this they must
swim against the rapid Yukon current, and travel, at the most conservative estimate,
012 | Vol_III-0910
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
6,000 miles through the water, entirely without food — a migration without
parallel among fishes. The whole journey takes about twelve weeks, and, of
course, none survive to return to the sea.King salmon are present in shallow coastal waters from journey onward.
The run starts early in June in Norton Sound, reaches Dawson about June 28,
and Selkirk about July 10. Regular fisheries are conducted as far up as Daw–
son, employing 6- to 8-inch (15-20 cm.) gill nets set in eddies, and also
automatic fish wheels operated by the river current. The salmon are fit
for human food as long as one month after entering fresh water, after which
the silver color gives place to red and the flesh loses its flavor.The dog salmon also ascends the Yukon above Dawson, and its tributary,
the White River, as far as Kluane Lake. Its color and flesh deteriorate
almost immediately on entry into fresh water, but the fish is still suitable
for dog feed. The remaining species do not go far up the river, the sockeye
being more abundant than the coho and humpback.In the smaller Alaskan Rivers, e.g., the Kobuk, the humpback is usually
the most abundant species, running up in July. For a fuller account of Alaskan
salmon see Evermann and Goldsborough (15).Any species of Salmo or Oncorhynchus is liable to produce landlocked
varieties; there are at least two of these in northwestern American north
of the 60th parallel, namely the rainbow trout ( S. gairdneri irideus ) and
the red salmon or kokanee ( O. nerka var.), both of which occur in the Yukon
Territory in the Alsek River system.Trout and Char . Many kinds of trout which are confined to fresh water and
thereby isolated into as many separate populations as there are watersheds have
produced confusing series of local varieties and subspecies. They are to be
013 | Vol_III-0911
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
found in almost all northern and arctic streams, provided the water is clear,
and in lakes.The most widely distributed of arctic freshwater fish may be grouped under
the general name of arctic char, Salvelinus alpinus . Either as a sea-run fish,
commonly known as “salmon” or “sea trout” around the shores of Hudson Bay and
northward, or as landlocked fish, or both, they occur throughout the arctic
mainland and on most of the larger islands. Their range embraces Iceland,
Spitsbergen, Great Britain, Scandinavia, the whole of northern Asia and North
America, and both coasts of Greenland; the islands of Ellesmere, Baffin,
— Novaya Z me em lya, and New Siberian are also included.The sea-run char or “salmon” enter the rivers on both shores of Hudson
Bay, on the west from the Churchill northward, and thence right along the arctic
coast to the Coppermine (and perhaps to Anderson River); they may ascend for
distances exceeding one hundred miles up the Thelon, Back, and no doubt other
rivers, the upper limit depending on the presence of impassable falls. On the
east side of Hudson Bay, they extend from Great Whale River (51) to Ungava Bay,
northern Labrador, and Greenland. They are abundant in Southampton and Baffin
Islands, and recorded from Somerset Island. Manning (31) believes that they come
in from the sea in August and September, descending again the following spring
as soon as the ice is out; and he thinks it improbable that any remain in the
sea during the winter. Spawning takes place beneath the ice, probably in the
early months of the year.In summer these big sea char may be very numerous in river mouths and shallow
coastal waters and are taken with gill nets, or, in favorable places, by spearing,
[ ?] as , for example, below Bloody Falls near the mouth of the Coppermine. The normal
weight is 5 to 10 pounds (2-4 kg.), exceptionally 20 pounds (9 kg.). The flesh
color is variable, but is usually red or pink.
014 | Vol_III-0912
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
Most nonmigratory char are smaller and more widely distributed. They are
very variable in color and markings. Gunther (16; 17) described two “species”
from northern Ellesmere Island, one from latitude 82°30′ N. Both were small;
one was found mature at 8 inches (20 cm.), and the other at 12 inches (30 cm.),
with the roes in the latter starting to develop in August. Other species have
been named from Quebec ( Salvelinus alpinus marstoni ) and other parts of north–
eastern Canada. In the northwest, from the District of Mackenzie to Alaska
and southward in the mountain, as well as in the Aleutians, Kamchatka, and the
Anadyr, the type found is the Dolly Varden trout ( S. alpinus malma ). Some of
these nonmigratory species may run out to the sea. Many of the landlocked char
are remarkable for their brilliant nuptial colors. They are found of eating
salmon eggs when they can get them, but do not very readily take the angler’s fly.The speckled or brook trout ( Salvelinus fontinalis ) is an entirely distinct
species in temperate and subarctic eastern North America, attaining its northern
limit so far as known 24 kilometers north of Great Whale River on the east shore
of Hudson Bay (51), at the outlet of Payne Lake in northernmost Ungava (30), and
in the Nelson River on the west shore (24). In Siberia and Europe there are
several other separable species.Arctic char are valuable as food. They are readily obtained, however, only
in the summer months, the season of plenty.The Old and New Worlds have each an additional kind of trout of great size,
competing with the king salmon for the claim of being the largest of the Salmonidae.
The nearctic fish is the lake trout ( Cristivomer namaycush ), well known in tem–
perate North America and extending into the Subarctic. It is chiefly, but not
entirely, a lake fish, never so far as known descending to the sea. It has a
northern limit somewhat as follows: Alaska and Yukon Territory, in the Yukon Basin,
015 | Vol_III-0913
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
the Kobuk and some of the Pacific coast watersheds; Mackenzie Basin, including
Great Bear and Great Slave lakes; Coppermine, including Dismal Lakes (20) and
— Fort Enterprise (42); possibly Back r R iver; Dubawnt-Thelon watershed down to
Baker Lake. There is a specimen from Victoria Island in the Royal Ontario Museum
of Zoology (12), and another from Southampton Island (33). It is absent from
Newfoundland, but present in the interior of Ungava, north at least to latitude
60° N. (Payne Lake and George and Kogaluk rivers (30)).Lake trout attain a large size, fairly frequently exceeding 50 lb. (22 1/2
kg.) and exceptionally reaching nearly 100 lb. (45 kg.). They are especially
abundant in Great Bear and Great Slave lakes, and in the latter have made up a
substantial part of the commercial fishery developed since 1945 (41). They are
voracious, to a large extent, preying on other fish; but in Great Bear Lake
they take insect food at the surface.The taimen, Hucho taimen , is the giant Siberian trout whose range extends from
the Ob eastward to the Lena, and south to the Volga, Lake Baikal, and the upper
Amur (4). According to Berg (l.c.: 187), it attains 65 to 130 lb. (30-60 kg.),
and in the Yenisel, Khatanga, and Piasina old records go up to 177 lb. (80 kg.),
almost twice the weight of the largest lake trout or king salmon. A smaller
related form is the lenok , Brachymystax lenok , which has a similar range in the
Arctic except that it is found also in the Kolyma. These trout do not enter the
sea, and are, in consequence, entirely confined to unglaciated watersheds. Never–
theless, the taimen makes migrations upstream to spawn, behaving like a salmon in
its persistent attempts to leap waterfalls.Inconnu . The inconnu or “conny” ( Stenodus leucichthys ) has a particularly
interesting and well-known distribution. It was first recorded in North America
016 | Vol_III-0914
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
by Samuel Hearne at Great Slave Lake in 1772, and received its name from the
— fact that it was “unknown” to the French-Canadian voyageurs voyageurs . It is now recog–
nized as being a race ( Stenodus leucichthys mackenzii ) of the wide-ranging
northern fish found in the Volga and other Caspian rivers ( S. leucichthys
— leucichthys leucichthys ), and in the great northern rivers of the U . S . S . R . , where it is known
as nielma ( S. leucichthys nelma ).The conny stands between the typical salmonines and the whitefish or
coregonines. Its teeth are in fact numerous, but so small and densely packed
as to be inconspicuous. It is an anadronous migrant, spawning chiefly in
running water probably in late summer; and those individuals inhabiting the
lower 500 to 700 miles of the rivers largely return to the sea in the late fall.
They migrate upstream from June to August as far as the first real rapids, and
they are, therefore, unknown in the Slave River above Fort Smith. Many no doubt
spawn in the Mackenzie itself, including even the delta, in which yearling
stages three centimeters in length have been found by the author. There is a
large immature population, for maturity is not reached, in the nielma at least,
until the eighth year, when the fishes’ length is about 20 inches (50 cm.).Inconnu readily take the hook. Their food consists of small fish, includ–
ing whitefish and herring, sculpins, minnows, and sticklebacks; when young
they take aquatic insects (41). They do well in muddy rivers.— It is the general con c s ensus that the conny population of Great Slave Lake
and the larger tributaries of the Mackenzie is independent of that in the Mac–
kenzie proper, and that there is little or no migration between Great Slave Lake
and the sea. There is probably no part of the navigable system of the river, from
Fort Smith to the sea, from which connies are always absent. But they are quite
uncommon in the lower Liard and between Fort Simpson and Providence Rapids.
017 | Vol_III-0915
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
They occur in the Peel, but appear to be absent from Great Bear Lake, being
kept from it by the Bear River rapids. There is indeed an old record of Simpson’s
(45) of one inconnu taken at Fort Confidence, but it must be accepted with reserve,
since the species was not rediscovered during the recent fisheries exploration.Inconnu form an important part of the fall fishery above Providence, and at Hay,
Buffalo, and Rocher rivers, all situated around Great Slave Lake; they are taken
incidentally in whitefish and river-herring nets at the Ramparts, the Arctic Red
River, and in the Mackenzie delta. They are not esteemed as food in summer, either
here or in Siberia, being usually oily and rank. But they are palatable when small,
and also in the winter and spring; at all times they are acceptable as dog feed.The eastern limit in North America is in the Anderson River. Probably they
enter some of the larger rivers along the coast west of the Mackenzie. They are
known in the Kobuk (15), and are generally distributed in the Yukon and its tribu–
taries, though by no means as abundant as in the Mackenzie. In these areas they are
of little economic value. Specimens have been obtained in Teslin Lake, on the 60th
parallel, and inconnu are caught in small numbers in Kluane Lake. They have been
verbally reported to the author on less reliable authority from Mayo Lake.In the U.S.S.R. the nielma is present in all the large rivers from the White
Sea eastward, including the Dvina, Pechora, Ob, Yenisei, Khatanga, Lena, Indigirka,
Kolyma, and Anadyr, the last, like the Yukon, entering the Bering Sea. The nielma
ascends as soon as the ice is out, and its distribution is similarly restricted by the
first serious rapids, which excludes it from Lake Baikal, standing 1,500 feet above
sea level. It attains a larger size than in the Mackenzie, 50 lb. (22 kg.) being not
uncommon, and 88 lb. (40 kg.) recorded, compared with a maximum of 50 lb. in the
Mackenzie.Tullibee . The taxonomy of the tullibee ( genus genus Leucichthys ) and the whitefish
(genus Coregonus ), together constituting the coregonine subfamily of the Salmonidae,
is even more confusing and difficult than that of the salmonine division. The
018 | Vol_III-0916
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
Many freshwater herrings are principally lake fish, being rather seldom
taken in rivers; but there are also a few which are essentially river fish.
All are largely plankton feeders, sifting small organisms from the water passing
through their gills, by means of numerous long gill rakers arranged in four pairs
of curved combs at the sides of the gullet.Of the lake herrings, the most widespread in Canada is the tullibee
( Leucichthys artedi ) which, in one or another of its many local forms, extends
from New England and southern Quebec to Great Bear Lake, whence it is celebrated
as the “Bear Lake herring.” It is said to spawn in July. In the Great Lakes
region, the tullibee and similar fish are named ciscoes. Tullibee occur in the
watersheds entering the east side of Hudson Bay north to Great Whale River and
Richmond Gulf (10), and in the watersheds entering the west side of Hudson Bay;
at certain times they are found in brackish water at their mouths. They are
found throughout the Thelon-Dubawnt and Back systems (20), and in all parts of
the Mackenzie Basin north of the 60th parallel at least. In many of the more
temperate lakes to the southward, two or more independent species of herring
may live together in the same waters. In Lake Athabaska, the second species
is apparently L. zenthicus . Tullibees are not reported either from northern
Ungava, Labrador, and Newfoundland, or from the Yukon and Alaska.Rather similar to the tullibee is the large river herring, Leucichthys
laurettae , of the Mackenzie and lower Yukon, which probably occurs also in the
intermediate rivers entering the Arctic Sea and the mouth of the Coppermine.
L. laurettae is probably the nearctic representative of the Siberian omul ,
L. autumnalis . In the Mackenzie, the river herring has been found as far up
as Camsell Bend; it forms the principal object of the summer fishery at the
— Ramparts, and is caught in numbers also at Arctic Red River and Aklavik. It
019 | Vol_III-0917
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
attains a length of 12 to 18 inches (30-45 cm.) and a weight of 3 lb. (1.4 kg.).
It is migratory, being caught at Aklavik between freeze-up and Christmas presumably
on its way out to the sea, and ascending again in early spring. In the Yukon it
is common at the mouth, but does not come up as far as the Canadian border. It has
also been recorded from the Meade, Kuaru (now known as Inaru), Nushagak, and Naknek
rivers in Alaska (15).In most of the same rivers there is found a smaller species seldom attaining
12 inches (30 cm.) and with a strongly projecting chin, formerly called Leucichthys
pusillus , but shown by Dymond (11) to represent the Asiatic species L. sardinella .
This is also a migratory fish of little economic value in the Mackenzie, partly on
account of the fact that all but the largest individuals pass through the 3-inch
nets, which are the smallest in common use in the river. Its distribution in the
Mackenzie is the same as that of the previous species. In the Yukon they are abun–
dant right up to the headwaters, and are best known at Carcross, lying in immense
schools in summer beneath the railroad bridge across the narrows between Lakes Ben–
nett and Tagish, where children take them on hooks. It is the only Leucichthys cer–
tainly known to occur in the interior of the Yukon Territory, and is probably the
species reported from Mayo and Teslin lakes.The last two species, or their near relatives, are very plentiful in the Siber–
ian rivers. Leucichthys sardinella , referred to by Nansen (36) as the seld , has the
wider distribution, from the Dvina to Anadyr, and also in Novaya Zemlya and Kolguev
Island. It is migratory and does not reach Lake Baikal. The omul , L. autumnalis , is
not found in the Dvina or Ob, according to Berg (4), though he records it in the inter–
mediate Pechora and in the Yenisei, including Baikal, the Lena, and Kolyma.Siberia has also the tugun and peled ( L. tugun and L. peled ), so that four
species of Leucichthys Leucichthys coexist in the Yenisei and Lena, as against two in the Yukon
and Mackenzie.In northern and arctic Europe there are the various fish known as “vendace”
020 | Vol_III-0918
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
in north England and adjacent parts of Scotland, as “pollan” in Ireland, lake–
sild in Norway and smasik in Sweden; all are forms of Leucichthys albula , and
inhabit lakes like the tullibee. Spawning takes place in the late fall.Whitefish . The whitefish ( Coregonus spp.) are collectively the most valuable
group of arctic fishes, and justly celebrated for their good flavor. Richardson
(42) says “though it is a rich, fat fish, instead of producing satiety it becomes
daily more agreeable to the palate; and I know, from experience, that though
deprived of bread and vegetables, one may live wholly on this fish for months,
or even years, without tiring.”Whitefish are generally larger than lake herrings, often weighing 3 to 5 lb.
(about 2 kg.); and the exceptional “jumbos” weigh very much more. Whitefish
feed to a large extent on bottom organisms, including crustaceans and mollusks,
rather than on plankton; the stomach is thick, and the gill rakers correspond–
ingly shorter than in Leucichthys. Some are inhabitants of large rivers, others
of lakes. They are rather sluggish fish, but many of them are migratory and
capable of entering brackish or salt water.In North America, east of the Rockies, the most widespread species is Core–
gonus clupeaformis , the common whitefish, of which a number of subspecies have
been described. The species is highly variable and it is difficult to find char–
acters of taxonomic value. Such obvious features as the size of the eye and the
shape of the back, which is frequently developed into a prominent hump behind
the head, vary from one locality and even from one individual to another.The common whitefish ranges from New England to Ungava (Great Whale River
(10); Kokscak River (P. Orlin, verbal communication)); and from the Great Lakes
northward to Baker Lake, the Thelon and Back rivers (20). It is present in Great
Slave and Great Bear lakes. A closely allied if not conspecific form is well
021 | Vol_III-0919
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
known in the Mackenzie and Yukon, and rivers and lakes of Alaska; it is known
as the “humpback” or “crooked-back,” and to the Indians at Arctic Red River
as teltsin ( Coregonus nelsonii ).The common whitefish falls into the same species group as the universal
palaearctic species Coregonus lavaretus Coregonus lavaretus , known as “powan” in Scotland, sik in
— Sweden, and sig in the U . S . S . R. This species is found in all the mainland water–
sheds of northern Europe and Asia and is of considerable economic importance.
The Mackenzie humpback most closely resembles the Siberian form C. lavaretus
pidschian . There is a second species in the Mackenzie and Yukon, known there
as the broad or true whitefish, and by various Indian names such as khlugu–
zhey (Arctic Red River) and tezareh (Yukon Territory), and scientifically as
Coregonus kennicotti . It differs from helsonii in many prominent characters,
most conspicuously in the larger maximum size (over 4 lb. or 2 kg.), the blunt
snout and rounded head, the broad back, large adipose fin, pale-colored eggs
(orange-yellow in nelsonii nelsonii ). The gill rakers are short, less than half the
height of the adipose fin, 21 to 24 in number. In nelsonii the gill rakers
are about equal to the height of the adipose fin, and number 25 to 28. The
rim of the eye in kennicotti is much farther from the supplemental bone of the
maxilla than in nelsonii .There can be little doubt that the Mackenzie broad whitefish is the same
species as the Siberian chir , Coregonus nasus , and it should be named C. nasus
— kennicotti kennicotti . The differences which distinguish the chir from the sig are pre–
cisely those which have just been mentioned as distinguishing kennicotti and
nelsonii : the chir has the characteristic blunt head, the wide space between
orbit and maxilla, the short gill rakers, 19 or 21 to 25 in number, and the
more numerous scales of the broad whitefish, and similarly grows to a larger
size than the sig .
022 | Vol_III-0920
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
The broad whitefish spawns in the rivers in August. In the Mackenzie at
Arctic Red River and elsewhere, females outnumber males by 12 or 15 to 1; the
sex ratio is similarly unequal in the humpback whitefish.The remaining Siberian species, the muksun ( Coregonus muksun ), has no coun–
— terpart so far recognized in North America, having 44 g t o 65 gill rakers, far
in excess of the number found in any nearctic Coregonus .In addition to those already mentioned, there are some additional types
peculiar to special districts, for example, the “squanga” found in Squanga Lake,
southern Yukon Territory, which is notable for its extraordinary development of
rough warts, the so-called nuptial tubercles, from head to tail; by the fact
that there are 26 rows of scales, counted diagonally down the side of the body,
which is more than in any other described form; and by having 28 to 29 gill
rakers, the highest number of any nearctic Coregonus . Superficially, and in some
fundamental characters, it comes closest to C. muksun aspius from Lake Onega in
Russia. At Squanga Lake the common whitefish ( nelsonii ) is also present, but the
two are said to have different spawning beds.Spawning takes place in the late summer and fall, as late as November in
some northern species. The lake whitefish spawn in shallow water, and the prin–
cipal fishing takes place immediately before freeze-up and also beneath the ice
in winter. The river whitefish are often strongly migratory, and both the
Mackenzie and Yukon species enter the sea. The broad whitefish, Coregonus nasus
kennicotti , is not to be found above the first rapids, and has not been taken
above Camsell Bend in the main Mackenzie River. The upstream run takes place in
July and August, the broad whitefish coming somewhat earlier than the humpback.
The return may be in midwinter, since there was formerly an important winter
fishery for broad whitefish about Minto and Pelly Crossing in the Yukon Territory.
023 | Vol_III-0921
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
Whitefish are usually caught in gill nets set in shallow water. In
rivers, the nets must be short and set in eddies close to the banks; in
Siberia, the seine net is commonly used. Occasionally, whitefish will take
the angler's fly. They are frequently cured by air-drying and smoking in
wooded country. The fish is cut along both sides of the spine, and a single
fillet prepared from the top side without cutting into the belly; it remains
attached to the spine at the tail, so that the prepared fish may be hung over
a pole with the bones on one side and the flesh on the other. The head and
entrails are removed. Salmon fillets are also dried and smoked by the Pacific
coast Indians. The fish loses 70% of its weight by evaporation and is a
valuable food, for dogs particularly, during winter travel. Fish is a staple
food of sledge dogs throughout the North and has been much used for feed in
fox and mink ranches. A dog will consume up to 1,000 pounds of fish per annum.Round Whitefish . The round whitefish ( Prosopium app.) is more slender in
shape than the Coregonus species, with a small mouth, blunt snout, and fewer
and shorter gill rakers (up to 16 only). It inhabits rivers and lakes.Prosopium cylindraceum is widespread in the Arctic and Subarctic, both in
Siberia (Yenisei excluding Baikal, also Lena, Kolyma, Anadyr, and Kamchatka)
and in North America (Alaska, Yukon, Mackenzie, and eastward to the Coppermine,
Bathurst Inlet and Churchill River, Great Lakes, central and southern Ontario,
Quebec, and Ungava north to the Koksoak (P. Orkin, verbal communication)). It
may enter salt water at the mouths of rivers. The round whitefish from the
Anadyr, Kamchatka, and North America is P. cylindraceum quadrilaterale , first
described by Richardson from Fort Enterprise. It is seldom sufficiently con–
centrated to be the object of a special fishery, although one of the most universal
of northern freshwater fish. It spawns in the fall.
024 | Vol_III-0922
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
Other species include the Rocky Mountain whitefish ( Prosopium williamsoni ),
not yet certainly known north of British Columbia, and a rare interesting little
fish known as P. coulterii , so far detected only in a few isolated places in
Washington, British Columbia, southern Alaska (near Chignik and Lake Aleknagik),
and the Yukon Territory (Sockeye Lake on the upper Alsek, lat. 60°30′ N., long.
137°38′ W.). These are all in the Pacific slope drainage.The young stages of Prosopium species have parr marks, i.e., a row of uni–
form large rounded patches of dark pigment like finger marks, on the sides of
the body. In this they resemble the salmon-like fishes and grayling, but differ
from other coregonines.Graylings: Thymallidae
The "bluefish" of northern Canada and Alaska is the nearctic representa–
tive of the widespread species Thymallus arcticus , which in Asia extends from
Kamchatka and the Anadyr west to the Urals. In Canada the arctic grayling ex–
tends southeastward to the Churchill and its tributaries. It is present in the
Thelon, Back, Coppermine, and Anderson systems, and in abundant in clear streams
and shallow lakes draining into the Mackenzie and Yukon and their upper tribu–
taries. It is also found throughout western and northern Alaska, south to the
Nushagak River. It is not known to occur in rivers entering the Pacific proper,
excepting the Alsek, which is also unique among Pacific coast watersheds in con–
taining the round whitefish.Bluefish are distinguished by the magnificent dorsal fin, which is of great
size, with blue spots on a dark ground and an edging of red. They may be caught
on an artificial fly more readily than any other fish known to us. Bluefish
attain a length of 16 inches (40 cm.) and a weight of about 1 3/4 pounds (0.8 kg.).
025 | Vol_III-0923
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
Characteristically they are found in schools in clear water, and avoid the large
turbid rivers. In the Mackenzie itself they may be taken at several points,
such as Wrigley at the outlet of Great Slave Lake, and along the right bank at
Simpson, where the water is clear. Occasionally they penetrate milky glacier
streams and are then pale in color. Grayling apparently spawn in early spring,
running out of the small creeks soon thereafter in May; Preble (38) describes
an Indian grayling trap used at this season near Fort Simpson. They are good
eating only if cooked as soon as caught.Smelts: Osmeridae
Smelts are small fish, usually less than 12 inches (30 cm.) in length, but
rich in fat and extremely nutritious, notwithstanding their characteristic and
somewhat disagreeable odor. Many of them are marine, spawning among the
breakers on beaches or in shallow water, for example, the well-known capelin,
Mallotus villosus , of the coasts of the arctic North Atlantic, North Pacific,
and Bering Sea, and the eulachon or candlefish of the Pacific coasts.Smelts have an adipose fin, and are silvery fish with a projecting lower
jaw; their teeth are developed and often conspicuous. One species that spawns
— in fresh water is circumpolar, namely, Osmerus eperlanus . It en e ters the sea
freely, though it may be entirely landlocked in some waters. Typical eperlanus
occur throughout western Europe and the Baltic countries to the Murman coast.
In Siberia, including Kamchatka, in Alaska and northwest Canada, east to the
Mackenzie, the type found is O. eperlanus dentex . It ascends the Mackenzie to
Arctic Red River and is common in the Mackenzie Delta. (Berg does not record
it from the Lena and Kolyma.).The eastern form is O. eperlanus mordax , and is found in the Great Lakes-
St. Lawrence region. It is scarcely subarctic at any point of its known range,
026 | Vol_III-0924
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
which reaches Baie Comeau on the north shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, Lake
St. John, and Rimouski.A second species, the pond smelt ( Hypomesus clidus ), is a little-known fish
of the rivers entering Bering Sea and the Mackenzie; it has been taken in the
Peel above McPherson, actually over the border of the Yukon Territory.The chief value of smelts is as food for many kinds of predaceous fish,
seals, and birds.Suckers: Catostomidae
The common sucker, Catostomus commersonnii , extends from the Great Lakes to
Hudson Bay and the Mackenzie, as far down as Good Hope; but it is not known to
occur in any waters in the District of Keewatin. It is usually called the "grey
sucker" in the Northwest.The northern sucker, Catostomus catostomus , is much more widely distributed;
its northern range includes the Albany, Nelson, Churchill, and Thelon watersheds.
In the last-mentioned area, it is recorded in Artillery Lake (Critchell-Bullock
1931: 33) (7) , head of Hanbury River ( Hanbury 1904: 41 20 ), and in the same river below
Dickson's Canyon ( Hornby 1934: 109 25 ). It is also recorded from Great Bear Lake,
the Mackenzie to the delta, the whole Yukon watershed, the Alsek-Dezadeash, and
Alaska, generally. Across Bering strait it has been found in the Kolyma, In–
digirka, and Iana, and it has also been reported from the Anadyr. This species
is the "red sucker" of the Northwest Territories, though the same name is used
for other species in temperate parts of the continent.Suckers spawn in spring. They are not of much economic value, though by
no means to be despised as food in spite of the numerous small bones.
027 | Vol_III-0925
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
Minnows: Cyprinidae
Other than Couesius no cyprinids are known to occur in Ungava north of the
St. Lawrence drainage, nor even in the latter east of Baie Comeau (English River).
At least six species occur in arctic and subarctic America west of Hudson Bay.The fine-scale minnow, Pfrille (phoxinus) neogaea , has been reported from
Fort Severn, northern Ontario; Charlie Lake, Peace River District, British
Columbia; and was taken by the author at Fort Good Hope, District of Mackenzie.The long-nosed minnow, Rhinichthys cataractae , is found in the Mackenzie
Basin: at the mouth of the North Nahanni, at Good Hope, and in the Peel River
at latitude 66°32′ N., longitude 137°05′ W; the last station is in Yukon Ter–
ritory. It is otherwise known from the Atlantic to the Pacific, chiefly in the
St. Lawrence drainage and thence south of the international boundary, but reaching
at least the Severn and other rivers in northern Ontario which enter James Bay
(40).The northern chub, Couesius plumbeus (including C. dissimilis and C. greeni ),
is found in the Mackenzie Basin, generally distributed down to the delta, but is
not found in Great Bear Lake. It has been reported in the Yukon Basin: below
Five Finger Rapids, in the Donjek River, and in the Porcupine River at Old Crow.
This is the only cyprinid in the Yukon. It probably occurs in Alaska, although
it has never been reported from there. It is found in all the Provinces of Canada
from New Brunswick to British Columbia, north to Fort Severn in Ontario (40), and
the Indian House Lake region of the George River system, Ungava (30).The flat-head chub, Platygobio gracilis , is a large "minnow" which also fre–
quents the Mackenzie, but has never been reported below Good Hope. It extends
southward to the three Prairie Provinces. It was originally described by Richard–
son from Carlton House on the Saskatchewan.
028 | Vol_III-0926
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
The spot-tail shiner, Notropis hudsonius , is found in the St. Lawrence
and the Great Lakes northwestward to the Saskatchewan-Nelson system, and in
Hayes River above York Factory. It appears also in the Mackenzie watershed:
Lesser Slave Lake, Lake Athabaska, and the main river down to Good Hope.The emerald shiner, Notropis atherinoides , is distributed like the pre–
vious species, but north of latitude 60° N. is known only from Mills Lake
and Simpson in the Mackenzie.In northern Europe and Siberia a larger number of cyprinids occur, in–
cluding the reach ( Rutilus rutilus ), dace ( Leuciscus leuciscus ), ide ( L. idus ),
minnow ( Phoxinus shoxinus ), [ ?] ench ( Tinca tinca ), gudgeon ( Gobio gobio ), and
the crucian carp ( Carassius carassius ). Several of these fish are large enough
to be of economic value.Blackfish: Umbridae
The Alaska blackfish, Dallia pectoralis , is one of the most curious and
interesting of northern fish. Its range is circumscribed, being chiefly in
the low grounds and coastal regions of northwest Alaska, from the Seward
Peninsula southward, and also in St. Lawrence Island and a small area of the
Chukotak Peninsula adjacent to the latter on the Asiatic side of Bering Strait.
Where found it exists in extraordinary numbers, and "is probably the most abun–
dant of all fishes which occur in the fresh and brackish waters of the northern
part of Alaska" (15; 50). It has been reported in the Yukon from the delta,
Andreafski, and at the junction of the Tenana; from the kuekokwim and Nushagak
rivers; and around Norton Sound generally.The blackfish attains a length of only 8 inches (20 cm.), and is exceedingly
fat. It inhabits especially the countless small shallow ponds of the tundra,
029 | Vol_III-0927
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
and even sphagnum swamps "which at times seem to contain water sufficient only
to moisten the skin of the fish" (50). Turner thought this mossy covering might help
to protect them from the winter's cold. They spawn in June and July, and sometimes
block the outlet streams of the ponds completely, so immense are their numbers.
The Indians, in Turner's time, removed "tons and tons of them daily."Undoubtedly blackfish are exceptionally adapted to withstand freezing.
They are exceedingly tenacious to life; and, after being caught and left in wicker
baskets to freeze, they may remain alive for weeks and revive on thawing or when
swallowed by dogs, although they have been frozen so hard that they must be chopped
out with an axe or divided into pieces with a club.Turner is still almost our sole authority on the natural history of Dallia ,
which certainly merits further study. The generic name was bestowed in honor of
Dr. W. H. Dall, pioneer naturalist of the Western Union Telegraph Expedition of
1865-67 and collector of the original specimens of the blackfish.Pike: Esocidae
The northern pike or jackfish, Esox lucius , is circumpolar. In the nearctic
region its known northern limit extends into Ungava as far as latitude 56° N. in
the George River (30), though it has not been reported from any rivers of the
Labrador coast; English River at Baie Comeau, and thence to the whole of Ontario
and Manitoba, including the Albany, Severn, Nelson, and Churchill. In the North–
west Territories it has not been found in any of the rivers of Keewatin, nor in
the Back nor Coppermine watersheds, though it occurs in the Anderson (38). It
is present and often abundant throughout the lowland rivers and lakes of the Mac–
kenzie system. In Great Bear Lake, where it attains a weight of at least 16 pounds
(7 1/4 kg.), it is rather scarce and local. In the Yukon watershed, the pike is
030 | Vol_III-0928
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
— generally distributed and usually common; it is present also in the Kobuk r R iver
in Alaska (15). Esox lucius does not occur in the Pacific coast drainages of
North America or Asia, south of latitude 60° N. (i.e., south of Bering Sea).In eastern Asia the pike is absent from Kamchatka except at the base of the
peninsula (Vivinskaia River on the east coast and Penzhina River entering Okhotsk
Sea); but it is generally distributed northward and westward, in the Anadyr,
Kolyma, and all the northern rivers of Siberia and Europe, excepting those on
the Atlantic slope of Norway. It has never been reported from arctic or sub–
arctic islands, but only from the mainland, for it is a stenohaline species
unable to survive long in the sea. The distribution maps published by Berg (4)
and amended by Hinks (24) are evidently incorrect regarding the nearctic northern
limit.Trout Perch: Percopsidae
This endemic American family contains a single species, the trout perch,
( Percopsis omiscomaycus ), a small and adaptable fish of no economic value, often
frequenting sluggish muddy waters. Its flesh is semitransparent, and it is
marked externally with large black spots; it combines in a highly anomalous
manner the head and scale characters of a perch with the adipose fin of the
salmonids. It grows to 6 inches (15 cm.).It has a wide range: from the Mississippi Val l ey and the Hudson River north
to Lake St. John, James Bay, the Albany, Severn, and Nelson systems; thence to
the Mackenzie Basin, in which the author found it down to Good Hope (66° N.);
and Miller (34) reported it in Great Bear Lake. It extends farther, having been
found in 1945 at Old Crow on the Porcupine River (lat. 67°40' N.), which flows
to the Yukon. It probably also exists in Alaska.
031 | Vol_III-0929
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards; Freshwater Vertebrates
Perch: Percidae
The American pike perch, Lucioperca (Stizostedion ) vitreum , more commonly
— known as the dor e é , "walleyed pike", or "pickerel", extends northward to Lakes
Mistassini and Chibougamau and the waters draining into James Bay in western
Quebec; to the whole of Ontario and Nanitoba, as far as the Churchill (51);
and the Mackenzie watershed down to Great Bear Lake and the Mackenzie Delta.
Records have not been found for any of the rivers of Keewatin.This is a valuable commercial species in Manitoba, and very widely known
as a sporting fish. Its normal size is 2 to 3 lb. (about 1 kg.), but it may
exceed 12 lb. (5 kg.). It is chiefly a lake fish, though generally distributed
in the main Mackenzie River.The related palaearctic species do not extend north of the rivers entering
the Baltic or east of the Volga-Caspian system.The American perch, Perca flavescens , does not reach as far to the north
— as the dor e é dor e é , and has little claim to be included here. In Ontario and Manitoba
it inhabits the James and Hudson Bay rivers, north to the Saskatchewan-Nelson.
It has been found in Lesser Slave Lake and Lake Athabaska in Alberta, but not
as yet in any part of the Northwest Territories.The Old World perch, Perca fluviatilis , on the other hand, is generally
distributed in temperate and arctic Europe and Asia, east to the Ko l yma. The
related pope or ruff, Acerina cernua , is very similarly distributed, but has no
close relative in North America.Sculpins: Cottidae
Sculpins or bullheads are small fishes, some marine and others freshwater,
of no economic importance, but very characteristic of cold northern seas, rivers,
032 | Vol_III-0930
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
and lakes. All are bottom feeders and some of the littoral marine species may
enter the mouths of rivers. An example is the long-horned sculpin, Myoxocephalus
quadricornis , found in geographically varying forms on all the arctic coasts,
except Norway, but including the Baltic and Hudson Bay. It is found in the mouths
of many of the rivers.The several freshwater forms of this fish retain throughout life some of
their juvenile characters, lacking, for example, the four rugose spines on the
head, to which the name quadricornis refers. They are found in wetter, Wener,
Ladoga, Onega, and other lakes in northern Europe, where they are regarded as
relicts of the "Yoldia Sea." The so-called Triglopsis thompsonii of the Great
Lakes seems to be an analogous derivative (cf. 51).Of the ordinary freshwater bullheads it is convenient to distinguish those
which are prickly skinned all over from those which are mostly smooth or slimy.
The former include Cottus sibiricus and C. ricei. C. sibiricus is found in the
Ob, Yenisei, Lena, and Kolyma (4); it closely resembles C. ricei in the long,
curved preopercular spine and the broad, flat head, which gives the name "spoon–
head muddler" to the American species. C. ricei has the following northern
range: Great Lakes northward in Ontario to James Bay and Fort Severn (40);
the Saskatchewan system in the Prairie Provinces (but not recorded from the Nel–
son); Mackenzie watershed, in Lesser Slave Lake and Lake Athabaska (12), in the
main river to the delta, and in the Peel River. It has not been found in Great
Bear Lake (nor yet in Great Slave, where it probably is present), and it is
unrecorded from the Yukon system. On the Pacific coast it reaches some rivers
on southeastern Alaska, e.g., in the Ketchikan area (15).The smooth bullheads more or less resemble Cottus gobio , a palaearctic
species practically universal in cold clear streams in northern Europe and Asia.
033 | Vol_III-0931
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
C. cognatus , the most widespread bullhead in North America, is scarcely dis–
tinguishable from C. gobio ; it was described by Richardson (42) from Great
Bear Lake, and extends from there and the Hanbury River (12) to Quebec and the
Maritimes. Smooth bullheads are found in all parts of the Yukon system and
Alaska, and they must for the present be included in C. cognatus ; indeed all
the diverse American material lumped together under this name could probably
be equally well grouped into the superspecies C. gobio .Under this heading mention must be made of the unique endemic fauna of Lake
Baikal, which comprises not only a number of peculiar amphipod crustaceans and
unique mollusks, one of which is a nudibranch, but also two endemic families of
fishes related to the bullheads, namely, the Cottocomepheridae and the Comephori–
dae. These contain about sixteen species between them. There is abundant evi–
dence that Lake Baikal is a very ancient body of fresh water, and the origin of
the oldest part of the peculiar fauna dates from early Tertiary times.Sticklebacks: Gasterosteidae
Two species of sticklebacks, Gasterosteus aculeatus and Pungitius pungitius ,
are found in the Arctic. Both are euryhaline, occurring in salt, brackish, or
fresh water; but, being small fish and not migratory, individually they stay
for the most part in one or other of these environments. Conspicuous differ–
ences are developed in G. aculeatus between marine and freshwater races. Though
small, sticklebacks are sometimes so numerous, and so universal in their combined
distribution, that they are probably the most important forage fish for the
large predatory trout and char.The three-spined stickleback, Gasterosteus aculeatus , has a disrupted
Atlantic-Pacific distribution. It has been found in rivers entering the head
034 | Vol_III-0932
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
of James Bay (40), at Payne Lake, Ungava (30), at York Factory (3), and Tavani
(12) in Hudson Bay. From Baffin Island (19), Hudson Strait (51), and South Green–
land, it extends commonly southward in the Atlantic coast drainage of Canada. It
occurs in Iceland and Europe generally, east to the Urals. In the North Pacific
region, it is present from the Anadyr and Kamchatka to Japan; and on the Amer–
ican side from the Pribilof Islands and Dutch Harbor (Aleutian Islands), south
to California.The nine-spined stickleback, Pungitius pungitius , is more widely distributed.
In North America it is present in the Great Lakes, Newfoundland, Labrador, Ungava,
Baffin Island (19; 31); at least 800 feet above sea level at Cumberland Sound
(47); the Churchill, other rivers of Manitoba, and those entering James Bay;
in the Mackenzie system, including the Slave River, North Nahanni, and the delta,
besides Great Bear Lake, whence it has been known since the time of Richardson
(42). It has not been found in the Yukon Territory, but has been recorded from
the lower Yukon River at Andreafski and St. Michael; and from many other Alaskan
rivers north to Point Barrow; also from the Pribilof and Aleutian Islands (15).In Asia it is recorded from every northern watershed, including those of
Kamchatka and Bering Sea, though absent from Lake Baikal. It is generally dis–
tributed likewise throughout the waters of northern Europe and Greenland, but is
absent from Iceland.Ling: Gadidae
The freshwater ling, Lota lota , is circumpolar. It was formerly known in
the fur country of Canada as the methy , a Cree name, or by the French-Canadian
name of loche . In Britain it is called the "burbot."It is usually stated to "exist in every river and lake from Canada to the
035 | Vol_III-0933
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
northern extremity of the continent," in Richardson's phrase (42) or similar
words. However, there seems to be only one published reference each for
Keewatin and Ungava.So far as known to us, its northern limit is as follows. In Quebec, it
occurs east to Lake St. John and north to Chimo, Ungava Bay (28); this record
is based on L. M. Turner's collection, and M. J. Dunbar informs the author
that Turner's unpublished manuscript says of Lota maculosa that "the burbot is
quite common in the lakes of the Ungava district, in fact more common than the
number of specimens obtained would indicate." It is present throughout Ontario
and Manitoba north to the Severn (40) and Churchill (51). Critchell-Bullock (7)
caught one in the Hanbury-Thelon system during his journey to Hudson Bay, making
the Irish comment that it is "almost absent." It is found in the Coppermine
(43), in Great Bear Lake, and throughout the Mackenzie and Yukon systems. Other
Alaskan rivers from which it has been recorded include the Kobuk and Nushagak.
It occurs southward on the Pacific coast to the Columbia River.In the palaearctic region it is found in southern Britain, in all the Baltic
countries (but not Norway), and from the White Sea eastward it is recorded by
Berg (4) from every northern watershed in Russia and Asia as far as the Kolyma
and Anadyr.The Old World subspecies is Lota lota lota ; that in the Kolyma, Anadyr,
Alaska, and Mackenzie is L. lota leptura ; and the common American form is L. lota
maculosa (26). (But Mackenzie and Yukon specimens do not appear to be inter–
mediate between leptura and maculosa , as anticipated by Hubbs and Schultz.)Freshwater ling attain a length of 3 feet (90 cm.), but are insipid in
flavor and not esteemed as food. They are voracious in habits and occur both
in lakes and in large and small streams. They spawn in midwinter under the
ice.
036 | Vol_III-0934
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
Other species of Gadidae sometimes enter brackish estuaries and rivers,
including Microgadus tomcod (St. Lawrence and Labrador), Eleginus navaga
( = gracillis) (Mackenzie, Alaska, eastern Siberia), and Gadus ogac (Canadian
eastern Arctic and Greenland). The tomcod is landlocked in Lake St. John,
Quebec (29).Amphibia
In North America two species of frogs extend into the subarctic region of
permafrost. These amphibians must hibernate in water of sufficient depth to
escape being frozen in, and in summer the water must be warm enough for a suit–
able time to allow the development of the egg and tadpole stages.As far as can be ascertained, all the northernmost species metamorphose
in their natal summer, never hibernating as tadpoles. Interesting work by
Moore (35) has revealed important physiological differences between different
American species of Rana in the relation between water temperature and the devel–
opment rate of the embryo. The species which extends farthest north, namely,
the northern wood frog ( R. sylvatica ), has the highest rate of development at any
given temperature. It has also the lowest "temperature coefficient," indicating
that temperature changes have the least effect in modifying the rate of develop–
ment; and it can tolerate lower minimum temperatures than other species.It may be observed that frogs extend farthest north in regions where the
summer is warmest, and that their limit roughly coincides with the 50°F. (10°C.)
July isotherm, rather than with a mean annual temperature of 0°C., as has some–
times been stated. It appears to be the summer rather than the winter tempera–
ture which is limiting.Other known adaptations of northern races of frogs include larger egg size,
037 | Vol_III-0935
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
submerged egg masses which cannot therefore be frozen in surface ice, and a
marked tendency to shortening of the hind legs.A considerable number of Amphibia stop short in the region of James By
in the east, and the 60th parallel in Western Canada and Alaska, including
Triturus viridescens , T. granulosus , Bufo americanus , B. hemiophrys , B. boreas ,
Rana pipiens , and R. pretiosa . At least two species extend considerably
farther north than this; their northern limits are defined below.The northern wood frog, Rana sylvatica cantabrigensis , is found at Fort
Yukon (6); Selkirk and Lake Lebarge, Yukon Territory (personal observation);
down the Mackenzie Valley to Fort Norman and at old Fort Good Hope (38);
probably Anderson River (38); Great Bear Lake, collected by Richardson (5);
Churchill and York Factory on Hudson Bay (39). In Ungava, frogs of this
species occur north to Fort Chimo at the mouth of the Koksoak River (23); they
have been seen in Ungava Bay, where the Eskimos refrain from harming them, ad–
hering to the widespread primitive belief that frogs have an influence on the
weather. Hantzsch (21) also saw an unidentified frog on the Ungava coast.
Packard reported " R. septentrionalis " from Okkak, Labrador. There are no
records of frogs on the east shore of Hudson Bay, however, north of East Main.The northern limit outlined here considerably exceeds the range shown by
Moore (35).The northern swamp tree frog, Pseudacris nigrita septentrionalis , occurs
in the Mackenzie region well to the northward of Great Slave Lake, namely, at
Forts Simpson and Norman (38); Wrigley, and perhaps the Franklin Mountains
to the eastward, where Williams (52) mentions hearing "pipers" in early July;
Great Bear Lake, the type locality of septentrionalis (5), which is based on
specimens collected by Richardson. Otherwise it is found in the Prairie
Provinces north to Norway House and York Factory, Manitoba (39).
038 | Vol_III-0936
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
In the Old World, the common frog, Rana temporaria , has the highest
northern range, extending throughout the whole of Scandinavia, Finland, and
the U.S.S.R. to well above the Arctic Circle. It ascends to 9,000 feet (3,000
meters) above sea level in the Alps and Pyrenees, and to 4,000 feet (1,200 meters)
in the Dovrefjell in Norway, in both cases close to the snow line. Several other
species, including R. arvalis and Bufo vulgaris , just reach the Arctic Circle.No Amphibia are native to Iceland, Greenland, or Newfoundland, though
introduced frogs have long been established in the last-mentioned area.Mammalia
The white whale white whale or beluga, Delphinapterus leucas , scarcely merits inclusion
here. Like some other porpoises it often frequents estuaries, and in pursuit
of fish it may penetrate a considerable distance into fresh water on temporary
visits.The type locality of the species is the mouth of the Ob River. Nansen (36)
saw it in the Yenisei at latitude 69°43′ N., more than 100 miles above the head
of Yenisei Bay.It is very abundant in summer off the mouth of the Mackenzie, where it was
seen by the early explorers. Porsild (37) says that some white whales ascend the
larger branches of the delta, and are reported to have been seen as far up as
Point Separation at its head. Preble (38) mentions a report of two seen in the
Peel at Fort McPherson, 20 miles above the delta and not much short of 150 miles
from the open sea. Anderson (1) says it comes into the mouth of the Yukon, and
Preble (39) states that it enters the Churchill and Nelson.Ringed Seal . Like the beluga, the ringed seal ( Phoca hispida ) and harbor
seal are inclined to make excursions into fresh water, and often turn up far
039 | Vol_III-0937
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
inland in large rivers. In both these species, however, there are populations
partly or wholly isolated from the sea in inland waters. Ringed seals ( Phoca
hispida caspica ) occur in the Caspian and Aral seas, which are, of course, salt;
there is also a race ( P. hispida sibirica ) in the freshwater Lake Baikal. Two other
landlocked forms occur: one, P. hispida saimensis , inhabits Lake Saimaa in Fin–
land; the other, P. hispida ladogensis , is found in Lakes Ladoga and Onega in
Russia.In Arctic America there is a permanent population of ringed seals in Nettil–
ling Lake, Baffin Island, named Phoca hispida soperi by Anderson (2). This form
is identical with that found on the adjacent coast of Foxe Basin, and there may
possibly be some sporadic movement between the sea and the lake, a distance of
52 miles, through the Koukdjuak River. Manning saw a seal two miles up the river
(48); he also found ringed seals in Lake Bennett, Melville Peninsula, in summer
(32).Harbor Seal . Sutton and Hamilton (49) report harbor seals, Phoca vitulina ,
visiting freshwater lakes in Southampton Island, and Preble (39) saw one sev–
eral miles above York Factory in the Nelson. They often ascend the St. Lawrence
to Montreal and occasionally to Ottawa. Seton (44) mentions that he had been
told of the presence of small seals "in the old days" in Lake Ashkeek, 50 miles
northeast of Timiskaming, which drains by the Kipawa to the Ottawa River.It has been known since A. P. Low's traverse of 1896 that there were land–
locked seals in the Upper and Lower Seal lakes in Ungava, 90 miles inland from
Richmond Gulf on the east coast of Hudson Bay. These had been assumed to be
ringed seals, but Doutt (8) discovered them in fact to be a dark-colored race of
harbor seal, named by him Phoca vitulina mellonae .
040 | Vol_III-0938
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Anderson, R.M. "Mammals and birds," Canada. Dept. of Mines and Resources.
Lands, Parks and Forests Branch. Canada's Western North–
land . Assembled by W.G.Bethune. Ottawa, Patenaude, 1937,
pp.97-122.2. ----. "Two new seals from arctic Canada with key to the Canadian forms of
hair seals (Family Phocidae)." Provancher Soc. Nat. Hist.
Can. Ann.Rep . 1942,pp.23-34.3. Bean, T.H. "Notes on some fishes from Hudson's bay," U.S.Nat.Mus. Proc .
1881, pp.127-29.4. Berg, L.S. Ryby Presnykh vod SSSR i Sopredelnykh Stran. Les Poissons
des Eaux Douces de l'U.R.S.S. et des Pays Limitrophes .
3d ed. Leningrad, Izdanie Vsesoiuznogo Instituta Ozernogo
i Rechnogo Rybnogo Khoziastva, 1932-33, pp.30,59,187,606,
699,784-85,793. Pts. 1-2. (Title page in Russian and
French. Text in Russian.)5. Boulenger, G.A. Catalogue of the Batrachia Salientia S. Ecaudata in the
Collection of the British Museum . 2d ed. Lond., British
Museum, 1882, pp.46,335.6. Cope, E.D. "The Batrachia of North America," U.S.Nat.Mus. Bull . no.34,
p.437, 1889.— 7. Critchell-Bullock, J.C. "An expedition to sub-arctic Canada," Canad.Field
Nat . vol. 34 45 ,pp.33-34, 1931.8. Doutt, J.K. "A review of the genus Phoca," Carnegie Mus. Annals , vol.29,
pp.61-125, 1942.9. Dymond, J.R. "Atlantic salmon in Ungava bay," Canad.Field Nat . vol.55;
pp.19-20, 1941.10. ----. "The Coregonine fishes of Hudson and James Bays," Contr.Canad.Biol .
& Fish . n.s. vol.8,pp.3-12,1933.— 11. ----. "The c C oregonine fishes of northwestern Canada," Roy.Canad.Inst. Trans .
vol.24,pp.171-231, 1943.12. ----. Note of Specimen-Localities in the Northwest Territories of Fish,
Other than Coregonidae, in the Collections of the Royal
Ontario Museum of Zoology, kindly furnished by Prof. Dymond
in 1944. (Unpublished)
041 | Vol_III-0939
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
13. ----. "Notes on the distribution of Salmo salar and Salvelinus alpinus in
northeastern Canada," Canad.Field Nat . vol.46,p.185, 1932.14. ----, and Vladykov, V.D. "The distribution and relationship of the Salmonoid
fishes of North America and North Asia," Pacific Sci.Congr.
5th, 1933, Proc . vol.5, pp.3,741-50.15. Evermann, B.W. and Goldsborough, E.L. The Fishes of Alaska . Wash.,G.P.O.,
1907. U.S.Bur.Fish. Bull . vol.26, 1906, pp.219-360.16. Gunther, Albert. "Account of the fishes collected by Capt. Feilden between
78° and 83° N lat., during the arctic expedition 1875-6,"
Zool.Soc.Lond. Proc . 1877, pp.293-95.17. ----. "Report on a collection of fishes made by Mr. C. Hart during the late
arctic expedition," Zool.Soc.Lond. Proc . 1877,pp.475-77.18. Halkett, Andrew. Check List of the Fishes of the Dominion of Canada and
Newfoundland. Ottawa, Printer to the King, 1913.19. ----. "Notes on a collection of fish from Baffin Island," Nat.Mus.Can. Bull .
no.53, Biological Ser . no.15,pp.117-18, 1928.20. Hanbury, D.T. Sport and Travel in the Northland of Canada . Lond., Arnold,
1904.21. Hantzsch, Bernhard. "Contributions to the knowledge of extreme northeastern
Labrador," Canad.Field Nat . vol.45,p.195, Nov.1931. (Transla–
tion by M.B.A. Anderson of "Beiträge zur Kenntnis des nördost–
lichsten Labradors," Mitteilungen des Vereins für Erdkunde zu
Dresden , vol.8, 1909.)22. Harper, F. "Amphibians and reptiles of the Athabaska and Great Slave Lake
Regions," Canad.Field Nat . vol.45, pp.68-70, 1931.23. Hildebrand, Henry. "Notes on Rena sylvatica in the Labrador peninsula,"
Copeia , pp.168-72, 1949.— 24. Hinks, David. The Fishes of Manitoba . Winn e i peg, Manitoba. Dept. of Mines
and Resources, 1943, pp.90,92.25. Hornby, J. "Wild life in the Thelon River area, N.W.T., Canada," Canad.Field
Nat. vol.48, pp.105-11, 1934.26. Hubbs, C.L., and Schultz, L.P. "Contribution to the ichthyology of Alaska,
with descriptions of two new fishes," Mich.Univ.Mus.Zool.
Occ. Pap . no.431, pp.17-27, 1941.27. Johansen, Frits. "The crustacean life of some arctic lagoons, lakes and ponds,"
Canadian Arctic Expedition, 1913-1918. Report. Vol.7 :
Crustacea. Pt. N. Ottawa, Acland, 1922.
042 | Vol_III-0940
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
28. Kendall, W.C. "The fishes of Labrador," Portland Soc.Nat.Hist. Proc . vol.2,
pt. 8, pp.207-43, 1909.29. Legendre, Vianney, and Lagueux, Robert. "The tomcod ( Microgadus tomcod ) as
a permanent fresh-water resident of Lake St. John, Province
of Quebec," Canad.Field Nat . vol.62, p.157, Oct. 1948.30. ----, and Rousseau, J.J. "La distribution de quelques-uns de nos poissons
dans le Qu e é bec arctique," Assoc.Canada.--Fran c ç .Avanc.Sci.
Annales , vol.15, pp.133-35, 1949.31. Manning, T.H. "Notes on some fish of the eastern Canadian Arctic," Canad .
Field Nat . vol.56, pp.128-29, 1942.32. ----. "Notes on the coastal district of the eastern barren grounds and
Melville peninsula from Igloolik to Cape Fullerton,"
Canad.Geogr.J . vol.26, pp.84-105,1943.33. ----. "Remarks on the physiography, Eskimo and mammals of Southampton island,"
Canad.Geogr.J . vol.24, pp.17-33, 1942.34. Miller, R.B. "North West Canadian fisheries surveys in 1944-1945. Chap.4,
Great Bear Lake," Canada. Fisheries Res.Brd. Bull . no. 72,
pp.31-44, 1947.35. Moore, J.A. "Patterns of evolution in the genus Rana ," Jepsen, G.L., and
others, eds. Genetics, Paleontology, and Evolution . Prince–
ton, N.J., Princeton Univ. Press, 1949, pp.315-38.36. Nansen, Fridtjof. Through Siberia the Land of the Future . Lond., Heinemann;
N. Y., Stokes, 1914, pp.107,137,148,164,305,313.37. Porsild, A.E. "Mammals of the Mackenzie delta," Canad.Field Nat . vol.59,
pp.4-22, 1945.38. Preble, E.A. A Biological Investigation of the Athabaska-Mackenzie Region .
Wash., U.S. Dept. of Agriculture. Bur. of Biological
Survey, 1908. North American Fauna no.27, pp.46,49,128,501-2,
512-13.39. ----. A Biological Investigation of the Hudson Bay Region . Wash., U.S. Dept.
of Agriculture. Bur. of Biological Survey, 1902. North
American Fauna no.22, pp.40,71,133-34.40. Radforth, I. "Some considerations on the distribution of fishes in Ontario,"
Roy.Ont.Mus.Zool., Contr . vol.25, pp.1-116, 1944.41. Rawson, D.W. "North West Canadian fisheries surveys in 1944-1945. Chap.5.
Great Slave Lake," Canada. Fisheries Res.Brd. Bull . no.72,
pp.45-68, 1947.
043 | Vol_III-0941
EA-Zoo. Wynne-Edwards: Freshwater Vertebrates
42. Richardson, John. Fauna Boreali-Americana. Part Third. The Fish . Lond.,
Bentley, 1836,pp.40,57,182,195-96,248,294.43. Seebohm, Henry. The Birds of Siberia . Lond., Murray, 1901,pp.325-33.
44. Seton, E.T. The Arctic Prairies . N.Y., Scribner, 1911, p.56.
45. Simpson, Thomas. Narrative of the Discoveries on the North Coast of America .
Lond., Bentley, 1843,pp.217,267.46. Soper,J.D. “A faunal investigation of southern Baffin Island,” Nat.Mus.Can.
Bull . no.53, Biological Ser. no.15,p.16, 1928.47. ----. “Fish,” Canada. Dept. of Interior. Lands, Northwest Territories and
Yukon Branch. Canada’s Eastern Arctic . Ottawa, Patenaude,
1935, pp.129-32.48. ----. “The mammals of southern Baffin Island, N.W.T., Canada,” J.Mammal .
vol.25, pp.221-54, 1944.49. Sutton, G.M., and Hamilton, J.W.,Jr. “The mammals of Southampton Island,”
Carnegie Mus. Mem . vol.12,pp.1-111,1932.50. Turner, L.M. “Fishes,” his Contributions to the Natural History of Alaska .
Wash., G.P.O., 1886, pt.4, pp.87-113. U.S. Army. Signal
Service. Arctic Series of Publications , no.2.51. Vladykov, V.D. “Fishes from the Hudson Bay region (except the Coregonidae),”
Contr.Canad.Biol. & Fish . vol.8, pp.13-61, 1933.52. Williams, M.Y. “Biological notes, covering parts of the Peace, Liard,
Mackenzie and Great Bear River systems,” Canad.Field Nat .
vol.45, pp.23-31, 1933.53. Wynne-Edwards, V.C. “North west Canadian fisheries surveys in 1944-1945.
Chap. 2. The Yukon Territory. Chap. 3. The Mackenzie
River,” Canada. Fisheries Res.Brd. Bull . no. 72, pp.6-30,
1947.V. C. Wynne-Edwards
Freshwater Fisheries
Unpaginated | Vol_III-0942
EA-Zoology
(Vadim D. Vladykov)
FRESHWATER FISHERIES
CONTENTS
Page Introduction 1 Characteristics of Arctic Habitat 2 Climate and Productivity of Land 2 Productivity of Water 5 Selected Types of Habitats 6 Great Bear Lake 7 Great Slave Lake 8 Lake Athabaska 9 Lena River 11 Freshwater Fish Fauna of the Arctic 12 General Remarks 12 List of Vernacular and Scientific Names 14 Economically Important Families 18 Families of Lesser Importance 28 Distribution of Fishes by Regions 42 Greenland 42 Canadian Arctic 43 Pacific Arctic 44 Siberian Arctic 45 European Arctic 46 Freshwater Fisheries of the Arctic 47 Methods of Fishing 47 Preparation of Fish 51 Importance of Fisheries 52 Bibliography 70 56
001 | Vol_III-0943
EA-Zoology
[Vadim D. Vladykov]
FRESHWATER FISHERIES
INTRODUCTION
One cannot overemphasize the importance of fish in arctic regions. There
are certain seasons when local inhabitants subsist principally on fish; dif–
ferent kinds of fishes also constitute the main bulk of food for sledge dogs.
This importance is well brought out by Urquhart who, speaking about Canada’s
western northland, stated that: “The amount of fish required by an Eskimo
family appears to us enormous. They eat huge amounts themselves and require
large quantities for their dogs, and an Eskimo that starts the winter with less
than 8,000 or 10,000 fish can look forward to lean days ahead.” The fish eaten
by the natives are lake herring ( Leucichthys spp.), whitefish ( Coregonus spp.),
and inconnu ( Stenodus leucichthys ) in that order of preference.With the increasing importance of the Arctic, no doubt, the white population
will grow considerably, thus the local freshwater fishes will be used to a
still greater extent.
002 | Vol_III-0944
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
CHARACTERISTICS OF ARCTIC HABITAT
A knowledge of the peculiarities of the climate and the productivity of
the Arctic help s to understand the fisheries conditions existing there.Climate and Productivity of Land
The climate of the Arctic is characterized by long cold winters and short
summers. Another peculiarity is the existence of a long polar day and long
polar night. At the North Pole, the length of the polar day at the present time
is 186 days and 10 hours, and the polar night is 178 days and 14 hours. The
yearly quantity of solar radiation, measured in small calories over a square
centimeter of horizontal surface, is very small in the Arctic in comparison
with lower latitudes. At the equator, this radiation is equal to 186,500
calories, and at a latitude of 50° is 105,700 calories, while at 80° this
radiation is only 65,700 calories. If these absolute figures are corrected
for the cloudiness and fog of the Arctic, then the actual radiation is only
13,000 calories, that is 5 times less than at a latitude of 50° (93).Over the arctic seas and near the shore, the climate is definitely maritime,
that is, the amplitude of the variations between the average temperatures of
the warmest and coldest months is not very great. On the mainland the climate
is continental, the amplitude of the variations increasing with the distance from
the sea. To illustrate this point, we cite the observations of Stefansson (88)
that at Herschel Island, near estuary of the Mackenzie River, about two
hundred miles beyond the Arctic Circle, the lowest temperature observed was
−54°F. On the other hand, at Fort McPherson, near the Mackenzie River, less
003 | Vol_III-0945
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
than two hundred miles south of Herschel Island, the lowest temperature ob–
served was −68°F. Further details can be found in a compendium of meteorologi–
cal observations in the Canadian Northland , published in 1944, in a separate
bulletin: “Meteorology of the Canadian Arctic,” by the Department of Transport,
Ottawa.In the Arctic, the maritime climate is also more pronounced in eastern
regions. In Greenland, temperatures on the east coast are lower than on the
west, for the ice sheet is more developed on its eastern side and a cold current
washes the coast. On the other hand, a branch of the North Atlantic Drift flows
north on the east side of Davis Strait and accounts for relatively high tempera–
tures in southwest Greenland. Along the west coast, from south to north, the
January mean at Ivigtut is 18°F. and at Upernivik −7°F.; the July means are
49°F. and 42°F., respectively (18).In the case of the Canadian Arctic, there is a marked distinction between
the climates of the eastern and western regions. This distinction is most
clearly manifested in July. Along the Arctic Circle, the average temperature in
July ranges from 40°F. in southern Baffin Island to about 60°F. in the lower
Mackenzie Valley and the upper portion of the Yukon Territory.On the other hand, in midwinter the Eastern Arctic is influenced to some
extent by polar Atlantic air masses which bring periods of comparatively mild
weather to at least Baffin Island and the Hudson Bay area. The lowest tempera–
ture of the year is on the average −30° to −40°F. in southern Baffin Island, and
−55° to −60°F. in the Mackenzie Valley (21).The coldest place of the Northern Hemisphere is not near the North Pole but
004 | Vol_III-0946
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
is found in the Yakutsk republic north of Irkutsk, where the temperature occasion–
ally falls close to −90°F.During the short warm season in the Arctic, the temperature near the sea is
lower than farther inland. For instance, the mean annual highest temperature in
Baffin Island is about 65°F., whereas on the Arctic Circle in the Yukon, it is
85°F. or higher. Thus, a limited agriculture is possible in the Mackenzie Valley
on the Arctic Circle while at the corresponding latitude in the Eastern Arctic,
only tundra is found. Since 1920 there is a definite change in the climate of the
Arctic, which became 2 or 3°C. warmor (for further details see 93; 95). What
influence this raise in temperature can have on the freshwater fishes is not
clear at present. (See “Faunistic Effects of Climatic Change in the North.”)A short summer with intense sunshine apparently suffices to support abundant
life in the Arctic. Even in Greenland, according to Jensen (50), there have been
collected at least 168 species of birds, 437 species of insects, and 124 species
of arachnids, as well as typical arctic mammals such as musk ox, reindeer, lemming,
and hare. According to the same author, in 1839 as many as 37,000 reindeer were
shot in Greenland.In the Canadian Northland which is, in the west at least, much more produc–
tive than Greenland, the plant and animal life is far more abundant. According to
Porsild (73), in the western Canadian Arctic only, there were collected over 750
species of plants distributed in 74 families. It is most significant that sedges
and other grasslike plants make up a total of no less than 181 species, or almost
one-fourth of the entire flora of vascular plants. Thus it is not surprising
that many early travelers saw so often the large herds of musk oxen “grazing in
green and flowered [ ?] meadows among the song of birds and the hum of bees.”
005 | Vol_III-0947
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
The best summary, which is almost classical by now, is that given by
Stefansson (88) about the abundance of animal life in the Northland. He said:
“The arctic land is lifeless except for millions of caribou and of foxes, tens
of thousands of wolves and of musk oxen, thousands of polar bears, billions of
insects and millions of birds.”Productivity of Water
The arctic climate has several characteristics favorable to the growth of
phytoplankton, compared with more southerly regions. The low temperatures allow
high concentrations of dissolved gases, both carbon dioxide for photosynthesis
and oxygen for energy requirements; the long summer days allow photosynthesis to
continue for longer periods (during the summer season) than in more temperate
regions.Due to the rigors of climate there is a very pronounced difference in the
productivity of small, shallow lakes and large ones. The latter are too cold and
deep for most vascular aquatic plants, but they possess a rich microflora, as of
diatoms, flagellates, etc. Different species of these microscopic plants, as
was pointed out by Porsild (73), impart a different color to the waters of the
lakes. As Porsild stated: “This is best seen from the air, where it is at once
noticeable that, apart from the difference in color due to the depth of the waters
and the nature of the bottom the water itself in no two lakes is exactly alike.”In shallow lakes of Canada’s western northland, the abundance of vascular
aquatic plants is rather surprising. According to Porsild (73): “In shallow
lakes and small streams in early spring, the sun’s rays penetrate the ice, although
006 | Vol_III-0948
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
this is often frozen to the bottom, and are absorbed by the dark mud or black
mosses of the bottom, causing the ice to melt from below. For this reason the
small lakes open up much earlier than the large ones. On Great Bear L l.c. ake, when
it was still possible to travel with sledges and dogs on the ice of the main
lake, the writer in June, 1928, found the water of small ponds and streams warm
enough for comfortable bathing. Because of the heat-retaining quality of water
the growing season of aquatic plants is extended for a month or longer after the
terrestrial plants have ceased their activities because of night frosts.”An excess of phytoplankton usually goes hand in hand with an abundance of
zooplankton, basic food for fish. There is no doubt that the large quantity
of droppings of mammals feeding around the shore, and particularly of enormous
numbers of nesting aquatic birds is natural fertilization of the water, favorable
for the production of both phytoplankton and zooplankton, and invertebrates in
general.The myriads of insects, particularly of biting Diptera (mosquito, blackfly,
etc.), are also an important source of fish food in either the larval or adult
stage. So, in spite of the rigorous climatic conditions of the Arctic, we may
reasonably expect to find there an abundance of freshwater fish.Selected Types of Habitats
In order to illustrate the physical and chemical conditions of the aquatic
habitat of the Arctic, we give recent observations on conditions in the three
largest lakes of the Canadian North, and in the Lena River in Siberia.The Canadian lakes form a part of the Mackenzie River drainage. The most
007 | Vol_III-0949
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
northerly of the three is Great Bear Lake, with Great Slave Lake lying to the
south, between it and Lake Athabaska. In the first two, commercial fisheries
did not exist previous to 1944, while Lake Athabaska has been extensively fished
since 1926. According to Raw s on (78), each has rugged pre-Cambrian shores to
the north and east, faced by shallow areas and low sandy shores to the south and
west. The chief species of fish and the shrimps, which are the main supply of
fish food, are common to all three.Great Bear Lake . This large lake, with an area of about 12,000 square miles,
was recently studied by Miller (67). The following details are taken from his
paper. The surface temperature of this lake remains not far from freezing all
summer. Near Port Radium the surface temperature was 35.2°F. early in June,
while, by the end of July, it had risen to 43.2°F. In August, surfac e
temperatures reached 55.2°F. on the western shore of the lake; below the sur–
face, the water remained uniformly cold, from 100 feet down, never reaching
above 39°F. Over its greatest extent, this lake is 400 feet or more deep, with
a maximum of 1,300 feet found.The water in this lake was remarkably clear. A small white dinner plate
suspended by a rope could be seen cleary clearly to depths as great as 60 to 70
feet all along the eastern shore; three miles from shore, the plate could be seen
up to 96 feet below the surface (68).Due to the low temperature and transparency, the water is well saturated with
oxygen, while carbon dioxide is present only in insignificant amounts, there
being less than 4 p.p.m. The water was slightly alkaline, the pH varying from
7.2 to 7.4.
008 | Vol_III-0950
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Both phytoplankton and zooplankton were present only in very small amounts
in this lake. The bottom fauna, consisting of snails, small clams, larvae of
aquatic insects, and certain small crustaceans, was also poorly represented. All
this indicates rather meager provender for such fishes as lake herring and
whitefish.Great Slave Lake . This is the second largest body of fresh water in the
Canadian Arctic, with a surface area of about 10,500 square miles, while its
total drainage area is 370,000 square miles, more than one-tenth of the total
land area of Canada. This important body of water was recently studied by
Rawson (77), who gives the following information.The surface temperature of the open lake is rarely above 55°F., with a
summer (June to August) variation from 40° to 55°F.; near the delta of the Slave
River, the temperature is usually higher, rising to slightly above 62°F. On the other
hand, in McLeod Bay, the water is coolest, being around 42°F. From 100 feet down to t
the maximum depth of 2,000 feet, temperatures range between 38° and 39°F.The transparency of the water is less than in Great Bear Lake. In Great
Slave Lake, the disk is clearly visible only from 10 to 15 feet in the middle of
the lake, and from 20 to 56 feet in the east arm. The oxygen content is very high,
being very favorable for fish and other aquatic animals.Great Slave Lake contains a much smaller amount of dissolved salts than
commonly found in fresh waters. In McLeod Bay where the drainage is from hard pre-
Cambrian rock surface, the total solids are only 22 p.p.m. (At Snowdrift the total
solids were 107 p.p.m. and in Yellowknife Bay 60 p.p.m.) At Outpost Island, where
the influence of the Slave River is felt, the amount is 140 p.p.m. The salts are
mostly bicarbonates of calcium with a little magnesium and only traces of
009 | Vol_III-0951
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
chlorides and sulfates. The water is very slightly acid in McLeod Bay, but in
the rest of the lake somewhat [ ?] alkaline in reaction.Plankton was found in adequate quantities in this lake, thus providing a
good explanation why lake herrings or [ ?] c iscoes are very numerous. The bottom fauna
is quite rich, with an average of 1,275 animals per square yard, and 3.4 pounds
dry weight per acre. Among important bottom organisms are two kinds of small
crustaceans, Pontoporeia and Mysis . The first of these constitute nearly 60%
of food bulk for whitefish, while the Mysis is eaten by a number of fish species.Lake Athabaska . This has an area of about 3,000 square miles. According
to Rawson (78), the mean depth of the lake is 85 feet, and the maximum, 405 feet.
Freezing of the lake begins in late October and is usually complete by mid–
December. The ice disappears completely during the last half of June. By mid–
July, the open lake is already warmed to 50° or 55°F. and in August, tempera–
tures of 60° to 66°F. are common in all parts of the lake. Thus the mean tempera–
ture at midsummer was approximately 51°F. or at least 6 degrees warmer than Great
Slave Lake.The water is less clear than in the two previously mentioned lakes. In the
center, Secchi’s disk could be seen only to depths of 20 to 25 feet. The hydrogen–
ion concentration varies from slight acidity (pH 6.6) in the east end to a
moderate alkalinity (pH 7.7) at the west. The mineral content of the water was
58 p.p.m. in the vicinity of Goldfields and 52 p.p.m. in Fond du Lac. The abun–
dance of plankton and bottom fauna was practically the same as in Great Slave
Lake.
010 | Vol_III-0952
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
In conclusion, it may be stated that conditions in these three lakes are
quite comparable with those of Lake Superior except for the somewhat lower
temperatures. The low temperatures, no doubt, are responsible for the surpris–
ingly slow rate of growth of the fishes found in these waters. Corresponding to
the variation of temperatures between the lakes, we find a gradient in rates of
growth of ( lake trout ( Cristivomer namaycush ) as illustrated by Table I.Table I. Rates of Growth of Lake Trout GREAT BEAR LAKE (68) GREAT SLAVE LAKE (77) LAKE ATHABASKA (78) Age,
yearsStandard
length,
cm.Weight
kg.Standard
length,
cm.Weight
kg.Standard
length,
cm.Weight
kg.14 44.9 0.99 49.5 1.25 54.6 2.04 18 57.4 2.32 60.3 2.50 64.8 3.97 20 62.6 2.86 64.8 3.18 68.6 4.65
From Table I it is clearly seen that the slowest growth occurred in Great
Bear Lake, the coolest of the three, while Lake Athabaska, the warmest,
supported the greatest rate of growth. To contrast with this retarded growth,
Lake Michigan trout, according to Van Oosten (92), grow very nearly twice as
fast; and, from a few fish, it appears that lake trout from Lake Superior also
grow almost twice as rapidly. Slow-growing lake trout from Great Bear Lake reach
maturity only at 13 to 17 years (68), while in Lake Michigan they are already
mature at 7 years (92). This [ ?] retarded maturity imposes careful considera–
tion before any increase of fishing intensity is undertaken in arctic waters, in order to
prevent a dangerous reduction of the stock.
011 | Vol_III-0953
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Lena River . This, one of the largest rivers of the Old World, with a
length of about 3,000 miles, drains through the Yakutsk Republic, originating
in the Baikal Mountains and emptying into the Nordenskiöld (Laptev) Sea. The
following description is taken from a publication by Borisov (17). Although the
Yakutsk Republic during the winter is the coldest region in the world, the local
population stands the rigorous climate well as there is very little wind and the
air is dry. Only the shallower lakes freeze nearly to the bottom, while in
the deeper basins fish survive very well. The deep blanket of snow serves as
efficient insulation. The thickness of the ice at Yakutsk (62° N.lat.) is
213 cm. (84 in.) and at the delta (73° N.lat.) it is 235 cm. (92-1/2 in.).On account of the rigors of climate, for winter fishing the inhabitants
use nets of horsehair instead of hemp or cotton thread, to avoid freezing up of
their fishing gear. (In Hudson Bay, Eskimos sometimes make their fishing nets of
split baleen from the baleen whale, probably with the same purpose in view. Thanks
to the kindness of Mr. L. T. S. Norris-Elye, Director of the Manitoba Provincial
Museum in Winnipeg, Canada, the author had the privilege of examining one of
these elaborate nets on exhibit in the museum.)The ice breaks at Yakutsk at the end of May, and in the delta only about a
month later. The navigation season is of an average duration of 140 days in the
delta, and about 20 days more at Yakutsk. In spite of the cold winter, the
summer temperatures are surprisingly high: the summer isotherm is 20°C. at
60° N. latitude, and 11°C. at 70° N. latitude. Only at the delta (73° N. lat.)
is the isotherm rather low, being around 5°C.The fish fauna is represented by at least twelve families, details of which
will be dealt with further on.
012 | Vol_III-0954
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
FRESHWATER FISH FAUNA
Freshwater fishes of such a vast expanse as the Arctic are as yet not too
well known. This is due not only to the difficulties presented by the habitat,
but also to the fact that the most important fish families as salmon (Salmonidae)
and whitefish (Coregonidae) present great systematic difficulties. The Core–
gonidae particularly vary to a great extent under different ecological conditions
(13; 30; 60). Nevertheless, there is already enough information available to give
a fairly comprehensive picture of the fisheries conditions which exist at present
in the Arctic.General Remarks
Freshwater fishes of the Arctic as a whole belong to only 18 different families.
This number is rather small, as in the Great Lakes region for example, a consider–
ably smaller area, 29 different families are reported. On the other hand, indi–
viduals of the same species are found in great numbers. To illustrate this
point we quote an observation by Sergeant Mellor (16), who, speaking about
inconnu ( Stenodus leucichthys mackenzii ) at spawning time at certain tribu–
taries of Great Slave Lake, stated that “he was nearly able to walk across
Buffalo river on their backs,” and the same has been said of Riviére des Rochers.Another point to be borne in mind is that several of the most important
fish species of the Arctic are anadromous in habit, that is, they spend consider–
able time and feed actively in salt water, but always spawn in fresh water, as–
cending rivers and streams sometimes for considerable distances. This dual habitat
helps to explain why so many specimens of one species can be found in arctic
fresh waters in certain seasons.
013 | Vol_III-0955
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
The size of arctic fishes varies from about 2 inches in the case of nine–
spined stickleback ( Pungitius pungitius ) to more than 10 feet in the case of
Siberian sturgeon ( Acipenser baeri ), weighing up to 463 pounds.Although the great majority of arctic fishes belong to the same families
as are found in more temperate regions, there is at least one family (Dalliidae)
exclusive to the Arctic. Its single representative, the Alaska blackfish
( Dallia pectoralis ) is found in streams and ponds of Alaska (Yukon and Kuskokwim
basins) and in the northeastern tip of Siberia (Chukchi Peninsula), as well as
on St. Lawrence Island, Bering Sea.A contrasting example of an unusually broad circumpolar range is the
northern pike ( Esox lucius ), commonly known in the Canadian Arctic as jackfish.
The distribution of this pike extends from New England through the Great Lakes
region to Alaska; in the Old World, from the Amur River (but absent from Kam–
chatka) through all of Siberia and Europe to the British Isles. In spite of this
enormous area of distribution, which by “overland” route, for instance from
Quebec to Ireland, measures about 12,000 miles, it seems that the northern pike
from different localities are identical. However, according to Berg (13), a
particular subspecies of the pike, E. lucius bergi , is found on the Anadyr
Peninsula.Another species with an equally wide distribution is the burbot ( Lota lota )
or in Russian nalim . The burbot, however, on basis of recent studies (47) is
subdivided into three subspecies according to geographical regions: from Europe
and Siberia to Kolyma by L. lota lota ; east of Kolyma, on the Asiatic continent,
in Alaska, and throughout northwestern Canada [ (y ?] (Yukon drainage) by L. lota leptura ;
while eastern North America is characterized by L. lota maculosa .
014 | Vol_III-0956
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
List of Vernacular and Scientific Names
For rapid identification, a list of the common and scientific names of the
most important fishes are given, arranged alphabetically by vernacular names.
An asterisk preceding the name indicates an anadromous species; the names used
in the Soviet Arctic are followed by (R). The names of three genera repeatedly
used in the list are abbreviated as follows: C. = Coregonus , L. = Leucichthys ,
O. = Oncorhynchus.Vernacular name Scientific name * American eel - Anguilla bostoniensis * Arctic char - Salvelinus alpinus Arctic grayling - Thymallus signifer * Atlantic salmon - Salmo salar Blackfin cisco - L. nigripinnis Blackfish - Dallia pectoralis Bluefish - Thymallus signifer Burbot - Lota lota maculosa * Chavycha (R) - O. tschawytscha * Chinook salmon - O. tschawytscha Chir (r) - C. nasus * Chum salmon - O. keta Ciscoes - different species of Leucichthys * Coho salmon - O. kisutch Common sucker - Catostomus commersonnii * Common whitefish - C. clupeaformis * Conny - Stenodus leucichthys mackenzii
015 | Vol_III-0957
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Vernacular name Scientific name * Crooked back - C. nelsonii * Dog salmon - O. keta * Dolly Varden - Salvelinus malma Dor e é - Stizostedion vitreum * Eulachon - Thaleichthys pacificus * European eel - Anguilla anguilla Goldeye - Amphiodon alosoides * Golets (R) - Salvelinus alpinus * Gorbus c ha (R) - O. gorbus c ha * Humpback salmon - O. gorbus c ha * Humpback whitefish - C. nelsonii * Inconnu - Stenodus leucichthys mackenzii * Innyakha (R) - Hypomesus olidus Jackfish - Esox lucius * Kamchatskaya Siemga (R) - Salmo penshinensis * Keta (R) - O. keta * Kharius (R) - Thymallus arcticus * Kijuch (R) - O. kisutch * King salmon - O. tschawytscha * Kondyevka (R) - L. sardinella * Koryushka (R) - Osmerus eperlanus * Krasnaya (R) - O. nerka * Kumja (R) - Salmo trutta
016 | Vol_III-0958
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
* Lake herring - L. artedi Lake sturgeon - Acipenser fulvescens Lake trout - Cristivomer namaycush Lamprey - any species of Petromizonidae * Lauretta herring - L. laurettae Lenok (R) - Brachymystax lenok Loche - Lota lota maculosa * Losos (R) - Salmo salar * Malma (R) - Salvelinus malma * Mikija (R) - Salmo mykiss Minoga (R) - corresponds to the English term “lamprey,”
i.e., any species of Petromizonidae* Muksun (R) - C. muksun Mundu (R) - Phoxinus percnurus Nalim (R) - Lota lota * Navaga (R) - Eleginus navaga * Nelma (R) - Stenodus leucichthys nelma * Nelson’s whitefish - C. nelsonii Northern pike - Esox lucius Northern sucker - Catostomus catostomus * Omul (R) - L. autumnalis Pelyad (R) - L. peled Pike - Esox lucius Pike perch - Stizostedion vitreum * Pink salmon - O. gorbuscha
017 | Vol_III-0959
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
* Pond smelt - Hypomesus olidus * Round whitefish - Prosopium quadrilaterale Schuka (R) - Esox lucius * Sibirskaya ryapushka (R) - L. sardinella * Sibirsky sig (R) - C. lavaretus pidschian * Siemga (R) - Salmo salar brevipes * Silver salmon - O. kisutch * Smelt - any species of
Osmerus* Sockeye salmon - O. nerka * Speckled trout - Salvelinus fontinalis * Spring salmon - O. tschawytscha * Steelhead trout - Salmo gairdnerii Taimen (R) - Hucho taimen * Tezra or Tizareh - C. clupeaformis Tugun (R) - L. tugun Tullibee - L. tullibee * Tyee salmon - O. tschawystscha * Vakhnya (R) - Eleginus gracilis * Valyek (R) - Prosopium cylindraceum * Whitefish - C. clupeaformis Yellow perch - Perca flavescens Yellow pickerel - Stizostedion vitreum
018 | Vol_III-0960
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Economically Important Families
Among the eighteen fish families found in the Arctic, only two can be con–
sidered important as food for man and dogs, namely, the whitefish (Coregonidae)
and salmon (Salmonidae) families.Coregonidae . With the exception of Greenland and the Canadian Arctic
Islands, whitefish are the most important food fish throughout the arctic
regions. The great majority of species are anadromous fishes. There are four
closely related but distinguishable genera: (1) Stenodus (inconnu or, in
Russian, nelma ); (2) Coregonus (common whitefish, known in Russian as sig and
under several other names); (3) Leucichthys (cisco, lake herring, known in
Russian as ryapuchka and under several other names); and (4) Prosopium
(round whitefish, in Russian valyek ).1. Stenodus . There is only one species, S. leucichthys , that is sub–
divided into three subspecies according to different geographical regions.
Throughout the arctic drainage of Europe and Asia, from the North Dvina to
Kamchatka, is found S. leucichthys nelma , while another subspecies, S. leucichthys
mackenzii is confined to North America (Alaska, Yukon, and Mackenzie river
systems). The third subspecies S. leucichthys leucichthys inhabits the basin
of the Caspian Sea.Inconnu is regarded typically as anadromous, but in some sections of the
Mackenzie Basin (Great Slave Lake) is probably landlocked (30). It grows to a
large size; specimens weighing over 60 pounds are on record. It is of consider–
able value as a food fish for humans and dogs not only in America but in
Siberia as well.
019 | Vol_III-0961
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
2. Coregonus . There are several species belonging to this genus. As
the taxonomy of this genus is made mainly on the basis of external and highly
variable characters (body proportions, number of gill rakers, scales,
branchiostegals, and fin rays), it is very difficult to arrive at a conclusion
on the exact number of species so far described.In the American Arctic (Alaska and the Canadian Northland), at least five
species have been described: Coregonus albus , C. kennicotti , C. nelsonii,
C. odonoghuei , and C. atikameg . On the basis of recent studies, Dymond (30)
concluded that all these species are merely local forms of C. clupeaformis ,
some of which are landlocked while the others are anadromous. However, Fowler
(39) inclines to the opposite opinion. Recent investigators of the Canadian
Northland (77; 98) noticed three different types of body shapes of whitefishes
from the Mackenzie River basin. They consider some of these fish as typical C.
clupeaformis , and those that are humpbacked as C. nelsonii . The present author,
although well aware of the taxonomic complexity of this group and until a new
revision of Coregonidae is undertaken, agrees for the time being with Dymond in
considering that all whitefish from the American North belong to C. clupeaformis .Richardson (82), a century ago, expressed very well the importance of the
whitefish for the native population of the Canadian Northland. He said, “next to
the reindeer in importance ... is the species of Coregonus , named Whitefish,
to which the Chippeways and Nithe-wuk have given the figurative appellation
of ‘reindeer of the waters,’ Adikumaig or Atih-hameg.” Richardson presented
also the Chippewa legend of the origin of the whitefish from the scattered
brains of a woman.
020 | Vol_III-0962
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
About the present importance of whitefish in Canada, Dymond (30) states
that it makes up a large part of the food of the people and their sledge dogs;
it is preferred to all other species. The whitefish occasionally exceeds 20
pounds in weight, although 10 pounds is usually considered a large fish; 4 or 5
pounds is the average size. In winter they are caught in gill nets set under
the ice and just piled up and frozen. In summer some are put in pits in the
ground for dog food.In the Russian Arctic there are three species of whitefishes: (1) chir
( Coregonus nasus ), (2) muksun ( C. muksun ), and (3) Sibirsky sig ( C. lavaretus
pidschian ).The chir is exclusively a freshwater species found in lakes and rivers
emptying in the Arctic Sea, from the Pechora to Anadyr rivers, inclusive. It
grows to a large size and can weigh up to 40 pounds. According to certain
authors (13; 30), C. nasus and C. clupeaformis may be regarded as different
forms of the same species. However, further studies are necessary to decide
this point definitely.The muksun is slightly smaller, weighing up to 20 pounds. The Sibirsky sig
is the smallest species, with an average size below 3 pounds. Both these
species are anadromous fishes, entering all large rivers of the Soviet Arctic
from the North Dvina to the Kolyma. Sig has been reported from the Anadyr River
as well. All three of these Coregonus species are very important from an eco–
nomic point of view, the muksun being the most valuable.3. Leucichthys . Numerous species have been described, the relationship
of which is very often not clearly defined. Therefore, without a new and more
complete revision of the group, only a tentative classification of this genus
is possible at present.
021 | Vol_III-0963
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Among several species of ciscoes described for the American Arctic, only
seven of economic importance will be mentioned here. For the Hudson Bay
region the following species have been described: (1) Leucichthys tullibee
from the Lake Winnipeg Basin (81); (2) L. artedi from brackish waters of Hudson
and James bays (28); (3) L. churchillensis from Churchill River (39); and
(4) L. nueltinensis from a tributary of Nueltin Lake (39).From the Mackenzie and Yukon drainages the following species have been
reported: (1) Leucichthys lucidus (81), (2) L. laurettae (8), and (3)
L. pusillus (10).Dymond (30), in his study on the coregonine fishes of northwestern Canada,
tried to establish the relationship between different species of Leucichthys from
the Arctic. According to him, the two anadromous species from Alaska and the
Mackenzie River, L. laurettae (large herring) and L. pusillus (Big-eye) have a
resemblance to Siberian ciscces L. aut o u mnalis ( Omul ) and L. [ ?] sardinella
( Kondyevka ), respectively.Dymond, speaking of Leucichthys lucidus at least from Great Bear Lake, con–
siders it as merely a subspecies of L. artedi , which is widely distributed
throughout North America. Thus, cisco from Great Bear Lake should be called
L. artedi lucidus .The other species, Leucichthys tullibee , described by Richardson, has a
very wide distribution in the Canadian Arctic. About it Richardson said that
“this fish is very generally diffused through the waters of the fur countries.”
In Dymond’s opinion, L. tullibee is very close, possibly identical to the
blackfin cisco, L. nigripinnis , from more southern waters.Recent investigators, although they do not give any proof of correct
022 | Vol_III-0964
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
identification, consider the following cisco species present in northern Cana–
dian lakes. Miller (67) mentions the occurrence of L. artedi only for Great
Bear Lake. Rawson (77) said that the ciscoes of Great Slave Lake “appear to
be at least of three species, a small form of Leucichthys artedi ; a slender
species with black fins and large eyes resembling L. nigripinnis in some
respects; and a large form up to 24 inches in length which is called ‘tullibee’
by the fishermen.” For Lake Athabaska, Rawson (78) mentioned that the local
ciscoes “represent two species and possibly a third. Most of those taken are
Leucichthys artedi tullibee , a large, heavy-bodied species which is properly
called ‘tullibee,’ the name applied locally to all Ciscoes. Some of the Ciscoes
taken were L. zenithicus , a small form with a long jaw and slender head. The
third form may be the Blackfin, L. nigripinnis , but there is some doubt as to
whether these specimens are of this species or a variant of the tullibee.”In the Russian Arctic there are four important cisco species: (1) omul
( L. autumnalis ), (2) kondyevka ( L. sardinella ), (3) pelyad ( L. peled ), (4)
tugun ( L. tugun ). The first two are anadromous species, while the remainder are
found only in fresh water. The omul can weigh up to 8 pounds and the kondy ve ev ka
barely 1 pound. The pelyad is the largest species, weighing up to 12 pounds;
the tugun is the smallest, weighing less than one-half pound. All these
species are taken in large quantities for human consumption and for feeding
of dogs.The distribution of the tugun is restricted to the Ob, Yenisei, and Lena
river basins. The kondy ve ev ka is found throughout the largest area, from the
North Dvina to the Anadyr. The remaining two are known from the Pechora to the
Kolyma; the omul is, however, absent from the Ob River.
023 | Vol_III-0965
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
4. Prosopium . In the opinions of Berg (13; 14) and Dymond (30), there is
only one species of round whitefish distributed in northern Asia and northern
North America, from the Yenisei River to the Atlantic. In Siberia is found
the valyek , P. cylindraceum cylindraceum , while North America is inhabited by
another subspecies P. cylindraceum qusdrilaterale .Fowler (39) recently described a new species, Prosopium hearnei , from
Nueltin Lake in the Northwest Territories. However, its taxonomic position is
not very clearly defined. South of the Canadian Arctic, in Alberta, British
Columbia, and also in southern Alaska, are several species of Prosopium which,
on account of their geographical distribution, will not be dealt with in this
paper.Prosopium cylindraceum , which is anadromous in its habits and which reach
2 or more pounds in weight, is not thought of as economically important either
in North America or Siberia.Salmonidae. Salmonidae. For the arctic regions, next in importance after Coregonidae
is the salmon family. The following six genera are represented here: (1) Salmo
(salmon, or in Russian losos ); (2) Oncorhynchus (Pacific salmon, or in Russian
tikhookeansky losos tikhookeansky losos ); (3) Salvelinus (char or trout, or in Russian golets );
(4) Cristivomer (lake trout); (5) Brachymystax ( lenok ); and (6) Hucho ( taimen ).1. Salmo . There are several species in this genus. In the northern
Atlantic region is found the Atlantic salmon, S. salar , which is caught in
small numbers in southwestern Greenland (Holsteinsborg and Godthaab districts)
and along the Labrador coast northward to Ungava Bay (27). This valuable species
is, however, insignificant in importance for the Arctic, as it is found here in
very restricted numbers.
024 | Vol_III-0966
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
In the White Sea basin and the North Dvina and Pechora rivers is found a
particular subspecies of salmon, Salmo salar brevipes . In the North Dvina
River is present also the sea trout, or in Russian kumja , S. trutta (13).Both coasts of the Pacific Ocean and Bering Sea are inhabited by four
salmon species, all of which are anadromous. In Alaska (34) are taken the
steelhead or rainbow trout, Salmo gairdnerii and the cutthroat trout, S. clarkii .
Around Kamchatka are found two other kinds of Salmo closely related to the
American species. One of them is the Kamchatskaya siemga , S. penshinensis ,
and the other mikija , S. mykiss . All these salmon attain rather large size,
up to 38 inches in length, and weigh up to 40 pounds.2. Oncorhynchus . All species of the Pacific salmon, in addition to
morphological peculiarities, are characterized also by the fact that, after
attaining sexual maturity, they spawn in fresh water and then die. Individuals
of the other salmon genera, even those present in the Pacific, do not die
after their first reproductive season, but spawn more than once in their
remaining lifespan.There are five principal species on both shores of the Pacific: (1) pink
or humpback salmon, or in Russian gorbuscha ( Oncorhynchus gorbuscha ); (2) chum,
keta, or dog salmon, or in Russian keta or silcha ( O. keta ); (3) coho or silver
salmon, or in Russian kijuch ( O. kisutch ); (4) sockeye, red, or blueback salmon,
or in Russian krasnaya or nerka ( O. nerka ); and (5) king, spring, chinook, or
tyee salmon, or in Russian chavycha ( O. tschawytscha ). A sixth species, O. masu ,
is found along the Asiatic coast from Sakhalin southward. The key for identifica–
tion of Pacific salmon is given by several authors, as, for instance, Berg (13),
Foerster and Pritchard (37), and Schultz (83).
025 | Vol_III-0967
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
All the Pacific salmon are anadromous; however, Oncorhynchus nerka in
some lakes become landlocked. One of these landlocked forms, from British
Columbia, is known as kokanee salmon.The size range in progressive order is as follows: gorbuscha , nerka ,
kisutch , keta , and tschawytscha . The maximum weight of gorbuscha is 10 pounds,
while tschawytscha can attain 108 pounds. The [ ?] palatability of different
species in a fresh state is, “according to the opinion of those who have had
opportunity to test the matter: first the tschawytscha , then gorbuscha , kisutch ,
keta and nerka . The natives have different opinions of their relative value.
The Aleuts consider the cartilaginous nose and forehead of the kisutch to be
the best of food when fresh” (91). From a canning viewpoint, the reddish color
of the flesh of nerka and its rather uniform size make it an exceptional fish
for this industry; the kisutch is next in importance.The chief northern industry for the Pacific salmon is located in Alaska and
Kamchatka. The distribution of individual species throughout the Arctic varies
somewhat. The keta occupies the widest range and is found from the Lena to
the Yukon and even visits the Mackenzie River in small numbers (31); the gorbus c ha
has practically the same distribution but is absent from the Lena River. The
remaining species are found around the Anadyr, Kamchatka, and Alaska; the king
salmon is caught also in good numbers in the Yukon Territory (98).The relative abundance of various species is shown by commercial catches
for North America and Siberia as follows (13):Region Year Catches in millions of individuals gorbuscha keta nerka tschawytscha
and kisutchTotal North America 1915 48.4 8.7 34.2 8.7 79.0 Siberia 1914 76.7 21.1 1.5 0.7 96.5
026 | Vol_III-0968
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
3. Salvelinus . The relationship between numerous species of this genus
is not as yet properly defined. In the future it may be subdivided into
several subgenera and even genera. Following the lead of Berg (13), we dis–
tinguish at present two different subgenera: Baione and Salvelinus . In the
subgenus Baione is included the speckled trout, S. fontinalis , a characteristic
species of eastern North America. In the Arctic, its distribution is limited by
the Hudson Bay basin. It is usually a freshwater species but in many parts of
its habitats is anadromous as well. It seldom grows over 28 inches in length
and rarely weighs more than 14 pounds.The several species belonging to the subgenus Salvelinus , in a narrow sense,
could arbitrarily be classified into three geographical groups: Pacific Ocean,
Canadian Arctic, and North Eurasian.In the Pacific Ocean group are found two anadromous species, one of which
is the kumja , Salvelinus leucomaenis , restricted to the Asiatic coast from
Kamchatka southward. It grows over 2 feet and weighs around 5 pounds. The
other species is the Dolly Varden trout, or in Russian malma , S. malma . It
can be considered as a type species for this group. It can weigh up to 20
pounds and measure 3 feet in length. This voracious fish has a much wider
distribution than the preceding one, being reported from Anadyr, Kamchatka,
Alaska, and Yukon and Mackenzie rivers. In the Canadian Arctic it probably
did not penetrate any farther east than Cape Bathurst, Beaufort Sea.In the Canadian Arctic group are included species described from different
localities, between Beaufort Sea and western Greenland. These species are as
follows: Salvelinus stagnalis , S. rivalis , S. alipes , S. nitidus , S. rossii ,
S. arcturus , and S. naresi . For practical purposes we consider S. stagnalis
as the type for this group. Some of the anadromous specimens from the Hudson
027 | Vol_III-0969
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheires
Bay can attain a weight of 20 pounds and are highly valued for their pala–
tability. They are known locally as “salmon” or in the literature as the arctic
char. For further details see Vladykov (94).In the North Eurasian group of the Arctic are included the regions from
eastern Greenland to Kolyma River in Siberia. The type species for this
group is the golets golets , Salvelinus alpinus . According to Berg (13), the following
species were described from the Siberian Arctic: S. tolmachoffi , S. czerskii ,
and S. jacuticus . The largest individuals of some of these forms can weigh up
to 20 pounds. All of them are valued as food and sport species.The relationship between Salvelinus species from the Canadian Arctic and
those from Eurasia should be properly studied before pronouncing a definite
judgment. However, certain authors (13; 31) regard Canadian chars as belong–
ing to one and the same circumpolar species, namely S. alpinus .4. Cristivomer . The lake trout, C. namaycush , is the most characteristic
fish of North America. In the Arctic, it is found throughout the whole Canadian
Northland from Labrador to Mackenzie and Yukon rivers, and in Alaska as well.
It is exclusively a freshwater species, typically found in deep lakes. It grows
to a large size often weighing over 40 pounds.It is highly praised as food by both the natives and city inhabitants.
At present, the main commercial fishery for lake trout is located in Great Slave
and Nueltin lakes. No doubt, in the future its fisheries can also be developed
in Great Bear and Athabaska lakes.5. Brachymystax . The lenok , B. lenok , is typical of Siberia. It is ex–
clusively a freshwater fish and is found in all rivers from the Ob to the Kolyma.
It grows up to 30 inches and can weigh occasionally up to 20 pounds. As the
028 | Vol_III-0970
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
lenok is not found in any great abundance in any one locality, its fishery is
of minor importance.6. Hucho . The taimen , H. taimen , is the largest representative of the
genus and can weigh up to 150 pounds. It is exclusively a freshwater species
found in rivers with awift currents. Its distribution is limited to Siberia,
where it is found in the Ob, Yenisei, and Lena rivers. It is highly valued as
a food and sport species.Families of Lesser Importance
The 16 families of fishes will be treated in order of their importance as a
food for man or dogs.Grayling ( Thymallidae Thymallidae ). In the whole Canadian Arctic and in northern Alaska
as well, the A a rctic grayling, commonly known as “bluefish” ( Thymallus signifer ),
is very important. It is exclusively a freshwater species found in both rivers
and lakes. The usual size is from one to three pounds, but some individuals
can attain two or three times this weight. The usual method of catching this
fish is to construct traps across streams, as do the Franklin Indians from Great
Bear Lake. There the best season is in June, when the grayling are moving to
their summer feeding grounds in the large rivers and the lake. According to
Miller (67), some native fishermen can catch in this manner and dry in a good
year up to 150 bales of bluefish, one bale containing from 100 to 150 fish.
Dried grayling is used principally for dog food, although it is a very tasty
fish in its fresh state.In the Soviet Arctic are found at least two species of grayling, or in
Russian [ ?] kharius . In the White Sea basin is found Thymallus thymallus ;
it can reach up to 8 pounds in weight. Throughout the Siberian rivers from the
029 | Vol_III-0971
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Ob to Kamchatka another species, T. arcticus , is present. This species is
larger than the thymallus , some individuals weighing up to 10 pounds. Both
graylings are equally important as food. They are taken in traps, nets, and
speared in the fall. In Anadyr early in spring, they are taken with lines
through the ice. During a good night’s fishing, as many as 800 fish can be
taken by a single fisherman (13).Perch ( Percidae Percidae ). In this family the most important species in the Cana–
dian Arctic is the pike perch (pickerel or dore), Stizostedion vitreum. It is
found in the Hudson Bay and Mackenzie River drainages. It is most abundant in
Athabaska Lake, while it is present in very insignificant quantities in Great
Slave and Great Bear lakes. It weighs occasionally more than 15 pounds, but
the average size is about 3 or 4 pounds. This is a valuable commercial fish
and is especially appreciated by city dwellers.Another species found in the same areas but in smaller numbers is the yellow
perch, Perca flavescens . On account of its scarcity in the Canadian Arctic,
it has no economic importance there.In the Soviet Arctic there are two representatives of the perch family,
one of which is the European perch, or in Russian okun , Perca fluviatilis ,
and the other is the ruffe, or in Russian versh , Acerina cernua .The okun can attain a much larger size than its American relative; some
specimens caught weighed up to 10 pounds. The weight of the yersh yersh never exceeds
1 pound. Both species have the same distribution, being found from the North
Dvina to Kolyma rivers. As both kinds are characterized by very tasty flesh,
they are caught inte sn ns ively with line, nets, and even spear.Pike ( Esocidae Esocidae ). There is only one representative of this family found in
030 | Vol_III-0972
EA Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
the Arctic, namely, the northern pike (or jackfish), or in Russian schuka ,
Esox lucius . Although pike can attain a very large size, over 75 pounds, its
usual weight is from about 3 to 10 pounds.Pike is found in fresh water only: in lakes as well as in quiet weedy
ponds and streams. It inhabits the whole Arctic with the exception of Green–
land. In the American Northland it is found everywhere on the mainland from
Labrador to the Yukon. Throughout the Soviet Arctic, [ ?] it is caught from
the North Dvina to the Anadyr. Due to its voracious habits, it is easily
taken with hook and line, especially in the cold season. In many parts of the
Arctic, pike is taken with nets; it is often during spaw i ning it is often
speared. Its white firm flesh is very tasty.Alaska Blackfish ( Dalliidae Dalliidae ). The single representative of this family
is the Alaska blackfish, or in Russian chornaya ryba , Dallia pectoralis . It
is found in streams and ponds of Alaska (Yukon and Kuskokwim drainages) and in
the northeastern tip of Siberia (Chukotsk Peninsula) as well as on St. Lawrence
Island, Bering Sea. It is one of the most abundant of all fishes that occur
in the fresh and brackish waters of northern Alaska. The adult specimens are
about 8 inches in length.Turner (91) and Nelson (70), who observed the habits of this species in
Alaska, give interesting details. The blackfish is found in all the small
streams of the low grounds, in the wet morasses, and sphagnum-covered areas,
which protect fish from the great cold of winter. In these sluggish areas the
blackfish concentrate in enormous quantities. According to Nelson, a native
population of nearly 3,000 persons from the vicinity of Kotzebue Sound, Alaska,
rely upon this fish for one of their most ab undant and certain sources of food
supply. The fish is caught in wickerwork traps set in their haunts with a wicker
031 | Vol_III-0973
EA Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
fence leading into it on either side. During the fall, especially after the
ice forms, immense numbers are taken and packed in grass bags that hold from
40 to 100 pounds of fish. These bags are then allowed to freeze and are then
either packed in a turf-covered pit or stored in a framed storehouse. These
fish are afterward used to a great extent for dog food as well as eaten raw or
boiled by the natives. In three months, October to December, an average of
1,500 pounds per day are taken by the natives in this region, totaling about
138,000 pounds.According to Turner (91), “The vitality of these fish is astonishing. They
will remain in those grass-baskets for weeks, and when brought into the house
and thawed out they will be as lively as ever. The pieces which are thrown
to the ravenous dogs are eagerly swallowed; the animal heat of the dog’s stomach
thaws the fish out, where upon its movements soon cause the dog to vomit it up
alive. This I have seen, but have heard some even more wonderful stories of
this fish.”In Siberia, the blackfish is not as important a food as in Alaska.
Lamprey ( Petromyzonidae Petromyzonidae ). Several species of lampreys have been described
for the Arctic as a whole. Unfortunately, the taxonomic position of some of
these lampreys from the Pacific coast is not clearly defined, particularly in
the case of nonparasitic forms (13).From an economic standpoint, there are two species of lampreys, both
anadromous and parasitic, which merit description in the present article. One
of them is Entosphenus Entosphenus tridentatus, tridentatus, which is distributed from Unalaska southward
along the North American coast. Apparently it spawns in coastal streams only; [ ?]
thus it is not found very far inland. It is only of minor importance. Moreover,
E. tridentatus has not been reported from Asia.
032 | Vol_III-0974
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
The other species, originally described from Japan, is Lampetra japonica ,
which has a very wide distribution throughout the Soviet Arctic, from the North
Dvina River to Kamchatka, where it is subdivided into a number of local forms
(13). No doubt, the same species is found on the North American Continent,
in Alaska as well as in the Yukon and Mackenzie drainages. However, American
specimens have been described under different names, the most common of which is
Ammocoetes aureus, Ammocoetes aureus, applied for the first time to Yukon lampreys. Full-grown
specimens of L. japonica measure up to 24 inches and can weigh about half a pound.In the Canadian Northland, Richardson (80) observed a lamprey in Great Slave
Lake adhering to an inconnu. He considered it Petromyzon fluvialis , but, no
doubt, it was Lampetra japonica . (Through the kindness of Dr. W. B. Scott,
Curator of Ichthyology and Herpetology, Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology, Toronto,
Canada, the author had an opportunity to examine two half-grown specimens (186
mm. and 249 mm.) of lampreys from Great Slave Lake, the larger of which was
taken in 1946 and the other in 1949. They were identified by us as L. japonica .)According to Turner (91), in Alaska the lampre t y ( Lampetra japonica ) ascends
the Yukon River in the latter part of December of each year, and at the end of
April arrives at Fort Yukon, over 1,000 miles from the mouth of the river. To
quote Turner, “they are so abundant that figures fail to express an adequate
idea of their numbers.” At Mission and Anvik the natives out a narrow piece of
ice out of the river. A long stick with some twigs llaf left on it is used.
The native thrusts the stick into the water and with a quick lift throws out
dozens of these fish at a a time. In a couple of hours an industrious native will
have caught a wagonload of them. The fish are thrown into piles and left to
freeze as they fall. When the fish are wanted for food a chunk is picked off
033 | Vol_III-0975
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
and taken to the huts. The fish are very fat. Accord c ing to Nelson (70),
these lampreys are extremely oily, and the natives use the oil for eating
and for lamps as a substitute for seal oil. In general, the lamprey is used
as food for both man and dog.In the Soviet Arctic, apparently Lampetra japonica is not as abundant.
However, along the Lena River the larvae (ammocoetes) are used extensively as
bait for night lines for sterlet (17). These larvae which are known in Russian
as Peskoroiky are sold not only in a fresh state but also salted.Cod ( Gadidae Gadidae ). Although the majority of representatives of this family
are marine fishes, there is at least one species found in fresh water, namely,
Lota lota . This species is known in the North American Arctic under several
names as burbot, loche, methye, and maria; in Russian it is called nalim.
Throughout the Arctic are found three subspecies, one of which, L. lota lota ,
inhabits northern Europe and Asia to [ ?] Kolyma, inclusive. East of Kolyma,
in Alaska as well as in the Yukon and Mackenzie drainages is found L. lota
leptura. L. lota maculosa is found throughout the Hudson Bay drainage.The burbot of any subspecies can occasionally attain a large size, more
than 40 inches in length, and can weigh more than 60 pounds (90). The usual
weight is from 3 to 10 pounds. The burbot is a very important food in the Arctic
for man and dog. (However, in feeding dogs, precaution should be taken as, ac–
cording to Preble (75), some superstitious Athabaska-Mackenzie region Indians
used to “believe that no more loche will be taken if the bones of one are
eaten by a dog.”)The liver, which is very large and contains great quantities of rich oil,
is highly praised for cooking purposes by whites and natives. When part of the
034 | Vol_III-0976
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
oil has been removed from the liver, the latter is then excellent food when
fried and eaten hot (91). The roe also attains a large size and affords a
very rich soup. According to Richardson (82), an addition of a small amount
of flour to the roe makes a palatable and nourishing bread.The burbot is very voracious and is easily taken with hook and line. The
best time for fishing with night lines is the cold season just before spawning,
which takes place in the winter. It is caught also with different types of
nets and wicker traps.There is another genus of Gadidae, Eleginus , representatives of which being
anadromous in habits furnish food to inhabitants around Alaska and the Soviet
Arctic. One of them is the vakhnya , E. gracilis , and the other is navaga ,
E. navaga . According to Berg (13), vakhnya is a subspecies of navaga , while a
recent revision of this genus by Svetovidov (90) showed that vakhnya should be
considered as a separate species.The vakhnya is used as food for man and dog. The natives either boil them
or eat them raw when frozen. The flesh is rather firm, but in a very short time
becomes watery. When they are fried hard and brown they are good as a change,
but not as a regular diet.According to Svetovidov (90), the fishery for vakhnya around Siberia is
little developed, although the fish is present in large quantities. The largest
yearly catch was in 1929-30, when 1,600,000 pounds [ ?] were taken.Navaga is much more important commercially. It is found in the White and
Kara seas basins, visiting the North Dvina, Pechora, and Ob rivers for spawning.
The catches vary from year to year; in 1930, it was equal to 2,400,000 pounds
(90).
035 | Vol_III-0977
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Also in the Gadidae family are two species of tomcod, one of which
Microgadus tomcod is found in the North Atlantic from Labrador southward, while
M. proximus inhabits the North Pacific from Alaska southward. Although both
species spawn in fresh water during the winter months, they are not particu–
larly abundant in the Arctic and hence are of little food value there.In order to complete the list of Gadidae found in freshwhater sections of
the Arctic, we should mention Arctogadus borisovi and A. pearyi [ ?] . According to
Svetov odiov idor (90), both of these species can be found in the estuaries of
rivers. A. borisovi was reported from the deltas of the Lena and Kolyma, and
A. pearyi was described from North Greenland (Lincoln Bay). As both species
are caught in very small numbers, they have no value as a food fish.Smelt ( Osmeridae Osmeridae ) . From an economic point of view, the arctic smelt, pond
smelt, and eulachon are most important, all of which are found in the North
Pacific region. The arctic smelt, or in Russian koryshka ( Osmerus dentex ), is
found around Alaska, north to Cape Bathurst (16), Beaufort Sea, and in the
Soviet Arctic, from Kamchatka to the North Dvina River, but is absent from the
Lena and Kolyma basins. Berg (13) considers this form as a subspecies of the
European smelt, hence, calls it O. eperlanus dentex . The smelt, in spite of
its small size, seldom more than 12 inches in length, is a very important food
species.Turner (91) left us very interesting details about smelts at St. Michael,
Alaska. During June and July, the spawning season for smelt, the Eskimos catch
great quantities of this fish with seines and dry them in the air. The fish are
kept together on ropes made from grass.The vakhnya is used as food for man and dog. The natives either boil them
036 | Vol_III-0978
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Smelts are not only very tasty when fresh, but they are good even dried, as
there is sufficient oil in them to prevent them from drying too hard and yet not
enough to become rancid.In the Soviet Arctic, smelts are taken in large quantities also. The smelt
is a typically anadromous species, but in many lakes in North America and the
U.S.S.R. they are landlocked.The pond smelt, or in Russian innyakha ( Hypomesus olidus ), is found around
the Alaskan coast, in Kamchatka, and in the Kolyma River. It is an anadromous
species which spawns not very far from the sea in shallow ponds. At St. Michael,
Turner (91) observed this fish in incredible numbers at the end of May, when
natives could catch them not only with small dip nets, but even “procured
thousands of them by thrusting a stick into the water and throwing them out
with it.” When fried, these fish possess a sweet taste and are excellent eating.
The natives dry them on strings of grass. In northern Asia it is also found in
large quantities. The size of the pond smelt is about the same as that of
the arctic smelt.The eulachon ( Thaleichthys pacificus ) is found from northwest Alaska south–
ward. In its habits and size, it is very similar to Hypomesus olidus . It spawns
early in spring in rivers. The eulachon is taken in considerable numbers in gill
nets for the fresh-fish market. It is a choice fish because of its flavor and
richness. In recent years, a considerable portion of the catch has been utilized
as food for animals on fur farms. It is used extensively by the Indians for food
and the production of oil for cooking. Previous to the advent of manufactured
candles and other lighting devices, these fish were dried, fitted with [ ?]
a wick, and used as candles; hence, the frequently used name candle fish (20).
037 | Vol_III-0979
EA Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Goldeye ( Hiodontidae Hiodontidae ). There is only one representative in the Arctic of
this exclusively North American family, namely, the goldeye, Amphiodon alosoides .
It is found in fresh water, principally in lakes, and in the Hudson Bay and
Mackenzie River drainages. Although it is particularly abundant in southern
Manitoba where it is taken in large quantities, it is also numerous in Lake
Athabaska. Rawson (78) considers that goldeye in the latter lake is of good
quality and thinks it can be caught commercially.The goldeye grows to 17 inches in length and can weigh 2 pounds. It is
particularly good eating in a smoked condition. As they often feed on terres–
trial insects from the surface of the water, the goldeye provides good sport
when caught on a fly.Sucker ( Catostomidae Catostomidae ). In the Arctic, particularly in the North American
regions, two species of suckers are of considerable importance as food for man
and dog. One of them, the northern sucker, Catostomus catostomus , is widely
spread throughout the Canadian Northland and Alaska. A subspecies, C. catostomus
rostratus , is found in northern Asia in the Kolyma and Anadyr drainages. This
species seldom weighs more than 2 pounds.The other species, the common sucker, Catostomus commersonnii , is found
in the Canadian Northland but is absent from other regions of the Arctic. It
does not spread as far north as C. catostomus , Great Slave Lake being its most
northern point. The common sucker can weigh more than 4 pounds.Both species of suckers are easily taken, especially in spring during the
spawning season, with dip nets or spears. Other species of suckers have been
reported from the Canadian Arctic, but their presence there requires additional
verification.
038 | Vol_III-0980
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Carp ( Cyprinidae Cyprinidae ). Of numerous species belonging to this family, only a
limited number is found in the Arctic. For the Canadian Arctic, only five
species have been definitely reported, all of them of very small size. The
largest one is the flathead chub, Platygobio gracilis , which can grow up to 12
inches in length. It is found from Manitoba to the Northwest Territoires
(Mackenzie Basin). No cyprinid fishes are known from Alaska.In the Soviet Arctic at least ten species of cyprinids are found. Some
of them, as the golavl golavl , Leuciscus cephalus , and yaz, L. idus , can reach a weight
up to 15 pounds. However, in the Soviet Arctic it is not the large species
that are of importance as a food for the local population, but the small ones,
Among the latter should be mentioned the mundu, Phoxinus percnurus , which do not
grow over 7 inches in length. In spite of its small size, it constitutes one
of the chief foods for the poor inhabitants of the Lena Basin, and it is cured
in enormous quantities. It is fished as soon as the lakes are clear of the
ice and the fishing continues until they freeze again. Although there are no
exact figures of the quantities taken, there are estimates that in the [ ?]
Yakutsk province twenty million pounds of this fish are taken annually (17).
The mundu in one or another local form is found throughout an enormous area,
from the North Dvina to Kolyma basins, inclusively. The other cyprinids, large
or small, are not in such great abundance as the mundu and consequently do not
play an important role as food.Stickleback ( Gasterosteidae) Gasterosteidae) . Two species of these small fishes are found
throughout the entire Arctic, from Greenland to the White Sea: the nine-spine
stickleback, or in Russian devyatiiglaya kolyushka ( Pungitius pungitius ), and the
039 | Vol_III-0981
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
three-spine stickleback, or in Russian tryekhiglaya kolyushka ( Gasterosteus
aculeatus ). Although the nine-spine stickleback is barely two inches long,
that is, much smaller than the three-spine species, it is found in greater
quantities and hence used for food.Many years ago Richardson (81) wrote that the nine-spine stickleback often
occur in such myriads, as, for instance, in a lake near Cumberland House, that
they were collected by sledge loads to be used for dog food. Nelson (70)
reports that in the marshy country between the mouths of the Yukon and Kuskokwim
rivers they are particularly numerous and are caught in great numbers in dip nets
and formed an important item in the food supply of that district. In certain
sections of Siberia (Verkhne Kolymsk), there exists a fishery for Pungitius
pungitius . According to Drjagin (26), yearly catches of it amounted to about
18,000 pounds, representing at least eight million individuals. The stickle–
back is used there as bait for ermine traps as well as for human consumption.It is of interest to add that both species of sticklebacks thrive either
in salt or fresh water. Moreover, the males of each species build a nest of
aquatic plants where they protect the eggs and newly hatched fry.Sturgeon ( Acipenseridae Acipenseridae ). This very valuable family of more temperate
regions is of minor importance in the North because of the limited number of
sturgeon taken there. At least two species are found quite regularly in one or
another part of the Arctic. In southern sections of the Canadian Northland
(Hudson Bay drainage), there is a freshwater species, the so-called lake sturgeon,
Acipenser fulvescens . It grows in favorable conditions to a large size, and
can weigh over 200 pounds.
040 | Vol_III-0982
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
In the Siberian Arctic there is a common anadromous species, the s ibirsky
osetz , Acipenser baeri , which is commercially taken in the Ob and Yenisei rivers.
It can weigh over 460 pounds. In the Lena River, according to Borisov (17),
there is a hybrid between the Siberian sturgeon and the sterlet, A. baeri
x A. ruthenus .It is quite possible that there exists in Alaska one of the two Pacific
species, commonly found southward along the North American coast. These two
species are the white sturgeon, Acipenser transmontanus , and the green sturgeon,
A. medirostris .It should be added that the sturgeon furnish, in addition to a very tasty
meat, a valuable commercial product, caviar. In order to make good caviar, the
female sturgeon should be at the right stage of maturity, when the eggs are well–
developed but not too soft for handling. The quantity of salt with which the
extracted eggs are treated varies with the condition of eggs, temperature of
season, etc.Sculpin ( Cottidae Cottidae ). There are a number of freshwater species of this
principally salt-water family in the Arctic. Throughout the Canadian North–
land and Alaska, the northern Miller’s thumb, Cottus cogantus , is found. In the
Mackenzie River drainage (Lake Athabaska) the presence of Rice’s sculpin,
C. ricei , has been reported (79). Several other freshwater species have been
described from Alaska (34). In the Russian Arctic, the pestronogy podkamenschik ,
C. poecilopus , has the widest distribution throughout freshwater areas from
Scandinavia to Kolyma. All freshwater sculpins are small fishes up to about 5
inches in length. As they are found in fairly small numbers in any one locality,
they are practically without any economic importance.
041 | Vol_III-0983
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Among salt-water species are two sculpins, which are found also in fresh–
water of certain sections of the Arctic. According to M. J. Dunbar ( P p ersonal
communication), Myoxocephalus scorpius is a common species in western Greenland
and Ungava Bay. The other is the four-horned sculpin, or in Russian rogatka
( Oncocottus quadricornis ), found throughout the arctic waters from Scandinavia
to Alaska, around the Canadian Northland and in Greenland. This species fre–
quently enters the mouths of rivers. It reaches a maximum size in Bering
Strait, where specimens up to 2 feet have been reported (13). The usual size is
about 8 inches. Accord i ng to Richardon (81), the Eskimos of Boothia praise it
highly as an article of food, preferring it to codfish or salmon. Berg (11; 12)
considers that the typical salt-water form of O. quadricornis in certain geological
[ ?] periods penetrated into fresh water in Europe and North America and there
its succeeding generations transformed into peculiar freshwater types, known
now under different scientific names. The freshwater form found in the Great
Lakes is known as Triglopsis thompsoni , while in lakes of northern Russia and
Finland-Scandinavia several other forms were described.Eel ( Anguillidae Anguillidae ). It is interesting that representatives of eels, warm–
water fishes, are found in the Arctic. In the White Sea, the North Dvina and
Pechora rivers, the European eel, or in Russian ugor ( Anguilla anguilla) , is
taken in small numbers. Along the Labrador coast not farther north than 60°
N. latitude the American eel, A. bostoniensis is found. But the most interest–
ing fact is that in southwest Greenland (Tiningnertok) at 62°18′ N. latitude
in different years eels belonging to the American species were caught. The
size of these eels ranged from 4 to 26 inches (51).Loach ( Cobitidae Cobitidae ). This is a warm-water family from the Old World. Never–
theless, there are two representatives found in the Soviet Arctic. One of them,
042 | Vol_III-0984
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
a small curious fish, the spined loach, or in Russian schipovka ( Cobitis
taenia ), reaches about 5 inches in length, and is found in the Ob, Yenisei,
and Lena basins. An t other species somewhat larger, up to 7 inches in length,
is the stone loach, or in Russian golets golets ( Nemachilus barbatulus ). Different
local forms of the stone loach are distributed in several northern rivers from
the North Dvina to Kolyma. On account of its abundance and white, tasty flesh,
it has a certain economic importance.Trout B P erch ( Percopsidae ). There are only two representatives of these
freshwater fishes known from the North American Continent. The trout perch,
Percopsis omiscomaycus , is found in the Canadian Arctic in the Yukon, Mackenzie,
and Hudson Bay drainages. It grows up to 6 inches in length. It has no economic
importance as a food species.DISTRIBUTION OF FISHES BY REGIONS
Although the arctic habitat is probably more uniform than that of more
southern areas, there exist definite differences beeween the various regions. On
the basis of the present geographical conditions, the Arctic as a whole could be
divided into five large areas.Greenland
“The largest of islands or smallest of continents,” Greenland has a greatest
north-south length of about 1,670 miles and a greatest width of about 810 statute
miles; the total area is near 736,000 square miles. The greater part of Green–
land is covered [ ?] with ice and snow, leaving only a narrow coastal belt snow-free.
For further details see Stefansson (87).As there do not exist any true freshwater lakes or rivers of any great size
in Greenland, no strictly freshwater fishes are present (cf. 42 52). According
043 | Vol_III-0985
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
to Jensen (50), there are found only four species of fishes in the fresh waters
of Greenland, all of them able to live in both salt and fresh water. These
fishes are as follows: the Atlantic salmon ( Salmo [ ?] salar) , American eel
( Anguilla bostoniensis ); alpine char ( Salvelinus alpinus ), and the three–
spined stickleback ( Gasterosteus sculeatus ). Jensen considered the alpine
char (S. alpinus) and arctic char ( S. stagnalis ) as the same species. In
the present article we regard the two groups of chars as different species
(see under heading Salvelinus ). Thus, in Greenland, we consider the presence
of five species found in fresh water, instead of four as by Jensen (49; 50).From the point of view of distribution of fishes, Greenland should be sub–
divided into two parts, one on each side of the 45 t h meridian of longitude west
of Greenwich: western Greenland, and eastern Greenland. Along the coast of western
Greenland are found the Atlantic salmon and the American eel. The salmon is
caught in a few rivers in the Holsteinsborg and Godthaab districts, while
the eel is taken in the Julianeha a b District. Several species or races of the
char belonging to the group Salvelinus stagnalis are also found in western
Greenland.No salmon or eel live along the coast of eastern Greenland. Although
travelers very often report the presence of “salmon,” it is in reality the
alpine char ( Salvelinus alpinus ).Canadian Arctic
q The enormous expanse of the Canadian Northland embraces the Northwest and
Yukon Territories, with an area of well over two million square miles. This
territory consists of the vast Arctic Archipelago, with climatic and geographic
044 | Vol_III-0986
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
conditions quite similar to those found in Greenland, and the mainland with
numerous large lakes and rivers. The mainland may be subdivided into the
Eastern Canadian Arctic and the Western Canadian Arctic, the 105th meridian of
longitude being taken as the dividing line.Included in the Eastern Canadian Arctic are northern Labrador and the areas
of the Hudson Bay and Ungava Bay drainages. The typical freshwater fishes
found there are the speckled trout ( Salvelinus fontinalis ) and lake sturgeon
( Acipenser fulvescens Acipenser fulvescens ), both of which are absent from the western area.The Mackenzie River drainage and upper Yukon River area are included in
the Western Canadian Arctic. Although there are no endemic freshwater or ana–
dromous fishes that are not found at the same time in Alaska, nevertheless, there
are several species which are absent from the Eastern Canadian Arctic. The
following important species are characteristic of the western area: the inconnu
( Stenodus leucichthys mackenzii ), Lauretta herring ( Leucichthys laurettae ),
big-eye herring ( L. pusillus ), and the arctic lamprey ( Lampetra japonica) .Pacific Arctic
The use of this rather artificial term is well justif i ed from the point of
view of distribution of freshwater and particularly anadromous fishes. The
northern parts of the North American and Asiatic continents bordering the North
Pacific and Bering Sea and Strait are included here. The most characteristic
groups of fishes found in this section of the Arctic are blackfish ( Dallia
pectoralis ), five species of Pacific salmon ( Oncorhynchus ) [ ?] , and the Dolly Varden
trout ( Salvelinus malma ). This region could be [ ?] subdivided into two areas:
Alaska and northeastern Siberia.
045 | Vol_III-0987
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Alaska is about 586,000 square miles. The main streams of Alaska are the
Yukon and Kuskokwim rivers; there are practically no lakes of any considerable
size except those found in the southern parts. Its climate is very continental,
hot in summer and very cold in winter. According to Gruening (40), there are oc–
casionally temperatures as low as −75° or −80°F.Although the fish fauna of Alaska is, in the main, very similar to that of
northern Asia, there are some fishes absent from the latter which are of impor–
tance in Alaska. Alaska constitutes the western limit of the lake trout ( Cristivomer
namaycush ), an endemic North American species. Among anadromous fishes found ex–
clusively on the North American Continent is the eulachon ( Thaleichthys pacificus ),
taken in considerable quantities in Alaska; the Pacific tomcod ( Microgadus
proximus ) can also be included in this category.In northeastern Siberia are included the Kamchatka, Anadyr, and Chukotsk
peninsulas. Freshwater fishes in this area, particularly the Cyprinidae, are
poorly represented. Only one representative of this family, namely, Phoxinus
phoxinus (a widely distributed species throughout the Soviet Arctic, from Anadyr
to the North Dvina) is found in the Anadyr River. It should be noted that in
Alaska no cyprinid fishes are found. The grayling of this region belongs to the
species Thymallus arcticus , while the specimens from Alaska are T. signifer . In
Kamchatka is found anadromous species of char, Salvelinus leucomaenis , which is
closely related to but not identical with S. malma .Siberian Arctic
As the name implies, this section includes all the Siberian coast of the
north polar seas. This part of the Arctic is characterized by the absence of
large lakes, but by an abundance of several large rivers all of which empty into
046 | Vol_III-0988
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
the polar seas. The most important rivers are the Ob, Yenisei, Lena, and
Kolyma. Although all these rivers are quite similar, the Ob, in its middle and
lower regions as well as the lower parts of its main tributary, the Irtysh, is
affected by a condition called zamor in Russian. This is an impoverishment of
river waters of oxygen, attributable to the thick cover of ice and the slow current.
Water in these conditions assumes an unpleasant taste and smell, and causes large
quantities of fish to perish. No doubt due to zamor , the omul omul ( Leucichthys
autumnalis ), which for spawning ascends other rivers for considerable distances,
does not do so in the Ob.Among the characteristic species of the Siberian Arctic are the lenok
( Brachymystax lenok ), taimen ( Hucho taimen ), tugun ( Leucichthys tugun ), a Siberian
sturgeon ( Acipenser [ ?] baeri ), and a sucker ( Cat a o stomus cat a o stomus rostratus ).
While the first four species have very wide distribution, being found in
practically all Siberian rivers, the sucker does not occur farther west than
the Iana River.European Arctic
This section of the Arctic is limited by the White Sea basin. There are
numerous lakes and two large rivers, the North Dvina and [ ?] Pechora. This rather
small part of the Arctic contains a mixed Atlantic and Pacific fauna, adapted to
the local conditions. By this peculiarity it is sharply distinguished from the
neighboring Asiatic Arctic.Among Atlantic species are the salmon ( Salmo salar brevipes ), sea trout
( Salmo trutta ), and the European grayling ( Thymallus thymallus ). Of the Pacific
elements the presence of the navaga ( Eleginus navaga ) is noted, which is also
taken in the Ob River. Its nearest relative, vakhnya ( E. gracilis ), is found in the
North Pacific. For further details, see Berg (13).
047 | Vol_III-0989
EA Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
FRESHWATER FISHERIES
This section deals with the methods of fishing and the utilization of
fisheries products in the Arctic.Methods of Fishing
Early Methods . The hand line, made at home, has always been an important
fishing method. The description of an early type was given by Turner (91).
The Eskimos at St. Michael, Alaska, in fishing vakhnya used lines generally made
of whale bone (baleen), cut into long strips and polished so that the water would
not cling to it and freeze. The lower part of the line next to the hook or snood
is made of strips of the quill of birds (gull, goose, or swan) or the sinew
from the wing of the swan. Several of these snoods may be used on one line. The
hook consists of a slightly curved bone, ivory, or deer horn. A small piece of
metal (preferably copper) is sharpened and firmly set in the concave side of the
hook. No barb is used, as the [ ?] weather is so cold in winter that the hands
would be frozen in removing the fish which the presence of the barb would render
necessary. Without the barb the fish is detached instantly, unless the hook is
swallowed too far. Sometimes the hook is made to imitate the form of a sea slug
or crustacean. A piece of fresh fish of any kind is used as bait. The bait is
secured to the hook by two little sinew threads which are fastened to the upper
part of the hook. This keeps the bait from being taken off by the fish, as in
winter it would be serious work to fasten on bait every few minute x s . Sometimes,
a small red bead is placed just above the hook, or the little red processes, which
are found on the base of the bill of the anklet ( Simorhynchus cristatellus ). The
purpose of these is to the more easily to attract the fish. All this is done before
leaving the village.
048 | Vol_III-0990
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
According to Turner, the method of fishing with this line is as follows.
The Eskimo fisherman, or woman, goes out early in the morning to the hole, which
has been made the day before. The person takes a grass sack or basket along
in which to carry the fish home. A piece of old sealskin or grass mat is taken
to sit on. The hole is carefully cleaned out with a seinelike scoop (a few
inches in diameter, having a hoop made of bone, horn, or wood, netted across
with whale bone or sinew) with as little disturbance as possible, the line
prepared, and let down into the water. In a few seconds one or two fish will be
drawn out and slung high in the air; and, as they slap down on the ice they [ ?]
invariably become detached from the hook. When he has caught a sufficient number
he gives a signal for those on the lookout to come with a dog and sled to carry
them home.Several other similar descriptions given by numerous authors prove beyond
doubt the great ingenuity of the so-called “primitive” natives, Eskimos, Indians,
or Samoyeds.The Indians from the Canadian Northwest, according to observations assembled
by Bethune (16), have many devices for catching fish. Common nearly everywhere
was the bone fish hook, trolled from a canoe in summer, and jigged in winter
through a hole in the ice. Almost equally common was the trident, used from the
canoe in night fishing by torchlight, and in winter with a lure dropped through
the ice. The natives secured their largest catches, however, with seines made of
either willow-bark or caribou-hide thongs (babiche). The Kutchin differed from
all other tribes in employing also a dip net and a fish basket, devices they
learned from the Tlinkit Indians of the Pacific coast.To prevent freezing of the lines during winter, the North American natives
049 | Vol_III-0991
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
are obliged to use a material such as baleen. For the same purpose, the inhabi–
tants of Siberia use nets of horsehair instead of hemp or cotton thread.Another method used by natives consists in employing different types of
wicker traps. Small dams are also built to divert streams, allowing the
natives to pick up fish left on the dry beds.A peculiar method of fishing is used for catching the king and dog salmon,
on the upper Yukon River, called “fish wheels.” Wynne-Edwards (98), who observed
this type of gear at Dawson City gave the following description: “A hollow-
square raft is moored in a strong current a few yards out from the bank. . Each
side of the raft forms a catwalk, in the middle of which is a 3-foot upright
post bearing one [ ?] end of the 12-foot axle. The axle and its bearing are wooden,
made from spruce trunks. Bolted radially to the axle are wooden frames covered
with chicken-wire, each shaped in the form of a hollow scoop, about 10 feet square.
Some wheels have three or four [ ?] scoops, forming the blades of the wheel. The
one we examined had a pair of paddle-boards alternating with two opposite fish–
scoops.“As the wheel is slowly rotated by the current, making two to three revolu–
[ ?] tions per minute, each frame in turn dips about 6 feet under water.
The concave or hollow side is downstream; and in rising again to the surface it
traps any fish which happens at that moment to swim against it. As it now swings
up into the air, the fish slides inwards towards the axle, and is diverted to one
side or the other by sloping gutters meeting at the centre, to fall into collect–
ing boxes placed under the ends of the axle on the catwalks.” Considerable
quantities of fish are taken by this method. According to Wynne-Edwards, each
trap near Dawson City takes upward of 2,500 pounds of king salmon during a good
season.
050 | Vol_III-0992
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Modern Methods . Less than a decade ago, an intensive survey of the
fisheries possibilities in the Canadian Northland took place. Owing to the
foresight of the Department of Fisheries of Canada and the Fisheries Research
Board of Canada, particular attention was given to the fisheries possibilities
of Great Bear, Great Slave, and Athabaska lakes. Some of the results of these
studies were published in a separate bulletin entitled “North West Canadian
Fisheries Surveys in 1944-45.” As a result of this survey, there now exists
an intensive fishery in the Great Slave Lake and a smaller one in Nueltin Lake.The commercial exploitation of Great Slave Lake is carried out by fisher–
men licensed by the Canadian Government. The chief method of fishing is
with the gill net, typically 100 yards long and 30 meshes deep. The size of
stretched mesh is 5-1/2; inches. Outside of mesh size, which is regulated by
law, the size of nets varies from one fisherman to the other. As the main
fisheries are carried on by companies, the fishermen [ ?] are well provided with
modern equipment. The chief means of transportation in addition to fishing
and freight boats are dog team sleigh, trucks, Bombardier snowmobile, and
aircraft. Packing sheds provided with quick-freezing equipment are also at
the disposal of fishermen.There is a new time-saving invention, the so-called “jigger,” which is a
wooden device, about eight feet long, that is forced through a hole in the lake
ice to facilitate setting gill nets by pulling them beneath the ice by means of
a running line. A description of the jigger is given by Sprules (85).
051 | Vol_III-0993
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Preparation of Fish
The severe climatic conditions of the Arctic are favorable for the pre–
servation of fish without processing. Moreover, as natives of the Arctic
consume large quantities of raw fish and meat, common salt is never used in
cooking (88). Hence, salt has never figured as a preservative for fish in
these regions. The common methods of preserving are treated separately.Freezing . The best season for choice fish, such as whitefish and salmon,
is near or during spawning time, which takes place in the fall of the year. A
special effort is made, just before freeze-up in late September, to obtain a large
supply of fish to last through the winter. Other fishes caught during the
fall and winter months, such as lamprey, vakhnya , etc., are preserved by freez–
ing, too. The fish caught are thrown into piles and are left on the ice to
freeze as they fall. So long as the ice lasts, the pile of fish is secure, as
it is frozen so hard that nothing affects it. When the fish are wanted for
food, a chunk is picked off.Storing in Pits . Fish taken during summer months, such as whitefish and some
other species, are placed in pits dug in the ground. If the pits are deep and the flies
kept out, fish thus stored make excellent dog food and are also sometimes eaten
by men.Drying . Many fish taken during the summer months such as ciscoes, inconnu,
and others are dried in considerable numbers. The procedure is practically the
same for all species and, according to Wynne-Edwards (99), consists of the fol–
lowing manipulations. The fish is split down the back, the two fillets remaining
joined along the belly. The viscera are carefully removed, the roes being
separated. The backbone is then detached from both sides, except at the tail.
052 | Vol_III-0994
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
The clean fillets are scored crossways with the knife, at intervals of 1 to 2
inches; similar incisions are cut longways in the belly, and in the larger fish
the knife is also thrust between the neural spines of the vertebrae in half a
dozen places. The fish is then thrown over a stage of 4-inch poles, high enough
to be out of reach of dogs and small children; the fillets hang down on one side,
the backbone on the other.If the fish is very oily, the finished product has a strong odor and often
oil still dripping from it. Thus, it is used for dog food exclusively. If
the fish is properly cured, a very tasty product results, for instance, dried
smelt. The roes and guts of fish are frequently dried separately.Smoking . Often the fish are partially dried and are then treated with smoke.
The best smoked product is obtained by using hard wood (the coniferous trees
contain large amounts of resin which gives an unpleasant taste). On the Mackenzie
River, according to Wynne-Edwards (99), fish after being dried for about three
days outdoors are placed on racks in a smoke tent or house with where a poplar-wood
fire smolders on the floor. Smoking takes 48 hours, improves the flavor, and
prevents the development of blow-fly eggs. The cured fish are afterward tied
in bunches by the tail and left on the outdoor stages until baled. About three–
quarters of the weight is lost in the process.Importance of Fisheries
The fish in the Arctic not only supplement the diet of meat but in particular
seasons form the chief food for man. Moreover the fish is a staple diet for
sledge dogs. According to estimates by Wynne-Edwards (99), when supplies are
available the dogs are fed on fish, each receiving 9 pounds of green fish per day
when working, and per a haps 2 pounds when idle (from June to November). If they were
053 | Vol_III-0995
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
fed entirely on fish, each dog would consume about a ton a year. According to
the calculations of the same author, the sledge dogs kept along a stretch [ ?]
of about 600 miles of the Mackenzie River, between Providence and Good Hope,
consumed a total of several million pounds annually. Rawson (77) estimated that
4,250 dogs around Great Slave Lake consumed 1,265,000 pounds of fish annually.There is no way to make a proper estimate of the amount of fish consumed by
the population of the [ ?] Arctic as a whole. No doubt this amount would be very
large. It is well known that in the Canadian Arctic an Eskimo family needs at
least 10,000 coregonid fish for themselves and their dogs for a winter’s supply.
Even the white population in Siberia requires a large amount of fish as food.
According to Borisov (17), the daily consumption of fishermen of the Lena River
is 5 pounds per person.In northern Siberia even the Russian population, probably under the influence
of the natives, often used during the winter months frozen sturgeon, cut in very
thin slices, eaten uncooked with salt, pepper, and vinegar. There are more
elaborate recipes for preparing fish. For instance, in Verkhne Kolymsk, the
eggs of Pacific salmon are used [ ?] to replace bread: ground eggs without flour
form a substance from which pancakes ( bliny ) are made; this same substance,
somewhat drier, is made into a kind of dough from which are made tasty pies
( pirogy ), filled with fish meat (71).Canadian Arctic . The principal fishing center is the Great Slave Lake, where
during recent years the yearly quotas are fixed by the Department of Fisheries in
Ottawa. There are two fishing seasons [ ?] : one in the summer (June 1-September 15)
and the other in the winter (December 1-March 15). The figures in Table II are
for commercial catches in Great Slave Lake by Canadian fishermen, the number of
which varied from 500 to 600 in different years.
054 | Vol_III-0996
EA Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Table II Year a Quantity in round weight, in pounds Whitefish Lake trout Inconnu Summer Winter Total Summer Winter Total Summer Winter Total 1945-46 469,000 — 469,000 1,014,000 — 1,014,000 66,000 — 66,000 1946-47 1,042,000 122,000 1,164,000 1,581,000 120,000 1,701,000 130,000 30,000 160,000 1947-48 856,000 1,068,000 1,924,000 1,450,000 205,000 1,655,000 64,000 123,000 187,000 1948 1948-49 975,000 3,650,000 4,625,000 1,418,000 731,000 2,149,000 94,000 324,000 418,000
a The fishing year extends from April 1 of one year to March 31, of the following.
055 | Vol_III-0997
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
Another smaller fishing center is at Nueltin Lake where a quota of 250,000
pounds, mostly of lake trout and whitefish, is accorded to 10 fishermen.The fish taken in northern Canadian lakes are quick-frozen and transported
to Edmonton whence it is shipped principally to large American cities like
Chicago, New York, and Detroit.Siberian Arctic . There is some information about the fisheries in this
section of the Arctic assembled by Baievsky (3), Borisov (17), and by Drjagin (26).
The Ob River region is the most important in western Siberia. In Tobolsk Province,
the fishing industry is the mainstay for the major portion of the native tribes.
The largest number of fish was taken in the estuary of the Ob River, representing
40% of all the fish shipped from this region. In the lower reaches of the Ob, there
is a canning industry. The yearly catch [ ?] in the Ob River before 1914 was
18,000,000 pounds. The principal commercial fishes are freshwater species such as
the coregonids with the exception of omul , sturgeon, cy rp pr inids, perch, and pike.The Yenisei River region is of very little commercial importance. Fishing is
[ ?] done largely in the lower regions of the Yenisei and in small tundra lakes. The
principal species are sturgeon, nelma , omul , mukeun , chir , and sig . The yearly catch
before 1914 amounted to 13,500,000 pounds, of which half went to the markets, chiefly
those of the towns of Yeniseisk and Krasnoyarsk.In the Lena River, owing to the sparsity of the population and lack of transpor–
tation, fish was mainly used for local consumption. According to Borisov, the rich–
est fishing grounds, locally known as peski or “sands,” are located in the delta and
the lower reaches of the Lena River proper. Other good fishing places are found also
in its tributaries, the Aldan and Maya. For the sixteen-year period, 1910-1925, the
yearly catches ranged from 680,000 p l o unds (in 1922) to 2,400,000 pounds (in 1912). The
chief commercial species are the coregonids: catches of muksun together with omul
amounted to 66% of the total; kondyevka ranked next with 20%, and nelma represented
11% of the total.
056 | Vol_III-0998
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Anonymous. Meteorology of the Canadian Arctic . Dept. Transport, Ottawa.
Form 9000; 85 pp., 1944.2. Anderson, R.M. “Arctic flora.” In W.C. Bethune: Canada’s Eastern Arctic ,
pp. [ ?] 133-37, 1935.3. Baievsky, B. “Fisheries of Siberia,” Rept. U.S. Comm. Fish. for 1926,
Washington, App. II, pp. 37-64, 1926.4. Bajkov, A. “A preliminary report on the fishes of the Hudson Bay drainage
system,” Can. Field Nat ., vol. 42; pp. 96-99, 1928.5. ----. “Description of a new whitefish ( Coreg n onus odonoghuei ) from Clear
Lake, Riding Mountains, Man., Canada,” Zool. Anz ., vol.86; pp.17-21, 1930.6. ----. “The genus Leucichthys (ciscoes or tullibees) in Manitoba waters,”
Can.Biol.Fish. , vol.7, no.26; pp. 327-33, 1932.7. ----. “Description of two new whitefish from Manitoba waters,” Int.Rev.Hydrobiol .,
vol.29, pp. 29-32, 1933.8. Bean, T. H. “Description of new fishes from Alaska and Siberia,” Proc. U.S.
Nat.Mus ., vol.4,p.156, 1882.9. ----. “Description of a new species of whitefish ( Coregonus nelsonii ) from
Alaska,” Proc.U.S.Nat.Mus ., vol.7, p.48, 1885.10. ----. “Description of Coregonus pusillus , a new species of Whitefish from
Alaska,” Proc.U.S.Nat.Mus ., vol.21, p.526, 1889.11. Berg, L.S. “Sur la distribution du poisson ( Myoxocephalus quadricornis L.) fam.
Cottidae et sur quelques problemes y concernant”(in Russian), Bull.Acad .
Sci.Russ ., vol.10, ser.6, pp.1,343-60, 1916.12. ----. Climate and Life (in Russian). Moscow, 196 pp., 1922.
13. ----. Les poissons des eaux douces de l’U.R.S.S. et des pays limitrophes .
Leningrad. Partie I: 1-544, Partie II: 545-903, 1932-1933.14. ----. “Note on Coregonus (Prosopium) cylindraceus (Pallas),” Copeia , No. 1,
pp.57-58, 1936.15. Bethune, W.C. Canada’s Eastern Arctic . Dept. of Inter., Ottawa, 166 pp., 1935.
16. ----. Canada’s Western Northland . Dept. of Mines and Resources. Ottawa, 162 pp.
1937.
057 | Vol_III-0999
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
17. Borisov, P. “Les poissons du fleuve Lena. Travaux de la Commission pour
l’etude de la Republique Autonome Sov. Soc. Iakoute,” Acad. Sci.
U.S.S.R., Leningrad, vol.9, 181 pp. 1928.18. Brown, R. N. Rudmose. “Greenland,” Encyclop. Britannica , vol.10, pp. 857-61,
1942.19. Clemens, W.A. “The Pacific salmon in British Columbia waters,” Rept. B.C.
Comm. Fish. for 1934 , pp. K103-105, 1935.20. Clemens, W.A., and Wilby, G.V. “Fishes of the Pacific Coast of Canada,”
Fish. Res. Board Can. Bull . 68, 368 pp., 1946.21. Connor, A.J. “Climate and weather of the Arctic.” In W.C. Bethune: Canada’s
Western Northland . Ottawa, pp. 44-47, 1937.22. Dall, W. H. “The food fishes of Alaska,” Rept. Comm. Agric. for 1870 , Wash–
ington, 1871.23. Davidson, F. A., and Hutchinson, S. J. “The geographic distribution and
environmental limitations of the Pacific salmon (Genus Oncorhynchus),”
Bull. Bur. Fish ., vol. 48, pp. 667-92, 1938.24. Doan, K. H. “Speckled trout in the lower Nelson River region, Manitoba,”
Fish. Res. Board Can. Bull . 79: 12 pp., 1948.25. Dresel, H.G. “Notes on some Greenland fishes,” Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus ., vol.7,
pp. 244-58, 1884.26. Drjagin, P.A. Fishery resources of Yakutiya . Acad. Sci. S.S.S.R., Leningrad,
94 pp., 1933.27. Dymond, J. R. “Notes on the distribution of Salmo salar and Salvelinus alpinus
in northeastern Canada,” Can. Field-Naturalist , vol.26, [ 1 ?] p. 185, 1932.28. Dymond, J. R. ----. “Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson Bay. 8. The
coregonine fishes of Hudson and James Bays,” Contrib. Can. Biol. Fish .,
vol.8, pp. 1-12, 1933.29. Dym ----. “Some freshwater fishes of British Columbia,” Rept. B.C. Comm. Fish .
for 1935 , pp. L.60-73, 1936.30. ----. “The coregonine fishes of northwestern Canada,” Trans. [ ?] Roy.Can.Inst .,
vol.24, Part II, pp. 171-231, 1943.31. ----. “A list of the Freshwater Fishes of Canada, east of the Rocky Mountains.”
R. Ontario Mus. Zool. Miscel.Pub.No. 1, Toronto, 36 pp., 1947.32. ----, and Pritchard, A.L. “Some ciscoes or lake herrings of western Canada,”
Contrib. Canad. Biol. Fish ., vol.5, pp. 469-74, 1930.33. ----, and Vladykov, V.D. The distribution and relationship of the Salmonoid
fishes of North America and North Asia . Proc. Fifth Pacific Sci. Conf.,
pp. 3741-50, 1934.
058 | Vol_III-1000
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
34. Evermann, B. W., and Goldsborough, E. L. “The fishes of Alaska,” Bull. Bur .
Fish ., vol.26, pp.219-360, Plates 14 to 42, 1907.35. ---- and ----. “A check list of the freshwater fishes of Canada,” Proc.Biol.
Soc ., Washington, vol.20, pp.89-120, 1907.36. Fabricius, O. F. Fauna Groenlandica. Fishes . Havniae et Lipsiae, pp. 125-83,
344, 1780.37. Foerster, R. E., and Pritchard, A. L. “A study of the variation in certain
meristic characters in the genus Oncorhynchus in British Columbia,”
Trans. R.S.C. , Sec. V, pp. 85-95, 1935.38. ---- and ----. “The identification of the young of the five species of
Pacific salmon, with notes on the freshwater phases of their life–
history,” Rept. B.C. Comm. Fish. for 1934 , pp. K106-116, 1935.39. Fowler, H. W. “Fishes of the Nueltin Lake Expedition, Keewatin, 1947.
Part 1-Taxonomy.” Proc . [ ?] Acad.Nat.Sci.Phil. , vol.C, pp.141-52, 1948.40. Gruening, E. “Alaska,” Encyclop. Britannica , vol.1, pp. 498-506, 1942.
41. Halkett, A. Check list of the fishes of the Dominion of Canada and Newfoundland .
Ottawa. 138 pp., 14 plates, 1913.42. Harper, F. “Fishes of the Nueltin Lake Expedition, Keewatin, 1947. Part 2 –
Historical and Field notes.” Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil ., vol.C, pp.
153-84, 1948.43. Harper, T., and Nichols, J.T. “Six new fishes from northwestern Canada,”
Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist ., vol.41, pp.263-70, 1919.44. Henn, A.W. “The exploration of Southampton Island, Hudson Bay. Part 2,
Zoology. Sect. 3 - Some fishes of Southampton Island.” Mem.Carnegie Mus .,
vol.12, part 2, Sec.3, pp.1-3, 1932.45. Hinks, D. The Fishes of Manitoba . Dept. Min. and Nat. Res. Manitoba, x, 102 pp.,
1943.46. Hubbs, C.L., and Lagler, K. F. “Fishes of the Great Lakes Region,” Cranbrook
Inst. Sci. Bull ., no.26, XI, 186 pp., 1947.47. ---- and ----. “Contribution to the ichthyology of Alaska, with descriptions
of two new fishes,” Occas. Pap . Zool. Univ. Michigan, No. 431, 31 pp. 1941.48. Hult e é n, E. “History of botanical exploration in Alaska and Yukon territories
from the time of their discovery to 1940,” Botaniska Notiser för Ar 1940 , Lund,
Part 4, pp.289-346, 1940.49. Jensen, Ad. S. “The fishes of East-Greenland,” [ ?] Medd. om Grønland , vol.29,
pp.211-76, Plates XI-XIII, 1909.50. ----. “The Fauna of Greenland. Part III,” Fish in Greenland , Copenhagen, vol. I,
pp.343-349, 1928.
059 | Vol_III-1001
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
51. Jensen, Ad. S. “Remarks on the Greenland Eel, its occurrence and reference
to Anguilla rostrata ,” Medd. om Grønland , vol.118, no.9, pp.1-8, 1937.52. Johansen, Frits. “Freshwater life in north East Greenland,” Medd. om Grønland ,
vol.45, pp.319-37, 1912.53. ----. “The fishes of the Danmark-Ekspe id di tionen til Grønlands Nordøstkyst
1906-1908. V, No. 12,” Medd. om Grønland , vol.45, pp.631-75, Plates
44-46, 1912.54. Jordan, D. S., and Evermann, B. W. “The fishes of North and Middle America,”
Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus ., vol.47, 1896-1900.55. ----, ---, and Clark, H.W. “Check list of the fishes and fishlike vertebrates
of North and Middle America north of the northern boundary of Venezuela and
Colombia,” Rept. U.S. Comm. Fish. for 1928 . Part II, 1-670, 1930.56. Kendall, W. C. “The fishes of Labrador,” Proc. Portland Soc. Nat. Hist. ,
vol. 2, pp. 07-44, 1909.57. ----. “Report on the fishes collected by Mr. Owen Bryant on a trip to Labra–
dor in the summer of 1908,” Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus ., vol.38, pp.503-10, 1910.58. ----. “An annotated list of a collection of fishes made by Francis Harper in
the Athabaska region in 1920, to which is appended a list of species
collected by [ ?] Dr. R. T. Morris in the district between Lake Winnipeg
and Hudson Bay in 1905. Contr. Can. Biol . n.s., vol.I, Part 3, pp.421-39,
1924.59. Kennedy, W. A. “Some observations on the coregonine fish of Great Bear Lake,
N. W. T.,” Fish. Res. Board Can. Bull . 82, 10 pp., 1949.60. Koelz, W. N. “Coregonid fishes of the Great Lakes,” Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish. ,
vol.43, pp. 97-643, 1929.61. Le Sueur, C. A. “Descriptions of several new species of North American fishes,”
Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., vol.I, pp. 222-35, 1818.62. Manning, T. H. “Notes on some fish of the Eastern Canadian Arctic,” Can.Field-
Nat ., vol.56, pp.128- [ ?] 9, 1943.63. Melville, J. C. D. “Notes on the distribution and economic importance of the
“Inconnu” ( Stenodus mackenzii ) in the Mackenzie River valley,” 47th
ann. Rept. Dept. Mar. and Fish., Canada, pp. 238-43, 1914.64. ----. “Report on the east coastal fisheries of James Bay.” Can. Sess. Pap. 1915 ,
vol.27, App. Ann. Rept. Dept. Naval Serv., 1914, pp.3-28.
060 | Vol_III-1002
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
65. Menshikov, M. I. “Contributions to the taxonomy and biology of Stenodus
leucichthys nelma of the lower Irtysh,” Bull. Inst. Res. Biol. de
Perm ., vol.10, pp.26-28, 1935.66. Middleton, W. E. K. “Climate and weather of the Eastern Arctic.” In W. C.
Bethune: Canada’s Eastern Arctic , pp. 25-32, 1935.67. Miller, R. B. “Great Bear Lake,” Fish Res. Board Can. Bull ., vol.72, pp.31-44,
1947.68. Miller, R. B., and Kenn e dy, W. A. “Observations on the lake trout of Great
Bear Lake,” J. Fish. Res. Board Can ., vol.7, no. 4, pp.176-89, 1948.69. Miller, R. B., and Kennedy, W.A. “Pike ( Esox lucius ) from four northern
Canadian lakes,” J. Fish. Res. Board Can ., vol.7, No.4, pp. 190-99, 1948.70. Nelson, E. W. Report on Natural History Collections made in Alaska between
the years 1877 and 1881 . Arctic Series of Publications issued in
connection with the Signal Service, U.S. Army. Washington. No.III,
Part III. Field Notes on Alaskan Fishes, pp.299-322, 1887.71. Nikolski, A. M. Reptiles, Amphibians, and Fishes . St. Petersbourg. XXVIII,
873 pp., 1909.72. Pennant, T. Arctic Zoology . London, 1785.
73. Porsild, A.E. “Flora.” In W. C. Bethune: Canada’s Western Northland .
Ottawa, pp.130-41, 1937.74. Pravdin, I. F. “Morphological characteristics of the West Kamchatka hump–
back salmon,” Bull. Pac. Sci. Fish. Res. Sta ., vol.4, part 1, 152 pp.
1929. (In Russian.)75. Preble, E. A. “A biological investigation of the Athabaska-Mackenzie region,”
North American Fauna, no.27, U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, Bur.Biol.
Survey. Washington. 574 pp., 1908.76. Prince, E. E. “Description of specimens of sea-trout, capelin, and sturgeon
from Hudson Bay,” Trans. Brit. Assn. Adv. Sci ., vol.67 (D), pp.687-88,1898.77. Rawson, D. S. “Great Slave Lake,” Fish. Res. Board Can. Bull . 72, pp. 45-68, 1947.
78. ----. “Lake Athabaska,” Fish. Res. Board Can. Bull . 72, pp.69-85, 1947.
79. ----. “ The Fishes of Saskatchewan . Dept. Nat. Resources and Indust. Develop–
ment. Regina, Sask. 8 pp., 1949.80. Richardson, John. “Notices of the Fishes,” pp. 705-728. In John Franklin:
Narrative of a Journey to the Shores of the Polar Sea, in the Years 1819,
20, 21 and 22 . London, pp. 705-728, 1823.
061 | Vol_III-1003
EA-Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
81. ----. “Fauna Boreali-Americana. Part III,” The Fish . London, XV, 327 pp. 1836.
82. ----. Arctic Searching Expedition: A Journal of a Boat-Voyage through
Rupert’s Land and the Arctic Sea . London, pp. 13-516, 1852.83. Schultz, L. P. “Keys to the fishes of Washington, Oregon and closely
adjoining regions,” Univ. Washington Pub. Biology , V v ol.2, no.4,
pp. 103-228, 1936.84. Smitt, F. A. (Editor). A History of Scandinavian Fishes by B. Freis, C. U.
Ekstörm, and C. Sundevall. 2nd ed. revised and completed by F. A.
Smitt. Stockholm, 1893.85. Sprules, W. M. “The prairie ice jigger,” Am. Soc. Limnol. Oceanog. Sp. Pub.
no.20, 10 pp., 1949.86. Stefansson, Vilhjalmur. “Arctic regions,” Encyclop. Britannica , vol.3, pp.
290-306, 1942.87. ----. Greenland . Garden City, N.Y. Doubleday, Doran and Co., 338 pp., 1943.
88. ----. The Friendly Arctic . New York, Macmillan Co., 812 pp., 1921.
89. Stejneger, L. “Røiren og den skotsk-norske landbro,” Naturen, Februarhefte,
1909, pp.52-59.90. Svetovidov, A. N. “Gadiformes.” In Fauna of S.S.B.R., Pisces , Vol. IX, Part 4.
Zool. Inst. Acad. Sci., S.S.S.R., n.s., no.34, 222 pp., Plates I-LXXII,
Leningrad, 1948.91. Turner, L. M. “Contributions to the Natural History of Alaska. Results of
Investigations made chiefly in the Yukon District and the Aleutian Islands,”
Arctic Series of Publications issued in connection withthe Signal
# > Service, U.S. Army, Washington. No.2, Part IV, Fishes; pp. [ ?] 87-113, 1886.92. Van Oosten, J. Lake Trout . U.S. Dept. Inter. Fish. Wildlife Serv. Fish leaflets,
No.15, pp.1-8, 1943.93. Vize, B. J. Climate of the Maritime Soviet Arctic . Leningrad. 124 pp., 1940.
(In Russian.)94. Vladykov, V. D. “Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson Bay. 9.
Fishes from the Hudson Bay Region (except the Coregoni x dae),” Contr.
Canad. Biol. Fish. , vol.8, pp.13-61, 1933.95. ----. E É tudes sur les [ ?] Mammif e è res aquatiques. III. Chasse, biologie et
valeur economique du Marsouin Blanc ou B e é luga valeur economique du Marsouin Blanc ou B e é luga ( Delphinapte urus leucas )
du fleuve et du Golfe Saint-Laurent. du fleuve et du Golfe Saint-Laurent. D e é pt. des Pech e ê ries, Quebec,
194 pp., 1944.
062 | Vol_III-1004
EA Zoo. Vladykov: Freshwater Fisheries
96. Walker, S. J. “Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson Bay. 2.
Report on the Hudson Bay fisheries expedition of 1930. B. Investiga–
tions at Churchill, Manitoba,” Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish ., vol.6(23) [ ?] ,
pp. 472-74, 1931.97. Weed, A. C. “Notes on the sea trouts of Labrador,” Copeia , no.3, pp.127-33, 1934.
98. Wynne-Edwards, V. C. “The Yukon Territory,” Fish. Res. Board Can. Bull.
72, pp. 5-20, 1947.99. ----. “The Mackenzie River,” Fish. Res. Board Can. Bull . 72, pp.21-30, 1947.
Vadim D. Vladykov
The Arctic Char
Unpaginated | Vol_III-1005
(EA-Zoo. E. H. Grainger)
THE ARCTIC CHAR
CONTENTS
Page Description 1 Taxonomy and General Review 2 Economic Importance 12 Bibliography 13
001 | Vol_III-1006
EA-Zoology
(E. H. Grainger)
THE ARCTIC CHAR
The arctic char, Salvelinus alpinus , is found generally throughout
arctic and north temperate waters, more specifically in northern North
America, Greenland, northern Norway, northern Siberia, Bear Island,
Spitsbergen, Iceland, and Novaya Zemlya. In addition, nonmigratory forms
on , l y are found in lakes of Sweden, southern Norway, Finland, the Alps,
England, Ireland, Scotland, the Orkneys, the Shetlands, and the U.S.S.R.Description
Salvelinus alpinus belongs to the order Isospondyli, the genus being
one of ten of the family Salmonidae. Kendall (22) gave as characteristics
of the genus Salvelinus : vomer boat-shaped, shaft strongly depressed,
without teeth, the latter confined to the head and more or less prolonged
backward; scales comparatively small. Jordan and Evermann (21) described
the Salvelinus alpinus as having numerous gill rakers, 6 plus 12 to 16,
a large head, a stout body, and an orange belly in the breeding season.
The adult char from the Baffin Island region may be described as dark
green dorsally, creamy-whitish or conspicuously orange ventrally, with
many orange or reddish spots scattered along the sides. J. D. Soper (2)
002 | Vol_III-1007
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
described immature Baffin Island char, up to 25 centimeters, as blackish
above and pale red underneath, and very young specimens as dusky with
darker lateral transverse bars. The scales are cycloid, up to 3 milli–
meters in diameter, and are securely embedded under the epidermis.
Meristic counts from a 74-centimeter female were: dorsal fin, 11; anal
fin, 11; pelvic fin, 10; pectoral fin, 15; branchiostegals, 10. On
the same individual, rows of scales above the lateral line at the level
of the adipose fin numbered 26 to 27; below the lateral line, at the
same leve , l, the rows of scales numbered 23 to 24.Taxonomy and General Review
The taxonomy of the North American arctic char has been a variable
one and remains so at the present time (1950). Many names have been applied
to the char or chars and there is still no general agreement as to the
validity of the various subspecies which have been described. Considerable
study is necessary before any satisfactory conclusions on the systematics
by this wide-ranging group can be reached. The names used in descriptions
by various authors serve to illustrate the chaotic position of arctic char
nomenclature since its first description. Until a satisfactory approach
can be established to the uncertain taxonomy of these fish, it is best,
and most probably correct, to refer all forms and varieties to one species —
alpinus alpinus — with indication of the possibility of geographic or ecological
subspeciation.Linnaeus (23) wrote of many representatives of the genus to which he
gave the name Salmo , including S. alpinus , the red char. This he described
as having a black back, pale-blue sides, and an orange belly, as being a
003 | Vol_III-1008
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
feeder on larvae of gnats, and an inhabitant of northern mountain lakes
in Europe. Fabricius (9) described five species of the same genus found
in lakes and streams of Greenland. He described S. alpinus as having a
red-yellow belly and S. carpio a white belly, the latter probably the
nonbreeding time sea coloration of the former. Probably a similar color
difference caused Fabricius to differentiate between S. stagnalis and
S. rivalis , two color phases of the form known later as Salvelinus
alpinus stagnalis , the Greenland char (21). Salmo arcticus described by
Fabricius is now known as Mallotus villosus , the capelin.Salmo hearnei was described by Richardson (27) from Coppermine River.
Nilsson (25) introduced the term Salvelini to include the chars. Richardson
(26) described twenty-seven American species of the genus Salmo and included
five of them a l m ong the Salvelini . Among these was Salmo alipes , the long–
finned char, a characteristic inhabitant of rocky pools and streams, which
may or may not migrate to the sea. Another, S. nitidus , apparently was
similar to S. alipes , but differently colored, with a thicker body and
shorter upper jaw and fins. Both were taken from a freshwater lake from
Boothia Peninsula (formerly Boothia Feli s x ). Jordan and Evermann (21)
suggest the probability of these two representing one species under differ–
ent conditions, and S. hoodii , S. hearnei , and S. rossii , described by
Richardson, belonging to another species, differing in appearance as the
two forms above.Günther (12) contributed Salmo arcturus to the growing list of chars,
specimens having been taken from Ellesmere Island; this species was later
considered as the subspecies Salvelinus alpinus arcturus . At the same
time, from Discovery Bay, Günther described Salmo naresi , later known as
Salvelinus alpinus naresi .
004 | Vol_III-1009
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
D. S. Jordan (20) listed six northern North American species of the
genus Salvelinus: S. nitidus , S. stagnalis , S. arcturus , S. rossii ,
S. oquassa , and S. naresi . Jordan and Evermann (21) listed in North Ameri–
can waters: S. fontinalis , S. malma , S. naresi , and S. alpinus (variously
known as the European char, saibling , ombre chevalier , and Greenland char).
Salvelinus alpinus is subdivided into S. alpinus alipes , found in the sea
as well as in fresh water; S. alpinus stagnalis , similar to the alipes
form but not entering the sea; S. alpinus arcturus , particularly evident
in the Far North; and a group geographically separated from the others,
S. alpinus aureolus (1), found in Maine and New Hampshire.Halkett (13) referred to four chars of the E e astern Canadian Arctic:
Salvelinus alpinus alipes , the long-finned char, described from Prince
Regent Inlet and Boothia Peninsula, is lacustrine and fluviatile; S. alpinus
stagnalis , the Greenland char, is reported from Prince Regent Inlet, Boothia
Peninsula, and Labrador, in fresh water and in the sea; S. alpinus arcturus ,
the arctic char, lacustrine in habitat, occurs in Victoria Lake (lat. 82°34′ N.) and (lat. 82°28′ N.) Floeberg —
Beach on the northeastery coast of (northern Ellesmere Island ) , and as far north as latitude 82°43′ N.; S. oquassa naresi , the —
Nares char, is also lacustrine, from Discovery Bay and Cumberland Gulf. In
1915 Fowler (11) published a description of S. alpinus marstoni , apparently
similar to the arctic-type chars, but an inhabitant of more temperate areas
of eastern Canada. Two char from Southampton Island were taken by Henn (14)
and classified as S. alpinus , the Greenland char; Dymond (7) reported
S. alpinus in the Gulf of St. Lawrence as far west as Trinity River.Vladykov (31), in an account of fishes of Hudson and James bays,
described two types of Salvelinus alpinus , with the possibility of subspec–
ific classification, one group anadromous, the other a landlocked form.
005 | Vol_III-1010
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
Among fourteen mature anadromous char caught in coastal waters, the males
were from 27.8 to 49 centimeters long, and females from 35 to 59 centimeters.
These fish normally ascend streams to spawn during September. Observations
on ovaries and eggs were made during the summer of 1929; the final exam–
ination on September 2 of a 65-centimeter char showed ovaries 22 milli–
meters wide and eggs 2 millimeters in diameter. Examination of stomach
contents from fifteen specimens showed the presence of amphipods and fishes.
Four mature landlocked specimens were examined; one male, 10.5 centi–
meters, and three females, from 10.9 to 18.2 centimeters. Characteristic
of this type is precocious maturity, less forked caudal fin, larger eyes,
and smaller size than the seagoing form. Their juvenile coloration is
described as showing ten wide, dark crossbands on the sides. Spawning
occurs probably late in August or in September, based on evidence of mature
eggs, 5 millimeters in diameter, from August 24 until August 31.Soper (2) has described Salvelinus alpinus as observed in the southern
Baffin Island area. The char collect at river mouths during late July, often
in great numbers. The average weight during the summer run from rivers is
3 1/2 to 4 pounds, average length 40 to 50 centimeters. The Eskimos claim
to find adult “trout” in freshwater lakes on Baffin Island, and insist that
they are different from the char of the salt water, externally, and in having
flesh of a different color. Some of these apparently remain permanently in
these lakes. Baffin Island char have been taken in quantity as far north
as Pond Inlet.Weed ( 23 32 ) observed Salvelinus alpinus in Labrador streams during the
summer when only breeding individuals and first-year char were present.
One spawning bed was found five miles from the sea, a wide, shallow,
006 | Vol_III-1011
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
rapid-flowing section of the river, in which the char lay motionless
despite the swift current. From the condition of gonads it was considered
probably that some spawn earlier than those seen, perhaps as early as
July. Fisherm a e n along the Labrador coast believe some of the sea trout
spawn in the sea during the summer, and there is some evidence that this
may occur. On e June 13 and 14, while ice was still in the bay, sea trout
were taken with free eggs in their oviducts. As a result of his observa–
tions, Weed concluded that while some of the fish spawn in brooks late
in the fall, others are, apparently, in a spawning condition far from
freshwater spawning regions as much as five months ahead of the usual (fall)
spawning time. It is this second group, apparently summer spawners, which
may breed in the sea.Thirty specimens of arctic char were taken from eastern Canadian
arctic waters by Rogers (28) and measured an over-all length ranging from
53.5 to 80 centimeters. These fish were observed to remain in lakes during
the winter. Although it was not observed whether these char return to fresh
water during the late summer of the same year as their migration to sea, it
was thought probable that they spend at least a year or more in salt water
before reascending the rivers. At Lake Harbour, in 1937, the return began
about July 27, but, since the ice break-up occurred during the first week of
July, and the fish grow most during the time spent in the sea, their return
during the same year was considered unlikely. Because of the thirty fish
described above were taken early in September, and the sex ratio was about
five males to one female, it was thought probable that the females enter
the rivers before the males. Young char apparently are present at all times
in the streams, from young fingerlings to parr of seven or eight inches.
007 | Vol_III-1012
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
The presence of the Greenland char, Salmo stagnalis , in Foxe Basin and
Labrador was reported by Hildebrand (16). In fishing conducted in the area
of Southampton Island, no char were taken , in nets set thirty miles from
shore, while, in the same locality, nets set three miles off the coast were
regularly successful. As a result of observations made during these opera–
tions it was considered improbable that any char remain in the sea during
the winter. This was inferred from the fact that no char was observed
offshore immediately after the break-up of ice in the spring. None was
seen along the coast until those from fresh water had migrated. Manning
(24) believed that char could be caught at river mouths during the second
half of June. Although it is probable that the date of leaving the rivers
depends upon the time of ice break-up, he has seen them swimming among the
ice. It was suggested that the probable date of c h ar ascending the rivers
depends upon the amount of water descending. On the west coast of Baffin
Island, in 1938, the homeward run was recorded by Manning until September
10. Lake types showed a lower belly color of bright red, differing from
those of salt and river-mouth water. Manning suggests that there is evi–
dence that this color is not seasonal or sexual but, rather, characteristic
of the nonmigrating fish, a suggestion advanced also by Johansen (19).Salvelinus alpinus of the most northern Pacific coast area was found
by DeLacy and Morton (5) to be nonmigratory. These char average 35 to 45
centimeters in length. Food was found to consist mostly of insects, eggs,
and smaller fishes. Wynne-Edwards (33) found char to ascend the Mackenzie
River in small numbers during the summer, as far as Good Hope.In 1948 Hildebrand studied Salvelinus alpinus in the Ungava Bay region,
where they occur in many lakes and streams, and in coastal waters during
008 | Vol_III-1013
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
the summer. Certain specimens found in shallow lakes of the region were
observed to be mature at 7.6 to 10 centimeters in length, and were found
up to 69 centimeters. At Port Burwell, landlocked forms were found to
spawn in lakes after an upstream migration, where, from July 28 until
August 16, specimens were 5.4 to 17 centimeters long, parrlike in colora–
tion, and approaching maturity. One of the few attempts to study the
char during the winter was made by Hildebrand (15) at Fort Chimo, when one
specimen was taken through the ice. Present in the stomach were a number
of fish, too badly mangled to allow identification. It has been stated
that char are inactive during the winter, that winter-caught specimens
often have a fungal growth on their skin, and are generally in poor con–
dition. The spring run of the migrants of Ungava Bay begins shortly after
ice break-up in the rivers. The food of the migrating char is mostly fish
and amphipods, Ammodytes and Gemmarus locusta being commonly found.Dresel (6) observed three char that were caught off the western coast
of Greenland. These varied in length from 38 to 43 centimeters, and were
classified as Salvelinus stagnalis . Johansen (19) referred to Salmo alpinus
as being common in most large lakes in Greenland. He observed that two types
of this species exist in Greenland, one migratory, the other not. In winter
these fish could be seen under the ice, where they were extremely active,
unlike the char of Ungava Bay, and apparently searching for food. Migration
began as soon as the ice was out of the stream leading to the sea. By
August, seaward migration apparently had reached its maximum, and, by Septem–
ber, movement was mainly in the direction of fresh water, ending with the
start of freezing.Eighteen males caught by Johansen, ranged from 11 to 70 centimeters
009 | Vol_III-1014
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
in length, while five females ranged from 15.7 to 62.5 centimeters. The
conditions of ovaries and eggs varied. From the spawning coloration and
hooked jaw condition of one male, it was concluded probable that spawning
occurs in autumn. Stomachs of smaller forms (10 to 20 centimeters) con–
tained mud from the lake bottom, and larvae and pupae of insects. Larger
specimens showed Salmo alpinus and Gadus saida fry, Entomostraca, and green
algae. Johansen described two varieties of coloration, essentially similar
to the two forms previously mentioned, one with the belly whitish, the
other, orange. Most of the white-bellied group were caught just before
or during seaward migration and were predomina n tly males. The conclusion
regarding relation of color to spawning was that the color outside of
spawning time (spring and early summer) is characterized by the whitish
belly, and that when sea migration begins in July the color gradually
changes to the orange underside. This change is more evident in males
than in females. By the time of re-entrance into fresh water, coloration
is near its peak, gradually fading toward the end of the year. Differing
from these migratory forms, the nonmigratory forms found in fresh water
retain throughout the year the darker spawning-time coloring.Jensen (17) described 141 male char, 31.5 to 58 cm. long, and 111
females, 39 to 65 cm. long, taken on July 18 and 19, 1909, in West Greenland.
The largest of the females weighed 3.5 kg. (7.7 lb.), one kilogram heavier
than the largest male. The color of these specimens was black and sea-green
dorsally; sides silvery with a pinkish tinge and small, indistinct, yellow–
white dots; and white ventrally. Eggs varied in degree of development;
some mature ones were amber-colored and were up to 7 mm. in diameter.
Testes varied, too; some were narrow and pink, others broad and white.
010 | Vol_III-1015
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
Examination of stomach contents showed presence of capelins and fish eggs.
On July 23, examination showed mearly ripe genital organs. By July 30,
the river individuals were either sexually developed or completely un–
developed, showing that unripe specimens ascend the rivers with the others.
According to Jensen, the char of Greenland deposits its eggs between the
middle and the end of September, when the eggs are the size of peas. The
char stays in lakes for the winter, and begins to descend around the middle
of May, quite emaciated. Ascension of the rivers begins about July 20.Otolith examination of Greenland char has shown the age of individuals
to reach twenty years (10). It is probable that the first three years of
life are spent in fresh water, with departure for the sea occurring during
the fourth year. The frequency of spawning is not known. Hansen’s in–
vestigation of 671 char showed the following correlation between age and
length of the Greenland char: 4 years, 19 cm.; 6 years, 23.7 to 34.2 cm.;
8 years, 43.4 to 52.5 cm.; 10 years, 37.4 to 55.4 cm.; 12 years, 51.9 to
55.0 cm.; 13 years, 53.0 to 60.6 cm.; 16 years, 66.8 cm.The char of Spitsbergen have been described by Dahl (4) as Salmo umbla ,
subspecies stagnalis . Examination was made of 84 char, ranging from 20 to
72 centimeters in length. Observations on scales showed that 43% of these
migrated to the sea for the first time after two winters in fresh water, 50%
after three winters, and 7% after four winters. It was thought probable that
all migrate to the sea after reaching a length of 20 centimeters. Da sh hl has
concluded that the growth rate in the sea is dependent upon length of time
spent in fresh water before the first seaward migration; the longer the parr
life, the greater the growth in the sea. He considered that the majority
spend at least three winters after migration before reaching sexual maturity.
011 | Vol_III-1016
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
In 1927 Saemundsson (29) encountered two forms of arctic char in
Iceland, one migratory, the other landlocked. The former, fairly common,
varied in length from 40 to 60 centimeters. The return to rivers begins
in July and lasts until September, with spawning occurring probably from
September until November. The food of migrants was mostly Gammarus locusta ,
while freshwater forms live chiefly on insect larvae and pupae. It was
thought likely that sexual maturity is reached at about six years.Esipov (8) found that char of Novaya Zemlya spawn in lakes every
second year, during October and November, with attainment of sexual
maturity in the sixth or seventh year. It is probable that they enter the
sea for the first time during the third or fourth year, migration occurring
from the end of June until near the middle of July, with return from the
middle of August until about mid-September.Observations were made on the arctic char of Frobisher Bay by the
author in July and August 1948. In this region it was found that most of
the seaward run is completed during June, varying from the first to about
the middle of the month, but that some may emerge from the rivers during at
least a part of July. Those returning collect in the region of the river
mouths in late July, and, after a period of lingering there, reascend the
rivers, possibly at a time of spring tides. This return diminishes in
volume toward the end of August. The presence of eggs, approximately 2 to
5 m n m . in diameter, was observed in almost all the female char examined.
Testes, too, had taken on the characteristic appearance of prespawning
time, thickened and whitish in color. These factors, along with external
breeding-time characteristics of the males, suggest the occurrence of
spawning during September or October. Length measurements of 386 char
012 | Vol_III-1017
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
showed average length to be 66.4 cm., the maximum, recorded for 2 males,
being 84 cm. The average length for males was 68 cm., for females, 64.7 cm.
Sex determination was done on 376 char, of which 55.7% were females and 44.3%
males. The use of 6- and 6 ½- inch mesh nets served to exclude small spec–
imens from the samples. Examination of stomachs of 224 char showed Pseudali–
brotus littoralis and Themisto libellula to be most numerous. Also present
in smaller numbers were Hyperia galba , Gammarus locusta , Gammaracanthus
loricatus , Ischyrocercus anguipes , Pontoporeia affinis , Mysis oculata ,
Calanus hyperboreus , C. finmarchicus , Euchaeta glacialis , Myoxocephalus
groenlandicus, and unidentified acanthocephalans, cladocerans, and poly–
chaetes. The char scales were found to be too small to allow satisfactory
age estimates to be made from them. Readings of otoliths indicated the
average age of 24 char to be 21.4 years, the range extending from 14 to 27
years.Economic Importance
Bethune (3) described the char as the most abundant and valuable food
fish found along the arctic coasts of Canada. Many natives of the Eastern
Arctic subsist on char alone for weeks during the July and August return to
fresh water, spearing or netting the fish as they ascend the rivers to spawn.
In the Franklin District of the Western Canadian Arctic , Dymond (3) referred
to the arctic char as “the most important food fish.” Char fishing is one
of the summer pastimes of Greenlanders, who take them from the rivers during
the July and August upstream migration (18). A part of the catch is eaten
at the time, and the remainder is dried for the winter or sold to Denmark.
In Greenland only a few rivers are large enough to allow fishing for export.
However, some commercial fishing is conducted , but on a relatively small scale.
The fish is salted at the rivers, sent to nearby settlements, and exported
from there. In this way about 550 barrels are shipped annually (30).
013 | Vol_III-1018
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
BIOGRAPHY
1. Bean, T.H. “Fishes collected in Cumberland Gulf and Disko Bay,”
U.S. Nat.Mus. Bull . vol.15, pp.107-38, 1879.2. Bethune, W.C. Canada’s Eastern Arctic. Ottawa, Patenaude, 1935,
pp.129-32.3. ----. Canada’s Western Northland . Ottawa, Patenaude, 1937, pp.64-66,
123-29.4. Dahl, K. “Contribution to the biology of the Spitsbergen Char,”
Norsk Polarinstitutt, Skrifter vol.7, no.1-12, 1926.5. DeLacy, A.C., and Morton, W.N. “Taxonomy and habits of the chars,
Salvelinus malma and Salvelinus alpinus , of the Karluk
drainage system,” Amer.Fish.Soc. Trans . 1942, pp.79-916. Dresel, H.G. “Notes on some Greenland fishes” U.S. Nat.Mus. Proc .
vol.7, pp.244-58, 1884.7. Dymond, J.R. “Notes on the distribution of Salmo salar and Salvelinus
alpinus in Northeastern Canada,” Canad.Field Nat .
vol.46, p.185, 1932.8. Esipov, V.K. “Materialy po biologii i promyslu Novozemelskogo Goltsa
( Salvelinus alpinus L.).” (Materials of the life history
and fishery of the Char in Novaya Zemlya. ( S. alpinus L.)),
Leningrad. Arkticheskii Nauchyi-Issled.Inst. Trudy vol.17,
pp.5-70, 1935.9. Fabricius, O.F. Fauna Groenlandica . Hafniae & Lipsiae, Rothe, 1780,
pp.125-83, 344.10. “Fiskerinndersøgelserne i 1939,” Beretninger Vedrørende Grønlands
Styrelse 1940, Nr. 1, pp.362-67.11. Fowler, H.W. “Fishes from Eastern Canada,” Acad.Nat.Sci.Philad. Proc .
vol.67, pp.515-19, 1915.12. Günther, Albert. “Account of the fishes collected by Capt. Feilden
between 78° and 83° N. Lat. during the arctic expedition
1875-6,” Zool.Soc.Lond. Proc . pp.293-95, 1877.13. Halkett, Andrew. Check List of the Fishes of the Dominion of Canada and
Newfoundland . Ottawa, Parmelee, 1913.14. Henn, A.W. “Some fishes of Southampton Island,” Sutton, M.G. “The ex–
ploration of Southampton Island, Hudson Bay,” Carnegie
Mus. Mem . vol.12, pt.2, sect.3, pp.1-3, 1932.
014 | Vol_III-1019
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
15. Hildebrand, H. Unpublished material. 1948.
16. Hildebrand, S.F. “An annotated list of fishes collected on several
expeditions to Greenland, Fox Basin region and the coast
of Labrador by Capt. R. A. Bartlett,” Medd. Grønland vol.125,
no.1, pp.5-12, 1939.17. Jensen, Ad.S. “Contributions to the Ichthyofauna of Greenland 8-24,”
Spolia Zoologica Musel Hautiensis vol.9, pp.67-78, 1948.18. ----. “Fisk,” his Grønlands Fauna et Forsog paa en Oversigt . Køben–
havn, Bian c o Luno, 1928, pp.66-72.19. Johansen, Frits. “The fishes of the Danmark Expedition, 1906-1908,”
Medd.Grønland vol.45, pp.668-74, 1912.20. Jordan, D.S. A Catalogue of the Fishes Known to Inhabit the Waters of
North America . Wash.,G.P.O., 1885.21. ----, and Evermann, B.W. “The fishes of North and Middle America,”
U.S.Nat.Mus. Bull . vol.47, no.1, pp.506-17, 1896.22. Kendall, W.C. “The salmon family. ” 1. The trout or charre,” Boston
Soc.Nat.Hist. Mem . vol. 1 8, no.1, 1914.23. Linnaeus [Carl von Linn e é ]. System of Nature . 1758.
24. Manning, T.H. “Notes on some fish of the eastern Canadian Arctic,” Canad.Field.Nat . vol.56, pp.128-29, 1942
25. Nilsson, Sven. Prodromus Ichthyologias Scandinavicae . Lund, 1832.
26. Richardson, John. Fauna Boreali-Americana. Part 3. The Fish . London,
Bentley, 1836.27. ----. “Notices of the fishes,” Franklin, John. Narrative of a Journey
to the Shores of the Polar Sea in the Years 1819, 20, 21, and
22 . London, Murray, 1823, Appendix no.6.28. Rogers, H.N. Biological Report of the Eastern Arctic Patrol . 1937.
From unpublished material.29. Saemundsson, Bjarni. Synopsis of the Fishes of Iceland . 1927.
30. “Sammendrag of Statiske Oplysninger on Grønland III,” Beretninger
Vedrørende Grønlands Styrelse , 1944, Nr.1.31. Vladykov, V.D. “Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson Bay.
9. Fishes from Hudson Bay Region (except the Coregonidae),”
Contr.Canad.Biol. & Fish . n.s., vol.8, no.2, pp.15-61, 1933.
015 | Vol_III-1020
EA-Zoo. Grainger: Arctic Char
32. Weed, A.C. “Notes on the sea trouts of Labrador,” Copeia, pp.127-233,
1934.33. Wynne-Edwards, V.C. “North West Canadian fisheries surveys in 1944-
1945. The MacKenzie River,” Canada. Fisheries Res.Brd. Bull .
vol.72, pp.21-30, 1947.E. H. Grainger